Copyright: Copyright 1996 - 2003. Corel Corporation. All rights reserved.
Citation: Copyright 1996 - 2003. Corel Corporation. All rights reserved.


Analyzing data

After you have entered, edited, and formatted data, you can perform many powerful functions to summarize data, answer specific questions, and solve problems.

In this section, you'll learn about

•	using statistical analysis tools

•	creating frequency distribution tables

•	performing regression analysis

•	performing matrix operations

•	creating scenarios

•	managing scenarios

•	creating one-variable What-If tables

•	creating two-variable What-If tables

•	using goal seeking

•	finding optimum solutions for linear and nonlinear problems

For more information about analyzing data, see "Reference: Analyzing data."


Using statistical analysis tools

Quattro Pro lets you perform a number of advanced statistical, numerical, and financial analysis tasks. You can access any of the following statistical analysis tools to guide you through the steps you must perform.

Advanced regression

Amortization schedule

ANOVA: one-way

ANOVA: two-way with Replication

ANOVA: two-way without Replication

Correlation

Covariance

Descriptive statistics

Exponential smoothing

Fourier

F-Test

Histogram

Mortgage refinancing

Moving average

Random number

Rank and percentile

Sampling

t-Test

Z-Test

 How to


To use an analysis tool

1	Click Tools [image] Numeric tools [image] Analysis tools.

2	Follow the steps in the Analysis Expert.

 Note

•	Before you use an analysis tool, make sure the input cells you are analyzing are arranged properly and contain numeric data, not strings. As well, the analysis tools have varying restrictions on the contents of the input cells and size of the cell area.

 Related topics


Creating frequency distribution tables

A frequency distribution table indicates the values that a variable can take on and the frequency with which each value occurs. For example, you can create a frequency distribution table to find the number of times that numbers between two and five appear in a given block of cells.

You can supplement the statistical information in your notebook with appropriate spreadsheet functions. For example, you can include these formulas at the end of the weekly sales figures contained in a selection named SALES:

@SUM(SALES)	Calculates total sales
@COUNT(SALES)	Calculates the number of sales in the column
@AVG(SALES)	Calculates the average sales amount
To create a frequency distribution table, you need one or more areas of values to count and bin cells listing the value intervals, or bins, for each count you need. Bin cells contain the range of intervals you want analyzed. The bin must be a single column with a column of blank cells to its right, where the results will be written. Value cells must also be placed in a single column.

 How to


To create a frequency distribution table

1	Type values in a bin of ranges on the spreadsheet.

2	Click Tools [image] Numeric tools [image] Frequency.

3	Click the Range picker in the Value cells box, and select the value cells.

4	Click the Range picker in the Bin cells box, and select the bin cells.

The bin cell ranges must be in ascending order.

 Notes

•	Each value in the bin cells represents all values from it down to the previous value. The first value represents any value less than or equal to itself.

•	The result area is one cell longer than the bin cells, and is displayed to the right of the bin cells. The last cell contains the number of values found that were greater than the final number in the bin.

 Tip

•	To create an XY chart of a frequency distribution, specify the bin cells as the x-axis series and the results as the first series of values.

 Related topics


Performing regression analysis

Regression analysis answers the question "To what extent can one or more independent variables explain and predict a dependent variable?" By performing regression analysis, you can create a regression analysis table showing how sets of independent variables affect a certain set of dependent variables. For example, you can estimate how the number of hours worked affects production, or how advertising expenditures affect sales.

The relationship between dependent and independent variables is a linear estimate. With one independent variable, regression analysis plots a line of best fit, also called a regression line, through a scatter plot of each independent-dependent value pair.

Because regressions assume a linear relationship, the results will be more accurate if the data closely matches a linear model. To help you determine accuracy of results, the regression table includes two standard error estimates.

 How to


To perform regression analysis

1	Click Tools [image] Numeric tools [image] Regression.

2	Click the Range picker in the Dependent box, and select the column of dependent data.

3	Click the Range picker in the Independent box, and select the column of independent data.

4	Click the Range picker in the Output box, and select the upper-left cell of the output cells where you want to write the regression information.

If you want to force the y-intercept to zero, enable the Zero option in the Y intercept area.

 Notes

•	The data cells you compare in regression analysis must have an equal number of rows.

•	Regression tables are not automatically updated.

 Related topics


Performing matrix operations

A matrix is a rectangular array of numbers. Each column in a matrix corresponds to one variable, and each row corresponds to a linear constraint. Quattro Pro lets you multiply two matrices and invert a matrix.

Matrix operations can help you solve sets of linear formulas and equations. For example, suppose you have these four unique equations using variables w, x, y, and z:

1w+1x+2y+3z=10

3w+2x+2y+1z=20

1w+0x+3y+4z=15

1w+1x+0y+1z=6

You can express the coefficients (the numbers multiplying the variables w, x, y, and z) of these equations in this "4 by 4" coefficient matrix:

1 1 2 3

3 2 2 1

1 0 3 4

1 1 0 1

And you can express the results of the equations in this "4 by 1" constant matrix (the first variable is at the top of the list, the second is next, and so on):

10

20

15

6

You can use matrix multiplication and inversion to find the value of each variable in the second matrix that satisfies the constraints in the first matrix.

Matrix multiplication is helpful when you need to multiply the elements of one matrix by the elements of a second and sum their products. For example, matrix multiplication can calculate the cost of several types of building materials across development phases, or it can compute job costs involving different labor categories.

Matrix inversion is the first step in solving sets of linear equations. When you multiply a matrix by its inverse, the resultant matrix is an identity matrix (all 1s and 0s, with only a single diagonal of 1s). You cannot invert a matrix that is mathematically singular. A matrix is singular when its determinant equals zero. You cannot invert a matrix with mathematical redundancies or inconsistencies. You can invert "square" matrices only. A square matrix is one with the same number of rows and columns.

 How to


To multiply two matrices

1	Click Tools [image] Numeric tools [image] Multiply matrices.

2	Click the Range picker in the Matrix 1 box, and select the first matrix to multiply.

3	Click the Range picker in the Matrix 2 box, and select the second matrix to multiply.

4	Click the Range picker in the Destination box, and specify the destination cells.

 Note

•	The number of columns in the first matrix must equal the number of rows in the second matrix.

 Related topics


To invert a matrix

1	Click Tools [image] Numeric tools [image] Invert.

2	Click the Range picker in the Source box, and select the matrix cells to invert.

3	Click the Range picker in the Destination box, and select the upper left cell of the cells where you want to write the inverted matrix.

 Notes

•	You can invert matrices of sizes up to 90 rows by 90 columns.

•	If you specify the same source cells as the destination cells, the inverted matrix overwrites the existing matrix.

 Related topics


Creating scenarios

Quattro Pro lets you create scenarios, scenario groups, or display scenarios. A scenario is a snapshot of a data model which is a set of formulas designed to simulate real-life situations and conditions. Scenarios show changing data or variable values plugged into a model and the values that result. For example, a worst-case scenario shows what you can expect from the least desirable set of variable values; a best-case scenario uses the most desirable values as input. Scenarios are often used to find the optimum solution to a problem.

Before using scenarios, you have to create a data model that includes formulas and supporting data.

 How to


To create a scenario

1	Click Tools [image] Scenario [image] New.

2	Click the Range picker in the Changing cells box, and select the changing cells.

3	Click Next.

4	Type a name in the Scenario name box.

5	Type a value for each changing cell in the Changing cells and their values boxes.

6	Click Add scenario.

7	Click Next.

8	Click Show scenario.

9	Click Next.

 Note

•	By default, changing cells are yellow; result cells are green.

 Tip

•	You can click Create report to see a Scenario Summary Report.

 Related topics


To create a scenario group

1	Click Tools [image] Scenario [image] Edit.

2	Click Settings.

3	In the Scenario group settings dialog box, click New.

4	In the New group dialog box, type a name in the New group name box.

 Related topics


To display a scenario

1	Click Tools [image] Scenario [image] Edit.

2	Choose a scenario group from the Scenario groups list box.

3	Choose a scenario from the Scenarios list.

 Notes

•	When you display a scenario, its changing cell and result cell values replace those currently on the screen.

•	When you highlight a scenario in the list and click Show scenario, the values for that scenario display in the notebook. You can drag the Scenario expert dialog box to a new location to view all scenario cells.

 Related topics


Managing scenarios

Quattro Pro lets you keep track of all the scenarios you create. You can save edits to a scenario or you can rename the scenario group if the focus of the scenarios changes.

You can highlight the changing cells of a scenario to make it easier to keep track of the data that you modify.

When you no longer need a scenario, you can delete it from the scenario group, or you can remove the scenario group altogether.

 How to


To save scenario edits

1	Click Tools [image] Scenario [image] Edit.

2	Choose a scenario group from the Scenario groups list box.

3	Choose a scenario from the Scenarios list.

4	Edit the scenario on the spreadsheet.

5	Click Capture.

6	In the Capture scenario as dialog box, type the name of the scenario in the Scenario name box.

 Tip

•	You can save the scenario you edited as a new scenario by typing a new name in the Scenario name box.

 Related topics


To rename a scenario group

1	Click Tools [image] Scenario [image] Edit.

2	Click Settings.

3	In the Scenario group settings dialog box, click Rename.

4	In the Rename group dialog box, type the new name in the New group name box.

 Related topics


To highlight cells

1	Click Tools [image] Scenario [image] Edit.

2	Click Highlight.

3	In the Scenario manager highlight dialog box, open the Changed cells color picker, and click a color.

4	Open the Result cells color picker, and click a color.

 Note

•	By default, changed cells are yellow; result cells are green.

 Related topics


To delete scenarios

1	Click Tools [image] Scenario [image] Edit.

If the scenario is in another scenario group, choose the group name from the Scenario groups list.

2	Choose a name from the Scenarios list.

3	Click Delete.

 Related topics


To delete a scenario group

1	Click Tools [image] Scenario [image] Edit.

2	Click Settings.

3	In the Scenario group settings dialog box, choose a group from the Scenario groups list box.

4	Click Delete.

 Related topics


Creating one-variable What-If tables

What-If tables show the results of substituting a number of values for one or two variables in a formula. Also called sensitivity tables, What-If tables can answer questions such as "What if my company's expenses increase 10%, 20%, 30%? And, what if production increases 10% to 25% at the same time?" What-If tables can also be used to look up values, such as postal charges for different parcel weights.

You can create one-variable What-If by varying a single value that is referenced by one or more What-If formulas. You can create one by setting up a column of figures to use as substitutions, and setting up formulas that reference a blank cell (the input cell). Each formula is calculated using the values in the substitution column, and the column below each formula is filled in with calculated values.

For example, suppose you want to set up a table that shows commissions earned for a range of sales amounts. By varying a single value referenced by a What-If formula, you can calculate the commission employees would receive for three different commission rates: 12%, 15%, and 18%. You can create a column of figures that reflect the sales range you want to show, and enter the formulas to calculate the commissions. Each formula must reference a blank cell. This is the input cell; each substitution value will be put in this cell, one at a time, to create the table. The input cell can be any cell outside the table.

To fill in the table values, Quattro Pro moves down each column, enters each row's substitution value in the input cell, recalculates the formula at the top of the column, and places the result in the cell.

Using a one-variable table with a notebook database

A What-If table can be a helpful supplement to existing database information. You can create a table that uses information in a database without affecting the database itself. For information about creating a notebook database, see "Using databases."

For example, you can determine what your net income might be in the year 2001. Suppose your boss promised you an annual raise of 10%, and the current inflation rate is 6.5%. You created a database projecting yearly gross income (based on a yearly 10% increase), expenses (based on a yearly 6.5% increase), and net income (subtracting expenses from gross income) as shown in the next figure.

A database showing one possibility (using one variable). 1) Gross income 2) Business expenses 3) Net income 4) Salary increase 5) Inflation rate

You can try substituting other variables (for example, different inflation rates) in cell B9 of this example, but this method is slow. A more efficient way of viewing the options is to use a What-If table to show you all the possibilities at once, as in the next figure. Quattro Pro fills the table by moving down each column, entering each row's substitution value in the input cell, recalculating the formula at the top of the column, and placing the result in the cell.

The same database using a What-If table to show the income based on a range of inflation rates. Cell B9 is the input cell. 1) Gross income 2) Business expenses 3) Net income 4) Salary increase 5) Inflation rate.

 How to


To create a one-variable What-If table

1	Type a column of values to substitute in one or more formulas.

This will be the left column of the table.

2	Type one or more formulas in the row above the first substitution value, starting in the column to the right.

3	Click Tools [image] Numeric tools [image] What-If tables.

4	Enable the One free variable option.

5	Click the Range picker in the What-If table box, and select the cells containing both formulas and substitution values.

6	Click the Range picker in the Input cell box, and select the blank cell referenced in the formulas.

7	Click Generate.

 Related topics


To use a one-variable table with a notebook database

1	Below a notebook database, type a range of data.

2	Above and to the right of the list, enter the address of the cell that shows the formula which references the input cell.

3	Move right one cell, then enter the cell address where you want to display the results.

4	Click Tools [image] Numeric tools [image] What-If tables.

5	Enable the One free variable option.

6	Click the Range picker in the What-If table box, and select the cells containing both formulas and substitution values.

7	Click the Range picker in the Input cell box, and select the blank cell referenced in the formulas.

8	Click Generate.

 Related topics


Creating two-variable What-If tables

Two-variable What-If tables show the results of varying two values in a What-If formula. Unlike one-variable tables, you can use only one formula. You can create a basic table that uses only the data you supply to calculate values, or you can build a table that refers to data already entered in the notebook database.

For example, suppose you own a health club and want to try a sliding-scale fee schedule. You devise a formula to calculate individual yearly fees:

Family Income - (No. of Dependents * 1000)/100

Now you want to build a lookup table to make it easier to pinpoint fees. The next figure displays a sample What-If table using this formula:

A sliding scale lookup table. 1) Column Input Cell 2) Salary 3) Row Input Cell 4) Number of Dependents.

You can build similar tables showing all kinds of information [image] for example, a mileage chart listing miles per gallon for different amounts of gas used and numbers of miles driven, or profit amounts for a range of prices and costs.

Using two-variable What-If tables with a notebook database

A two-variable What-If table can draw out and analyze information in a notebook database. When you create this kind of table, you can use database @ functions to calculate values.

The following example of an employee notebook database uses a What-If table to show how long people have been employed in each department. A criteria table (F12..G13) is set up for two fields: Dept. and Years. The empty cells below the field headings are the input cells. The first column of the data table (F3..F6) lists each department. The first row (G2..I2) shows a range of years employed. The formula in cell F2 counts the number of employees for each department and employment length that's shown in the criteria table:

@DCOUNT(A3..D16, 0,F12..G13)

A What-If table showing employment lengths by department. 1) Years employed 2) Salary 3) Department 4) Employee name 5) Length of employment table 6) Formula used in the table 7) Criteria table uses F13 as the column input cell and G13 as the row input cell.

 How to


To create a two-variable What-If table

1	Type a column of substitution values.

2	Starting in the row above and to the right of the substitution column, type a second column of substitution values.

3	In the top-left cell of the table, type the formula to use to calculate table values.

The formula must refer to two blank cells.

4	Click Tools [image] Numeric tools [image] What-If tables.

5	Enable the Two free variables option.

6	Click the Range picker in the What-If table box, and select the cells containing both formulas and substitution values.

7	Click the Range picker in the Column input cell box, and select the column input cell referenced in the What-If formula.

8	Click the Range picker in the Row input cell box, and select the row input cell referenced in the What-If formula.

9	Click Generate.

 Related topics


To use a two-variable table with a notebook database

1	Click Tools [image] Numeric tools [image] What-If tables.

2	Enable the Two free variables option.

3	Click the Range picker in the What-If table box, and select the cells containing both formulas and substitution values.

4	Click the Range picker in the Column input cell box, and select the column input cell referenced in the What-If formula.

5	Click the Range picker in the Row input cell box, and select the row input cell referenced in the What-If formula.

6	Click Generate.

 Related topics


Using goal seeking

Quattro Pro lets you calculate a formula backward, starting with the result and solving for a variable that produces that result. This is called goal seeking; instead of calculating an optimum solution, you change a single variable to reach the solution you specify.

When you know the result you want, but you aren't sure how to reach it, use goal seeking to help you find the answer.

 How to


To perform goal seeking

1	Type a formula into a cell. The formula must reference one variable cell.

2	Click Tools [image] Numeric tools [image] Solve for.

3	Click the Range picker in the Formula cell box, and select the cell containing the formula.

4	In the Target value box, type the result you want from the formula.

5	Click the Range picker in the Variable cell box, and select the cell that can be varied to achieve a particular result.

You can also
Specify how many passes from one to 1000 Quattro Pro can make to solve a formula	Type a number in the Max iterations box.
Specify how close Quattro Pro has to be to a particular result	Type a number in the Accuracy box.
 Related topics


Finding optimum solutions for linear and nonlinear problems

You can use Quattro Pro to find optimum solutions for linear and nonlinear problems. For example, you can

•	evaluate formulas with one or more variables

•	solve sets of linear and nonlinear equations and inequalities

•	find a minimum or maximum solution, or meet an exact goal

•	find values that satisfy problem limits, or constraints

If you are solving a set of expressions, you can add them as constraints. Once you define a problem you can save the settings for future use.

Producing an Optimizer report

With Quattro Pro, you can produce an Optimizer report that shows how well the constraints were met and indicates starting and final values for the solution cell; starting and final values for the variable cells; and value, binding, slack, and dual value for the constraints.

Slack is the difference between the constraint constant value, or Right Value, and the value actually used in the solution.

Variable dual values are sometimes called reduced gradients. They show how a one-unit increase in the variable affects the solution cell.

Constraint dual values, or Lagrange Multipliers, measure the amount by which the solution could be improved if the constraint were relaxed by one unit.

Increment for variable cells is the amount of increase in the gradient value before a different value is calculated for that variable cell in the solution. For constraint cells, increment is the amount of increase in the right value before the binding status changes.

Decrement for variable cells is the amount of decrease in the gradient value before a different value is calculated for that variable cell in the solution. For constraint cells, decrement is the amount of decrease in the right value before the binding status changes.

 How to


To solve a problem

1	Type a single formula into a cell.

The formula must reference any variable cells you have assigned.

2	Click Tools [image] Numeric tools [image] Optimizer.

If you have a goal-seeking problem with one formula, click the Range picker in the Solution cell box, and select the cells that contain the formula.

3	Enable one of the following options:

•	None [image] chooses a default solution cell

•	Max [image] maximizes the formula

•	Min [image] minimizes the formula

•	Target value [image] makes the solution cell formula evaluate to an exact value

4	Click the Range picker in the Variable cell(s) box, and select the variable cells.

 Notes

•	If you are solving a set of expressions, enter their left terms into cells. You can enter the right term into adjacent cells, or you can enter the value into the Optimizer directly when adding constraints.

•	You can reference up to 200 variable cells.

•	Variable cells must not contain dates, formulas, or text, and they must not be protected.

 Related topics


To specify the Optimizer options

1	Click Tools [image] Numeric tools [image] Optimizer.

2	Click Options.

3	In the Optimizer options dialog box, modify any options.

 Note

•	For more information on Optimizer options, see "Specifying the Optimizer tool options."

 Related topics


To add an Optimizer constraint

1	Click Tools [image] Numeric tools [image] Optimizer.

2	Click Add.

3	In the Add constraints dialog box, click the Range picker in the Cell box, and select a cell containing a formula that must be bounded, or that must equal a target value. You can select a single cell, or select cells that must all have the same bound.

4	Enable the operator option that connects both terms of the constraint and describes their relationship.

5	Click the Range picker in the Constant box, and select a cell that contains a value, or type a value for the target or bound.

 Note

•	You can specify a selection of cells equal to or larger than the number of cells included on the left side of the constraint. Each cell on the left is compared with the corresponding cell on the right. A single cell on the left is compared with the upper left cell of the cells on the right.

 Tips

•	To edit a constraint, select it in the Optimizer dialog box, and click Change.

•	To delete a constraint, select it in the Optimizer dialog box, and click Delete.

 Related topics


To save an Optimizer model

1	Click Tools [image] Numeric tools [image] Optimizer.

2	Click Options.

3	In the Optimizer options dialog box, click Save model.

4	In the Save optimizer model dialog box, click the Range picker in the Model cells box, and select the cells to hold the model.

 Notes

•	The cells must be three columns wide, with enough rows to hold the model. You can select the cell in the upper left corner of the cells.

•	The last Optimizer problem you defined is always saved with the note.

 Related topics


To reuse an Optimizer model

1	Click Tools [image] Numeric tools [image] Optimizer.

2	Click Options.

3	In the Optimizer options dialog box, click Load model.

4	In the Load optimizer model dialog box, click the Range picker in the Model cells box, and select the cells that contain the model.

 Related topics


To produce an Optimizer report

1	Click Tools [image] Numeric tools [image] Optimizer.

2	Click Options.

3	In the Optimizer options dialog box, click Reporting.

4	In the Report output cells dialog box, click the Range picker in the Answer report cells box, and select the cells.

5	Click the Range picker in the Detail report cells box, and select the cells.

6	Click OK.

7	Click OK.

8	Click Solve.

 Related topics


Reference: Analyzing data

This section contains additional information related to analyzing data. For example, it contains an in-depth explanation about interpreting an amortization table, and a mortgage refinancing table.

You will also learn about understanding the regression output cells and about the different options available with the Optimizer.

 How to


Interpreting an amortization table

You can generate an amortization schedule, showing principal and interest payments, as well as interest paid from start to date and from year to date.

The amortization table consists of two sections. In the top section you can input values related to your mortgage. You can change any of these input values to customize the bottom section of the table.

Column name	Description
Interest Rate	The annual interest rate of the loan
Term	Number of years of the loan, not the number of payments
Original Balance	Money originally borrowed
Ending Balance	The amount of principal remaining to pay off at the end of the loan
Last Year	The number of years to show in the table
1st PMT	The first payment date for the mortgage
The bottom section of the table consists of 10 columns:

Column name	Description
Pmt #	Number of payments from the first payment to the last payment of the loan or to the last one in the last year specified by Last Year
Date	Date on which the corresponding payment number is due. Mortgage payments are typically due on the first day of the month following the month covered by the payment. The default date format is Month-Year (MMM-YY).
Yr Rate	Equivalent yearly interest rate for the period; for fixed-rate loans, this rate does not change; for variable rate loans, specify an estimated average interest rate when you create the table, then replace individual monthly rate values later by overwriting the calculated values.
P&I Payment	Shows the principal and interest payment for the corresponding payment period. This will not vary for fixed loans, but will vary with variable interest loans or other variable loans such as graduated payment loans. In the case of "graduated payment" loans, you can type in the actual P&I payment to replace the calculated value. Even if this results in a negative amortization, the New Balance and other columns calculate correctly. Negative amortization occurs when the P&I payment is insufficient to cover the interest charged for the period, and so the loan balance increases by the shortage amount.
Principal	Principal portion of the P&I payment
Interest	Interest portion of the P&I payment
Extra Prin	Amount of extra principal per pay period. If you intend to pay extra principal for some portion of the loan, enter the amount in this column at the row of the corresponding payment number. The extra principal amount is included in every row that follows. If extra principal payments vary from month to month, type in the actual extra principal amount wherever it changes.
New Balance	Balance after each payment. The balance decreases with each payment and eventually reaches zero (or Ending Balance, if it is not zero). The amortization table stops short of zero if Last Year precedes the end of the loan.
Cum. Interest	Cumulative interest paid through the corresponding payment
Yearly Total Int	Cumulative interest paid for each calendar year. Use this column to calculate the yearly interest paid for tax purposes.
 Related topics


Interpreting a mortgage refinancing table

The mortgage refinancing table provides you with information about refinancing a mortgage and lets you compare your current loan with candidate loans. The mortgage refinancing table consists of two sections: the Current Loan section and the Candidate Loans section.

The Current Loan section takes information about your present mortgage from the Analysis Experts dialog box.

Column name	Description
Rem. Term	The number of years remaining on the loan, not the number of payments
Balance	The remaining principal to pay off in the current loan
Rate	The annual interest rate of the current loan
Candidate Loan Rate	The annual interest rate of the proposed loan
Fees	The amount of percentage fees for the proposed loan
The Candidate Loans section takes information about the rates and terms of different mortgages from the Analysis Experts dialog box. The table calculates the gross savings by showing how different the monthly payment is for the candidate loan compared to the current loan. It also calculates the net savings, by determining the amount of money saved.

The Candidate Loans section of the table consists of 19 columns:

Column name	Description
Loan Description	Name of the candidate loan
Current Balance	Balance of the current loan
Cash Out	Cash removed from equity (a positive value), or cash paid up front into the loan to pay down the balance or to prevent financing or loan fees (a negative value)
Pct Fees	Percentage fees (points) charged by the lender (for example, 1.75%)
Fixed Fees	Fixed fees involved in the refinancing; if a loss (for example, a loan prepayment penalty), enter a positive value; if a gain (for example, a prorated return of prepaid Private Mortgage Insurance from payoff of current loan), enter a negative number
Loan Amount	Amount of the candidate loan
Rate	Annual interest rate of the candidate loan
Term (yrs)	Loan term in years
Future Value	Future value of the candidate loan; enter a positive value if the loan requires a balloon payment
P&I Payment	Principal and interest payment for each period
Fixed mo. Loan Fees	Fixed monthly loan fees (such as private mortgage insurance)
Loan Pmt	Monthly payment (Loan Pmt = P&I Payment + Fixed Mo. Loan Fees)
Savings: Gross	The difference in the monthly payment of the candidate loan and the current loan; if negative, the candidate's monthly payment is higher; if positive, the candidate's monthly payment is lower and all gross savings are applied as extra principal
Savings: Term +/-	Portion of gross savings due to lengthening the term of the loan; if the term is lengthened, Term +/- is negative; if the term is shortened, Term +/- is positive
Savings: Cash I/O	Portion of gross savings due to closing costs paid up front (a negative number), or the amount of gross savings that has already been reduced by cash taken out (a positive number enclosed by "><", which does not affect the Net amount)
Savings: Net	Sum of savings from Gross, Term +/-, and Cash I/O
Payback: When	The initial estimate of the number of years it will take for the candidate loan to pay for the cost of refinancing; displays "Never" if the refinance loses money
Payback: Loan Life	The number of years you plan to keep the property before selling it or refinancing
Payback: Bal chg	The difference in the balance at the end of Loan Life of the candidate loan and the current loan due to extra principal paid on the candidate loan; a negative number represents money saved
 Related topics


Understanding regression output cells

The regression output is nine rows deep and three columns wider than the number of columns in the independent cells. Make sure to leave enough blank space because any underlying data will be overwritten. The output cells contain the following information:

Output Cell	Description
Constant	The y-intercept value, zero if Y Intercept is set to Zero instead of Compute
Std Err of Y Est	The estimated standard error of y values; the degree of deviation of observed y values from predicted values
R Squared	The variance; the degree of relationship between independent and dependent variables. With one independent variable, R Squared is the square of the correlation between the two variables.
No. of Observations	The number of values for each variable; the number of rows in the regression table
Degrees of Freedom	The number of observations minus the number of independent values being computed by the regression. With Y Intercept set to Zero, Degrees of Freedom = (No. of Observations) - (number of independent variables); with Y Intercept computed, Degrees of Freedom = (No. of Observations) - (number of independent variables + 1).
X Coefficient(s)	The regression coefficients of the independent (x) variables; the slope of the regression line representing the relationship between each independent variable and the dependent variable.
Std Err of Coef.	An error estimate of the X Coefficient above it. Interpret each coefficient as the X Coefficient value plus or minus the Standard Error of Coefficient.
 Related topics


Specifying the Optimizer tool options

When you produce an optimizer report, you can specify the following options:

•	Assume linear model (use Simplex Method) [image] lets you use a linear method to solve the problem by indicating that the problem has only linear expressions in the solution cell or any of the constraint cells

•	Show iteration results [image] lets you pause between each iteration, or trial, to check the progress of the search. You can either stop or continue the search after each iteration.

•	Automatic scaling of variables [image] lets you scale variables to achieve the target value

•	Maximum time (in seconds) [image] lets you indicate the maximum amount of time to find the best solution to the problem

•	Maximum number of iterations [image] lets you set the maximum number of iterations, or trials, that Optimizer can perform to find the best solution

•	Allowed solution precision [image] lets you control the accuracy of the solution

•	Allowed solution tolerance [image] lets you indicate the maximum percentage by which a solution can differ from a theoretical optimum integer solution. As you increase the tolerance setting, solutions are produced more quickly; however, they may be less accurate.

•	Estimates [image] lets you select the approach for obtaining initial estimates of the basic variables in each iteration

•	Derivatives [image] lets you select the Forward or Central differencing for estimates of partial derivatives

•	Search [image] lets you select a method for computing the search direction

 Related topics


Working with form controls

Form controls make spreadsheets an interactive part of the user interface. When you create a form control, you can activate it to behave in a specific way. You can also customize the appearance and behavior of form controls by setting control properties.

In this section, you'll learn about

•	creating controls on a spreadsheet

•	customizing and managing controls on a spreadsheet


Creating controls on a spreadsheet

You can add the following controls to a spreadsheet:

Control	Description
	Push button [image] performs a specific action when clicked
	Check box [image] provides two choices: Yes when enabled and No when disabled
	Radio button [image] typically used in a mutually exclusive list where only one radio button can be selected at a time
	Group box [image] usually contains other controls, such as radio buttons or check boxes
	List box [image] lets a user browse values using a scroll bar
	Combo box [image] creates a drop-down list box from which a user can make choices from
	Label text [image] allows you to add static text near a control
	Vertical scroll bar [image] lets a user scroll through a list of values by clicking arrows
	Spin control [image] lets a user choose a value by clicking arrows and selecting a value
	Edit box [image] lets a user type text
The way controls are activated varies depending on the action they incur. When you specify a source block to appear in a control (for example, a list box), each row in the block you specify becomes one item in a list. If you want to make a control functional, you must specify the appropriate information in a different area depending on the control.

You can attach a macro to a form control that runs when a user activates the control. For example, a user can click a button that runs a macro to perform a calculation. You can attach a macro to all form controls except group boxes and labels. For information about creating macros, see "Using macros."

Form controls can also be attached to the Internet. For example, a button can launch a browser linked to a Web site. For information about using Quattro Pro notebooks with the Internet, see "Working with the Internet."

As well, you can link a custom dialog box to a form control so that when a user executes a macro, the specified dialog box displays.

 How to


To add a form control to a spreadsheet

1	Click Insert [image] Form control, and click a form control.

2	Click where you want the control to display.

3	Drag diagonally until the control is the desired size.

 Tip

•	To create a form control of the default size, position the pointer where you want the control to display, and click.

 Related topics


To attach a macro to a form control

1	Select a form control.

2	Right-click the control, and click Properties.

3	Click the Macro tab.

4	Type the macro command name or location in the Enter macro box.

You must enclose the macro command name with braces {}.

 Related topics


To attach a form control to the Internet

1	Select a form control.

2	Right-click the control, and click Properties.

3	Click the Macro tab.

4	Click Link to URL.

5	Type the Internet address in the URL box.

 Related topics


To display a dialog box from a form control

1	Select a form control.

2	Right-click the control, and click Properties.

3	Click the Macro tab.

4	Click Execute dialog.

5	In the Execute dialog box, choose a dialog box from the Active dialog list.

6	Type a cell reference in the Result cell box.

7	Type a cell reference in the Values range box.

 Related topics


Customizing and managing controls on a spreadsheet

You can change both the border color and border width of a form control. As well, you can change the label of a form control to better describe its role in the spreadsheet.

When you add a form control to a spreadsheet, Quattro Pro assigns it a default object name in the format ControlName1, ControlName2, and so on. The default object name is the control label.

For controls that do not have labels (list boxes, combo boxes, scroll bars, and spin controls), you can add a label beside the original control.

The object name is the name used to reference the form control in macros, link commands, and in spreadsheet functions. You can change the object name of a form control the same way you change the object name of other OLE objects.

You can enable protection on a form control. Enabling protection prevents a control from being changed or deleted by other users when protections have been set higher up at the sheet level. For information about protecting spreadsheets and cells, see "Protecting data."

You can print a spreadsheet without printing a form control.

 How to


To change the border of a form control

1	Select a form control.

2	Right-click the control, and click Properties.

3	Click the Border color tab.

4	Click a color on the color palette.

5	Click the Box type tab.

6	Enable a Box type option.

If you want to create a shadow behind the control, enable the Drop shadow check box.

 Related topics


To change the label of a form control

1	Select a form control.

2	Right-click the control, and click Properties.

3	Click the Label text tab.

4	Type a new label in the Enter text box.

 Related topics


To add a label beside a form control

1	Click Insert [image] Form control [image] Label text.

2	Drag the label to a spot near a form control.

3	Right-click the label, and click Properties.

4	Click the Label text tab.

5	Type a label in the Enter text box.

 Tip

•	To create a control of the default size, put the cursor in the desired position and click once.

 Related topics


To change the object name of a form control

1	Select a form control.

2	Right-click the control, and click Properties.

3	Click the Object name tab.

4	Type a new name in the Object name box.

 Related topics


To enable protection on a form control

1	Select a form control.

2	Right-click the control, and click Properties.

3	Click the Protection tab.

4	Enable the Locked check box.

 Related topics


To print a spreadsheet without printing a form control

1	Select a form control.

2	Right-click the control, and click Properties.

3	Click the Print tab.

4	Disable the Print object check box.

 Related topics


Using macros

A macro is a script containing instructions that you record and then play back to perform simple or complex tasks. For example, you can record a macro that prints a report. Or you can record a macro that opens a notebook, moves the insertion point to a specified place, and prompts a user to type information.

In this section, you'll learn about

•	recording and editing Quattro Pro macros

•	working with macro libraries

•	recording  and editing PerfectScript macros

•	creating VBA macros

•	debugging and editing a VBA macro

•	using the PerfectScript class to change a Quattro Pro document

•	working in Developer mode

•	recording macros using relative and absolute cell references

•	attaching macros to notebooks and buttons

•	playing macros

•	debugging Quattro Pro macros

•	debugging PerfectScript macros

•	customizing application settings using macros

For more information about using macros, see "Reference: Using macros."


Recording and editing Quattro Pro macros

With Quattro Pro, you can record actions as you perform them. Recording converts actions into macro commands and stores them as labels in a block. Quattro Pro does not record actions keystroke by keystroke. Instead, it translates keystrokes and mouse actions that invoke menu choices into one or more macro commands called command equivalents. This recording method is called logical recording. Macros recorded in this way are more efficient and can run with a customized Quattro Pro menu system. For example, a macro containing commands to print the active notebook runs even when the menu command is not in the active menu bar.

You can also type Quattro Pro macros if you prefer to enter the macro manually. You can type multiple macro commands in the same cell or type each separately in multiple cells. Macro commands are labels, therefore, Quattro Pro does not recognize a syntax error as you type it in; the error occurs only when you try to run the macro. Even a typing error can prevent a macro from running. To save debugging time, pay careful attention to the format of macro commands as you enter them, and record macros whenever possible. For information about macro syntax, see "Understanding Quattro Pro macro syntax."

You can also add a command to a macro script.

Quattro Pro lets you name the macros you record. Cell names make macros more readable and easier to remember. Give names to macros that reflect the tasks they perform. For example, PERCENT could be the name of a macro that changes the numeric format of the current cell to a percentage.

When naming macros, avoid names that are the same as macro command names; otherwise the macro commands are invalid. For example, suppose you name a macro READLN; this is also the name of a predefined macro command for reading a line from a file. If you try to use this command to read a line into cell A6 rather than {READLN A6}, Quattro Pro assumes you are playing the READLN macro rather than the {READLN} command.

 How to


To record a Quattro Pro macro

1	Click Tools [image] Macro [image] Record.

2	Enable the Quattro Pro macro option.

If you want to save the macro in an existing macro library, on the status bar, click the notebook name that contains the macro library.

3	Select the cells in which to store the macro.

4	Click OK.

5	Perform the actions in the macro.

6	Click Tools [image] Macro [image] Record.

 Notes

•	You can store a macro on the spreadsheet where you perform the macro or on a spreadsheet specifically assigned to the macro.

•	At the end of the macro, leave a line blank so the macro terminates without user intervention. Otherwise, the macro interprets labels below it as macro commands.

•	The recording of a macro is noted by [image] on the Application Bar.

•	For more information about saving a macro in an existing macro library see "Working with macro libraries."

•	When you select cells to store the macro in, select a single cell if there is no chance of overwriting data in the cells below (Quattro Pro fills the cells below as necessary). When you select more than one cell, the macro is confined only to those cells, and stops recording when they are full.

 Related topics


To pause or resume recording a Quattro Pro macro

•	Click Tools [image] Macro [image] Pause.

 Related topics


To type a Quattro Pro macro

1	Click in the first cell where you want to store the macro.

2	Type the macro commands you want.

3	Type {QUIT}.

 Note

•	When you type commands in more than one cell, be sure the entries proceed downward (A1, A2, A3) with no empty cells between them. Each cell must contain a label or a text formula.

 Tip

•	You can also indicate the end of a macro by typing {RETURN} or leaving an empty cell below the last cell of the macro.

 Related topics


To add a command to a macro script

1	Click a spreadsheet containing the macro script.

2	Click the cell above where you want to add the command.

3	Click Insert [image] Insert row.

4	Click OK.

5	Type the new command.

 Related topics


To delete a command from a macro script

1	Click a spreadsheet containing the macro script.

2	Click the row label containing the command you want to delete.

3	Click Edit [image] Delete cells.

 Related topics


To name a Quattro Pro macro

1	Click a spreadsheet containing the macro script.

2	Select the cells containing the macro you want to name.

3	Click Insert [image] Name [image] Name cells.

4	Type the name in the Name box.

 Related topics


Working with macro libraries

The best way to store macros is in a macro library, a special notebook reserved for macros that you can access from any notebook. You can create a library Macro libraries can

•	simplify linked access

•	make tracking macros easier

•	ensure that macros do not interfere with the notebook data and conversely

•	save disk space by using one set of macros for a group of notebooks

•	store a set of macros that can be copied into individual notebooks as you need them

•	create a separate set of macros for each application or type of notebook you work with

You should keep only one macro library open at a time. When two open libraries contain a macro with the same name, it is difficult to predict which macro will play. Quattro Pro searches only open macro libraries for macros; closed libraries are ignored.

You can also create a system notebook. You can use system notebooks to hold application macros and ensure their availability while Quattro Pro is running. You can hide system notebooks. A system notebook, when hidden, stays open even when users close all notebooks.

 How to


To create a macro library

1	Click Format [image] Notebook properties.

2	Click the Macro library tab.

3	Enable the Yes option.

4	Click OK.

5	Click File [image] Save.

 Related topics


To create a system notebook

1	Click Format [image] Notebook properties.

2	Click the System tab.

3	Enable the Yes option.

If you also want to designate the notebook as a macro library, click the Macro library tab, and enable the Yes option.

4	Click OK to close the dialog box.

 Related topics


To hide a system notebook

1	Click Format [image] Notebook properties.

2	Click the Password level tab.

3	Enable the Medium option

4	Click OK.

5	In the Enter password dialog box, type a password.

 Tip

•	You can also hide a system notebook by clicking Window [image] Hide.

 Related topics


Recording and editing PerfectScript macros

You can use PerfectScript macros not only with Quattro Pro, but also with other Corel applications such as Corel Presentations and WordPerfect.

PerfectScript is a command-based language that records the results of keystrokes or mouse selections rather than the keystrokes themselves. PerfectScript includes commands that direct the function of the macros. These commands let you create macros that can prompt for user input, make decisions based on conditions in a notebook, access system variables, and so on.

You can record PerfectScript macros. A recorded macro includes only product commands.

You can also type a macro in WordPerfect and play it in Quattro Pro. A typed macro can include non-recordable statements that specify how a macro performs a task. When writing this kind of macro, you specify the conditions for playing assignments, loops, and programming commands.

Once you have created a PerfectScript macro script you can create a .wcl file. The .wcl file is necessary for debugging PerfectScript macros.

In Quattro Pro you can edit a PerfectScript macro in two ways: in WordPerfect or in the PerfectScript Macro Facility.

 How to


To record a PerfectScript macro

1	Click Tools [image] Macro [image] Record.

2	Enable the PerfectScript macro option.

3	Type a filename in the Filename box.

4	Click OK.

5	Perform the actions in a task.

Each action is recorded and written as one or more macro commands in the macro file.

6	Click Tools [image] Macro [image] Record.

 Notes

•	The recording of a macro is noted by [image] on the application bar.

•	You cannot record a PerfectScript macro that pauses for user input. If you want the macro to pause, edit it after recording it.

 Related topics


To pause or resume recording a PerfectScript macro

•	Click Tools [image] Macro [image] Pause.

 Related topics


To type a PerfectScript macro

1	Start WordPerfect.

2	Click Tools [image] Macro [image] Macro toolbar.

3	Click the Commands button on the Macro toolbar.

4	Choose a command type from the Command type list box.

If the command requires a parameter, choose a parameter from the Parameters list box.

If the command requires an enumeration, choose an enumeration from the Enumerations list box.

5	Type any additional parameters or values in the Command edit box.

6	Click Insert.

7	Click Save & compile on the macro toolbar.

 Note

•	Enumerations are used to set parameter values when parameter values are limited to a specific set of values. For example, the FileClose command lets you close a file. It has a parameter named DoSave? with two enumerations, Yes! and No!.

 Tip

•	You can also type a PerfectScript macro by click Start [image] Programs [image] WordPerfect 11 [image] Utilities [image] PerfectScript 11 and clicking Help [image] Macro command browser.

 Related topics


To create a .wcl file

1	Click Tools [image] Macro [image] Edit.

2	Choose the drive and folder where the macro is stored.

3	Double-click the filename.

WordPerfect opens.

4	Click Options [image] Compile with debug on the macro tools toolbar.

5	Click Save & compile on the macro toolbar.

6	In the PerfectScript compiler listing box, click OK.

 Note

•	The .wcl file defaults to the same location and name as the .wcm file.

 Tip

•	You can open the macro tools toolbar in WordPerfect by clicking View [image] Toolbars, and enabling the Macro tools check box in the Toolbar list.

 Related topics


To edit a PerfectScript in the PerfectScript Macro Facility

1	Click Tools [image] Macro [image] Edit.

2	Choose the drive and folder where the macro is stored.

3	Double-click the filename.

 Related topics


To edit a PerfectScript macro in WordPerfect

1	On the Windows taskbar, click Start [image] Programs [image] WordPerfect 11 [image] Utilities [image] PerfectScript 11.

2	Click File [image] Edit.

3	Choose a drive and folder where the file is stored.

4	Double-click a filename.

This starts WordPerfect and displays the macro commands.

5	Edit the macro.

 Related topics


Creating VBA macros

Quattro Pro lets you start Visual Basic for Applications (VBA) from Quattro Pro. You can display the VBA toolbar, which provides quick access to commands such as playing a macro or starting the VBA Editor.

With VBA, you can create a project macro. You can play a project macro only in the document which was used to create it.

You can create a project VBA macro by creating a public method for the ThisDocument object. The term public refers to the access level. If a method is public, it can be accessed from outside the class. This means that you can call it from the host application. If a method is private, then only methods in the same class can access it. Every public method that belongs to the ThisDocument class is a project macro.

You can copy PerfectScript to a VBA code module. You can also copy Quattro Pro macro script to a VBA code module.

You should always play a macro once you have created it. For more information about playing a PerfectScript macro see "To play a PerfectScript macro."

For more information about VBA, see the Microsoft Visual Basic Help in the Visual Basic Editor.

 How to


To start VBA from Quattro Pro

•	Click Tools [image] Visual Basic [image] Visual Basic Editor.

 Note

•	For more information about VBA, see the Microsoft Visual Basic Help in the Visual Basic Editor.

 Related topics


To display the VBA toolbar

1	Click View [image] Toolbars.

2	Enable the Visual Basic check box in the Toolbar list.

 Note

•	For more information about VBA, see the Microsoft Visual Basic Help in the Visual Basic Editor.

 Related topics


To create a VBA project macro in Quattro Pro

1	Click Tools [image] Visual Basic [image] Visual Basic Editor.

2	In the Project explorer Docker window, double-click the VBAProject (NoteBk1) in the list of categories.

3	Click Insert [image] UserForm.

4	In the Toolbox dialog box, drag any control to the user form.

5	Modify any of the control's attributes, in the Properties Docker window.

6	Double-click a control.

7	In the Notebk1 code module window, type the code that responds to the activation of the control.

8	Open the QuattroPro objects folder in the Project explorer Docker window.

9	Double-click ThisNotebook.

10In the Notebk1 code module window, type the code that adds a new method to the notebook.

 Related topics


To copy PerfectScript to a VBA code module

1	Open the .wcm file containing the PerfectScript macro.

2	Select the macro.

3	Click Edit [image] Copy.

4	Click Tools [image] Visual Basic [image] Visual Basic Editor.

5	In the Project explorer Docker window, double-click VBAProject (NoteBk1) [image] Quattro Pro objects [image] ThisNotebook in the list of categories.

6	In the Notebok1 code module window, type Public Sub and the name of the sub.

7	Within the Public Sub, type Application.PerfectScript.

8	Click Edit [image] Paste.

9	Replace the first brace from the line of code with a period.

10Choose the VBA code that is equivalent to the PerfectScript code from the list.

11Type End with at the end of all the code and within the Public Sub.

 Related topics


To copy Quattro Pro macros to a VBA code module

1	Open the file containing the Quattro Pro macro.

2	Select the macro.

3	Click Edit [image] Copy.

4	Click Tools [image] Visual Basic [image] Visual Basic Editor.

5	In the Project explorer Docker window, double-click VBAProject (NoteBk1) [image] Quattro Pro objects [image] ThisNotebook in the list of categories.

6	In the Notebok1 code module window, type Public Sub and the name of the sub.

7	Within the Public Sub, type Application.PerfectScript.

8	Click Edit [image] Paste.

9	Replace the first brace from the line of code with a period.

10Choose the VBA code that is equivalent to the Quattro Pro code from the list.

11Type End with at the end of your code and within the Public Sub.

 Related topics


To play a VBA macro

1	Click Tools [image] Visual Basic [image] Play.

2	Choose VBAProject(NoteBk) from the Macros in list box.

3	Choose a macro from the Macro name list box.

4	Click Run.

 Tip

•	You can also play a VBA macro by clicking the Play button on the Visual Basic toolbar.

 Related topics


Debugging and editing a VBA macro

You can debug VBA macros. Debugging lets you step through code line by line to ensure that a macro executes properly. For example, if you are at a point in the code where a variable is about to be assigned a value, you can step into this line of code to determine the value of the variable at runtime.

You can also edit a VBA macro. Editing a macro involves going directly to start of the code, whereas debugging lets you step through each line of the code.

 How to


To debug a VBA macro

1	Click Tools [image] Visual Basic [image] Play.

2	Choose a macro from the Macro name list box.

3	Click Step into.

4	In Microsoft Visual Basic, click Debug [image] Step into.

5	Modify the code.

 Note

•	After you click Step into, you can position the pointer over a specific variable to determine the value of the variable. For more information about debugging in VBA, see the Microsoft Visual Basic Help in the Visual Basic Editor.

 Related topics


To edit a VBA macro

1	Click Tools [image] Visual Basic [image] Play.

2	Choose a macro from the Macro name list box.

3	Click Edit.

4	Edit the code as necessary.

 Note

•	For more information about editing VBA, see the Microsoft Visual Basic Help in the Visual Basic Editor.

 Related topics


Using the PerfectScript class to change a Quattro Pro document

The PerfectScript class lets you automate specific and repetitive tasks. The members of the PerfectScript class are the product commands used in conjunction with the PerfectScript language. You can change a Quattro Pro document using the PerfectScript class.

 How to


To change a Quattro Pro document using the PerfectScript class

1	Click Tools [image] Visual Basic [image] Visual Basic Editor.

2	In the Project explorer Docker window, double-click VBAProject (NoteBk1) [image] Quattro Pro objects [image] ThisNotebook in the list of categories.

3	In the Notebok1 code module window, type Public Sub and the name of the sub.

4	Below End Sub, type Private Sub and the name of the sub.

5	Press ENTER.

You will notice that VBA automatically adds End Sub to you code

6	Within the Private Sub, type PerfectScript. and choose the necessary commands.

7	Within the Public Sub, type the name of the Private Sub.

 Notes

•	If you declare the first method as private, you will not be able to run it from Quattro Pro.

•	For more information about VBA, see the Microsoft Visual Basic Help in the Visual Basic Editor.

 Related topics


Working in Developer mode

You can start Quattro Pro to work in Developer mode. Developer mode adds special properties to property menus and lets you use the shortcut key Ctrl + M, which varies in function depending on the current program state. In most instances, Ctrl + M restores the standard Quattro Pro application bar and input line. In Developer mode, you can modify property settings or change the title displayed in the Quattro Pro title bar. Additional properties of drawn objects in a chart or map window let you read or change property settings with macro commands, link commands, and spreadsheet functions (Name property). You do not have to be in Developer mode to change or read these property settings; macro commands can always access them.

You can also control whether users can access object property settings.

 How to


To start Quattro Pro in Developer mode

1	On the Windows taskbar, click Start [image] Run.

2	Type the Quattro Pro command with its path, followed by a space and /d.

For example, qpw.exe /d.

 Related topics


To modify the title bar in Developer mode

1	Click Tools [image] Settings.

2	In the list of categories, double-click Workspace, Application, and click the Developer options.

3	Type a new title in the Application title box.

 Related topics


To modify the properties of a chart or map object in Developer mode

•	Click the Property button on the toolbar.

 Related topics


To disable access to property settings in Developer mode

1	Click Tools [image] Settings.

2	In the list of categories, double-click Workspace, Application, and click the Developer options.

3	Enable the No option.

 Tip

•	To enable property settings after disabling them, press Ctrl + M in all states other than debug mode.

 Related topics


Recording macros using relative and absolute cell references

By default, addresses in macro commands use absolute cell addressing like A1 and C6. You can record absolute cell references. However, you can also record macro commands that use relative references so you can play the macro in different parts of a notebook or in different notebooks. For more information on absolute and relative cell addresses, see "Absolute and relative cell addresses."

 How to


To record a macro using relative or absolute cell references

1	Click Tools [image] Macro [image] Options.

2	Enable one of the following options:

•	Relative

•	Absolute

 Related topics


Attaching macros to notebooks and buttons

Quattro Pro lets you attach macros to notebooks. A macro attached to a notebook can play when you open or close the notebook.

You can also attach a macro to a button. The button plays the macro. You can link a button you create to a macro script.

You can attach a macro to a keystroke. Macros attached to keystrokes are activated when you press the keystroke.

You can use the macro buttons you create to display the dialog boxes you create in Quattro Pro. For information about creating dialog boxes, see "Working with custom dialog boxes and controls."

Once you create a macro button, you can change the button properties by modifying the box type, border color, protection, and button name.

You can also attach a Quattro Pro or PerfectScript macro to a customized a command. For example, you can create a toolbar button and display it on any of the toolbars. When you click the button, the macro executes.

 How to


To attach a macro to a notebook

1	Right-click the top-left cell of the macro.

2	Click Name cells.

3	Type one of the following in the Name box:

•	_nbstartmacro [image] creates a startup macro that plays when you open the notebook

•	_nbexitmacro [image] runs a macro when you close the notebook

•	any block name (for example, "Fred" could be the name of a macro stored in a block)

4	Click Add.

5	Click Close.

 Tip

•	You can also create a startup macro that plays when you open the notebook by typing \0 (backslash zero).

 Related topics


To create a macro button

1	Click Insert [image] Form control [image] Push button.

2	Click the spreadsheet.

3	Drag the button to position it on the spreadsheet.

You can also
Display a label on a macro button	Right-click the button, and click Selection properties. Click the Label text tab. In the Enter text box, type the text you want to display on the button.
Attach a macro button to a URL address	Right-click the button, and click Selection properties. Click the Macro tab. Click Link to URL. In the Button URL dialog box, type the URL address in the URL box.
 Tips

•	Clicking the spreadsheet creates a button at the default size. If you want to create a custom size button, drag to create the button.

•	You can also create a macro button by opening the Form Controls flyout on the Drawing tools toolbar and clicking the Push button tool.

 Related topics


To link a button to a macro

1	Right-click a button, and click Selection properties.

2	Click the Macro tab.

3	In the Enter macro box, type { (an opening brace), the macro command name, and } (a closing brace).

 Note

•	The maximum length for a macro command name is 200 characters.

 Related topics


To attach a macro to a keystroke

1	Select the starting cell of the macro.

2	Click Insert [image] Name [image] Name cells.

3	In the Name box, type ' (an apostrophe) and \ (a backslash), followed by a letter of the alphabet.

4	Click Add.

 Note

•	Macros assigned to keystrokes play by holding down Ctrl + Shift and the letter assigned to the name. Avoid using the same alphabet letters already assigned to shortcuts in the application. For more information on keyboard shortcuts, see "Quattro Pro keyboard shortcuts."

 Related topics


To link a macro button to a dialog box

1	Right-click the macro button, and click Selection properties.

2	Click the Macro tab.

3	Click Execute dialog.

4	In the Execute dialog dialog box, choose a dialog box from the Active dialog list.

5	Type a cell reference in the Result cell box.

After the dialog box is closed, this cell contains 1 or 0. The value 1 means the dialog box was closed by clicking OK; the value 0 means it was closed by clicking Cancel.

6	Type a cell reference in the Values range box:

Specify the cells that contain initial settings for the dialog box. When the dialog box is closed, its final settings are written into these cells.

 Tip

•	You can also select a cell reference by clicking the Range picker tool.

 Related topics


To modify a macro button

1	Right-click a macro button, and click Selection properties.

2	Click one of the following tabs:

•	Border color [image] changes the color around the outside of the button

•	Box type [image] changes the thickness of the line around the button or applies a shadow effect

•	Protection [image] locks the button, preventing users from moving or changing the button when protections are set at the spreadsheet level

•	Object name [image] changes the button's name (used when referring to the button in a macro)

•	Print [image] enables the printing of chart objects on the spreadsheet.

•	Label text [image] changes the name displayed on the label

•	Macro [image] changes the button activation, URL link, or dialog box that displays when clicking the button

3	Modify any settings.

 Related topics


To attach a macro to a toolbar button

1	Click Tools [image] Customize.

2	In the list of categories, double-click Workspace, Customize, and click Commands.

3	Choose Macros from the list box.

4	Choose a button graphic from the list.

5	Click the Macro command category tab.

6	Enable one of the following options:

•	Quattro Pro macro

•	PerfectScript macro

7	Type the macro in the Enter macro box.

8	Click the Appearance tab, and type a name in the Caption box.

9	Click the General tab, and type text to use as the button's Tool Tip in the Tooltip help box.

 Related topics


To add a macro button to the toolbar area

1	Click Tools [image] Customize.

2	In the list of categories, double-click Workspace, Customize, and click Commands.

3	Choose Macros from the list box.

4	Select a macro button you want to add to the toolbar area.

5	Drag the macro button to the appropriate toolbar.

 Related topics


Playing macros

You can play a Quattro Pro macro from the menu or by using the macro buttons on a customized toolbar. For information about creating customized toolbars, see "Working with toolbars."

Playing a PerfectScript macro is similar to playing a Quattro Pro macro. However, PerfectScript macros cannot be used for startup or exit macros.

You can have a play a macro each time you open or close a notebook. For example, Quattro Pro can enter the current date and time when you open a notebook. You can also play a macro each time you start Quattro Pro.

You may want to have Quattro Pro launch a macro whenever a user opens a particular notebook. When you open a file that contains a PerfectScript or Quattro Pro native startup macro, the macro launches as soon as you open the file. For your convenience, Quattro Pro displays a message alerting you that the file contains this kind of macro. Quattro Pro can have the same macro startup every time a user launches Quattro Pro. You can also design an exit macro to make sure any ongoing operations are completed so you can exit the notebook without problems.

 How to


To play a Quattro Pro macro

1	Click Tools [image] Macro [image] Play.

2	Enable the Quattro Pro macro option.

3	Type the location of the macro in the Location box.

 Tips

•	You can also play a Quattro Pro macro by pressing ALT + F2.

•	If the macro is in another notebook, use full linking syntax to specify the macro location (for example, [LIBRARY]A:C26).

 Related topics


To play a PerfectScript macro

1	Click Tools [image] Macro [image] Play.

2	Enable the PerfectScript macro option.

3	Type a filename in the filename box.

 Tip

•	You can play a PerfectScript macro by pressing Alt + F2.

 Related topics


To play a startup or exit macro in a notebook

1	Select the first cell of a macro.

2	Click Insert [image] Name [image] Name cells.

3	 In the Name box, type one of the following:

•	_NBSTARTMACRO [image] plays a startup macro when opening the notebook

•	_NBEXITMACRO [image] plays an exit macro when closing the notebook

4	Click Add.

5	Click Close.

 Note

•	If a notebook is linked to other notebooks, a Links dialog box displays when you open the notebook. To ensure that _NBSTARTMACRO plays correctly in a notebook that contains links, begin the macro with {ESC}. This cancels the Links dialog box.

 Related topics


To assign an existing macro as the startup macro

1	Click Tools [image] Settings.

2	In the list of categories, double-click Workspace, Application, and click Macro.

3	Type a new name in the Startup box.

 Note

•	If you modify the default startup macro name, existing macros named \0 will no longer play automatically. For example, if you set the startup name to AUTOSTART, macros named \0 do not play automatically; they must be renamed AUTOSTART.

 Related topics


To assign a macro to launch automatically when Quattro Pro launches

1	Click Tools [image] Settings.

2	In the list of categories, double-click Workspace, Application, and click File options.

3	Type the name of the macro in the Autoload file box.

 Tip

•	You can also locate the macro by clicking the Browse button in the Autoload file box.

 Related topics


To stop a macro while it is playing

•	Click Ctrl+BREAK.

 Note

•	If Ctrl + BREAK has been disabled with {BREAKOFF}, you cannot stop the macro. If you need to use {BREAKOFF} in the macro, add it as a last step after debugging the macro.

 Related topics


Debugging Quattro Pro macros

Once you create a Quattro Pro macro, you can turn on the macro debugger to check for errors in the code. This allows you to

•	assign standard or conditional breakpoints

•	assign trace cells

•	assign cells for editing

You control when debug mode is active and turn it on or off as needed. You can play a macro while in debug mode. You can also edit Quattro Pro macro cells from the debugger.

If you know that most of a macro is correct, you can use breakpoints to play parts of a macro at full speed and step through other parts that may have problems. There are two types of breakpoint:

•	Standard breakpoints [image] pause the macro at the breakpoint cell

•	Conditional breakpoints [image] pause the macro when the result of a logical formula in the conditional breakpoint cell is true

You can set up to four conditional breakpoints for each notebook. Conditional breakpoints can be extremely valuable. Suppose you have a macro loop that contains date calculations and you want it to pause whenever December is reached. If the date is in cell A5, assign the first conditional breakpoint to a cell containing the following formula:

MONTH(A5)=12

As long as the formula in the condition cell is true (has a value of 1), the macro plays in step-by-step mode. Once the formula is false (has a value of 0), the macro stops playing.

You can set up to four standard breakpoints. Sometimes a problem appears after many repetitions of the same commands in a macro loop. If this is the case, you can set a pass count to indicate how many times to pass through the breakpoint before stopping. The default, 1, stops the macro every time it passes through the breakpoint. Setting it to 2 stops the macro every other pass.

Conditional breakpoints debug a macro using Boolean logic. The debugging process pauses only when a positive result (1) is returned by playing the script.

Macros often affect the contents of one or more cells. By tracing these cells, you can see what the macro is doing. You can specify up to four trace cells whose addresses and current values display during debugging in the debugger window. The debugger updates as the contents of the trace cells change.

 How to


To play a Quattro Pro macro in debug mode

1	Click Tools [image] Macro [image] Debugger.

2	Click Tools [image] Macro [image] Play.

3	Enable the Quattro Pro macro option.

4	Type the location of a macro in the Location box.

5	Click in the debugger window to step through each macro command until you find an error.

You can also
Exit macro debug mode	Click Tools [image] Macro [image] Debugger.
Stop macro before debugging is finished	Click Terminate.
 Tip

•	You can also play a macro in debug mode by pressing Shift + F2.

 Related topics


To set a standard breakpoint in a Quattro Pro macro

1	Click Tools [image] Macro [image] Debugger.

2	Click Tools [image] Macro [image] Play.

3	Enable the Quattro Pro macro option.

4	Type the location of a macro in the Location box.

5	Click OK.

6	Click Breakpoints, and click a breakpoint to set.

7	In the Breakpoint dialog box, type the breakpoint cell reference in the Location box.

8	Type a value in the Pass count box.

9	Click OK, and press the SPACEBAR.

You can also
Remove standard breakpoints	Type 0 in the Pass count box.
Clear all trace cells and breakpoints	Click Reset.
 Tip

•	You can also resume stepping through the macro by clicking Go.

 Related topics


To set a conditional breakpoint in a Quattro Pro macro

1	Click Tools [image] Macro [image] Debugger.

2	Click Tools [image] Macro [image] Play.

3	Enable the Quattro Pro macro option.

4	Type the location of a macro in the Location box.

5	Click OK.

6	Click Conditional, and click a conditional breakpoint.

7	In the Conditional cell dialog box, type the cell reference in the Location box.

8	Click OK.

9	Press the SPACEBAR.

 Tip

•	You can also resume stepping through the macro by clicking Go.

 Related topics


To set a trace cell for a Quattro Pro macro

1	Click Tools [image] Macro [image] Debugger.

2	Click Tools [image] Macro [image] Play.

3	Enable the Quattro Pro macro option.

4	Type the location of a macro in the Location box.

5	Click OK.

6	Click Trace, and click a trace cell.

7	In the Trace cell dialog box, type the trace cell reference in the Location box.

8	Click OK.

 Related topics


To edit macro cells from the macro debugger

1	Click Tools [image] Macro [image] Debugger.

2	Click Tools [image] Macro [image] Play.

3	Enable the Quattro Pro macro option.

4	Type the location of a macro in the Location box.

5	Click OK.

6	Click Edit.

7	In the Edit cell dialog box, type the edit cell reference in the Cells box.

8	Edit the contents that display in the Content box.

 Related topics


Debugging PerfectScript macros

PerfectScript macros are written with an editor and saved as a source file. The macro compiler creates an object, which it saves in a hidden area of the source (the macro compiler does not create a separate object file). When you save a source file, the object is destroyed. It is recreated each time the source file is compiled. A compiled source file (macro) contains instructions that are executed when you play the macro.

A macro compiler is used to compile or "translate" macros so that WordPerfect Office applications can play them. Macros in PerfectScript are compiled when you record, play, or save them. The tool used for compiling PerfectScript macros is the PerfectScript Debugger.

Compilation errors

Sometimes, when you type or edit a macro, errors are created. For example, if you mistype a word, when you compile the macro, a compile-time syntax error displays a syntax error message. The compiler does not recognize typographical errors and guesses that it is a label's calling statement. When the compiler reaches the end of the file and does not find a corresponding label, it displays a syntax error message. The message contains information about the error and its location. The compiler makes a best guess and may not always be accurate. The compiler identifies syntax errors and suggests solutions.

Common syntax errors are caused by

•	missing semicolons between parameters

•	missing parentheses

•	missing double quotation marks

•	missing command in a conditional or loop statement

•	undefined calling statements

•	using commas between parameters instead of semicolons

Run-time errors

Run-time is the same as execution time. Run-time errors occur while the macro is playing. Referencing a variable that has not been assigned a value causes a run-time error. Run-time error messages identify errors that occur while the macro plays and show where the errors occur.

For users familiar with other programming languages such as Visual Basic or C++, the PerfectScript Debugger has many of the same features and buttons found in those language compilers.

Debugging breakpoints

Use breakpoints to indicate locations in the macro where execution of the macro should be interrupted and suspended, and where the debugger should become active. While the macro executes statements, the debugger is mostly inactive, and the debugger state message line displays the text "Macro is running." However, the debugger is not completely disabled. You can interrupt the macro. This causes the debugger to become active, as if there were a breakpoint at the point where the macro is currently executing. Breakpoint commands are also available while the macro is running, so that you can add and remove breakpoints.

You can stop a macro at any line, DLL call, or other place in the macro. A dialog box displays the labels, functions, procedures, and variables being passed, so that you can check them. All breakpoints allow a message to be logged to the debugger event log.

The PerfectScript Debugger automatically creates three breakpoints: Macro Start, Macro End, and Error. It marks the breakpoints it adds with an exclamation mark (!), which can be removed if desired.

Debug options

When the debugger stops at a macro statement, it stops before the indicated statement executes. The PerfectScript Debugger provides the following options to continue macro execution:

 How to


To play a PerfectScript macro in debug mode

1	Click Tools [image] Macro [image] Debugger.

2	Click Tools [image] Macro [image] Play.

3	Enable the PerfectScript macro option.

4	Type a filename in the Filename box.

5	Click OK.

6	In the PerfectScript debug dialog box, click Debug and choose one of the following menu commands:

•	Continue [image] continues executing the macro until the next breakpoint

•	Step into [image] executes the next statement

•	Step over [image] executes the label or routine call without stopping until debugging is complete. This will stop the macro at the next statement in the current label or routine.

•	Step out [image] executes the macro until the next return is encountered, if you have entered a routine or label

•	Run to cursor [image] executes to the line below the cursor in the macro source list

•	Skip to cursor [image] skips a series of statements without executing them; if some statements need to be repeated, sets the next statement to be executed by the Debugger, without executing any statements between the current point and the new line.

•	Animate [image] repeats the next Continue or Step command until you stop it, or until the macro ends. Between each command, the Debugger displays for the amount of time you specify in the Settings dialog box.

 Notes

•	Use the Skip to cursor menu command with extreme caution, since skipping to a line that is not within the same label or routine could cause the internal macro execution to become invalid, which will almost certainly result in execution failure.

•	You need a .wcl file in the same folder as the PerfectScript macro file. For information on creating a .wcl file see "To create a .wcl file."

 Related topics


To set a breakpoint in PerfectScript macros

1	Click Tools [image] Macro [image] Debugger.

2	Click Tools [image] Macro [image] Play.

3	Enable the PerfectScript macro option.

4	Type a filename in the Filename box.

5	Click OK.

6	In the Debugger dialog box, click Debug [image] Breakpoints [image] Edit.

7	In the Edit breakpoints dialog box, click the Location and condition tab.

8	Choose the type of breakpoint you want from the Type list box.

9	Click one of the following buttons:

•	Add [image] creates a new breakpoint

•	Update [image] updates an existing breakpoint

 Tip

•	You can add a line number breakpoint by double-clicking the line in the macro source list where you want the macro to stop.

 Related topics


Customizing application settings using macros

As the application you create may affect standard settings on the desktop, it is a good idea to save and reset the user's environment settings. You can include extra code in the macro to restore the original settings once the user exits the application. You can also update links to other notebooks and objects using linking parameters.

You can customize macros using self-modifying (or dynamic) macro codes. Self-modifying macros either alter all or part of the macro when playing.

 How to


To save and reset application defaults

When you develop a Quattro Pro application, it is usually best to store the user's environment settings.

If you create a custom application in Quattro Pro that changes a user's environment settings, it is a good idea to include macro code that saves the user's current settings and restores them when the user exits the application. You can save the current settings with the following macro commands:

{LET:A1,PROPERTY("Application.Display")}

{LET:A2,PROPERTY("Application.International")}

{LET:A3,PROPERTY("Application.Macro")}

{LET:A4,PROPERTY("Application.File_Options")}

{LET:A5,PROPERTY("Application.General")}

To change the settings, you can use macro commands like the following:

{Application.Display "none,Yes,Yes,Yes,A..B:A1..B2,Yes,Yes,yes"}

{Application.International "$;Quattro Pro/Windows;Prefix;Signed;Windows Default;MM/DD/YY (MM/DD);HH:MM:SS (HH:MM);Quattro Pro;""English, North American (EN)"";No;Canada (English)'}

{Application.File_Options "H:\;;QPW;Yes;20;No;Yes;Yes;H:\Program Files\Corel\\Template\Custom QP Templates;20;No"}

{Application.Macro "Both;No;Quattro Pro - DOS;\0;No"}

{Application.General "Yes;No;Yes;Yes;500;No;Yes;Yes;Yes;Yes;Down"}

Finally, to restore the settings, use these macro commands:

{Application.Display +:A1}

{Application.International +:A2}

{Application.Macro +:A3}

{Application.File_Options +:A4}

{Application.General +:A5}

 Related topics


To use the active selection within a macro

PROPERTY("Active_Block.Selection") returns the address of the currently selected cells as an address and can be used within macro commands. The following macros set the print selection and create a named cell from the active cells:

Print_Block	{Print.Block PROPERTY("Active_Block.Selection")}

Name_Blk	{BlockName.Create TestBlk", PROPERTY("Active_Block.Selection")}

 Related topics


To update links with macros

To pass linking parameters such as "Open Supporting," "Update References," or "None," you must spell out the entire parameter in the {FileOpen} macro command, as follows:

{FileOpen "TEST.QPW, "Open Supporting"}

{FileOpen "TEST.QPW, "Update References"}

{FileOpen "TEST.QPW, "None"}

 Related topics


To create self-modifying macros

You can use macro commands and text formulas to create self-modifying macros (also called dynamic macros) that alter themselves while playing. For example, to save the active notebook as acctx.qpw, where x is a value stored in cell A5, type the following text formula into a cell:

+"{FileSaveAs ""ACCT"&@STRING(A5,0)&".QPW""}"

The result of this formula plays as a macro command. For example, if cell A5 contains the value 5 from the previous example, Quattro Pro plays {FileSaveAs "ACCT5.QPW"}. If cell A5 changes to 10 and the notebook recalculates, Quattro Pro plays {FileSaveAs "ACCT10.QPW"}.

You can also use macro commands to change a portion of the macro while it is playing. The next example shows a macro that uses {GET} to convert user keystrokes into macro actions:

cell_type	b

type_indic	{INDICATE UPPER(CELLPOINTER("type"))}

{LET cell_type,cellpointer("type")}

{IF cell_type="l"}{INDICATE LABEL}

{IF cell_type="b"}{INDICATE BLANK}

{IF cell_type="v"}{INDICATE VALUE}{GET next_key}

{IF UPPER(next_key)="{ESC}"}{BRANCH clear_indic}

next_key	{Esc}{BRANCH type_indic}

clear_indic	{INDICATE}{QUIT}

You can use these concepts to create powerful macros that completely change themselves based on their environment.

 Related topics


Reference: Using macros

There are three types of macros: Quattro Pro native macros, PerfectScript macros, and Visual Basic for Applications (VBA) macros. It is important to understand all three types of macros before choosing a macro that best suits your needs. Some aspects that you can look at are the differences between the macros and the syntax of a macro.

 How to


Additional macro resources

For a complete listing and category breakdown of available macro commands, see Quattro Pro Macros Help, which is located in the reference information section of the Quattro Pro online help.

For information about the list of available programming commands, see PerfectScript Programming Macros Help, which can be accessed from the WordPerfect Office Macro Command Center.

The WordPerfect Office Software Developer's Kit (SDK) is a set of tools that lets software developers customize WordPerfect Office applications for commercial or business use. The SDK includes the online Help for the SDK, OLE automation samples, PerfectScript tools, code generation wizards for third-party add-ons, utilities to monitor events, and a file format parsing tool. For information about acquiring a WordPerfect Office Software Developer's Kit, visit Corel Partners.

 Related topics


Choosing a macro creation tool

Quattro Pro provides several built-in scripting tools to create macros:

•	Quattro Pro macros are stored in notebook cells. Use this type of macro when a task is performed within Quattro Pro.

•	PerfectScript macros are stored in a .wcm file. This type of macro is useful when you want to automate tasks with several notebooks or interact with other WordPerfect Office applications, such as WordPerfect. For example, you can update Quattro Pro data in a WordPerfect report. For information about using PerfectScript macros in Quattro Pro, see "Recording and editing PerfectScript macros."

•	Visual Basic for Applications (VBA) lets you develop scripts that are saved within specific projects using a robust version of the Visual Basic programming language. You can access the VBA Editor from within Quattro Pro. For information about using VBA with Quattro Pro, see "Integrating Visual Basic for Applications with WordPerfect Office."

The simplest way to create a macro is to record the keystrokes in Quattro Pro. You can also write a macro to include non-recordable tasks. For example, you can define a macro to play until a certain event happens or include a comment to prompt users to enter specific data.

 Related topics


Comparing Quattro Pro macros with PerfectScript

Quattro Pro macros and PerfectScript use similar command syntax. There are, however, some major differences in the two scripting tools:

Quattro Pro macros	PerfectScript macros
Are stored in notebooks or cells	Are stored in .wcm macro files
Are created and edited in the notebook	Are created and edited in WordPerfect
Can be played from a library notebook	Are played from the source folder
Can use shortcut names for playing	Cannot play from shortcut names
Play only in Quattro Pro	Play in any WordPerfect Office application
Use blank lines to separate macros	Use blank lines to separate commands and subroutines
Use commands and arguments	Use commands and parameters (which contain arguments)
The following table presents the major syntactical differences between both macro tools:

Quattro Pro syntax	PerfectScript syntax
Command has curly braces	No braces around command
No parentheses around argument list	Parentheses required around parameter list
Object and property separated by period	Object and property separated by underscore
Arguments separated by commas	Arguments separated by semicolons
 Related topics


Syntax examples of Quattro Pro macros

Quattro Pro macro syntax uses the following syntax format:

{CONTENTS E15, F15, G15}

The command name CONTENTS is the exact name of the command. Arguments are values providing instructions to the command. Not all macro commands require arguments, but when they do, they require specific information. For example, {BEEP} is a macro command without arguments. Many command equivalents contain a period (.) in their command name , for example {Search.Find "3rd Quarter Profits}.

PerfectScript uses the following syntax format:

GraphGallery(GraphStyle:"3dbar";ColorScheme:"Tangerine")

The command name GraphGallery indicates the feature the command activates. This particular example launches the Chart Gallery and selects a 3-D bar chart with a tangerine color scheme. Some commands are made up of only a command name, such as FileOpenDlg(). Parameters provide more information about the command, such as which options of a feature are active. Parameters are always enclosed in parentheses; for example, Backup(State:On!). A semicolon is the separator mark between parameters in a command.

For more information about Quattro Pro syntax, see "Macro syntax and arguments."

To get more information about recording and attaching macros to toolbars, notebooks, and controls, see "Using macros."

 Related topics


Understanding Quattro Pro macro syntax

Macro commands are like spreadsheet functions: they have specific grammatical rules, or syntax. The basic syntax is

{COMMANDNAME Argument1,Argument2, Argument3,...}

COMMANDNAME is the name of the command.

Arguments are values. Not all macro commands require arguments; when they do, they require a specific type of information.

The following are some examples of macro commands:

{Query.Criteria_Table B27..B29}

{BlockCopy A1,A2..A37}

{Search.Find "3rd Quarter Profits"}

{GETNUMBER "How old are you?",AGE}

{CONTENTS E15,F15,5}

Quattro Pro syntax requires that you type the entire macro command in a single cell. The following syntax rules for macro commands also apply:

QP syntax must include	Examples
Opening and closing braces{}	{BEEP 3}
COMMANDNAME(space)Argument1	{BlockCopy A1}
Commas or semicolons between arguments	{CONTENTS E15,F15,5}
Correct argument types	{GETLABEL hello world, A4} where "hello world" is not a valid string type
Quotation marks around punctuation or spaces	{GETLABEL "Hello,world",A4}
Type command in upper/lower case	GETLABEL = getlabel
One or more commands for each cell	{BEEP}{GETLABEL "Hello, world",A4}{QUIT}
If a setting contains spaces, punctuation, or quotation marks, enclose it within double quotation marks (for example, "Prefix, ""Windows Default"",",No").

 Related topics


Understanding arguments

Arguments in macro commands, like those used with spreadsheet functions, require specific information to be supplied with the command. There are four types of arguments: numbers, strings, locations, and conditions.

Number arguments	Examples
Any numeric value, entered as a number	2 or 0.45
A formula resulting in a number	A3*15
A cell address with a numeric value or formula	C10, where C10 contains a number or formula
A named block with a numeric value or formula	C10, where C10 contains a valid number or formula
String arguments	Examples
A text string, such as an actual string	"Corel"
A reference to a cell or block containing a label	A1..A4
A property separated by a comma (,)	"Currency, 2" (This also applies to command settings separated by a comma)
A formula resulting in a label	@UPPER("hello ")
Location arguments	Examples
A block name	INTEREST refers to a cell block C5-C15
Block coordinates with more than one cell	A1,A1..A4 or A..B:C4..D22
A block relative reference of more than one cell	[]C(0)R(0),[]P(-2):C(0)R(22) or []C(0)R(0)..C(3)R(10)
Coordinates for noncontiguous blocks	(A1,B1..B7,C1..C7) or (A1,B:C27..C52)
A label or text formula in any of these options	+"A"&"2" which results in A2
Condition arguments	Examples
A formula that evaluates to true or false	+C4>500
Some commands accept a combination or choice of argument types. For example, {LET} stores either a label or a number in a cell, depending on the argument type.

You can use argument suffixes in a command to specify a value or label entry. Using :string (or :s) assures a label entry, and :value (:v) ensures a value entry (if the entry is a valid number). In the following example, the first example enters the value 7 into a new_block, while the second example enters a label into a new_block:

{LET new_block,3+4:value}

{LET new_block,3+4:string}

For information about PerfectScript syntax, see "Choosing a macro creation tool."

For information about using relative cell references, see "Recording macros using relative and absolute cell references."

 Related topics


Integrating Visual Basic for Applications with WordPerfect Office

You can use Microsoft Visual Basic for Applications (VBA) with WordPerfect Office. VBA is an object-oriented programming language that lets you create VBA macros to automate tasks. You can, for example, create a macro in WordPerfect that changes the color of headings in a spreadsheet. VBA is not part of the typical install of WordPerfect Office. To use VBA, you should do a custom install and enable Microsoft Visual Basic for Applications.

Event-driven programming

Visual Basic for Applications is an event-driven programming language. Most of the code you create is written to respond to an event. An event is an action recognized by VBA; for example, clicking a button or choosing an option from a list box. Unlike traditional procedural programming, in which the program starts at line 1 and executes line by line, event-driven programming executes code in response to events.

The difference between PerfectScript and VBA

Previously, you could use the PerfectScript language only to automate specific tasks. Both product commands and programming commands are used in conjunction with the PerfectScript language. The PerfectScript language is useful for developing simple macros. VBA offers more flexibility and power. When you use VBA to create macros, you are assisted by the Visual Basic compiler. The compiler helps you by providing context-sensitive help when you are coding a VBA macro. You can combine the power of VBA with the PerfectScript product commands to create powerful macros. You have to use the Visual Basic Editor to create VBA macros; however, PerfectScript macros are developed from the WordPerfect Editor. You can access the Visual Basic Editor only when you are working in an active document.

The PerfectScript class

All product commands used in WordPerfect, Quattro Pro, and Corel Presentations can be used in VBA macros. You must call the PerfectScript object to access a product command. An object is an instance of a class. All objects have properties; for example, the name of a document is a property that belongs to the document object. You can set or change an object's properties by calling certain methods. A method performs a specific action, such as inserting a table into a document. You can, for example, close a document by calling the close method, or you can save a document by calling the save method. The term class is a VBA programming term and means a collection of related methods, which are referred to as class members. The product commands are the class members that belong to the PerfectScript class. WordPerfect, Quattro Pro, and Corel Presentations have their own PerfectScript class because the class members, which are the product commands, are different depending on the application.

All members of the PerfectScript class perform a specific action. For more information about product commands, see the macros command list "QP MACRO LIST".

 Note

•	Although there may be some differences, the syntax for the product commands and the PerfectScript members is usually the same.

•	Working in the VBA Editor

•	In most cases, the name of the class is the same as the name of the object. WordPerfect Office has a document object. The document object is the host application that is open. In Quattro Pro, the name of the document object is ThisNotebook. In WordPerfect, the name of the document object is ThisDocument. In Corel Presentations, the name of the document object is ThisSlideShow.

•	You can create a new object, such as a dialog box, which is known as a form. You can add controls, such as a check box or a text box. You can set the object's properties in the property dialog box located in the Visual Basic Editor. You can also set the object's properties at run time by programming a method. For example, you can color a form red when you click on it. For more information about setting an object's properties, see the Microsoft Visual Basic Help in the Visual Basic Editor.

•	An experienced programmer can work directly with the Windows API (Application Programming Interface) and, for example, be able to determine how much disk space is available or gain access to the system's time and date values. Most VBA users will want to automate specific and repetitive tasks.

•	Accessing an application from another application's macro

•	You can access and change an application from another application's macro. For example, you can create and use a Quattro Pro object from a WordPerfect VBA macro. This allows you to change and save a Quattro Pro document from a WordPerfect VBA macro.

•	Using VBA macros

•	You can store a VBA macro in the document by saving the document. Once you have saved the document, you can close and reopen the document and access the macro. After you have developed the macro, you should debug it. You can step through each macro line by line. This is a useful exercise to ensure that the macro will have the desired outcome. A project macro is not available if the document is closed. After you have debugged the macro, you can play the macro.

•	Assigning security

•	When you open WordPerfect Office documents created by other users, be aware that a document could contain a macro virus. As a screening measure, VBA includes a security mechanism to help manage document security. You determine the security level used when opening or loading documents and add-ins containing embedded VBA macros. The Security dialog box lets you review the assigned security level and your collection of trusted certificates. You can trust a certificate that you know comes from a reputable source. VBA developers can attach their digital signature to a macro that creates a certificate when the document is opened. That a document has a digital signature does not automatically ensure the document is free of viruses, so the onus is on you to find out if the developers scans for viruses before adding their certificate to your trusted sources.

•	There are three security level settings available: High, Medium and Low. With the High setting, you can open a signed VBA project from a trusted source with the macros enabled. Otherwise, the document is opened with the macros disabled. The default security setting is Medium. A Medium setting indicates that a warning displays if you try to load a VBA document that is not on your trusted source list. You can then choose to open the document with the macros enabled or disabled. The Low setting allows you to open all VBA projects without applying any security (which disables all virus protection).

•	If you want to create your own certificate (in situations where you do not have formal certification), you can run the seflcert.exe that installs with Visual Basic for Applications. For more information about Visual Basic for Applications security, open the Security dialog box (click Tools [image] Visual Basic [image] Security) and click the What's this Help.

 Related topics


Setting macro breakpoints

The following macro includes a loop that continuously increments a single cell called COUNTER.

counter	0

Is_done	+COUNTER>=100

\m	{LET counter,0}

again	{; increment counter}

{LET counter,counter+1}~

{BRANCH again}

A pass count specifies the number of loops that occur before reaching a breakpoint. If you specify the cell containing {BRANCH again} as the first breakpoint and leave the pass count at 1, the macro stops at the {BRANCH} command each time it goes through the loop. When you click Go, the macro continues, incrementing the counter cell by one. In the top of the debugger window, the selector highlights the {BRANCH} command, indicating that it is the next command.

If you specified a pass count of 5 for the first breakpoint in the above example, then every time you click Go, five loops occur, and the counter increments from 0 to 5, to 10, and so on.

The cell Is_done contains a logical formula. Is_done is false (has a value of 0) until 100 or more loops occur. If this cell is specified as a conditional cell, the macro pauses when the counter reaches 100.

 Related topics


Example of a VBA project macro in Quattro Pro

1	Click Tools [image] Visual Basic [image] Visual Basic Editor.

2	In the Project Docker window double-click VBAProject (NoteBk) in the list of categories.

3	Click Insert [image] User form.

4	Modify the form so that it resembles the following diagram:

5	Change the name of the TextBox control to NameBox as illustrated in the following list:

Command Button - CommandButton1

TextBox - NameBox

6	Double-click the CommandButton1 control to create a new method for the UserForm1 class, and type the following lines of code in the CommandButton1_Click method:

Private Sub CommandButton1_Click()

Dim myname, Msg As String

myname = NameBox

Msg = "Hello " & myname

MsgBox Msg

End

End Sub

This code responds to the event that occurs when the command button is clicked.

7	Open the Quattro Pro objects folder in the Project Docker window.

8	Double-click ThisNotebook.

9	Type the following lines of code in the Notebk1 editor window:

Public Sub ShowForm()

End Sub

This code will add a new method to the ThisDocument class.

10	Type the following line of code in the ShowForm method:

Public Sub ShowForm()

UserForm1.Show

End Sub

 Note

•	If you declare ShowForm as a private method, you will not be able to run the macro from Quattro Pro.

 Tip

•	You can change all of the control's attributes, including the name of the control, in the Properties docker window.

 Related topics


Example of a VBA macro that will manipulate a Quattro Pro document

In the following procedure, a Quattro Pro object, called myQp, will be created. This object will be used to create an inventory table in a Quattro Pro document.

For the purpose of this procedure, a simple inventory table was created in a Quattro Pro document. You can run this macro from WordPerfect. For testing purposes, make sure that Quattro Pro is open. For more information about VBA, see Microsoft Visual Basic Help in the Visual Basic Editor.

1	Open WordPerfect.

2	Click Tools [image] Visual Basic [image] Visual Basic Editor.

3	Double-click on Project (Document1) in the Project explorer Docker window.

4	Click Tools [image] Reference.

5	Enable the Corel [image] QuattroPro type library check box.

6	Click OK.

7	Open the WordPerfect objects folder in the Project explorer Docker window.

8	Double-click ThisDocument, and type the following line of code in the code module window:

Public Sub CreateQPTable()

End Sub

This code adds a new method to the ThisDocument class.

9	Type the following lines of code in the CreateQPTable method:

Public Sub CreateQPTable()

Dim myQp as Object

Set myQp = CreateObject("QuattroPro.PerfectScript")

If myQp Is Nothing Then

MsgBox "The Quattro Pro Object is invalid", vbCritical

End If

This code creates a Quattro Pro PerfectScript object. After the object is created, it is tested to determine if memory has been allocated to it. A message informs you if the object is invalid.

10	Type the following lines of code in the CreateQPTable method:

Public Sub CreateQPTable()

Dim myQp as Object

Set myQp = CreateObject("QuattroPro.PerfectScript")

If myQp Is Nothing Then

MsgBox "The Quattro Pro Object does not exist", vbCritical

End If

'Populate the Quattro Pro document

myQp.FileNew "FileNew"

myQp.SetCellString "B1", "Jan"

myQp.SetCellString "C1", "Feb"

myQp.SetCellString "D1", "Mar"

myQp.SetCellString "A2", "TVs"

myQp.SetCellString "A3", "VCRs"

myQp.SetCellString "A4", "Radios

End Sub

This code creates a new Quattro Pro document and creates an inventory table.

 Notes

•	Make sure that CreateQPTable is declared public so that you can access this macro from WordPerfect.

•	Every application has an object. Make sure you reference the right object.

 Related topics


Example of using the PerfectScript class to change a Quattro Pro document

The PerfectScript class lets you automate specific and repetitive tasks. The members of the PerfectScript class are the product commands used in conjunction with the PerfectScript language. The following example creates a project macro.

In the following procedure, a new method, called AddInventory, is added to the ThisDocument class. This macro creates an inventory table, populates the table with specific values, and calculates the values. All PerfectScript class members can be accessed only by calling the PerfectScript object, which must be followed by a ".". You can call the FileSave method, which is a PerfectScript class member, by typing: "PerfectScript.FileSave".

1	Click Tools [image] Visual Basic [image] Visual Basic Editor.

2	In the Project explorer Docker window, double-click VBAProject (NoteBk1) [image] Quattro Pro objects [image] ThisNotebook in the list of categories.

3	Type the following lines of code in the Notebook1 code module window:

Public Sub AddInventory()

End Sub

This code adds a new method, called AddInventory, to the ThisDocument class.

4	Type the following lines of code to create a private method called CreateTable:

Private Sub CreateTable()

PerfectScript.SetCellString "B1", "Jan"

PerfectScript.SetCellString "C1", "Feb"

PerfectScript.SetCellString "D1", "Mar"

PerfectScript.SetCellString "A2", "TVs"

PerfectScript.SetCellString "A3", "VCRs"

PerfectScript.SetCellString "A4", "Radios"

End Sub

This code creates an inventory table.

5	Type the following lines of code to create a private method called AddValues:

Private Sub AddValues()

'Populate the January Column

PerfectScript.SelectBlock "B2"

PerfectScript.PutCell2 "200"

PerfectScript.SelectBlock "B3"

PerfectScript.PutCell2 "250"

PerfectScript.SelectBlock "B4"

PerfectScript.PutCell2 "350"

'Populate the February Column

PerfectScript.SelectBlock "C2"

PerfectScript.PutCell2 "100"

PerfectScript.SelectBlock "C3"

PerfectScript.PutCell2 "280"

PerfectScript.SelectBlock "C4"

PerfectScript.PutCell2 "340"

'Populate the March Column

PerfectScript.SelectBlock "D2"

PerfectScript.PutCell2 "150"

PerfectScript.SelectBlock "D3"

PerfectScript.PutCell2 "230"

PerfectScript.SelectBlock "D4"

PerfectScript.PutCell2 "490"

End Sub

This code adds numeric values to the inventory table.

6	Type the following lines of code to create a private method called CalculateValues:

Private Sub CalculateValues()

'Calculate the January totals

PerfectScript.SelectBlock "B2..B4"

PerfectScript.QuickFunction "SUM", "B5"

'Calculate the February totals

PerfectScript.SelectBlock "C2..C4"

PerfectScript.QuickFunction "SUM", "C5"

'Calculate the March totals

PerfectScript.SelectBlock "D2..D4"

PerfectScript.QuickFunction "SUM", "D5"

PerfectScript.SetCellString "A5", "Totals:"

End Sub

This code adds the values in each column.

7	Type the following lines of code in the AddInventory method to call the private methods:

Public Sub AddInventory()

CreateTable

AddValues

CalculateValues

End Sub

This code calls all of the private methods that you created.

 Notes

•	If you declare AddInventory as a private method, you will not be able to run it from Quattro Pro.

•	You can access the private methods because you are working in the same class. It is not possible to access a private method from outside of the ThisDocument class.

 Related topics


Example of accessing the system's date and time values

In the following procedure, you have to create a new method called, ShowTime. Next, you will declare two new variables: myTime and myDate. You can use the return value of the Time method to populate the myTime variable. The variable myDate can be populated by the return value of the Date method. You will have to type-cast the two variables [image] myTime and myDate [image] into string values. The easiest way to accomplish this is to declare two new string variables: myStrDate and myStrTime. Use the Str method to convert the contents of myDate and myTime into strings. Display the contents of myStrDate and myStrTime in a Message Box.

The following example creates a project macro.

1	Click Tools [image] Visual Basic [image] Visual Basic Editor.

2	In the Project explorer Docker window, double-click VBAProject (NoteBk1) [image] Quattro Pro objects [image] ThisNotebook in the list of categories.

3	Type the following lines of code in the Notebook1 code module window:

Public Sub ShowTime()

End Sub

This code will add a new method to the ThisDocument class.

4	Type the following new code in the ShowTime method to declare two new variables:

Public Sub ShowTime()

Dim myTime

Dim myDate As Date

End Sub

5	Type the following new code in the ShowTime method to populate the myTime and the myDate variables:

Public Sub ShowTime()

Dim myTime

Dim myDate As Date

myTime = Time

myDate = Date

End Sub

6	Type the following new code in the ShowTime method to convert the two variables to string data types:

Public Sub ShowTime()

Dim myTime

Dim myDate As Date

myTime = Time

myDate = Date

Dim myStrTime, myStrDate, Msg As String

myStrDate = Str(myDate)

myStrTime = Str(myTime)

End Sub

7	Type the following new code in the ShowTime method to populate and display the Msg variable:

Public Sub ShowTime()

Dim myTime

Dim myDate As Date

myTime = Time

myDate = Date

Dim myStrTime, myStrDate, Msg As String

myStrDate = Str(myDate)

myStrTime = Str(myTime)

Msg = "The date is " & myStrDate & " and the time is " & myStrTime

MsgBox Msg

End Sub

 Notes

•	Make sure that ShowTime is declared public so that you can access this macro from Quattro Pro.

•	For the purpose of this procedure, a Message Box was selected to display the date and time; however, you can create a new form and then display the time and date in this form. For more information about VBA, see Microsoft Visual Basic Help in the Visual Basic Editor.

 Related topics


Absolute and relative cell addresses

The following is an example of absolute and relative addressing:

•	Absolute: []A:A1..D10

•	Relative: []P(0):C(0)R(0)..C(4)R(10)

When you record with relative references, the macro records cells in relation to each other, rather than recording exact cell addresses. For example, the macro indicates two cells to the right of the selector, rather than a specific cell. The following example shows how to use absolute and relative cell referencing in macros:

•	Absolute: []$A:$A$1..$D$10

•	Relative: [][]A:A1..D10

Using relative references increases macro portability (letting you use a macro with different notebooks), but hinders readability, since it is harder to track which cells the macro affects. If macros use the spreadsheet function @CELLPOINTER frequently, you can try relative references.

Relative references specify cells as offset from the cell selector. For example, the cell selector's relative reference is []P(0):C(0)R(0).

Reference	Result
([ ])	Specifies that you are referring to the active notebook
P(0):	Indicates the number of spreadsheets from the selector (in this case, zero); it is optional (except when selecting an entire row or column)
C(0)	Indicates the number of columns from the selector
R(0)	Indicates the number of rows from the selector
The cell below the selector is []C(0)R(1), the cell to the right of it is []C(1)R(0), and the cell beneath the selector (on the next spreadsheet) is []P(1):C(0)R(0).

For more information about setting absolute and relative cell references, see "Setting cell addresses."

If [] does not precede a relative reference, the relative reference is offset from the cell containing the macro command, not the cell selector. For example, if {BLANK C(1)R(0)} were stored in A:A16, playing the macro would erase the cell to the right of it (A:B16).

You can precede a relative reference with a colon (:) to affect the same cell, but on the active sheet. For example, if {BLANK :C(1)R(0)} were stored in A:A16, playing it when sheet B is active would erase the cell B:B16.

You can omit C( ) or R( ) to select entire rows or columns. For example, {SELECTBLOCK []P(0):C(0)} selects the column containing the active cell; {SELECTBLOCK []P(0):R(0)} selects the row containing the active cell. To select the three columns to the right of the active cell, use {SELECTBLOCK []P(0):C(1), C(3)}.

Relative references can use negative or positive offsets. For example, if the selector is in cell A2, you could use []C(0)R(-1), C(2)R(1) to specify the cells A1, C3.

 Related topics


Creating spreadsheets

Quattro Pro contains spreadsheets in a notebook. Once you have created a spreadsheet, you can enter data and perform calculations. For example, you can enter a list of items and the cost of each item and then calculate the total cost of all items.

In this section, you'll learn about

•	creating and opening notebooks

•	entering labels and special characters

•	entering values

•	filling cells and spreadsheet tabs automatically

•	creating a series to fill cells

•	restricting and annotating cell data

•	creating simple equations

•	calculating data in rows and columns

•	performing running calculations

For more information about creating spreadsheets, see "Reference: Creating spreadsheets."


Creating and opening notebooks

When you start a new spreadsheet in Quattro Pro, you must first create a notebook. You can create a notebook from a list of project templates or from the default template. Project templates prompt you for data and then format and calculate it automatically. When you create a notebook from the default template, you must format the data yourself and perform your own calculations.

For information about using project templates, see "Working with project templates."

You can also open a notebook or customize the start options to automatically open a specific notebook every time you start Quattro Pro.

For a complete list of custom start options, see "Using startup switches."

 How to


To create a notebook

•	Click File [image] New.

 Related topics


To create a notebook using a project template

1	Click File [image] New from project.

2	Click the Create new tab.

3	Select Quattro Pro from the Categories list box.

4	Choose a project from the Projects list.

5	Click Create.

6	Use the PerfectExpert panel to modify the project.

 Related topics


To open a notebook

1	Click File [image] Open.

2	Choose the driver and folder where the notebook is stored.

3	Click a filename

4	Click Open.

 Note

•	Quattro Pro version 10 and 11 files use the .qpw extension. Earlier versions use .wb3, .wb2, or .wb1 extensions.

 Related topics


To open a specific notebook when starting Quattro Pro

1	Click Start [image] Run on the Windows taskbar.

2	In the Open box, type the Quattro Pro command with its path, followed by a space, and a notebook filename.

For example, qpw.exe "C:\My Documents\MYFILE.QPW starts Quattro Pro and opens MYFILE.QPW.

 Note

•	When you open a file that contains a PerfectScript or Quattro Pro native startup macro, the macro launches as soon as you open the file. However, macros may contain commands that can alter, remove, or corrupt data or files on your system. This type of macro is often referred to as a virus. For your convenience, Quattro Pro displays a message alerting you that the file contains this kind of macro.

 Related topics


Entering labels and special characters

You can create labels in a spreadsheet which, unlike other cell data, cannot be calculated in formulas. A label can be text (address), text with numbers (145 Howard Street), or numbers seen as text (202-555-1212, a phone number). A label can begin with any letter, punctuation mark, or symbol, except the following characters:

Character	Description
/	forward slash
+	plus
-	minus
$	dollar sign
(	opening parenthesis
@	at sign
#	number sign
.	period
=	equals
If you type one of these characters, Quattro Pro treats the information as a formula or value. You can force Quattro Pro to read values as labels by typing an alignment character before the value. For example, to enter (Before Taxes), you would type: "(Before Taxes).

You can insert special characters and symbols that are not on your keyboard, such as icons, phonetic characters, and characters in other languages. Quattro Pro also lets you repeat characters or a series of characters in a cell.

 How to


To create a label

1	Click a cell.

2	Type alphanumeric characters.

3	Press Enter.

 Related topics


To create a label from a value

To create	Do the following
Left-aligned label	Type ' before a value.
Right-aligned label	Type " before a value.
Centered label	Type ^ before a value.
 Tip

•	You can also type an alignment character before a backslash, if you want a label to begin with a backslash, but don't want to repeat the character after it.

 Related topics


To insert special characters and symbols

1	Click a cell.

2	Click Insert [image] Symbol.

3	Choose a character set from the Set list box.

4	Choose a character from the Symbols list.

5	Click Insert.

 Tip

•	You can also insert special characters and symbols by clicking the WP characters button on the property bar.

 Related topics


To repeat a character

1	Click a cell.

2	Type \ (backslash character), and type a character.

3	Press Enter.

 Related topics


To repeat a series of characters in a pattern

1	Click a cell.

2	Type \ (backslash character). and type the set of characters to be repeated.

For example, \abc.

 Related topics


Entering values

A value is a number, formula, date, or time. Quattro Pro determines that data is a value from the characters you type. The data type displays in the application bar.

For information on entering formulas see "Working with formulas."

Numbers entered in cells can consist only of the following:

•	numerals (0 to 9)

•	minus sign (-) for negative numbers

•	plus sign (+) for positive numbers

•	currency symbols; for example, $

•	one decimal point

•	a trailing %

•	an E for scientific notation

When entering numbers, be aware of the following restrictions:

•	Use a minus sign (-), not parentheses, to indicate a negative number. However, if you change the numeric format to currency or a value with a decimal, negative numbers appear in parentheses.

•	Do not include spaces in the entry.

•	If a number does not fit into a cell, it is displayed in exponential format.

•	Use numeric characters, not letters, to represent 1 and 0. For example, do not substitute a lowercase l ("el") for 1 (one) or an uppercase O ("oh") for 0 (zero).

•	Quattro Pro also lets you enter numbers as fractions.

You can enter fractions in a cell. You can enter a date or time, including the current date, in a cell. While Quattro Pro reads dates and times as values, it applies specific formatting and calculation criteria to them depending on the date and time formats you set as defaults. Dates or times can be in many formats, such as 04-04-98, 04/04/98, and 01:42:30 PM.

For information on entering dates prior to 1900 and after 2000, see "Entering dates." You can also automatically enter the current date.

Quattro Pro stores all dates as serial integers and times as decimal fractions, so that it can calculate dates and times as values. The minimum serial integer is -109,571, which represents January 1, 1600; the maximum is 474,816, which represents December 31, 3199. The minimum decimal fraction for time is 0.99999 (for the time 23:59:59) and the maximum is 0.000 (for 00:00:00). The serial integer or decimal fraction appears in the input line when you select a cell.

A cell containing a serial integer mixed with a decimal fraction indicates the date and time. For example, 2.5 represents January 1, 1900 at 12:00 noon.

If a notebook includes many dates, you may want to force specific cells to accept only dates and times. This is particularly useful when you create notebooks that others will use. For information about restricting cell data, see "Restricting and annotating cell data."

 How to


To enter a number

1	Click a cell.

2	Type a number.

3	Press Enter.

 Note

•	You can change the number of decimal places in a value. For more information, see "To change the number of decimal places in a value."

 Related topics


To enter fractions

1	Click a cell.

2	Type a number as a decimal.

3	Press Enter.

4	Click the cell.

5	Click Format [image] Selection properties.

6	Click the Numeric format tab.

7	Choose Fraction from the Numeric formats list.

8	Choose a type from the Fraction list.

 Related topics


To enter a date or time

1	Click a cell.

2	Type a date or time.

3	Press Enter.

 Note

•	For a list of available date and time formats, see "Default date and time formats."

 Related topics


To enter the current date

1	Click a cell.

2	Click Insert [image] Date.

Quattro Pro inserts the short date format specified in the Windows Regional Settings on the Control Panel.

 Tip

•	You can also enter the current date by clicking a cell and pressing Ctrl + D.

 Related topics


To enter a date using the spreadsheet DATE function

1	Click a cell.

2	Click Insert [image] Insert function.

3	Choose Date from the Function category list.

4	Choose DATE from the Function list.

5	Click OK.

6	Type the date (year, month, and day) between parentheses.

7	Press Enter.

 Note

•	For a list of available date formats, see "Default date and time formats."

 Related topics


Filling cells and spreadsheet tabs automatically

Quattro Pro lets you automatically enter repeated labels and functions. Once the initial letters or sequence you are typing is recognized, the data is automatically inserted. As you type a function, the likeliest function displays.

You can fill cells automatically. You can save time by automatically filling cells with a sequence that you start with a seed value.

You can also fill spreadsheet tabs automatically.

 How to


To automatically insert repeated data

1	Click Tools [image] Settings.

2	In the list of categories, double-click Workspaces, Application, and click General.

3	Enable the QuickType check box.

4	Click OK.

5	Type text in a cell.

 Note

•	The blank cells to be filled must be contiguous with the seed value, extending down the column or across the row to the right.

 Related topics


To fill empty cells automatically

1	Select the cells.

2	Click Edit [image] Fill [image] QuickFill.

3	Choose a series from the Series name list box.

4	Choose an element from the Series elements list.

5	In the Fill as area, enable one of the following options:

•	Columns [image] fills to the bottom of the first column of cells, and continues at the top of the second column

•	Rows [image] fills to the end of the first row of cells, and continues at the beginning of the second row

 Tips

•	You can also open the QuickFill dialog box by clicking the QuickFill button on the notebook toolbar.

•	You can create a new series using part of an existing series by modifying the series and saving it under another name.

 Related topics


To fill cells automatically using seed values

1	Type a seed value in a cell.

2	Select the seed value cell and the blank cells you want to fill.

3	Click Edit [image] Fill [image] QuickFill.

 Note

•	For a list of seed values and resulting sequences, see "QuickFill seed values."

 Tip

•	You can also fill cells automatically by clicking the QuickFill button on the notebook toolbar.

 Related topics


To fill spreadsheet tabs automatically

1	Select an empty cell.

2	Click Edit [image] Fill [image] QuickFill.

3	Choose a list series from the Series name list box.

4	Choose an element from the Series elements list.

5	Enable the Tabs option in the Fill as area.

 Tip

•	You can also open the QuickFill dialog box by clicking the QuickFill button on the notebook toolbar.

 Related topics


Creating a series to fill cells

You can create a custom QuickFill series, using your own sequences of values and labels, to use with QuickFill. You can modify, rename, or remove a QuickFill series from the series list. Quattro Pro also lets you add elements from a cell to a QuickFill series.

Quattro Pro also lets you specify rules for filling selected cells. You can create your own custom number and formula series. You can also create your own custom date series. To fill dates and times, you must know the date serial number. For more information about date serial numbers, see "Entering values."

 How to


To create a QuickFill formula series

1	Select an empty cell.

2	Click Edit [image] Fill [image] QuickFill.

3	Click Create.

4	In the Create/modify series dialog box, type a descriptive name in the Series name box.

5	Enable the Formula option in the Series type area.

6	In the Seed value box, type the first number in the series.

This value is used as a constant in the formula. A string seed value is evaluated as zero.

7	Type a formula in the Formula box.

 Tips

•	You can also click Iteration, Seed, and Previous in the Formula definition area to insert the iteration number, seed value, and previous value into the formula. For example, the following formula produces a series that starts with 5 and increases by 5 (5, 10, 15, 20, and so on): #SEED#+(5*#ITER#).

•	You can also open the QuickFill dialog box by clicking the QuickFill button.

 Related topics


To create a QuickFill list series

1	Select an empty cell.

2	Click Edit [image] Fill [image] QuickFill.

3	Click Create.

4	In the Create/modify series dialog box, type a descriptive name in the Series name box.

5	Enable the List option in the Series type area.

If you want the series to start again when every element has been entered once, enable the Repeating check box.

6	Type the first element of the list in the Value box.

7	Click Add.

If you want to insert an element before an existing element, highlight the existing element, type the new element in the Value box, and click Insert.

 Tip

•	You can also open the QuickFill dialog box by clicking the QuickFill button.

 Related topics


To modify a QuickFill series

1	Select an empty cell.

2	Click Edit [image] Fill [image] QuickFill.

3	Select a series from the Series name list box.

4	Click Modify.

5	In the Create/modify series dialog box, change any series options.

 Tip

•	You can also open the QuickFill dialog box by clicking the QuickFill button on the notebook toolbar.

 Related topics


To rename a QuickFill series

1	Click Edit [image] Fill [image] Define QuickFill.

2	Select a series from the Series name list box.

3	Click Rename.

4	In the Rename series dialog box, type the new name in the Series name box.

 Related topics


To delete a QuickFill series

1	Select an empty cell.

2	Click Edit [image] Fill [image] QuickFill.

3	Select a series from the Series name list box.

4	Click Delete.

 Tip

•	You can also open the QuickFill dialog box by clicking the QuickFill button.

 Related topics


To add elements from a cell to a QuickFill series

1	Select an empty cell.

2	 Click Edit [image] Fill [image] QuickFill.

3	Click one of the following buttons:

•	Create [image] adds elements from a list in the notebook to a new series

•	Modify [image] adds elements from a list in the notebook to an existing series

4	In the Create/modify series dialog box, click Extract.

5	In the Extract values dialog box, specify the cells that contain the new series elements.

If you want to replace any existing elements with those in the notebook enable the Override existing values check box.

 Tip

•	You can also open the QuickFill dialog box by clicking the QuickFill button.

 Related topics


To create a custom series to fill cells

1	Select the cells to fill.

2	Click Edit [image] Fill [image] Fill series.

3	In the Start box for the first cell, type a value or date or time serial number.

4	Type a step value in the Step box.

5	Type a stop value in the Stop box.

6	In the Order area, enable one of the following options:

•	Column [image] fills down the columns, starting with the left-most column

•	Row [image] fills across rows, starting with the top row

7	In the Static area, enable one of the following options:

•	Linear (addition) [image] adds the step value to the previous value (defined at first to be the start value)

•	Growth (multiplication) [image] multiplies the step value by the previous value

•	Power (exponentiation) [image] uses the step value as the exponent of the previous value

•	Year [image] increments the series by year

•	Month [image] increments the series by month

•	Week [image] increments the series by a 7-day week

•	Weekday [image] increments the series by week days only

•	Day [image] increments the series by day

•	Hour [image] increments the series by hour

•	Minute [image] increments the series by minute

•	Second [image] increments the series by second

 Note

•	If you select a group of noncontiguous blocks of cells, Quattro Pro fills the cells in the order selected.

 Tips

•	If you want the values to decrease, type a negative number in the Start box and type a stop value that is lower than the start value.

•	To find the serial number of the date or time you want to start the series, type a date or time in a cell on the spreadsheet using one of the recognized date or time formats, press Enter, click on the cell, and view the serial number in the input line. For more information about date and time serial numbers, see "Entering values."

 Related topics


Restricting and annotating cell data

You can restrict a cell so that Quattro Pro read the data in the cell as a specific data type, regardless of what the data is.

Adding comments to cells lets you add notes to explain data without cluttering the spreadsheet. Cells with an attached comment display a red triangle in the upper-right corner. By default, cell comments do not print with a spreadsheet, but you can set up the page view to show and print comments on the spreadsheet. For information about printing comments with the spreadsheet, see "To print cell comments."

Once you have created a cell comments, you can change its attributes.

 How to


To restrict cells

1	Select a cells to restrict.

2	Click Format [image] Selection properties.

3	Click the Constraints tab.

4	In the Data input constraint area, enable one of the following options:

•	General [image] accepts both labels and dates

•	Labels only [image] accepts only labels

•	Dates only [image] accepts only dates

 Related topics


To add a cell comment

1	Click a cell.

2	Click Insert [image] Insert comment.

3	Type the comment.

4	Click outside the comment bubble.

You can also
Read a cell comment	Point to the small red triangle in the upper-right corner of the cell.
Edit a cell comment	Right-click the cell, and click Edit comment.
Delete a cell comment	Right-click the cell, and click Delete comments.
 Tip

•	You can add a non-bubble comment to a cell by typing a semicolon (;) after a value and then typing the comment. You can see the comment on the input line when you click the cell.

 Related topics


To view all cell comments on a spreadsheet

•	Click View [image] Comments.

 Related topics


To change cell comment attributes

1	Right-click the cell, and click Edit comment.

2	Right-click inside the comment bubble, and click Cell comment properties.

 Related topics


Creating simple equations

You can perform simple mathematical operations such as 1+1 directly in a cell. Quattro Pro interprets these equations as formulas and indicates cells with formulas by adding a blue triangle to the bottom-left corner of the cell. Quattro Pro also totals values for you.

Quattro Pro specify to have Quattro Pro identify the forward slash ( / ) as a division sign. For example, when the forward slash is used as a division sign, 4/4 is interpreted as 4 divided by 4, and the result 1 displays. Otherwise, when you type a forward slash, Quattro Pro might assume you are typing a date. For example, 4/4 might be interpreted as the date 04/04.

 How to


To do simple math in cells

1	Type the numbers and math operators in a cell.

For example, type 4500+450.

2	Press Enter.

 Note

•	Do not include commas in numbers.

 Related topics


To total values in a column

1	Click in the first blank cell below and one column to the left of the cells to be totaled.

2	Type total.

3	Press Enter.

 Note

•	This feature is not case sensitive and is language dependent.

 Tip

•	You can also total values in a row by clicking the first blank cell to the right and one row above the cells to be totaled, and typing total. Press Enter.

 Related topics


To have Quattro Pro identify the forward slash (/) as a division sign

1	Click Tools [image] Settings.

2	In the list of categories, double-click Workspaces, Application, and click General.

3	Enable the Mathematical formula entry check box.

 Tip

•	You can also identify the forward slash as a division sign by typing a plus sign (+) before the equation (for example, +4/12).

 Related topics


Calculating data in rows and columns

Using PerfectExpert, you can calculate data in rows and columns. For example, you can add a column, find the average of a list of figures, or find the middle value of either.

You can also perform calculations on individual cells.

Quattro Pro also lets you perform calculations on two rows or columns. For example, you could multiply a quantity column by a unit price column to find the total cost (5 units x $5.00 each = $25.00).

 How to


To calculate data in a single row or column

1	Click Help [image] PerfectExpert.

2	Click Do simple math in the PerfectExpert panel.

3	Click Quick math.

4	In the Select a row or column box, specify the cells to calculate.

5	Choose a math operation from the Do math list box.

6	In the Insert answer in cell box, specify the cell where you want to display the answer.

 Tip

•	You can also specify cells by clicking the Range picker tool and selecting the cells.

 Related topics


To perform a calculation on each item in a row or column

1	Click Help [image] PerfectExpert.

2	Click Do simple math in the PerfectExpert panel.

3	Click More quick math.

4	In the Select a row or column box, specify the cells to calculate.

5	Choose a math operation from the Do math list box.

6	In the Insert answer in cell box, specify the cell where you want to display the answer.

The answer row or column must have as many cells as are in the list on which you're performing calculations.

 Tip

•	You can also specify cells by clicking the Range picker tool and selecting the cells.

 Related topics


To calculate data in two rows or columns

1	Click Help [image] PerfectExpert.

2	Click Do simple math in the PerfectExpert panel.

3	Click 2-column quick math.

4	In the Select first row/column box, specify the cells to calculate for the first row or column.

5	In the Select second row/column box, specify the cells to calculate for the second row or column.

6	Choose a math operation from the Do math list box.

7	In the Insert answer in cell box, specify the cell where you want to display the answer.

The answer row or column must have as many cells as are in the list on which you're performing calculations.

 Tip

•	You can also specify cells by clicking the Range picker tool and selecting the cells.

 Related topics


Performing running calculations

Quattro Pro lets you perform calculations quickly by using preset calculations.

You can also total cells in rows or columns. For example, you can calculate totals in a single row, or multiple rows or columns. The row or column cannot contain blank cells, and any labels in the selected cells are treated as zero values.

You can also total all cells on multiple spreadsheets and total the subtotals in a column.

Calc As-You-Go lets you display several different running totals for cells you select; the sum, average, count, maximum value, and minimum value display on the application bar. You can disable Calc As-You-Go.

 How to


To perform preset calculations

1	Type values across a row or down a column.

2	Click the first blank cell after the values.

3	Open the QuickFunction flyout on the notebook toolbar, and click a function.

 Note

•	The icon on the flyout varies depending on which calculation you select.

 Related topics


To total cells

To total	Do the following
Cells in a row	Select the cells and one blank cell to the right, and click the QuickSum button on the notebook toolbar
Multiple rows	Select the cells and a blank column to the right, and click the QuickSum button on the notebook toolbar
Rows and columns for a grand total	Select the cells with a blank column to the right, and a blank row below, and click the QuickSum button on the notebook toolbar
Rows or columns on multiple spreadsheets	Select the rows or columns and a blank row and column around the data on each spreadsheet, and click the QuickSum button on the notebook toolbar
 Note

•	You can total several cells in a column by selecting the data plus one blank cell below. For example, to total the values in the cells A1..A3, select A1..A4. The total appears in cell A4.

 Tip

•	You can also total cells in a column or multiple columns.

 Related topics


To total all cells on multiple spreadsheets

1	Select the cells that you want to total on each spreadsheet.

2	Select the same cells on a blank spreadsheet.

3	Click the QuickSum button on the notebook toolbar.

 Related topics


To total subtotals in a column

1	Select the first blank cell below the column containing the subtotal cells.

2	Click the QuickSum button on the notebook toolbar.

 Related topics


To use Calc As-You-Go

1	Select the cells on which to perform running calculations.

2	View the totals on the application bar.

 Related topics


To disable Calc As-You-Go

1	Click Tools [image] Settings.

2	In the list of categories, double-click Workspaces, Application, and click General.

3	Disable the Calc As-You-Go check box.

 Related topics


Reference: Creating spreadsheets

Quattro Pro has default date and time formats. As well, Quattro Pro has guidelines for entering years in two digits and entering dates prior to 1900 and after 2000.

Quattro Pro also has a lists of seed values and their sequences available for use with QuickFill.

 How to


Default date and time formats

While Quattro Pro reads dates and times as values, it applies specific formatting and calculation criteria to them depending on the date and time criteria you set as defaults. When you type a date, the cell formatting automatically switches to the date format you typed. You can enter dates and times in any default date and time format.

Format	Example
DD-MMM-YYYY	28-Apr-1999
DD-MMM-YY	11-Nov-99
DD-MMM	11-Nov
MMM-YY	Nov-99
M/DD/YY	5/15/99
MM/DD/YY	05/16/99
MM/DD	05/16
DD/M, assumes the current year	15/5
DD/MM, assumes the current year	15/05
DD-MMM, assumes the current year	04-Mar
MMM-YY, assumes the first day of the month	Mar-99
MMM-YYYY, assumes first day of the month	Apr-1999
HH:MM:SS AM/PM	04:10:45 AM
HH:MM AM/PM	10:45 AM
 Notes

•	The short international date format is ordinarily MM/DD.

•	The long international time format is ordinarily HH:MM:SS (13:42:30).

•	The short international time format is ordinarily HH:MM (13:42).

•	A date or time can be changed to another format.

 Tip

•	International date and time formats are set by clicking Tools {bmct.onestep.bmp} Settings, and clicking the International tab.

 Related topics


Entering dates

Quattro Pro has specific rules for entering dates, including entering years in two digits, dates prior to 1900, and dates after the year 2000.

Entering years in two digits

If you enter a year using two digits, Quattro Pro assumes the century based on the following year ranges:

When you type the two-digit year	Quattro Pro assumes
30-99	1930–1999
00-29	2000–2029
For example, the date 4/26/99 is interpreted as 4/26/1999. The date 2/2/25 is interpreted as 2/2/2025. To override the year assumption, enter all four digits for the year; for example, 4/26/1927.

Entering dates prior to 1900

If you enter a negative serial date value (for example, for a date before December 30, 1899) and reformat it as a date, to properly display century information you should set your system to the four-digit Windows default setting, click Format [image] Selection properties and click either the Short date international (11/15/1899) or Long date international (Wednesday, November 15, 1899) date format.

Other standard and user-defined four-digit display options do not display the century information properly for negative serial date numbers.

About the year 2000

Quattro Pro has always stored dates typed in a cell (except dates entered as labels) as a unique date/time serial number or integer date value. Therefore, Quattro Pro has always provided for date storage which includes the century information.

It is best to enter all dates (in both numeric and label formats) in a four-digit year, or "explicit century" year, format (such as MM/DD/YYYY).

 Related topics


QuickFill seed values

When using QuickFill, sequences are available for specific seed values. These sequences allow you to automatically fill cells.

Seed value(s)	Continued sequence
1st	2nd, 3rd, 4th, 5th. . .
Qtr 1	Qtr 2, Qtr 3, Qtr 4, Qtr 5. . .
1st Quarter	2nd Quarter, 3rd Quarter. . .
Jan	Feb, Mar. . .
January	February, March. . .
Mon	Tue, Wed, Thu. . .
Monday	Tuesday, Wednesday. . .
Week 1	Week 2, Week 3. . .
P1, P2, Total	P3, P4, Total, P5, P6, Total. . .
Jan 89, Feb 89	Mar 89, Apr 89. . .
100 days	101 days, 102 days, 103 days. . .
100 days, 200 days	300 days, 400 days, 500 days. . .
1, 3, 5	7, 9, 11, 13. . .
1, 3, 6	8.333333, 10.83333, 13.33333. . .
04/05/92	04/06/92, 04/07/92. . .
 Related topics


EXPERTS.RTF


Type the cells for your chart data. If you include column and row labels in the chart data, they appear in your chart as x-axis and y-axis labels. A chart type is displayed, based on the number of rows and columns and the total number of data points in the chart data cells. You can change the chart type later.


Compares values of different items at specific points in time.


Plots a bar chart with the axes reversed: The x-axis is the vertical axis, and the y-axis is the horizontal axis.

Click this general chart type if you want to emphasize that values move forward rather than increase. This type also works well if you have long x-axis labels.


Compares individual values to other values and to the whole. Use them to focus on the individual values in a single series. Doughnut charts, available through this type choice, are like pie charts with a hole in the middle.


Shows the progression of values over time. Area charts are like filled-in line charts; they plot cumulative rather than individual values.


Includes high-low charts, radar charts, and combination charts.


Selects a chart type for you based on the number of rows and columns and the total number of data points in the chart data cells.


Shows the relationship of each value to the total. 100% stacked bar charts show the percentage each series contributes to the total.


Shows the relationship of each value to the total by displaying the percentage of the total contributed to each series.


Plots each series as a separate sub-chart.


Compares individual values to other values and to the whole. Use these chart types to focus on the individual values in a single series.


Like pie and column charts, plots a single series with each value plotted as a percentage of the whole. You can add text or graphics to the interior "hole" with chart window drawing tools.


Plots each series as a separate sub-chart.


Shows the progression of values over time. The chart in the upper right corner is an XY chart. It  plots data only if the first column of your chart data contains dates.


Shows 3-D representations of the line chart. Select ribbon, 3-D unstacked area, or step charts.


Shows the relationship of each value to the total over time--how each sales representative contributed to total sales over a 12-month period, for example.


Plots rows and columns as intersecting lines on a surface that is suspended in a 3-D frame. Surface charts are useful for plotting functions such as f(x) and f(x,y), and parametric curves (x(t), yt(t)).


Shows x-axis values as imaginary lines radiating from a common center, like spokes of a wheel, with y-axis values plotted on each "spoke." Radar charts are useful for highlighting trends, depending on the shapes drawn by the plot lines, or simplifying series comparisons.


Illustrates the difference between corresponding values in two series. Though most often used in tracking daily stock prices, high-low charts can be used whenever you want to compare the difference between pairs of values.


Combines different types of charts in one.


Type the coordinates of the cells that will change with each scenario.


Type new values into any cells that you want to change.


Takes a snapshot of the data in the changing cells and preserves it as a scenario.


Lists the scenarios you have captured using the Add scenario button in the previous panel.


Show Scenario displays the selected scenario in the notebook, highlighting changes you have made to the baseline data. Changing cells are yellow and result cells are green.

Undo Show reverts the notebook to the baseline data.


Removes the named scenario from the list.


Creates a summary report of the change and result cells in each scenario. The Scenario Expert closes, and the report appears on a new sheet, the Scenarios sheet.


Click an analysis tool and then click Next. Read the left panel for information about each tool.


Type the yearly interest rate; the default is 12%.


Type the number of years of the loan; the default is 30. You can enter fractions to represent months. For example, 18+5/12 represents 18 years and 5 months; 100/12 represents 100 months.


Type the original loan balance; the default is $100,000.


Type the balance at loan completion; the default is $0.00. You can enter fractions for Term and Last Year to represent months. For example, 18+5/12 represents 18 years and 5 months; 100/12 represents 100 months.


Type the last year through which the amortization table is generated; the default is the value entered for Term, which generates a table through the end of the loan.


Specifies the significance level at which to evaluate values for the F-statistic; the default is 5%.


Indicates the number of rows in each sample.


Displays a separate row in the output table for the nth largest value. Type 1 to display the largest value.


Displays a separate row in the output table for the nth smallest value. Type 1 to display the smallest value.


Displays the confidence level of the means for the input cells; the default is 95%.


Displays the following statistics for each data set in the input cells: Mean, Standard Error, Median, Mode, Standard Deviation, Variance, Kurtosis, Skewness, Range, Minimum, Maximum, Sum, Count, Largest, Smallest, Confidence Level.


Specifies the constant used to smooth the data. The Damping factor indicates the percentage for error that the prior forecast can be adjusted; the default is 30%.


Specifies the cells to transform. The cells can contain real or complex numbers. (Complex numbers can be in x+y, x+iy, x+yj, or x+jy format.) Type the cell coordinates. The number of values in the input cells must be a power of 2 (for example, 2, 4, 8, 16,...) between 2 and 1024, inclusive; you can pad the input cells with zeros so that the number of values is a power of 2.


Check this box to perform the inverse transformation on data in the input cells. If the input cells have already been transformed, Inverse FFT sets the values back to their original state.


Specifies the data to analyze. The cells can consist of one or more columns or rows of numeric values. They should not contain labels. Type the cell coordinates.


Specifies values that define the bin ranges for the data. Type the cell coordinates. If you do not specify bin cells, bins are distributed evenly from the minimum to the maximum value in the input cells, with the number of bins equal to the square root of the number of values in the input cells.


Check this box to generate a column for cumulative percentages in the output table.


Check this box to create an output table with data in both descending frequency order and ascending Bin Cells order.

If you do not check Pareto?, the output table displays data only in ascending bin cells order.


Type the number of years remaining in the loan; the default is 30.


Type the current loan balance.


Type the current yearly interest rate.


Type the annual interest rate on the candidate loan.


Type the percentage fees ("points") for the candidate loan. For example, if you loan fee is 1 point, type .01.


Specifies the values to analyze. Type the cell coordinates. The input cells must be either a single column or row. They must not contain labels.


Specifies the number of values to include in the moving average; the default is 3.


Type the number of columns in the output cells. If you already specified multicells for Output cells, type 0.


Type the number of rows in the output cells. If you already specified multicells for Output cells, type 0.


Type a starting value for the random number generation algorithm. You can use Seed to generate the same sample of random numbers again.


Every value in this distribution has an equal probability of being selected.


This distribution has the qualities of a symmetrical, bell-shaped curve.


This distribution has two possible outcomes, failure or success, represented by 0 and 1, respectively.


This distribution represents the successful outcomes in a given number of independent Bernoulli trials. For example, a coin toss experiment produces a binomial distribution.


The distribution of values in any interval depends on the length of the interval and the constant Lambda, the expected number of occurrences in an interval.


This distribution produces a pattern of repeated values and sequences.


This distribution generates random numbers drawn from a sample group of values; each sample value has a discrete probability value, and the sum of the probability values equals 1.


Type a value indicating the lower bound on the set of numbers to generate; the default is 0.


Type a value indicating the upper bound on the set of numbers to generate; the default is 1.


Type a value indicating the mean of the set of numbers to generate; the default is 100.


Type a value indicating the standard deviation of the set of numbers to generate; the default is 10.


Type a value indicating the probability of success on each trial; the value must be greater than or equal to 0% and less than or equal to 100%; the default is 50%.


Type the number of trials to run; the default is 10.


Type the expected number of occurrences of a value in a given interval; the default is 1.


Type a value indicating the lower bound on the set of numbers to generate; the default is 1.


Type a value indicating the upper bound on the set of numbers to generate; the default is 100.


Type the increment used to generate numbers between From and To; the default is 1.


Type the number of times to repeat each value; the default is 1.


Type the number of times to repeat each sequence of values; the default is 1.


Specify a two-column area containing numbers in the first column and probability values (between 0 and 1) in the second column. The sum of the probability values must equal 1. Type the cell coordinates.


Specifies the y values (the dependent variables). The y values should be in a single column. Type the cell coordinates.


Specifies the +x values (the independent variables). The x values should be in one or more columns. Type the cell coordinates.


Sets the confidence level of the means for the input cells; the default is 95%.


Specifies the upper left cell of the resulting summary table. When you specify the cells, allow at least seven columns. Type the cell coordinates. Output cells cannot overlap. Try placing output cells side by side instead of on top of one another.


Specifies the upper left cell of the resulting residuals output table. When you specify the cells, allow at least four columns. Type the cell coordinates. Output cells cannot overlap. Try placing output cells side by side instead of on top of one another.


Specifies the upper left cell of the resulting probability output table. When you specify the cells, allow at least two columns. Type the cell coordinates. Output cells cannot overlap. Try placing output cells side by side instead of on top of one another.


Check this box if labels are in the first row of both Y Range and X Range.


Check this box if you want to include residuals in the residuals output table.


Check this box if you want to include standardized residuals in the residuals output table.


Specifies the type of sample, Random or Periodic; the default is Periodic. In a random sample, every value in the input cells has an equal probability of being selected. A periodic sample selects every nth value from the input cells.


For periodic sampling, specify the periodic interval used to sample data. For example, 3 means every third value from the input cells is selected. For random sampling, specify the number of values in the output cells.


Specifies the first column or row of numeric data to compare. The cells should be a single column or row. Type the cell coordinates.


Specifies the second column or row of numeric data to compare. The cells should be a single column or row. Type the cell coordinates.


Performs a two-sample Student's t-Test for means using two independent (rather than paired) samples with equal variances.


Performs a paired two-sample Student's t-Test for means. Each value from one data set is paired with a value from another set; both sets must have the same number of values.


Performs a two-sample Student's t-Test for means using two independent (rather than paired) samples with unequal variances.


Sets the significance level of the test; the default is 5%.


Type a value indicating the hypothesized difference (the null hypothesis) in the means between Variable 1 Input and Variable 2 Input; the default is zero. This option is not available if the t-Test type is Two-sample with unequal variances.


Type the population variance of Variable 1 Input. You can use @VAR and @PUREVAR to calculate the population variance.


Type the population variance of Variable 2 Input. You can use @VAR and @PUREVAR to calculate the population variance.


Click a budget tool, then click Next.


Displays a list of the sources of income. To add an item to the list, type the item in the New item edit field, then click Add.


Type a new item, then click Add.


Deletes the selected item.


Adds the new item to the list.


Displays a list of expenses. To add an item to the list, type the item in the New item edit field, then click Add.


Click a Budget Period to indicate whether the budget should use monthly, quarterly, or yearly information.


If the Budget Period is Monthly, click a starting month. If the Budget Period is Quarterly, click a starting quarter.


Type the starting year for the budget, or click the spin control to select a year.


Type the duration of the budget. The default is one year.


Check this box to show quarterly totals. If the Budget Period is Quarterly or Yearly, this option is unavailable.


Check this box to show annual totals. If the Budget Period is Yearly, this option is unavailable.


Creates the budget in a new notebook. The budget will start at cell A1 of sheet A of the new notebook.


Creates the budget in the current notebook.


Click one of the following Format options:

•	None [image] uses default cell formatting.

•	Color [image] formats the budget with text color, shading, and multiple fonts.

•	Laser Printer [image] formats the budget in a monochrome format ideal for printing to laser printers.


Substitutes values for one cell referenced in a formula (or formulas). Click the Tip button for an example.


Substitutes values for two cells referenced in a formula. Click the Tip button for an example.


Type a cell reference. Select only one cell. The next step lets you select additional formula cells. The formula you select must reference at least one other cell. For example, the formula @PMT(10000,A1,36) references cell A1.


If the formula you specified in the previous step references a cell that is also referenced by other formulas, you can substitute values for those other formulas in the What-If table. Type a cell reference.


Lists the formula cells you have added.


Adds the formula cell specified in Additional formula cells to the list.


Deletes the selected formula cell from the list.


Specifies the cell containing the value you want to substitute for to create the What-If table. For example, in the formula @PMT(10000,A1,A2) cell A1 is one input cell. Type a cell reference. The input cell must be referenced by the formula(s) that you selected. The input cell cannot be blank and it must contain a numeric value.


Type a name (up to 30 characters) to identify the values substituted for the input cell in the What-If table. The default name is "My Subst. Cell."


Type a name (up to 30 characters) to identify the values substituted for the input cell in the What-If table. The default name is "My Subst. Cell."


Check to show first input values in a row and second input values in a column.


Specify the number of patterns to display; the maximum is 6.


Lists the substitution values that will be used to create the What-If table.


Lets you specify a different range of substitution values.


Creates a new list of substitution values based on the Start, Step, and Stop values you entered.


Sets the first value in the range of substitution values. Enter a number, a formula, or a date/time serial number.


Sets the constant value to add to the Start value. If you want the values to decrease, enter a negative number and a Stop value lower than the Start value.


Sets the limit for the substitution values.


Type the upper left cell where you want to create the What-If table. Type a single cell reference. After you specify the table cells, click Make table to create the What-If table.


Select cells containing up to three columns of text for one or more bullet charts. Type the cell coordinates.

When you select the bullet chart area, the first bullet chart in the area appears in the left panel.


Displays styles from the Master slide gallery in the panel below.


Displays a list of charts you created. Click User defined to use a template style from an existing chart (such as a bullet chart with drawn shapes). If the notebook has no charts, User defined is unavailable.


Click this button to not use a Master Slide for the slide show. You can select a master slide after the slide show has been created, if you want to.


Controls how one slide appears after another. Random applies a transition effect to each slide. From List selects a transition effect from the list. The Slide Show Expert uses a display time of 0 seconds, which displays a slide until the viewer clicks the mouse or presses a key. It also uses fast transition effects; you can later slow down the effects if necessary by changing a slide's properties.


Select a map from the list. Once you are satisfied with your selection, click Next.


Type the cell coordinates for the map region names in your notebook. If you do not specify map region names, you cannot display data in your map.


Type the cell coordinates for the color data series in your notebook. If you do not specify color data series, your map will not contain any colored regions.


Type the cell coordinates for the pattern data series in your notebook. If you do not specify pattern data series, your map will not contain any patterned regions.


If your notebook contains major world city names, you can use the Expert to mark any of those cities on your map.


Displays a title above the map.


Displays a subtitle below the map title.


Displays a title above the map legend.


Hides the legend.


Displays the legend below the chart.


Displays the legend to the right of the chart.


Inserts the map on the active sheet.


Displays the map in a window, ready for editing.


Lets you display a legend title, as typed in the box to the right.


Alignment Property


Makes text left-justified, centered, or right-justified.


Enables shading on the text.


Sets the perspective of the text.


Sets the style for the text.


Sets tab stops within the text box at regular intervals you specify.


Box Settings Property


Specifies the color of the box.


Sets the style of box that surrounds the object. The 12 choices range from "no frame" (the first button) to several 3-D styles.


Border Settings Property


Sets the style or thickness of the lines. There are nine styles, ranging from transparent (the first button) to a thick line.


Sets the color of the lines.


Fill Settings Property


Lets you to choose a pattern, a two-color wash, an imported bitmap, or no fill from the drop-down list.


Specifies the style of wash. A preview of the style appears in the lower right corner.


Specifies the style of the pattern. A preview of the style appears in the lower right corner.


Specifies the color of the pattern, or the start color if you are using a wash.


Specifies the color behind the pattern, or the end color if you are using a wash.


Displays only the part of the bitmap that fits within the object.


Shrinks or enlarges the bitmap to fit within the object.


Repeats the image until the entire object is full.


Enter the name of the bitmap file you want to use, or click the folder button to select a bitmap file.


Adjusts a bitmap to simulate the depth of a 3-D wall (for 3-D Chart walls only).


Chart Button Property


Select the chart you want displayed after the macro has run. If Select chart is unchecked, no other charts will be displayed.


Runs a macro from the chart button when it's clicked. Enter a defined macro or macro statements (up to 160 characters) into the Macro edit field.


CHART.RTF


Displays the list of chart categories. Choose from Bar, Rotated Bar, Pie, Line Or area,  Specialty, Templates.


Displays examples of chart styles for the selected category. When you select a style, the picture of your chart on the right side of the Chart gallery dialog box updates to reflect your selection.


Displays the list of color schemes. The color scheme you select determines colors used for all chart elements and objects. Click No change to not use a color scheme. If you selected Templates for the chart category, Color scheme is unavailable.


Opens an Advisor dialog box appropriate for the chart category you selected. The Advisor presents a selection of styles based on stylistic criteria you specify.


Displays examples of template styles, which provide a background style for charts. Templates also affect the position, size, and color of chart titles and bulleted text.


Slide the boxes left or right to choose whether to chart the data series individually or together.


Slide the boxes left or right to choose whether the chart style should highlight differences in the data series or trends.


Slide the boxes left or right to choose whether you want the chart style to be simple or fancy.


Sets the number of data series (or columns) that you are graphing.


Sets the number of data points (or rows) per series that you are graphing.


Suggests appropriate chart styles given the constraints you specified.


Displays suggested chart styles after you click Advise. Select a style and click Apply.


Applies the selected style to your chart or slide.


Slide the boxes left or right to choose between entertaining and serious templates.


Slide the boxes left or right to choose between sophisticated and simple templates.


Slide the boxes left or right to choose between vivid and subdued templates.


Slide the boxes left or right to choose between plain and fancy templates.


Check this box if you want the Advisor to suggest slide templates appropriate for viewing on screen.


Check this box if you want the Advisor to suggest slide templates appropriate for viewing on paper in black and white.


Check this box if you want the Advisor to suggest slide templates appropriate for viewing on black and white transparencies.


Check this box if you want the Advisor to suggest slide templates appropriate for viewing in 35 millimeter slides.


Check this box if you want the Advisor to suggest slide templates appropriate for viewing on paper in color.


Check this box if you want the Advisor to suggest slide templates appropriate for viewing color transparencies.


Check this box if you want the Advisor to suggest slide templates appropriate for viewing in a darkened room.


Check this box if you want the Advisor to suggest slide templates appropriate for viewing in a lighted room.


Suggests appropriate template styles given the constraints you specified.


Displays suggested template styles after you click Advise. Select a style and click Apply.


Applies the selected template style to your chart or slide.


Choose a category from the drop down list. The chart types for that category appear below.


Select a chart type. The name of the chart appears below.


Adds a series after the selected series.


Deletes the selected series.


Plots the last series first, then moves backward through the series order. This is useful in 3-D bar and unstacked area charts, for example, when a series with high values is plotted at the front of the chart, covering other series.


Plots columns as series when Quattro Pro assigns series by rows, and plots rows as series when Quattro Pro would plot columns. Row/column swap also puts x-axis series labels in the legend, and places legend series labels along the x-axis.


Type the main title (available in all numeric chart types). The main title appears above the chart.


Type the subtitle (available in all numeric chart types). The subtitle appears above the chart, directly beneath the main title.


Type the x-axis title (available in all numeric charts with axes). The x-axis title runs along the bottom of the chart (unless the axes are reversed or the chart is rotated).


Type the primary y-axis title (available in all numeric charts with axes). The y-axis title appears along the left side of the chart (unless the axes are reversed or the chart is rotated).


Type the secondary y-axis title (available in all numeric charts with axes except 3-D charts).


Displays the name of the current overlay, and lets you switch between overlays when the map contains more than one overlay.


Lets you add an overlay to the map.


Deletes the current overlay from the map.


Select the region overlay you want to add to the map, then click OK.


Select the static overlay you want to add to the map, then click OK. Static overlays do not require any notebook data, and you cannot change their content. They display only if they are appropriate for the current map. For example, a static overlay of U.S. highways is not appropriate for a map of Japan.


Click this button if you want to use pin names from a notebook in the DATAMAPS folder, then select one of the predefined pin overlays below.


Click this button to apply latitude and longitude coordinates from a notebook.


Select a predefined pin overlay.


Type a custom name for the pin overlay that will use latitude and longitude coordinates from a notebook.


Type the main title of the map.


Type the subtitle of the map.


Type the title for the map legend.


DATA.RTF


Specifies the cells to be sorted, including row labels, if any, but excluding column headings. Type the cell coordinates.


Lets you specify up to five sort keys, in the order they are to be sorted. For example, if you want to sort a sales prospect file, the first key might be postal code and the second key might be last name. Quattro Pro guesses what headings you want to sort by. Click the arrow to choose from your headings.


Enable to sort in ascending order (A-Z and 0-9).


The Top to bottom setting sorts data down the column. The Left to right setting sorts data across rows.


Lets you sort blank cells first or sort numbers last. Also, if you included headings in the Sort cells box, and you do not want the headings included in the sort, click that option.


Clears all entries and restores defaults.


Lets you sort blank cells first, sort numbers last, sort from left to right instead of top to bottom, and so on.


Lets you choose a previous sort.


Select if your sort cells contain headings you do not want to be sorted.


Lets you sort data based on the criteria you specify.


The Column setting fills by moving down columns, starting with the leftmost column. The Row setting fills across rows, starting with the top row.


The type of fill operation to perform. If the Start value is a number or a formula, you can choose Linear (addition), Growth (multiplication), or Power (exponentiation). If the Start value is a date or time, addition is assumed, and you can use one of the remaining Series settings to determine the time unit (Year, Month, and so on) to use.


Lists the defined series. To create a new fill series, click Create.


Lets you define a new series.


Lets you change the values in the selected series.


Deletes the selected series.


Changes the name for the selected series.


The name of the current series you are defining; the name can be up to 200 characters.


List creates a series consisting of a list of values. When List is selected, the Series element options appear. Formula creates a series consisting of a sequence of formulas. When Formula is selected, the Formula definition options appear.


Check this box to repeat the list of values in order to fill cells. If the series type selected is Formula, this option is unavailable.


Enter and edit series values. After you type a new value, click Add to add the value to the series. Each value can be up to 200 characters.


Draws values from a selected cells on a sheet.


Changes a selected value in the series. Select a value from the list, edit the value in the text box, then choose Modify.


Removes a value from the series. Select the value from the series list, and click Delete.


Inserts a value before the selected value in the series list.


Adds a value after the selected value in the series list.


Inserts a variable into the formula representing the value of the iteration number in the series list (for example, 1, 2, 3, and so on). The iteration number variable is represented by #ITER#.


Inserts the seed value constant into the formula expression. The seed value constant is represented by #SEED#.


Inserts a variable into the formula representing the value of the previous element in the series list. The previous element variable is represented by #PREV#.


When checked, replaces any existing series values with the values in the source cells.


Type the name of the consolidation.


Specifies the password to assign to the saved file.


Saves an exact copy of the cells, including formulas.


Converts formulas to their resulting values in the extracted file.


Specifies the data, including field names, to search. Type the cell coordinates.


Specifies the cells containing search conditions, including field names. Type the cell coordinates.


Specifies the cells where you want to copy field names and records that meet the criteria. Type the cell coordinates.


Highlights all records that meet the search criteria.


Copies all records that meet the search criteria to the output cells.


Copies all records that meet the search criteria to the output cells like Extract, but skips duplicate records.


Deletes all records that meet the search criteria.


Assigns cell names to fields so you can use them in search formulas.


Removes all selection settings (Database Cells, Criteria Table, and Output Cells). It does not affect the criteria cells or output cells in your notebook, only the dialog box settings.


Specifies an external query file (with Query in File) or cells in the active notebook (with Query in Selection) as the source of the query text.


Specifies the alignment of data in the selected column. Select Left, Right, or Center.


Specifies the numeric format of values in the selected column. Click Skip to ignore the column when parsing.


Sets the name of the bitmap you want to use. Click the folder button to select a different bitmap file.


Shows a sample of what the bitmap looks like.


Applies the Text draw flags properties you have selected.


Displays the current number of hours on your system clock.


Displays the current number of minutes on your system clock.


Displays the current number of seconds on your system clock.


Enables the control when the dialog is displayed from a notebook window.


Enables the control when the dialog is displayed from a chart window.


Enables the control when the dialog is displayed from another dialog box.


Enables the control when the dialog is displayed from the input line.


Enables the control when the dialog is displayed from the Objects sheet.


Sets the distance in pixels between grid lines.


Sets a horizontal bar's value when its scroll box is as far left as possible; vertical bars are set to this value when their scroll box is at the top of the scroll bar.


Sets a horizontal bar's value when its scroll box is as far right as possible; vertical bars are set to this value when their scroll box is at the bottom of the scroll bar.


Sets the amount the scroll bar's value changes when a user clicks a scroll arrow.


Sets the amount the scroll bar's value changes when a user clicks above or below the scroll box on a vertical scroll bar, or to the left or right of the scroll box on a horizontal scroll bar.


Locks each edge of the child control in place so that when the parent control is resized, the child control resizes proportionally.


Centers the control between the left and right sides of the parent control whenever the parent control is resized.


Centers the control between the top and bottom of the parent control whenever the parent control is resized.


DIAL.RTF


Creates a new link command below the selected link command.


Creates a new link command above the selected link command.


Removes the selected link command from the control.


Removes all link commands from the control.


EDIT.RTF


Pastes cell comments from the copied selection to the destination.


Adjusts formulas that have absolute references to cells within the copied cells, but leaves the references absolute. Check this box if you are copying cells that contain absolute references to cells within the copied area.


Check this box to copy all formula cells in the source cells.


Check this box to copy all labels in the source cells.


Check this box to copy all numeric values in the source cells.


Check this box to copy all selection properties applied to each source cell.


Check this box to copy all QuickButtons, floating graphs, and other objects in the source cells.


Check this box to make the destination rows and columns the same sizes as those in the source cells.


Specifies the sheet(s) to be moved.


Specifies the sheet before which the moved sheets will be placed.


Lets you insert rows, columns, or sheets.


Select whole or partial rows, columns, or sheets.


Click the supporting file (spreadsheet or Internet file). You can select multiple files by holding down the CTRL (as you click individual files) or the SHIFT (as you click the last file in a range to be selected).


Specifies the named cell or group of cells to go to.


Specifies the sheet to go to.


Specifies the cells or multiple cells to search. Type the cell coordinates. To search the entire sheet, leave this field blank.


Specifies the group of characters to be found in labels, values, or formulas. These characters are called the find string.


Specifies the group of characters to substitute for characters found. This is called the replacement string.


Looks at the formulas as they appear in the input line.


Looks at the results of the formulas, as they appear in the cells.


Treats the find string as a conditional expression. For example, a find string of B13>500 with Condition selected looks for the first value that is greater than 500, starting with cell B13.


Check this box to search down columns first, starting with column 1. By default, this option is unchecked for searching across rows starting with row 1.


Check this box if the find string must match all of a cell entry. When this option is unchecked (the default), searching will find partial matches as well as exact matches.


Check this box if you want capitalization to be considered during the search. When this option is unchecked (the default), searching will find strings regardless of capitalization.


Begins or resumes a forward search without replacing found entries.


Begins or resumes a backward search without replacing found entries.


Lets you decide on an individual basis whether to replace each string found.


Replaces all found strings without stopping.


Clears any entries in the dialog box and reinstates the defaults.


Displays the list of entries in the series.


Fills the cells in order from top to bottom of each column.


Fills the cells in order from left to right of each row.


Fills sheet tab names with entries in the series. This option is available only if you chose QuickFill with a single cell selected.


Lets you define a new series.


Lets you change the values in a series.


Deletes a series.


Q Plus E

The dialog box lets you add, edit, and execute database queries through Q+E:

For more information, press  F1 within Q+E to display Q+E Help.


FILE.RTF


Opens all supporting notebooks. If those notebooks contain links to closed notebooks, those notebooks open, too, until all supporting notebooks are open.


Accesses linked values in closed supporting notebooks without opening them. This takes up less memory than opening the notebooks.


Temporarily replaces links to closed supporting notebooks and server applications with the value NA (not available). This lets you examine or edit notebooks when you do not need the linked values.


Type a title for the notebook.


Type a description of the notebook.


Type the author's name (by default, Author is the user name of the person who created the file).


Type keywords that identify the notebook. You can use these keywords later when searching for the file.


Type comments about the notebook. You can use these comments later when searching for the file.


Prints the entire contents of the current sheet.


Prints all notebook pages.


Prints the cells you specify. Type the cell coordinates. If a cell's contents spill over into adjacent cells on screen, include the spillover cells in the selection; otherwise, only part of the entry will print.


Specifies the number of copies to print.


Specifies the beginning and ending pages in the document to print.


Opens the Print preview window, which lets you examine the document's appearance before you actually print it.


Lets you specify the page format of output.


Sends the document to the printer.


Makes printouts more readable. Prints all backgrounds white, all text black, and all lines black.


Specifies which of the available printers to use. Before printing, use the Windows Control Panel to specify the printers available or click System printers to see the current list.


Select Print to file to create a binary file to store the printed document instead of sending the document to a printer. If you select Print to file, type the file name.


Adds the cell entries you specify as headings to print at the top of each printed page. Type the cell coordinates.


Adds the cell entries you specify as headings to print at the left of each printed page. Type the cell coordinates.


Check this box to print each cell's address and contents instead of its calculated results.


Check this box to include the spreadsheet grid in the printed document.


Check this box to include row and column borders in the printed document.


Check this box to center the cells of the print selection between the left and right margins of the printed page. (By default, the first column of each group of cells prints starting at the left margin.)


Choose Lines and type an entry in the edit field to separate each group of cells, if you have specified more than one group, with blank lines. Choose Page advance to separate them with page breaks.


Choose Lines and type an entry in the edit field to separate sheets of 3-D cells with blank lines. Choose Page advance to separate them with page breaks.


Saves the current dialog box selections as the default settings.


Specifies the type of paper loaded into your printer.


Prints data vertically, on individual pages.


Prints data horizontally, on individual pages.


Specifies the text for the header.


Specifies the text for the footer.


Specifies the typeface, point size, and type style for header text.


Specifies the typeface, point size, and type style for footer text.


Sets the amount of space between the edge of the page and the top of the document. The default is a third of an inch.


Sets the amount of space between the edge of the page and the bottom of the document. The default is a third of an inch.


Sets the amount of space between the edge of the page and the left of the document. The default is four-tenths of an inch.


Sets the amount of space between the edge of the page and the right of the document. The default is four-tenths of an inch.


Sets the amount of space between the header and the first row of data. The default is half an inch.


Sets the amount of space between the last row of data and the footer. The default is half an inch.


Check this box to start a new printed page at each soft page break. Uncheck Break Pages if you are printing a long printout to continuous-form paper. This option does not affect hard page breaks.


Specifies the maximum width and height in pages to use when printing the print selection.


Specifies the percentage (15-1000) to increase or decrease the size of notebook data on the printed page. The margins (except for header and footer margins) do not change.


Type the name for a new print setting. Click Add to add the setting to the list.


Lists the named print settings you've already saved.


Creates a named print setting using the name in the New set text box. The name is added to the named print setting list.


Uses the selected named print setting. When you click Use, the selected named print setting replaces the current print settings with those stored under the name.


Replaces the settings stored under the selected name with the current print settings.


Deletes the selected named setting.


Resets the dialog box to its default settings, replacing all selections in the dialog box.


Saves the current dialog box selections as the default settings, without clearing named settings.


Prints multiple copies sorted by page.


Prints multiple copies sorted by sets of copies.


Specify the options for the selected printer driver.


Use the wizard to add a printer.


Specifies the print resolution to use when printing.


View the status of print jobs.


FORMAT.RTF


Sets the style to revise or create. To create a new style, type a style name that has not been used.


Check the box to add the Alignment property to the style. Click the Alignment button to choose a particular alignment setting.


Check the box to add the Format property to the style. Click the Format button to choose a particular numeric format.


Check the box to add the Protection property to the style. Click the Protection button to choose a particular protection setting.


Check the box to add the Line drawing property to the style. Click the Line drawing button to choose a type of line drawing.


Check the box to add the Shading property to the style. Click the Shading button to choose a particular shading setting.


Check the box to add the Font property to the style. Click the Font button to choose a particular font setting.


Check the box to add the Text color property to the style. Click the Text color button to choose a particular color setting.


Deletes the style selected in the Define style for option. Any cells that used the deleted style change to Normal style.


Lets you copy the style settings from a specified cell or an existing style.


Lists predefined and custom formats.


By default, each format applies settings for Numeric format, Font, Shading, Text Color, Alignment, Line drawing, and Column width (Auto-Width option) properties. To prevent SpeedFormat from applying a particular property throughout the selection, uncheck that property.


By default, each format applies properties to these parts of the active selection: Column headings, Column totals, Row heading, Row total, and Subtotals. To prevent SpeedFormat from applying any properties to a particular part of the selection, uncheck that part.


Creates a new custom format.


Deletes the active SpeedFormat.


Type the name of the new format you want to add to the SpeedFormat list. The name can be up to 14 characters long and can include spaces and punctuation marks.


GRAPH.RTF


The name assigned to the chart. You can use the default name, or change it to a more descriptive one. The chart name appears on the Objects sheet. Right-click the chart on the Objects sheet, then right-click Icon Properties to change the chart name.


INSERT.RTF


Select a Function Category on the left. The Function list on the right changes to show the functions for that category in alphabetical order. Double-click an spreadsheet function, or select an spreadsheet function and click OK.


Displays the available functions for the category selected. Double-click an spreadsheet function, or select an spreadsheet function and click OK. The full name and a brief description of the function appears at the bottom of the dialog box.


MAP.RTF


Enable Automatic to have the map redraw itself every time the source data changes.


Enable Manual to update the map only when you select Redraw in a submenu.


Select a color for the symbol.


Specify up to six groups for your map data.


Displays or hides the color legend.


Specify the maximum value in each group.


Select a color for the group.


Type a description of the group. The description will appear in the legend.


Check this box to turn off the automatic grouping feature so you can specify the values of each group yourself.


Check this box to specify that the value in your data be exactly the same as the setting in the dialog box, instead of a number within a range.


Displays or hides the pattern legend.


Select a pattern for the group.


Type the text of the legend title.


Displays or hides the legend title.


Displays or hides pin labels. You must also select pin label data before you can display pin labels.


Displays or hides pin symbols. You must also select pin names or latitude and longitude coordinates before you can display pin symbols.


Select a symbol to mark all defined pin locations in your map.


SLIDE.RTF


Type the name of the slide show (up to 15 characters).


TOOL.RTF


Type the incorrect spelling of a word you commonly misspell or mistype, or type an abbreviation that you want expanded in your document.


Type the correct spelling of the misspelled word, or type the expanded word(s) of the abbreviation.


Lists the common errors or abbreviations QuickCorrect replaces.

To add a QuickCorrect entry, type text in the Replace and With fields, then click Add entry.

To delete a QuickCorrect entry, select one in the list, then click Delete entry.


Adds the entry from the Replace and With fields to the QuickCorrect list.


Removes the selected entry from the QuickCorrect list.


Check this box to turn on QuickCorrect. When you type text that is identical to the complete misspelled or abbreviated word, it is automatically replaced with the replacement text the moment you press the SPACEBAR.


Select a Quattro Pro macro or PerfectScript macro. Quattro Pro macros are stored as labels in notebook cells and edited in Quattro Pro. PerfectScript macros are compatible with the PerfectScript macro technology available in other applications, such as WordPerfect and Corel Presentations. PerfectScript macros are stored in .WCM files.


Allows you to enter the filename for the macro.


Allows you to choose the location in which to store the macro.


If the macro is stored in a notebook designated as a macro library, choose the notebook name here. Macros/Named Cells changes to display the macros available from the notebook.


You can choose the name of a macro to run or record from this list. Use Macro Library to specify the list displayed.


Uses standard cell addressing notation, like A1..C6.


Uses relative referencing, which specifies cells as offset from the cell selector. For example, the cell selector's relative reference is P(0):C(0)R(0).


Displays the calculated value for the current cell.


Displays the cell reference for the current formula.


Displays the current expression selected within the formula. You can type an entire formula here, or select parts of a formula in the outline pane.


Displays an expandable/collapsible outline of the formula. Double-click part of the outline to expand or collapse it.


Takes a baseline snapshot of data. You can use Capture repeatedly to capture changes as scenarios to add to the group.


Deletes the selected scenario.


Creates a summary report of the change and result cells in each scenario.


Turns on and off coloring of change and result cells. You can specify different colors to highlight cells. The default colors are yellow for change cells and green for result cells.


Lists the scenario groups included in the active notebook.


Specifies the area where the Scenario Manager tracks data and format changes:

•	Notebook [image] tracks changes within the entire notebook except the Objects sheet.

•	Sheet [image] tracks changes on the specified sheet.

•	Cells [image] tracks changes in the specified cells.


Creates and names a new Scenario manager group.


Applies another name to the active group.


Deletes the active group and all scenarios in it.


Type the name (up to 19 characters) of the current scenario.


Displays a report for each scenario group, not just the active group.


Identifies scenario cells with text in cells immediately to their left.


Identifies scenario cells with text above them.


Check this box to put the Scenario summary report on the first empty sheet in the notebook. To place it somewhere else, uncheck this box and enter a sheet and cells in the edit field.


Check this box to highlight changing and result cells with different colors.


Sets the color used for changing cells when the Highlight box is checked. The default color is yellow.


Sets the color used for result cells when the Highlight box is checked. The default color is green.


Indicates you want to maximize the formula in the solution cell. This is the default.


Indicates you want to minimize the formula in the solution cell.


Indicates you want to find a solution without considering a solution cell.


Specifies the value to be reached by the formula in solution cell.


Defines formulas that limit the Solution cell formula and/or Variable cell(s) contents. Constraints can require cells to fall within upper or lower bounds. They can also specify a target value.


Adds a new constraint.


Edits the selected constraint.


Removes the selected constraint.


Offers calculation settings and methods, loads and saves model settings, and generates reports.


The Revert button restores original variable and solution cell values in the notebook after you use Solve to generate a set of solution values.

The Reset button clears the Optimizer settings.


The Revert button restores original variable and solution cell values in the notebook after you use Solve to generate a set of solution values.

The Reset button clears the Optimizer settings.


Finds a solution to the defined problem. If you revise Optimizer settings without saving a solution, and then click Solve, you will be asked to confirm your action before Optimizer overwrites the existing solution.


Loads cells of Optimizer settings.


Saves cells of Optimizer settings for future use.


Generates Answer and Detail reports.


Check this box to use a linear method to solve the problem. This indicates that your problem has only linear expressions in the solution cell or any of the constraint cells. Expressions are linear when the algebraic statements express relationships where the variables are being added (or subtracted) in various combinations.


Check this box to pause between iterations so you can check the progress of the search. At each iteration you can continue the search or stop.


Check this box if you want to automatically scale variables to achieve the target value. When checked, this option can help when variable cell and target values differ greatly in size.


Indicates how long Optimizer can spend looking for the best solution (100 seconds is the default).


Sets the maximum number of iterations, or trials, Optimizer can perform to find the best solution (100 is the default).


Controls the accuracy of the solution, from 0 to 1. The default is .000001 or 1E-06. The greater the precision (the more decimal places), the more time it takes to find a solution.


Indicates the maximum percentage a solution can differ from a theoretical optimum integer solution. As you increase the Tolerance setting, Optimizer can produce solutions more quickly, but they may be less accurate.


Specifies the approach used to obtain initial estimates of the basic variables in each iteration. Tangent uses linear extrapolation from a tangent vector, while Quadratic uses quadratic extrapolation. Quadratic may be useful in highly nonlinear problems.


Selects Forward (the default) or Central differencing for estimates of partial derivatives. Central requires more iterations but may help if a message indicates a better solution is not available.


Selects a method for computing the search direction. Newton, the default, is a quasi-Newton method and may be faster, but Conjugate can help if you see a message indicating that the objective function is changing too slowly.


Specifies the result you want from the formula cell.


Determines how many passes Solve for makes to solve the formula (1 to 1000). The default is 5.


Specifies how close Solve For must get to the Target value (the default is 0.0005).


Specifies the number of variables in the What-If formulas. Choose One free variable to substitute for one variable when building the What-If table; choose Two free variables to build a two-variable table.


Builds the table.


Clears all settings.


Specifies whether to force the y-intercept value to zero or whether to compute it.


The file is not found. It may not be installed.


The file is not found. It may not be installed.


The file is not found. It may not be installed.


The file is not found. It may not be installed.


Recalculates formulas automatically, but pauses until recalculation is finished. Use Automatic if you have complex formulas that Background calculation does not handle fast enough.


Recalculates the formulas you enter or edit, but does not recalculate the entire notebook until you press F9. If a formula needs to be recalculated, CALC appears on the application bar to remind you that the displayed results of formulas may not be accurate. Press F9 to recalculate all formulas.


Calculates cells in dependency order. Formulas without dependencies are calculated first, followed by formulas that depend on them.


Starts recalculation in cell A1 of the first sheet and proceeds down column A, ignoring formulas in other columns. When A is finished, recalculation continues in B1, and on down column B. This continues to the end of the sheet (column IV), and on to the last sheet in the notebook.


Starts recalculation in cell A1, but proceeds by rows, starting at 1 and continuing through row 100,000, through to the last sheet.


Displays in each problem cell the sheet and cell reference where the problem started. The notebook name is included if the cell is in another notebook.


Each color square controls the color displayed in the same location in the corresponding palettes.


Opens a dialog box for modifying the active color square.


Displays or hides the scroll bars or the sheet tabs. Deselect the display elements you want to hide; click them when you want them displayed again.


Columns automatically widen to fit values. Select this option to make sure values are always visible in the notebook.


Enter the number of decimal places you want to use (0 to 15). Numbers will display with no more than that number of decimal places. Examples: 46.1 or 0.56 or -34.123


Uses scientific notation. Allows only one digit in the integer portion of the number. Examples: 2.35E+2 or 4.76E+9


Displays numbers as currency, using the currency symbol of the country you specify. Examples: $3,467.00 or 35 or ($56.24)


Displays numbers as entered, unless they are too long to fit the active cell. Then, they are rounded (if fractional) or translated into scientific notation. Examples: 456.9452 or -365 or 0.41 or 1.955E+6


Displays numbers as percentages. Examples: 13.40% or -56.44%


Displays numbers as dates in the format you choose.


Displays numbers as times in the format you choose.


Displays formulas instead of their results. Displays numbers entered in the cells in General format. This is also known as the Show Formulas format. Example: +B6*C3 or @SUM(B1..B10)


Suppresses display of both value and label entries. Entries still appear on the input line when the cell is selected.


Single line or Double line show a total line in the cell(s) you selected. If you don't see a line, enter a number in the cell to see the single or double line.


Click line segments with the mouse; nibs appear to show which segments are selected. SHIFT+ click to select multiple segments. At least one segment is always selected. To deselect a segment, click it again.


Selects vertical lines in the selection.


Selects horizontal lines in the selection.


Clears all lines in the selection.


Selects lines around every cell in the selection.


Selects lines around the selection but not between cells.


Selects lines between cells but not around the perimeter of the selection.


Click the color you want. If you already changed the Fill color, make sure the Text color contrasts enough to be visible.


Resets the selected row's height to the default row height (as determined by the largest font used in the row).


Changes the height of the selected row to the value you type. Then click a unit of measurement (characters, inches, or centimeters).


Specifies whether the row height you entered is in points (the default), inches, or centimeters.


Enter a value for Column width.


Changes the selected column's width to the value you type. Then click a unit of measurement (characters, inches, or centimeters).


Resets the selected column's width to the default column width.


Specifies whether the column width you entered is in characters, inches, or centimeters.


Hides the active rows or columns.


Redisplays hidden rows or columns currently surrounded by the active rows or columns.


Makes no change.


Suppresses the display of any value in the active sheet that equals exactly zero, whether it was entered directly or calculated with a formula. Select Yes to display zeros, or No to hide them.


Turns off row and column borders in the active sheet. Deselect Row borders to turn off the numbered row borders at the left of the sheet. Deselect Column borders to turn off lettered column borders at the top of the sheet. These options are useful for setting up a sheet as a form for data input.


Turns off the spreadsheet grid in the active sheet. Deselect Horizontal to turn off grid lines that separate rows. Deselect Vertical to turn off grid lines that separate columns. These options are useful for viewing a sheet as it would look when printed (grid lines are not printed by default).


Type a name up to 63 characters long. You can use letters, numbers, and spaces in the name, as well as the following special characters:

~  `  !  %  _  |  \  '  ?

You cannot use a name you have previously assigned to a group in the same notebook.


Restores the sheet name back to its original letter name.


Enter the smallest value of the range of values you consider normal. Cells with values within the range specified by Smallest normal value and Greatest normal value will appear in the Normal color. The default setting for Smallest normal value is 0.


Enter the largest value of the range of values you consider normal. Cells with values within the range specified by Smallest normal value and Greatest normal value will appear in the Normal color. The default setting for Greatest normal value is 1E+300.


Sets the color of cells whose values are below the Smallest normal value; the default is red.


Sets the color of cells whose values fall within the range set by Smallest normal value and Greatest normal value; the default is black.


Sets the color of cells whose values are above the Greatest normal value; the default is green.


Specifies the color to use for ERR and NA values generated by formula errors; the default is red.


Indicates whether to use the conditional colors set with this property.


Enter a macro (up to 200 characters) for the QuickButton to run.


Lets you link the QuickButton to a Uniform Resource Locator (URL) address, name of an Internet resource.


Makes the QuickButton display a dialog box. Using this option replaces whatever macro is assigned to the button with a {DODIALOG} command.


Lists the names of dialog boxes you can display. If you did not create a dialog box using Tools [image] Macro [image] Dialog designer, no dialog boxes appear in the list.


When checked, the object is automatically resized after you edit it. If you deselect this option, you can manually resize the object after editing it.


When checked, the OLE object always reflects edits in the server application. When unchecked, the object is updated only when you manually update it.


Select one of the transition effects from the list. The effect sets how the slide is replaced by the next slide in a slide show. For example, a wipe simulates turning a page.


Controls the speed of the transition effect.


Overlays the previous slide with the new slide, instead of replacing it.


Displays the template style and chart elements used in the master slide (the first slide in a slide show). The master slide also affects the position and color of chart titles and bulleted text in bullet chart slides.


Specifies how long the slide remains on screen, in seconds (up to 3600). The default is zero, which causes the slide to stay on screen until the viewer clicks the mouse or presses a key.


VIEW.RTF


Sets the zoom percentage. The default setting is 100%. Percentages less than 100% show more columns and rows; percentages greater than 100% show fewer.

To expand the current cells to fill the screen, click Selection.

To set a custom zoom, click Custom, then enter a percentage.


Select Sheet to apply the new zoom factor to the active sheet. Select Notebook to apply the new zoom factor to every sheet in the notebook.


Lists all toolbars. Toolbars that are displayed in the selected context have a checkmark. You can check the box to display a toolbar, or uncheck the box to hide it.


Lets you create a toolbar and add it to the toolbar list.


Lets you set the position and the context in which the toolbar displays. You can also change the toolbar name.


Splits the window horizontally.


Splits the window vertically.


Removes the active pane.


Makes both panes scroll when you move the selector in one of the panes.


OHTEXT.RTF


Floating Window

A floating window is the frame that appears above the cells in a notebook sheet. Graphics, maps, and charts can be displayed within a floating window. Right-click the floating window to change its properties.


3-D Wall or Base

Each wall surrounds a 3-D chart and is a separate object. Click a chart, then right-click each wall to change its properties.


Area Series

A data series plotted as an area, surface, shaded surface, or contour. Click a chart, then right-click the area representing the series you want to change.


Bar Series

A data series plotted as a bar. Click a chart, then right-click the bar representing the series you want to change.


Chart Pane

The area bordered by the x- and y-axes in a 2-D chart. Click a chart, then right-click anywhere in the pane to change its properties.


Background Property

The background area within the chart or graphics window. Click a chart or graphic, then right-click the background to change its properties.


Line Series

A data series plotted as line series. Click a chart, then right-click the area representing the series you want to change.


Pie Chart

A single data series, with each value represented as a slice of the pie. Click a chart, then right-click a pie slice to change its properties.


X-Axis

The axis along which labels are usually placed, normally the horizontal axis, except in rotated charts. Click a chart, then right-click the axis to change its properties.


Y-Axis

The axis against which series elements are plotted, normally the vertical axis, except in rotated charts. Click a chart, then right-click the axis to change its properties.


Text box

A floating text object drawn using the Text tool [image] from the toolbar. Double-click the text box to edit the text within it. To customize the text box, right-click it, then choose the Text box properties command.


SHORTCUT.RTF


#

Toolbar [image] [image] (Chart and drawing tools)


#

Toolbar [image] [image] (Selection formatting toolbar)


#

Toolbar [image] [image] QuickSort button (Selection formatting toolbar)


#

Toolbar [image] [image] (Notebook toolbar)


#

Toolbar [image] [image] (Notebook toolbar)


#

Toolbar [image] [image] (Data manipulation toolbar)


#

Toolbar [image] [image] (Data manipulation toolbar)


#

Toolbar [image] [image] (Data manipulation toolbar)


#

Toolbar [image] [image] (Objects Sheet)


#

Keyboard [image] CTRL+Z

Toolbar


#

Keyboard [image] CTRL+X

Toolbar


#

Keyboard [image] CTRL+C

Toolbar


#

Keyboard [image] CTRL+V

Toolbar


#

Right-click the notebook sheet, then click Paste special


#

Toolbar [image] [image] (Selection formatting)


#

Toolbar


#

Toolbar [image] [image] (Selection formatting)


#

Keyboard [image] Del

Toolbar [image] [image] (Selection formatting)


#

Select all button (upper left of notebook window)


#

Toolbar [image] [image] (Data manipulation toolbar)


#

Toolbar [image] [image] (Data manipulation toolbar)


#

Keyboard [image] CTRL+F


#

Keyboard [image] F5


#

Keyboard [image] CTRL+N

Toolbar


#

Keyboard [image] CTRL+O

Toolbar


#

Keyboard [image] CTRL+F4


#

Keyboard [image] CTRL+S

Toolbar


#

Keyboard [image] CTRL+P

Toolbar


#

Keyboard [image] ALT+F4; right-click the application bar


#

Keyboard [image] [image]; F12


#

Keyboard [image] F12


#

Keyboard [image] [image]; F12


#

Toolbar [image] Format [image] SpeedFormat


#

Toolbar [image] [image] (Notebook toolbar)


#

Toolbar [image] [image] Bring forward (Chart and drawing tools toolbar)

  Send backward (Chart and drawing tools toolbar)

  Bring to front (Chart and drawing tools toolbar)

  Send to back (Chart and drawing tools toolbar)


#

Toolbar [image] [image] Align left

  Align right

  Align top

  Align bottom


#

Toolbar [image] [image] Horizontal center

  Vertical center


#

Toolbar [image] [image] Horizontal space

  Vertical space


#

Toolbar


#

Toolbar


#

Toolbar


#

Toolbar [image] [image] (Objects Sheet)


#

Keyboard [image] F11


#

Toolbar [image] [image] (Experts and numeric tools toolbar)


#

Toolbar [image] [image] (Objects Sheet)


#

Toolbar [image] [image] (Objects Sheet)


#

Toolbar


#

Keyboard [image] CTRL+F3


#

Keyboard [image] ALT+F3


#

Toolbar [image] [image] (Notebook toolbar)


#

Toolbar [image] [image] (Chart and drawing tools toolbar)


#

Toolbar [image] [image] (Chart and drawing tools toolbar)


#

Toolbar [image] [image] (Chart and drawing tools toolbar)


#

Toolbar [image] [image] (Chart and drawing tools toolbar)


#

Toolbar [image] [image] (Chart and drawing tools toolbar)


#

Toolbar [image] [image] (Chart and drawing tools toolbar)


#

Toolbar [image] [image] (Chart and drawing tools toolbars)


#

Toolbar [image] [image] (Chart and drawing tools toolbars)


#

Toolbar [image] [image] (Chart and drawing tools toolbars)


#

Toolbar [image] [image] (Chart and drawing tools toolbar)


#

Toolbar [image] [image] (Chart and drawing tools toolbar)


#

Toolbar [image] [image] (Chart and drawing tools toolbar)


#

Toolbar [image] [image] (Chart and drawing tools toolbar)


#

Keyboard [image] DEL


#

Keyboard [image] F11


#

Toolbar [image] [image] (Objects Sheet)


#

Toolbar [image] [image] (Light Table)


#

Toolbar [image] [image] (Objects Sheet)


#

Keyboard [image] CTRL+F1


#

Keyboard [image] ALT+F2


#

Keyboard [image] SHIFT+F2


#

Keyboard [image] CTRL+F2

Toolbar [image] [image] (Notebook toolbar)


#

Toolbar [image] [image] (Data manipulation toolbar)


#

Toolbar [image] [image] (Selection formatting toolbar)


#

Keyboard [image] ALT+F5


#

Keyboard [image] SHIFT+F5

Button


#

Keyboard [image] SHIFT+F5

Button


Lets you specify cells as fractions. Quattro Pro accepts a fraction when you type it unless it could be confused as a date. In this case, select blank cells and apply this Fraction setting before you enter fractions in the cells. Also, you can click this setting to set a denominator instead of having fractions appear as reduced fractions.


Enable this button if you do not want to change the original spreadsheet name. You will not be able to access formulas and macros if the name is not recognized by Quattro Pro.


Enable this button if you do not want to rename the spreadsheet so that it contains characters that Quattro Pro recognizes.


Specifies the spreadsheet name that contains characters not recognized by Quattro Pro.


Displays the amended spreadsheet name.


Click this to convert the embedded information to a different type.

This is useful if you no longer have the program that was used to create the information, or if you want to display the information in a different format than the original type allows.


Click this to open the embedded information by using a different program that is compatible with the original object type.


Lists the available file types that the information can be converted to.


Specifies whether the embedded object will appear in the document as an icon or whether the actual contents of the object will always be visible.

If you select Display as icon, you can open the object in your document by double-clicking its icon.


Describes whether the information will be converted to a different file type, what that file type will be, and how the information will appear in the current document.

This is useful for experimenting with different conversions without actually implementing them into your document. To implement the conversion, click OK.


Displays the type of object that is selected.


Displays the icon that will represent the embedded or linked information in your document.


Click this to change the icon that represents the embedded information in your document.


Lists the available applications in which the object can be edited.


Aligns the label above the bar.


Aligns the label at the top of the bar.


Aligns the label in the middle of the bar.


Aligns the label at the bottom of the bar.


Lets you display a Help topic for this dialog box. For specific help, click [image], and click any control.


Lets you specify cells as fractions. Apply the Fraction format before you enter fractions in cells if the fraction could be confused as a date. Use this format to set a denominator instead of having fractions appear as reduced fractions.


Lets you set the horizontal alignment of entries within cells.

General [image] right-aligns values and left-aligns labels.

Left [image] left-aligns all types of entries.

Right [image] right-aligns all types of entries.

Center [image] centers all types of entries.

Center across block [image] centers text over the selected cells.

Indent [image] moves text in from the edge of the cell.


Lets you set the vertical alignment of entries within cells.

Top [image] places entries at the top of the cell

Center [image] places entries in the middle of the cell

Bottom [image] places entries at the bottom of the cell


Enable the Wrap text check box to wrap entries that do not fit horizontally in a cell onto the next line within the cell. Enable the Join cells check box to combine the selected cells into one cell.


Enable the Protect option to prevent cell content from being edited, replaced, or deleted. Columns or rows that contain protected cells cannot be deleted. If sheet protection is enabled, only unprotected cells can be changed.

Enable the Unprotect option to remove protection from the active cells.


Data input constraints

General [image] allows all entries in cells.

Labels only [image] allows only label entries in cells; dates, times, or numbers are converted to labels.

Dates only [image] allows only date or time entries in cells; if you type labels or numbers an error message appears.


Lets you choose a border type.


Lets you choose a color.


Enable to hide gridlines in cells that contain a Fill color.


Protects all cell entries in the active spreadsheet, except those specifically unprotected with the cell Constraints property.


Protects all objects in the active spreadsheet, except those specifically unprotected with the object Protection property.


Enable to use the system color for the object. For example, displays Notebook sheet tabs as white and Rectangles in dialog boxes as gray with black frames.


Lets you set the color of the object if the Use system color check box is disabled.


Shows all objects on the notebook, such as floating charts.


Shows only the outline of objects. Select this option to save time when scrolling or printing.


Hides all objects. Select this option for fast scrolling or printing.


Automatically recalculates formulas between keystrokes. This does not interrupt your work. Quattro Pro always finishes recalculation before saving, extracting, or printing the notebook.


Sets the number of times Quattro Pro recalculates formulas; enter a number from 1 (the default) to 255. If the notebook contains formulas with circular references, increasing this number can result in more accurate calculations. If no circular references exist and recalculation order is set to Natural, the iteration count is ignored.


Enable the Yes button to make this notebook a macro library notebook. The No button removes the macro library property from the notebook


Enable the Yes button to make this notebook a system notebook. You can place macros in this notebook that will always be available while Quattro Pro is running. The No button removes the system notebook property from the notebook.


Returns the notebook palette to the default Quattro Pro settings.


Lets you apply the style you have changed to all new notebooks. For example, if you can change properties for the Normal style, all new notebooks created that use this style will have the new properties you set.


Changes the selected standard Quattro Pro toolbar back to its default settings. You cannot reset custom toolbars.


Enable to have the regression line pass through the y-axis at zero. If you do not specify the y-intercept as a zero, Quattro Pro generates a y-intercept from an internal set of variables.


Type the coordinates for the source cells to consolidate, or select cells from the notebook. then click Add to add the cells to the source cells list. Use the Browse button to select cells in another notebook.


Lists the cells on which the consolidation operates.


Adds an entry to the source cells list. You can browse to choose cells from another notebook.


Removes an entry from the source cells list so it will not be part of the consolidation.


Type the file you want to use, or click to select a file.


Type the cell coordinates, or click to select cells from the notebook.


Specifies the operation to perform on the source cells. These operations work like spreadsheet functions of the same name.


Specifies the destination cells to contain the consolidation results. The destination cells can contain column and/or row labels.


Enable if the source cells contain labels in the top row. Quattro Pro consolidates data from different cells based on the column labels. Destination cells can also contain column labels.


Enable if the source cells contain labels in the left column. Quattro Pro consolidates data from different cells based on the row labels. Destination cells can also contain row labels.


Lists saved consolidation setups. To switch to another consolidation setup, choose a name from this list.


Saves the current consolidation setup (source cells, destination cells, and operator). Consolidation setups save with the active notebook.


Deletes the selected setup in the Consolidations list.


Determines whether consolidation results appear as formulas or values.


Performs the consolidation of the source cells and places the results in the specified destination cells.


Closes the dialog box.


Type a title for the budget. If the budget contains multiple spreadsheets, the title appears on each spreadsheet.


Type a subtitle for the budget. If the budget contains multiple spreadsheets, the subtitle appears on each spreadsheet.


Specifies the starting cell of the budget. Type the cell address or select a cell from the notebook.


Click an option to divide the budget into multiple spreadsheets by Month, Quarter, or Year. Click None to create the budget on one spreadsheet.


Lets you specify where to place row and column summary cells; these are the cells containing formulas (average, subtotal, total, and so on) that summarize data in detailed cells.


Sets the distance in pixels between the left edge of the object and the left side of the window.


Sets the distance in pixels between the top edge of the object and the bottom edge of the window's title bar (or from the top of the chart background in the case of a drawn object).


Sets the width of the object in pixels.


Sets the height of the object in pixels.


Position relative to

Positions the child control relative to the sides of the parent control. Enable Top, Bottom, Left, or Right to unlock edges of the child control. If you move an edge of the parent control, unlocked edges of the child control move instead of resizing.


Displays the grid to help you position objects in the window.


Snaps the sides of objects to the grid when you move, resize, or align objects.


Wrapping text

Single line specifies that the text appears on one line. Disable Single line to wrap lines of text and enable the Word break option. Word break specifies word-wrapped lines (that is, lines of text that break between words, instead of in the middle of words).


Vertical position

Top places text flush against the top edge of the label background. Center vertically centers the text between the top and bottom of the background. It does not affect the horizontal position of the text. Bottom places text flush against the bottom of the background.


Horizontal position

Left places text flush against the left side of the label background. Center horizontally centers the text between the left and right sides of the label background. It does not affect the vertical position of the text. Right places text flush against the right side of the label background.


Enables the control when the dialog is displayed from the Quattro Pro desktop.


Sets the title of the object's Help dialog.


Briefly describes the function of the object. This can be identical to the Help Line property text.


This optional field specifies the Winhelp context string of the relevant Help topic. The context string must be followed immediately by the @ symbol and Help file name.


Displays internal bitmaps used by Quattro Pro. Select one from the list, or type the name of another bitmap.


Sets the amount of time in milliseconds that Quattro Pro waits before moving the scroll box in response to a user action (clicking a scroll bar, holding down the mouse button while pointing to a scroll arrow, and so on).


Click the thickness you want for the box surrounding the object. Click None if you do not want a surrounding box.


Displays a black offset border that gives the object a 3-D appearance.


Makes the floating object transparent, this lets you see notebook cells beneath the object. If you are working with a chart, you can also make objects within the chart pane transparent.


Retains the proportions of the floating chart, even when you bring this chart into a chart window. This is the default aspect ratio when creating a floating chart using the Chart tool.


Gives the correct proportions to a chart that will be part of an on-screen slide show. This is the default aspect ratio when creating a chart using Insert [image] Chart.


Gives the correct proportions to a chart that will be sent to a slide service for processing into 35mm slides.


Shows the chart as it will look when printed with the current page setup.


Adjusts the chart display to fill the chart window and fit the area designated for the floating chart. Full extent assumes that charts and drawings are at their proper size when displayed full-screen; these elements are scaled down in smaller views, while fonts stay the same size no matter where they are displayed. This is why charts with the full extent aspect ratio often look different on a spreadsheet than they do in a chart window.


Turns the grid display on and off. Display grid and Snap to grid work independently. For example, you can place objects using Snap to grid even when the grid display is turned off.


Automatically aligns objects with the nearest grid point when you create or move them. You can align several objects by placing them close to the same grid line. The grid forces the objects to align with the grid and with each other. Display grid and Snap to grid work independently. For example, you can place objects using Snap to grid even when the grid display is turned off.


Controls the distance between the dotted grid lines. The size is measured as a percentage of the chart window area. The default grid size, 4, means the distance between each grid line is 4% of the edge it intersects, with 25 increments in each direction (a 25 x 25 grid). The grid has the fewest guidelines when the grid size is set to 25 (a 4 x 4 grid), and the densest guidelines when the grid size is set to 1 (a 100 x 100 grid).


Selects or changes the data series to be plotted. Enter a series, or select cells of numeric data from the notebook.


Places labels over bars in bar charts, and over data points in line and area charts. Enter a series, or click to select cells with labels from the notebook.


Lets you enter legend text (or the coordinates where legend text is located), to override the legend label that is placed in the chart by the series.


Changes the chart type of the series you right-clicked. Use this option to create a custom combination chart. You can override a series on 2-D bar, line, variance, and high-low charts. (High-low charts restrict the override to the fifth series or greater.)


Lets you plot the selected series against the primary y-axis or secondary y-axis. This option is available only for 2-D bar, line, variance, and high-low charts.


Specify Aggregation, Moving Average, Linear Fit, or Exponential Fit as the analysis method to use. None (the default) disables the Analytical chart.


Indicates what the series values represent, or what period exists in the series. For example, if the series contains weekly information, choose Weeks. The aggregation period must be larger than the series period.


Indicates the number of data values to combine for each point on the chart. Choose a period, or type in a number (for example, 14 to represent 2 weeks) to use an arbitrary period. The aggregation period must be larger than the series period.


Select the function you want to use (sum, average, standard deviation, variance, minimum, or maximum) to combine data points. These functions are the same as the identically named spreadsheet functions.


Creates a table of analysis data. Enter the upper left cell of the table's location in the Table edit field, or select a cell from the notebook.


Displays the method of analysis for the specified series in the legend. Make sure the Legend property is set to display a legend.


Specifies a number of points to average. Enter a number, or use the scroll bar.


Select Standard or None. Standard numerically places greater emphasis, or weight, on recent points (closest to the point it is working with) and less weight on older points (farthest from the most recent point). The oldest point is multiplied by 1, the next is multiplied by 2, and so on; the most recent point is multiplied by the specified Period.


Sets the style of the markers.


Enable this check box to match the marker size to the size of the chart with a default weight of 5.


Sets the size of the markers relative to the line. When AutoSize is enabled, the weight is 5. Increase or decrease the weight to change the size of the markers. To hide markers, set the marker weight to zero.


Enable to turn on the display of each chart pane border. To set the color and thickness of the border, change the Border settings property.


Enable to display the grid in front of bars and other chart markers.


Controls the thickness of the bars. When Quattro Pro draws a bar chart, it divides the axis spaces evenly between the bars (reserving some of the axis area for spaces between the bars). The initial bar width depends on how many values you plot. To make the bars thinner, move the Bar Width Percentage slider to the left; to make the bars thicker, move the slider to the right.


Controls the amount of extra space between the bars and the right and left sides of the chart to give your chart a more polished look.


Determines how much the bars in a series cover the bars of the previous series. There are three settings: None (bars are placed side-by-side), Partial (bars overlap by 50% of their width), and Full (each series is drawn directly on top of the last one).


Sets the highest and lowest values for the axis scale. (To set a descending scale, reverse the high and low values.)


Sets the increase (or in descending scales, the decrease) in values between major tick marks. This option also affects the spacing between major grid lines.


Specifies how many minor tick marks and minor grid lines to place between major tick marks. (The default style for minor grid lines is "no lines," so you will not see minor grid lines unless you select a different Line style option for the Minor grid style property.)


Sets the scale to Normal or Log (logarithmic). In a normal scale, the value of each major division is exactly the same. In a logarithmically scaled axis, each major division of the axis represents 10 times the value of the previous major division. A logarithmic scale is useful when you are plotting series with wide ranges in magnitude.


Simplifies the axis labels where numbers on the axis scale are 1000 or greater. Show Units displays only the first characters of the label and automatically adds the appropriate units title in parentheses along the y-axis: "(thousands)" or "(millions)" for example.


Refers to the scale that is automatically calculated from your data. If you change High, Low, Increment, or No. of minors settings, this option becomes disabled. If you enable it, it clears your changes and resets the scale to Quattro Pro's original settings.


Displays no tick marks.


Extends tick marks to the left of the y-axis.


Extends tick marks to the right of the y-axis.


Makes tick marks cross the axis.


Turns axis label display off and on.


Specifies the name of the control to which you want to add link commands.


Enable to send changes from the source to the target whenever the source's value changes, rather than waiting until the user closes the dialog box.


Extends tick marks below the x-axis.


Extends tick marks above the x-axis.


Places the labels in a single row, or in two or three staggered rows.


Eliminates some of the labels when label text would otherwise overlap.


Lets you choose how many evenly-spaced labels to eliminate, to prevent overlap. If you enter 2, for example, the first label is displayed, the second and third labels are skipped, the fourth label is displayed, the fifth and sixth labels are skipped, and so on.


Lets you specify the maximum number of characters displayed in a label. Any additional characters will not appear in the label.


Specifies the amount of space between the pie or doughnut and the exploded slice. The space is measured as a percentage of the radius (the default value is 25%).


Places text labels next to the data labels. (If you have an x-axis series defined for the chart, the x-axis series appears in this edit field.)


Shows the values from the spreadsheet, in dollars.


Shows the data as a percentage of the value of the whole series.


Shows the actual data that appears on the spreadsheet.


No value labels appear next to the slice.


Turns tick mark display off and on. Be sure to turn this option off if you do not have a label series defined, and if you set Data label to None.


Quattro Pro can add other features to a map. These features are called overlays because they can be laid on top of each other, like overhead transparencies or tracing paper.

Overlays should be appropriate for the current map. For example, an overlay of U.S. Interstate Highways is of no use in a map of Japan.


Specifies the upper left cell where Quattro Pro places the resulting output table. Type a cell address, or select a cell from the notebook.


Specifies the cells to analyze. Type the cell coordinates, or select cells from the notebook.


Specifies whether data in the input cells is grouped by Row or Column.


Enable if the first row or column of the input cells contains labels; the labels will be used in the output cells. If the input cells you specified do not contain labels, do not enable this check box; Quattro Pro generates appropriate column and row labels for the output table.


Enable to include a column in the output table for standard error values.


Specifies the values to smooth. Type the cell coordinates, or select cells from the notebook. The input cells must be either a single column or row; they must not contain labels.


Specifies the first column or row of numeric data to compare. Type the cell coordinates, or select cells from the notebook.


Specifies the second column or row of numeric data to compare. Type the cell coordinates, or select cells from the notebook.


Specifies the upper left cell where Quattro Pro starts the resulting output table. Type a cell address, or select a cell from the notebook. The table will extend to the right and downward as needed. If there are not enough values to forecast a value, Quattro Pro returns NA (Not Available).


Specifies the cells to sample. Type the cell coordinates, or select cells from the notebook. For periodic sampling of cells with multiple columns, Quattro Pro samples each column in order from left to right.


Enable if the first row of both Variable 1 Input and Variable 2 Input contains labels; the labels will be used in the output cells. If the input cells you specified do not contain labels, do not enable this box; Quattro Pro generates appropriate column and row labels for the output table.


Sets the expected difference between input variable means; the default is 0.


Pivots the chart on its base. You can adjust the rotation to any angle between zero and 90 degrees. The default setting is 30 degrees.


Views a chart from different heights. You can adjust the height to any angle between zero and 90 degrees. The default setting is 30 degrees.


Makes objects in the distance appear smaller than objects that are close. As you increase the Perspective setting, chart objects that are closest to your view get larger in proportion to objects that are farther away, and the chart looks somewhat distorted. When perspective is off, you view the chart at an ideal distance, and there is no distortion. When you enable Perspective, a slider bar for adjusting the amount of perspective appears.


Adjusts the distance between the front and back of the chart. When depth is set to 166, the top and base of a 3-D bar are square.


Proportional to width when Quattro Pro draws a chart with the standard 3-D view settings. This height is given the value 100. To increase the proportion of height to width, move the slider to the right. To decrease the height to width ratio, move the slider to the left.


Applies changes without closing the dialog box.


Returns settings to the default Quattro Pro settings.


Hides or reveals the left wall.


Hides or reveals the back wall of the chart.


Hides the area under the series display.


Gives the chart 3-D walls. When thick walls are turned off, the walls look thin, like sheets of paper. This option applies to all walls in the chart.


Use the scroll bar to pick a number from 0 to 32 to set the relative size of the bullets, or type a number in the edit field. Set bullet size to 0 to hide bullets.


Sets the amount of spacing that appears before the bullet character in a series. Type a percentage of average character width (based on the Text font property setting), or use the scroll bar to pick a value from 0 to 500.


Sets the amount of spacing that appears after the bullet character in a series. Type a percentage of average character width (based on the Text font property setting), or use the scroll bar to pick a value from 0 to 500.


Enable to separate bullets from their text, making items in the list easier to read. In a hanging indent, the first line is indented, then the rest of the lines for that bullet are indented farther.


Shows row borders when enabled; hides row borders when disabled.


Shows column borders when enabled; hides column borders when disabled.


Shows horizontal grid lines when enabled; hides horizontal grid lines when disabled.


Shows vertical grid lines when enabled; hides vertical grid lines when disabled.


Maintains the same aspect ratio as the cells in the notebook cells. Disable this option to fit cells in the specified box, making each cell the same width.


Type the file you want to use, or select a file.


Enable to convert the colors in the chart to levels of gray. This is useful if you plan to import this file into a program that can accept only gray scale .TIF files.


Customize settings dialog box

Keyboard tab


Click to access dialog boxes for making program buttons and buttons to launch macros.


Displays all the available commands. Double-click a command category to open it.


The name of the current keyboard assignment set.


Shows the new keyboard combination to assign to the command. Press BACKSPACE to make a correction.

You can have up to four layers of keystrokes. For example, the key combination CTRL + ALT + 1, 2, 3, 4 is accomplished by holding down the CTRL and ALT keys, then pressing the 1, 2, 3, and 4 keys in succession.


Enable to delete conflicting shortcut key.


Enable to navigate.


Displays any existing shortcut keys for the current command.


Displays the current shortcut file.


Assigns the new keyboard combination to the current command.


Deletes the selected shortcut keys.


 Loads a shortcut file (*.SCK)


Saves the current settings as a shortcut file (*.SCK).


Displays the commands, table assignment, key stroke combination, and description associated with each shortcut key.


Resets the keyboard assignments to their original configuration.


Gives a short description of the selected shortcut.


Click this tab to customize a keyboard.


Settings dialog box

Display tab


Enable to display column letters or row numbers when you move the scroll bar in a notebook window.


Settings dialog box

International tab


Sets the default file extension to use when you do not specify a file extension with file-handling commands.


Lists the available numeric formats.


Sets the default file extension to use in the file open dialog box.


Uses the default spreadsheet notation syntax for cell references in 3-D selections. In this syntax, spreadsheet references appear first, followed by a colon and the cell coordinates. For example, A..C:B4..D9 refers to the cells B4..D9 on spreadsheets A, B, and C.


Uses an alternative spreadsheet notation syntax for cell references in 3-D selections. In this syntax, each corner of the 3-D selection is specified with the spreadsheet reference included. For example, A:B4..C:D9 refers to the cells B4..D9 on spreadsheets A, B, and C.


Customize settings dialog box

Toolbars tab


Click to access dialog boxes for making program buttons and buttons to launch macros.


Click a category to change the selection of buttons to the right. Many of the categories correspond to Quattro Pro menus.


Choose the property bar to customize from the list box. Drag the appropriate toolbar item icon to the property bar on your screen to add it to that property bar.


 Gives a description of the selected button.


 Displays a selection of buttons you can add to a toolbar. When you point to a button, a description of it appears at the bottom left of the tab. Drag a button from the Buttons panel to a toolbar.


 Returns you to the main Toolbars dialog box.


Customize settings dialog box

Toolbars sub dialog box


Takes you to the Customize settings dialog box where you can create or customize toolbars.


toolbars options button


Adjust the slider to change the size of the toolbar buttons.


Adjust the slider to change the width of the border that surrounds the buttons in toolbars.


Enable to display only the button image in the toolbar.


Enable to display only the name of the button in the toolbar.


 Enable to display the name of the button beneath the button image in the toolbar.


Enable to show titles on floating toolbars.


Customize settings dialog box

menu tab


Gives a description of the selected command.


Click to access dialog boxes for making program buttons and buttons to launch macros.


Displays the available commands. Double-click a command category to open it.


Adds the selected command to the menu.


Removes the selected command from the menu.


Adds a separating line to a menu below the current selection.


Adds a new menu.


Moves the current menu or menu entry up.


Moves the current menu or menu entry down.


Choose the notebook component for which you want to customize a menu.


Displays the current menu structure. Double-click a menu or submenu to open it.


Resets the menu assignments to their original configuration.


Scenario Manager dialog box


Lets you create a new scenario group, rename a scenario group, set the scenario capture area to notebook, sheet or cells, or delete a scenario group.


Scenario group settings dialog box


Enable if you want the Scenario Manager to track all cell operations internally; no scenario changes are recorded. Do not enable if you are using the Scenario Manager for version control. If this check box is disabled, the scenarios register any moves, insertions, and deletions.


Enable to specify the spreadsheet where you want the Scenario Summary Report to appear.


CrossTab Report dialog box


SOURCE DATA The data you want to summarize in a CrossTab report. You can select the cells where your notebook database is located by typing in the location or using the Pointer.


DESTINATION The spreadsheet where you want to place your CrossTab report. The default destination is the next available, unprotected spreadsheet. You can select the cells by typing in the location or using the pointer.


Imports a predesigned CrossTab report from an Online Analytical Processing (OLAP) data source. You must connect to your OLAP server before you can import a report.


Changes how your CrossTab report displays. Data fields aligned by row appear vertically in the report. Alignment by row is the default and is easier to view on-screen.


Changes how your CrossTab report displays. Data fields aligned by columns appear horizontally in the report. Alignment by row is the default and is easier to view on-screen.


Lists all the fields from the source data with which you can build a CrossTab report. You can drag fields to positions in the Layout section. Positions in the Layout area can have more than one field but a field cannot appear more than once in each position.


Fields in the Pages position appear in the upper left corner of the CrossTab report. In the report, these fields have list boxes from which you can choose a field item to view. Dragging a field to the Pages position is optional.


Fields in the Columns position appear horizontally along the top of the CrossTab report. You must drag at least one field into the Columns position to create a CrossTab report.


Fields in the Rows position appear vertically along the left side of the CrossTab report. You must drag at least one field into the Rows position to create a CrossTab report.


Fields in Data position contain the data to analyze in the CrossTab report. Data fields with labels are summarized (by default) by a count of the labels while data fields with values are summarized (by default) by a sum of the values. You must drag at least one field into the Data position to create a CrossTab report.


Lets you manipulate the CrossTab report. You can rename the report, modify the report's data by showing row and column summaries, and manipulate the report's formatting by centering labels across a block of cells.


Takes you to the CrossTab data sources dialog box where you can connect to an OLAP provider to import OLAP data and create OLAP CrossTab reports.


CrossTab Options


Lets you change the name of the CrossTab report. The default report name is CrossTab Table 1. If you generate several reports from your source data, the report names must be unique.


Displays the totals and grand totals for the column data.


Displays the totals and grand totals for the row data.


Verifies the source data when the report is opened and updates the data, if it has changed.


Specifies the label to appear in the report when a cell is empty. You can enter a custom label, such as an asterisk, or choose from the available presets in the adjoining list box.


Displays the character that appears in the report if there are empty cells in the source data. You can enter your own character, or choose from the available presets.


Available only when working with OLAP CrossTab reports. Enable the check box to place drill down and roll up buttons in the report. Use the drill down and roll up buttons to navigate through the report.


Enable to apply a preset format to the fields and data, making the report easier to read. The check box is enabled by default.


Enable to maintain the numeric format from the source data, such as currency.


Enable to center the fields names (labels) across the column of data. By default, field names are right-aligned.


CrossTab Report Field dialog box


Represents the Rows position. Fields in Rows position appear horizontally along the left side of the CrossTab report. You can move the field to a different position in the report by clicking on the desired position icon. The field's active position is enabled when the dialog box opens.


Represents the Columns position. Fields in the Columns position appear vertically along the top of the CrossTab report. You can move the field to a different position in the report by clicking on the desired position icon. The field's active position is enabled when the dialog box opens.


Represents the Data position. Fields in Data position contain the data to analyze in the CrossTab report. You can move the field to a different position in the report by clicking on the desired position icon. The field's active position is enabled when the dialog box opens.


Represents the Pages position. Fields in the Pages position appear in the upper left corner of the CrossTab report. You can move the field to a different position in the report by clicking on the desired position icon. The field's active position is enabled when the dialog box opens.


Displays the name of the field that you are modifying. You can change the field name by typing in a new one in the Label edit field.


Performs various statistical and numerical analyses on data. You can choose from the many field summary options, including sum, count, and average. Only fields in the Data position can be summarized.


Displays a list of the field items for each field. You can enable a field item's check box so that the field item does not appear in the report.


Lets you summarize and analyze the data by comparing the field data to the whole. You can select from many different data comparison options, including percentage of total, percentage difference from total, and percentage of row.


Lets you select the field from which to extract detailed data comparisons.


Lets you select the field item from the field on which you want to base the data comparisons.


CROSSTAB REPORT TYPE DIALOG BOX


Enable this button to import an OLAP (online analytical processing) CrossTab report. OLAP data sources can contain large amounts of data.


Enable this button to create a CrossTab report using data stored in a Quattro Pro notebook.


SOURCE DATA EDIT FIELD  Click the Pointer button to specify the notebook location where your data is stored.


OLAP DATA SOURCE EXPLORER DIALOG BOX


Lets you choose a data source to browse. The directory tree appears in the window.


Lets you move up a level from the selected data.


Opens the Find dialog box to enable specific data searches.


OLAP Properties dialog box


under construction


DATABASE FORM dialog box


CELLS  Specifies the cells and notebook where your notebook database is located. You can select the cells by typing in the location or using the Pointer.


search records dialog box


FIRST RECORD BUTTON Takes you to the first record in the database.


RECORD BACK BUTTON Takes you to the previous record in the database.


RECORD FORWARD BUTTON Takes you to the next record in the database.


LAST RECORD BUTTON Takes you to the last record in the database.


FIELDS Shows the database fields that you can search for to find specific records.


CLEAR BUTTON Clears the search criteria.


REVERT BUTTON When editing, if you do not want to save your changes, click Revert to reinsert the original information in the record.


EDIT BUTTON  Lets you change or modify any of the records in the database.


NEW BUTTON  Lets you add a new record to the database. Type in the information first, then click New when you are finished. The record is insert at the end of the database.


Edit records dialog box


SEARCH BUTTON  Lets you search the database for records that match your search criteria. You can use wildcards, and search formulas in your search criteria.


SLIDER This is a tool you can use to navigate through the database records. As you drag the Slider across its bar, Quattro Pro displays the record number above the bar. You can drag the Slider from the first record to the last and can stop at any record.


Quick Columns Expert dialog box


Specify the type of text you are importing, and Quattro Pro will parse it automatically.

•	Automatic [image] Quattro Pro determines the parse.

•	Delimited auto [image] Quattro Pro parses text with delimiters such as commas, tabs, and so on.

•	Fixed width auto [image] Quattro Pro parses text lined up in fixed-width columns.


Click this button to specify options for parsing an individual row.

•	Parse (the default) parses the row.

•	Skip skips the row.

•	Label copies the row to the destination cells as an unparsed label.


Click the Break data flow button to insert a row, column, or spreadsheet into your parsed text file.


Click the Merge data control button to remove the delimiter and therefore, the column break. The data merges into the first cell selected.


Click the Transpose data control button to switch columns with rows.


Click the Delimiter to text button to remove columns and move the selected text into the first cell selected. However, the delimiter remains to separate text.


Click the Revert text button to restore the original parse.


Parse settings custom


Data enclosed by the text qualifier you choose here is always parsed as a label.


Enable if the text file contains lines that were wrapped onto a second line by the application that generated them.


Enable the Join broken line check box if the text file contains lines that were wrapped onto a second line by the application that generated them.

For example, if the text was generated by an application that wrapped text lines that exceeded 80 characters, check this option and enter 80. The QuickColumns Expert will unwrap the lines before parsing.


Saves the current parse settings. Quattro Pro saves parse settings in files that end with a .QPX extension.


Web Query options dialog box


Enable to save the Web query results as a Web link. This link lets you update the Web query results either manually or automatically.


Enable to retrieve only Web query data that contains the HTML table tag.


Enable to automatically size columns to fit the Web query data.


Enable to retain the HTML formatting and layout of the Web query data when it is loaded in the notebook.


Enable to update the Web query data in the notebook each time you open the notebook file.


Create web query dialog box


Indicates the Uniform Resource Locator (URL) of the Web site from which you want to get query information.


Specifies the POST parameters to include in the Web query.


Creates the Web query after you enter a URL and specify the filename and location.


Web link options dialog box


 Specifies the cell or range of cells in the notebook where you want to insert the Web query.


Contains a measure of time for refreshing Web query data.


Enable to start refreshing Web query data at a specified time.


Contains the time of day to start refreshing Web query data.


Specifies that the time is either before (am) or after (pm) noon when you use a twelve hour time format.


Enable to end refreshing Web query data at a specified time.


Contains the time of day to end refreshing Web query data.


Specifies that the time is either before (am) or after (pm) noon when you use a twelve hour time format.


Enable to start refreshing Web query data on a specified day.


Contains the weekday to start refreshing Web query data.


Enable to end refreshing Web query data on a specified day.


Contains the weekday to end refreshing Web query data.


Wraps Web query data to the beginning of the specified cell range when it is updated and overwrites any previous data in the cell.


Clears the Web query data in the specified cell range when you update it by wrapping to the beginning of the cell range.


Inserts updated Web query data at the end of the cell range that you specified in your notebook.


Inserts updated Web query data at the beginning of the cell range that you specified in the notebook.


Enable to update Web query data in your notebook at a specified time interval.


Contains a unit of time for refreshing Web query data.


Publish to HTML options dialog box (name subject to change)


Enable to change the graphic type of selected charts to Graphic Interchange Format (*.GIF).


Enable to change the graphic type of selected charts to Joint Photographic Experts Group (*.JPG).


Enable to change the graphic type of selected charts to Portable Network Graphics (*.PNG).


Enable to display all cell ranges and charts selected to convert to HTML on one Web page.


Enable to display all cell ranges and charts selected to convert to HTML on a Web page using frames.


Enable to display all cell ranges and charts selected to convert to HTML on multiple Web pages.


Lets you manipulate the CrossTab report. You can rename the report, modify the report's data by showing row and column summaries, and manipulate the report's formatting by centering labels across a block of cells.


Enable to use the colors that are available with your Web browser.


Enable to use the color settings you select from the options shown below.


Changes the text color to the color you choose from the list box.


Changes the link color to the color you choose from the list box.


Changes the background page color to the color you choose from the list box.


Lets you customize the look of your HTML document by setting options such as page layout, graphic, type, and color.


Lets you enter the path and filename of the graphic file to use as wallpaper, or locate the file using the Browse button.


Break options dialog box (click on break data flow button from quick columns expert)


Enable to insert a row in your parsed text file.


Enable to insert a column in your parsed text file.


Enable to insert a spreadsheet in your parsed text file.


Enter parameter value dialog box


Enter the parameter value.


Run web query dialog box

Data tab


Displays the data retrieved from the Web query in a new notebook.


Displays the data retrieved from the Web query in the current notebook.


Enter the spreadsheet and cell address where you want to insert the Web query data or select the location using the Pointer button.


Enable to preview the results of the Web query before loading the information in the notebook.


Lets you customize the Web query by setting various options.


Run web query dialog box

Parameters tab


Lists any parameter names that have been specified in the Web query (*.IQY) file.


Enable to get the parameter value for the Web query e.g. stock quote, using a prompt string. The prompt string appears when you run the Web query.


Contains the prompt text string used to get the parameter value.


Enable to get the parameter value for the Web query e.g. stock quote, using the value in the text box.


Enter the parameter value for the Web query.


Enable to get the parameter value for the Web query e.g. stock quote, from a cell in the notebook.


 Enter the cell address that contains the parameter value for the query or select the cell using the Pointer button.


Button URL dialog box


Enter the URL of the Web page to which you want the button to link.


Save consolidation as dialog box


Lets you enter a name for the consolidation that you performed.


Spreadsheet Page setup dialog box

Paper type tab


Indicates page orientation. Portrait prints data vertically; landscape prints data horizontally.


Print margins tab


An arrow points to the margin you are modifying.


Named settings tab


Prints the selection according to the page setup settings.


Options tab


Adds lines between each cell selection you choose to print. Enter the number of lines to add in the text box.


Prints each cell selection on a new page.


Adds lines between each cell selection you choose to print. Enter the number of lines to add in the text box.


Includes any blank lines that exist between each cell selection you choose to print.


Collapses any blank lines that exist between each cell selection you choose to print.


Adds lines between each 3-D cell selection you choose to print. Enter the number of lines to add in the text box.


Prints each 3-D cell selection on a new page.


Adds lines between each 3-D cell selection you choose to print. Enter the number of lines to add in the text box.


Spreadsheet print dialog box

Print tab


Prints only the cells you specify.


Details tab


 Lets you set print detail options.


Lets you select the current printer, select the number of copies to print, and the print range.


Charts dialog box, All Insert, Form Control (button, radio button, check box etc.)


Enable to prevent other users from moving, sizing, changing, or deleting the chart or object.


The name used when referring to the control, in a macro, link command, or spreadsheet function.


Enable to print the chart object on the spreadsheet.


 Select a chart from the list of available charts in the notebook.


Select a color from the palette.


Lets you change the label text.


Sort options dialog box


Lets you choose which row to use as the heading and sort keys; any data following this row is sorted according to the sort keys you specify.


Bullet series dialog box


Line spacing tab


Sets the line spacing before the next bulleted line of text.


Sets the line spacing after the next bulleted line of text.


Bullet Style tab


Select a bullet style.


Scrollbar dialog box


Destination block tab


Destination block [image] specifies the target cells for an action, such as displaying a data selection from a list box.

Source block [image] specifies the cells where the control data originates.


Settings tab


Sets a value for the value at the top of the scroll bar.


Sets a value at the bottom of the scroll bar.


Enter the number of rows you want the scroll bar to jump instead of scrolling row by row.


Bar Series dialog box


Sets the style of riser used for the 3-D bar.


Sets the cross section (circle, square, hexagon, or octagon) of the riser type.


Select tables dialog box


Shows the path of the tables you want to import.


Set Criteria dialog box


Double-click the available fields you want to import.


Click an available field you want to import, then click >>.


Move selected fields you want to import up or down, or delete selected fields.


Set import options for fields you want to import.


Sets the query properties for the database table; you can join and filter fields.


Moves a selected field up in the list.


Moves a selected field down in the list.


Deletes a selected field from the list.


Specify a notebook destination for the import results.


Import Options dialog box


Enable to specify whether to allow duplicate rows in the data you are importing.


Enable to specify whether to include field names as column headings in the first row of data you are importing.


Enable to specify whether to keep the query definition the next time you import the database.


Query Properties dialog box


Select the field from the list box to filter or join in the imported database table.


Select the operator to use to join or filter the imported database table.


Specify the field's value you want to filter or join.


Enable to list the values of the field to filter or join.


Displays defined filters or joined tables for fields you want to import.


Adds another statement for additional fields you want to filter or join.


Adds an alternative statement for a value you want to filter.


Clears the highlighted statement to join fields or define filters.


Tools, Settings, Display tab


Enable to display the most recently opened documents at the end of the File menu.


CQTGCreateDlg


Lets you type in the name for the XML tag for a cell or a range of cells.


Displays defined XML tags.


Displays selected range.


Adds the XML tag to the Tag list box.


Deletes the tag selected in the Tag list box.


Deletes all the tags in the Tag list box.


Opens the Generate XML tags dialog box where you can specify for which rows, columns, or intersections that XML tags are generated.


Opens the Tag cells from labels dialog where you can specify that tag names be automatically generated based on the cell labels.


Opens the Tag table dialog box. Lets you output a list of all XML tags and their corresponding cell definitions.


CQTGLabelsDlg


Automatically generates XML tags for the cell immediately to the right of any valid cells in the selected range.


Automatically generates XML tags for any cells immediately below all valid cells in the selected range.


Automatically generates XML tags for the cells immediately to the left of any valid cells in the selected range.


Automatically generates XML tags for any cells immediately above all valid cells in the selected range.


CQTGLabSpcDlg


Creates an XML tag for each cell in the selected range, excluding the top row. The XML tags created are based on the labels in the top row.


Creates an XML tag for each cell in the selected range, excluding the left-most column. The XML tags created are based on the label in the left-most column.


Creates an XML tag for each cell in the selected range, excluding the bottom row. The XML tags created are based on the labels in the bottom row.


Creates an XML tag for each cell in the selected range, excluding the right-most column. The XML tags created are based on the label in the right-most column.


Creates a compound XML tag definition for each intersecting cell that includes a row and column label. The XML tag created incorporates both the row and column labels.


CQHyperLinkDlg


Specifies a custom name for the link.


Specifies the path or URL to the file you want to link to.


Enables Quattro Pro to search for the link using a relative path. This is useful if you move the file containing the link to a different directory.


Specifies a location to link to within the same notebook


Deletes the selected notebook link.


 CSummaryPage


Displays the filename.


CStatsPage


Specifies the folder where the notebook is stored.


Specifies the title of the file.


Specifies the date when the file was created.


 Specifies the date when the file was last saved.


 Specifies the user who last saved the file.


Specifies the current revision number of the file.


 CQAppDisplayPage


Enable to list keyboard shortcuts beside a menu item.


Enable to display formula markers, which denote a cell that contains a formula.


Enable to display comment markers, which denote a cell that contains a comment.


Enable to display Corel RealTime Preview, which lets you preview changes to data in a selected cell while you point to formatting options such as font type, size, color, background color, and borders.


CQAppIntlPage


Determines the default language for all applications in WordPerfect Office or for Quattro Pro only.


Enable to use the corresponding language setting in Regional Settings of the Windows Control Panel. See your Windows documentation for details.


Enable to use the language setting you specify for Quattro Pro only.


Select a language for the Quattro Pro user interface text. The language option lets you display your interface in the language you select from a list of languages. You must have another language version installed to change the interface language.


 CQAppCompPage


Lets you create or edit notebooks in a format compatible with other programs by selecting Quattro Pro 9, Quattro Pro 8, Microsoft Excel 97, Lotus 1-2-3, or custom settings. Depending on the program type selected, some or all of the following options are affected: default file type (or file extension), menu bar, 3-D syntax, notebook size, and spreadsheet tab display.


Enable to adopt the keystroke method Microsoft Excel 97 uses when calculating arrays


Specifies the type of menu bar to display in the notebook.


Specifies the number of spreadsheets to include in the notebook. The default number is 18,278.


Specifies the number of columns to display on each spreadsheet. The default number is 256.


Specifies the number of rows to display on each spreadsheet. The default number is 1,000,000.


Enable to use the Microsoft Excel spreadsheet naming conventions of Sheet1, Sheet2, and so forth.


Specifies the minimum number of spreadsheets to display on-screen. The actual number of spreadsheets in your notebook is the number you specify in the Sheets box.


 CQAppDevModePage


Lets you change the title in the Quattro Pro title bar.


Enable to turn on access to property settings and right-clicking.


Enable to turn off access to property settings and right-clicking.


CQSelectWindowDlg


Select the slide show to edit.


CGotoDialog


Specifies the named cell or group of cells last edited.


Specifies cell type to go to.


CQFuncPickDlg  QP->Insert->Function


Displays a description of the function you have selected.


CQScenarioMgrDlg QP->Tools->Scenario


Refreshes the scenario settings if changes are made.


Lets you apply highlight color to specified scenario cells.


Removes highlight color from specified scenario cells.


 CQScenarioGroupSettingsDlg


Lists the name of the scenario groups to modify.


OLE object dialog box


 Specifies the OLE server and type of OLE object.


 Specifies the source of the linked OLE object.


When enabled, the OLE object always reflects edits in the server application. When disabled, the object is updated only when you manually update it.


Tools, Workgroups,

Notebook sharing dialog box


Enable to share your notebook with others.


Enable to specify that changes to the notebook should only be updated when the notebook is saved.


Enable to specify how often you want changes automatically updated.


Use this list box to select the intervals (in minutes) at which Quattro Pro should update changes to the notebook.


If you specified that you want changes saved at regular intervals, enable this button to specify that Quattro Pro should save any changes made by you and other users.


If you specified that you want changes saved at regular intervals, enable this button to specify that the only changes you want saved at these intervals are those made by other users.


Enable to specify the number of days to keep a history of changes to a cell.


Use this list box to select the number of days for which you want to keep a change history.


Enable to have Quattro Pro prompt you that a conflict has occurred and display the conflicting changes. You can select which change to accept.


Enable to have Quattro Pro accept the last changes being saved when a conflict has occurred.


Workgroups, Select color dialog box


Choose a user name in order to assign a color that identifies that user's changes.


Choose a color for the specified user's changes.


User Status dialog box


 Specifies user names, the date and the time when each user opened the notebook, and the current status of the user.


Lets users send messages to each other. These messages appear when a user opens a shared notebook.


Conflict resolution dialog box (workgroups)


Specifies a change you made to a cell. The change conflicts with another user's recently saved changes.


Specifies the change made to the same cell by another user.


To accept your change, click the Accept mine button.


To accept the other change, click the Accept other button.


To revert to the original cell data, click the Keep original button.


To accept all of your changes and reject the others, click the Accept all mine button.


To accept all changes previously made by another user, click the Accept all Other's button.


Closes the Conflict resolution dialog box.


Object Link dialog box (Tools, Macros, Dialog Designer)


Link Events [image] Shows the event you want to trigger the link command.

Link Commands [image] Contains link commands (or actions) which allow you to send a value to a notebook cell or control, play a macro, close the dialog box, or change the zoom factor of the notebook.

Link Control Properties [image] Displays the available properties for the control being linked.

Object Selector List [image] Lets you specify a control or cell on which to act.

Selected Object Properties [image] Displays properties for the item selected in the Object Selector list.


Chart Title dialog box


Left aligns the chart title.


Center aligns the chart title.


Right aligns the chart title.


Help, About Quattro Pro

About QP dialog box


Opens the Serial/PIN dialog box where you can enter your Serial and personal identification number (PIN).


Opens the System info dialog box where you can get information about your system, display, printing, Corel EXEs & DLLs and system DLLs.


Displays copyright information regarding this product.


Displays licensing information regarding this product.


Displays copyright and licensing information regarding this product.


Displays the registration information about this product.


Serial number/PIN dialog box


Displays the serial number located on your proof of purchase.


Displays the personal identification number (PIN). This number is not needed to run the software but is necessary to receive customer support.


system info dialog box


Displays the system information for the chosen category.


Provides a list of system information categories, including: System, Display, Printing, Corel EXEs and DLLs, and System DLLs.


Saves all system information as SYSINFO.TXT. Once saved, a message box appears informing you of the location of the saved file.


copyright dialog box


Displays copyright and licensing information regarding this product.


Opens the Print dialog box, which allows you to print your work, modify print options, and change the printer and its properties.


color palette


Select a color from the color palette.


Insert chart dialog box (create a chart, right click and choose insert chart)


Select a chart to insert from the list of available charts you have created.


Slide dialog box (Slides, Edit Slide)

Slide Comment tab


 Change Link dialog box


Click the supporting file (spreadsheet file or Internet file) whose links you want to change.


(Enter the name of the notebook to which you want to change links. In the active notebook, all link references to the selected notebook change to the new notebook name.


Exponential smoothing


Specifies the upper left cell to start the smoothed values. If there are not enough values to forecast a value or calculate a standard error, NA (not available) displays.


enter password dialog box


Type a password for the file. Passwords can be up to 15 characters in length. The characters you type show on screen as pound signs (#####) so they are hidden from view.


Range picker (common to most dialog boxes)


The Range picker lets you select cells directly from the spreadsheet.


Format, Selection


Lets you format the number of decimal places, separate thousands with commas, and format how you want negative numbers to appear.


Lets you choose from a list of custom formats, edit an existing format, or add a new format.


Separates thousands with commas.


Lets you choose the pattern color for the cell, and the background color to appear behind the pattern.


Displays the list of available shortcut keys and their names. The current workspace is also displayed.


Specifies Quattro Pro commands which have corresponding keyboard shortcuts.


Opens the Save as dialog box which allows you to save your keyboard shortcuts as a text file.


A button can run a macro, launch another dialog box, or open your browser to a specific website.


A check box sends a value result to a cell on the spreadsheet when enabled or disabled.


A radio button sends a value result to a cell on the spreadsheet when enabled or disabled. In a group box, radio buttons provide a list of mutually exclusive choices, letting you enable one button at a time.


A group box acts as a container for other form controls, like radio buttons or check boxes. A group box allows multiple controls to be treated like a unit.


A list box lets you display a block of data from the spreadsheet as the list from which users can make a selection. The selection result can then be displayed elsewhere in the notebook.


A combo box is made up of an edit field with a down arrow. When a user clicks the arrow, the combo box displays a list from which a selection can be made.


A spin control is an edit field with scrolling arrows on its edge. The user clicks either arrow to increase or decrease the value displayed in the edit field, or the user can type a value in the edit field.


A label control lets you write text next to a control. For example, you can add a name or description next to a control to identify the control or give the user instructions on how to activate the control.


A scroll bar lets users pick a value from a range of integer values. You assign a maximum and minimum value range, and can assign even the number of increments that can be covered by clicking between the arrows (using the Page property setting).


An edit field allows users to enter text or data. This data can then be displayed in another cell on the spreadsheet.


The Graph Window

Every graph has its own window where you can set properties. It has two properties:

•	Aspect Ratio controls the proportion of width to height

•	Grid Options control display of an alignment grid and determine whether drawn objects and bitmaps automatically align with it.


Publish to Internet dialog box


Publishes spreadsheets as HTML; assigns HTML tags to the selected spreadsheet data and saves the file as a .HTML document .


Publishes spreadsheets as XML. XML start tags and end tags are inserted.


Lets you select a chart to publish to HTML.


Lists the cell ranges and charts to convert to HTML.


Exports the selected cell range as a table with HTML table formatting tags.


Exports the selected cell range as text and excludes the HTML table formatting tags.


When you enable this check box, Quattro Pro searches the selected file in the Save File text box and inserts the range of cells or charts only if it finds the HTML table or chart tags.


Automatically indicates the Save date according to your computer system's internal date.


Automatically enters the name stored in the Login setting of your computer.


Enter the complete email address to which Internet users can send mail.


Enter the title to appear in the title bar of the Web page.


Enable to put a horizontal line above the heading of the Web page.


Enable to put a horizontal line above the footer of the Web page.


Type the header text to appear as meta text in the heading section of the HTML source code.


Enter keywords related to your document or a description of the content to help users find the document when conducting a Web search. This text does not appear on the Web page but is included as hidden meta text in the heading section of the HTML source code.


CQDataTableDlg (Tools->NumericTools->What-if...)


Takes you to an Expert that walks you through the steps to creating a What-If table.


CQPastEspDlg (Edit->Paste Special...)


Copies the row or column sizes.


Copies objects from within Quattro Pro to the selected cell area. When you double-click the object, its source application launches.


Lets you control how formulas adjust when you copy them. Adjusts cells with absolute references when you copy them to the new location.


Copies only rows or columns that appear in the spreadsheet. Hidden rows or columns do not copy.


Enable if you do not want Quattro Pro to perform a mathematical operation when combining files.


Enable when you are using Paste special to combine two files and you want Quattro Pro to add incoming values to the existing values.


Enable when you are using Paste special to combine two files and you want Quattro Pro to subtract the incoming values from the existing values.


Enable when you are using Paste special to combine two files and you want Quattro Pro to multiply the incoming values by the existing values.


Enable when you are using Paste special to combine two files and you want Quattro Pro to divide the existing values by the incoming value.


CQPSerMgrDlg (Edit->Fill->QuickFill)


Renames a series.


CmdFndBkDlg (Edit->Find Page Breaks...)


Specifies the type of page break.


Searches for page breaks at intersections by paging down in the spreadsheet.


Searches for page breaks at intersections by paging to the right in the spreadsheet.


Lets you choose the type of page break you are searching for (e.g., hard page break, soft page break).


Locates the next page break.


Locates the previous page break.


Deletes the page break.


Closes the dialog box and makes the selected changes.


CQQpw50Dlg (File->SaveAs...(choose a non-quattropro format)->Save)


Saves the file in .QPW format.


Saves the file in the format specified in the Save as dialog box. You may lose formatting or other features not supported by the file format displayed on this button.


This icon represents a warning message.


CQP_DlgDCC_Macro


Type in the name of the macro button.


Lets you write a Tool Tip for a macro button.


CQSpaceDlg


 Lets you set the space in pixels between dialog box controls.


QParCseditDlg


CQParadoxDlg


Lists the spreadsheet data you are exporting to Paradox as fields.


Deletes fields marked with an asterisk, to restore the field marked to be deleted, press the Delete button again.


Lets you make any necessary changes to the field name.


Enable to specify the fields selected in the Fields list as a Text field type.


Enable to specify the fields selected in the Fields list as a Numeric field type.


Enable to specify the fields selected in the Fields s list as an Integer field type.


Enable to specify the field selected in the Fields list as a Date field type.


Enable to specify the field selected in the Fields list as a Currency field type.


Sets the maximum width of the field (in characters).


CQDBaseDlg


Enable to specify the field selected in the Fields list box as a Logical field type.


Lets you set the maximum number of decimal places for Numeric fields.


Lets you set the maximum width of the Text field (in characters).


Lets you set the maximum width of the Numeric field (in characters).


Active Notebook


Enable to specify that no password protection be applied to the notebook.


Enable to specify that users must enter a password to view and edit formulas in the notebook.


Enable to specify that users must enter a password to display and edit spreadsheets and the Objects sheet.


Enable to specify that users must enter a password to open the notebook.


Enable to specify that users can only edit the notebook through form controls.


Lets you change your password.


Lets you disable your password for the current session of notebook viewing and editing.


Type a value in the Full value field within the range of values displayed in the Range section.


Displays the range of values and the increment number available based on the color model used (for example, RGB, HLS, etc.).


Type in the appropriate object name.


Type in the appropriate label.


You can type a new number in the Enter number box or view the current number.


Format, Selection, Numeric Format, Custom Edit Dialog


Lets you edit the custom format selected in the Custom formats list.


Lets you add a new custom format based on the custom format selected in the Custom formats list.


Lets you type a new name for the custom format or edit the existing name.


Displays a summary of each format statement contained in the custom format. This includes any conditions, format codes, or adjustments.


Lets you choose a font type.


Turn bold on and off.


Turn italics on and off.


Turn underline on and off.


Turn superscript on and off.


Turn subscript on and off.


Turn strikeout on and off.


Changes the text color.


Lets you choose a numeric format code to insert in the Format box.


Lets you choose a date or time format code to insert in the Format box.


Lets you choose the first term of the If Condition. If you specify Value, or Other cell, type the value or cell location in the adjoining text box.


Lets you choose an operator to include in the If Condition.


Lets you choose the second term of the If Condition. If you specify Value, or Other cell, type the value or cell location in the adjoining text box.


Enable to change how a value displays in the notebook. This does not change the actual value.


Lets you choose the first term to adjust before displaying the final value in the notebook. If you specify Value, or Other cell, type the value or other cell in the adjoining text box.


Lets you choose the operator by which you want to adjust the first term.


Lets you choose the second term by which the operator adjusts the first term. If you specify Value, or Other cell, type the value or other cell in the adjoining text box.


Lets you choose the lower limit of the numeric range for the bar format. Specify the Value, or Other cell in the adjoining text box.


Lets you choose the upper limit of the numeric range for the bar format. Specify the Value, or Other cell in the adjoining text box.


Adds a new format statement after the format statement selected in the Format Summary box.


Inserts a new format statement before the format statement selected in the Format Summary box.


Deletes the selected format statement in the Format Summary box.


Type in a cell range or use the Pointer to select a range of cells to label the x-axis.


Type in a cell range or use the Pointer to select a range of cells to label the x-axis.


Tools, Data tools, Combine files


Enable to specify which data to combine.


Enable to specify a method for combining the data.


Tools, Data Tools, Quick Columns


Select a map from the list to view it in its own window.


Click the Browse button to open the File Save dialog box or to browse for a file on your system.


 A Floating Shape is created with one of the drawing tools that floats above the notebook. Right-click the shape to change its properties.


Click the operator that connects both terms of the constraint and describes their relationship: less than or equal to (<=), equal to (=), greater than or equal to (>=), or Integer (the cell must be a whole number).


Lets you select cells and see the sum, average, count, maximum value, and minimum value.


As you type a label, the closest match from the column is displayed. As you type a function, the likeliest function is displayed.


The Cell reference checker helps you copy formulas to other locations and shows you how the formula will appear in the new location. You can have the formula adjust to the new location, or you can change the formula to contain the original formula and cell addresses.


Enable to show the input line, which provides buttons that help you enter or edit data.


Enable to show QuickTips, a help window that appears when you point at a toolbar button.


Sets the default currency symbol used in the Numeric format property's Currency setting and in the Currency styles. Select a country whose currency you want to use.


Controls the characters used as the thousands separator, the decimal separator, and as argument separators.


Determines the international formats given as options for date display from the cell Numeric format property. Each of the date format options is shown in its long and short versions.


Determines the international formats given as options for time display from the cell Numeric format property. Each of the time format options is shown in its long and short versions.


Converts Lotus International Character Set characters into standard ANSI characters. LICS characters are identical to the standard ANSI set except in the range 128 through 255, which is usually used for international and graphics characters. When you save the file, Quattro Pro writes these characters back to the LICS equivalents. For information about LICS characters, see the Lotus 1-2-3 documentation.


Controls whether negative values are preceded with a minus sign (Signed) or are surrounded with parentheses (Parens).


Suppresses redrawing of both windows and the panel. Panel includes menus, dialog boxes, the Application Bar, and the input line.


Prevents redrawing of menus, dialog boxes, the application bar, and the input line.


Prevents redrawing of windows only.


Redraws all parts of the screen while macros are running. When you select None, macros run slower because Quattro Pro has to stop and draw the window, menus, dialog boxes, the application bar, and the input line.


Enable to have the Corel Quattro Pro for Dos menu display when the forward slash (/) key is pressed.


Sets the macro to be run every time any notebook containing a macro with this name is opened. The default startup macro is \0.


Enable to turn on auto-backup of files.


Sets the time interval at which notebooks are automatically backed up.


Enable to display full path titles of filenames in the notebook window title bar.


Enable to use the latest Microsoft Windows Explorer-type dialogs.


Makes the Edit [image] Undo command available after the full range of undoable operations.


Makes a variety of keys work in the same way as Quattro Pro for DOS. When disabled, these keys work as they would in most Windows applications.


When enabled, makes the selector move down a cell each time you enter data. (This option is available only when Compatible Keys is unchecked.) When this option is disabled, the selector remains in a cell when you press ENTER. To move the selector, you can still click the mouse, the Tab key, or the arrow keys.


Sets how you want to enter formulas. When this option is enabled, you do not need to start formulas with a plus sign (+). Quattro Pro interprets most data you enter as a formula. For example, 4/4 is interpreted as 4 divided by 4, and the result 1 is displayed.

When this option is disabled, start a formula with a plus sign (+) or another valid character (such as @ or =). Also, when Quattro Pro identifies possible dates, times, or text, it enters the data as dates, times, or text. For example, 4/4 is interpreted as the date 4/4. If you type 245 Juniper Park, it is displayed as text.


Specifies how long to wait, in milliseconds, before changing from cell selection to Drag-and-Drop mode. In Drag-and-Drop mode, you can drag a cell from one location to another.


Lists scenarios you have captured in the active group of scenarios.


Quick Columns Parse Settings dialog box


Enable to specify that the column format and alignment specified in the Preview pane should be applied to the destination cells.


Enable to specify that the column widths specified in the Preview pane should be applied to the destination cells.


Enable when the text contains rows at regular intervals that you want to skip or copy directly to the destination cells as unparsed labels. Type the number of lines of text on each page. You can use the Preview pane to specify whether header rows are skipped or copied to the destination cells as unparsed labels.


Specifies which additional parse options are displayed. Delimited displays options for text enclosed by comma, quotes, tabs, and so on.


Specifies which additional parse options are displayed. Fixed Width displays options for text lined up in fixed width columns.


Enable to skip the first character in each line of text.


Enable to skip lines in the text that the QuickColumns Expert cannot parse. Otherwise, these lines are copied into the destination cells as unparsed labels.


Parse settings custom dialog box delimited settings


Enable to specify that text is separated by tab characters at the end of cells.


Enable to specify that text is separated by commas at the end of cells. The QuickColumns Expert parses the data based on its appearance (numbers are parsed into values, non-numerical data is parsed into labels, and so on).


Enable to specify that text is separated by a space at the end of cells.


Enable to specify that text is separated by multiple spaces at the end of cells.


Enable to specify that text is separated by carriage returns at the end of cells.


Enable to specify that text is separated by semicolons at the end of cells.


Enable to specify that a delimiter of your choice is at the end of cells.


Type the delimiter of your choice in the list box. It separates text at the end of cells.


Enable to specify that text is separated by tab characters at the end of rows.


Enable to specify that text is separated by commas at the end of rows. The QuickColumns Expert parses the data based on its appearance (numbers are parsed into values, non-numerical data is parsed into labels, and so on).


Enable to specify that text is separated by a space at the end of rows.


Enable to specify that text is separated by multiple spaces at the end of rows.


Enable to specify that text is separated by carriage returns at the end of rows.


Enable to specify that text is separated by semicolons at the end of rows.


Enable to specify that a delimiter of your choice is at the end of rows.


Type the delimiter of your choice in the list box. It separates text at the end of rows.


Enable to specify that text is separated by tab characters at the end of a spreadsheet.


Enable to specify that text is separated by commas at the end of a spreadsheet. The QuickColumns Expert parses the data based on its appearance (numbers are parsed into values, non-numerical data is parsed into labels, and so on).


Enable to specify that text is separated by a space at the end of a spreadsheet.


Enable to specify that text is separated by multiple spaces at the end of a spreadsheet.


Enable to specify that text is separated by carriage returns at the end of a spreadsheet.


Enable to specify that text is separated by semicolons at the end of a spreadsheet.


Enable to specify that a delimiter of your choice is at the end of a spreadsheet.


Type the delimiter of your choice in the list box. It separates text at the end of a spreadsheet.


Enable to skip delimiters that do not enclose data. For example, if Tab is selected as the delimiter and the text to parse is Text<tab><tab>7930, disable the box to copy Text, an empty cell, and 7930 to the destination cells. Enable the check box to copy Text and 7930 to the destination cells.


Saves the current parse settings. Quattro Pro saves parse settings in files that end with a .QPX extension.


Custom QuickFilter dialog box


Click the down arrow, then select a filter option.


Spreadsheet set up dialog box


Closes this dialog box and saves any changes you have made.


Creates or hides a header.


Creates or hides a footer.


Closes this dialog box.


Closes this dialog box without saving any changes you have made.


Lets you select a file from a specific folder or subfolder.


Displays helpful instructions in the left panel of the dialog box. Click the Tip button again to remove the tip.


Moves to the previous step of the Expert.


Moves to the next step of the Expert.


Completes the Expert and closes the dialog box.


Provides a description of the spreadsheet function that is currently selected. For help about a spreadsheet function, click to the left of the spreadsheet function name.


Provides entry fields for entering spreadsheet function arguments. For help about an argument, click to the left of the argument.


Specifies the name for the cell or cells. The name can be up to 63 characters long.


Shows existing cell names.


Adds a name for the specified cell(s) to the cell names list.


Deletes a selected cell name. When you delete a cell name, the contents of the cells are unaffected. Also, formulas referencing the name then change to reference the cell addresses. The formula results do not change.


Deletes all existing cell names from the notebook. Formulas that reference named cells change so they refer to cell addresses instead of names.


Opens the Name cell from labels dialog box and lets you assign names to single cells using adjacent labels.


Enable to indicate the position of the cell being named in relation to the selected label.


Lets you create cell names from adjacent labels.


Creates a table in the notebook listing all named cells by name and location.


Type a name for the group (up to 15 characters). You can use letters, numbers, and spaces.


Type the name of the first spreadsheet in the group.


Type the name of the last spreadsheet in the group.


Specify the data type for a database you want to import.


Specify the path for a database you want to import.


Select the tables you want to import.


Inserts the chart on a spreadsheet. When you click Create Chart, it appears over the selected cells. You can click inside its borders and drag it to a new location, if you prefer.


Displays the chart in a chart window, ready for editing. The toolbar contains drawing tools so you can add drawn objects and text to the chart, or you can right-click any part of the chart and click the Properties option to change its properties.


Specifies the cell coordinates of the data series of the chart. A series can be a single cell, cells next to each other, or groups of cells that are not next to each other. Type the cell coordinates in the series edit fields, or click  to select cells in the notebook.


LEGEND DIALOG BOX


Shows the result of the property settings you have made.


Sets the typeface of the selected text. If a font has a TT (TrueType) symbol beside it, text in that font will appear in print just as it does on screen.


Sets the size of the selected text.


Sets whether the text is bold, italic, underlined, or strikeout (a line appears through the characters).


Lets you choose a text fill style from the list box: solid, two-color wash, imported bitmap, or 3-D text.


Specifies the color of the text or the start color if you are using a Wash.


Specifies the color of the drop shadow behind the text or the end color if you are using a Wash.


Creates a drop shadow.


Enable to name each row included in the Cells box by the label in its leftmost column.


Enable to name each row included in the Cells box by the label in its rightmost column.


Enable to name each column included in the Cells box by the label in its first row.


Enable to name each column included in the Cells box by the label in its bottom row.


Enable to name each cell included in the Cells box by the label in the top row of each column combined with the label in the leftmost cell of each row.


Pastes the graph style of the copied graph.


Pastes the position of graph objects from the copied graph.


Pastes the graph title, subtitle, and axis title text from the copied graph.


Pastes the data series from the copied graph. When you choose this option, Quattro Pro copies a reference to the data used in the copied graph. (Data is not physically copied to a different location in the notebook.) Data Series also pastes x-axis and legend series, legend label overrides, and label series.


Pastes the graph background style used in the copied graph.


Pastes the color scheme used in the copied graph. (Color Scheme does not affect the color of graph annotations.)


Copies all text and drawings you created for the source graph using the drawing tools on the Chart tools toolbar. Annotations also includes any graphics you imported for the source graph.

Caution: To preserve annotations that already exist in the destination graph, disable Annotations. Annotations erases all annotation items in the destination graph, even when there are none to copy from the source graph.


Takes you to the Formula composer dialog box where you can create, edit and debug formulas.


Select the notebook you want to show.


Enable Small to display slides in small size on the Light Table.


Enable Medium to display slides in medium size on the Light Table.


Enable Large to display slides in large size on the Light Table.


Enable Name only to display the names of slides on the Light Table.


Type a new name or change an existing name for a slide show in the Enter name box.


Type a new name for the Master Slide in the box.


Choose a slide from the list of slides in the slide show to be the Master Slide.


Tools, Macros, Dialog Designer. Make a tab button. RMC. Select Properties. Select Page List


Indicates the name of the tab to remove or add.


Displays the existing tabbed pages on the dialog box.


Adds the tab indicated in Sheet name before the name tab selected in Sheet list.


Adds the tab indicated in the Sheet name box after the tab name selected in the Sheet list.


Removes the selected tab name from the tab control.


Moves the tab name selected in the list box up one position.


Moves the tab name selected in the list box down one position.


Active Page dialog box


Indicates the name of the active tab in a tab control.


Publish to Internet dialog box


Adds a new cell range or chart to the list of ranges and charts to convert to HTML.


Deletes the cell range or chart selected in the box.


Moves the cell range or chart selected up one item in the list box.


Moves the cell range or chart selected down one item in the list box.


Map, what's this?


Map

Map properties vary depending on the type of map displayed. All maps have the Redraw options property, but only maps with Pin data include properties for customizing Pin display.


Map Legend

Map legends explain the range of data associated with each color or pattern in a map. Maps without color or pattern data do not include legends. Changes in Map Legend properties affect the appearance of both the legend and the map.


OLAP, CROSSTAB REPORTS

FIELD DIALOG BOX


The name of the field you are modifying.


Represents the Rows position. Fields in the Rows position appear horizontally along the left side of the CrossTab report.


Represents the Columns position. Fields in the Columns position appear vertically along the top of the CrossTab report.


Represents the Data position. Fields in the Data position contain the data that you want to analyze in the CrossTab report.


Represents the Pages position. Fields in the Pages position appear in the upper left corner of the CrossTab report.


Displays the name of the field that you are modifying. You can change the field name by typing a new one in the Label edit field.


The starting level element of the field you want to filter. You can select the element to use as the starting level by clicking on the list box. Only fields with more than one element have list boxes.


The ending level element of the field you want to filter. You can select the element to use as the ending level by clicking on the list box. Only fields with more than one element have list boxes.


Shows a list of elements you can filter.


Takes you to the Element selection dialog box where you can set up custom filters. Filtering can minimize the amount of information that is shown in the CrossTab report.


Closes this dialog box and completes the requested changes.


OLE Object

Floats above cells in a notebook sheet and links other applications to Quattro Pro. Right-click the OLE object to change its properties.


Check Regions dialog box


Displays all known regions in the current map. Select a name to replace the unknown name, or skip the current unknown name.


Replaces the unknown region name in your map data with the name you select from the list of known regions.


Ignores the current unknown region and all data associated with it.


Ignores all unknown region names and their data.


pattern settings dialog box


Enable the None button if no transparent color is needed.


Enable the Fill color button to display the fill as a transparent color wash on the spreadsheet.


Enable the Pattern color button to display the fill pattern as a transparent on the spreadsheet.


gradient settings dialog box


Choose one of the gradient type options in the list box to indicate the style of gradient used.


Click on the up or down arrow to increase or decrease the direction the light hits the object.


Click on the up or down arrow to increase or decrease the horizontal movement of the light.


Click on the up or down arrow to increase or decrease the vertical movement of the light.


Automatically sets the balance of darkness and lightness of the gradient.


Enable this button to control the gradient balance of darkness and lightness.


Click on the up or down arrow to increase or decrease the ratio of lightness to darkness.


texture settings dialog box


Enable this check box to anchor the texture to the page so that it repeats from the top left corner of the page.


Enable this check box to anchor the texture to the object so that the texture repeats from the top left corner of the object.


picture settings dialog box


Tiles the selected bitmap.


Displays the bitmap in a horizontally offset brick pattern.


Displays the bitmap in a vertically offset brick pattern.


Enlarges or reduces the bitmap to fill the shape.


Adjusts the bitmap proportionally to the shape of the object.


Stacks the bitmap on top of itself.


Sets the starting value as a constant in the formula. Seed Value can be any decimal value; a Seed Value that is a string is evaluated as 0.


Enable to have the name of the button appear beneath the button image in the toolbar.


Displays components that cannot be saved to this file format.


Lets you type or select the cell reference for an edit cell.


Lets you edit the contents that display in the macro label.


Select the cells or type the cell coordinates where you want to set breakpoints.


Enter the number indicating how many times to pass through the breakpoint before stopping.


Select the cells or type the cell coordinates where you want to set breakpoints.


Type a label for the selected cell in the Enter label box.


Move the white square in the color wheel or the color bar to change the shade and color selection.


Select RBG (Red, Blue, Green), HLS (Hue, Luminosity, Saturation), or CMYK (Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, and Black) method for combining colors.


Use the up or down arrows to select a number between 0 and 255 to indicate the amount of red in the color.


Use the up or down arrows to select a number between 0 and 255 to indicate the amount of green in the color.


Use the up or down arrows to select a number between 0 and 255 to indicate the amount of blue in the color.


HLS (Hue, Luminosity, and Saturation) is a color model based on values between 0 and 100. Hue is the basic color.


Luminosity is the amount of white that a color contains. Use the up or down arrows to choose a value between 0 and 100.


Saturation is the strength of the color or the color's distance from gray. Use the up or down arrows to choose a value between 0 and 100.


Cyan is one of the four color components used in graphics for reproducing color images on paper (CMYK). Use the up or down arrows to choose a value between 0 and 100.


Magenta is one of the four color components used in graphics for reproducing color images on paper (CMYK). Use the up or down arrows to choose a value between 0 and 100.


Yellow is one of the four color components used in graphics for reproducing color images on paper (CMYK). Use the up or down arrows to choose a value between 0 and 100.


Black is one of the four color components used in graphics for reproducing color images on paper (CMYK). Use the up or down arrows to choose a value between 0 and 100.


Type in the name and location of the file you want to insert, or use the Browse button to search for it.


Displays the custom color you have modified.


Measure Properties (OLAP) dialog box


Displays a list of measure names in the data position of the layout in the CrossTab report dialog box. Measures can be added and removed from this list.


Adds the highlighted measure to the filtered list.


Adds all of the measures to the filtered list.


Removes the highlighted measure from the filtered list.


Removes all the measures from the filtered list.


Displays a filtered list of the measures to display in the OLAP CrossTab report. Measures can be added and removed from this list.


CrossTab Data Sources dialog box


Lists the OLAP servers to which you have access. Double-click a server name to login to the server, access the OLAP data and create OLAP CrossTab reports.


Lets you connect to the last OLAP server to which you logged on.


Quattro Pro Title Bar

Displays the name of the current notebook and where it is stored.


Input line

Displays information about the active cell. In Edit mode, the input line shows the data you are entering or editing, and it contains cell names, @ (@functions), {} (macros), X (Cancel), and checkmark (Enter) buttons.


Miscellaneous hookups


Cell comments are short notes that refer to the contents of a cell. To view cell comments on the spreadsheet, click View [image] Comments.


Lists the groups defined in the active notebook.


Deletes the group currently selected in the Defined groups list box.


Substitutes values for one cell referenced in a formula (or formulas). Click the Tip button for an example.


Lets you edit the custom format selected in the Custom formats list.


Lets you add a new custom format based on the custom format selected in the Custom format list.


Edit Forms/Data entry form


Click New to enter a new record into the database.


Click Delete to delete a record in the database.


When editing a record, click Revert to reinsert the original information into the record.


Click Search to search records in your notebook database when you need to edit or delete existing records, or discover if there are duplicate records in your database.


Close


Use the navigation buttons to move through records in your database one at a time, or quickly jump to the end or beginning record.


Move the slider to navigate through database records.


The Data forms tool lists each field in your database. The field labels represent column headings and the edit fields display row entries which make up the database record.


Displays a Help topic for this dialog box. For specific help, click [image], then click any control.


Displays a Help topic for this dialog box. For specific help, click [image], then click any control.


Displays a Help topic for this dialog box. For specific help, click [image], then click any control.


Displays a Help topic for this dialog box. For specific help, click [image], then click any control.


Lets you choose a fill style.


Lets you choose a texture category.


Source data dialog box


Lets you choose a series to modify.


Lets you specify a title for the chart legend.


Floating Shape Properties dialog box

Fill tab


Lets you choose the fill style.


Lets you choose the fill style.


Lets you choose the fill style.


Lets you choose the fill style.


Lets you customize pattern, gradient, and picture fills.


Lets you choose a foreground color.


Lets you choose a background color.


Displays how the current selections will appear.


Lets you reverse the foreground and background fill colors.


Lets you choose a fill style.


Lets you customize pattern, gradient, and picture fills.


Opens the Texture settings dialog box.


Displays how your current selection will appear.


This is how the current selection will appear.


Opens the Open file dialog box.


Lets you choose textures or pictures as fills.


Lets you customize pattern, gradient, and picture fills.


Displays the current texture or picture.


Displays the current texture or picture.


Lets you choose textures or pictures as fills.


This is how your current selection will appear.


Click to change the style of fill method.


This is how your current selections will appear.


This is how your current selections will appear.


This is how your current selections will appear.


Click to change the style of fill method.


Click to change the style of fill method.


Click to change the style of fill method.


Lets you choose no fill style.


Line Tab (context-sensitive Help)


Lets you choose a line color from the color palette.


Lets you choose a line style.


Lets you choose a preset line width, or you can type in a number in the Line width box.


Lets you choose a preset line width, or you can type in a number in the Line width box.


Lets you choose a style for line joints.


Lets you choose a style for a line starting cap.


Lets you choose a style for a line ending cap.


This is how your current selection will appear.


This is how your current selection will appear.


This is how your current selection will appear.


This is how your current selection will appear.


Shadow tab


Lets you choose the direction of the shadow, or you can use the scroll bars to position the shadow around the object.


Lets you specify a horizontal offset number for the shadow.


Lets you specify a vertical offset number for the shadow.


Select a color for the shadow behind objects and text. For a more realistic look, select a slightly darker shade of the background color.


Enable to make the shadow partially transparent.


Insert, External Data, Expert


Select the database to import.


Quick Columns Expert


Sets Text parse options that let you format the destination data, specify delimiters, and skip extra rows.


Displays a preview of how the text will be parsed. You can also choose format options for the parsed text.


Lists the types of files that can be inserted.


Budget Expert dialog box


Click the type of variance style you want to use in the budget.

One column in your budget will compare estimated values with actual values for each period. You can show the variance as a dollar value or as a percentage.


Displays a list of items factored into Cost of goods sold. To add an item to the list, type the item in the New item edit field, then click Add.


Displays a list of General and administrative expenses. To add an item to the list, type the item in the New item edit field, then click Add.


Enable this box to show a column for the same period from the prior year. A Variance column also shows the difference in values. For example, you can compare the first quarter revenue from this year with the first quarter revenue from last year.


Specifies which cells from the Web query preview to insert to the notebook.


Paste Special


Pastes the formulas from the copied selection.


Pastes the labels from the copied selection.


Pastes the numbers from the copied selection.


Pastes the properties from the copied selection. This option does not copy row heights or column widths; use Edit [image] Copy Cells to copy row/column sizes.


When checked, pastes the values resulting from formulas, not the formulas themselves. Checking Paste formulas as values accomplishes the same thing as using Edit [image] Convert to values.


Avoids erasing data in the destination selection that otherwise would be replaced by blanks pasted from the source.


Switches the position of entries so that data listed in columns is placed in rows and vice versa. Be sure to allow enough room in the destination area for the changed size of the data. This option is equivalent to choosing Tools [image] Numeric Tools [image] Transpose.


Pastes the copied selection.


Pastes a link to each cell in the copied cells. Each pasted cell contains a formula using the following format:

+[Drive:\Path\File name]Sheet:Cell reference


Element selection dialog box (OLAP CrossTab reports)


Adds highlighted field elements from the source list to the filtered list. Field elements that are added to the filtered list appear in the CrossTab report. You can highlight multiple field elements by holding down CTRL while making your selections.


Highlight an item and click Remove to take it off the filtered list.


Highlight an item and click Add to include it on the filtered list.


Adds all field elements from the source list to the filtered list.


Removes highlighted field elements from the filtered list to the source list. Removed field elements are not displayed in the CrossTab report. You can highlight multiple field elements by holding down CTRL while making your selections.


Removes all field elements from the filtered list to the source list.


Lets you select a predesigned OLAP CrossTab report template to import.


USER STATUS DIALOG BOX (WORKGROUPS)


Click this button to send a message to the selected user.


SEND MESSAGE DIALOG BOX (workgroups)


Specifies the user who will receive the message.


Type the message here.


Closes this dialog box without saving any changes you have made.


Specifies information the serial number and personal identification number (PIN).


TOOLS, MACROS, DIALOG DESIGNER


Lists all of the available predefined system lists.


View the current number setting or type a new number in the Enter number box.


File, Save, password protection


Type a password for the file. Passwords can be up to 15 characters in length. The characters you type show on screen as pound signs (#####) so they are hidden from view.


Re-type the password to verify it. If this password is not identical, Quattro Pro warns you and must try again. Passwords are case-sensitive.


Connect to provider dialog box (OLAP CrossTab reports)


Select the OLAP server you want to connect to. Once connected, you can create OLAP CrossTab reports.


Type your user ID in the User ID field. User IDs are usually case sensitive.


Type your user password in the Password field. Passwords are usually case sensitive.


Paste special


Click this to embed the copied information into your document.

Changes you make to the embedded information will not be reflected in the original document, and changes to the original document will not appear in this document.


Click this to link copied information to your document.

Changes you make to the linked information will be reflected in the original document, and changes in the original document will also appear in this document.


Enables you to select how the information is pasted into your document.

This option is not available for all types of documents.


Provides a preview of the selections you made.

This is useful for experimenting with different choices without actually inserting the information into your document.

To insert the information into your current document, click OK.


Specifies whether the information will appear in the document as an icon or whether the actual information will always be visible.

If you select Display as icon, you can open the object in your document by double-clicking its icon.


Displays the name of the source application.


Indicates the pasted data's source application.


Insert object dialog box


Click this to create a new object to insert into the file that is currently open.

The new object will be of the type you specify, and will be inserted ready for you to enter information into it.


Click this to insert an entire file into the document that is currently open.

The file will be inserted as an object that you can edit with the program used to create the file.


Shows the type of file you are inserting. This information changes depending on the filename you specify.


Specifies whether the embedded object will appear in the document as an icon or whether the actual contents of the object will always be visible.

If you select Display as icon, you can open the object in your document by double-clicking its icon.


Enter parameter value (create web query)


Uses the specified parameter for future refreshes.


Format, Selection, Numeric Formats tab


Aligns the currency symbol.


Reduces the fraction to the lowest common denominator.


Header and Footer

The header is an area where you can type text that appears at the top of the notebook; text in the footer appears at the bottom of the notebook.


Web query preview dialog box


Lets you link cells in the notebook to Web query data, set refresh time intervals, and specify where to place refreshed data in the notebook.


Lets you customize the Web query by setting various options.


Closes this dialog box and saves any changes you have made.


Select a style from the list box. Normal is the default applied to all merged cells in a new notebook.


Specify any command line options.


Choose an icon for the new button from the icon list box.


Type your macro in this box.


Type in a filename or use the Browse button to locate a file.


Format, Selection, Alignment tab


Displays text horizontally, vertically, or on a rotated angle. Specify the number of degrees to rotate the text.


Displays the selected predefined system list.


Select the report you want to modify.


Displays formatting codes and rich text formatting to apply to the cell.


This is how your selected chart style will appear with the chart data you have entered.


You must enter chart data before you can see how your selected chart style will appear with the chart data you have entered.


Displays the directory where the file is located.


Column and pie charts - What's this


Column Chart

A single data series, with each value represented by a section of the column. Click a chart, then right-click a section to change the chart's properties.


Pie and Doughnut Charts

Pie and doughnut charts plot a single series; each value is a "slice." Negative values in the series are plotted as though they are positive. You can explode a slice (pull it away from the rest of the circle) to emphasize it.

When you define an x-axis series or label series for a pie or doughnut chart, its labels appear next to the percentages. By default, the label for each slice shows what percentage the segment contributes to the whole. A tick mark connects the label and the slice.


Chart window  What's this


Lets you enter and edit data, change chart appearance, and size charts.


Float series properties


Sets the style of floating marker. Choose one of the marker types pictured.


Sets the cross section (circle, square, hexagon, or octagon) of the marker type.


Sets the relative size of the markers. Type a number, or use the scroll bar to pick a value from 8 to 32.


Slides on the Light Table, What's this


Master Slide

Maintains common elements and renders a background style for all slides in a slide show.

The master slide does not display when you run the slide show unless it is also included as a separate slide.


Slide

Represents a chart in miniature form, in the order it appears in the slide show. You can change the slide order, transition effect, display time, and transition speed assigned to each slide.


Legend

A box that defines the series in some chart types. Click a chart, then right-click anywhere in the legend box except on the series markers to change legend properties.


Chart Title Box

The text box around the title and subtitle. Click to display the box boundary, then right-click where the pointer is an arrow to set box properties.


Axis Label

The title of the x or y axis.


This is how your current selection will appear.


Give you a "bar and whisker" (or "candle") chart. A line connects high and low values. A bar spans the open and close values. When the close value is higher than the open, the bar is white. When the open value is higher than the close, the bar is blue. (Retain this light/dark relationship if you change fill colors.)


High and low values determine each end of the I-beam. Open and close are represented by left and right tick marks, respectively.


Connects corresponding high and low values with a line and shows open and close values as left and right tick marks.


Assigns different-colored markers to high, low, open, and close values, and connects each set of corresponding values with a line.


Displays the axis title; you can edit the axis title in the Enter text edit field.


The lowest number that can be specified in a spin control.


The highest number that can be specified in a spin control.


Map expert, step 4, Mark points dialog box


Quattro Pro recognizes many major city names so you don’t have to specify latitude and longitude to mark those location on your map. Location names recognized by Corel Quattro Pro are called Pin Names. Each sample notebook in the DataMaps directory includes a list of regional pin names.

Type the cell coordinates for the Pin Names in your notebook, or click [image] to select cells from the notebook.


Bitmap What's this


Floating Bitmap

Appears above cells in a notebook sheet and contains a picture in bitmap form. Right-click the bitmap to change its properties.


Use this dialog box to create a custom chart. You can enter labels for the x-axis and the legend, as well as select data series. Specify the type of chart, the titles you want to display, and change the default name of the chart on the appropriate tabs.


Customize toolbars, menus, and keyboard settings here.


Vertical lines in the preview are show where the data is divided into columns. To adjust the column, drag its triangle in the ruler.


Button properties


Lets you adjust the color, shading, and highlight properties of a button.


Format, Notebook, passwords


Type the old password.


Type the new password.


Retype the new password to confirm the change.


top 10 filter dialog


Click the up or down arrow to increase or decrease the number. You can also type a number.


Links dialog box


Click this to update the information in the selected link.


Click this to open the source file for the selected link.


Click this to change the source file for the selected link.

This is useful if you want to link information from a different document.


Disconnects the selected link.

This is useful if you no longer want changes in the source document to be reflected in your current document.


Specifies whether you want the selected link to be updated automatically or manually.

If you click Automatic, whenever you change the linked information in the original document, this document will be updated.

If you click Manual, you need to click Update now when you want the information to be updated.


Specifies whether you want the selected link to be updated automatically or manually.

If you click Automatic, whenever you change the linked information in the original document, this document will be updated.

If you click Manual, you need to click Update now when you want the information to be updated.


Displays the current links used in this document, their type, and the update status.

To change the update status of a link, click the link, and then click Automatic or Manual.

If the source file for the link cannot be found, the Update column will read Unavailable. This typically happens if the source file is on an unavailable network drive or has been moved.


Displays the name of the source file for the selected link.


Displays the type of source file for the selected link.


Customization/Toolbar


Lists all toolbars. Toolbars that are displayed in the selected context have a checkmark. You can check the box to display a toolbar, or uncheck the box to hide it.


Lets you create a toolbar and add it to the toolbar list.


Changes the selected standard Quattro Pro toolbar back to its default settings. You cannot reset custom toolbars.


Lets you choose a size for toolbar buttons.


Lets you specify the size of the toolbar borders.


Lets you choose the toolbar button's appearance.


Enable to show titles on floating toolbars.


Lets you choose the property bar to display.


Lets you specify the width of the docked application bar.


Lets you choose the position of the docked application bar.


Customization/Commands


Lets you choose a button category.


Opens the Find text dialog box and lets you search for buttons containing specific text.


Lets you specify the text you want to search for.


Lets you specify the text for the QuickTip help that accompanies a button.


Displays a list of toolbars on which the selected button is currently available.


The name of the current keyboard assignment set.


Lets you specify the new keyboard shortcut to assign to a command.

You can have up to four layers of keystrokes. For example, the key combination CTRL + ALT + 1, 2, 3, 4 is accomplished by holding down the CTRL and ALT keys, then pressing the 1, 2, 3, and 4 keys in succession.


Assigns a new keyboard shortcut to a command.


Displays the keyboard shortcut currently assigned to a command.


Enable to automatically resolve keystroke conflicts.


Displays any existing shortcut keys for the current command.


Deletes the selected shortcut keys.


Resets the keyboard assignments to their original configuration.


Open the Shortcut keys dialog box and displays the commands, table assignment, key stroke combination, and description associated with each shortcut key.


Displays the list of available shortcut keys and their names. The current workspace is also displayed.


Opens the Save As dialog box and lets you to save your keyboard shortcuts as a text file.


Sends the document to the printer.


Lets you specify a caption for the toolbar button.


Lets you specify a caption for the toolbar button.


Lets you choose a button graphic size.


Lets you choose a button graphic size.


Lets you choose a pen color.


Lets you make sections of a button graphic transparent one pixel at a time.


Lets you make certain colors of a button graphic transparent.


Lets you undo the last action.


Lets you redo the last undone action.


Displays a preview of the button graphic. You can edit the button graphic using the Pen and Transparent tools.


Lets you set the vertical position of the button graphic.


Lets you set the horizontal position of the button graphic.


Allows you to manage image properties.


Lets you undo or redo previous actions.


Allows you to assign shortcut keys.


Displays any existing shortcut keys for the current command.


Lets you restore the default appearance of the button graphic.


Opens the File Save dialog box and lets you browse for a file on your system.


Specify any command line options.


Opens the File Save dialog box and lets you browse for a file on your system.


Allows you to add a program button.


Allows you to add a program button.


Allows you to remove a program button.


Applies modifications made to a program button.


Allows you to choose a macro category.


Enable to select a Quattro Pro macro. Quattro Pro macros are stored as labels in notebook cells and edited in Quattro Pro.


Enable to select a PerfectScript macro. PerfectScript macros are compatible with the PerfectScript macro technology available in other applications, such as WordPerfect and Corel Presentations. PerfectScript macros are stored in .WCM files.


Lets you specify the macro.


Lets you specify the macro.


Opens the File Save dialog box and lets you browse for a file on your system.


Adds a macro button from the list of macro buttons.


Removes a macro button from the list of macro buttons.


Applies modifications made to a macro button.


Workspace category tree


Lets you choose an option to modify.


Allows you to customize Quattro Pro.


Allows you to customize Quattro Pro.


Allows you to change application settings.


Allows you to change application settings.


Allows you to customize toolbars.


Allows you to customize the application bar.


Enable to make the user interface transparent.


Sets the interface elements to be made transparent.


Enable to make command bars transparent.


Enable to make dockers transparent.


Enable to make color information transparent.


Sets the transparency level.


Slide to adjust the transparency level.


The Properties dialog box lists the names and values for the item you selected.


Workspace options


Lets you choose a workspace.


Displays a description of the workspace.


Opens the New workspace dialog box and lets you create a new workspace.


Lets you specify the name of the new workspace.


Lets you choose an existing workspace on which to base the new workspace.


Lets you specify a description of the new workspace.


Enable to set the new workspace as the current workspace.


Deletes the selected workspace.


Opens the Import workspace dialog box and lets you import a workspace.


Lets you specify a file to import.


Opens the Open dialog box and lets you browse for a file on your system.


Lets you choose items to import.


Enable to import the workspace into the current workspace.


Enable to import the workspace into a new workspace.


Displays the workspace name.


Lets you enter a name for the new workspace.


Lets you base the new workspace on a specific option.


Lets you enter a description of the new workspace.


Displays the items included in the workspace.


Opens the Export workspace dialog box and lets you choose a workspace to export.


Lets you choose the items to export.


Opens the Save as dialog box and lets you save a workspace.


Lets you email a workspace.


Summarizing data using CrossTab reports

CrossTab reports let you summarize large amounts of data from both spreadsheets created in Quattro Pro and external databases.

In this section, you'll learn about

•	creating CrossTab reports

•	creating CrossTab reports using OLAP data sources

•	naming CrossTab reports

•	formatting CrossTab reports

•	updating and refreshing CrossTab report data

•	sorting and filtering CrossTab report data

•	moving and deleting CrossTab reports

•	customizing CrossTab report fields

•	hiding field items and details

•	calculating field summaries in CrossTab reports

•	performing field data comparisons in CrossTab reports

•	expanding, filtering, and removing OLAP CrossTab report field elements

•	making static copies of CrossTab reports

•	expanding CrossTab reports


Creating CrossTab reports

You can use CrossTab reports to analyze and organize data located in notebooks and databases. For example, you might maintain a database with addresses of customers in different cities, including information on customer sales. The database effectively stores the information but does not allow you to analyze the data in a convenient or precise manner. By building a CrossTab report, you can analyze, organize, and summarize the data into a constantly updated report on area sales. The same database can also be analyzed to determine sales by salesperson for each product that the business sells.

Data does not have to be on the same spreadsheet of a notebook for you to create a CrossTab report. You can connect two or more spreadsheets that contain data and produce a CrossTab report to summarize the data.

Planning and interpreting your data analysis

Before you produce a CrossTab report from a data source like a database, you must plan which data fields you want to analyze. The CrossTab report feature analyzes data by using selected data fields as row or column labels and numeric data fields as the data being analyzed. The fields in the row and column areas are used as selection criteria to determine which values from the database to include at intersections of the row and column field labels. For example, assume a database contains product sales information (data). In the CrossTab report, place the field containing the names of the company's salespeople along the left of the spreadsheet (rows), and the field containing the products you sell along the top of the spreadsheet (columns). The intersection of the labels "Salesperson A" and "Products" shows the total number of products that Salesperson A sold.

 How to


To build a CrossTab report

1	Click a spreadsheet cell containing data.

2	Click Tools [image] Data tools [image] CrossTab [image] Report.

3	Drag any fields from the list in the Fields area into any of the following positions of the Layout area:

•	Rows

•	Columns

•	Data

•	Pages

4	Type the report destination in the Destination box.

Unless you select a destination, the CrossTab report will be placed in A1 of the next available, unprotected spreadsheet.

 Notes

•	Dragging a field to the Pages position is optional. Fields placed in the Pages position appear in the upper-left corner of the CrossTab report as items in a list box so that you can select the desired field item to view. If fields are placed in the Pages position, you can expand the report. For more information about expanding CrossTab reports, see "Expanding CrossTab reports."

•	You can drag more than one field into each position of the Layout area, but fields cannot appear more than once in each position.

 Related topics


To connect multiple spreadsheets to produce a CrossTab report

1	Click a spreadsheet cell containing data.

2	Click Tools [image] Data tools [image] CrossTab [image] Report.

3	Click the Range picker in the Source data box.

4	Press SHIFT, and click the tabs of the spreadsheets where the data is stored.

You must click the spreadsheet tabs in ascending order.

5	Click Maximize on the CrossTab report title bar.

 Note

•	After you connect multiple spreadsheets of data, the first field in the list in the Fields area of the CrossTab report dialog box is [SHEET]. You can drag this field to the Pages, Rows, or Columns positions of the Layout area.

 Related topics


Creating CrossTab reports using OLAP data sources

CrossTab reports are particularly suited to displaying and exploring data contained in OLAP servers. You can create CrossTab reports from fields in an OLAP server by selecting an OLAP server as the data source. You can also import CrossTab reports created with OLAP software into Quattro Pro.

 How to


To select an OLAP data source for a CrossTab report

1	Click Tools [image] Data tools [image] CrossTab [image] Report.

2	Enable the OLAP report option.

3	Click OK.

4	In the CrossTab data sources dialog box, select the server you want.

5	In the Connect to provider dialog box type a user ID and password.

 Related topics


To import OLAP CrossTab reports

1	Click Tools [image] Data tools [image] CrossTab [image] Report.

2	Enable the OLAP report option.

3	Click OK.

4	In the CrossTab data sources dialog box, select the server you want.

5	In the Connect to provider dialog box, type a user ID and password.

6	Select a data source.

7	In the CrossTab report dialog box, click Import report.

8	In the Import templates dialog box, choose a report type.

9	In the Import report dialog box, choose a report.

 Note

•	You must have an OLAP provider running in the background before you can connect to the server.

 Tip

•	You can also click the Import report button in the CrossTab report dialog box to import OLAP CrossTab reports.

 Related topics


Naming CrossTab reports

After you create a CrossTab report, you can change its name from the default. If you generate several CrossTab reports from data, you have to assign a unique name to each report.

 How to


To name a CrossTab report

1	Click a cell in a CrossTab report.

2	Click Tools [image] Data tools [image] CrossTab [image] Options.

3	Type a name for the report in the Name box.

 Notes

•	The default name is CrossTab Table 1.

•	All CrossTab reports must have a name.

 Related topics


Formatting CrossTab reports

Once you summarize data in a CrossTab report, you can align data fields by row or column. You can also display the totals and grand totals for both column and row data. Showing column and row totals is useful because it gives you a better understanding of how each field relates to the total and can help you see an overall picture of the data.

You can also change the appearance of a CrossTab report by changing formatting options, such as the numeric format, and the alignment of labels.

 How to


To align data fields in a CrossTab report

1	Click a cell in a CrossTab report.

2	Click Tools [image] Data tools [image] CrossTab [image] Report.

3	Enable one of the following options:

•	By row [image] data appears vertically in the report

•	By columns [image] data appears horizontally in the report

 Note

•	By default, data fields are aligned by row.

 Related topics


To show column summaries in a CrossTab report

1	Click a cell in a CrossTab report.

2	Click Tools [image] Data tools [image] CrossTab [image] Options.

3	Enable the Show column summaries check box.

 Tip

•	You can also show row summaries by enabling the Show row summaries check box.

 Related topics


To customize the appearance of a CrossTab report

1	Click Tools [image] Data tools [image] CrossTab [image] Options.

2	Enable any of the following check boxes:

•	Format CrossTab report [image] applies a preset format to the fields and data, making the report easier to read

•	Preserve data formatting [image] maintains the numeric format of the source data, such as currency

•	Center labels across blocks of cells [image] centers the field names (labels) across the column of data. (By default, field names are right-aligned).

 Related topics


Updating and refreshing CrossTab report data

CrossTab reports are dynamic, meaning that changes in the source data are reflected in the CrossTab report. You can set Quattro Pro to automatically check the source data when you open the report and update the report if the source data has changed.

 How to


To update CrossTab report data

1	Click Tools [image] Data tools [image] CrossTab [image] Options.

2	Enable the Update data on open check box.

 Note

•	You cannot edit or delete data in a CrossTab report. To edit the values in a CrossTab report, you must make a static copy of the report. For information about making static copies of CrossTab reports, see "Making static copies of CrossTab reports."

 Related topics


To refresh a CrossTab report

1	Click a cell in a CrossTab report.

2	Click Tools [image] Data tools [image] CrossTab [image] Refresh.

 Related topics


Sorting and filtering CrossTab report data

You can sort and filter data in a CrossTab report.

 How to


To sort CrossTab report data

1	Click a cell in a CrossTab report.

2	Click Tools [image] Data tools [image] CrossTab [image] Sort and filter options.

3	In the Sort and filter dialog box, choose a field from the Field list box.

4	In the Sort area, choose an option from each of the following list boxes:

•	Based on [image] lets you sort data based on the contents of a field or data field

•	Data field [image] lets you choose a data field from the CrossTab report

•	Sort order [image] lets you sort data in ascending or descending order

 Related topics


To filter CrossTab report data

1	Click a cell in a CrossTab report.

2	Click Tools [image] Data tools [image] CrossTab [image] Sort and filter options.

3	In the Sort and filter dialog box, choose a field from the Field list box.

4	In the Filter area, choose an option from each of the following list boxes:

•	Display [image] lets you choose the items you want displayed after filtering

•	Based on [image] lets you choose a data field

5	Type a value in the Quantity box to specify the number of rows available.

 Related topics


Moving and deleting CrossTab reports

After you create a CrossTab report, you can move it to another spreadsheet of your notebook. You can also delete a CrossTab report.

 How to


To move a CrossTab report

1	Click Tools [image] Data tools [image] CrossTab [image] Report.

2	Click the Range picker in the Destination box, and drag an area on the spreadsheet where you want to display a CrossTab report.

 Notes

•	You can place one or more CrossTab reports on any spreadsheet of a notebook.

•	Select a destination range that does not overlap an existing CrossTab report; otherwise, the existing report will be overwritten.

 Related topics


To delete a CrossTab report

1	Click a cell in a CrossTab report.

2	Click Tools [image] Data tools [image] CrossTab [image] Remove.

 Related topics


Customizing CrossTab report fields

A field is a category of information that appears in a database column. Each field in a database contains items [image] the individual entries that occur in a field. For example, a field named "Country" might have field items that include France, Venezuela, and Kenya.

You can change a field name in a CrossTab report. The field name is changed only in the report; it is not changed in the original data.

You can also change the position of any field. You may want to change a field's position to explore hidden relationships in the data. There are four positions: rows, columns, data, and pages. Row fields are displayed along the left side of the report, column fields are displayed along the top of the report, and pages fields are displayed in the top left corner of the report.

Changing a field's position can significantly change the information that appears in the CrossTab report. Certain fields are more useful in some positions than others. For example, a field with several hundred field items is not an appropriate choice for the pages position of the CrossTab report because you must scroll through several hundred different versions of the CrossTab report to view all of the data.

 How to


To change a field name in a CrossTab report

1	Click a field.

2	Click Tools [image] Data tools [image] CrossTab [image] Field options.

3	Type a new name in the Label box.

 Tip

•	You can also change a field name by double-clicking the field.

 Related topics


To change the position of a field in a CrossTab report

1	Click a field.

2	Click Tools [image] Data tools [image] CrossTab [image] Field options.

3	In the Position area, click the position where you want to move the field.

 Tip

•	You can also change a field's position by dragging it to a new position.

 Related topics


Hiding field items and details

Fields can contain multiple field items. For example, a database may have a field named "Region" with four field items: East, West, North, and South. If particular items are not relevant or necessary to the report, or if the CrossTab report is large or complex, you can hide items The hidden item's information is still available, but it is not displayed in the report.

You can hide details about a selected field so that you have the same level of information for data analysis, but fewer details are shown in the report.

For example, assume that a CrossTab report has two fields in its columns: "Year" (with field items 1991 and 1992) and "Quarter" (with field items Q1, Q2, Q3, and Q4). When you hide details of the Year field, the resulting report shows the field items for "Year" (1991 and 1992) without showing the breakdown for the values by quarter.

After you hide the details of a selected field, you can display them again at any time.

 How to


To hide field items in a CrossTab report

1	Click a field.

2	Click Tools [image] Data tools [image] CrossTab [image] Field options.

3	In the Hide field items list, enable the check box of the field item to hide .

 Notes

•	You cannot hide all items in a field.

•	You must have more than one field in the rows or columns of a CrossTab report to hide details.

 Tip

•	You can also change a field name by double-clicking the field.

 Related topics


To hide the details of a CrossTab report field

1	Click the name of a field.

2	Click Tools [image] Data tools [image] CrossTab [image] Hide.

 Related topics


To show the details of a CrossTab report field

1	Click the name of a field.

2	Click Tools [image] Data tools [image] CrossTab [image] Show.

 Related topics


Calculating field summaries in CrossTab reports

You can calculate the field summaries in a CrossTab report to give you an overall look at the data. You can choose from many field summary options, including calculating the sum, average, and standard deviation. Only fields in the data position of CrossTab reports can be summarized, because they are the fields that have numeric values.

 How to


To calculate a field summary in a CrossTab report

1	Click a data field.

2	Click Tools [image] Data tools [image] CrossTab [image] Field options.

3	Enable any of the following check boxes in the Summary list:

•	Sum [image] calculates the sum of items for numeric field items

•	Count [image] calculates the number of occurrences for label field items

•	Average [image] calculates the average

•	Max [image] displays the maximum value

•	Min [image] displays the minimum value

•	StdDevp [image] calculates the population standard deviation

•	StdDevs [image] calculates the sample standard deviation

•	Varp [image] calculates the population variance

•	Var [image] calculates the sample variance

•	CountNonBlank [image] counts non-blank cells for a field

 Notes

•	You cannot drag field summaries because they are superficially generated on the report.

•	You can display an enormous amount of information about your data if you enable all of the summary options; including only those options which are most relevant makes the report easier to read.

 Related topics


Performing field data comparisons in CrossTab reports

You can compare field data, and Quattro Pro lets you choose from many field data comparison calculations. Field data comparisons are useful to summarize and analyze the data. Only fields in the data position of CrossTab reports can be compared, because they are the fields with numeric values.

 How to


To compare field data in CrossTab reports

1	Click a data field.

2	Click Tools [image] Data tools [image] CrossTab [image] Field options.

3	Click Compare>>.

4	Choose one of the following from the Data comparison list:

•	Difference from [image] displays all data in the data area as the difference between the value for the specified field and field item

•	% of [image] displays all data in the data area as a percentage of the value for the specified field and field item

•	% difference from [image] displays all data in the data area as the difference between the value for the specified field and field item [image] but displays the difference as a percentage of the base data

•	Running total in [image] displays the data for successive items as a cumulative total

•	% of row [image] displays all data in each row as a percentage of the total for each row

•	% of column [image] displays all data in each column as a percentage of the total for each column

•	% of total [image] displays all data in the data area as a percentage of the grand total of all of the data in the CrossTab report

•	Index [image] displays the result using the following calculation: ((value in cell) x (grand total of grand totals)) / ((grand row total) x (grand column total))

 Note

•	You can display an enormous amount of information about your data if you enable all of the data comparison options; decide which options are most relevant and include only them.

 Related topics


Expanding, filtering, and removing OLAP CrossTab report field elements

When a database is large or complex, the field elements have many levels. Expanding a CrossTab report field element reveals all hidden details associated with a field. Expanding (or "drilling down") is a navigational technique that lets you explore levels of data ranging from the most general (up) to the most detailed (down).

For example, assume your database contains information about the Olympic Games. If you drill down "Olympics," details display that contain information related to the Olympics: whether it was a winter or summer games, the country that hosted the Olympics, and the city where the games were held. Because some countries have hosted more than one Olympics, there are more details associated with those countries.

The following chart shows the "Olympics" field drilled down to reveal elements and subelements. Some subelements are not drilled down to the bottom level.

Drilling down is useful for analyzing data or comparing the details of one element with other elements. It takes you from the most general detail of an element to the most specific.

Because OLAP source data is often very large, it is important to be able to minimize the amount of information that appears in your CrossTab reports. Level filtering lets you select specific field elements from the level to display in the CrossTab report, rather than displaying all elements in a level.

You can also remove elements from an OLAP CrossTab report to minimize the amount of data.

 How to


To expand an OLAP CrossTab report field element

1	Click a field.

2	Click Tools [image] Data tools [image] CrossTab [image] Drill down.

 Note

•	The Minus button in the element cell indicates that the element has been drilled down.

 Tip

•	You can also expand the OLAP CrossTab report field elements by clicking Plus in the element cell.

 Related topics


To collapse OLAP CrossTab report field elements

1	Click an expanded field.

2	Click Tools [image] Data tools [image] CrossTab [image] Rollup.

 Tip

•	You can also collapse the OLAP CrossTab report field elements by clicking Minus in the element cell.

 Related topics


To filter OLAP CrossTab report field elements

1	Double-click the name of a field.

2	Click Filter.

3	In the Element selection dialog box, choose the elements from the Source list that you want to move to the Filtered list.

4	Click Add.

 Note

•	If you open the Element selection dialog box and all of the field elements are in the Filtered list, remove all field elements to the Source list.

 Tips

•	To move all of the elements from the Source list to the Filtered list, click Add all.

•	You can drag elements either from the Source list to the Filtered list or from the Filtered list to the Source list.

 Related topics


To remove an OLAP CrossTab report element

1	Click an element.

2	Click Tools [image] Data tools [image] CrossTab [image] Remove element.

 Related topics


Making static copies of CrossTab reports

You can make an exact copy, called a static copy, of a CrossTab report. It is called a static copy because it is no longer connected to the dynamic source data, so any changes made to the source data are not reflected in the static copy. The static copy is placed on the next available, unprotected spreadsheet of the notebook.

 How to


To make a static copy of a CrossTab report

1	Click a cell in a CrossTab report.

2	Click Tools [image] Data tools [image] CrossTab [image] Copy static.

 Note

•	You can determine whether a report is dynamic or copied from the appearance of the field names. In dynamic CrossTab reports, the field names are grayed.

 Related topics


Expanding CrossTab reports

Expanding CrossTab reports lets you open a CrossTab report onto several different spreadsheets of a notebook. You can expand a report only if you have a field in the Pages position of the CrossTab report. For example, suppose you generate a CrossTab report, which is placed on spreadsheet B that has a field named "Year" in the Pages position with two field items, 1990 and 1991. When you expand the CrossTab report, the first field item (1990) and the data associated with it are placed on spreadsheet C, and the second field item (1991) and the data associated with it are placed on spreadsheet D.

 How to


To expand a CrossTab report

1	Click a cell on a CrossTab report.

2	Click Tools [image] Data tools [image] CrossTab [image] Expand.

 Note

•	The report is expanded to the next available, unprotected spreadsheet of the notebook.

 Related topics


Working with custom dialog boxes and controls

Quattro Pro lets you create custom dialog boxes and controls. When you create a dialog box, you can add controls and then customize their appearance and behavior.

In this section, you'll learn about

•	creating custom dialog boxes

•	editing and positioning dialog boxes

•	adding dialog box controls

•	assigning properties to dialog box controls

•	attaching actions to dialog box controls

•	editing and positioning dialog box controls

•	working with child controls in dialog boxes

•	creating Help and tips for controls

•	using macros to display a dialog box

For more information about working with custom dialog boxes and controls, see "Reference: Working with custom dialog boxes and controls."


Creating custom dialog boxes

You can create custom dialog boxes in Quattro Pro. Dialog boxes are stored on the Objects sheet and saved with the notebook in which they are created.

You can add controls to dialog boxes. When you add a control to a dialog box, it is inactive. For example, list boxes do not contain information and check boxes are not linked to anything. For information about activating controls and buttons, see "Attaching actions to dialog box controls."

Adding labels to dialog box controls lets you identify the purpose of each control. Some controls have a label text property that is used to display a label with the control (for example, buttons).

You can hide controls when they are not relevant.

Whenever a change is made to the dialog box, you can test the dialog box and its controls. For example, you can test a new control after assigning properties or creating links to see if the control behaves in the manner intended. When in Test mode, the dialog box displays as it will in the application. In Test mode, you cannot activate any other windows to display as the active object unless you have configured a control in the dialog box to do so. For example, you can have a second custom dialog box display only when you click a button on the first dialog box.

For more information about controls, see Properties of dialog box controls and Properties of form controls in the reference information section of the Quattro Pro online Help.

 How to


To create a custom dialog box

1	Click Tools [image] Macro [image] Dialog designer.

2	Right-click the dialog box background, and click Dialog properties [image] Name.

3	Type a name for the title bar in the Enter text box.

4	Click OK.

5	Right-click the dialog box background, and click Dialog properties [image] Title.

6	Type a title in the Enter text box.

 Notes

•	You cannot save a file when creating a custom dialog box unless you deactivate the dialog designer by clicking the spreadsheet.

•	Password protection rights can be assigned to dialog boxes. For information about working with passwords, see "Using password protection."

 Tip

•	You can also create a dialog box on the Objects sheet by clicking the Quick tab button at the bottom of the application window, and clicking the Create dialog box button.

 Related topics


To add a control to a dialog box

1	Click the Quick tab button at the bottom of the application window to display the Objects sheet.

2	Double-click a dialog box.

3	Click Insert, and click a control to add.

4	In the dialog box, drag diagonally to create the control.

5	Right-click the control, and click Connect.

6	Type the cell reference in the Target field.

If you want to immediately send control value changes to a cell or another control, enable the Dynamic connection check box.

 Note

•	For information about the behavior of specific controls, see "Understanding dialog box controls."

 Tip

•	If you want to customize a control, right-click the control, click Properties, and click any option in the submenu that displays.

 Related topics


To add a label to a dialog box control

1	Click the Quick tab button at the bottom of the application window to display the Objects sheet.

2	Double-click a dialog box.

3	Click Insert [image] Label text.

4	Click where you want to add the label.

If you need more room, drag the control to a new location.

5	Double-click the label.

6	Type the label text.

 Tip

•	You can also add a label to a dialog box by clicking the Label tool on the property bar.

 Related topics


To hide a control on a dialog box

1	Click the Quick tab button at the bottom of the application window to display the Objects sheet.

2	Double-click a dialog box.

3	Right-click a control, and click Properties [image] Hidden [image] Yes.

You can also
Make a control display grayed	Right-click the control, and click Properties [image] Grayed [image] Yes.
Disable a control	Right-click the control, and click Properties [image] Disabled [image] Yes.
 Note

•	When the Hidden property is applied, the control still displays in the dialog window while you are editing, but will disappear when you test the dialog box with the Test button.

 Related topics


To test a dialog box

1	Click the Quick tab button at the bottom of the application window to display the Objects sheet.

2	Double-click a dialog box.

3	Click the Test button on the property bar.

4	Test the dialog box.

 Related topics


Editing and positioning dialog boxes

You can edit the properties of dialog box windows, including their size, position, and name. Dialog boxes are created with a default object name (for example, Dialog 1). Macros, link commands, and formulas use this name when referring to a specific dialog box.

A dialog box can be copied to another notebook. You can also disable a dialog box. As well, you can delete a dialog box.

For information about specific dialog box properties, see Properties of form controls in the reference information section of the Quattro Pro online Help.

 How to


To edit a dialog box window

1	Click the Quick tab button at the bottom of the application window to display the Objects sheet.

2	Double-click a dialog box.

3	Right-click the title bar, click Dialog properties, and click one of the following:

•	Dimension [image] lets you specify the size and position of the dialog box window

•	Title [image] lets you change the title that displays on the title bar

•	Position adjust [image] lets you specify how the dialog box moves when the window is resized

•	Grid options [image] lets you display a grid to aid with placing controls

•	Name [image] lets you type an object name to which macros, link commands, and formulas can refer

 Related topics


To copy a dialog box to another notebook

1	Click the Quick tab button at the bottom of the application window to display the Objects sheet.

2	Double-click a dialog box.

3	Click Edit [image] Copy.

4	In the notebook to which you are copying the dialog box, click the Quick tab button at the bottom of the application window to display the Objects sheet.

5	Click Edit [image] Paste.

 Tip

•	You can also copy a dialog box to another notebook by holding down CTRL, selecting the dialog box, and dragging it to the second notebook's Object sheet.

 Related topics


To disable a dialog box

1	Click the Quick tab button at the bottom of the application window to display the Objects sheet.

2	Double-click a dialog box.

3	Right-click the title bar on the dialog box, and click Dialog properties [image] Disabled [image] Yes.

 Related topics


To delete a dialog box

1	Click the Quick tab button at the bottom of the application window to display the Objects sheet.

2	Click a dialog box icon.

3	Press DELETE.

 Related topics


Adding dialog box controls

After you create a default dialog box, you can add any of the following controls to a dialog box.

To specify the action performed when you select a control, right-click the control, and click Connect to connect the control to another control or display its value in a cell, or Links to specify the action to perform.

For more information about control properties, see Properties of form controls in the reference information section of the Quattro Pro online Help.

Bitmap buttons

A bitmap button displays a bitmap image on the face of the button. Bitmap buttons can imitate the behavior of all button types (for example, radio buttons).

Push buttons

You can add buttons to dialog boxes that can execute a macro, link to a Web site, or activate another custom dialog box when the button is clicked. Buttons do not have a value; buttons execute an event such as clicking instead of displaying a value that is transferred to a cell on a spreadsheet or to another control.

Check boxes

You can add check boxes to a dialog box. Each check box displays next to a default label.

Color controls

Adding color controls let you choose a color or create a custom color.

Combo boxes

You can add combo boxes, which are a type of list box that lets you add items to a list.

Label controls

You can add a label control to a dialog box. The label control lets you place text on the dialog box as a standalone feature or near a control that does not have a label, such as a rectangle control.

Edit boxes

Adding edit boxes to dialog boxes let you add data. The input data can be characters, numbers, cell addresses, or can make the typed data hidden.

File controls

A file control consists of a box for typing filenames and a browse button that displays a list of files on disk. Adding a file control lets you choose a filename, folder, and drive.

Group boxes

You can add a group box control, which acts as a container for other controls. Group boxes can contain radio buttons, check boxes, or buttons. These controls are considered child controls of the group box. You can use a group box to manage the controls it contains as a single unit. For example, when you move a group box in the dialog box, you also move the contents of the group box.

Scroll bars

Two scroll bar controls can be added to a dialog box: a horizontal scroll bar and a vertical scroll bar. Scroll bars let you scroll through a list of data to make a data selection.

List boxes

You can add a list box to a dialog box to list items which you can choose. The item that you choose becomes the value of the list box.

Radio buttons

Grouped radio buttons present a list of mutually exclusive choices. Only one radio button can be selected. When radio buttons are on a dialog box, the radio buttons are still mutually exclusive. The dialog box acts as a container for the radio button controls. When you want to use more than one set of radio buttons and have each set provide mutually exclusive choices on the same dialog box, place each set within a group box or rectangle.

Rectangle controls

A rectangle control performs the same function as a group box control. You can add a rectangle control to organize controls in a dialog box. Like group boxes, controls added to a rectangle become child controls.

Spin controls

Adding a spin control lets you enter numeric data by clicking arrows to increase or decrease the value of the spin control, or by typing the value.

Tab controls

You can add a tab control to organize settings in a notebook of controls. Clicking a tab displays controls associated with that tab.

Timer controls

You can use a timer control to run link commands at regular intervals or at a specified time. This is useful for creating toolbar controls that periodically retrieve current values from the active window.

 How to


To add a bitmap button to a dialog box

1	Click the Quick tab button at the bottom of the application window to display the Objects sheet.

2	Double-click a dialog box.

3	Click Insert [image] Bitmap button.

4	In the dialog box, drag diagonally to create the control.

5	Right-click the control, and click Properties [image] Bitmap.

6	Choose a file.

 Tips

•	You can add a custom bitmap image by copying a graphic to the clipboard, right-clicking the bitmap button, and selecting Paste.

•	You can select a button type for the bitmap image to imitate by right-clicking the bitmap button, and clicking Properties [image] Button type.

 Related topics


To add a push button to a dialog box

1	Click the Quick tab button at the bottom of the application window to display the Objects sheet.

2	Double-click a dialog box.

3	Click Insert [image] Push button.

4	In the dialog box, drag diagonally to create the control.

 Note

•	You can make a push button close the dialog box by selecting OK exit button or Cancel exit button from the Button type choices in the Properties menu.

 Related topics


To add a check box to a dialog box

1	Click the Quick tab button at the bottom of the application window to display the Objects sheet.

2	Double-click a dialog box.

3	Click Insert [image] Check box.

4	In the dialog box, drag diagonally to create the control.

5	Right-click the control, and click Properties [image] Label text.

6	In the Enter text box, type the label to display.

If you want to display the label to the left of the check box, right-click the check box, and click Properties [image] Draw to right [image] No.

 Note

•	The value of a check box is Yes when it is enabled and No when it is disabled.

 Related topics


To add a color control to a dialog box

1	Click the Quick tab button at the bottom of the application window to display the Objects sheet.

2	Double-click a dialog box.

3	Click Insert [image] Color box.

4	In the dialog box, drag diagonally to create the control.

 Related topics


To add a combo box to a dialog box

1	Click the Quick tab button at the bottom of the application window to display the Objects sheet.

2	Double-click a dialog box.

3	Click Insert [image] Combo box.

4	In the dialog box, drag diagonally to create the control.

If you want to specify a system list for the combo box, right-click the combo box, click Properties [image] List, and click a list.

You can also
Include cell contents in a combo box	Right-click the combo box, click Properties [image] List, double-click the edit box, and select a cell block on the spreadsheet
Paste a block of data into a combo box	Select the data from a spreadsheet, click the combo box, and click Edit [image] Paste
 Related topics


To add a label control to a dialog box

1	Click the Quick tab button at the bottom of the application window to display the Objects sheet.

2	Double-click a dialog box.

3	Click Insert [image] Label text.

4	In the dialog box, drag diagonally to create the control.

5	Right-click the control, and click Properties [image] Label text.

6	In the Enter text box, type the label to display.

 Related topics


To add an edit box to a dialog box

1	Click the Quick tab button at the bottom of the application window to display the Objects sheet.

2	Double-click a dialog box.

3	Click Insert [image] Edit box.

4	In the dialog box, drag diagonally to create the control.

 Note

•	Special characters (such as \n, \t, or \\) can only be allowed in an edit box if the Convert text option is set to Yes.

 Tip

•	If you want to remove the surrounding box, right-click the edit box, and click Properties [image] Show frame [image] No.

 Related topics


To add a file control to a dialog box

1	Click the Quick tab button at the bottom of the application window to display the Objects sheet.

2	Double-click a dialog box.

3	Click Insert [image] File control.

4	In the dialog box, drag diagonally to create the control.

 Note

•	The value of a file control determines the drive letter, folder, and filename that display. Whenever you view a different folder or use a different filename, the change is reflected in the value of the file control.

 Related topics


To add a group box to a dialog box

1	Click the Quick tab button at the bottom of the application window to display the Objects sheet.

2	Double-click a dialog box.

3	Click Insert [image] Group box.

4	In the dialog box, drag diagonally to create the control.

5	Click Insert, and click a control to add to the group box.

6	In the group box, drag diagonally to create the control.

 Note

•	When you add a group box, the Process value of a group box is set to yes. The Process value of radio buttons in the group box are set to no.

 Tip

•	You can also add options to a group box by copying a block from the clipboard to the group box. Each row of the block becomes a radio button.

 Related topics


To add a scroll bar to a dialog box

1	Click the Quick tab button at the bottom of the application window to display the Objects sheet.

2	Double-click a dialog box.

3	Click Insert [image] Scroll bar.

4	In the dialog box, drag diagonally to create the control.

 Note

•	The value of a scroll bar is an integer from a fixed range of integers.

 Related topics


To add a list box to a dialog box

1	Click the Quick tab button at the bottom of the application window to display the Objects sheet.

2	Double-click a dialog box.

3	Click Insert [image] List box.

4	In the dialog box, drag diagonally to create the control.

If you want to specify a system list for the list box, right-click the list box, click Properties [image] List, and click a list.

 Note

•	By default, list box entries are sorted alphanumerically in ascending order.

 Related topics


To add a radio button to a dialog box

1	Click the Quick tab button at the bottom of the application window to display the Objects sheet.

2	Double-click a dialog box.

3	Click Insert [image] Radio button.

4	In the dialog box, drag diagonally to create the control.

If you want to display the label to the left of the radio button, right-click the radio button, and click Properties [image] Draw to right [image] No.

 Note

•	By default, a radio button's Process value property is set to no, and the group box containing it has its Process value property set to yes. When the Process value property of a radio button is set to yes, a radio button has a value of yes when enabled and no when disabled.

 Tip

•	You can also add radio buttons to a dialog box by copying a block of data from the clipboard so that each row of the block becomes a radio button.

 Related topics


To add a rectangle control to a dialog box

1	Click the Quick tab button at the bottom of the application window to display the Objects sheet.

2	Double-click a dialog box.

3	Click Insert [image] Rectangle.

4	In the dialog box, drag diagonally to create the control.

5	Click Insert, and click a control to add to the rectangle control.

6	In the rectangle control, drag diagonally to create the control.

 Related topics


To add a spin control to a dialog box

1	Click the Quick tab button at the bottom of the application window to display the Objects sheet.

2	Double-click a dialog box.

3	Click Insert [image] Spin control.

4	In the dialog box, drag diagonally to create the control.

 Note

•	The value of a spin control is always an integer.

 Related topics


To add a tab control to a dialog box

1	Click the Quick tab button at the bottom of the application window to display the Objects sheet.

2	Double-click a dialog box.

3	Click Insert [image] Tab.

4	In the dialog box, drag diagonally to create the control.

If you want to add another control to the tab control, click Insert, and click a control.

 Note

•	You can rename a tab by double-clicking on its name and typing a new one.

 Related topics


To add a timer control to a dialog box

1	Click the Quick tab button at the bottom of the application window to display the Objects sheet.

2	Double-click a dialog box.

3	Click Insert [image] Timer.

4	In the dialog box, drag diagonally to create the control.

 Tip

•	The timer control can be turned into a clock by right-clicking the control, and clicking Properties [image] Show time [image] Yes.

 Related topics


Assigning properties to dialog box controls

You can identify the Name property of a control. The Name property of a dialog box control is usually the way you reference that object in a macro, link command, or spreadsheet function. This property is accessed for graphic objects, clipart, maps, charts, and OLE objects.

The Selected property indicates numerically which radio button in a group box is chosen, or which item in a list box or combo box is selected. Numbers are sequential (beginning at zero). If the first item is chosen or selected, the Selected property is set to 0. Choosing or selecting the second item sets the Selected property to 1, and so on.

Along with setting the Selected property, you can set the Selection text property. With this property, you can specify the selected text to display in a list box. You see this text selected when the control is activated or when you open the dialog box.

Every dialog box has a default button that closes the dialog box. By default, the OK button in a dialog box performs this function. You can assign another control the same function.

You can assign shortcut keys to both labeled and unlabelled controls. Assigning a shortcut key to a control allows you to run a macro when the control is selected or activated. For more information about using these events, see "Understanding link events."

You can specify areas of a dialog box or control where access is not available.

For more information about specific controls, see "Adding dialog box controls" and "Outline of control-specific properties." For more information about specific properties, see Properties of form controls in the reference information section of the Quattro Pro online Help.

 How to


To identify the Name property of a dialog box control

1	Click the Quick tab button at the bottom of the application window to display the Objects sheet.

2	Double-click a dialog box.

3	Right-click a control, and click Properties [image] Name.

You can also
Identify the object ID property of a dialog box control	Right-click the control, and click Properties [image] Object ID.
 Note

•	For information about changing the name of a dialog box control, see "To rename a control in a dialog box."

 Related topics


To set the Selected property for a dialog box control

1	Click the Quick tab button at the bottom of the application window to display the Objects sheet.

2	Double-click a dialog box.

3	Right-click a control, and click Properties [image] Selected.

4	Type a number in the Enter number box.

This will indicate which item is selected.

 Related topics


To set the Selection text property for a dialog box control

1	Click the Quick tab button at the bottom of the application window to display the Objects sheet.

2	Double-click a dialog box.

3	Right-click a control, and click Properties [image] Selection text.

4	Type text in the Enter text box.

 Note

•	For more information about creating the list used in a list box, see "To add a list box to a dialog box", "To add a spin control to a dialog box", or "To add a file control to a dialog box."

 Related topics


To make a dialog box control the default button

1	Click the Quick tab button at the bottom of the application window to display the Objects sheet.

2	Double-click a dialog box.

3	Right-click a control, and click Properties [image] Default button [image] Yes.

 Related topics


To assign a shortcut key to a labeled dialog box control

1	Click the Quick tab button at the bottom of the application window to display the Objects sheet.

2	Double-click a dialog box.

3	Double-click a label.

4	Click just before the letter to use.

5	Type &.

6	Press ENTER.

 Note

•	When a control or label control has an attached shortcut, a letter of the label is underlined.

 Related topics


To assign a shortcut key to an unlabelled dialog box control

1	Click the Quick tab button at the bottom of the application window to display the Objects sheet.

2	Double-click a dialog box.

3	Right-click a control without a label, and click Properties [image] Name.

4	Click just before the letter to use.

5	Type &.

6	Press ENTER.

 Note

•	If you use more than one ampersand, the first is recognized as a shortcut key designation, and the remaining ones display as text.

 Related topics


To limit access to a dialog box control or dialog box

1	Click the Quick tab button at the bottom of the application window to display the Objects sheet.

2	Double-click a dialog box.

3	Right-click a control, and click Properties [image] Depend on.

4	Disable any check boxes corresponding to areas in which you do not want the control available.

 Notes

•	If all options in the Depend on property are checked, the control is always available.

•	You can also limit access to dialog boxes and controls by using password protection. For information about assigning password protection, see "Using password protection."

 Related topics


Attaching actions to dialog box controls

After you add a control to a dialog box, you must specify what happens when a control executes an action or result. A control can execute when triggered by an action or when triggered by another control's actions. There are two ways to activate a control: by connecting it or by linking it.

You would connect a control to create a static or dynamic connection to a spreadsheet. For example, if you want the list in a list box to display a list of current customers, then a dynamic connection is appropriate, as it reflects the most recent data in the connected column on the spreadsheet. You should link a control to create a more complicated link. For example, you can create a compound link (a link containing several link actions for a control) or a conditional link (a link using an IF condition).

You can connect a control to another control or to a notebook cell. This creates a link command for the selected object.

You can specify actions for a control to perform in the Object link dialog box. You can assign a single link or consecutive links to a control. The links execute in the order they display.

The list types in the Object link dialog box from which to select are:

List	Description
Link events	Displays the specific event that triggers the link command
Link commands	Displays the command (action) that sends a value to another control or notebook cell, runs a macro, or runs another event in response to a triggering event
Link control properties	Displays available properties for the control
Object selector list	Allows you to specify a control or cell on which to act
Selected object properties	Displays properties for the item selected in the Object selector list
You can create conditional links by using the IF-THEN-ELSE link command. An IF-THEN-ELSE link command compares a minimum of two conditions and tests if the results are true. If the conditions are true, the THEN part of the link command occurs. The ELSE portion of the link command occurs if the result is false, so that the second IF link command occurs. For example, you can create a group box with three radio buttons, and link the radio buttons to two edit boxes that display different results depending on which radio button is selected.

You can delete a connected link command.

For examples of how to link dialog box controls, see Examples of linking controls in the reference information section of the Quattro Pro online Help.

For information about the kinds of link events and link commands available, see "Understanding link events" and "Understanding link commands."

 How to


To connect a dialog box control to cells or other controls

1	Click the Quick tab button at the bottom of the application window to display the Objects sheet.

2	Double-click a dialog box.

3	Select a control.

4	Right-click the control, and click Connect.

5	Type the cell reference in the Target field.

If you want to immediately send control value changes to a cell or another control, enable the Dynamic connection check box.

 Notes

•	The Dynamic connection check box is enabled by default; disable this box if you want to display control value changes to a cell or another control only when you close the dialog box.

•	You can access the Connect command through the Object link dialog box when you are in Developer mode. For more information about Developer mode, see "Working in Developer mode."

 Related topics


To specify the action performed by a dialog box control

1	Click the Quick tab button at the bottom of the application window to display the Objects sheet.

2	Double-click a dialog box.

3	Select a control.

4	Right-click the control, and click Links.

5	Click one of the following buttons:

•	Add [image] creates a link below the active link

•	Insert [image] creates a link above the active link

6	From the Link event list, choose the event that initiates the action.

7	From the Link command list, choose the action to perform.

8	Choose an option from any of the available lists.

 Tip

•	You can assign consecutive link commands for the control by repeating steps 3 through 6 of the above procedure.

 Related topics


To create a conditional object link

1	Click the Quick tab button at the bottom of the application window to display the Objects sheet.

2	Double-click a dialog box.

3	Select a control.

4	Right-click the control, and click Links.

5	Click Add.

6	From the Link event list, choose the event that initiates the action.

7	Choose If from the Link commands list.

8	Choose an option from any of the available lists.

 Related topics


To delete a connected link command

1	Click the Quick tab button at the bottom of the application window to display the Objects sheet.

2	Double-click a dialog box.

3	Select a control.

4	Right-click the control, and click Links.

5	Click one of the following:

•	Delete [image] deletes the selected link in the Object link dialog box

•	Delete all [image] deletes all links displayed in the Object link dialog box

 Related topics


Editing and positioning dialog box controls

Quattro Pro lets you customize the position and appearance of dialog box controls.

Dialog box controls are created with a default object name (for example, Dialog 1). Macros, link commands, and formulas use this name when referring to a specific control. You can rename these controls.

You can move dialog box controls in the same way as you move other floating objects. You can also specify the exact position of controls on a dialog box.

Controls can be copied in the same way as you copy other objects. Each instance of a control has a different object name (Button1, Button2, and so on), to avoid confusion when referring to the control in macros, link commands, and spreadsheet functions.

You can edit the controls in a dialog box. As well, you can align, center, and space multiple controls. For example, when you space controls horizontally, the first control you select displays at the left after repositioning, the next control displays to the right of the first, and so on. When you space controls vertically, the first control you select displays at the top, and so on.

You can change the size of a control in the same way as you resize other objects.

By default, when you press TAB, you can cycle through the controls in the order they were added to the dialog box. However, you can change this tabbing order.

 How to


To rename a control in a dialog box

1	Click the Quick tab button at the bottom of the application window to display the Objects sheet.

2	Double-click a dialog box.

3	Right-click a control, and click Properties [image] Name.

4	Type a new name in the Enter text box.

 Related topics


To move a control in a dialog box

1	Click the Quick tab button at the bottom of the application window to display the Objects sheet.

2	Double-click a dialog box.

3	Select a control.

4	Drag the control to a new location.

 Tips

•	If two or more controls are covering all or part of another control, you can adjust the overlap options so that the controls position separately by right-clicking one of the controls, clicking Object order, and clicking the appropriate selection.

•	If you want to use a grid to help you position the control, right-click the dialog box title, click Dialog properties [image] Grid options, and enable the Show grid check box.

 Related topics


To specify an exact position for a control in a dialog box

1	Click the Quick tab button at the bottom of the application window to display the Objects sheet.

2	Double-click a dialog box.

3	Right-click the control, and click Properties [image] Dimension.

4	Type a value in the following boxes:

•	X pos [image] lets you specify the distance in pixels between the left edge of the control and the left side of the dialog box

•	Y pos [image] lets you specify the distance in pixels between the top edge of the control and the bottom edge of the dialog box's title bar

 Related topics


To copy a control in a dialog box

1	Click the Quick tab button at the bottom of the application window to display the Objects sheet.

2	Double-click a dialog box.

3	Select a control.

4	Click Edit [image] Copy.

5	Click where you want to copy the control.

6	Click Edit [image] Paste.

 Note

•	Copying a parent control copies any child controls attached to it as well.

 Tip

•	You can also copy a control by using the Copy and Paste buttons on the toolbar.

 Related topics


To edit multiple dialog box controls

1	Click the Quick tab button at the bottom of the application window to display the Objects sheet.

2	Double-click a dialog box.

3	Drag a frame around the controls you want to edit.

4	Edit the selected controls.

 Tips

•	You can also select multiple controls by holding down SHIFT and clicking the controls you want to edit.

•	You can edit all controls in a dialog box by clicking a control and clicking Edit [image] Select all.

 Related topics


To align multiple dialog box controls

1	Click the Quick tab button at the bottom of the application window to display the Objects sheet.

2	Double-click a dialog box.

3	Click a control, hold down SHIFT, and click additional controls.

4	Right-click one of the controls, click Align, and click one of the following:

•	Align left [image] lines up the left sides of the selected controls

•	Align right [image] lines up the right sides of the selected controls

•	Align top [image] lines up the top edges of the selected controls

•	Align bottom [image] lines up the bottom edges of the selected controls

 Related topics


To center multiple dialog box controls

1	Click the Quick tab button at the bottom of the application window to display the Objects sheet.

2	Double-click a dialog box.

3	Click a control, hold down SHIFT, and click additional controls.

4	Right-click one of the controls, click Position, and click one of the following:

•	Center horizontally [image] centers controls between the left and right edges of the dialog box

•	Center vertically [image] centers controls between the top and bottom edges of the dialog box

 Related topics


To space multiple dialog box controls

1	Click the Quick tab button at the bottom of the application window to display the Objects sheet.

2	Double-click a dialog box.

3	Click a control, hold down SHIFT, and click additional controls.

4	Right-click one of the controls, click Space, and click one of the following:

•	Horizontal space

•	Vertical space

5	Type a number in the Space between objects box.

This indicates the pixel distance to space the selected controls.

 Related topics


To resize multiple dialog box controls

1	Click the control whose size you want to apply to other controls.

2	Hold down SHIFT, and click additional controls.

3	Click Format [image] Same size.

 Related topics


To change the tab order for dialog box controls

1	Click the Quick tab button at the bottom of the application window to display the Objects sheet.

2	Double-click a dialog box.

3	Hold down SHIFT, and select each control in the order you want to move through the controls.

4	Click Format [image] Tab order [image] Set new.

 Note

•	You can also change the order for settings initial values of a control and the order in which they activate. For more information about changing the initial values and order of controls, see "To change the order for setting initial values in a dialog box."

 Related topics


Working with child controls in dialog boxes

When you drag a control on top of another control, they become attached. The top control is the child; the bottom control is its parent. You can attach controls to both group boxes and rectangle controls. When you move a parent control on top of another control, the controls attached to the original parent stay associated with the original parent. For example, you can place a group box of radio buttons on top of a rectangle control and the radio buttons remain children of the group box, not of the rectangle.

You can also add an unattached control to a parent control. This means that the unattached control is not controlled by the parent control. For example, resizing the parent does not affect the unattached control. A control can be unattached from its parent. This allows the control to work independently from the other child controls in the parent control (like a rectangle control or group box).

You can move a child control when the dialog box is resized. When you move a group box, any child controls (for example, radio buttons) move with it. By selecting a relative position for a control, the unlocked edges of a child control move relative to its position in the parent control.

If you change settings, however, you can move a child control with the parent as shown by the arrows below.

For more information about creating group boxes and rectangle controls, see "To add a group box to a dialog box" and "To add a rectangle control to a dialog box." For more information about linking group boxes and rectangle controls, see Examples of linking controls in the reference information section of the Quattro Pro online Help.

 How to


To attach a control to group boxes and rectangle controls

1	Click the Quick tab button at the bottom of the application window to display the Objects sheet.

2	Double-click a dialog box.

3	Drag a control onto a rectangle control or group box.

4	Right-click the parent control, and click Properties [image] Attach child [image] Yes.

 Notes

•	For information about adding buttons, radio buttons, or check boxes to group boxes and rectangle controls, see "To add a group box to a dialog box" and "To add a rectangle control to a dialog box."

•	Child controls must cover only the parent control. Controls partially covering one another will not attach.

 Related topics


To add an unattached control to a parent control

1	Click the Quick tab button at the bottom of the application window to display the Objects sheet.

2	Double-click a dialog box.

3	Select a control.

4	Right-click the parent control, and click Properties [image] Attach child [image] No.

5	Click Insert, and click a control.

6	Drag the new control onto the parent control.

7	Right-click the parent control, and click Properties [image] Attach child [image] Yes.

 Related topics


To separate a control from a parent control

1	Click the Quick tab button at the bottom of the application window to display the Objects sheet.

2	Double-click a dialog box.

3	Drag the child control onto the dialog box outside of the parent control.

4	Select the parent control.

5	Right-click the parent control, and click Properties [image] Attach child [image] No.

6	Drag the control back onto the parent control.

 Related topics


To move a child control when the dialog box is resized

1	Click the Quick tab button at the bottom of the application window to display the Objects sheet.

2	Double-click a dialog box.

3	Right-click a control, and click Properties [image] Position adjust.

4	In the Position adjust area, enable any of the following options:

•	Depend on parent [image] locks each edge of the child control in place so that the child resizes in proportion to the proportions of the resized parent control

•	Center horizontally [image] centers the control between the left and right sides of the resized parent control

•	Center vertically [image] centers the control between the top and bottom sides of the resized parent control

5	In the Position relative to area, enable any of the following check boxes:

•	Top [image] unlocks the top edge of the control

•	Bottom [image] unlocks the bottom edge of the control

•	Left [image] unlocks the left edge of the control

•	Right [image] unlocks the right edge of the control

6	Drag the lower-right corner of the dialog box window to resize the parent control.

 Related topics


Creating Help and tips for controls

You can create your own Help (.hlp) files and use them for custom applications you build with Quattro Pro. This allows you to enter tips and Help files for the controls and the dialog boxes you create.

Application bar hints can be created for a control. For dialog box controls, this property displays the text at the bottom right of the application bar when the cursor hovers over the control.

You can link a Help file to a control. As well, you can link a Help button to a Help file.

 How to


To create Help for a dialog box control

1	Click the Quick tab button at the bottom of the application window to display the Objects sheet.

2	Double-click a dialog box.

3	Right-click a control, and click Properties [image] Object Help.

4	In the Object Help title box, type the title to display.

5	In the Object Help text box, type the text to display when you right-click the object in a dialog box.

 Notes

•	For more information about using the Object Help property, see Properties of form controls in the reference information section of the Quattro Pro online Help.

•	The combined total of all characters in the three Object Help fields cannot exceed 194 characters.

 Related topics


To create an application bar hint for a dialog box control

1	Click the Quick tab button at the bottom of the application window to display the Objects sheet.

2	Double-click a dialog box.

3	Right-click a control, and click Properties [image] Help line.

4	Type the hint in the Enter text box.

 Related topics


To link a Help file to a dialog box control

1	Click the Quick tab button at the bottom of the application window to display the Objects sheet.

2	Double-click a dialog box.

3	Right-click a control, and click Properties [image] Object Help.

4	Type the context string, an @ symbol, and the Help filename in the WinHelp context box.

 Note

•	For the Help to launch the Object Help title and Object Help text boxes must both be empty.

 Related topics


To link a dialog box to a Help file

1	Click the Quick tab button at the bottom of the application window to display the Objects sheet.

2	Double-click a dialog box.

3	Right-click a control, and click Links.

4	Click Add and make the following list selections:

•	On

•	Link event

•	Link command

•	Help topic and filename

•	Selected object

•	Selected object properties

 Tip

•	When creating the link command, if you do not see Help on the object pick list next to where you type in the Help file, click Enter and type Help.

 Related topics


To link a Help button to a Help file

1	Click the Quick tab button at the bottom of the application window to display the Objects sheet.

2	Double-click a dialog box.

3	Right-click the title of the dialog box, and click Links.

4	Click Add and make the following list selections:

•	On

•	Link event

•	Link command

•	Blank

•	Object selector

•	Selected object properties

•	On

•	Link event

•	Link command

•	Object selector

•	Selected object properties

 Tip

•	When creating the link command, if you do not see Help on the object pick list next to where you type in the Help file, click Enter and type Help.

 Related topics


Using macros to display a dialog box

You can create a macro to display a custom dialog box and set its initial values, using the {DODIALOG} macro command. The most important argument in {DODIALOG} is the third argument, which outlines cells that contain the initial settings of the dialog box controls. Each cell in the block (starting at the upper-left cell and proceeding row by row to the lower-right cell) sets the initial value of one control. If you cancel the dialog box, the values in this block remain unchanged.

Each control stores one setting. You manipulate the control (by clicking a scroll arrow, typing text, and so on) to change that setting. There are several ways to set a control's value:

•	through initial settings you send (or pass) using a {DODIALOG} command

•	by changing a setting in the dialog box

•	using the {SETOBJECTPROPERTY} command.

•	with link commands from any dialog box control

For example, the following macro command uses the Value property to enter Spanish in an edit box: {SETOBJECTPROPERTY "Dialog1:EditField3.Value","Spanish"}

You can change the order for setting initial values. As well, you can reorder controls.

For additional information, see the reference section "Example of using macros to display a dialog box."

 How to


To display a dialog box and set initial values

1	Set up an area in a notebook that will send default settings to the dialog box.

2	Type a {DODIALOG} macro command that displays the dialog box and sends the choices back to the notebook. The {DODIALOG} macro must contain the following arguments:

•	Argument 1 [image] specifies the name of the notebook that contains the dialog box you want to display and the name of the dialog box. The name of the notebook is optional if the dialog box is stored in the active notebook.

•	Argument 2 [image] specifies a cell that stores a value indicating how you closed the dialog box. If the dialog box was canceled, 0 is stored in the cell. If the dialog box was closed by pressing ENTER or clicking OK, 1 is stored.

•	Argument 3 [image] specifies a block that contains initial values for the dialog box controls, and receives final values from the dialog box controls when the dialog box is closed

•	Argument 4 [image] specifies whether you should manipulate the dialog box (1) or if the macro should manipulate it (0). The default is 1.

 Notes

•	If a control's Process value property is set to No, the control will not receive an initial value. Controls that do not have a Process value property have no initial value.

•	If you want to make a dialog box dynamic so that changes are immediately reflected in the notebook, add link commands to each control. For information about using link commands, see "Attaching actions to dialog box controls."

 Related topics


To change the order for setting initial values in a dialog box

1	Click the Quick tab button at the bottom of the application window to display the Objects sheet.

2	Double-click a dialog box.

3	Click the dialog box background.

None of the controls should be selected.

4	Hold down SHIFT, and click each control in the order in which you want to send initial value settings.

5	Click Format [image] Value order [image] Set new.

 Related topics


To reorder controls in a dialog box

1	Click the Quick tab button at the bottom of the application window to display the Objects sheet.

2	Double-click a dialog box.

3	Click the dialog box background.

None of the controls should be selected.

4	Click Format [image] Value order [image] Reorder from first.

5	Hold down SHIFT, and click each control in the order in which you want to send values.

 Related topics


Reference: Working with custom dialog boxes and controls

Once you have named a dialog box and given it a title, you can add controls to it. Each control is best suited for presenting or receiving a certain type of information. Most controls display a setting and allow you to change the setting.

Link commands perform dynamic actions in response to events. A link command can make a control do different things. For example, it can send a value to a cell in the notebook, send a value to another control, run a macro, close the dialog box, or change the zoom factor in the notebook. One control can have several link commands listed in the Object link dialog box.

The first list in the Object link dialog box (the Link event list) shows the event that you want to trigger the link command. More than one link command in a control can respond to the same event. The order in which the link commands display in the Object link dialog box is the order in which they run.

 How to


Understanding dialog box controls

The following table describes the most common controls.

Control	Description
Button	Performs a specific action when clicked
Check box	Provides two choices: Yes when enabled and No when disabled
Radio button	Typically used in a mutually exclusive list where only one radio button can be enabled at a time
Group box	Contains other controls, such as radio buttons or check boxes
List box	Lets you choose data from a list
Combo box	Lets you add items to a list box
Label	Lets you display text next to a control
Spin control	Lets you choose a value by typing or by clicking arrows and selecting a value
Edit box	Lets you type text
Vertical scroll bar	Lets you select a value from a range of values
Horizontal scroll bar	Lets you select a value from a range of values
Bitmap button	Lets you display a bitmap image instead of a label on a button, and then imitates the behavior of a check box, radio button, or push button
Rectangle control	Embellishes a dialog box, or groups two or more controls
File control	Lets you choose a filename and a browse button with access to all available files
Color control	Lets you change a color setting
Tab	Lets you create tabs on a dialog box
Timer control	Lets you add a timer, clock, or alarm to a dialog box
For more information about the functions of controls, see Properties of dialog box controls in the reference information section of the Quattro Pro online Help.

 Related topics


Understanding link commands

The following table shows you the link commands available from the Link command list:

Choose	Result
SEND	Sends a value or property to a cell in the notebook; another control; or a property in a selection; sheet; notebook; or the Quattro Pro application
RECEIVE	Receives a value or property from a cell in the notebook, another control, or a property in a selection, sheet, notebook, or the Quattro Pro application
DOMACRO	Plays the macro you specify
EXECUTE	Executes another control or another dialog box
SET	Sets properties in the dialog box, another dialog box, a cell, a sheet, a notebook, or the Quattro Pro application
TRIGGER	Executes or "fires" an action or piece of code when certain events or conditions are met. For example, you might use a trigger event for a button that updates values.
IF	Creates conditional statements
The {DODIALOG} macro command brings changed values to the notebook when you close the dialog box. However, if you set up a dynamic link, you do not have to close the dialog box to see the changed values. For more information about using {DODIALOG}, see "Using macros to display a dialog box."

 Related topics


Understanding link events

The following table describes the link events common to all dialog box controls.

Link event	Triggers the link command when
Init	The dialog box is about to display. Use Init to set initial settings.
Init_Complete	You add a link command to the dialog box itself. This event occurs immediately after all controls have run all link commands that respond to Init.
OKExit	The dialog box has been closed. The link command runs before the dialog box closes.
CancelExit	The dialog box has been canceled. The link command runs before the dialog box closes.
Clicked	The control has been clicked..
Right_bdown	The control has been right-clicked.
Left_bdown	You've pointed to the control and held down the left mouse button. Releasing the button generates a Clicked event.
Doubleclick	The control has been double-clicked.
Valuechanged	The value of the control has been changed. This event occurs any time the value is changed.
key:keystroke	The key keystroke has been pressed. When you choose key from the Link event list, it flashes to indicate that you must press a key. Press the key you want to generate the event. For example, key:Ctrl + F5 indicates that the link command is triggered by pressing CTRL + F5.
Activate	The control for manipulation has been chosen. For example, clicking an edit box generates this event so that Valuechanged traps the final result entered in the edit box.
Deactivate	Another control has been chosen, leaving this control inactive.
Trigger	This event cannot be generated by any action. Use it to connect link commands that are triggered (or executed) by link commands. Use the link command TRIGGER to generate this event.
Some link events that trigger link commands are available only for specific controls. The following table describes link events for edit boxes, scroll bars, combo boxes, and timer controls.

Control	Link event and purpose
Edit box	Enter [image] executes when ENTER is pressed.
Scroll bars	Lineup [image] permits you to increase the value of the scroll bar by clicking a scroll arrow
	Linedown [image] permits you to decrease the value of the scroll bar by clicking a scroll arrow
	Pageup [image] permits you to increase the scroll bar's value by clicking between a scroll arrow and the scroll box
	Pagedown [image] permits you to decrease the scroll bar's value by clicking it between a scroll arrow and the scroll box
	Thumb [image] lets you click or drag the scroll bar's scroll box
Combo box	Editdynamic [image] lets you insert or delete characters in the combo box's edit box
Timer control	Alarm [image] executes when the specified time has been reached
	Timer [image] executes when the specified amount of time has elapsed
 Related topics


Outline of control-specific properties

You can assign properties to a control by right-clicking it, and clicking Properties. The commands on the Properties menu listed before Dimension are specific to that control. All the properties from Dimension to the end of the menu are properties you can set for all controls. The procedure for assigning these properties differs from control to control. The following list identifies control-specific properties.

For more information about specific controls, see "Adding dialog box controls."

Bitmap button properties

You can select a bitmap image from the systems list or display a bitmap image you have available from another source by using the Bitmap properties dialog box. You can also assign a bitmap button a behavioral identity from the Button type properties.

Push button properties

A push button can also imitate the behavior of an OK button or a Cancel button, allowing the button to close the dialog box.

Check box properties

You have the option of displaying a check box label to the left of a check box in addition to the default display (which displays the label on the right side.)

Combo box properties

One of the variations possible is to configure the combo box to prevent you from entering a value into the list. By default, combo box entries are sorted alphanumerically in ascending order. A combo box can also be set to display a history as the list of the combo box.

Label control properties

You can use the default font in a label control, or you can change the label font through the Label font properties. You can also change the word wrap features of the label and position of the text on the label.

Edit box properties

The input data can be characters, numbers, cell addresses, or you can make the typed data hidden. When you specify Integer as the field type, the control is renamed to Edit Integer. Default values for Edit Integer are 0 as the minimum value, 32,676 as the maximum value, and 0 as the initial (default) value in the edit box. You can configure the edit box to accept special characters, using the following chart for characters available:

Special character	Result
\n	Displays the following text on a new line
\t	Inserts a tab
\\	Inserts a backslash (\) into the text
You can set an edit box so that you can double-click the edit box, and point to a cell or cell block on a spreadsheet to add the cell references to the edit box.

File control properties

You can display a predefined list in the File list control. When you click the Browse button, the Quattro Pro open file dialog box displays. If the Dialog type property is set to Save, the Quattro Pro save file dialog displays. You can also prevent users from typing in the box.

Group box properties

When a group box contains radio buttons, its value is the title of the radio button chosen. By default, an empty group box does not have a value. A group box has a Value property and a Selected property. The Selected property indicates numerically which of its radio buttons is enabled, starting from the top-left radio button (zero) and proceeding to the bottom-right button.

When you create a group box, the Process value of a group box is set to Yes. The Process value of radio buttons in the group box are set to No.

Scroll bar properties

You can configure a scroll bar by setting parameters and changing the settings.

List box properties

You can use a predefined list or assign data in a cell block as the list in a list box. By default, the list displays with one column, but you can add more columns to a list box. By default, lists display in alphanumeric order.

Radio button properties

You can change the label of a radio button, as well as display the label on either the right (default) or left sides of the radio button.

Rectangle control properties

You can customize the appearance of the rectangle through the Rectangle control properties. The Transparent rectangle style is useful for grouping controls together without displaying the rectangle to which they are attached. The background color and the border color around the rectangle can also be customized.

Spin control properties

You can assign a range of values to a spin control through the spin control properties. You can also change the number of digits allowed to display by adjusting the integer length (the default length is 6).

Tab control properties

Once you add a tab control to a dialog box, you can then create multiple tabs (or pages) to help organize the dialog box controls. The Active page property indicates which tab is active. The Page list property displays commands for creating, removing, and reordering tabs.

Timer control properties

There are two ways to configure a timer control for generating regular events: as a timer or as an alarm.

A timer generates the timer event at regular intervals (for example, every two seconds). A timer control shows the current time. You can also use a timer control to run link commands at regular intervals or at a certain time. You can use timer controls to display the current time in a dialog box or on a toolbar. Timer controls do not have a value.

Two properties of the timer control are used to specify the number of milliseconds to wait between timer events, as shown in the following formula: Wait = Units in Milliseconds X Interval in Units

Units in Milliseconds is set to 1000 by default, so you can use the Interval in units property to specify how many seconds to wait between timer events.

As an alarm, the timer control generates the alarm event at a certain time. The toolbar must be open; for example, an alarm set for 3:00 will not generate an alarm event if the toolbar is not on screen at 3:00.

 Related topics


Example of using macros to display a dialog box

First, set up an area in the notebook that will send default settings to the dialog box. For example, in the following table for a loan payment dialog box, B1..B5 is a block that defines the initial dialog box settings:

A	B
1. Pay_Every	Month
2. Loan_Amount	100000
3. Int_Rate	12.5
4. Term	30
5. End_Of_Period	No
This sets the default payment period to monthly, the default loan amount at 100,000, the default interest rate at 12.5%, the default term at 30 years, and the payment date at the start of the month.

After the initial dialog box settings have been entered in the notebook, you can enter a macro command that will display the dialog box and send the choices back to the notebook. Use the {DODIALOG} command to do this.

Each cell in the block (starting at the upper-left cell and proceeding row by row to the lower-right cell) sets the initial value of one control. If the dialog box is cancelled, the values in this block remain unchanged.

Here is an example of a {DODIALOG} macro command used to display a loan payment dialog box using the initial settings in B1..B5: {DODIALOG LoanData,B6,B1..B5,1}

This command displays the dialog box and sends (or passes) the initial values in cells B1 through B5 to the dialog box controls. If the dialog box is cancelled, it also sends a value of 0 to cell B6 ; otherwise, the value is 1. The final argument of the command specifies that you can manipulate the dialog box.

For example, if a dialog box has six controls, but you have set the Process value property of the third control to No, the setting block should be only five cells long. The values in the first two cells will be passed to the first two controls. However, the value in the third cell will go to the fourth control, and the values in the fourth and fifth cells will go to the fifth and sixth controls, respectively.

Setting the Process value property to Yes lets the {DODIALOG} macro command access the control's value. The Process value property is available for many dialog box controls.

By default, the order in which you created controls is the order that the {DODIALOG} command sets initial values in a dialog box. The first control you created is sent the first value from the {DODIALOG} command, regardless of its position in the dialog box.

You can make this dialog box dynamic by adding link commands to each control so that the changes are immediately reflected in the notebook. For more information about using link commands, see "Attaching actions to dialog box controls."

 Related topics


Using databases

Databases are collections of information organized as fields, records, and files. A field is a single piece of information; a record is a set of fields; and a file is a set of records. A database can contain information such as names and addresses of clients, patient records, or product inventory.

In this section, you'll learn about

•	creating notebook databases

•	preparing notebook database search queries

•	querying notebook databases

•	querying external databases

•	importing data from external databases

For more information about using databases, see "Reference: Using databases."


Creating notebook databases

You can use data forms in Quattro Pro to create notebook databases. Data forms let you do the basic functions of adding, deleting, or changing records in a database using a form, instead of typing the information directly in the notebook cells. Each field from the database is listed, you type in the information, and then Quattro Pro automatically places it in a row in the notebook database.

You can add records to a notebook database. As well, you can search for records in a notebook database when you need to edit or delete existing records or discover if there are duplicate records. When searching for records, you can navigate through the database to find the information you want.

You can edit information in existing records and delete records that you no longer require.

 How to


To create a notebook database

1	In a blank notebook, type field names in individual columns of row 1.

For example, you could type Name in cell A1, Address in cell B1, and City in cell C1.

2	Select the field names in row 1 and the empty cells directly beneath them in row 2.

For example, if you have field names in cells A1 to C1, select the block of cells from A1 to C2.

3	Click Tools [image] Data tools [image] Form.

4	Click OK.

5	In the Edit records dialog box, type the record information in the corresponding fields.

6	Click New.

 Note

•	A notebook database can also be created by manually typing data in the rows beneath the appropriate field name. For more information, see "Rules for entering database cells in Quattro Pro."

 Related topics


To add a notebook database record

1	Click a cell in the database.

2	Click Tools [image] Data tools [image] Form.

3	Click OK.

4	In the Edit records dialog box, click New.

5	Type the record information in the corresponding fields.

6	Click New.

 Related topics


To navigate in a notebook database

1	Click a cell in the database.

2	Click Tools [image] Data tools [image] Form.

3	Click OK.

4	In the Edit records dialog box, click any of the following navigation buttons:

•	First record [image] moves directly to the first database record

•	Last record [image] moves directly to the last database record

•	Record forward [image] moves forward one database record

•	Record back [image] moves backward one database record

 Note

•	When searching for records, the navigation buttons navigate only records that meet the search criteria. To navigate all database records, clear the search criteria.

 Tip

•	You can also navigate in a database by using the slider. As you drag the slider, Quattro Pro displays the record number above the bar. You can drag the slider from the first record to the last record, and you can stop at any record.

 Related topics


To search for a record in a notebook database

1	Click a cell in the database.

2	Click Tools [image] Data tools [image] Form.

3	Click OK.

4	In the Edit records dialog box, click Search.

5	Type the information for which to search in the corresponding fields.

6	Click Record forward.

 Note

•	To narrow the search, fill out as many fields with search criteria as you can. To broaden the search, use wildcards in your search criteria.

 Related topics


To edit a notebook database record

1	Click a cell in the database.

2	Click Tools [image] Data tools [image] Form.

3	Click OK.

4	In the Edit records dialog box, click Record back to locate the record to edit.

5	Edit the record.

6	Click Record forward.

 Related topics


To delete a notebook database record

1	Click a cell in the database.

2	Click Tools [image] Data tools [image] Form.

3	Click OK.

4	In the Edit records dialog box, click Record back until you locate the record to delete.

5	Click Delete.

 Note

•	You cannot retrieve records after you delete them.

 Related topics


Preparing notebook database search queries

Preparing to query a notebook database is a three-step process. First, you create a criteria table. A criteria table consists of a row of field names that must match one or more fields in the database cells, and one or more rows of search criteria. The criteria table must be contiguous and confined to one spreadsheet, but it does not have to be on the same spreadsheet as the database cells.

Next, you create the search output cells for viewing the results of your query. You create these cells on an area of the notebook where database records that match your search criteria will be copied. It is important to place your output cells in an area that does not overlap with either the database cells or the criteria table.

Finally, you can set up AND and OR queries, search formulas, and wildcards in the criteria table to help you narrow or broaden your search.

AND and OR queries can help you either narrow or broaden your search. When you use AND queries, all data must match all search criteria in all rows of the criteria table. When you use OR queries, data can match criteria in one or more rows of the criteria table, but not necessarily all rows. To get the most out of your search, combine AND and OR queries. For an example, see "Example of a notebook database query."

Search formulas are a powerful database search tool. They let you specify conditions that must be met for Quattro Pro to find matching records. Your search conditions can be as specific or as general as you want. For example, you can create a search formula that looks for payments of less than $25.00 (+~PAYMENT<25) or records dated after January 1, 1939 (+~DATE>@DATE(1939,1,1)). When you reference another cell in a criteria table formula, while the cell reference on the left needs to be relative, the cell reference on the right needs to be absolute; for example: +~AGE>$H$5. For a listing of available operators and symbols, see "Operators and symbols available in a search formula."

Wildcards are placeholder characters that represent one or more characters. They are powerful tools for searching for text in database cells. You can use wildcards or search formulas as search criteria, but you cannot combine wildcards with other operators. For example, +~Item=tape is a valid comparison formula. However, if you enter the formula +~Item=t?p , the exact string t?p is found; records containing tip, tap, or top are not found. For a listing of available wildcards, see "Wildcards available in a criteria table."

 How to


To create a criteria table for a notebook database

1	Select the field names to search in the database.

2	Click Edit [image] Copy.

3	In a blank area of the spreadsheet, click Edit [image] Paste.

4	Type search criteria in the rows beneath the corresponding field names using the following:

•	Exact matches [image] type search criteria exactly as the data displays in the database

•	Conditional matches [image] type search criteria using search formulas, wildcards, or queries

 Note

•	For an example of a query, see "Example of a notebook database query."

 Related topics


To set up an AND query in a criteria table

1	Type a criterion under a field name of the criteria table.

2	In the same row, type a criterion under another field name of the criteria table.

 Note

•	For an example of this query, see "Example of a notebook database query."

 Related topics


To set up an OR query in a criteria table

1	Type a criterion under a field name of the criteria table.

2	In a different row, type a criterion under another field name of the criteria table.

 Note

•	For an example of this query, see "Example of a notebook database query."

 Related topics


To set up an AND and OR query in a criteria table

1	Type a criterion under a field name of the criteria table.

2	In the same row, type a criterion under another field name of the criteria table.

3	In a different row, type a criterion under a field name of the criteria table.

 Note

•	For an example of this query, see "Example of a notebook database query."

 Related topics


To set up a search formula in a criteria table

1	Type search formulas under field names of the criteria table.

2	Click Tools [image] Data tools [image] Notebook query.

3	Click Field names.

 Notes

•	For a listing of available operators and symbols, see "Operators and symbols available in a search formula."

•	Logical formulas in criteria tables display either 1 (true) or 0 (false).

 Related topics


To set up wildcards in a criteria table

•	Type a criterion, including a wildcard, under a field name of the criteria table.

 Note

•	For a listing of available wildcards, see "Wildcards available in a criteria table."

 Related topics


To create search output cells for a notebook database

1	Select the field names to search in the database.

2	Click Edit [image] Copy.

3	In a blank area of the spreadsheet, click Edit [image] Paste.

 Notes

•	The search output cells must be separate from the criteria table.

•	The search output cells do not have to be on the same spreadsheet as the criteria table or the database cells.

 Related topics


Querying notebook databases

After creating a criteria table, setting up search formulas, queries, or wildcards, and creating search output cells, you can query notebook databases. For information about query preparation, see "Preparing notebook database search queries."

Using the query function, you can highlight specific records in a notebook database. You can also copy records from the notebook database to output cells on your spreadsheet. As well, you can use search criteria to delete records from the notebook database.

 How to


To highlight specific records in a notebook database

1	Click Tools [image] Data tools [image] Notebook query.

2	Select the database cells using the Range picker.

3	Select the criteria table using the Range picker.

4	Click Locate.

 Note

•	Pressing ESC returns you to the Notebook data query dialog box.

 Tip

•	To select database cells in another open notebook, use standard linking syntax. For example, typing [DATA]A1..Z50 specifies cells A1..Z50 in the notebook called DATA.

 Related topics


To copy notebook database records to output cells

1	Click Tools [image] Data tools [image] Notebook query.

2	Select the database cells using the Range picker.

3	Select the criteria table using the Range picker.

4	Select the row of the output cells which contains the field names using the Range picker.

5	Click one of the following buttons:

•	Extract [image] copies all records matching the specified criteria to the output cells

•	Extract unique [image] copies only unique records matching the specified criteria to the output cells; duplicate entries are ignored

 Notes

•	To select database cells in another open notebook, use standard linking syntax. For example, typing [DATA]A1..Z50 specifies cells A1..Z50 in the notebook called DATA.

•	Only fields whose names are written on the first row of the output cells are copied. All data in the cells beneath the output cells is erased before it is extracted; do not store notebook data in that area of the spreadsheet. You can avoid losing data by specifying an output area larger than one row; this also limits the number of records the output cells accept.

 Related topics


To delete specific records from a notebook database

1	Click Tools [image] Data tools [image] Notebook query.

2	Select the database cells using the Range picker.

3	Select the criteria table using the Range picker.

4	Click Delete.

 Notes

•	Records below the deleted records move up to fill in the empty rows. Use caution when doing this unless you are certain you want to remove the records.

•	To select database cells in another open notebook, use standard linking syntax. For example, typing [DATA]A1..Z50 specifies cells A1..Z50 in the notebook called DATA.

 Tips

•	Records that have been accidentally deleted can be restored using the Undo command.

•	You can use the delete function in conjunction with the highlight function, allowing you to see the records that match your search before they are deleted.

 Related topics


Querying external databases

You can query external databases to access information in database files created using Paradox, Reflex, or dBASE (versions II, III, and IV) applications. Querying external databases lets you extract information from the database without first having to translate the file.

When you query external databases, you must create a criteria table specifying the type of information for which you are searching and output cells to hold the results of the search. For information about criteria tables and output cells, see "Preparing notebook database search queries."

You can also Query By Example (QBE), which, in database management systems, refers to a method of forming queries in which the database program displays a blank record with a space for each field. You can enter conditions for each field to be included in the query. For example, to find all records where the age field is greater than 65, you would type >65 in the age field.

Once you create a .qbe file, you can run the QBE query from Quattro Pro. A QBE query in a notebook selection always starts with the word Query and ends with the word EndQuery. The best way to learn the QBE syntax is to create queries in Paradox, import them into Quattro Pro, and then experiment by revising them.

An alias is a shortcut name that takes the place of a long path name. When using external database tables, it is convenient to assign aliases for your private and working directories. A private directory is a location for your temporary answer tables and other files that are not shared. A working directory is where a database application or a feature looks for external database tables.

 How to


To query external databases

1	Click Tools [image] Data tools [image] Notebook query.

2	In the Database cells box, type the path of the external database file using linking syntax.

You do not need to type the path if the database path is already in your working directory.

3	Select the criteria table using the Range picker.

4	Select the row of the output cells which contains the field names using the Range picker.

5	Click Extract.

 Notes

•	The format of linking syntax is [Database]A1..A2, where [Database] is the name of the database, including the path; for example, C:\PARADOX\SAMPLE.DB. The cells specified after the filename can be any valid area with at least two rows. A1..A2 acts as a hook into the database. It remains A1..A2, no matter the size of the database area.

•	If your criteria contain formulas with cell references to data elsewhere, those cell references must be absolute. For example, for a table with Name and Age as column titles, you could type +~age>25 to identify all entries where age>25. To reference the cell C1 that contained the value 25, typing +AGE>C1 would not work; instead, you would need to type +~AGE>$A:$C$1 as the criteria, using absolute references.

 Related topics


To use Query By Example

1	Click Insert [image] External data [image] Table query.

2	Enable one of the following options:

•	Query in file [image] indicates that the query is located in a .qbe file

•	Query in selection [image] indicates that the query is located in a notebook selection

3	Type the location of the query in the Query file box.

4	Select the destination for the query results in the Destination box using the Range picker.

 Notes

•	The QBE query and the database table must be in your working directory.

•	You can make a query selection easy to read by setting the font for the QBE selection to a nonproportional font such as Courier.

 Related topics


To assign aliases for private and working directories

1	Click Insert [image] External data [image] Aliases.

2	Type the path for your private directory in the Private directory box.

3	Type the path for your working directory in the Working directory box.

 Tip

•	You can also click Browse to insert a path.

 Related topics


Importing data from external databases

You can insert into Quattro Pro external databases created using other software applications.

Linking to external database tables means that changes made in the source data are reflected in the linked table when you reopen it. You can open .db or .dbf files directly in Quattro Pro and edit them as if they were spreadsheets, as long as they do not contain index or memo files.

You can import external database tables in Quattro Pro. Database tables contain data extracted from a database, arranged in a specified sequence. Tables are useful when a database contains a large amount of data and you need to work with only a portion of it.

When importing database tables from external databases, you have several options for displaying data. You can display duplicate rows of information in the data you import. For example, if the imported data lists all customers who have ordered books, any customers who have ordered more than one book can be listed on a new row for each book. As well, you can include field names as column headings in the first row of data you import.

You can join external database tables. When using more than one table, you must join common fields in the tables, even if they have different field names, to avoid duplicating their records in the data you import. For example, if two tables contain the same customer identification field, you must use the customer identification field to join the tables.

Because external databases can contain a large amount of information, it is useful to filter the amount of information that you import, retrieving only the portions of data you want. For example, you can list only those customers who have ordered a particular book so that you can send them a letter announcing the sequel.

You can open password-protected tables. For security, as you type the password, the pound symbol (#) represents the characters you type.

 How to


To insert an external database into Quattro Pro

1	Click File [image] Open.

2	Choose the drive and folder where the file is stored.

3	Choose the filename extension from the File type list box.

4	Double-click the filename.

 Notes

•	If the external database file has more than 1,000,000 records, close the file when you are done, but do not save it. If you save the file, records that are not displayed are lost.

•	If no Open Database Connectivity ODBC sources are listed in the Data type list, you can add them through the ODBC options in the Control Panel. If no Borland Database Engine (BDE) sources (also called aliases) are listed, you can create them using the Borland Database Engine 5.01 utilities.

 Tip

•	You can also insert external databases by clicking Insert [image] External data [image] Import database file.

 Related topics


To link to an external database table

1	Click Insert [image] External data [image] Table link.

2	In the Cells box, select the cells using the Range picker.

3	In the Table box, select the database file using the Browse button.

 Tip

•	You can also link to external database tables by clicking the Table link button on the Data manipulation toolbar.

 Related topics


To import an external database table

1	Click Insert [image] External data [image] Expert.

2	From the Data type list box, choose a type of data to import.

3	In the Database path box, type the path where the database table is stored.

4	Click Next.

5	In the Select tables dialog box, select the tables to import.

6	Click Next.

7	In the Set criteria dialog box, select the fields to import.

8	In the Destination box, type a destination for the import results.

You can also
Change the position of a field in the Selected fields list.	Click Arrow up or Arrow down.
Remove a field from the Selected fields list.	Click the Trash can.
 Related topics


To set import options for external database tables

1	Click Insert [image] External data [image] Expert.

2	Click Options.

3	In the Import options dialog box, enable any of the following check boxes:

•	Allow duplicate rows [image] displays duplicate rows of information in the data you import

•	Include column headings [image] displays field names as column headings in the first row of data you import

•	Keep query definition [image] maintains the parameters you specify the next time you import tables from external databases

 Note

•	The database must be imported before carrying out this procedure. For more information, see "To import an external database table."

 Related topics


To join external database tables

1	Click Insert [image] External data [image] Expert.

2	Choose the database tables to join.

3	Click Query properties.

4	In the Query properties dialog box, click the Joins tab.

5	Choose a field from the first Field list.

6	Choose the corresponding field from the second Field list.

7	Choose the equal sign from the Operator list.

8	Click OK.

9	Click Finish.

 Note

•	The database must be imported before carrying out this procedure. For more information, see "To import an external database table."

 Tip

•	You can join more than two tables by clicking And in the Query properties dialog box.

 Related topics


To filter an external database table

1	Click Insert [image] External data [image] Expert.

2	Click Query properties.

3	In the Query properties dialog box, click the Filters tab.

4	Choose a field to filter from the Criteria field list.

5	Choose an operator from the Operator list.

6	Enable the List values check box.

7	Choose a value from the Value list or type a value of your own.

8	Click OK.

9	Click Finish.

 Tips

•	Clicking And in the Query properties dialog box narrows the filter results. For example, you can generate a list of customers who have a credit limit above a specified amount and who live in a certain city.

•	Clicking Or in the Query properties dialog box broadens the filter results. For example, you can generate a list of customers who live in a certain city.

 Related topics


To open a password-protected table

1	Click File [image] Open.

2	Choose the drive and folder where the file is stored.

3	Choose the filename extension from the File type list box.

4	Double-click the filename.

5	In the Password dialog box, type the password for the table.

6	Click one of the following buttons:

•	Add [image] stores the password in memory, so that if other tables you want to query require the same password, you can open them without retyping the password

•	Remove [image] releases the password from memory, so that if any table you want to query requires the password, you must retype the password to open it

•	Remove all [image] deletes all passwords from memory, so that you must type a password for any protected table you want to query

 Note

•	When you open a password-protected database table the password for the table is discarded when you close the file.

 Related topics


Reference: Using databases

When entering database cells in Quattro Pro, you must follow certain rules. These rules cover such items as the formatting of field names and the structure of the area filled by the database cells.

As well, queries are a key component of Quattro Pro notebook databases. You can use specific operators and symbols to assist you in developing queries; you can also use wildcards.

 How to


Rules for entering database cells in Quattro Pro

When you enter database cells in a Quattro Pro database, you must ensure that:

•	database cells fill a rectangular area that can contain any number of blank cells

•	database cells are entered in a contiguous format and are confined to one spreadsheet

•	field names are entered in the top row of the database cells, one name per column

•	field names are labels with no blank spaces at the beginning or end

•	field names are unique; they are different from other field and cell names you use

•	the first row of data is entered directly below the field names without leaving a blank row or inserting a row of symbols

•	you use the same type of data throughout each column; do not mix labels and values in the same column

 Related topics


Example of a notebook database query

The following is an example of a database that contains two columns, listing first and last names of company employees, to illustrate how you can use AND and OR queries to search a database.

To create an AND query in a criteria table using the database example, type the criterion Kelly in the row under First Name and the criterion Kind in the row under Last Name. The criteria are entered in different cells of the same row in the criteria table.

Quattro Pro searches for records with the last name Kind and the first name Kelly. The search results reveal only one possible match; the output cells contain a record for Kelly Kind.

To create an OR query in a criteria table using the database example, type the criterion Barbara in the row under First Name and the criterion Kind in the next row under Last Name.

Quattro Pro searches for any records with the last name Kind and the first name Barbara. The search results reveal five matches. The output cells contain records for Kelly Kind, Steve Kind, Barbara Kind, Barbara Smith, and Barbara Wong.

To combine AND and OR queries in a criteria table using the database example, type the criterion Kelly in the row under First Name, type the criterion Kind in the same row but under Last Name, and the criterion Barbara in a new row under First Name.

Quattro Pro searches for any records with the last name Kind and the first name Barbara or Kelly. The search results reveal four matches; the output cells contain records for Kelly Kind, Barbara Kind, Barbara Wong, and Barbara Smith. Records for Kelly Smith, Kelly O'Toole, and Steve Kind do not match the search criteria and are therefore not displayed in the search output cells.

 Related topics


Operators and symbols available in a search formula

The following table shows the operators and symbols you can use in search formulas.

Use	To indicate
=	Equals
<>	Not equal
<	Less than
>	Greater than
<=	Less than or equal to
>=	Greater than or equal to
#AND#	Both expressions are true
#OR#	Either the first or the second expression is true
#NOT#	The first expression is true, and the second is false
 Related topics


Wildcards available in a criteria table

The following table lists the wildcards you can use as search criteria.

Use	To search for
?	Any single character in a label. For example, typing t?p finds tip, top, or tap, but not tape or stop.
*	Any number of characters to the end of a label. For example, typing ten* finds tender, tension, and tent, but not attention.
~	All labels in a field except those that match the search condition. This symbol is referred to as tilde. For example, typing ~Boston under the City column in the criteria table finds all records that do not have Boston in the City field.
 Related topics


Reference: Properties of dialog box controls


Properties of dialog box controls

Dialog box controls are objects you add to a custom dialog box. For example, you can add buttons, color controls, check boxes, and radio buttons. Dialog box controls have specific properties which, when configured in different ways, cause the control to perform a specific action.

 How to


Bitmap button control

A bitmap button has a graphic image on its face instead of text. It can imitate the behavior of a check box, radio button, or push button. Bitmap buttons have the value of whatever button they are imitating. To specify how the button behaves, set the bitmap button's Button type property.

There are two different ways to specify the bitmap image that appears on a bitmap button's face. First, you can right-click the control, choose the Bitmap button properties command, and choose Bitmap. You will see a list of predefined images. Select a bitmap image from the list (it then appears under Preview) and click OK. In turn, if the Clipboard contains a bitmap image, select the bitmap button and choose Edit [image] Paste to paste the image onto the button's face. The bitmap image will be saved with the active notebook.

For more information about creating bitmap button controls, see "To add a bitmap button to a dialog box."

 Related topics


Check box control

Check boxes present a Yes/No option to the user. The text that appears in this button is stored in its Label text property. The value of a check box is Yes when it is enabled, No when it is disabled.

For more information about creating check boxes on a dialog box, see "To add a check box to a dialog box."

 Related topics


Color control

A color control lets the user change a color setting. When you click a color control, you can select from 42 standard colors or click More to create a custom color.

The value of a color is in the format Red, Green, Blue (RBG) where Red is the amount of red in the color, Green the amount of green, etc. Each amount is a number from 0 to 255. Each part of a color control's value is a number between 0 and 255. For example, black is 0,0,0; white is 255, 255, 255; and red is 255, 0, 0.

In addition to the Red, Green, Blue color model, you can use the Hue/Saturation/Luminosity (HLS) or CMYK (Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, Black) to create custom colors. However, the control value is always in Red, Green, Blue format with the number range going from 0 to 255.

For more information about creating a color control on a dialog box, see "To add a color control to a dialog box."

 Related topics


Combo box control

Combo boxes are a special type of list box that lets the user add items to the list. The control consists of an edit field, a down arrow button, and a list box (which only appears when the user clicks the down arrow or presses the down arrow key on the keyboard). You can make a combo box store a history list of the entries that have been typed into its edit field. This history displays as the combo box's list and is set through the History property.

The value of the combo box is the value of its edit field. There are several ways users can change a combo box's value. First, they can choose the edit field and enter the value (you can disable this by setting the Edit disabled property to Yes). Second, they can press the down key to move through the list, and press ENTER on the desired choice (pressing ENTER also clicks the dialog box's default button, which typically closes the dialog box. To disable this, set the Terminate dialog property to No). Finally, they can click the down arrow button next to the edit field to display the list, and click the desired choice (to remove a combo box's down arrow button, set the Add down button property to No).

There are two ways you can specify the items that appear in a list box. You can copy a block to the Clipboard, then select the list box and click Edit [image] Paste. Each row of the block becomes one item in the list. Or, if your list is already in a block in the notebook, right-click the list box, choose the Properties command, then choose List, type or point to the block coordinates, and click OK.

For more information about creating combo box controls, see "To add a combo box to a dialog box."

 Related topics


Edit field control

An edit field is where a user types specific information. You can use the Field type property to restrict the type of information an edit field accepts.

Integer [image] restricts user entry to integers. This adds three properties to the edit field properties (which is renamed Edit Integer). Minimum defines the lowest acceptable value users can enter. Maximum defines the highest acceptable value a user can enter. Default defines the initial value of the edit field.

String [image] accepts any text a user enters (including numbers); this is the default edit field type.

Real [image] accepts any number or formula.

Block [image] accepts only cell addresses or block coordinates.

Hidden [image] accepts any text, but displays a pound sign (#) for each character instead of the actual character. This is handy when users are entering passwords.

For more information about creating edit fields on dialog boxes, see "To add an edit box to a dialog box" and "Edit integer control."

 Related topics


Edit integer control

The Edit Integer control is an edit field that only accepts integers. You create this control by placing an edit field in your dialog box, and setting the Field type property to Integer.

 Related topics


File control

A file control consists of an edit field for entering filenames and a button that displays a list of files on disk. From this list, the user can choose a filename, directory, and drive. The value of a file control determines the directory, drive letter, and filename that appears. For example, the value c:\files\qtrrep.qpw means the drive is set to c:, directory is set to c:\files\, filename is set to qtrrep.qpw, and file type is set to *.qpw (if a wildcard is specified; otherwise file types is not affected by the value). Whenever a user chooses a different directory to view, or a different filename to use, the change is reflected in the file control's value.

For more information about creating a file control to a dialog box, see "To add a file control to a dialog box."

 Related topics


Group box control

A group box usually contains other controls such as radio buttons or check boxes. It looks like a rectangle with a title at the top. When a group box contains radio buttons, its value is the title of the radio button chosen; otherwise, it does not have a value.

Initially, the Process value of a group box is set to Yes, and the Process values of radio buttons within the group box are set to No. In addition to the Value property, the group box has a property called Selected that indicates numerically which of its radio buttons is chosen, starting from the top-left radio button (zero) and proceeding to the bottom-right button.

For more information about creating a group box, see "To add a group box to a dialog box."

 Related topics


Label control

A label is simply descriptive text that you place beside another control to describe the control's purpose to the user. Labels do not have a value. Resizing a label does not increase the text size; it makes a larger background to display the text on.

To see the background of a label, select it. By default, the label text appears in the upper left corner of its background; to specify a different position for the label text, right-click the label, click the Properties command, and use the Text draw flags property. You can also use Text draw flags to create a multiple-line label and word-wrap the label text so that it fits in the label background.

You can enter special text items in a label to change its appearance. A double backslash (\\) inserts a backslash (\) into the text. You can use this to enter \n or \t into a label as normal text. An ampersand (&) makes the character to the right of it appear underlined in the text (the ampersand does not appear). This is handy for naming controls. Use only one & character; if you use two, the & character appears underlined in the text.

For more information about creating labels, see "To add a label to a dialog box control."

 Related topics


List box control

A list box displays a list of items to choose from. Whichever item the user picks becomes the value of the list box. There are two ways to specify the items that appear in a list box. Use the Clipboard and each row of a cell block becomes one item in the list. Or, use the List property if your list is already in a block in the notebook.

For more information about creating list box controls, see "To add a list box to a dialog box."

 Related topics


Push button control

A push button runs a specified command when the user clicks it. If you want to have a macro run when the user clicks a push button, add a DOMACRO link command to the push button. Push buttons do not have a value. If you want to make a push button close the dialog box, use the Button type property.

For more information about adding a button control to a dialog box, see "To add a push button to a dialog box." For information about creating link commands, see "Attaching actions to dialog box controls."

 Related topics


Radio button control

Radio buttons, when placed in a group box with other radio buttons, present a list of mutually exclusive choices to the user; only one radio button can be chosen at a time. When the user chooses one of the radio buttons, it darkens to indicate that it is chosen.

By default, a radio button's Process value property is set to No, and the group box containing it has Process value set to Yes. When its Process value property is set to Yes, a radio button has a value of Yes when chosen, No when not chosen.

For more information about creating radio buttons, see "To add a radio button to a dialog box."

 Related topics


Rectangle control

A rectangle can be used to visually organize controls in a dialog box, similar to the way group boxes are containers for controls. Rectangles do not have a value.

For more information about creating a rectangle control, see "To add a rectangle control to a dialog box."

 Related topics


Scroll bar control

Scroll bars let the user pick a value from a fixed range of values. You can use a vertical scroll bar or a horizontal one. The value of a scroll bar is an integer from a fixed range of integers. Use the Parameters property to restrict the range of values that horizontal and vertical scroll bars accept and to specify how manipulating the scroll bar changes its value.

For more information about creating a vertical scroll bar, see "To add a scroll bar to a dialog box."

 Related topics


Spin control

A spin control is an edit field with two arrows on its edge. The user can either click an arrow to increase or decrease the spin control's value, or type the value. The value of a spin control is always an integer. (You can use edit fields to enter decimal numbers.)

For more information about creating spin controls on dialog boxes, see "To add a spin control to a dialog box."

 Related topics


Tab control

A tab control lets you organize settings into a notebook of controls. Clicking a tab displays controls associated with that tab. This control behaves like the tab controls found in many dialog boxes in Corel Quattro Pro. The Active page property indicates which tab is active.

The Page list property displays commands for creating, removing, and reordering tabs. Right-click the tab control, and click the Properties option Page list.

For more information about creating tab controls, see "To add a tab control to a dialog box."

 Related topics


Time control

A time control shows the user the current time. You can use time controls to display the current time in a dialog box or toolbar. You can also use a time control to run link commands at regular intervals or at a certain time of day. This is handy for creating toolbar controls that periodically retrieve current values from the active window. There are two ways to configure a time control for generating regular events: as a Timer and as an Alarm. Time controls do not have a value.

As a Timer, it generates the Timer event at regular intervals (for example, every two seconds). As an Alarm, the time control generates the Alarm event at a certain time of day (for example, at 5:00). The toolbar must be open; for example, an alarm set for 3:00 will not generate an Alarm event if the toolbar is not on screen at 3:00.

A time control can have both of these functions enabled simultaneously. For example, you could have a timer generate Timer events every two seconds and send out an alarm event at 5:00 to signal the end of the work day.

For more information on creating and configuring a time control on a dialog box, see "To add a timer control to a dialog box."

 Related topics


Editing and formatting spreadsheets

Quattro Pro lets you edit and format cells, rows or columns, or an entire spreadsheet. For example, you can check the spelling in a spreadsheet, copy cells to different parts of a notebook, change the color of a cell or text within the cell, change the text orientation of a cell, and resize rows and columns. You can also create and edit headers, footers, and margins in a spreadsheet.

In this section, you'll learn about

•	checking spelling

•	protecting data

•	editing cell content

•	undoing actions

•	editing grouped data

•	moving selected cells by dragging

•	moving cells, rows, and columns

•	resizing rows and columns

•	resizing rows and columns to fit a specific cell

•	hiding rows and columns

•	using formatting tools to format a spreadsheet

•	wrapping text

•	joining cells

•	changing text font and appearance

•	working with fills, patterns, and borders

•	changing colors in the notebook palette

•	aligning data

•	working with numeric formats

•	creating custom formats

•	creating a bar format

•	working with page breaks

•	creating headers and footers

•	customizing margins

•	working with styles

For more information about editing and formatting a spreadsheet, see "Reference: Editing and formatting a spreadsheet."


Checking spelling

Checking the spelling in a Quattro Pro spreadsheet lets you search for misspelled or duplicate words and irregular capitalization. Quattro Pro also lets you automatically replace common spelling and typing errors. For example, you can automatically replace "adn" with "and." Quattro Pro comes with a list of commonly misspelled words linked to the correct spelling. You can add and delete words from the list.

You can disable the automatic replacement of commonly misspelled words.

 How to


To check spelling

•	Click Tools [image] Spell checker.

 Related topics


To add words to the list of commonly misspelled words

1	Click Tools [image] QuickCorrect.

2	In the Replace box, type the incorrect spelling of a word.

3	In the With box, type the correct spelling of the word.

4	Click Add entry.

5	Enable the Replace words as you type check box.

 Tip

•	If you frequently type a phrase, you can type an abbreviation in the Replace box, and type its expanded form in the With box to automatically expand to the full phrase each time you type the abbreviation.

 Related topics


To delete words from the list of commonly misspelled words

1	Click Tools [image] QuickCorrect.

2	Choose a word from the list.

3	Click Delete entry.

 Related topics


To disable automatic replacement of commonly misspelled words

1	Click Tools [image] QuickCorrect.

2	Disable the Replace words as you type check box.

 Related topics


Protecting data

You can prevent users from changing any data in a spreadsheet by protecting spreadsheet cells.

You can allow users to edit only specific cells, unlocking specific cells in a protected spreadsheet.

Protecting spreadsheet objects prevents users from moving, resizing, editing, or deleting objects on the active spreadsheet. Protected objects include floating charts and graphic objects, linked and embedded objects using Dynamic Data Exchange or OLE, drawn objects, and form controls. However, if you disable the sheet protection for objects, Quattro Pro ignores the status of unprotected objects.

 How to


To protect all spreadsheet cells

1	Click Format [image] Sheet properties.

2	Click the Protection tab.

3	Enable the Enable cell locking check box.

 Related topics


To unlock a cell in a protected spreadsheet

1	Select a cell.

2	Click Format [image] Selection properties.

3	Click the Constraints tab.

4	In the Cell protection area, enable the Unprotect option.

 Tips

•	You can also unlock a cell by right-clicking the cell, and clicking Selection properties.

•	You can select multiple noncontiguous cells by holding down Ctrl and selecting the cells.

 Related topics


To protect all spreadsheet objects

1	Click Format [image] Sheet properties.

2	Click the Protection tab.

3	Enable the Enable object locking check box.

 Related topics


Editing cell content

Quattro Pro lets you overwrite, replace, or edit cell content. Cell entries can be changed in various ways. You can replace the entire content and formatting of a cell, or you can modify only the content or the formatting.

You can also clear the values in a range of cells without clearing the formulas.

Quattro Pro lets you quickly find a cell and automatically replace the data it contains. You can look for data in cell formulas or cell values. You can also set conditions for the search criteria. For example, in an expenses spreadsheet, you can look only for expenses greater than $300.

 How to


To overwrite data

1	Click a cell.

2	Press Insert.

The Typeover button on the application bar appears pressed when the typeover mode is on.

 Tip

•	You can return to inserting data by pressing Insert.

 Related topics


To replace the entire content of a cell

1	Click a cell.

2	Type a new entry.

3	Press Enter.

 Related topics


To edit the content and formatting of a cell

1	Click a cell.

2	Click Edit [image] Clear, and click one of the following:

•	Cells [image] lets you erase the content and the formatting of a  cell

•	Values [image] lets you erase the content but not the formatting of a cell

•	Format [image] lets you erase the formatting but not the content of a cell

 Notes

•	Clicking Edit [image] Clear [image] Format does not affect column width or row height.

•	Unnecessary cell formatting can add significantly to the size of a notebook file; clearing cell formatting reduces the size of the file.

 Tip

•	You can also erase the content of a cell but not the formatting by selecting the cell, and clicking Delete.

 Related topics


To modify part of a cell's content

1	Double-click a cell.

2	Click where you want to edit.

3	Edit the cell content.

4	Press Enter.

You can also
Delete part of the cell content before the cursor	Click after the content to delete and press Backspace.
Delete part of the cell content after the cursor	Click before the content to delete and press Delete.
Return the cell content to its original state	Press Esc before you press Enter.
 Note

•	You can move the insertion point within a cell by using the arrow keys.

 Related topics


To clear values in a range of cells without clearing formulas

1	Select a range of cells.

2	Click Edit [image] Cut.

3	Click Edit [image] Paste special.

4	Disable the Number cells check box.

5	Click Paste.

 Related topics


To find and replace data

1	Click Edit [image] Find and replace.

2	Type the text or value to find in the Find box.

3	Type the replacement text or value in the Replace box.

4	Type the cells to search in the Cell(s) box.

5	In the Look in area, enable one of the following options:

•	Formula [image] finds data in a formula

•	Value [image] finds data in a value

•	Condition [image] compares cells in the spreadsheet with any conditions specified in the Find box

6	Click one of the following buttons:

•	Find next

•	Previous

7	Click Replace.

You can also
Search down columns before searching across rows	Enable the Columns first check box.
Find an exact match	Enable the Match whole check box.
Match the capitalization of the text in the Find box	Enable the Case sensitive check box.
 Note

•	Quattro Pro makes replacements from the cursor position to the end of a document, so you must position the cursor at the beginning of a document before you search.

 Tips

•	You can replace all occurrences of the search item with the replacement text or value by clicking Replace all.

•	When using conditional searches, type a question mark (?) before the search condition (e.g. ? > 300).

 Related topics


Undoing actions

Quattro Pro lets you undo most actions in reverse order of performance. For example, if you create a cell entry, and then you want to remove it, undoing the entry restores any previous content in the cell. You can undo one action at a time. You can also undo multiple actions simultaneously.

You can reinstate a change by redoing an action. You can also reinstate multiple actions simultaneously.

Quattro Pro lets you set the levels for undoing and redoing actions.

 How to


To undo one action

•	Click Edit [image] Undo.

 Note

•	Some actions cannot be reversed. (The Undo menu command appears grayed immediately after you perform one of these actions.)

 Related topics


To undo multiple actions

1	Click Edit, and click the Undo flyout.

2	Choose an action from the list.

 Note

•	When you choose an action from the list, all actions performed after that action will be undone.

 Tip

•	You can also undo multiple actions by clicking the Undo flyout on the notebook toolbar.

 Related topics


To redo an action

•	Click Edit [image] Redo.

 Related topics


To redo multiple actions

1	Click Edit, and click the Redo flyout.

2	Choose an action from the list.

 Note

•	When you choose an action from the list, all actions performed after that action will be redone.

 Tip

•	You can also redo multiple actions by clicking the Redo flyout on the notebook toolbar.

 Related topics


To set the undo and redo level

1	Click Tools [image] Settings.

2	In the list of categories, double-click Workspaces, Application, and click General.

3	Type a value in the Undo/Redo level (0 to 200) box.

 Note

•	In all situations, except where program speed and available memory are absolutely crucial, the level for undoing and redoing actions should be set to a minimum of one.

 Related topics


Editing grouped data

When a notebook contains similar text or formats in several spreadsheets, you can create spreadsheet groups to edit multiple contiguous spreadsheets at once. A change to one spreadsheet in a group affects all spreadsheets in the group. For example, you can simultaneously change the properties of the same cell in spreadsheets A, B, C if you group these spreadsheets together. A spreadsheet can belong to only one group.

The group mode for spreadsheets can be enabled or disabled. When you enable group mode, a blue line displays below the spreadsheet tabs to identify the spreadsheet group. By disabling the group mode, you can perform tasks that use 2-D references.

Quattro Pro lets you copy data to spreadsheets in a group.

You can delete a spreadsheet group.

 How to


To create a spreadsheet group

1	Click Insert [image] Name [image] Name group of sheets.

2	Enter a group name in the Group name box.

3	Type the name of the first spreadsheet in the First sheet box.

4	Type the name of the last spreadsheet in the Last sheet box.

 Notes

•	You can use letters and numbers, as well as these characters:

•	~ ` ! % _ | \ ' ?

•	You can use spaces, but not as the first character in a name.

 Tips

•	You can also create a spreadsheet group by selecting any cell in the first sheet, holding down Shift and clicking the tab of the last spreadsheet to include in the group.

•	You can create a new spreadsheet group by changing the entries in the First sheet and Last sheet boxes.

 Related topics


To enable or disable Group mode

•	Click View [image] Group mode.

When group mode is enabled, a blue line displays below the spreadsheet tabs in the group.

 Related topics


To copy data to spreadsheets in a group

1	Click View [image] Group mode to disable group mode.

2	Select the source data to copy.

3	Click Edit [image] Copy.

4	Click View [image] Group mode to enable group mode.

5	Select the destination cell in any spreadsheet in the group.

6	Click Edit [image] Paste.

 Related topics


To delete a spreadsheet group

1	Click Insert [image] Name [image] Name group of sheets.

2	Choose a group from the Defined groups box.

3	Click Delete.

 Related topics


Moving selected cells by dragging

Quattro Pro lets you visually choose exactly where to move selected cells by dragging the cells. You can move cells anywhere on the active spreadsheet, to another spreadsheet, or to another notebook. A colored outline of the cell selection moves with a four-way arrow as a guide to help you locate an area to which to move cells.

You can modify the delay time of the arrow that displays when you drag a selection of cells.

 How to


To move cells by dragging

1	Select a cell or cells.

2	Point to an edge of the cells until a four-way arrow displays.

3	Drag the cells to the destination area.

 Note

•	You can use the colored outline as a guide when you move cells.

 Tip

•	You can copy a cell by holding down Ctrl as you drag.

 Related topics


To move cells to another spreadsheet by dragging

1	Click Window [image] New view.

2	Click Window [image] Tile side to side.

3	In the window view that represents the destination spreadsheet, click the tab for the spreadsheet to which you want to drag the cell.

4	In the window view that represents the source of the cells, select a cell or cells.

5	Point to an edge of the cells until a four-way arrow displays.

6	Drag the cells to the destination area.

 Related topics


To move cells to another notebook by dragging

1	Open the notebook to which you want to drag the selected cells.

2	Select the cell or cells that you want to move.

3	Point to an edge of the cells until a four-way arrow displays.

4	Drag the cells onto the notebook name on the application bar that is the notebook you want to move the cells to.

5	Hold down the left mouse button until the second notebook displays, and drag the cells into the notebook.

 Related topics


To change the delay time for the Drag and Drop arrow

1	Click Tools [image] Settings.

2	In the list of categories, double-click Workspaces, Application, and click General.

3	Type a new interval time in the Cell drag and drop delay time box.

 Related topics


Moving cells, rows, and columns

Quattro Pro lets you copy or move cells. You can copy or move cells by selecting the cells directly on a spreadsheet or you can copy cells by specifying the location of the cell.

You can control what you copy or move by specifying the type of data or cell properties to be moved. For example, you can copy data without copying its properties, or you can copy properties without copying data.

Quattro Pro also lets you transpose columns to rows and rows to columns. For example, after transposing columns and rows, all data in a column can be transposed to display as a row.

The following example shows a column transposed to appear as a row.

 How to


To copy cells

1	Select the cells to copy.

2	Click Edit [image] Copy.

3	Select the destination cells within the active spreadsheet.

4	Click Edit [image] Paste.

 Note

•	When you copy a selection of cells to a specific cell, the Clipboard uses that cell as the upper-left position of the copied information.

 Tip

•	You can also copy a cell to the input line of another cell, a text box, another spreadsheet in the notebook, or another notebook.

 Related topics


To move cells

1	Select the cells to move.

2	Click Edit [image] Cut.

3	Select the destination cells within the active spreadsheet.

4	Click Edit [image] Paste.

 Tip

•	You can also move a cell to the input line of another cell, a text box, another spreadsheet in the notebook, or another notebook.

 Related topics


To copy cells to a specified location

1	Click Edit [image] Copy cells.

2	In the From box, specify the cells to copy.

3	In the To box, specify the destination cells.

If you copy cells containing absolute references, enable the Model copy check box.

 Tip

•	Instead of specifying the cells you want to copy, you can press F3 and choose a named cell from the Cell names dialog box.

 Related topics


To copy specific types of data, cell properties and cell comments in a cell selection

1	Select the cells to copy.

2	Click Edit [image] Copy.

3	Select the destination cells.

4	Click Edit [image] Paste special.

5	Enable any of the check boxes in the Paste area to specify what to copy.

If you want the copied cells to be updated when the source cells are, link the copied cells to the source cells by clicking Link in the Paste special dialog box.

 Related topics


To transpose columns to rows

1	Select the column of cells to transpose.

2	Click Tools [image] Numeric tools [image] Transpose.

3	In the To field, specify the top-left cell where you want to copy the transposed data.

 Notes

•	If you transpose cells containing formulas, cell references do not adjust properly.

•	If you specify a cell within the source cells, the data will not display properly.

 Tip

•	You can transpose rows to columns by selecting cells in a row instead of a column.

 Related topics


Resizing rows and columns

Quattro Pro lets you change the row height in a spreadsheet. You can also change the width of a column.

Quattro Pro uses a default column width for all columns in a spreadsheet. This default width of an active spreadsheet is wide enough to display nine characters in the default font. You can change the default width of an active spreadsheet.

Values that are wider than the cell display either in scientific notation or as a row of asterisks (*********), depending on the numeric format and width of the cell. You can automatically increase the column width as you type so that number values are always visible.

Columns whose widths you explicitly adjust are not controlled by the default width of the active spreadsheet. Before those columns can be affected by a change in the default width of the active spreadsheet, you must reset the column width of the active cell. You can also return row heights to the active cell default size, which is determined by the largest font used in the row.

 How to


To change row height

1	Select a cell in each row you want to resize, or select the row borders.

2	Click Format [image] Selection properties.

3	Click the Row/column tab.

4	In the Row options area, enable the Set height option and type a value in the box.

5	Enable one of the following options:

•	Points

•	Inches

•	Centimeters

 Tips

•	You can also change row height by moving the pointer to the bottom edge of a row border until it changes to a double arrow, and dragging the double arrow to resize the row.

•	You can select noncontiguous rows by pressing Ctrl before selecting the rows.

 Related topics


To change column width

1	Select a cell in each column you want to resize, or select the column borders.

2	Click Format [image] Selection properties.

3	Click the Row/column tab.

4	In the Column options area, enable the Set width option and type a value in the box.

5	Enable one of the following options:

•	Characters

•	Inches

•	Centimeters

 Tips

•	You can also change column width by moving the pointer to the right edge of a column border until it changes to a double arrow, and dragging the double arrow to resize the column.

•	You can select noncontiguous columns by pressing Ctrl before selecting the columns.

 Related topics


To change the active spreadsheet default column width

1	Click Format [image] Sheet properties.

2	Click the Default width tab.

3	Type a value in the Column width box.

4	In the Unit area, enable one of the following options:

•	Characters

•	Inches

•	Centimeters

 Tip

•	You can also change the default column width by right-clicking a spreadsheet tab and clicking Sheet properties.

 Related topics


To increase the column width while typing values

1	Click Tools [image] Settings.

2	In the list of categories, double-click Workspaces, Application, and click General.

3	Enable the Fit As-You-Go check box.

 Related topics


To restore the active cell default column width

1	Select a cell in each column whose width you want to restore to default.

2	Click Format [image] Selection properties.

3	Click the Row/column tab.

4	Enable the Reset width option.

 Tips

•	Click the Property button to access the Row/column tab.

•	You can select noncontiguous columns by pressing Ctrl before selecting the columns.

 Related topics


To restore the active cell default row height

1	Select a cell in each row whose height you want to restore to default.

2	Click Format [image] Selection properties.

3	Click the Row/column tab.

4	Enable the Reset height option.

 Tips

•	Click the Property button to access the Row/column tab.

•	You can select noncontiguous rows by pressing Ctrl before selecting the rows.

 Related topics


Resizing rows and columns to fit a specific cell

To accommodate long entries, Quattro Pro lets you increase the column width to one character wider than the longest entry in a selection. You can also increase the row height to fit the tallest entry in a selection.

You can adjust the row height and column width at the same time.

 How to


To increase the column width to fit the longest entry

1	Select a column.

2	Click the Column QuickFit button on the toolbar.

 Tips

•	You can also increase the column width to fit the longest entry by clicking Format [image] QuickFit [image] Column QuickFit.

•	You can also double-click the column letter to increase column width.

•	You can also increase the column width to fit the longest entry in a selection of cells by selecting a partial column.

 Related topics


To increase the row height to fit the tallest entry

1	Select a row.

2	Click the Row QuickFit button on the toolbar.

 Tips

•	You can also increase the row height to fit the tallest entry by clicking Format [image] QuickFit [image] Row QuickFit.

•	You can also double-click the row letter to increase row height.

•	You can also increase the row height to fit the tallest entry in a selection of cells by selecting a partial row.

 Related topics


To adjust the column width and row height simultaneously

1	Select a cell.

2	Click the Column/row QuickFit button on the toolbar.

 Tip

•	You can also adjust the column width and row height simultaneously by clicking Format [image] QuickFit [image] Column/Row QuickFit.

 Related topics


Hiding rows and columns

Quattro Pro lets you hide rows or columns from view on the screen. Hidden rows and columns do not print. Although they are hidden from view, they are still used in calculations. Columns move left to fill in the space left by the hidden column, and rows move up; however, row numbers and column letters do not change. For example, if you hide column B, the columns on the screen are labeled A, C, D, and so on.

You can reveal rows and columns that are hidden.

 How to


To hide rows or columns

1	Select the rows or columns to hide.

2	Right-click the rows or columns, and click Hide.

 Related topics


To reveal hidden columns

1	Click Edit [image] Select all.

2	Click Format [image] Selection properties.

3	Click the Row/column tab.

4	Enable the Reveal option in the Column options area.

 Tips

•	You can also reveal a hidden column by placing the pointer slightly to the right of where the hidden column should be and dragging.

•	You can reveal hidden rows by enabling the Reveal option in the Row options area.

 Related topics


Using formatting tools to format a spreadsheet

Quattro Pro lets you format a spreadsheet by copying the formatting (background color, font, numeric format, and so on) of one cell to another cell or selection of cells.

You can apply a predesigned format to data. You can also add a format to the predesigned format list. This formatting overrides any existing cell property settings.

 How to


To copy cell formatting

1	Click the cell or cells with the format you want to copy.

2	Click the QuickFormat button on the toolbar.

3	Select the cell or cells where you want to copy the formatting.

Tip

•	To turn off QuickFormat, click the QuickFormat button on the toolbar.

 Related topics


To apply a predesigned format

1	Select the cells to format.

2	Click Format [image] SpeedFormat.

3	Choose a format from the Formats list.

 Tips

•	You can also apply a predesigned format by clicking the SpeedFormat button on the toolbar.

•	You can revise a predesigned format by disabling any properties that you do not want applied to the cells.

 Related topics


To add a format to the predesigned format list

1	Click Format [image] SpeedFormat.

2	Choose a format to customize from the Formats list.

3	Click Add.

4	Type the name of the new format in the Format name box.

5	Select the cells that contain the format using the Range picker tool in the Example cells box.

 Related topics


Wrapping text

Text that displays wider than a column width overflows to the next cell when that cell is empty. If the next cell contains data, the overflow text is hidden and the text appears truncated. To fix this, you can wrap text within a cell or enter short lines of text in one cell.

The following example shows a cell containing wrapped text.

You can redistribute text in a cell to display as a paragraph covering multiple rows or columns. Although the text displays in several rows or columns, the data is stored in the left-most cells of each row. Redistributed text maintains the original row height unless you reformat entries with different font sizes; the font size of the entry in the first row determines the font size of the redistributed text. You can redistribute only existing text; text entered later is not affected.

 How to


To wrap text within a cell

1	Click the cell in which you want to wrap text.

2	Click Format [image] Selection properties.

3	Click the Alignment tab.

4	Enable the Wrap text check box in the Cell options area.

 Note

•	Wrapping text works only on text, not on numeric data. You can include up to 4096 characters (4 KB) in a single cell.

 Tip

•	You can also wrap text by clicking the Property button on the toolbar.

 Related topics


To enter short lines of text in one cell

1	Click a cell.

2	Type a line of text.

3	Press Alt + Enter.

4	Continue typing.

5	Press Enter.

 Related topics


To redistribute text over multiple rows or columns

1	Select the first cell to redistribute.

2	Click Format [image] Text reformat.

3	Select the cells in which you want the redistributed text to appear using the Range picker tool in the Cells box.

The first cell you selected to reformat will be the upper-left cell.

 Notes

•	If you specify both columns and rows as the destination cells for the redistributed text, Quattro Pro redistributes the text within those cells if enough space exists.

•	If you include blank cells between the cells to redistribute, the cells following a blank cell are not redistributed.

 Related topics


Joining cells

Quattro Pro lets you join cells to create a title across multiple cells or a vertical side bar. In joined cells, you can center and align text and numbers as you would in a single cell. You can join cells in rows, columns, or rows and columns. You can also perform calculations and use formulas in a joined cell as you would in a regular cell.

 How to


To join cells

1	Drag across the cells you want to join.

2	Click Format [image] Selection properties.

3	Click the Alignment tab.

4	Enable the Join cells check box in the Cell options area.

 Tip

•	You can also join cells by  selecting the cells to join and clicking the Join cells button on the toolbar. The data in cells joined with this method is automatically centered.

 Related topics


Changing text font and appearance

You can change the text in one or more cells by adjusting its font face, font size, or text color. Changing the color of text does not affect cell color or shading. Custom colors can also be used to color text.

When you choose a font or appearance option, Quattro Pro automatically displays a preview of the change using Corel RealTime Preview.

You can also change the appearance of text. For example, you can underline and italicize text, or you can set text to superscript or subscript.

For information about creating custom colors, see "Changing colors in the Notebook palette."

For more information about Corel RealTime Preview, see "Zooming data and hiding and displaying screen components."

 How to


To change text font and style

1	Select the cells with text to format.

2	Click Format [image] Selection properties.

3	Click the Cell font tab.

4	Choose a font face from the Face list.

5	Choose a font size from the Size list box.

6	Open the Color picker, and click a color.

 Notes

•	If a font face has a TrueType (TT) or Adobe Type Manager (a) symbol beside it, text displays in print as it does on the screen. Font faces with a printer symbol beside them print but may not display in the correct font face on the screen. Font faces without a symbol display accurately on the screen, but may not display in the correct font when printed.

•	If text does not appear on your printout, choose a darker color; light colors print as white on some printers.

 Related topics


To change text appearance

1	Select the cells with text to format.

2	Click Format [image] Selection properties.

3	Click the Cell font tab.

4	Enable any of the following check boxes in the Appearance area:

•	Bold

•	Italics

•	Underline

•	Strikeout

 Tip

•	You can also change the text appearance by clicking the Bold, Italic, Underline, or Strikeout buttons on the property bar.

 Related topics


To set text to superscript or subscript

1	Double-click a cell.

2	Select the data to change.

3	Click one of the following buttons on the property bar:

•	Superscript

•	Subscript

 Related topics


Working with fills, patterns, and borders

Quattro Pro lets you fill the cell backgrounds with colors and patterns. You can also use colors to identify data ranges and change the color of specific types of data, such as values above or below a specified range and ERR values. You can also color-code spreadsheet tabs. For example, you can make all tabs for expenses one color and all tabs for revenue another color.

Quattro Pro also lets you add borders to cells setting the style, thickness, and color of the border lines. You can also add lines for total and grand total columns in a spreadsheet.

 How to


To fill the cell background

1	Select a cell.

2	Click Format [image] Selection properties.

3	Click the Fill/pattern tab.

4	Click a pattern button on the pattern palette.

5	Open the Pattern color picker and click a color.

6	Open the Background color picker and click a background color.

 Related topics


To add color to a range of data

1	Click Format [image] Sheet properties.

2	Click the Conditional color tab.

3	In the Smallest normal value box, type the smallest value to which you want to apply conditional color.

4	In the Greatest normal value box, type the largest value to which you want to apply conditional color.

5	In the Options area, enable one of the following options:

•	Below normal color [image] sets the color of cells whose values are below the smallest normal value

•	Normal color [image] sets the color of cells whose values fall within the range set in the Smallest normal value and Greatest normal value boxes

•	Above normal color [image] sets the color of cells whose values are above the greatest normal value

•	ERR color [image] sets the color to use for ERR and NA values generated by formula errors

6	Click a color on the color palette.

7	Repeat steps 5 and 6 to enable a different color for as many options as you want to color code.

8	Enable the Enable check box.

 Tip

•	You can also add color to a range of data by right-clicking a spreadsheet tab, and clicking Sheet properties.

 Related topics


To color-code a spreadsheet tab

1	Click Format [image] Sheet properties.

2	Click the Tab color tab.

3	Disable the Use system color check box.

4	Open the color picker and click a color on the color palette.

 Tip

•	You can also color-code a spreadsheet tab by right-clicking a spreadsheet tab, and clicking Sheet properties.

 Related topics


To add a border to cells

1	Select the cells to which you want to add a border.

2	Click Format [image] Selection properties.

3	Click the Border tab.

4	In the Border properties area, open the Type picker, and click a border type.

5	Open the Color picker, and click a color.

6	Click one of the following buttons:

•	All [image] applies the borders to all the grid lines of the cell selection

•	Outline [image] applies the borders to only the exterior grid lines of the cell selection

•	Inside [image] applies the borders to only the interior grid lines of the cell selection

•	Verticals [image] applies the border to only the vertical gridlines of the cell selection

•	Horizontals [image] applies the border to only the horizontal gridlines of the cell selection

 Note

•	You can use the sample box to indicate where to draw lines on selected cells.

 Tips

•	You can remove lines in a border by clicking a line, opening the Type picker in the Border properties area and clicking No line.

•	You can also clear all segments of a selection by clicking Clear selection.

 Related topics


To add a line for totals and grand totals

1	Select the cells to which you want to add lines.

2	Click Format [image] Selection properties.

3	Click the Cell font tab.

4	In the Accounting style area, enable one of the following options:

•	Single line

•	Double line

 Related topics


Changing colors in the notebook palette

You can define your own colors in a color palette. You can save custom colors in the notebook palette. This palette gets saved with the notebook. If you customize the colors in the palette and want to delete the new colors, you can reset the palette to the default palette that comes with Quattro Pro.

The following table lists color values types and their descriptions.

Color	Description
HLS	Hue, luminosity, and saturation [image] Hues is the basic color: red, yellow, orange, or green, for example. Saturation is the amount of white mixed with the hue. Brightness is the amount of light energy present. When brightness is zero, no light is present, and the result is black for every hue and saturation value. by adjusting the saturation and brightness, you can easily control the amount of gray in a color.
RGB	Red, green, and blue [image] You mix different amounts of red, green, and blue to form all other colors.
CMYK	Cyan, magenta and Yellow. You mix different amounts of these colors to form all other colors. commercial printing houses often use this model to mix colors.
 How to


To define a new color for the notebook palette

1	Click Format [image] Notebook properties.

2	Click the NBPalette tab

3	Click a color on the Notebook palette.

4	Click Edit color.

5	In the Select color dialog box, move the slider in one or both of the following:

•	Circle color wheel [image] lets you choose lighter or darker settings, as well as different color sectors of the wheel

•	Vertical scale [image] lets you select lighter or darker settings with the selected area displayed in the color wheel

 Tip

•	You can also define a new color by typing values in the Red, Green and Blue boxes in the Color values area of the Select color dialog box.

 Related topics


To reset the default palette

1	Click Format [image] Notebook properties.

2	Click the NBPalette tab

3	Click Reset defaults.

 Related topics


Aligning data

You can align data horizontally and vertically in a cell. The default alignment setting for numbers and formula results is right-aligned; the default setting for labels and dates is left-aligned. You can change the default alignment of all labels.

You can also center data across multiple cells; for example, you can center a title across columns C, D, and E. You can also change the orientation of text in a cell by rotating it horizontally, vertically, or by a specific degree.

 How to


To align data in a cell

1	Select a cell.

2	Click Format [image] Selection properties.

3	Click the Alignment tab.

4	In the Horizontal alignment area, enable one of the following options:

•	General [image] right-aligns values and left-aligns labels

•	Left [image] left-aligns all types of data

•	Right [image] right-aligns all types of data

•	Center [image] centers cell data

•	Indent [image] moves data in from the edge of a cell

5	In the Vertical alignment area, enable one of the following options:

•	Top

•	Center

•	Bottom

 Tip

•	You can also click the Alignment button on the property bar to change horizontal cell alignment.

 Related topics


To set the default alignment of all labels

1	Click Format [image] Define styles.

2	Choose Normal from the Define style for list box.

3	Click Alignment.

4	In the Alignment dialog box, modify the alignment settings.

 Related topics


To center text across multiple cells

1	In the left-most cell, type the text to be centered.

2	Select the cells over which to center the text starting with the cell containing the text.

3	Click Format [image] Selection properties.

4	Click the Alignment tab.

5	In the Horizontal alignment area, enable the Center across block option.

 Note

•	If you type text in a second cell where text is centered across cells, the first entry is centered over cells to the left of the next entry.

 Tip

•	To display the centered text in the input line, click the cell where the text was originally entered.

 Related topics


To rotate text

1	Click a cell with text to rotate.

2	Click Format [image] Selection properties.

3	Click the Alignment tab.

4	In the Orientation area, enable one of the following options:

•	Horizontal [image] orients text horizontally

•	Vertical [image] orients text vertically

•	Rotated [image] rotates text to the degree you specify

 Tip

•	If you enable the Rotated option, specifying 90 or -90 rotates the text vertically.

 Related topics


Working with numeric formats

Quattro Pro uses two types of numeric formats: number formats and date/time formats. Numeric formats do not change cell values; they change only the way values display.

When you type numbers, Quattro Pro by default rounds off fractional numbers as necessary to fit in the cell. You can change the numeric format of a cell to accommodate, for example, scientific, currency, decimal, and percent formats.

Quattro Pro lets you hide all values that equal zero on a spreadsheet. Hiding zeros does not remove zero values from the sheet; rather, zeros remain in memory and will display if you choose to unhide them. It is easy to accidentally overwrite cells containing formulas that evaluate to zero. To prevent this, make sure you are able to undo actions or consider protecting the spreadsheet.

Quattro Pro also lets you change the number of decimal places in a value.

For information about undoing actions, see "Undoing actions." For information about protecting a spreadsheet, see "Protecting data."

Quattro Pro lets you format dates and times in a spreadsheet. For example, by default, Quattro Pro displays times in long form as HH:MM:SS (for example, 09:32:30), or in short form as HH:MM (for example, 09:32) when no seconds are specified, but you can change this format. You can also change the default date format or change the short date style.

For more information about time formats, see "Default date and time formats." You can also change the default date format and the short date style.

 How to


To change the numeric format of a cell

1	Select a cell.

2	Click Format [image] Selection properties.

3	Click the Numeric format tab.

4	Choose one of the following formats from the Numeric formats list:

•	General [image] to display numbers exactly as you type them (unless the column width is too narrow)

•	Number [image] to choose a negative number and number of decimal places formats, and separate thousands with commas.

•	Currency [image] to choose a country whose currency symbol you want to use

•	Scientific [image] to display numbers as scientific notations

•	Fraction [image] to choose a fraction format

•	Hidden [image] to prevent a cell from displaying its contents

•	Percent [image] to display numbers in a percent format

•	Custom [image] to choose a customized format

 Notes

•	Quattro Pro has added the Euro to the available currency formats. You can view the Euro currency symbol if you are using Microsoft Windows 98, or later, or if your system has a Euro-compliant font installed.

•	Enabling the Hidden option, hides cells. To prevent cells from being accidentally overwritten, protect the cells by locking them. For information about locking cells see "To protect all spreadsheet cells."

 Related topics


To hide zeros on a spreadsheet

1	Click Format [image] Sheet properties.

2	Click the Display tab.

3	Enable the No option in the Display zeros area.

 Related topics


To change the number of decimal places in a value

1	Select a cell.

2	On the property bar, click the Change the number of decimal places button.

3	Type a value in the box.

4	Press Enter.

You can also
Increase the decimal place by one	Click the Up arrow.
Decrease the decimal place by one	Click the Down arrow.
 Related topics


To format dates and times

1	Select a cell to format.

2	Click Format [image] Selection properties.

3	Click the Numeric format tab.

4	Click one of the following formats from the Numeric formats list:

•	Date [image] lets you choose a date format from the Date formats options

•	Time [image] lets you choose a time format from the Time formats options

Notes

•	If you edit dates from previous versions of Quattro Pro, you should change two-digit year date format to a four-digit year date format to explicitly indicate the century. For example, edit the date "1/1/20" as "1/1/1920".

•	In order to format dates and times to properly display in a chart, you must first concatenate the date and time as a single number as follows: YYYYMMDDhhmmss. For example, 20011231235959 = December 31st, 2001 at 11:59:59 pm.

 Related topics


To change the default date format

1	Click Tools [image] Settings.

2	In the list of categories, double-click Workspace, Customize, and click International.

3	Enable the Date format option from the Selection area.

4	Enable one of the date format options in the Date format area.

 Related topics


To change the short date style

1	Click Start [image] Settings [image] Control panel.

2	Double-click Regional settings.

3	Click the Date tab.

4	Choose a date format from the Short date style list box.

 Related topics


Creating custom formats

With custom formats, you can change the way dates, times, or numeric values display in a spreadsheet by using a format statement. A format statement must contain format codes. These codes, when applied to values in the spreadsheet, change the way values are formatted. For information about specific format code functions, see "Numeric format codes," "Date format codes", and "Time format codes."

You can create a custom format. When you create a custom format, you modify an existing format and save it with a new name. By default, when you modify an existing format the format name changes. Once you have created a custom format, you can apply it to a cell. You can edit an existing custom format.

Quattro Pro lets you set a condition for a custom format. When you set a condition, you must specify the condition and the resulting format to apply when the conditions are true; For example, if X is greater than Y, then apply the Z format.

A custom format can contain multiple conditions. When you apply a custom format to cells, all conditions within the custom format are evaluated. Quattro Pro evaluates conditions from top to bottom until it finds a condition that is "true" or reaches the default format statement.

The following figure is an example of a custom format that contains multiple format statements with conditions. The first column contains the conditions, and the second column contains the formats to be applied when each condition is true. The third column specifies how to adjust the value before displaying it in the spreadsheet.

Note that the default format statement does not contain a condition. This format is applied to all cells to which the above conditions do not apply.

You can delete format statements when you no longer need them.

 How to


To create a custom format

1	Click Format [image] Selection properties.

2	Click the Numeric format tab.

3	Click Custom from the Numeric formats list.

4	From the Custom list, choose the format that most closely resembles the one you want to create.

5	Click Add.

6	In the Add format dialog box, type a format name in the Format name box.

7	Choose a numeric format code from the Add numeric code list box.

You can also
Add a date or time format code	Choose a date or time format code from the Add date/time code list box.
Add rich text formatting	Select the format code in the Format Code box, and apply formatting using the text formatting buttons.
Add text to be displayed with the format	Click inside the Format Code box, and type the text.
 Note

•	A summary of the format statement. displays in the box under the Format name box.

 Related topics


To apply a custom format

1	Select the cells to which you want to apply a custom format.

2	Click Format [image] Selection properties.

3	Click the Numeric format tab.

4	Click Custom from the Numeric formats list, and select a format from the Custom list.

 Related topics


To edit a custom format

1	Click Format [image] Selection properties.

2	Click the Numeric format tab.

3	Click Custom from the Numeric formats list, and select a format from the Custom list.

4	Click Edit.

5	In the Edit format dialog box, modify any of the custom formats settings.

 Note

•	When you edit a custom format, Quattro Pro applies the formatting changes to all cells that use that custom format.

 Tip

•	If a custom format contains multiple format statements, you can edit a specific statement by choosing the statement from the list under the Format name box, and making any changes.

 Related topics


To set a condition for a custom format

1	Select a cell formatted with a custom format.

2	Click Format [image] Selection properties.

3	Click the Numeric format tab.

4	Click Custom from the Numeric Formats list.

5	Click Edit.

6	In the If condition area, choose one of the following first terms of the condition from the First term list box:

•	Value [image] Quattro Pro uses the value you type in the box

•	This cell [image] Quattro Pro uses the currently selected cell

•	Other cell [image] Quattro Pro lets you select a cell from the spreadsheet by using the Range picker tool

7	Choose an operator from the Operator list box.

8	Choose the second term of the condition from the Second term list box.

You can also
Add a format statement after the currently selected statement.	Click Add.
Insert a format statement before the currently selected statement.	Click Insert.
 Note

•	If you choose a bar format, you can adjust the limits of the bar range in the Bar format values area.

 Tip

•	You can enable the Adjust value before display check box to adjust how the value of the currently selected format statement displays in the notebook.

 Related topics


To delete a format statement

1	Click Format [image] Selection properties.

2	Click the Numeric format tab.

3	Click Custom from the Numeric formats list, and select a format from the Custom list.

4	Click Edit.

5	In the Edit format dialog box, choose a format statements, from the list under the Format name box.

6	Click Delete.

 Related topics


Creating a bar format

Applying a bar format to numeric values lets you visually identify patterns or anomalies in numeric data. By displaying numeric values as horizontal bars you create a graphical representation of your data. For example, consider a mousetrap company that tracks monthly sales for 1998. By viewing these figures using a bar format, you can view any sales trends for the year and quickly identify the month with the highest and lowest sales records.

The following figure shows the monthly sales figures for 1998 using numbers and then using the bar format.

You can also change the color of the bar and the limits of the bar range. By default, Quattro Pro colors bars red and uses a bar range of 0 to 100.

 How to


To apply a bar format to numeric values

1	Select the cells to which you want to apply the format.

2	Click Format [image] Selection properties.

3	Click the Numeric format tab.

4	Click Custom from the Numeric formats list.

5	Choose one of the following bar formats from the Custom list:

•	Left bar [image] displays the number as a red bar starting at the left of the cell

•	Right bar [image] displays the number as a red bar starting at the right of the cell

•	Center bar [image] displays the number as a red bar starting in the center of the cell

 Related topics


To change the color of a bar format

1	Select the cells for which you want to edit the bar color.

2	Click Format [image] Selection properties.

3	Click the Numeric format tab.

4	Click Edit.

5	Select the format statements, from the list under the Format name box.

6	In the Format code area, select the bar format code in the Format code box.

7	Open the Color picker, and click a color.

 Related topics


To change the range limit of a bar format

1	Select the cells for which you want to edit the bar range.

2	Click Format [image] Selection properties.

3	Click the Numeric format tab.

4	Click Edit.

5	Select the format statements, from the list under the Format name box.

6	In the Bar format values area, choose one of the following limits from the Lower limit list box:

•	Value [image] Quattro Pro uses as the lower limit the value you type in the box.

•	Other cell [image] Quattro Pro uses as the lower limit the value of another cell you specify in the box that is either relative to the current cell or an absolute cell address.

7	Choose one of the following limits from the Upper limit list box in the Bar format values area:

•	Value

•	Other cell

 Related topics


Working with page breaks

You can change the look of a spreadsheet by specifying page breaks. There are two kinds of page breaks: soft page breaks and hard page breaks. Quattro Pro lets you view and find page breaks in spreadsheets. Page breaks display as solid blue lines.

Quattro Pro automatically creates soft page breaks at the bottom of each page, according to the page size. You can insert either horizontal or vertical hard page breaks to start a new page.

Quattro Pro lets you convert soft page breaks to hard page breaks and hard page breaks to soft page breaks. You can also delete a hard page break.

 How to


To view page breaks

•	Click View [image] Page breaks.

 Related topics


To find page breaks

1	Click Edit [image] Find breaks.

2	In the Break type area, choose a type of page break from the list box.

3	In the Break classification area, choose a page break classification from the list box.

4	Click Find next.

 Related topics


To insert hard page breaks

1	Click the cell where you want to insert a page break.

2	Click Insert [image] Page break [image] Create.

3	Choose a break type from the Break type list box.

 Notes

•	The page break is inserted before the cell you click.

•	If you click below or to the right of an existing hard page break, the new page break created has the opposite orientation. For example, if you click next to a horizontal page break, a vertical page break is created.

 Tips

•	You can create a horizontal page break by selecting a row and clicking Insert [image] Page break [image] Create.

•	You can also insert a hard page break by clicking where you want to insert a page break and pressing Ctrl + Enter. This only applies if you are not in edit mode.

 Related topics


To convert soft page breaks to hard page breaks

1	Move the pointer over the displayed page break until it changes to a double arrow.

2	Right-click the page break, and click Set hard page break.

 Related topics


To convert hard page breaks to soft page breaks

1	Move the pointer over the displayed page break until it changes to a double arrow.

2	Right-click the page break, and click Remove hard page break.

 Related topics


To delete hard page breaks

1	Click below or right of the page break.

2	Click Insert [image] Page break [image] Delete.

 Tip

•	You can also delete all page breaks by clicking Insert [image] Page break [image] Delete all.

 Related topics


Creating headers and footers

Headers and footers are lines of text that print at the top and bottom of each page. Adding headers and footers provides a place to include such information as page numbers, title, date, time, and filename on each notebook page. Using links, you can even enter the contents of a cell in a header or footer.

You can change the distance between a header or footer and the first or last row of data.

After creating a header or footer, you can edit it as required.

 How to


To add a header or footer

1	Click View [image] Page.

2	Right-click the top or bottom margin, and click one of the following:

•	Create header

•	Create footer

3	Type the header or footer text.

4	Click Format [image] Selection properties.

5	Choose a font face from the Face list.

6	Choose a font size from the Size list box.

7	Enable any of the following check boxes in the Appearance area:

•	Bold

•	Italics

•	Underline

•	Strikeout

 Related topics


To link the contents of a cell to a header or footer

1	Click File [image] Page setup.

2	Click the Header/footer tab.

3	In the Header or Footer area, enable the Create check box.

4	Type the cell address preceded by a back slash.

For example, \A:A1.

 Note

•	You cannot enter text or insert positioning characters on the same line as the cell content.

 Related topics


To adjust the space above or below a header or footer

1	Click File [image] Page setup.

2	Click the Header/footer tab.

3	Type a height value in the Height box.

 Tip

•	You can also adjust the space between the header or footer and the first or last row of data by dragging the dotted line that borders the top or bottom of the spreadsheet data.

 Related topics


To edit a header or footer

1	Click View [image] Page.

2	Double-click in the header or footer dotted area.

3	Make any change.

4	Click outside the header or footer.

 Related topics


To edit the font and font attributes in a header or footer

To	Do the following
Edit the font in a header or footer	Click File [image] Page setup. Click the Header/footer tab. In the Header or Footer area, click the Font button. Choose a font from the Face list.
Edit the font size in a header or footer	Click File [image] Page setup. Click the Header/footer tab. In the Header or Footer area, click the Font button. Choose a font size from the Size list box.
Edit the font attributes in a header or footer	Click File [image] Page setup. Click the Header/footer tab. Enable any of the check boxes in the Appearance area.
 Related topics


Customizing margins

Quattro Pro lets you display all margins on a page. You can also change margin settings to best present data.

 How to


To display all margins on a page

1	Click View [image] Page.

2	Click View [image] Zoom.

3	Enable the 50% option.

 Tip

•	You can also display all margins on a page by clicking the Zoom button on the toolbar and choosing 50% from the list.

 Related topics


To change margin settings

1	Click File [image] Page setup.

2	Click the Print margins tab.

3	Type the margin measurements in the following boxes:

•	Top [image] the distance between the top of the page and the header

•	Bottom [image] the distance between the bottom of the page and the footer

•	Right [image] the distance between the right-edge of the paper and the data

•	Left [image] the distance between the left-edge of the paper and the data

 Note

•	If "in" displays next to the default margin settings, the measurements you type are recorded in inches. If "cm" displays, the measurements are recorded in centimeters. Using decimals indicates partial inches or centimeters; for example, 0.5 centimeters.

 Tip

•	You can also change a margin by clicking View [image] Page and dragging a dotted margin line.

 Related topics


Working with styles

A style consists of several text properties that can be modified and used to create a uniform look for notebooks. You can define a style for cells in a notebook and enable or disable properties. Disabled properties have no effect on cells to which you apply the new style.

Quattro Pro lets you copy a style to another notebook. You can also copy property settings for one style with those for another style or formatted cell. For example, you can copy a cell that has purple text color properties with the Normal style. When you apply the Normal style to cells in that notebook, the cells display the Normal style properties and purple text.

 How to


To define a new style

1	Click Format [image] Define styles.

2	Type a new name in the Define style for list box.

3	In the Include properties area, enable any of the check boxes corresponding to properties to change.

4	Click any of the following buttons to set the properties for the style:

•	Alignment [image] sets the alignment properties for the cell

•	Format [image] sets the cell format properties

•	Protection [image] enables or disables cell protection

•	Line drawing [image] sets the properties for cell lines

•	Shading [image] sets the shading, pattern, and color properties for the cell

•	Font [image] sets the font for the text in the cell

•	Text Color [image] sets the font color for text in the cell

 Tip

•	You can also delete a style by choosing a style from the Define style for list box and clicking Delete. Cells using this style revert to the Normal style.

 Related topics


To apply a predefined style

1	Select a cell.

2	Choose a style from the Style list box on the property bar.

 Related topics


To copy a style to another notebook

1	Select a cell that has a style format.

2	Click Edit [image] Copy.

3	Select a cell or group of cells in another notebook.

4	Click Edit [image] Paste.

The style name appears in the Style list box for that notebook.

 Related topics


To copy style settings from a cell or style

1	Click Format [image] Define styles.

2	Select a style from the Define styles for list box.

3	Click Merge.

4	In the Merge style dialog box, enable one of the following options:

•	Style [image] merges another style you choose from the Select style list box

•	Cell and [image] merges a formatted cell you specify in the Select cell box

 Related topics


Reference: Editing and formatting a spreadsheet

To create a uniform look for notebooks, Quattro Pro has default styles available. Quattro Pro also has numeric format codes, date format codes, and time format codes which can be used to set conditions.

You can type codes in a header or footer to add items such as page numbers and dates instead of adding them from the property bar. For example, when you type text in a header or footer, you can use the bar character (|) to change the text alignment from the left to either centered or right-aligned. On some keyboards, the vertical bar character appears broken in the middle.

If you want to type a number sign (#) or an at sign (@) as a symbol and not as a header or footer code, type a backslash ( \ ) in front of the symbol. For example, typing \@ displays @.

 How to


Styles available in Quattro Pro

The following is a list of default styles available in Quattro Pro.

Style	Result
Comma	Sets the numeric format to a comma with two decimals
Comma0	Sets the numeric format to a comma with no decimals
Currency	Sets the numeric format to currency with two decimals
Currency0	Sets the numeric format to currency with no decimals
Date	Sets the numeric format to user-defined (with the date format specified)
Fixed	Sets the numeric format to fixed with two decimals
Heading 1	Sets the font to Arial (or Helvetica) 18-point bold
Heading 2	Sets the font to Arial (or Helvetica) 12-point bold
Normal	Sets the numeric format and alignment to general; sets the font to Arial (or Helvetica) 10-point regular; sets shading to white; turns on protection; and sets the text color to black
Percent	Sets the numeric format to percent
Total	Inserts a double line above the active cell
 Related topics


Numeric format codes

The table below outlines and describes each numeric format code available in Quattro Pro.

Numeric format code	Description
0	Always displays a digit. If the number does not have a digit in this position, a zero displays. If there are more digits in the number than zeros in the format code, extra digits in the integer portion are displayed and the fraction portion is rounded.
9	Displays a digit if the number has one. If there are more digits in the number than nines in the format code, extra digits in the integer portion are displayed and the fraction portion is rounded.
, (comma)	Inserts a thousands separator (a comma, unless specified otherwise with the application's International properties). If not part of a number code, the comma is inserted wherever it is positioned in the format.
. (period)	Inserts a decimal separator (a period, unless specified otherwise with the application's International properties)
E- or e-	Displays the number in scientific notation, preceding negative exponents with a minus sign. If the format includes at least one zero or nine following this symbol, the number displays in scientific notation with E or e. If the exponent contains more digits than nines or zeros following this symbol, the extra digits are displayed.
E+ or e+	Displays numbers in scientific notation, preceding positive exponents with a plus sign. If the format includes at least one zero or nine following this symbol, the number displays in scientific notation with E or e. If the exponent contains more digits than nines or zeros following this symbol, the extra digits are displayed.
?//M	Displays a fraction followed by the maximum number of digits for the denominator
?//	Displays a fraction followed by the denominator to use. The fraction is not reduced
?//R	Displays a fraction followed by the base denominator to use. The fraction is reduced if possible.
* (asterisk)	Fills the column by repeating the character to the right of the asterisk
_ (underscore)	Skips the space that would have been required to display the character that follows the underscore. This lets you align numbers for formats with optional trailing characters, such as negative numbers with parentheses.
| (bar)	Displays the first character following the bar code in the space that would have been required to display the second character following the bar code. This allows the alignment of formats with different trailing characters, such as the K Meg Gig predefined format.
LeftBar	Displays the number as a red horizontal bar starting at the left of the cell using the range 0 to 100.
CenterBar	Displays the number as a red horizontal bar starting in the center of the cell. Uses the range 0 to 100 from the center to the left, and 0 to 100 from the center of the cell to the right.
RightBar	Displays the number as a red horizontal bar starting at the right of the cell using the range 0 to 100.
General	Uses the General numeric format
 Related topics


Date format codes

The table below outlines and describes the date format codes available in Quattro Pro.

Date format codes	Description
d	Displays the day of the month as a one- or two-digit number (1-31)
dd	Displays the day of the month as a two-digit number (01-31)
wday, Wday, WDAY	Displays the day of the week as a four-character abbreviation in lowercase, with the first letter capitalized, or in uppercase.
1wday, 1Wday, 1WDAY	Displays the day of the week as an abbreviation using a number  and four-characters in lowercase, with the first letter capitalized, or in uppercase
weekday, Weekday, WEEKDAY	Displays the day of the week in lowercase, with the first letter capitalized, or in uppercase
mo	Displays the month as a one- or two-digit number (1-12)
mmo	Displays the month as a two-digit number (01-12)
mon, Mon, MON	Displays the month as a three-character abbreviation in lowercase, with the first letter capitalized, or in uppercase
1mon, 1Mon, 1MON	Displays the month as an abbreviation using a number and  four-characters in lowercase, with the first letter capitalized, or in uppercase
month, Month, MONTH	Displays the name of the month in lowercase, with the first letter capitalized, or in uppercase
yy	Displays the last two digits of the year (00-99)
yyyy	Displays all four digits of the year (0001-9999)
* (asterisk)	Fills the column by repeating the character to the right of the asterisk
_ (underscore)	Skips the space that would have been required to display the character that follows the underscore. This lets you align numbers for formats with optional trailing characters, such as negative numbers with parentheses.
| (bar)	Displays the first character following the bar code in the space that would have been required to display the second character following the bar code. This lets you align formats with different trailing characters, such as the K Meg Gig predefined format.
 Related topics


Time format codes

The table below outlines and describes the time codes available in Quattro Pro.

Time format codes	Description
s	Displays seconds as a one- or two-digit number (1-59)
	Displays seconds as a two-digit number (01-59)
[ss]	Displays a count in seconds that can exceed 60 (for example, formats 00:01:01 as 61 seconds). This format should not be used with year, month, day, hour, or minute codes.
mi	Displays minutes as a one- or two-digit number (1-59)
mmi	Displays minutes as a two-digit number (01-59)
[mmi]	Displays a count in minutes that can exceed 60 (for example, formats 01:01:01 as 61 minutes). This format should not be used with year, month, day, or hour codes.
h	Displays the hour as a one- or two-digit number (1-24). If the format includes am/pm or AM/PM, the number is between 1-12. If am/pm or AM/PM is not included, the 24-hour format (0-24) is used.
hh	Displays the hour as a two-digit number (01-24). If the format includes am/pm or AM/PM, the number is between 01-12. If am/pm or AM/PM is not included, the 24-hour format (00-24) is used.
[hh]	Displays a count of hours that can exceed 24 (for example, formats one day and one hour as 25 hours). This format should not be used with year, month, or day codes.
.s	Displays the decimal portion of seconds (the number of digits to display is specified following this format).
.mi	Displays the decimal portion of minutes (the number of digits to display is specified following this format). This format should not be used with seconds codes.
.h	Displays the decimal portion of hours (the number of digits to display is specified following this format). This format should not be used with minutes or seconds codes.
a or A	Displays a shortened version of am/pm, and sets the time to a 12-hour instead of a 24-hour format in either lowercase or uppercase
am or AM	Displays am/pm in either lowercase or uppercase, and sets the time to  12-hour format instead of 24 hour
 Related topics


Header and footer codes

The following table outlines header and footer codes and their function.

Code	Description
| (vertical bar)	Centers text that follows
|| (two vertical bars)	Right-aligns text that follows
#p	Displays the current page number
#p+n	Displays the current page number plus the number n
#P	Displays the number of pages in the document
#P+n	Displays the number of pages plus the number n
#d	Displays the current date in the short format specified in Tools [image] Settings [image] International [image] Date format
#D	Displays the current date in the long format specified in Tools [image] Settings [image] International [image] Date format
#ds	Displays the current date in Short date format
#Ds	Displays the current date in Long date format
#t	Displays the current time in the short format specified in Tools [image] Settings [image] International [image] Time format
#T	Displays the current time in the long format specified in Tools [image] Settings [image] International [image] Time format
#ts	Displays the current time in Short time format
#Ts	Displays the current time in Long time format
#f	Displays the notebook filename with no path (for example, BUDGET.WB3)
#F	Displays the notebook filename, including the path (for example, C:\DATA\BUDGET.WB3)
#n	Displays the moves to a new line
# (number sign)	Displays the current page number; use for compatibility with Quattro Pro for DOS
@	Displays the current date (as found in your computer's calendar); use for compatibility with Quattro Pro for DOS
 Related topics


Reference: Properties of form controls


Properties of form controls

Form controls are objects such as buttons, list boxes, and radio buttons. Quattro Pro lets you place these controls directly onto your spreadsheet, and they can run a macro, display a custom dialog box, or display spreadsheet data. There are many properties available for use in developing form controls.

 How to


Active dialog box properties

The following properties control the behavior of the dialog box:

•	Dimension [image] specifies the exact size and position of the dialog box

•	Title [image] specifies the title of the dialog box, which the user will see

•	Position adjust [image] specifies how the dialog box moves when the Quattro Pro window is resized

•	Grid options [image] shows/hides a grid and sets the number of pixels between gridlines

•	Name [image] used to identify the dialog box in macros, link commands, and formulas

•	Disabled [image] disables all controls in the dialog box

•	Value [image] the current setting of the dialog box (a comma separated list of the current control settings of the dialog box

 Related topics


Active page property

Indicates the name of the active tab in a tab control.

 Related topics


Add down button property

Adds a down arrow to the right of a combo box.

 Related topics


Alarm on property

Turns the timer alarm on or off. When set to Yes, the time control generates an alarm event at the time specified by the Alarm time property. For information about the Alarm time property, see "Alarm time property."

 Related topics


Alarm time property

Specifies the time of day to generate an alarm event when Alarm on is set to Yes.

 Related topics


Allow point mode property

Lets users use the pointer to select cells while a dialog box remains on the screen. The Field type property must be set to a field type other than integer before this property can be enabled.

 Related topics


Attach child property

Used to group controls for moving or resizing. The Attach child property is available for many controls. For information about working with child controls, see "Working with child controls in dialog boxes."

 Related topics


Bitmap property

Specifies a .bmp file or an internal Quattro Pro bitmap to appear on a button.

•	System bitmaps [image] displays internal bitmaps used by Corel Quattro Pro. Select one from the list, or type the name of another image.

•	Bitmap [image] sets the name of the bitmap you want to use. Click the folder button to select a different file.

•	Preview [image] shows a sample of what the bitmap looks like

 Related topics


Button type property

Specifies the type of button:

•	Push button [image] acts like a push button; you can use link commands to make it perform operations when a user clicks it

•	Radio button [image] acts like a radio button, including a radio button's behavior in the group box. (A bitmap button appears recessed when a user chooses it.)

•	Check box button [image] acts like a check box button

•	OK exit button [image] closes the dialog box like a standard OK button. If the dialog box was displayed by {DODIALOG}, the values for controls whose Process value property is set to Yes are written back to the setting block.

•	Cancel exit button [image] closes the dialog box like a standard Cancel button. If the dialog box was displayed by {DODIALOG}, the values for controls whose Process value property is set to Yes are not written back to the setting block, since the dialog box was canceled.

 Related topics


Convert text property

Controls the format of text in edit fields. If Convert text is set to Yes, all characters preceded by a backslash (\ ) are treated as escape sequences. Important: This property is valid only if a field's value is set via a macro command or link, and not simply typed into the edit field.

Valid formatting codes for edit field text consist of the following:

\n [image] displays following text on a new line.

\t [image] inserts a tab (handy for lining up columns of text within the edit field).

\\ [image] inserts a backslash (\) into the text. Use \\ when you have to enter \n or \t as normal text into the edit field.

 Related topics


Current time property

Retrieves the current time. Settings cannot be altered.

•	Hours [image] displays the current number of hours on your system clock

•	Minutes [image] displays the current number of minutes on your system clock

•	Seconds [image] displays the current number of seconds on your system clock

 Related topics


Custom color property

Specifies whether the color control should include a button for specifying different colors.

 Related topics


Default property

Determines the default value displayed in a spin control or an edit field control (with Field type set to Integer).

 Related topics


Default button property

Specifies whether a push button or bitmap button is automatically clicked when the user presses ENTER in a dialog box or toolbar. A button configured this way is called the default button. A button defined as the default button displays in the dialog box with a thick black border. Only one button in the dialog box can have this property set to Yes; by default, it is the OK button. Setting a control's Default button property to Yes automatically sets the other control's Default button properties to No.

 Related topics


Depend on property

Specifies the areas of Quattro Pro in which the control is enabled when the dialog box displays. If all of the options are enabled, the control is always available. This property is available for many controls.

•	Desktop [image] enables the control when the dialog is displayed from the Quattro Pro desktop

•	Notebook [image] enables the control when the dialog is displayed from a notebook window

•	Chart [image] enables the control when the dialog is displayed from a graphics window

•	Dialog [image] enables the control when the dialog is displayed from another dialog box

•	Input line [image] enables the control when the dialog is displayed from the input line

•	Objects page [image] enables the control when the dialog is displayed from the Objects sheet

 Related topics


Dialog type property

Specifies whether a file control is for saving or opening files.

 Related topics


Dimension property

Specifies the exact size and position of the control. The Dimension property is available for many controls, and is also available for graphics window objects when running Quattro Pro in Developer mode (/D). For information about using Developer mode, see "Working in Developer mode." If you start Quattro Pro in Developer mode (with the /D parameter), the Dimension property will also be available for drawn chart objects.

•	X Pos [image] sets the distance in pixels between the left edge of the object and the left side of the window

•	Y Pos [image] sets the distance in pixels between the top edge of the object and the bottom edge of the window's title bar (or from the top of the chart background in the case of a drawn object)

•	Width [image] sets the width of the object in pixels

•	Height [image] sets the height of the object in pixels

 Related topics


Disabled property

Disables the control in the same manner as the Grayed property, but does not dim the control. The Disabled property is available for all controls.

 Related topics


Draw beveling property

This property is associated with the bitmap button. When it is set to Yes, a border around the bitmap gives the button a 3-D appearance. When it is set to No, the 3-D border does not display.

 Related topics


Draw to right property

Sets the position of check box and radio button text. If set to Yes, text is placed to the right of the check box or radio button; if set to No, text is placed to the left. The default is Yes.

 Related topics


Edit disabled property

Disables typing in a combo box or file control.

 Related topics


Edit length property

Specifies the maximum number of characters allowed in an edit field, combo box, or spin control.

 Related topics


Enabled property

Enables controls that have been turned off with the Disabled property or by setting Enabled to No. It is used by link commands and does not appear in the control's properties. This property is available for all controls.

 Related topics


Field type property

Determines the allowable type of input to the edit field. After changing Field type to Integer, properties change to Edit integer.

•	Integer [image] restricts user entry to integers. This adds three properties to the edit field properties (which is renamed Edit integer). Minimum defines the lowest acceptable value users can enter. Maximum defines the highest acceptable value a user can enter. Default defines the initial value of the edit field.

•	String [image] accepts any text a user enters (including numbers); this is the default edit field type

•	Real [image] accepts any number or formula

•	Block [image] accepts only cell addresses or block coordinates

•	Hidden [image] accepts any text, but displays a pound sign (#) for each character instead of the actual character. This is handy when users are entering passwords.

 Related topics


56 colors property

Specifies whether the color control should display 56 colors or 16 colors.

 Related topics


File type list property

Specifies the file types that the browse button can display.

•	Edit field [image] where you enter the name of the types list to use, or select it from the list

•	List box [image] lists the file types you can use (only toolbar files, only database files, and so on)

 Related topics


Fill color property

Specifies the color inside a Rectangle control. Enable the Use system color option if you want to use the system color for the object. For example, these are two default system colors: notebook sheet tabs are white, and rectangles in a dialog boxes are gray with a black frame.

 Related topics


Frame color property

Specifies the color of a rectangle frame.

 Related topics


Grayed property

Specifies whether the control can be used. When set to Yes, the control appears dimmer to indicate it is unavailable. This property is available for many controls. When you set the Grayed property for a control to Yes, you also have to set its Disabled property to No.

 Related topics


Grid options property

Shows or hides a grid in the dialog window, sets the number of pixels between grid lines, and turns Snap to grid on or off. The grid is an aid in laying out controls.

•	Grid size [image] sets the distance in pixels between gridlines

•	Show grid [image] displays the grid to help you position objects in the window

•	Snap to grid [image] snaps the sides of objects to the grid when you move, resize, or align objects

 Related topics


Group text property

Specifies a title for a group box.

 Related topics


Help line property

A brief description that appears in a QuickTip when the control is selected by the user. The Help line property is available for many controls. For toolbar controls, this field sets the QuickTip text that appears when you point to a toolbar button.

 Related topics


Hidden property

Specifies whether the control is visible in the dialog box. When set to No, the control is hidden to the user but still displays when editing. The Hidden property is available for every control.

 Related topics


History list property

Set this to Yes to have a combo box store a history of the values entered in its edit field; this supersedes the settings of the List property. For information about the List property, see "List property."

 Related topics


Interval in units property

Used with the Units in milliseconds property to specify the interval at which the time control generates the timer event. The Interval in units property determines how frequently the timer refresh event will be generated; the Units in milliseconds property determines the number of milliseconds represented by each unit. For information about using the Units in milliseconds property, see "Units in milliseconds property."

 Related topics


Label font property

Determines dialog label typeface and point size, and whether it is bold, italic, underlined, or strikeout.

 Related topics


Label text property

Specifies the text appearing on a button or other control. When a button leads to another dialog box, you should end its text with an ellipsis (...).

 Related topics


List property

Specifies a block containing a list to appear in a combo or list box, or selects one of Quattro Pro's predefined lists. Available predefined lists include Fonts, DriveList, BitmapList, and DBFileType. If you specify a block and the block contents are changed after the List property has been set, the List settings will not be updated until the dialog box is opened again or an EXECUTE link command is used to refresh the list box.

For information about the File type list property, see "File type list property."

 Related topics


List length property

Specifies the maximum number of history list entries in a combo box. For information about using history lists, see "History list property."

 Related topics


Maximum property

Determines the highest number that can be entered in a spin control or an edit field (when its Field type property is set to Integer).

 Related topics


Minimum property

Determines the lowest number that can be entered in a spin control or an edit field (when its Field type property is set to Integer).

 Related topics


Name property

Used to identify a control or drawn chart object. It can also be used by macros, link commands, and @functions to select the object, change its property settings, or read its property settings. The Name property is available for many objects. If you start Quattro Pro in Developer mode (with the /D parameter), the Name property will also be available for many graphics window objects. For information about using Developer mode, see "Working in Developer mode."

 Related topics


Number of columns property

Specifies how many columns of items appear in a list box. The default is one column.

 Related topics


Object help property

Determines the contents of Object Help for the selected object. Use the Object help property to create help for the objects in custom dialog boxes and toolbars. Note that the combined total of all characters in the three Object help fields cannot exceed 194 characters.

•	The Object help title field sets the title of the object's help dialog.

•	The Object help text field sets the text that appears in the object's help dialog when you right-click the object in a dialog. (For toolbar buttons, the Help line property sets the QuickTip that displays when the mouse is on the button.)

•	The WinHelp context field lets you specify a WinHelp context string for a Help topic instead of using the title and text fields. The context string must be followed immediately by the @ symbol and help filename. You can then right-click the control to display Help for it. (For more information about creating Help files, see the SDK documentation.)

 Related topics


Object ID property

Assigns an identification number for controls and drawn chart objects. It shows the order in which the controls were created. The Object ID property is available for many objects. You can use the Object ID to identify objects in a macro command, link command, or @function. You cannot change the Object ID of an object. It is a read-only property. If you start Quattro Pro in Developer mode (with the /D parameter), the Object ID property will also be available for drawn chart objects. For information about using Developer mode, see "Working in Developer mode."

 Related topics


Ordered property

Sorts list box and combo box entries alphanumerically in ascending order. Setting it to No does not reset the order of a list that has been sorted.

 Related topics


Page list property

This property displays commands for creating, removing, and reordering tabs.

•	Sheet name [image] indicates the tab to add or remove

•	Sheet list [image] lists the tabs already attached to the tab control. You can select an entry in this list to move it or insert new tabs before it.

•	Insert [image] adds the tab indicated in Sheet name before the tab name selected in Sheet list

•	Add [image] adds the tab indicated in Sheet name after the tab name selected in Sheet list

•	Delete [image] removes the selected tab name from the tab control

•	Move up or Move down [image] changes the position of the tab name selected in Sheet list

 Related topics


Page name text property

The Page name text property is a property of a tab that lets you rename a tab in a tab control. You can also rename a tab in the Dialog Designer by double-clicking it and entering a new name.

 Related topics


Parameters property

Controls the range of values a scroll bar accepts, and specifies how quickly the user can change the scroll bar's value.

•	Min [image] sets a horizontal bar's value when its scroll box is as far left as possible; vertical bars are set to this value when their scroll box is at the top of the scroll bar

•	Max [image] sets a horizontal bar's value when its scroll box is as far right as possible; vertical bars are set to this value when their scroll box is at the bottom of the scroll bar

•	Line [image] sets the amount the scroll bar's value changes when a user clicks a scroll arrow

•	Page [image] sets the amount the scroll bar's value changes when a user clicks above or below the scroll box on a vertical scroll bar, or to the left or right of the scroll box on a horizontal scroll bar

•	Time [image] sets the amount of time in milliseconds that Quattro Pro waits before moving the scroll box in response to a user action (clicking a scroll bar, holding down the mouse button while pointing to a scroll arrow, and so on)

 Related topics


Position adjust property

Specifies how a control moves when its parent control is resized. The Position adjust property is available for every control.

•	Depend on parent [image] locks each edge of the child control in place so that when the parent control is resized, the child control resizes proportionally

•	Center horizontally [image] centers the control between the left and right sides of the parent control whenever the parent control is resized

•	Center vertically [image] centers the control between the top and bottom of the parent control whenever the parent control is resized

•	Position relative to [image] positions the child control relative to the sides of the parent control. Check Top, Bottom, Left, or Right to unlock edges of the child control. If you move an edge of the parent control, unlocked edges of the child control move instead of resizing.

For information about using parent and child controls, see "Working with child controls in dialog boxes."

 Related topics


Process value property

Setting this property to Yes lets the macro command {DODIALOG} access the control's value. The Process value property is available for many objects.

 Related topics


Rectangle style property

Determines the type of rectangle:

•	Plain [image] draws the rectangle as a solid box without a frame

•	Framed [image] draws a frame around the rectangle (the default). To set the color of this frame, use the Frame color property.

•	Beveled out [image] displays a slightly raised rectangle

•	Beveled in [image] displays a slightly recessed rectangle

•	Transparent [image] displays a clear, unfilled rectangle. This is handy for grouping controls together without displaying the rectangle they are attached to.

•	Engraved [image] displays a rectangle with an etched frame

To change a rectangle's color, right-click the rectangle and choose the Rectangle Properties command, then click Color.

 Related topics


Select location property

This property is associated with File controls. When it is set to Yes, clicking the browse button on the file control activates the Select folder dialog box, which allows users to select a location in the directory tree.

The Select folder dialog box is akin to the one encountered during setup of WordPerfect Office which prompts for a specific destination for installing the applications. If users click the Browse button during installation, the Select folder dialog box displays so that users can choose a drive and folder.

 Related topics


Selected property

Indicates numerically which radio button in a group box is chosen or which item in a list box is highlighted. Numbers are sequential (such as 0, 1, 2, 3,...9). If the first item is chosen or highlighted, Selected is set to 0. Choosing or highlighting the second item sets Selected to 1, and so on.

 Related topics


Selection text property

Returns the text of an item selected in a list box.

 Related topics


Show property

The opposite of Hidden. Set it to No to hide the control from the user. It is used by link and macro commands and does not appear in the control's properties.

 Related topics


Show frame property

Displays a box around an edit field or spin control. The default is On.

 Related topics


Show time property

If set to Yes, the system time displays on the face of the time control.

 Related topics


Tab stop property

Determines whether the control can be activated by Tab. The Tab stop property is available for many controls.

 Related topics


Terminate dialog property

If set to Yes, pressing ENTER triggers the default button (usually OK). This property is available for combo boxes, edit fields, file controls, and spin controls. When set to No, keeps the dialog box from activating its default button when the user presses ENTER in an edit field.

 Related topics


Text draw flags property

Determines where the text appears in relation to its background (for labels, check boxes, and radio buttons) or in relation to the button itself (for push buttons and bitmap buttons).

You can enter special text characters in a label to change its appearance:

•	\n [image] makes characters to the right of it display on a second line. This only works when the Single line check box (in the Text draw flags property) is disabled.

•	\t [image] inserts a tab into the text (a fixed amount of space that is handy for lining up columns of text).

•	\\ [image] inserts a backslash (\) into the text. You can use this to enter \n or \t into a label as normal text.

•	& [image] makes the character to the right of it appear underlined in the text (the ampersand does not appear). This is handy for naming controls. Use only one & character; if you use two, the & character appears underlined in the text.

Other options you can select include the following:

•	Apply check box [image] enables the Text draw flags properties you have selected.

•	Wrapping text area:

•	Single line [image] specifies that the text appears on one line

•	Word break [image] specifies word-wrapped lines (that is, lines of text that break between words, instead of in the middle of words)

•	Vertical position area:

•	Top [image] places text flush against the top edge of the label background

•	Center vertically [image] centers the text between the top and bottom of the background. It does not affect the horizontal position of the text

•	Bottom [image] places text flush against the bottom of the background

•	Horizontal position area:

•	Left [image] places text flush against the left side of the label background

•	Center horizontally [image] centers the text between the left and right sides of the label background. It does not affect the vertical position of the text

•	Right [image] places text flush against the right side of the label background

 Related topics


Timer on property

Turns timer on or off. Timer specifies whether the time control generates time events at regular intervals.

 Related topics


Title property

Determines the dialog box title or file control title displayed to the user. For file controls, this property assigns a title to the dialog box that opens when the Browse button is clicked.

 Related topics


Units in milliseconds property

Controls timer intervals together with the Interval in units property. The Interval in Units property determines how frequently the timer refresh event will be generated; the Units in milliseconds property determines the number of milliseconds represented by each unit. For information about Interval in units, see "Interval in units property."

 Related topics


Value property

The current setting of a control. This varies from control to control. See the control descriptions for a discussion of their values. Value does not appear in the properties; you can access it using macros, link commands, or @functions. Most controls have a Value property.

 Related topics


Working with formulas and functions

Formulas are mathematical equations that calculate a final value, such as the difference between two cells or the total of a column. Functions are a set of standard built-in formulas used to simplify complex calculations. Quattro Pro allows you to use both formulas and functions in developing spreadsheet projects.

In this section, you'll learn about

•	working with formulas

•	recalculating formulas

•	moving and copying formulas and referenced cells

•	composing formulas

•	working with spreadsheet functions

•	tracing errors in formulas

•	naming cells

For more information about working with formulas and functions, see "Reference: Working with formulas and functions."


Working with formulas

Using Quattro Pro, you can create math formulas. The following characters are used when creating a formula:

Character	Result
.	establishes the following data as a value
+	establishes the following data as a positive value
-	establishes the following data as a negative value
( )	establishes the following data as a formula and calculates first anything contained in the parentheses
@	establishes the following data as a function
#	establishes the following data as a logical equation
$	establishes the following data as a currency value
=	establishes the following data as a value
As well, a formula can use any of the following arguments:

Argument	Examples
Numbers	1948, -84, 43.23, 12½
Cell coordinates	B12, G29..G31, B:A3..D6, or [NOTEBK2]A:A1
Cell names	EXPENSES (which may reference D5..D10)
Spreadsheet functions	@SUM(B1..B24)
Text set off by " "	"PROFIT" or "Dear Mr."
You create formulas using cell data, such as column totals. You can also create text formulas. Text formulas are any formulas that have a textual result. Quattro Pro also allows you to create logical formulas that evaluate true or false. For example, the result of the formula +C3<10 displays either 1 or 0 depending on the value of cell C3.

Displaying error sources directly in your cells shows you the cause of any problem with your formula. As well, you can convert formulas to values; the value appears in the cell and the input line, replacing the formula.

For additional information about creating formulas, see "Operator precedence", "Guidelines for solving errors in formulas", and "Working with arrays".

 How to


To create a math formula

1	Type a plus sign (+) in a blank cell.

2	Type a formula.

3	Press Enter.

 Tip

•	To view formula results as you enter the formula data, press F9.

 Related topics


To create a formula using cell data

1	Type a plus sign (+) in a blank cell where you want to enter the formula.

2	Begin typing the formula

3	Click the cell that contains the data to insert in the formula.

4	Finish typing the formula.

 Tip

•	If the cell containing the data has a cell name, you can type the name into the formula instead of clicking on the cell. Make sure the insertion point for the name is to the right of an operator or opening parenthesis in the formula.

 Related topics


To create a text formula

1	Type a plus sign (+) in a blank cell.

2	Type the formula using an ampersand (&) to combine text strings.

For example,+C4&"Review" enters the text in cell C4, then the word Review.

3	Press Enter.

 Tip

•	If you want to add a space between strings, type it inside the quotation marks. For example,+C4&" Review" enters the text in cell C4, a space, then the word Review.

 Related topics


To create a formula that evaluates to true or false

1	Click a blank cell.

2	Type a formula using one of the logical operators.

3	Press Enter.

 Notes

•	If the statement is true, a 1 displays in the cell. If the statement is false, a 0 displays.

•	For an explanation of operators, see "Operator precedence."

 Related topics


To display error sources in cells

1	Click Format [image] Notebook properties.

2	Click the Recalc settings tab.

3	Enable the Audit errors check box.

 Note

•	When you enable the Audit errors check box, each problem cell displays the sheet and cell reference where the problem started. The notebook name is included if the problem cell is in another notebook.

 Related topics


To convert a formula to a value

1	Select a cell containing a formula.

2	Click Edit [image] Convert to values.

3	Type the destination cells in the To box.

 Notes

•	To replace a formula in a cell with its value, specify the same cells in the To box as are in the From box.

•	To copy the value of a formula to another part of the notebook, specify the top-left cell to which you want to copy the value.

 Tip

•	You can also specify the addresses of the destination cells by clicking the Range picker to the right of the relevant box and selecting a cell.

 Related topics


Recalculating formulas

You can set Quattro Pro to update calculations at specified intervals. By default, formulas are calculated when you enter them and recalculated each time you change the data. If a notebook contains many complex formulas, you may want to delay recalculation to save time.

You can set the order in which formulas recalculate depending on the nature of the formula. Available options are Natural, Column-wise, and Row-wise. You can also set the number of recalculation iterations.

 How to


To specify a calculation interval

1	Click Format [image] Notebook properties.

2	Click the Recalc settings tab.

3	Enable one of the following options:

•	Automatic [image] recalculates formulas automatically, but pauses until recalculation is finished. Use Automatic if you have complex formulas that Background mode does not handle fast enough.

•	Manual [image] recalculates the formulas you enter or edit, but does not recalculate the entire notebook until you press F9. This setting is useful for large notebooks with many calculations.

•	Background [image] recalculates formulas between keystrokes. Background mode does not interrupt your work and recalculates automatically. Quattro Pro always finishes recalculating before saving, extracting, or printing the notebook.

 Note

•	The recommended recalculation setting is either Background or Automatic; both ensure that your data is accurate.

 Tips

•	If you choose to use Manual mode, you can also recalculate single cells by selecting the cell, pressing F2, then pressing Enter.

•	You can manually calculate all formulas by clicking the calculator in the application bar; the calculator is enabled only when a formula needs to be recalculated.

 Related topics


To set the recalculation order

1	Click Format [image] Notebook properties.

2	Click the Recalc settings tab.

3	Enable one of the following options:

•	Natural [image] calculates cells in dependency order. Formulas without dependencies are calculated first, followed by formulas that depend on them.

•	Column-wise [image] starts recalculation in cell A1 of the first sheet and proceeds down column A, ignoring formulas in other columns. When column A is finished, recalculation continues in cell B1, and down column B. This continues to the end of the sheet (column ZZZ), and on to the last sheet in the notebook.

•	Row-wise [image] starts recalculation in cell A1, but proceeds across the rows, starting at row 1 and continuing through to row 1,000,000, to the last sheet in the notebook.

 Note

•	If you enable the column-wise or row-wise options, you should set the number of iterations to at least two. Otherwise, the notebook may be inaccurate.

 Related topics


To set the number of recalculation iterations

1	Click Format [image] Notebook properties.

2	Click the Recalc settings tab.

3	Type a value in the # of iterations box.

 Notes

•	If the notebook has a formula with a circular cell reference, the formula's cell address displays on the Recalc settings tab to the right of the # of iterations box. Elaborate formulas are sometimes deliberately constructed to contain circular cell references, because the formulas require multiple evaluations to attain an acceptable degree of accuracy.

•	If the notebook contains no circular cell references and the Natural option is enabled, the iteration count is ignored. For information on setting the recalculation order, see "To set the recalculation order."

 Related topics


Moving and copying formulas and referenced cells

Formula references change in a logical manner when you move cells that contain formulas or cells referenced by formulas. For additional information, see "Rules for moving formulas and referenced cells."

You can move formulas to any spreadsheet in a notebook. When you move a formula, the formula readjusts to calculate the cells relative to its new location. If you want the formula to calculate the cells it referenced before the move, you must set the formula to calculate absolute cell addresses. For additional information, see "Setting cell addresses."

You can copy the formulas you create in Quattro Pro. When you copy data by dragging and dropping the cells, the formulas adjust to correspond with their new positions. When you copy formulas with copy and paste, the formulas adjust to the new location if it includes values to use in the formula. For example, you can type +C1+C2 in cell C3. Then, if D1 and D2 contain values, when you copy the formula to cell D3, the formula adjusts to +D1+D2.

However, if you copy the formula to D3, and D1 and D2 are empty, you are alerted that the formula is using an empty cell and provided with an option to fix it. Quattro Pro will find the original data associated with the copied formula and make the reference absolute. A red-lined arrow points to the location where Quattro Pro "guesses" you want to get the data to use in the formula. If this location includes empty cells, Quattro Pro reports an error.

You can also have Quattro Pro check your cell references while you work.

 How to


To move a formula

1	Select a formula.

2	Click Edit [image] Cut.

3	Select the cell in which to paste the formula.

4	Click Edit [image] Paste.

 Tip

•	You can also move a formula by selecting the formula cell, moving the cursor to the edge of the cell until the pointer changes to a four-way arrow, and dragging the formula to a new location.

 Related topics


To copy a formula

1	Select a formula.

2	Click Edit [image] Copy.

3	Click the cell in which to paste the formula.

4	Click Edit [image] Paste.

5	In the Cell reference checker dialog box (if appearing), click one of the following buttons:

•	Close [image] keeps the adjusted formula

•	Fix it [image] uses the original formula

 Note

•	By default, when you copy formulas containing cell names, the cell names in the new location use absolute cell referencing. To force Quattro Pro to use relative cell referencing, precede the cell name with a tilde (~). For example, AGE would be an absolute cell reference, while ~AGE would be a relative cell reference. For more information about cell names, see "Naming cells."

 Tip

•	You can also copy a formula by selecting the formula cell, moving the cursor to the edge of the cell until the pointer changes to a four-way arrow, and holding down Ctrl while dragging the formula to a new location.

 Related topics


To check cell references

1	Click Tools [image] Settings.

2	Click General.

3	Enable the Cell reference checker check box.

 Related topics


Composing formulas

You can create a formula or edit an existing one using Quattro Pro's Formula Composer.

Depending on the view you choose, you can see up to three panes that provide information about the formula you are creating:

Outline pane [image] lets you examine the structure of a formula, edit parts of the formula, and trace cell references and cell names. The outline pane shows the hierarchy of the formula you have created. You can expand or collapse parts of the formula to focus on part of the formula. The outline can consist of several levels, with each level containing a different expression.

Spreadsheet function description pane [image] provides a brief description of the spreadsheet function you have selected in the outline pane. When you type a spreadsheet function (for example, @SUM) in the Expression edit field, the spreadsheet function description pane appears to the right of the dialog box.

Argument pane [image] provides entry fields for the spreadsheet function arguments. Parentheses around an argument indicate an optional argument. When you type a value for an optional argument, you must also enter values for all preceding optional arguments. Clicking to the left of an argument gives you a short description of each spreadsheet function argument.

For a list of keyboard shortcuts available in the Formula Composer dialog, see "Formula Composer keys."

 How to


To create a formula in the Formula Composer

1	Select a blank cell.

2	Click the Formula Composer button.

3	Enable one of the following options:

•	Standard view [image] displays all three panes (spreadsheet function description, outline, and argument)

•	Argument view [image] displays the outline and argument panes

•	Outline view [image] displays only the outline pane

4	Type a formula in the Expression box.

 Notes

•	If an formula is incomplete or syntactically incorrect (for example, a spreadsheet function may be missing an argument), a red question mark icon in the outline alerts you to the error.

•	Expressions that cannot be expanded, such as values, display a small yellow circle to their left.

 Tip

•	You can expand and collapse selected parts of the formula outline by clicking Expand and Collapse.

 Related topics


To edit a formula in the Formula Composer

1	Select a cell containing a formula.

2	Click the Formula Composer button.

3	Select the first expression in the outline on the left.

4	In the Expression box, make changes to the formula.

 Tip

•	To edit only part of a formula, select another, lower expression in the outline.

 Related topics


Working with spreadsheet functions

Instead of composing formulas, you can use spreadsheet functions. Spreadsheet functions are a set of standard built-in formulas used to simplify complex calculations. Quattro Pro offers more than 500 built-in spreadsheet functions. These spreadsheet functions cover a range of calculations, including database, financial, engineering, and statistical calculations. A common spreadsheet function is @SUM, which adds the cell values you reference. For example, typing @SUM(A1..A4,B1) is equivalent to typing +A1+A2+A3+A4+B1.

A listing of available functions can be found in Quattro Pro Functions Help, which is located in the reference information section of the Quattro Pro online Help.

You can enter spreadsheet functions in a cell. As you type a function, the most likely function and its syntax appear at the bottom right of the screen. The function's arguments will appear on the application bar.

Spreadsheet functions can also be used to create formulas. In a formula, the left parenthesis is red until you type the right parenthesis. Then, they both turn green.

For additional information, see "Rules for entering spreadsheet functions," "Entering arguments in functions," and "Working with date functions."

 How to


To enter a spreadsheet function in a cell

1	Select a cell.

2	Click Insert [image] Insert function.

3	Choose a category from the Function category list.

4	Choose a spreadsheet function from the Function list.

5	Click Next.

6	Type the arguments of the function in the relevant boxes; optional arguments appear within angled brackets (<>).

 Notes

•	All spreadsheet functions begin with the at sign (@). When typing a spreadsheet function, you can omit the @ if it is not the first item in the formula.

•	Enclose arguments in parentheses.

 Related topics


To create a formula using a spreadsheet function

1	Select a cell.

2	Click Insert [image] Insert function.

3	Choose a category from the Function category list.

4	Choose a spreadsheet function from the Function list.

5	Click Next.

6	In the Expression box, type the rest of the formula.

 Notes

•	The pane on the left shows a breakdown of the formula.

•	To identify a missing parenthesis or bracket, double-click the cell, and move the insertion point through the formula. When you reach an unmatched parenthesis or bracket, the character turns red.

 Related topics


Tracing errors in formulas

Tracing errors in formulas lets you locate the source of calculation errors. If you are looking at a formula cell, you can see all cells that provide data to that formula. It can also show all formulas that use the data from a particular cell.

You can locate a circular cell reference, which is a formula that relies upon its own result to calculate the formula. For example, placing the formula +A1+A2 in cell A1 produces a circular cell reference.

Tracing cell precedents lets you view all cells that provide data to or influence a formula cell. All first-level precedent cells are outlined in blue. A first-level precedent cell provides data directly to the formula being traced. Once you have identified the first-level precedent cells, you can find the cells that influence them and repeat the process until you find the cell causing the error.

You can also trace cell dependents. When you trace dependents of a cell, you see all formulas that use the data from the selected cell.

Finally, you can trace formula cell references using the Formula Composer dialog box.

For additional information about tracing errors see "Guidelines for solving errors in formulas."

 How to


To locate a circular cell reference

1	Click Format [image] Notebook properties.

2	Click the Recalc settings tab.

The circular cell reference displays to the right of the # of iterations box.

 Notes

•	If the Circular cell reference indicator button displays on the application bar, the notebook contains a circular cell reference.

•	Elaborate formulas are sometimes deliberately constructed to contain circular cell references, because the formulas require multiple evaluations to attain an acceptable degree of accuracy.

 Related topics


To trace cell precedents

1	Select a cell containing a formula.

2	Click Tools [image] Auditing [image] Show auditing toolbar.

3	Click the Trace precedents button to display the first level of precedents.

4	Continue to click the Trace precedents button until no more precedents display.

 Related topics


To trace cell dependents

1	Select a cell.

2	Click Tools [image] Auditing [image] Show auditing toolbar.

3	Click the Trace dependents button.

4	Continue to click the Trace dependents button until no more dependents display.

 Related topics


To trace formula cell references

1	Select a cell containing a formula.

2	Click the Formula Composer button.

3	Click the cell reference in the outline pane.

4	Click the Follow formula button on the Formula Composer toolbar.

 Tip

•	Click the Back button on the Formula Composer toolbar to return to the standard display.

 Related topics


Naming cells

Instead of referring to a cell by its coordinates, such as B10, you can assign it a name. Creating a cell name has several advantages. First, if you move the contents of a named cell, the name is still associated with the same data, regardless of the new coordinates. Second, referencing names in a formula makes the formula easier to understand. For example, +PRICE - COST is more intuitive than B15 - D8. As well, using names increases accuracy. If you mistype a name, Quattro Pro alerts you to the error. If you mistype coordinates, you operate on the wrong cells.

You can change the cells assigned to a name. You can also name cells using adjacent labels.

Quattro Pro can name cells automatically. You can create a two-column table that lists all of the named cells in a notebook with their corresponding coordinates. And, if you no longer want to identify a cell or block of cells by a name, you can delete that name.

For additional information about naming cells, see "Guidelines for naming cells."

 How to


To create a cell name

1	Select a cell.

2	Click Insert [image] Name [image] Name cells.

3	Type a unique name in the Name box.

4	Click Add.

 Note

•	Before inserting a name, check the labels you plan to use. If there are duplicate labels or labels that duplicate existing names, you will overwrite the previous assignments. Quattro Pro lists existing names in the list box on the left side of the toolbar directly above the spreadsheet window.

 Related topics


To change the cells assigned to a name

1	Click Insert [image] Name [image] Name cells.

2	Choose a name from the Name list.

3	Type the new coordinates in the Cell(s) box.

4	Click Add.

 Related topics


To name a cell from an adjacent label

1	Select a label.

2	Click Insert [image] Name [image] Name cells.

3	Click Labels.

4	In the Direction area, enable an option to indicate the position of the cell being named in relation to the selected label.

For example, if the cell you are naming is below the label, enable the Down option.

 Notes

•	Each label in the specified cells (up to 64 characters) is used as a name. Numeric values in the selection are ignored. Later changes to original labels do not affect the cell names.

•	Any leading or trailing spaces in a label are included in the name.

 Related topics


To name cells from labels automatically

1	Click Insert [image] Name [image] Name cells.

2	Click Generate.

3	In the Generate cell names dialog box, type the cells to name, including label cells, in the Cells box.

4	In the Create cell names area, enable any of the check boxes.

If you want to have the cells named at their intersections, enable Name cells at intersections. Each cell has an additional name created by combining the two sets of labels. Each name can have up to 64 characters.

 Notes

•	Each label in the specified cells (up to 64 characters) is used as a name. Numeric values in the selection are ignored. Later changes to original labels do not affect the cell names.

•	For additional information about automatically naming cells, see "Guidelines for naming cells."

 Related topics


To create a table of named cells

1	Click Insert [image] Name [image] Name cells.

2	Click Output.

3	In the Name table dialog box, type in the Cells box the top-left cell of the cells where you want the table to display.

 Notes

•	Make sure there is enough room for a two-column table, with one row for each name. Existing data in the cells used for the table is overwritten by the table.

•	A named cell table is not automatically updated. If you add, change, or delete cell names, you must re-create the table to reflect the changes.

 Related topics


To delete a cell name

1	Click Insert [image] Name [image] Name cells.

2	Choose a name from the Name list.

3	Click Delete.

 Note

•	Although clicking Delete deletes the cell name from memory, the notebook data is not affected. Formulas that reference the named cell change so that they refer to cell coordinates instead.

 Related topics


Reference: Working with formulas and functions

Rules of mathematics and syntax are applied when you enter or modify formulas and functions in spreadsheets. Using arguments, dates, and arrays in functions allow you to extend your calculations. As well, setting cell names and addresses simplifies entering formula and function expressions.

 How to


Setting cell addresses

When you create formulas that reference cells you can refer to the cells by their cell address. This address is the intersection of the column letter and the row number, such as A15 or B6. When referring to a cell on a different spreadsheet, first specify the name of the spreadsheet; for example, C:A15. You can also specify a block of cells in this way by creating a cell address range, such as A5..D16.

When you reference data in formulas, functions, or macros, you can refer to the cell by relative cell address, absolute cell address, or cell name.

Relative cell addresses

When you set a relative cell address, the formula calculates the data from cells relative to its current location in the spreadsheet. When you change the address of a cell that contains a formula, the formula calculates the address relative to its new location. For example, if you create a formula in cell A3 to add cells A1 and A2, and then you move the formula to cell D3, the formula adjusts to add cells D1 and D2.

By default, cell formulas calculate relative cell addresses.

Absolute cell addresses

When you set an absolute cell address in a formula, the formula always references the same cells regardless of their location on the spreadsheet. For example, if you create a formula in cell A3 to add cells A1 and A2, and then you move the formula to cell D3 on the same spreadsheet, the formula still calculates cells A1 and A2.

You can set an absolute address by typing a dollar sign before the part of the cell address you want to make absolute. For example,

•	typing $A$1 makes both coordinates of address A1 absolute

•	typing $A1 locks the address into column A, but lets the row coordinate change

•	typing A$1 locks the address into row 1, but lets the column coordinate change

•	typing $A:A$1 locks the address into sheet A and row 1, but lets the column coordinate change

In Edit mode, press F4 when a cell address is highlighted in the input line to make a cell absolute. Press F4 repeatedly to cycle through the eight absolute combinations.

Press F4	Cell reference
starting reference	B6
1x	$A:$B$6
2x	$A:B$6
3x	$A:$B6
4x	$A:B6
5x	$B$6
6x	B$6
7x	$B6
Entering cell addresses

An easier way to enter cell references in formulas, instead of typing them, is to point to them. Make sure the cursor is after an operator character, and click the cell you want to include in the formula. You can also point to cells by dragging them or using keyboard commands. To point to noncontiguous selections, select the first group of cells, hold down Ctrl, then select additional cells. When every selection you want to refer to or act up on is highlighted, complete the formula or command.

You can also type the cell address directly into the formula cell. Depending on the cell selection you want to name, you must type the selection in a specific way.

To specify	Type
Range of cells	Address of top-left cell, followed by one or two periods and the address of the bottom right cell
	Example: C3..D6 (refers to cells C3, D3, C4, D4, C5, D5, C6, and D6) F4.F11 (refers to cells F4 to F11)
Cells on another sheet	Sheet name and a colon, then the cell reference
	Example: B:B4
Cell in a different notebook	Filename in brackets, the sheet name, then the cell reference [SALES]C:B5
Named cells	Name
	Example: EXPENSES
Cells in different places	Separate each selection with a comma
	Example: A2..A5,B7,D5..E12
3-D selection	The sheet references first, followed by the cell coordinates
	Example: A..D:A2..B5 (refers to cells on sheets A, B, C, and D)
Note that you can enter the addresses of any two cells in opposite corners in any order. The coordinates are rewritten to list the top-left cell followed by the bottom-right cell. As well, if you rename a sheet, you can use the new name on its tab in the cell reference or the sheet letter. And, if you group sheets, you can refer to them by their group name instead of by their individual sheet names.

 Related topics


Operator precedence

The result of a formula depends on the order in which arithmetic operations are performed. Each operator has a precedence, and the formula performs the operations in order of precedence. Operations with equal precedence are performed from left to right. For example, multiplication has higher precedence than addition, therefore the equation +5 + 1 * 3 equals 8, not 18.

The following table lists operators and the precedence assigned to each. Operators with the highest precedence (7) are performed first.

Operator	Precedence
Parentheses ( )	7
Exponents (^)	7
Negative, positive (-, +)	6
Multiplication, division (*, /)	5
Subtraction, addition (-, +)	4
Greater than or equal (>=)	3
Less than or equal (<=)	3
Less than, greater than (<, >)	3
Equal, not equal (=, <>)	3
Logical NOT (#NOT#)	1
Logical AND (#AND#)	1
Logical OR (#OR#)	1
Text operator (&)	1
You can override operator precedence using parentheses. Enclose in parentheses the part of a formula to calculate first. When parentheses are nested inside other parentheses, the innermost part is calculated first.

Example 1	Example 2
+4 * 2 + 3 = 11	+4 * (2 + 3) = 20
(4 * 2) + (3 + 5) * 4 = 40	((4 * 2) + (3 + 5)) * 4 = 64
 Related topics


Rules for moving formulas and referenced cells

When moving formulas and referenced cells, you should be aware of the following rules:

•	If you move a formula without moving the cells it references, the references remain intact, regardless of whether they are absolute or relative.

•	If you move both a formula and the cells it references, the references do adjust. For example, if cell A2 contains the formula +A1+1, and you move A2 to B1, the formula still reads +A1+1. But if you move both A1 and A2, the formula reads +B1+1.

•	If you move a formula to another notebook without moving the cells it references, the two notebooks link so that the formula still references the cells in the original notebook. If you move the formula back to the first notebook, the links are removed.

•	If you move a cell without moving formulas that refer to it, formulas update to refer to the cell's new location, even if you specified the reference as absolute. For example, if you move A:B4 into A:B6 of a notebook named TAX, the formula's reference changes to [TAX]A:B6.

•	If you move a cell from within a range without moving the formulas that refer to the cell, the formulas no longer refer to the moved cell. However, if you move one of the coordinate cells (the upper-left and lower-right cells), the references to the cells expand or contract to reflect the new location. For example, if you define BILLS as cells B1..B7, and then move cell B7 to B12, BILLS changes to B1..B12.

•	If you move a coordinate cell into another notebook, references to the cell are not adjusted.

•	If you move an entire named or referenced selection of cells, the cell name or the reference in affected formulas is updated.

•	If you move data into a coordinate cell of a referenced area or into a single referenced cell, the formula containing the reference becomes invalid. References in formulas to the single cell or selection of cells are replaced with ERR, and cells that contain those formulas display ERR. If you name a selection of these cells, the coordinates in the cell names list display as ERR.

 Related topics


Rules for entering spreadsheet functions

Spreadsheet functions contain:

•	the name of the spreadsheet function (such as @SUM or @AVG)

•	arguments (the values, cells, or text strings on which operations are performed)

•	commas that separate multiple arguments

•	parentheses around the arguments

A spreadsheet function must follow these syntax rules:

•	A leading at sign (@), plus sign (+), or equal sign (=) must be typed at the beginning of the formula.

•	The @function can be typed in either uppercase or lowercase letters.

•	Multiple arguments must be separated with a semicolon or the argument separator specified by clicking Tools [image] Settings [image] International [image] Punctuation.

•	Arguments must be typed in the specified order.

•	Optional arguments must be typed within angle brackets, <>. If you specify an optional argument, you must also specify all preceding optional arguments.

•	A space must not be typed between the at sign (@) and the function name.

 Related topics


Entering arguments in functions

Arguments refer to the information required by a spreadsheet function to perform a calculation. Most spreadsheet functions need at least one argument. There are three types of arguments: numeric values, cell values, and string values.

Some spreadsheet functions accept a combination or choice of types for a single argument. For example, @SUM accepts cells in combination with numeric values:

@SUM(B10..C25,50) totals numeric entries in cells B10..C25 plus 50.

You can separate arguments with a semi-colon, or you can specify a setting for separating arguments in Tools [image] Settings [image] International [image] Punctuation. In the example above, a comma separates arguments. If the message "Not enough arguments" appears after entering a spreadsheet function, use a semi-colon between arguments.

Entering numeric arguments

A numeric value can be used as a spreadsheet function argument in any of these forms:

•	an actual value, for example @SIN(1.571)

•	the coordinates of a cell containing a numeric value, for example @SIN(B5)

•	the name of a cell containing a single numeric value, for example @INT(TOTAL)

•	a formula resulting in a numeric value, for example @INT(B4*10)

•	another @function resulting in a numeric value, for example @INT(@PI)

•	a combination of forms, for example @ABS(@INT(C4)+35-TOTAL)

Entering cell arguments

Cells can be used as spreadsheet function arguments in a number of ways:

•	the coordinates of cells, for example @SUM(A1..B3)

•	the address of a single cell, for example @SUM(B3)

•	a cell name, for example @SUM(JANUARY)

•	a combination of these in a list, for example, @SUM(JANUARY,C15..D25,F10)

Entering string arguments

A string value can be used as a spreadsheet function argument in the following ways:

•	an actual string, in double quotes, for example @PROPER("ACME Company")

•	the address of a cell containing a label, for example @PROPER(G13)

•	the name of a cell containing a label, for example @PROPER(COMPANY NAME)

•	a formula resulting in a string, for example @LOWER(+MONTH&"Sales")

•	another spreadsheet function resulting in a string, for example @LENGTH(@PROPER("ACME Industries"))

 Related topics


Working with date functions

Date functions that require an integer date value as the date argument accept a valid date string, such as '12/31/1991' or '31-Dec-1997'.

If you use arguments for date functions, Quattro Pro assumes the century based on the following year ranges:

Argument	Year range
00-99	1900-1999
100-199	2000-2099
The date functions @DATE, @LWKDAY, @MDAYS, @NWKDAY, and @YDAYS accept a standard year, such as 2001, in addition to the original year arguments of 0 (1900) and 199 (2099). For example:

@DATE (40,12,31) and @DATE (1940,12,31) both return 14976 (31-Dec-1940)

@DATE (140,12,31) and @DATE (2040,12,31) both return 51501 (31-Dec-2040)

 Related topics


Working with arrays

The spreadsheet function ARRAY and other features help you use data arrays, which are selections of data you work with as a group. Instead of entering several formulas, you can work with arrays and enter just one formula. Working with arrays also saves computer memory, although it can lengthen recalculation times. Array formulas can contain block arrays or array constants.

A block array is a selection of rows and columns. With block arrays, you can type one formula that enters results in many cells. An array constant is a group of numbers used as an argument in a formula that can produce one or many results.

Using block arrays in formulas

The array B2..D3 below contains data in three columns and two rows that can be worked with independently, or one selection.

To total columns, you could enter @SUM(B2..B3) in B4, then copy it to C4 and D4. To take advantage of the array, however, you could select B4 then type an array formula: @ARRAY(B2..D2+B3..D3).

The spreadsheet ARRAY(B2..D2+B3..D3) contains the same information as three @SUM formulas. The array directs Quattro Pro to add the values in each column and show the results in the formula cell and the two cells to the right. The number of columns and rows in the output array depend on the dimensions of the arrays in the array formula.

You can use any mathematical or logical operator in an array formula: +, -, *, /, ^, =, <>, <=, >=, <, >, #AND#, #OR#, and &.

As with other formulas, calculations are performed according to operator precedence: multiplication and division first, then addition and subtraction. To change the calculation order, use parentheses.

Formula syntax

To create a formula using block arrays, type a selection followed by an operator, followed by the next selection or value. For example,

@ARRAY(B2..D2-B3..D3)

@ARRAY(B2..D2*5)

The operator indicates the operation to perform on matching cells of each block or the relationship between them. For example, - (minus) means "subtract each cell of the second block from the equivalent cell of the first block." When the second formula above is calculated, it expands the 5 to a 1 X 3 array to match the first array. So, it calculates B2*5, C2*5, and D2*5, then enters three formulas.

When you are working with rows, array results appear in the ARRAY formula cell. For columns, the results appear beside the ARRAY formula cell. You can mix columns and rows. Block arrays can be contiguous or noncontiguous, but they must be 2-D.

You can enter more than two row or column blocks and use multiple operators. For example, the formula @ARRAY(B2..B4+C2..C4*D2..D4) means "multiply C2 by D2 and add B2, multiply C3 by D3 and add B3, then multiply C4 by D4 and add B4."

You can use cell names instead of references to specify arrays. If you later change the selection identified by the cell name, all ARRAY formulas containing the cell name automatically change to the new selection.

For example, you can make EXPENSES in the array @ARRAY(EXPENSES*5), the selection C2..E4. You can also type +B2..D2+B3..D3 in any of the above examples, to add ARRAY spreadsheet function and parentheses.

Using array constants in formulas

An array constant is a group of numbers used as an argument in a formula. You can use an array constant to provide values for a formula instead of typing the values in a notebook. The numbers in the array are enclosed in braces {} and separated by semicolons. For example, an array is used in the formula @SUM({3;4;5}*5). The formula expands to @SUM({3;4;5}*{5;5;5}) as it is calculated. The formula calculates 3 * 5 + 4 * 5 +5 * 5, and displays 60 as the total.

You can specify different rows in an array constant. To do this, separate rows with the pipe symbol (|). For example, the values below are indicated by the array constant {1;2;3;4|5;6;7;8}:

The array constant {5;6;7;8} specifies values in the second row above. The array constant {3|7} specifies values in the third column.

Working with arrays as functions and macro arguments

You can use block arrays and array constants as arguments for spreadsheet functions other than ARRAY. Any spreadsheet function that accepts block arguments can handle array operations, although different types of spreadsheet functions handle them differently.

@ABS, @SQRT and many other spreadsheet functions normally take one argument, which is a single value or an expression that results in a single value, not a block. If you enter a block or array constant for these spreadsheet functions, the spreadsheet function statement is converted into an argument for ARRAY, and a value displays for each row or column of the array.

Statistical functions

@SUM, @AVG, and other statistical spreadsheet functions always return a single value, no matter how large an array you specify. For example, @SUM(C4..C8*D4..D8) means "multiply each value in C4..C8 by the equivalent value in D4..D8 and add the results."

Database functions

The database functions, such as @DSUM, take three arguments: a database block, the column to operate on, and a search criteria block. The first and third arguments must be blocks, not array constants. The second argument can be an array. In this case, the spreadsheet function is calculated once for each value in the array.

 Related topics


Guidelines for solving errors in formulas

The following guidelines cover some common causes of errors:

•	If ERR displays in a cell instead of formula results, the formula contains an erroneous calculation. ERR also displays when data is missing or a cell address is incorrect.

•	If a function displays ERR, it may contain an unmatched parenthesis. To identify a missing parenthesis or bracket, double-click the cell, and move the cursor through the formula. When you reach an unmatched parenthesis or bracket, the character turns red.

•	If a cell does not calculate a formula, Quattro Pro may be interpreting the formula as a label. For example, Quattro Pro recognizes phone numbers and dates as labels and does not try to calculate them. When you enter a formula that might be interpreted as a label, type a plus sign (+) before the formula. For example, the following would be interpreted as formulas:

+202-555-3670

+12/12/94

•	If NA displays in a cell, some of the necessary information is not available. This could occur, for example, when a formula is linked to another source and the notebook has not been updated.

 Related topics


Guidelines for naming cells

Setting cell names and addresses simplifies entering formula and function expressions. When naming cells in Quattro Pro, the following guidelines should be considered.

Cell naming syntax

•	Names can be up to 63 characters long.

•	You can use any keyboard characters (A to Z, 0 to 9, spaces, punctuation marks, and some special characters such as %). Accented characters such as Â, or Ä, are also allowed if they are available on your keyboard.

•	Uppercase and lowercase letters are equivalent; for example, INCOME is treated the same as income. Names always appear in uppercase letters in formulas.

•	Names cannot be the same as a valid cell address. For example, you can't name a cell E30, or CAT3.

•	Names can define ranges of cells which overlap each other. For example, the following names are acceptable:

•	HOTEL	B3..B7

•	TRANS	C3..C7

•	MEALS	D3..D7

•	TOTAL	B3..D7

•	Names cannot contain only numeric characters. For example, 1234 is not a valid name.

Automatic cell naming

If you select more than one location in the Generate cell names dialog box, a set of names is created for each set of labels. For example, if you select A1..C4 in the next figure and enable the first two check boxes in the Create cell names area, five names are created: Jan., B2..B4; Feb., C2..C4; Housing, B2..C2; Utilities, B3..C3; and Food, B4..C4.

If you enable Name cells at intersections, each cell has an additional name created by combining the two sets of labels. Each name can have up to 64 characters. The following is a table of cell names for this example:

Cell	Name
B2	JAN._HOUSING
B3	JAN._UTILITIES
B4	JAN._FOOD
C2	FEB._HOUSING
C3	FEB._UTILITIES
C4	FEB._FOOD
 Related topics


Getting started

Before beginning your project, you should familiarize yourself with the concepts and desktop components that will help you create spreadsheet-based documents. Quattro Pro features many tools which provide you with tools that give you quick access to your data to increase your efficiency. You can also customize your workspace and tailor your toolbars to present a familiar working environment each time you launch your application.

In this section, you'll learn about

•	components of a notebook

•	working with Quattro Pro Experts

•	working with toolbars

•	working with the application bar

•	navigating in spreadsheets and notebooks

•	selecting cells, rows, and columns

•	inserting and deleting cells, rows, and columns

•	adding, deleting, moving, and copying spreadsheets

•	naming spreadsheets

•	specifying Quattro Pro settings

•	displaying, arranging, resizing, and hiding windows

•	zooming data and hiding and displaying screen components

•	customizing menus

•	customizing keyboards

•	saving a notebook group

•	setting multiple workspaces

•	saving and closing notebooks

For more information about getting started, see "Reference: Getting started."


Components of a notebook

Notebooks, spreadsheets, and their associated elements are the core of the Quattro Pro application. Notebooks provide a way to organize many spreadsheets within the same file. There are 18,000 spreadsheets in a notebook. Each spreadsheet consists of approximately 1,000,000 rows and 18,000 columns.

 How to


Outline of notebook components

The following information describes the basic components of a Quattro Pro notebook.

Spreadsheets

A spreadsheet is an electronic ledger. It contains columns and rows in which you enter, arrange, calculate, and analyze data. In a spreadsheet, you can arrange and categorize data, perform simple math operations, and apply complex formulas. Once you enter your data in a spreadsheet, you can create a chart, add maps and graphics, or produce a report. The spreadsheet you see when Quattro Pro opens is one of thousands available in each notebook.

Objects sheet

The last sheet of every notebook is the Objects sheet. The Objects sheet displays an icon for every chart in the notebook. This sheet also displays icons for custom dialog boxes you build. You can copy, rename, and print items in the Objects sheet. The Objects sheet property bar has buttons for creating, editing, and displaying charts and for building custom dialog boxes.

Project templates

Project templates let you create a new notebook based on a pre-designed project. Many of the Quattro Pro project templates provide a basic format and structure for common spreadsheets and data entry forms. You can also create your own project templates.

Values

A value is a number, date, formula, or the result of a formula. Quattro Pro automatically determines whether data is a value or a label. As you type your data in a cell, the READY indicator on the application bar changes to LABEL or VALUE, depending on the type of data you enter.

Labels

Labels contain alphanumeric data, such as titles, phone numbers, or addresses. Quattro Pro interprets and formats labels differently than it does values. Values are calculable; labels are not.

Formulas

Formulas are mathematical equations. Formulas usually refer to numbers in other cells in order to calculate a value, such as the difference between the values in two cells or the total of values in a column. You can use mathematical functions and numbers in formulas.

Spreadsheet functions

Spreadsheet functions are built-in formulas that automate many of the calculations you perform in a spreadsheet. For example, @AMAINT is a spreadsheet function that calculates the accumulated interest paid on a loan after a specified number of payments. All spreadsheet functions are preceded by an @ sign.

Macros

Macros are computer scripts that automate complex or repetitive command sequences. A macro is a sequence of commands that Quattro Pro runs automatically. Macros can perform keystrokes, mouse actions, and menu commands. You can use macros to automate tasks (such as printing a standard report), enter frequently used labels with a keystroke, or build complete applications to simplify Quattro Pro tasks for other users.

 Related topics


Working with Quattro Pro Experts

Quattro Pro Experts guide you step by step through many spreadsheet tasks. You can access Quattro Pro Experts from a toolbar or from a menu. The following Experts are available:

•	PerfectExpert [image] helps you quickly perform many common Quattro Pro tasks

•	Analysis Expert [image] helps you make many analysis calculations, such as advanced regression, correlation, covariance, exponential smoothing, F-test, moving average, sampling, T-test, and Z-test

•	Budget Expert [image] guides you in creating five different budget templates for both home and business use

•	Consolidate Expert [image] lets you combine cells using statistical operators (SUM, AVG, COUNT, MIN, MAX, STD, STDS, VAR, VARS), after which you can sort the combined data

•	External Data Expert [image] lets you easily import data from a database, such as a Paradox or dBASE database. It also supports Query By Example (QBE) and Open Database Connectivity (ODBC).

•	Map Expert [image] builds a map from selected cells of data

•	Scenario Expert [image] lets you create and display groups of scenarios (data conditions and results) based on models in your notebook.

•	What-If Expert [image] lets you create tables that show the effect of changing one or two variable cells referenced in a formula

 How to


To access an Expert from a toolbar

1	Right-click a toolbar, and click Experts and numeric tools.

2	From the Experts and numeric tools toolbar, click the Expert you wish to use.

 Tip

•	You can point to a toolbar button to see a description of a particular Expert.

 Related topics


To access an Expert from a menu

•	Follow the menu path in the table below to access a particular Expert.

To use	Click
Analysis Expert	Tools [image] Numeric tools [image] Analysis tools
Budget Expert	Tools [image] Numeric tools [image] Budget
Chart Expert	Insert [image] Chart
Consolidate Expert	Tools [image] Consolidate [image] New
Database Expert	Insert [image] External data [image] Expert
Map Expert	Insert [image] Graphics [image] Map
Scenario Expert	Tools [image] Scenario [image] New
What-If Expert	Tools [image] Numeric tools [image] What-If tables
 Related topics


Working with toolbars

Toolbars give you quick access to the features you frequently use. You can create your own toolbars from a wide assortment of toolbar buttons. Quattro Pro creates a personal toolbar to which you can drag or copy toolbar buttons.

You can edit a toolbar to display the buttons you want, and in the order you want them. Because of the enhanced toolbar functionality in Quattro Pro, you cannot use toolbars that you created in earlier versions of Quattro Pro. These toolbars must be re-created. However, you can import toolbars that other people have created in Quattro Pro by using the workspace feature.

You can display toolbars horizontally or vertically around the Quattro Pro window, or display a floating toolbar within the spreadsheet window. You can hide any toolbar you don't want displayed. The following standard toolbars come with Quattro Pro:

•	Notebook [image] provides tools for entering and editing data

•	Selection formatting [image] provides tools for manipulating the current selection

•	Data manipulation [image] provides tools for working with notebook cells and selections

•	Drawing tools [image] provides tools for drawing or inserting objects in a graphics window, and for arranging objects on a layer on top of the notebook

•	Outlining tools [image] provides tools for grouping data in collapsible and expandable sets of information

•	Auditing tools [image] provides tools for tracing dependent cells, precedents, and even errors in large, complex notebooks

•	Review [image] provides tools for reviewing shared notebooks

•	Experts and numeric tools [image] provides tools for quickly creating maps, charts, and budgets, and for performing computations

•	CrossTab report [image] provides tools for manipulating cross-tab reports

•	Visual Basic [image] launches the Visual Basic Editor and Visual Basic Design Mode

You can reposition a toolbar by dragging it to the top, bottom, left, or right edge of the application window. If you drag the toolbar away from all edges of the application window, it becomes a floating toolbar. You can also rename or delete a toolbar you have created. If you make changes you no longer want, you can reset the toolbar to its default settings.

You can change the graphic or text of a toolbar button, or have Quattro Pro display text under all toolbar buttons.

Quattro Pro lets you create a button that will launch a Windows application or document. You can also create a button that executes either a Quattro Pro or PerfectScript macro.

 How to


To create a toolbar

1	Click Tools [image] Customize.

2	Open the Customization menu.

3	Click Toolbar.

4	Click New.

5	Type a name for the toolbar.

6	Click Commands.

7	Choose the commands you want from the Commands list.

Each command appears under the appropriate menu name.

8	Drag the commands from the list to the toolbar.

 Related topics


To edit a toolbar

1	Click Tools [image] Customize.

2	Open the Customization menu.

3	Click Toolbar.

4	Enable the check box beside the toolbar you want to customize.

5	Click Commands.

6	Choose the command you want from the Commands list.

Each command appears under the appropriate menu name.

7	Drag the command to the desired location on the toolbar.

You can also
Rearrange toolbar buttons	Click Commands, and drag the toolbar buttons to their new locations
Resize toolbar buttons	Click Toolbar, and change the Button and Border settings
Delete toolbar buttons	Click Commands, and drag the toolbar buttons off the toolbar
Add a separator between toolbar buttons	Click Commands, select User menus from the list box, and drag the separator to a toolbar
 Tip

•	If you want to customize a context menu, select Context menu from the toolbar list.

 Related topics


To display a toolbar

1	Right-click any toolbar.

2	Click the toolbar you want to display.

 Related topics


To move a toolbar

1	Point to the two vertical gray lines at the left of a toolbar.

2	Drag the toolbar to a new position.

 Tip

•	To have a toolbar title display on a floating toolbar, enable the Show title when toolbar is floating check box in the toolbar customization dialog box.

 Related topics


To rename a toolbar

1	Click Tools [image] Customize.

2	Open the Customization menu.

3	Click Toolbar.

4	Select a toolbar.

5	Press F2.

6	Type a new name.

 Note

•	You cannot rename system-defined toolbars.

 Related topics


To delete a toolbar

1	Click Tools [image] Customize.

2	Open the Customization menu.

3	Click Toolbar.

4	Select a toolbar.

5	Click Delete.

 Note

•	You cannot delete system-defined toolbars.

 Related topics


To reset a toolbar

1	Click Tools [image] Customize.

2	Open the Customization menu.

3	Click Toolbar.

4	Select a toolbar.

5	Click Reset.

 Note

•	You can only reset a system-defined toolbar.

 Related topics


To display a graphic or text on a toolbar button

1	Right-click a button on a toolbar, and click Customize [image] Toolbar item.

2	Enable one of the following display options:

•	Image only

•	Caption only

•	Caption below image

•	Caption to right of image

 Tip

•	You can revert the toolbar button to its original display setting by right-clicking the button, and clicking Customize [image] Toolbar item [image] Default.

 Related topics


To display text under all toolbar buttons

•	Right-click a button on a toolbar, and click Customize [image] Notebook toolbar [image] Caption below image.

 Related topics


To add a toolbar button that launches an application or document

1	Click Tools [image] Customize.

2	Open the Customization menu.

3	Click Commands, and choose Programs from the list box.

4	Click the Program command category tab.

5	Click Add.

6	In the Target list box, choose the file or application for which you want to create a button.

7	In the Parameters list box, specify any command line options.

8	In the Working folder list box, specify the working directory.

Leave the Working folder list box blank if you want to use the Quattro Pro startup folder.

9	Click Apply, and drag the new button to a toolbar.

 Tips

•	You can change the appearance and associated tooltip for the new button by clicking the Appearance and General tabs.

•	You can delete a toolbar button by selecting the command from the list and clicking Remove.

 Related topics


To add a toolbar button that plays a macro

1	Click Tools [image] Customize.

2	Open the Customization menu.

3	Click Commands, and choose Macros from the list box.

4	Click the Macro command category tab.

5	Click Add.

6	Click one of the following buttons:

•	Quattro Pro macro, and type the macro command in the Enter macro box.

•	PerfectScript macro, and specify the macro file (.wcm).

7	Click Apply, and drag the new button to a toolbar.

 Note

•	For more information about macros and toolbar buttons, see "To attach a macro to a toolbar button."

 Tips

•	You can change the appearance and associated tooltip for the new button by clicking the Appearance and General tabs.

•	You can delete a toolbar button by selecting the command from the list and clicking Remove.

 Related topics


Working with the application bar

The application bar displays mode and status indicators. For example, if you press Caps lock, the application bar display shows that Caps lock is on. You can customize the application bar to record and maintain your personal preferences.

The application bar is usually located at the bottom of the Quattro Pro desktop. However, you can change the position of the application bar. You can also change the height of the application bar.

The QuickCell feature is also displayed on the application bar. With QuickCell, you can view a selected cell on the application bar to see its updated value as you change other cells elsewhere in the spreadsheet.

 How to


To customize the application bar

1	Right-click the application bar, and click Customize [image] Application bar [image] Add new command.

2	Select View from the Commands list box.

3	Select a command from the list.

4	Drag the command to the desired position on the application bar.

You can also
Reset the application bar to its original state	Right-click the application bar, and click Customize [image] Application bar [image] Reset to default
Add spaces to the application bar	Right-click the application bar where you want to place a separator, and click Customize [image] Application bar [image] Add separator
 Tip

•	You can move commands and spaces in the application bar without opening the Customize dialog box by holding down Alt as you drag.

 Related topics


To change the position of the application bar

1	Right-click the application bar, and click Customize [image] Application bar [image] Position.

2	Click Top or Bottom.

 Related topics


To change the height of the application bar

1	Right-click the application bar, and click Customize [image] Application bar [image] Size.

2	Click One line or Two lines.

 Tip

•	You can also change the height of the application bar by dragging its border.

 Related topics


To use the QuickCell feature

1	Click a cell on the spreadsheet.

2	On the application bar, click QuickCell.

You can also
Clear the QuickCell value	Click a blank cell on the spreadsheet, and click QuickCell
Disable QuickCell	Right-click the application bar, click Customize [image] Application bar [image] Add new command, and drag the QuickCell button from the application bar to the spreadsheet window
 Related topics


Navigating in spreadsheets and notebooks

You can navigate columns and rows on a spreadsheet using the arrow keys, the Enter key, and the Tab key. You can also automatically scroll through a spreadsheet using the AutoScroll tool. As well, you can quickly navigate to the Objects sheet, and cycle through open notebooks.

Menu and dialog box options can be accessed using the keyboard. For a complete list of keyboard shortcuts, see Quattro Pro keyboard shortcuts in the reference information section of the Quattro Pro online help.

Finally, you can go directly to specific cells or data types using the Go To and Browse By features.

 How to


To navigate in a spreadsheet

•	Press the relevant key, as outlined in the table below.

To	Do the following
Move down columns after entering data	Press Enter or the Down arrow
Move up columns after entering data	Press the Up arrow
Move across rows after entering data	Press the Left arrow or Right arrow
 Note

•	The Enter key can be used to move the selector in a direction other than down. For more information see "To set the selector to move when you press Enter."

 Tip

•	You can also move across rows by pressing the Tab key.

 Related topics


To automatically scroll through a spreadsheet

1	On the notebook toolbar, click AutoScroll.

The cursor changes to the AutoScroll arrow.

2	Move the AutoScroll arrow in the direction you want to scroll.

 Tips

•	The scrolling speed increases as you move the arrow farther away from the AutoScroll tool.

•	You can disable AutoScroll by clicking anywhere on the spreadsheet.

 Related topics


To go to the Objects sheet

•	Click the Quick tab button at the bottom left of the notebook window.

 Tip

•	To return to the original spreadsheet, click the Quick tab button again.

 Related topics


To cycle through open notebooks

•	On the application bar, click the button that displays the notebook's name.

 Tips

•	You can also move through open notebooks by pressing Shift + F6 to cycle forward or Ctrl + F6 to cycle backwards.

•	If the displayed notebook title begins with a directory path, you can click Tools [image] Settings [image] File options, and disable the Enable full path titles check box. This will allow you to display notebook titles without the full directory path.

 Related topics


To access menu options using the keyboard

1	Press and hold down the Alt key.

2	Type the underlined letter for the menu you want to open.

3	Use the arrow keys to move from menu to menu, and from option to option.

4	Press Enter to choose a highlighted option.

 Note

•	For a list of keyboard shortcuts, see Quattro Pro keyboard shortcuts in the reference information section of the Quattro Pro online help.

 Tip

•	You can press the Esc key to return to the spreadsheet without making a menu selection.

 Related topics


To access dialog box options using the keyboard

•	Press the relevant key combination as outlined in the table below.

To	Do the following
Select options	Hold down Alt and type the underlined letter for the option you want
Move from option to option	Press Tab
Enable/disable buttons and check boxes	Press the Spacebar
Select text boxes	Press Tab, and type information into the boxes
Select pop-up lists	Press Tab, and press the Spacebar to open the lists
Select buttons	Press Tab, and press Enter to activate the buttons
 Note

•	For a list of keyboard shortcuts, see Quattro Pro keyboard shortcuts in the reference information section of the Quattro Pro online help.

 Related topics


To go to a specific cell in a notebook

1	Click Edit [image] Go to.

2	Type the cell address in the Reference box.

If the cell is on another spreadsheet, include the spreadsheet name in the address. For example, to move to cell Z36 on spreadsheet D, type D:Z36. If the cell is in another notebook, add the notebook prefix, for example, [Budget]D:Z36.

You can also
Go to a named cell	Choose the cell or group name from the Names box
Go to a named spreadsheet in the current notebook	Choose the spreadsheet name from the Sheets box
Go to the most recently edited cells	Choose a cell location from the Last edited box
Go to a cell type	Choose a cell type from the Other box
 Related topics


To browse to specific data in a notebook

1	Right-click the Browse By button in the lower-right corner of the spreadsheet.

2	Choose a data type.

 Related topics


Selecting cells, rows, and columns

You can select cells individually or in rows, columns, blocks, or 3-D blocks. When you select a cell, a black-bordered rectangle displays to indicate the active cell. This rectangle is called the selector. You can set the selector to move when you press the Enter key.

You can select noncontiguous cells, allowing you to write formulas that refer to various selections in different locations. You can also select a 3-D block of cells, which is a group of cells selected on more than one spreadsheet. For example, A2..B5 on sheets A through D is a 3-D selection. The syntax for 3-D selections can also be changed to suit your specific needs.

When you need to enter cell references in dialog boxes, it is usually easier to select the cells rather than type the entire cell address. Quattro Pro lets you use the Range picker to easily select cells.

SpeedSelect lets you quickly select an entire block of cells. As well, you can use the SpeedSelect buttons to quickly move to each corner of the block.

You can select entire rows, columns, and spreadsheets. You can also select multiple spreadsheets.

You can lock specific rows and columns of a spreadsheet so that their titles remain on the screen as you scroll. A blue line divides the locked area and the notebook data. Locked titles do not affect printing. You can also repeat column titles on each spreadsheet of a printed notebook.

Finally, you can repeat titles on each spreadsheet of a printed notebook.

 How to


To set the selector to move when you press Enter

1	Click Tools [image] Settings.

2	Click General.

3	Disable the Compatibility keys check box.

4	Enable the Move cell selector/enter key check box.

5	From the list box, choose Down, Up, Left, or Right depending on the direction you want the selector to move when you press Enter.

 Related topics


To select noncontiguous cells

1	Select the first group of cells.

2	Hold down Ctrl, and select additional cells.

 Note

•	If you want to type references to noncontiguous selections in a formula, separate each selection with a comma, as shown in this example: A2..A5,B7,D5..E12.

 Related topics


To select a 3-D block of cells

1	Select the cells on the first spreadsheet.

2	Hold down Shift and click the tab for the last spreadsheet in the series.

A black line appears under the tabs; the same cells are now selected on all the sheets where the black line appears.

 Notes

•	The cells remain selected only until you click elsewhere in the notebook.

•	If you want to type a reference to a 3-D block, include the spreadsheet references first, followed by the cell coordinates.

 Related topics


To change 3-D spreadsheet range syntax

1	Click Tools [image] Settings.

2	Click Compatibility.

3	In the 3-D syntax area, click one of the following options:

•	A..B:A1..B2 [image] expresses spreadsheet references first, followed by a colon and the cell coordinates. This syntax makes group references more concise.

•	A:A1..B:B2 [image] refers to each corner of the 3-D selection with the spreadsheet reference included

 Note

•	When you click a new cell, all existing 3-D references in formulas in open notebooks switch to the new syntax.

 Related topics


To select cells from a dialog box

1	Click the Range picker.

2	Select the cells you want to appear in the edit field of the dialog box.

3	Maximize the dialog box.

 Tip

•	You can also select cells by double-clicking the contents of the edit field.

 Related topics


To quickly select data on a spreadsheet

1	Select one cell within a block of cells.

2	Right-click a toolbar, and click Data manipulation.

3	On the Data manipulation toolbar, click Select table.

All the cells are selected.

 Related topics


To quickly move to a corner of a block of cells

1	Select one cell within a block of cells.

2	Right-click a toolbar, and click Data manipulation.

3	Click one of the following navigation tools:

•	Top left of table button

•	Top right of table button

•	Bottom left of table button

•	Bottom right of table button

 Related topics


To select a row or column

•	Select the row or column heading.

 Related topics


To select multiple spreadsheets

1	Click the tab of the first spreadsheet to select.

2	Hold down Shift while you click the last spreadsheet tab you want included in the selection.

A black line appears under the tabs.

 Related topics


To lock titles on a spreadsheet

1	Select the top-left cell of the spreadsheet area you want to remain scrollable.

2	Click View [image] Locked titles.

A blue line divides the locked area and the notebook data.

 Note

•	The Locked titles option is only available in Draft view.

 Tips

•	You can display only row titles or only column titles as locked titles by selecting the row or column below or to the right of the last one to be displayed.

•	To unlock titles, click View [image] Locked titles again.

 Related topics


To repeat column titles on each spreadsheet of a printed notebook

1	Click File [image] Page setup.

2	Click the Options tab.

3	Type the location of the column title in the Top heading box.

 Tip

•	You can also repeat row titles by typing the location of the row title in the Left heading box.

 Related topics


Inserting and deleting cells, rows, and columns

You can insert cells, rows, or columns anywhere in a spreadsheet. When you insert an item, existing data is pushed down, to the right, or to the back of the notebook to make room for the new item.

You can also copy and insert data and cells. When you copy and insert data and cells, Quattro Pro inserts the correct number of cells for the copied data and pastes the data in the spreadsheet. For more information about copying cells, see "Moving cells, rows, and columns."

When data is no longer useful, you can easily delete cells, rows, columns, or multiple rows and columns.

You can prevent other users from adding rows and columns to a spreadsheet by entering data in the last cell of the spreadsheet. Since this cell can't be pushed down or to the right, no extra cells can be added to the spreadsheet.

 How to


To insert a cell

1	Select a cell in the location where you want to insert a new cell.

2	Click Insert [image] Insert cells.

3	Enable the Partial option in the Span area.

4	Enable one of the following options in the Dimension area:

•	Rows [image] the selected cell will shift down and out of the way

•	Columns [image] the selected cell will shift to the right

•	Sheets [image] the selected cell will shift to the next spreadsheet

 Note

•	You can also insert the correct number of cells for data that you copy. For more information, see "To copy and insert data and cells

 Tip

•	You can also insert multiple cells. Make sure the upper-left corner of the cells you select contains the first cell entry you want shifted right, down, or back. The cells you select should be the same size as the number of cells you want to insert.

 Related topics


To insert a row

1	Select the row heading just below where you want the row inserted.

2	Click Insert [image] Insert row.

 Notes

•	When you insert a row within the boundaries of a named area or a cell referenced by a formula, the cell references expand to include the new row.

•	You can also insert the correct number of cells for a row of data that you copy. For more information, see "To copy and insert data and cells."

 Tip

•	You can insert multiple rows by selecting multiple row headings, and clicking Insert [image] Insert row.

 Related topics


To insert a column

1	Select the column heading to the right of where you want the column inserted.

2	Click Insert [image] Insert column.

 Notes

•	When you insert a column within the boundaries of a named area or a cell referenced by a formula, the cell references expand to include the new column.

•	You can also insert the correct number of cells for a column of data that you copy. For more information, see "To copy and insert data and cells."

 Tip

•	You can insert multiple columns by selecting multiple columns headings, then clicking Insert [image] Insert column.

 Related topics


To copy and insert data and cells

1	Select the row, column, or block of cells that contains the data you want to copy.

2	Click Edit [image] Copy.

3	Select the upper left-most cell where you want to insert the copied data and cells.

4	Right-click, and click QuickPaste.

5	In the Dimension area, enable one of the following options:

•	Rows [image] to shift cells down and out of the way

•	Columns [image] to shift cells to the right

6	In the Span area, enable one of the following options:

•	Entire [image] to insert an entire row or column

•	Span [image] to insert the required cells in a row or column

 Related topics


To delete a cell

1	Select the cell you want to delete.

2	Click Edit [image] Delete cells.

3	Enable the Partial option in the Span area.

4	Enable one of the following options in the Dimension area:

•	Rows [image] the cell below the selected cell will shift up

•	Columns [image] the cell to the right of the selected cell will shift to the left

•	Sheets [image] the corresponding cell on the next spreadsheet will shift to the current spreadsheet

 Tip

•	You can also delete multiple cells by first selecting a block of cells.

 Related topics


To delete a row or a column

1	Select the row or column heading.

2	Click Edit [image] Delete cells.

 Tip

•	You can delete multiple rows or columns by selecting multiple headings, and clicking Edit [image] Delete cells.

 Related topics


To restrict the addition of rows and columns

1	Press End, and press the Down arrow.

2	Press End, and press the Right arrow.

The cursor is at the last cell in the spreadsheet.

3	Type any label or value.

4	Press Home to get back to the first cell in the spreadsheet.

When you try to add a row or column, an out of boundary message displays.

 Note

•	If the spreadsheet contains data, pressing End and then the Down arrow and Right arrow keys moves the cursor to the last cell of the block. Keep pressing this combination to move to the last cell in the spreadsheet.

 Related topics


Adding, deleting, moving, and copying spreadsheets

You can add or delete single or multiple spreadsheets to or from your notebook. You can move sheets within a notebook or between notebooks to reorder them, using the mouse to drag the spreadsheet tab to another location. In the same way, you can also copy spreadsheets within a notebook.

 How to


To insert a spreadsheet

1	Click the tab of the spreadsheet you want to follow the new spreadsheet.

2	Click Insert [image] Insert sheet.

 Related topics


To insert multiple spreadsheets

1	Click Insert [image] Insert cells.

2	Enable the Sheets option in the Dimension area.

3	Enable the Entire option in the Span area.

4	Type a 3-D selection in the Cells field.

For example, to insert three sheets before spreadsheet B, enter B:A3..D:A3 (it does not matter which cell you reference).

 Related topics


To delete a spreadsheet

1	Click a spreadsheet tab.

2	Click Edit [image] Delete cells.

3	Enable the Sheets option.

4	Enable the Entire option.

 Tip

•	You can also delete a spreadsheet by right-clicking a spreadsheet tab, and clicking Delete sheet.

 Related topics


To delete multiple spreadsheets

1	Click the first spreadsheet tab.

2	Hold down Shift while you click the last spreadsheet tab to delete.

A black line appears under the tabs.

3	Click Edit [image] Delete cells.

4	Enable the Sheets option.

5	Enable the Entire option.

 Related topics


To move a spreadsheet

1	Click the tab of the spreadsheet you want to move.

2	Drag the spreadsheet tab in any direction until a sheet icon appears.

3	Move the sheet icon by dragging right or left along the row of tabs.

4	Release the mouse button when the sheet icon is where you want to place the spreadsheet.

 Note

•	You can also move a spreadsheet by clicking Edit [image] Move Sheets, and specifying the sheets to move.

 Related topics


To copy a spreadsheet

1	Hold down Ctrl and click the tab of the spreadsheet you want to copy.

2	Drag the spreadsheet tab in any direction until a sheet icon appears.

3	Move the sheet icon by dragging right or left along the row of tabs.

4	Release the mouse button when the sheet icon is where you want to place the spreadsheet.

 Tip

•	You can also copy a spreadsheet by clicking Edit [image] Select all, and then clicking Edit [image] Copy.

 Related topics


Naming spreadsheets

Each spreadsheet in a notebook has a tab at the bottom. This tab displays the name of the spreadsheet. Spreadsheets are initially named with letters of the alphabet in sequence, from A to Z, continuing from AA to AZ, up to ZZZ. You can assign a descriptive name to a spreadsheet using up to 64 characters (letters and numbers).

You can also change the spreadsheet name to reflect the naming conventions used by applications such as Microsoft Excel.

 How to


To rename a spreadsheet

1	Click Format [image] Sheet properties.

2	Click the Name tab.

3	Type a descriptive name.

 Notes

•	The Objects sheet (the last sheet in the notebook) cannot be renamed.

•	When you rename a spreadsheet, formulas that refer to the renamed spreadsheet adjust to use the new name.

 Tips

•	To reassign the original name to a spreadsheet, click Reset.

•	You can also name a spreadsheet by double-clicking its tab.

 Related topics


To rename a spreadsheet using Microsoft Excel conventions

1	Click Tools [image] Settings.

2	Click Compatibility.

3	Enable the Display as numbers check box.

 Note

•	To change spreadsheet tabs back to letters, disable the Display as numbers check box.

 Related topics


Specifying Quattro Pro settings

Application settings affect the overall functioning of Quattro Pro. Changes you make to these settings remain in effect until you change them again, even after you exit and restart Quattro Pro. Property settings allow you to see at a glance all changes that can be made to individual items in the notebook.

You can view statistical information about a Quattro Pro notebook. This includes the filename, directory path, date it was created, date it was last saved and by whom, and the revision number.

The notebook summary feature lets you record information, such as a file's title, subject, author, and keywords. You can also record comments pertaining to the file. Summary information is useful when searching for a file using QuickFinder. If you publish a notebook to the Internet, the summary information is transferred to the corresponding fields in your Web document.

You can create or edit notebooks in a format compatible with other programs by changing Quattro Pro compatibility options. Changes can be made to the default file save and file open types, as well as to notebook sizes. These changes become the program's default settings.

You can change international settings for currency and punctuation from within Quattro Pro. You can also change date, and time formats in individual cells. In addition, you can convert LICS characters.

Finally, the Quattro Pro language option allows you to have your interface display in the language you select from a list of languages. You must have another language version installed to be able to change the interface language.

 How to


To change application settings

•	Click Tools [image] Settings.

 Related topics


To change the properties of an item

•	You can change the properties of an item by clicking the following menu items:

Menu item	Properties
Format [image] Selection properties	Active cell properties
Format [image] Sheet properties	Active sheet properties
Format [image] Notebook properties	Active notebook properties
 Tip

•	You can also change properties by right-clicking an item, and selecting Selection properties.

 Related topics


To view statistics on a notebook

1	Click File [image] Properties.

2	Click the Statistics tab.

 Tip

•	You can also access the Statistics and Summary tabs by clicking Format [image] Notebook properties.

 Related topics


To record summary information about a notebook

1	Click File [image] Properties.

2	Click the Summary tab.

3	Record the appropriate information in any of the following boxes:

•	Title

•	Subject

•	Author

•	Keywords

•	Comments

 Tip

•	You can also access the Statistics and Summary tabs by clicking Format [image] Notebook properties.

 Related topics


To change compatibility options

1	Click Tools [image] Settings.

2	Click Compatibility.

 Related topics


To change the default file save type

1	Click Tools [image] Settings.

2	Click Compatibility.

3	Choose a file extension from the Default file type list.

 Related topics


To change the default file open type

1	Click Tools [image] Settings.

2	Click Compatibility.

3	Choose a file extension from the Default open file types list.

 Related topics


To change the notebook size

1	Click Tools [image] Settings.

2	Click Compatibility.

3	Type the number of sheets you want in the Sheets box.

4	Type the number of columns you want in the Columns box.

5	Type the number of rows you want in the Rows box.

 Note

•	You can also set the syntax for 3-D blocks. For more information, see "To change 3-D spreadsheet range syntax."

 Related topics


To change the currency symbol

1	Click Tools [image] Settings.

2	Click International.

3	Enable the Currency option.

4	Enable the Quattro Pro option, and click the country whose currency symbol you want to use.

5	Enable one of the following options:

•	Signed [image] precedes negative values with a minus sign

•	Parens [image] encloses negative values in parentheses

 Notes

•	When you change the currency symbol, it becomes the default currency. To show multiple currencies in one notebook, change the currency of individual cells with Format [image] Selection properties [image] Numeric format [image] Currency. This lets you use multiple currencies in one notebook.

•	Quattro Pro has added the Euro to the available currency formats. You can view the Euro currency symbol if you are using Microsoft Windows 98 or if your system has a Euro compliant font installed.

 Related topics


To change punctuation settings

1	Click Tools [image] Settings.

2	Click International.

3	Enable the Punctuation option.

4	Select a punctuation option.

The options show the punctuation marks used to mark thousands and the decimal place, followed by the punctuation mark used to separate arguments in spreadsheet functions and macros (a1,a2). The last four options specify that a blank space in numbers separates thousands.

 Related topics


To change available date formats

1	Click Tools [image] Settings.

2	Click International.

3	Enable the Date format option.

4	Select a date format option.

 Note

•	For more information about date formats, see "To format dates and times."

 Tip

•	This date format does not determine how dates appear. Rather, it determines the international date formats given as options for date appearance. To set the actual appearance of dates, click Format [image] Selection properties, and click the Numeric format tab.

 Related topics


To change available time formats

1	Click Tools [image] Settings.

2	Click International.

3	Enable the Time format option.

4	Select a time format option.

 Note

•	For more information about time formats, see "To format dates and times."

 Tip

•	This time format does not determine how times appear. Rather, it determines the international time formats given as options for time display. To set the actual appearance of times, click Format [image] Selection properties, and click the Numeric format tab.

 Related topics


To convert LICS characters

1	Click Tools [image] Settings.

2	Click International.

3	Enable the LICS check box.

 Note

•	Lotus International Character Set (LICS) characters are identical to the standard ANSI set except for the range 128 through 255, which is usually used for international and graphics characters. For more information about LICS characters, see your Lotus 1-2-3 documentation. When you save the notebook, these characters are converted back to the LICS equivalents.

 Related topics


To change the default language

1	Click Tools [image] Settings.

2	Click International.

3	Enable the Language option.

4	Enable one of the following options:

•	Suite default [image] specifies the default language of all suite applications

•	Quattro Pro [image] specifies a different language for only Quattro Pro

 Related topics


Displaying, arranging, resizing, and hiding windows

A Quattro Pro window displays a Quattro Pro file, or a file imported into Quattro Pro. While working in Quattro Pro, you can have several windows open. For example, suppose you are working with four different notebooks, each dealing with a quarterly report. You can display all four at once.

You can select which windows you want open, and how you want to view the data in those windows. As well, there are several methods of rearranging windows on your desktop. You can also hide windows.

You can change how you view your notebook without changing the notebook itself. For example, you can use Draft view when quickly entering data, or you can use Page view when you want to change margins and see how information will fit on a printed page. You can also use Zoom to make the notebook display larger or smaller.

You can display actual formulas instead of formula results. You can also have Quattro Pro automatically display spreadsheet comments. Once a comment is displayed, you can move or copy it to a new cell.

You can create any number of views. When you create a new view of a notebook window, the duplicate window appears full size in front of other open windows, with cell A1 selected on the first spreadsheet.

To view different parts of the same notebook, you can duplicate the window or split the window into two panes. Panes can be split vertically or horizontally.

If window panes are synchronized, you can scroll both of them at once to compare the data in rows or columns. Vertically split panes scroll together vertically, and horizontally split panes scroll together horizontally. If you unsynchronize the panes, you can scroll the panes independently to display different parts of the notebook. You can also resize the panes.

 How to


To select a notebook window

•	On the application bar, click the button that displays the window's name.

 Note

•	The window with the highlighted title bar is active.

 Tip

•	You can toggle back and forth between Quattro Pro and a non-spreadsheet window, such as the spelling checker, by pressing Alt + F6.

 Related topics


To arrange notebook windows

To	Do the following
Tile windows vertically	Click Window [image] Tile top to bottom
Tile windows horizontally	Click Window [image] Tile side by side
Have windows overlap	Click Window [image] Cascade
 Note

•	When possible, tiled windows are given equal room on the screen.

 Related topics


To hide a notebook window

1	Click the window.

2	Click Window [image] Hide.

 Tip

•	To show a hidden notebook window, click Window [image] Show.

 Related topics


To select a notebook view

1	Click View.

2	Click one of the following views:

•	Draft [image] does not display some document elements such as footers, page breaks, and margins, although they may exist in the notebook. Because not all features display, working in Draft view is often faster than working in Page view.

•	Page [image] displays your notebook pages the way they will look when printed. Page view displays elements such as fonts, appearance features, headers, footers, footnotes, page breaks, and margins. Page View offers more WYSIWYG (What You See Is What You Get) editing, such as dragging margins and page breaks. You can also get to the Page setup dialog box by double-clicking or right-clicking in a margin.

•	Page breaks [image] displays soft and hard page breaks. You can use this view to edit these page breaks.

•	Objects [image] displays the Objects sheet, the last sheet in the notebook. You can view your charts, maps, and dialog boxes from this sheet.

 Note

•	The view that is currently selected when you exit Quattro Pro is the view that will appear when you open Quattro Pro again.

 Tips

•	You can drag graphics or charts while in Draft view or Page view.

•	To see multiple pages while in Page view, click View [image] Zoom, and choose 50 percent (%) or less. To change margins while in Page view, drag a blue margin line to set the current margin for a column or row of pages.

 Related topics


To display formulas instead of formula results

•	Click View [image] Formulas.

 Related topics


To display spreadsheet comments

•	Click View [image] Comments.

 Related topics


To display a new view of a notebook window

•	Click Window [image] New view.

 Notes

•	The New view feature allows you to drag and drop cells between spreadsheets.

•	When you change border or gridline properties, the change does not display in duplicate views. When you lock titles, split panes, or zoom data, the change does not display in duplicate views.

 Tips

•	To view different areas of open windows, resize them to see a part of each. Scroll windows or select different sheets as desired.

•	To remove an extra view, click the Close window button at the top-right corner of the window. If you click File [image] Close, all views are closed because all views of the notebook are saved as the same file.

 Related topics


To split a window into two panes

1	Move the mouse pointer to the lower-right corner of the window over the pane splitter.

The pointer changes to a black double-arrow. Depending on where you position the mouse pointer, the double-arrow points horizontally or vertically.

2	Do one of the following:

•	To create horizontal panes, drag the vertical double-arrow upward. Release the mouse button where you want to split the panes.

•	To create vertical panes, drag the horizontal double-arrow to the left. Release the mouse button where you want to split the panes.

 Tips

•	You can also split a window into panes using View [image] Split window. The window is split at the position of the selector or, when there is not enough room to split the window at the current position, the window is split in half.

•	The second pane can be closed by clicking View [image] Split window, and enabling the Clear option.

 Related topics


To synchronize window panes

1	Click View [image] Split window.

2	Enable the Synchronize check box.

 Related topics


To resize window panes

1	Move the mouse pointer over the pane splitter at the lower right of the left or top pane until the double arrow appears.

2	Drag to the new position where you would like the first pane to end.

 Note

•	When you resize panes, the following property changes in one pane do not affect the appearance of the other pane: border or gridline properties, locked titles, row height, column width, default column width, or reveal/hide properties.

 Related topics


Zooming data and hiding and displaying screen components

Zoom lets you see an entire printed page or focus in on the detail of a few cells. You can set zoom for an entire notebook or for individual sheets. The default setting is 100%. Percentages less than 100% show more columns and rows; percentages greater than 100% show fewer. You can also use the Zoom to fit option to automatically fill the screen with the current selection.

You can hide scroll bars, tabs, and graphics. You may want to hide parts of the screen in just one notebook, for example, when you are creating a special presentation notebook or form. Displaying only the outlines of graphics (such as charts, clipart, and shapes) allows you to scroll and print faster.

You can hide parts of the screen in all future notebooks by setting display options. You can also hide borders and grid lines on a spreadsheet. These options are useful when creating a form.

 How to


To zoom a notebook

1	Click View [image] Zoom.

2	Select a zoom level.

3	Enable the Notebook option.

 Note

•	The Zoom setting does not affect printed output.

 Tips

•	To restore the screen to its normal display, choose 100%.

•	If you select one cell and choose Selection, Quattro Pro finds the boundaries of the data, then zooms only that cell.

 Related topics


To zoom data to fit on the screen

1	Select the cell or cells to zoom.

2	Right-click a toolbar, and click Data manipulation.

3	Click Zoom to fit.

 Related topics


To hide notebook features

1	Click Format [image] Notebook properties.

2	Click the Display tab.

3	Disable any of the following check boxes:

•	Vertical scroll bar

•	Horizontal scroll bar

•	Sheet tabs

 Related topics


To hide parts of the screen

1	Click Tools [image] Settings.

2	Click Display.

3	Disable the appropriate check boxes.

 Related topics


To hide borders on a spreadsheet

1	Click Format [image] Sheet properties.

2	Click the Display tab.

3	Disable any of the following check boxes:

•	Row borders

•	Column borders

 Related topics


To hide grid lines on a spreadsheet

1	Click Format [image] Sheet properties.

2	Click the Display tab.

3	Disable any of the following check boxes:

•	Horizontal

•	Vertical

 Related topics


Customizing menus

You can customize the current menu by adding, deleting, and rearranging menu items. You can also change the access keys used in menus. An access key is the underlined letter in a command that executes that command. Pressing an access key can be done instead of mouse-clicking.

You can make various elements in the user interface transparent.

 How to


To customize a menu

1	Click Tools [image] Customize.

2	Open the Customization menu.

3	Click Commands.

4	Choose the command you want from the Commands list.

Each command appears under the appropriate menu name.

5	Drag the command to the desired location on a menu.

 Note

•	When you customize menus, the Help topics referring to those menus do not change.

 Tips

•	To add a separator to a menu, select User menus from the list, and drag the separator to the desired location.

•	To add a new menu or submenu, select User menus from the list, and drag the new menu to the desired location. If you want to remove a menu or menu item, drag it onto the spreadsheet window.

 Related topics


To change the access key on a menu item

1	Click Tools [image] Customize.

2	Open the Customization menu.

3	Click Commands.

4	Choose the command you want from the Commands list.

Each command appears under the appropriate menu name.

5	Click the Appearance tab.

6	In the Caption box, insert an ampersand (&) before the letter you want to use as an access key.

7	Remove any unnecessary ampersands.

 Note

•	Make sure the letter you choose as an access key is unique to the menu or submenu in which you place it.

 Related topics


To make the user interface transparent

1	Click Tools [image] Customize.

2	Open the Customization menu.

3	Click Options.

4	Enable the Make user interface transparent check box.

5	Enable any of the following check boxes:

•	Command bars [image] makes command bars transparent

•	Dockers [image] makes dockers transparent

•	UI with color information [image] makes color information transparent

6	Move the Transparency level slider to the desired percentage.

 Note

•	The transparency options are only available in Windows 2000 and Windows XP.

 Related topics


Customizing keyboards

You can assign shortcut keys to menu items. Quattro Pro provides a list of current shortcut keys. You can print the list or export it to a text file. Note that the following keys or key combinations are system keys and are not valid as access keys:

•	F1

•	Alt + F6

•	Alt + Tab

•	Alt + Esc

•	Ctrl + Esc

•	Ctrl + /

You can also restore all keyboard assignments to their original settings.

 How to


To assign a shortcut key to a command

1	Click Tools [image] Customize.

2	Open the Customization menu.

3	Click Commands.

4	Choose the command you want from the Commands list.

Each command appears under the appropriate menu name.

5	Click the Shortcut keys tab.

6	Enter a shortcut key combination in the New shortcut key box.

7	Click Assign.

The new shortcut key appears in the Current shortcut keys list box.

 Tip

•	You can remove a shortcut key by selecting a key from the Current shortcut keys box, and clicking Delete.

 Related topics


To print a list of shortcut keys

1	Click Tools [image] Customize.

2	Open the Customization menu.

3	Click Commands.

4	Click the Shortcut keys tab.

5	Click View all.

6	Click Print.

 Related topics


To export a list of shortcut keys to a text file

1	Click Tools [image] Customize.

2	Open the Customization menu.

3	Click Commands.

4	Click the Shortcut keys tab.

5	Click View all.

6	Click Export to CSV.

7	Type a name in the Filename text box.

 Notes

•	You can have up to four layers of keystrokes. For example, the key combination Ctrl + Alt + 1,2,3,4 is accomplished by holding down the Ctrl and Alt keys, and then pressing the 1, 2, 3, and 4 keys in succession.

•	To automatically resolve keystroke conflicts, enable the Navigate to conflict on assign check box.

 Related topics


To restore all keyboard assignments to their original settings

1	Click Tools [image] Customize.

2	Open the Customization menu.

3	Click Commands.

4	Click the Shortcut keys tab.

5	Click Reset all.

 Related topics


Saving a notebook group

The arrangement of windows on the screen is called a notebook group. It includes the position and size of all notebook windows and the names of the files contained in each window. The positions of chart and dialog windows are not saved as part of a notebook group.

After you have created a notebook group that best suits your needs, you can save this configuration. When you want to use this customized notebook group again, you can restore it.

 How to


To save a notebook group

1	Click File [image] Notebook group [image] Save notebook group.

2	Type a filename.

3	Click Save.

 Notes

•	Do not include a filename extension; the .wbs extension is automatically added for notebook group files.

•	Saving a notebook group does not save the contents of the files within it. Use Save or Save as to save files. Also, if you use Save as, you must click File [image] Notebook group [image] Save notebook group afterward so that Quattro Pro can open the correct file the next time you try to open the notebook group.

 Related topics


To restore a notebook group

1	Click File [image] Notebook group [image] Open notebook group.

2	Choose the drive and folder where the file is stored.

3	Double-click the filename.

 Notes

•	Quattro Pro overlays existing windows with the windows stored in the notebook group file, and then opens the appropriate file for each.

•	Quattro Pro always opens the latest saved version of files when you open a notebook group. If you leave the notebook group and save a file included in the notebook group, Quattro Pro opens the updated version of the file the next time you click File [image] Notebook group [image] Open notebook group.

 Related topics


Setting multiple workspaces

A workspace is a configuration of settings that specifies how the various command bars, commands, and buttons are arranged when you open the application. You can create, choose, and delete workspaces. You can also import and export workspaces to and from other computers using the same application. For example, you may want a group of users to use a workspace with a similar look and feel.

 How to


To create a workspace

1	Click Tools [image] Settings.

2	Click Workspaces.

3	Click New.

4	Type the name of the workspace in the Name of new workspace box.

5	From the Base new workspace on list box, choose an existing workspace on which to base the new workspace.

If you want to include a description of the workspace, type a description in the Description of new workspace box.

 Related topics


To choose a workspace

1	Click Tools [image] Settings.

2	Click Workspaces.

3	Enable a check box beside a workspace in the available workspaces list.

 Tip

•	You can restore the default workspace by pressing F8 while starting the application.

 Related topics


To delete a workspace

1	Click Tools [image] Settings.

2	Click Workspaces.

3	Enable a check box beside a workspace in the available workspaces list.

4	Click Delete.

 Note

•	You cannot delete the default workspace.

 Related topics


To import a workspace

1	Click Tools [image] Settings.

2	Click Workspaces.

3	Click Import.

4	Click Browse.

5	Choose the drive and folder where the file is stored.

6	Double-click the file.

7	Follow the instructions on screen.

 Related topics


To export a workspace

1	Click Tools [image] Settings.

2	Click Workspaces.

3	Click Export.

4	Enable the check boxes beside the workspace items you want to export.

5	Click Save.

6	Type a filename in the Filename box.

7	Click Save.

8	Click Close.

 Note

•	The workspace items available for export are toolbars, menu bars, and the status bar.

 Tip

•	If you have an email client on your system, you can email a workspace as an attachment by clicking Email.

 Related topics


Saving and closing notebooks

Each notebook is saved as its own file. The default filename for the first notebook is NOTEBK1.QPW. The first time you save a notebook, you can accept this default filename or rename the file. You also have the option of applying a password to the notebook.

For information about setting passwords, see "Using password protection."

You can specify a default filename extension for your Quattro Pro files, and a default folder for your work. When you first open Quattro Pro, the default folder appears when you open or save a file. If you open or save a file in another folder, that folder becomes the default folder until you restart Quattro Pro.

For more information on the default folder, see "File-handling options."

If you exit Quattro Pro without saving your document, or if a power or network failure occurs, you will lose your work unless you have selected the document backup option. If you exit Quattro Pro unexpectedly with timed backup activated, you are prompted to recover any open files the next time you start Quattro Pro.

You can extract part of a notebook and save it as a separate file, leaving the original file intact. This is similar to copying the data, but allows you to also copy values or formulas, and to save the notebook's cell names and charts along with specified cells.

When you close a Quattro Pro notebook, you are prompted to save any unsaved changes. When you close a file, you remove the notebook and all its associated information from the desktop. Always save before closing your notebook or exiting Quattro Pro to keep any changes you have made.

 How to


To save a notebook

1	Click File [image] Save.

2	Choose the drive and folder where you want to save the file.

3	Type a filename in the Filename box.

4	Click Save.

 Tip

•	You can save all open notebooks at once using Save all.

 Related topics


To save a notebook with a new filename

1	Click File [image] Save as.

2	Choose the drive and folder where you want to save the file.

3	Type a filename in the Filename box.

4	Click Save.

 Related topics


To save a notebook with a password

1	Click File [image] Save as.

2	Choose the drive and folder where you want to save the file.

3	Type a filename in the Filename box.

4	Enable the Password protect check box.

5	Click Save.

6	Type a password.

7	Type the password again for verification.

 Tip

•	To save a file with a password after you have saved it previously, click File [image] Save as, and select Password protect.

 Related topics


To specify a default filename extension

1	Click Tools [image] Settings.

2	Click Compatibility.

3	Enter one to three letters in the Default file type box.

 Note

•	It is useful to specify a different extension if you usually save or open files in a format other than .qpw. For example, if you work mostly with Microsoft Excel files, it would be helpful to specify .xls as the default extension.

 Related topics


To specify a default folder

1	Click Tools [image] Settings.

2	Click File options.

3	In the Default folder list box, specify the default folder.

 Related topics


To back up your notebooks automatically

1	Click Tools [image] Settings.

2	Click File options.

3	Enable the Timed backup every check box.

4	In the Minutes box, set a time interval from 1 to 59 minutes.

 Tip

•	You can change the location of your backup file folder by typing a new path into the Backup file folder box.

 Related topics


To extract part of a notebook

1	Click Tools [image] Data tools [image] Extract to file.

2	In the Cell(s) field, type the cell name or coordinates to be saved.

You can specify noncontiguous selections by separating the selections with commas.

3	Enable one of the following:

•	Formulas [image] saves the cells exactly as they are

•	Values [image] saves the resulting values instead of the original formulas

4	Type a filename.

 Notes

•	If the selection includes hidden rows or columns, the hidden rows or columns are saved in the new file, and remain hidden when you open the file.

•	Some cell names and charts saved in the extracted file may not be meaningful if they refer to cells that were not also extracted. You can delete them, reassign them, or ignore them.

 Related topics


To close a notebook

•	Click File [image] Close.

 Note

•	If you have made any changes to the notebook, you are prompted to save your work.

 Tip

•	You can close all open notebooks at once using Close all.

 Related topics


To exit Quattro Pro

•	Click File [image] Exit.

 Note

•	If you have changed any files, you are prompted to save your work.

 Related topics


Reference: Getting started

The application bar displays mode and status indicators. For example, if you press Caps lock, the application bar lets you know that Caps lock is on.

Corel Application Recovery Manager (Corel A.R.M.) is an online wizard that allows you to save a notebook and exit Quattro Pro if the program ever becomes unstable.

 How to


Mode and status indicators

The following are some of the indicators that can appear on the application bar in Quattro Pro:

Indicator	What it means
	One or more formulas need to be recalculated. (Press F9 to recalculate the notebook.)
	A formula contains a circular cell reference (it refers to itself or to another formula that refers back to it).
	Caps lock is on
	Num lock is on
	Scroll lock is on
	Macro recording is in progress
	You pressed Ins and are in Typeover mode. Anything you type will overwrite existing data. (To return to Insert mode, press Ins again.)
COPY	You are using the Drag and Drop feature to copy cells. (Press Ctrl while dragging cells with the mouse.)
END	The End key is on. Any arrow keys you press move the insertion point to the end of an area in the notebook instead of scrolling
EDIT	You are in Edit mode. Press F2 to activate Edit mode
INPUT	Input is confined to selected cells with the {RestrictInput.Option} macro command. (Press Esc or Enter with no data in the input line to return to Ready mode.)
LABEL	The entry you are typing is text (a label)
MOVE	You are using the Drag and Drop feature to move cells
POINT	The notebook is in Point mode, letting you specify a cell or cells, or view cell names with F3
READY	Quattro Pro is ready for you to enter data or choose an option
VALUE	The entry you are typing is a number or formula
 Related topics


Corel Application Recovery Manager

Corel Application Recovery Manager (Corel A.R.M.) is an online wizard that allows you to save a notebook and exit Quattro Pro if the program ever becomes unstable. You can also send an online report to Corel that documents the nature of the problem and the events that led to it.

The Corel A.R.M. Wizard opens automatically at program failure and then offers three courses of action:

•	saving the notebook and closing the application

•	exiting the application without saving the notebook

•	continue working

With the last option, there is no guarantee that you can recover any work in your notebook after the last time you saved.

After you have made your selection, you can report the details of the problem to Corel with an attached program log. Your report will be vital part of Corel's product improvement efforts.

 Related topics


Quattro Pro Glossary

@function

35-mm slide

3-D charts

3-D selection

2-D charts

2-D selection

A

Absolute cell reference

Access key

Active cell

Active window

Advanced Regression Analysis

Aligning character

Amortization Table

ANOVA

ANOVA One-Way

ANOVA Two-Way without Replication

ANOVA Two-Way with Replication

ANSI

Annotations

API

Application Bar

Area/line charts

Argument

Array

Array constant

Aspect ratio

ASCII

Autoload file

Axis

B

Bar charts

Baseline

Binary file

Bin cells

Bitmap graphics

Bitmap image

Bitmap object

Block

Block array

Boolean logic

Border (graphic)

Borders (notebook)

Breakpoint

Bullet charts

C

Cell

Cell address

Cell identifier

Cell selector

Cell values

Chart

Chart button

Chart items

Chart pane

Chart type/Layout

Circular cell reference

Class

Client application

Clipboard

Collation

Column charts

Command object

Comments

Consolidator

Consolidator destination cells

Consolidator source cells

Constraint

Contiguous

Control label

Controls

Coordinates

Correlation

Covariance

Criteria table

CrossTab report

Custom dialog box

Custom Format

D

Database

Database cells

Data label

Data model

Data point

Data series

Data type

Date/time serial number

DDE

Default format statement

Delimited file

Delimited text

Delimiter setting

Dependent variable

Descriptive statistics

Destination cells

Detailed cells

Developer Mode

Dialog box control

Dimmed

Dithered

DLL

Document Type Definition File (DTD)

Drag and drop

Drill

Dynamic graphic

Dynamic parameter

E

Encapsulated PostScript

Event

Event-driven programming

Event (Object-oriented programming)

Experts

Explanatory reporting

Explode

Exponential smoothing

Extended selection

Extension

External database

F

Field

Field item

Field name

Fill

Find string

Fixed width text

Floating chart

Floating graphics window

Floating map

Floating object

Folder

Footers

Forecasting

Form controls

Form control commands

Format codes

Format statement

Formula

Fourier

Frequency Distribution

F-Test

FTP

Full Extent

Full page maps

Function

G

GIF

Gopher

Graphic element

Graphic file

Grid

Gridlines

Group

H

Handles

Hard page break

Headers

Headings

Histogram

Hotlink

HTML source code

HTTP

I

Independent variable

Input Line

Insertion point

Index

Iteration number

J

JPG

K

L

Label

Label series

Legend

Legend series

Light Table

Link

Link command

Locked titles

Lookup

M

Macro

Macro command

Macro library

Master slide

Matrix

MDI

Menu bar

Menu-equivalent commands

Menu system

Menu system definition

Metafile

Meta text

Mode

Mortgage Refinancing

Moving Average

Multidimensional database

Multiple selection

N

Named cells

Noncontiguous selection

Non-recordable tasks

Notebook

Notebook database

Numeric format

Numeric values

O

Object

Object (Object-oriented programming)

Object group

Object ID

Object inspector

Object name

Object-oriented programming

Objects sheet

OLAP

OLE

OLE object

Open Database Connectivity

Operator

Optimizer

Orientation

Output array

Output cells

P

Page break

Pane

Parameter

Parameter name

Parse

Password protection

Paste special

PCX

Picture object

Pie charts

Pin overlay

Population

Post parameter

Play

Precedence

Primary notebook

Product commands

Project templates

Properties

Protection

Property Bar

Q

Query

QuickMenu

Quick tab button

QuickTips

R

Random number

Range

Rank and Percentile

Read-only files

Recalculation

Record

Redraw options

Reference cell

Refresh

Region Overlay

Regression Analysis

Relative cell reference

Replacement string

Resolution

Right value

Row and column headings

S

Sample

Sampling

Scale

Scaling

Scenario

Screen slide

Search criteria

Secondary Y-axis

Seed value

Selector

Sensitivity Table

Separator

Series

Series labels

Series list

Server application

Sheet

Slack

Slide show

Soft page break

Solve For

Sort key

Sort selection

Source cells

Source data

Spillover text

Spreadsheet

Spreadsheet function

Standard Deviation

Startup folder

Static overlay

Static parameter

Step value

String values

Structured Query Language (SQL)

Style

Subscript

Summary cells

Superscript

Supporting file

Syntax

System notebook

T

t-Test

Tab

Tags

Template

Text box

Tick mark

TIF

Titles

Toolbar

Transition Effects

Twip

Two's Complement Notation

U

URL

V

Value

Value (of an object)

Variable

Variance

Vector graphics

W

Well-formed

What-If table

Wildcard

Workspace

X

X-axis

X-axis Series

XML/HTML

XML declaration

Y

Y-axis

Z

Z-axis

Zoom factor

Z-Test


Glossary terms


@function

@functions are referred to as spreadsheet functions in this version of Quattro Pro. Spreadsheet functions are one of a set of special commands you can enter in a cell, either alone or in a formula. Spreadsheet functions perform calculations and return the resulting value. For example, @AVG(A5..A8) finds the average of the values in cells A5 through A8. Quattro Pro includes over 500 spreadsheet functions.


35-mm slide

35-mm slide is a slide format where photos, graphics, or bullet charts are formatted into a 35-mm slide suitable for use with slide projectors. Quattro Pro can format graphics, charts, and maps for 35-mm display, which you can send to a slide bureau to be converted into 35-mm slides.


3-D charts

Quattro Pro offers the following 3-D chart types: 3-D bar, 3-D stacked bar, 2.5-D bar, 3-D step, 3-D unstacked area, 3-D ribbon, 3-D area, 3-D column, 3-D pie, 3-D surface, 3-D contour, 3-D shaded surface, 3-D 100% stacked bar, and 3-D doughnut. 3-D charts (except pie, column, and doughnut charts) plot multiple data series against a background of two walls and a base. The first series is plotted at the back of the graph, from left to right. Successive series are drawn, in order, in front of the first. Legend labels appear along the z-axis in most 3-D graphs.


3-D selection

3-D selections are cells that are selected on more than one spreadsheet.


2-D charts

Quattro Pro offers the following 2-D chart types: bar, variance, stacked bar, high-low, line, XY, area, column, pie, 100% stacked bar, stacked bar comparison, 100% stacked bar comparison, doughnut, and radar. 2-D charts (except pie, column, and doughnut charts) position data relative to two scales: the x-axis and they-axis. Pie, column, and doughnut charts illustrate the values of a single series in either a sliced pie format or as a sectioned column.


2-D selection

2-D selections are multiple cells selected on the same spreadsheet.


Absolute cell reference

An absolute cell reference is a reference in a formula that always refers the same cell, even if the formula is copied to a different part of the notebook. To make a cell reference absolute, use the Abs key (F4) to insert dollar signs ($) in a cell address--for example, $A$5. Named cells are absolute, unless a tilde (~) has been added in front of the name. For example, AGE would be an absolute cell reference. ~AGE would be a relative cell reference.


Access key

An access key is the underlined letter in a menu or dialog box that executes that command. Pressing an access key is used in lieu of mouse-clicking.


Active cell

The active cell is the cell affected by options you choose. The selector distinguishes the active cell from other cells in the spreadsheet.


Active window

The active window is the window affected by options you choose. It is the window on top of others and its title bar and frame are the same color as the application title bar.


Advanced Regression Analysis

The Advanced regression analysis tool performs linear regression analysis, which shows the relationship between a set of independent variables and a certain dependent variable. In addition to creating a summary output table, the Advanced regression analysis tool creates output tables for residuals and probability data. For information about simpler regression analysis, see "Performing regression analysis."


Aligning character

An aligning character is a character preceding a label entry that indicates how to align the entry. A single quote (') left-aligns a label entry, a double quote (") right-aligns it, and a caret (^) centers it.


Amortization Table

The Amortization table tool creates a table showing the amortization schedule for a mortgage. The table shows principal and interest payments, and interest paid from start to date and from year to date. For information about interpreting amortization tables, see "Interpreting an amortization table."


ANOVA

Analysis of variance (ANOVA) tools help determine if two or more samples come from the same population by calculating the F-statistic, the ratio of the mean variance between samples to the mean variance within samples. The ANOVA tools are commonly used in cases involving more than two samples (where t-Tests cannot be used).


ANOVA One-Way

The ANOVA one-way tool performs a single-factor analysis of variance with equal numbers of observations.


ANOVA Two-Way Without Replication

The ANOVA two-way without replication tool performs a two-factor analysis of variance using only one sample for each group of data.


ANOVA Two-Way With Replication

The ANOVA two-way with replication tool performs a two-factor analysis of variance using more than one sample for each group of data.


ANSI

ANSI refers to the American National Standards Institute (ANSI) character set used in Windows products. These characters can be translated into decimal and hexadecimal numbers.


Annotations

Annotations are any graphic objects inserted into charts or maps. For example, text boxes, arrows or shapes become annotations of the object where they reside.


API

API is an interface between the operating system and application programs, which includes the way the application programs interact with the operating system, and the services the operating system makes available to the programs.


Application Bar

The application bar, usually located at the bottom of the Quattro Pro desktop, shows different program status modes. For example, it will display NUM when the number lock is enabled and CAPS when the capitalization lock is enabled. The QuickSum and Calc-As-You-Go features are located on the application bar.


Area/line charts

Line charts plot series values as points, then connect the points in each series with a line. Area charts plot cumulative rather than individual values. The first series is plotted without modification. The second series is plotted using the top of the first series as the baseline. The third series is plotted on top of the second, and so forth. These charts show the progression of values over time and can be used to track sales, for example.


Argument

Arguments are information required by many spreadsheet functions and macro commands. It supplies information to the command. For example, in @SUM(A4..A10), the cell coordinates A4..A10 is the argument; it indicates what values to add together.


Array

An array is an object with one name that contains a collection of items and indexes these items for easy retrieval and manipulation. In Quattro Pro, arrays are rows and columns of data you can work with independently, not just as a whole selection. @ARRAY is used in most array calculations.


Array constant

An array constant is a group of numbers used as an argument in a formula. You can use an array constant to provide values for a formula instead of typing the values in a notebook. The numbers in the array are enclosed in braces {} and separated by semicolons.


Aspect ratio

Aspect ratio is the proportion of width to height of a chart. There are several ways to control a chart's aspect ratio, depending on where you want to display or print the chart.


ASCII

ASCII is the acronym for the American Standard Code for Information Interchange, the accepted standard for translating the first 128 alphabetic and numeric characters, symbols, and control instructions into 7-bit binary code. The ASCII character set is different from ANSI, the standard character set used in Windows products.


Autoload file

An autoload file opens automatically when you start Quattro Pro. You specify it with the Autoload File option in Tools [image] Settings [image] File options.


Axis

Most charts contain two axes: The x-axis usually runs horizontally along the bottom of the chart; the y-axis usually runs vertically on the left. (On rotated charts, x-axis and y-axis positions are reversed.)


Bar charts

Bar charts show each series as a bar plotted against the y-axis scale (vertically). The taller the bar, the greater the value. When you plot more than one series, the bars appear side by side, so you can easily compare series.


Baseline

A baseline is a fixed set of data against which you track changes. To set a scenario baseline, click Tools [image] Scenario [image] Edit then click Capture.


Binary file

A binary file is a file that contains instructions in your printer's native language for creating a printout. By default, binary files have the .PRN extension.


Bin cells

Bin cells are a group of ranges. A range could be 1 to 5, a bin of ranges would be 1 to 5, 11 to 15 and 42 to 75.


Bitmap graphics

Bitmap graphics are images composed of grids of pixels or dots that are arranged and colored differently to form a pattern. When you zoom in, you can see the individual pixels that make up the image. Scanners and paint programs such as Corel PHOTO-PAINT generate bitmap images. CorelDRAW creates images using vector objects. In Windows, these files are typically saved in a .BMP file. Other common bitmap image formats used are .PCX (PC Paintbrush), .TIF (Tagged-Image File Format), .GIF (Graphics interchange Format), and JPEG (Joint Photographic Experts Group).


Bitmap image

A bitmap image is a picture in one of many graphic file formats (such as .BMP) that you can use to fill bars, backgrounds, or graphic elements.


Bitmap object

A bitmap object is a graphic containing an image in bitmap image format that was pasted from another application.


Block

A block is any rectangular selection of cells, which can be selected by dragging the mouse. A block is identified in formulas by its coordinates or by its name. For example, A1..B4 is a block.


Block array

A block array is an array created based on a block of cells and used as an argument in a formula. You can use a block array to provide variable values for a formula instead of typing the values directly into the array.


Boolean logic

Boolean logic refers to algebraic logic which assigns either a TRUE or FALSE value based on the binary numbering system. In computer programming, a bit has a value of 1 or 0, so that in codes or scripting using boolean logic or value variables, 1 equals TRUE and 0 equals FALSE.


Border (graphic)

A graphic border is the outer edge of a graphic element. It is different from a graphic element's fill.


Borders (notebook)

Notebook borders consist of the lettered row at the top of the spreadsheet and the numbered column at the left used to identify cell addresses.


Breakpoint

A breakpoint allows you to pause or stop a macro during debugging. Quattro Pro macros have Standard breakpoints (to pause the macro) and Conditional breakpoints (to pause the macro when it encounters a specific condition that is true).


Bullet charts

Bullet charts are text charts with no numeric data. A bullet chart consists of a title, followed by major bulleted items and, if needed, minor bulleted items.


Cell

A cell is a single unit of a spreadsheet, used to store a formula or data. A notebook is made up of many spreadsheet sheets, each containing millions of cells identified by row and column location.


Cell address

A cell address is the identifier for the location of a cell in a notebook.

•	D5 is the address of the cell in column D and row 5.

•	B:D5 is the address of the cell in column D, row 5 of spreadsheet B.

•	[EAST]B:D5 is the address of the cell in a notebook named East in spreadsheet B, column D, row 5.


Cell identifier

A cell identifier is the left part of the input line that displays the active cell's address.


Cell selector

A cell selector is the black-bordered rectangle that indicates the active cell.


Cell values

Cell values are the values contained in a cell referenced by its cell address. For example the cell B6 could be used as an argument in a cell.


Chart

A chart is a visual representation of numerical information, often used to show trends and relationships in data.


Chart button

A chart button is a special type of text box that appears in a chart. You can click it to branch to another chart (using visual transition effects if desired), run a macro, or run a macro and then branch to another chart. The background area of a chart can also be programmed as a chart button. Chart buttons are active only when a chart is viewed in a slide show or when you right-click the chart and choose View.


Chart items

Chart items are parts of a chart that are selectable during editing. Chart items include integral parts of a chart (for example, axes, legend, title, and bars or lines) plus drawn graphics and text boxes added with the chart toolbar buttons.


Chart pane

A chart pane is the area bordered by the x- and y- axes in a 2-D chart. Gridlines and the bars, lines, or areas that represent series are drawn on top of this area.


Chart type/layout

Chart type/layout is the plotting style of a chart, such as line, bar, pie, 3-D ribbon, or text.


Circular cell reference

A circular cell reference is a formula with a direct or indirect reference to its own cell.


Class

In object-oriented programming, class refers to an object type that has the same properties and methods.


Client application

A client application is the application receiving data from another application through a DDE or OLE link.


Clipboard

The Clipboard is the temporary storage area used to hold data for transfer between locations or between Microsoft Windows applications.


Collation

Collation is the process of ordering pages in a certain order before printing. When printing a notebook with multiple pages or spreadsheets, you can collate or group the copies. Collating your print selection prints one full set of the selected pages before printing the second full set (e.g., a first set of pages 1 to 10 will print, before the second set of pages 1 to 10 will print, and so on).


Column charts

Column charts represent values as sections of a vertical rectangle. The first value in the series is plotted on the bottom; additional series are stacked on top, in order.


Columns

Fields placed in the Columns section of the Layout area are displayed vertically along the top of the spreadsheet.

You must drag at least one field into the Columns section of the Layout area in order to create a CrossTab report.


Command object

A command object is a collection of properties and actions that defines a menu command.


Comments

Cell comments are short notes that refer to the contents of a cell.


Consolidator

Consolidator is a tool that combines source cells using your choice of several statistical spreadsheet functions, such as @SUM. You can use this tool by clicking Tools [image] Consolidate [image] New.


Destination Cells
Consolidator destination cells

The destination cells contain the output of the consolidation. Thus the size of the destination cells will determine the size of the consolidation result. For example, if the destination area is smaller than the source area, results are limited to the size of the destination area.


Source Cells
Consolidator source cells

Consolidator source cells are the cells you want to combine. For example, you might want to count or average all cells in the source cells. Since the chosen operator works on equivalent cells in each source area, source areas usually have the same number of rows and columns.


Constraint

A constraint is a formula that defines a limit in a mathematical problem. For example, +A4 > 50 is a constraint formula which states that the value in cell A4 must be greater than 50.


Contiguous

Contiguous refers to a rectangular area of adjoining cells.


Control label

A control label is the text that displays on a dialog box next to other controls. Use a control label to label dialog box controls that do not have labels or to indicate the action you want a user to perform. For example, a control label might display the text "Enter your first name" next to an edit field on a dialog box.


Controls

Controls are the elements of a dialog box or toolbar that affect program actions; buttons, check boxes, and edit fields are examples of controls.


Coordinates

The coordinates are the two addresses that define a selection. The upper left and lower right addresses are always used. For example, the coordinates of the selection stretching from column B, row 5 to column E, row 9 are B5..E9.


Correlation (definition)
Correlation

The Correlation tool computes the correlation coefficient of the numeric values in two or more sets of data. Correlation coefficients range in value from -1.0 to 1.0. A correlation coefficient of zero means that two variables are not correlated. A variable correlated with itself returns a correlation coefficient of 1.0.


Covariance (definition)
Covariance

The Covariance tool returns the covariance matrix of two or more data sets. A positive covariance indicates that as values increase in one data set they increase in another (the sets move together). A negative covariance indicates that as values increase in one data set they decrease in another (the sets move apart). Unrelated data sets have a covariance approaching zero. Covariance, unlike correlation, is scale dependent; related data sets yield different covariances if their scales differ.


Criteria table

A criteria table is a range of cells in a notebook that specify what field(s) to search and what data to search for (the search criteria). Quattro Pro looks for all database records that match search criteria in the specified criteria table.


CrossTab report

CrossTab reports are tables that summarize the values from spreadsheets created in Quattro Pro and from external databases. CrossTab reports let you organize database information into categories and then analyze and summarize the database information in any way you choose.

CrossTab reports are dynamic, meaning that changes in the source data affect the values in the report; dragging a report cell to a new location causes all affected cells to update their data.


Custom dialog box

The Custom dialog box is a dialog box you create using the dialog box designer.


Custom format

A custom format contains one or more format statements that change the way selected values in the spreadsheet are formatted.


Data

Fields placed in the Data section of the Layout area contain the data that you want to summarize in your CrossTab report. Data fields that contain labels are summarized (by default) by a count of the labels, while data fields that contain values are summarized (by default) by a sum of the values.

You must drag at least one field into the Data section of the Layout area in order to create a CrossTab report.


Database

A database is an organized collection of information. In the notebook, a database is organized by rows (or records of information), divided into separate columns (or fields).


Database cells

Database cells are the cells that make up a database. They include field names in the first row and data records in the remaining rows. Each column is a data field.


Data label

A data label is the label (or the part of the label) that states the value of the slice of a pie chart, or the section of a column chart. This is usually expressed as a percentage of the entire pie or column. The Data label property in the pie or column chart property controls the format of these labels, and has four options: Currency, Value, Percent, and None.


Data model

A data model is a set of formulas designed to simulate real life situations and conditions. You can use data models when analyzing best-case and worst-case scenarios.


Data point

A data point is a single cell value displayed in a chart.


Data series

Data series are cells of data plotted as a group on a chart. Each value in a data series is represented by a bar in a bar chart, by a point on a line in a line chart, by a "slice" in a pie chart, and so forth. A data series is usually just called a "series," except when contrasted to a label series.


Data type

A data type is the type of data contained in a cell. Quattro Pro identifies two types of data labels and values. Labels are text and values are numbers, dates and times, and formulas.


Date/time serial number

The date/time serial number is a number assigned to a date or time. The number counts the number of days before or after December 30, 1899 (day 0), and the portion of the day that has elapsed. The integer portion is for the date; the fractional portion is used for time (with .00000=12:00 midnight, .5=12:00 noon, and .999999=11:59 p.m.).


DDE

DDE is an acronym for Dynamic Data Exchange. It is a method of exchanging data between Microsoft Windows applications. You can use it to set up dynamic links between applications so that if the data in one application changes, it also changes in the other.


Default format statement

The default format statement is required when setting conditions in a custom format. Quattro Pro applies this statement if none of the preceding conditions are evaluated to be true. Conditions are evaluated from top to bottom therefore, the default format statement must appear as the last format statement in the Format Summary section. The default format statement must not contain a condition.


Delimited file

A delimited file is a file containing delimiters which indicate parses or breaks in text. Delimiters are used to set up columns, rows, cells and so on, when the text is imported to a spreadsheet.


Delimited text

Delimited text uses delimiters such as commas, quotation marks, or tabs to separate text. Delimiters are used to set up columns, rows, cells and so on, when the text is imported to a spreadsheet.


Delimiter setting

A delimiter setting is the character used to define a parse or break in a file. Delimiters are used to set up columns, rows, cells and so on, when the text is imported to a spreadsheet.


Dependent variable

A dependent variable is the variable that is affected or influenced by another variable. For instance, when studying whether there is a relationship between a person's gender and his or her income, gender is the independent variable and income is the dependent variable.


Descriptive Statistics (definition)
Descriptive Statistics

The Descriptive statistics tool characterizes a sample. It computes the mean, variance, median, mode, standard deviation, kurtosis, skewness, range, minimum, and maximum of a distribution.


Destination box

The Destination box indicates the spreadsheet where you want the CrossTab report to appear. The default destination is the next available unprotected spreadsheet.


Destination cells

Destination cells are the target cells for an action, such as a copy or move operation.


Detailed Cells

For notebook outlines, the detailed cells are the data cells usually to the left or above summary cells.


Developer mode

Starting Corel Quattro Pro with the command line switch /D runs Corel Quattro Pro in Developer mode. Developer mode adds special properties to property menus and lets you use a shortcut key, CTRL+M. Additional property settings available in Developer mode include Enable Inspection, Title, and Name properties.

The Developer mode shortcut key, CTRL+M, varies in function depending on the current program state. When you are debugging a macro, CTRL+M stops macro execution and exits Debug mode. In all other states, CTRL+M restores the standard Corel Quattro Pro menu bar, application bar, and input line. CTRL+M also re-enables the ability to right-click and access property menus.


Dialog box controls

A dialog box control is an object you add to a custom dialog box. For example, you can add buttons, color controls, check boxes, and radio buttons to a dialog box you want to create. Dialog box controls have specific properties and linking properties which when configured in different ways, causes the control to perform a specific action. For example, you configure a button to launch another custom dialog box, or to initiate another control's activation.


Dimmed

If a menu item is dimmed, you cannot select it. The option name appears in dimmed (gray) type on the menu if it is unavailable.


Dithered

Dithered is a pattern of various colors that approximate a new color that could not otherwise be displayed by the video driver.


DLL

DLL is an acronym for Dynamic Link Library. It contains functions written in a programming language. You can use functions in DLLs as custom functions in a notebook.


Document Type Definition file (DTD)

DTD is an acronym for Document Type Definition. It is a file that defines the elements and the structured relationship between the elements. The DTD also defines entities and attributes. The DTD defines all valid elements, the order in which elements can be used, and how many times a particular element can appear in a document. By default, Quattro Pro uses the HTML2_X.DTD.


Drag and Drop

Drag and Drop is the method of moving a selected cell, chart, graphic, spreadsheet tab, or other object by dragging it to a new location with the mouse. You can also press CTRL while you drag certain items to copy them to another location.


Drill

You can enter data through several grouped spreadsheets at the same time when you drill. After creating a group and activating Group mode, you can select a cell and make an entry. Instead of pressing ENTER, you can press CTRL+ENTER to drill the entry through all corresponding spreadsheets in the group.


Dynamic graphic

A dynamic graphic is a graphic that is continually changing based on the information it displays. For example, a weather map graphic is constantly changing to reflect the differences in climate and temperature.


Dynamic parameter

A dynamic parameter is a condition of an argument that changes to reflect the current state of the values that affect the argument.

For Web queries, a dynamic parameter is not included directly in the Web query file. Web queries that include dynamic parameters, require the user to identify the parameter name and value to be included in the query before it is executed. Dynamic parameters can obtain different results from the same database by allowing the user to change the search criteria.


Encapsulated PostScript

EPS, or Encapsulated PostScript, is a graphics file format used by the PostScript programming language. Use of this format sometimes indicates the presence of bitmap images within the file. These files can be in binary or ASCII formats.

Do not confuse EPS files with regular PostScript files. PostScript is a page-description language used to send instructions to a PostScript printer. All the objects in a print job are represented by lines of PostScript code that the printer uses to reproduce your work.


Event

An event is a user interface action that triggers a link option (for example, mouse clicks, keystrokes, and values changing).


Event-driven programming

Event-driven programming is a program which waits for an event to occur and responds to it, instead of going through a program line by line.


Event (Object-oriented programming)

An event is an occurrence that is significant to a program, and which may call for a response from the program.


Experts

Quattro Pro helps you perform certain spreadsheet tasks using Experts that walk you through each step. Experts are found in various parts of the program. Some Experts include

•	Insert [image] Chart

•	Insert [image] Graphics [image] Map

•	Insert [image] External data [image] Expert

•	Tools [image] Numeric tools [image] Budget

•	Tools [image] Numeric tools [image] Analysis


Explanatory reporting

Explanatory reporting is an account which attempts to clarify or make obvious something that is not immediately understandable, logical or widely known.


Explode

You can explode a pie chart when you move a pie chart slice away from the center of the chart. Exploding is a way to emphasize the pie chart slice.


Exponential Smoothing (definition)
Exponential Smoothing

The Exponential smoothing tool, like the Moving average tool, smoothes out variations in a data series. After you use the Moving average tool to create a set of forecast values, you can use the Exponential smoothing tool to smooth each forecast value and adjust for error in the prior period.


Extended selection

Extended selections are cells selected by clicking a cell, then holding down SHIFT while clicking the opposite corner cell or while pressing arrow keys.


Extension

An extension is a code of up to three characters attached to the end of a filename and separated from the rest of the name by a period. A file's extension often identifies what type of file it is. For example, Quattro Pro notebook files have the default extension .QPW.


External database

An external database is a database that is not created or stored in Quattro Pro. You can import external databases into Quattro Pro. Examples of external databases include Paradox or dBASE.


Field

A field is a category of information in a database. In notebook databases, fields are set up as columns of information.


Field item

Field items are the individual entries that occur in a field. For example, a field named Country might have field items such as Venezuela, Egypt, and France. Another field named Sales might have field items such as $1,000, $3,250 or $189,000.


Field name

Field names are the headings of the columns of information.


Field position

There are four potential positions where you can place fields in CrossTab reports:

•	Rows fields are displayed horizontally along the left side of the report

•	Columns fields are displayed vertically along the top of the report

•	Pages fields are displayed in the upper left corner of the report

•	Data fields are displayed between the Column and Row fields and contain the data of the report


Fill

The fill is the interior of a graphic element, as opposed to its border.


Financial analysis

Quattro Pro offers several financial analysis tools designed to help you manage your money. You can create an amortization table for your mortgage, make budgets for home or office, or analyze the cost of refinancing your mortgage.


Find string

In a find and replace operation, the find string is the group of characters you are searching for. You enter the find string in the Find edit field.


Fixed width text

Fixed width text appears in columns of a set number of characters.


Floating chart

A floating chart is a chart that appears on a spreadsheet. You can create a floating chart directly on a notebook, or place an existing chart on a notebook by clicking Insert [image] Graphics [image] Map. Floating charts sit directly on a spreadsheet letting you view or print your chart on the same spreadsheet as your data.


Floating graphics window

A graphics window  serves as a container for graphics, including charts, maps, clipart, shapes, and lines. You can edit graphics properties within the graphics window.


Floating map

A floating map is a map that appears on a spreadsheet. You can create a floating map directly on a notebook, or place an existing map on a spreadsheet by right-clicking and clicking Insert chart.


Floating object

A floating object is a graphic that can be placed on top of cells. You can create floating charts, arrows, ellipses, lines, rectangles, rounded rectangles, text boxes, QuickButtons, OLE objects, bitmap image objects, and picture objects.


Folder

A folder is a named section of computer disk space used to store and organize your documents, programs, and other files. For example, you could create a folder called "LOGOS" for storing logo designs.


Footers

Footers contain specified information that prints at the bottom of each notebook page. Use footers to print information such as the page number, filename, date, time, a person's name, a company name, or any text you want at the bottom of each notebook page.


Forecasting

Forecasting is the calculation or prediction of a future condition as the result of study and analysis of available data.


Form control commands

A form control command is the tool you use to insert form controls to a spreadsheet. From the main menu, choose Insert [image] Form control, and a suitable form control.


Form controls

Form controls are objects such as buttons, list boxes, and radio buttons. Quattro Pro lets you place form controls directly on a spreadsheet, and for this reason are sometimes called spreadsheet controls. Form controls can run a macro, display a custom dialog box, or display spreadsheet data.


Format codes

Format codes are characters that apply or assign formatting attributes to cell data. For example, the date code dd, Mon yyyy, formats the date 12/02/99 to 12, Feb 1999.


Format statement

Format statements are contained within a custom format. A format statement contains one required and two optional components. The required component is the Format. It consists of format codes for numbers, dates, or times, that change the way selected values in the spreadsheet are formatted (e.g., mmo dd, yyyy changes dates to Jan 12, 1999). Optionally, a format statement can include a condition (e.g., This Cell>5) that applies the Format to values in the spreadsheet if the condition is true. The second optional component lets you adjust the way values display in the spreadsheet after the Format is applied.


Formula

A formula is a mathematical equation that calculates a final value, such as the difference between the values in two cells or the total of values in a column.

In spreadsheet applications, a formula is an expression that defines how one cell relates to other cells. For example, you can input the formula B5*E8 which means to multiply the value in cell B5 by the value in cell E8.


Fourier (definition)
Fourier

The Fourier tool performs a fast Fourier transformation on cells of data. Fourier transforms are commonly used to solve partial differential equations.


Frequency distribution

Frequency distribution is the number of times that numbers within given ranges are found in cells of data.


F-Test

The F-Test tool compares the population variances of two data sets. If the variances of two data sets are significantly different, you can hypothesize that the samples were drawn from different parent populations.


FTP

FTP is an abbreviation for File Transfer Protocol. FTP is an Internet protocol which allows the sending of files over the Internet.


Full extent

Full extent is the aspect ratio where a map or chart view is displayed with accurate proportions.


Full page maps

Full page maps are maps that appear alone on a separate page. You can create a map on its own page by clicking Insert [image] Chart and enabling the Window chart button in the Destination section of the Map Expert.


Function

A function is one of a set of special commands you can enter in a cell, either alone or in a formula. These are referred to as "spreadsheet functions." Spreadsheet functions perform calculations and return the resulting value.


GIF

GIF is an acronym for Graphics Interchange Format. GIF is the bit-mapped file format used by the World Wide Web, CompuServe, and many other bulletin board services (BBS). GIF supports color and various resolutions. It also includes data compression, making it especially effective for scanned photos.


Gopher

Gopher is a hierarchical system for formatting and displaying files on the Internet that was developed at the University of Minnesota.


Graphic element

Graphic elements are drawn graphics or explanatory text that are added to charts. Types of graphic elements include lines, arrows, polylines, polygons, rectangles, ellipses, freehand shapes, and text boxes.


Graphic file

A graphic file is a file containing images of lines and shapes and saved in a file format compatible with the application in which it is created.


Grid

In a spreadsheet, the lines that separate rows and columns are referred to as the grid.

In a graphics window, the dotted lines spaced at regular intervals in the background are referred to as the grid. You can use the grid to line up elements in a graphics window.


Grid lines

Grid lines are the lines that separate the cells of a notebook. Grid lines are also lines extending at regular intervals from axes across a chart frame, dialog window, or toolbar window. Chart grid lines help show the values represented by lines, bars, or areas on 2-D, 3-D, and combination charts.


Group

In a notebook window, a group is a series of contiguous sheets gathered together when you click Insert [image] Name [image] Group of sheets. When you activate the Group mode, a blue line indicates that Group mode is on and the group is active. Changes made to one sheet in the group affect others while the Group mode is on.

In a graphics window, you can select multiple drawn elements and tie them together into one group. You can then move, resize, or change properties of the group as a whole.


Handles

Handles are small black squares, also called nibs, that appear on the border of a graphic when the graphic is selected. Drag a handle to resize the graphic. Drag within the selected graphic to move it.


Hard page break

Hard page breaks are manually created to start a new page.


Headers

Headers specify information to print at the top of each notebook page. Use a header to print information such as the page number, filename, date, time, a person's name, a company name, or any text you want to appear at the top of each notebook page.


Headings

Headings are the letters that appear at the top of columns or the numbers that appear at the left of rows.


Histogram

The Histogram tool calculates the probability and cumulative distributions for a sample population, based on a series of bins you define. Histograms are often used to chart the data in frequency distribution tables. You can use the Histogram tool to view the shape of a sample population's distribution.

Note that, in order to include an interval from zero to your first number, a blank cell above your first number must be selected in the bin cells range. Otherwise, the first interval will start at your first number, and not at zero.


Hotlink

A link connecting two applications, allowing changes made in one application to be reflected in the other.


HTML source code

HTML source code contains HTML tags which are embedded in the text or content of the document. These tags control the format of the Web page (e.g., font, heading styles etc.). HTML source code is translated by the Web browser. You can view the source code of Web pages.


HTTP

HTTP is an abbreviation for Hypertext Transfer Protocol. It defines the way messages are formatted and sent in the World Wide Web and the way Web browsers and Web servers respond to commands.


Independent variable

An independent variable is a variable that influences or affects another variable. For instance, when studying whether there is a relationship between a person's gender and his or her income, gender is the independent variable and income is the dependent variable.


Input line

An input line is the line below the toolbar where information is displayed about the active cell. In Edit mode, the input line shows the data you are entering or editing, and it contains Navigate (for displaying a list of cell names), @ (@functions), {} (macros), X (Cancel), and checkmark (Enter) buttons.


Insertion point

An insertion point is the flashing vertical bar indicating where text will be inserted as you type.


Index

A number used to address individual elements of a list, array, string or other sequence. Can consist of any value, for example strings or negative numbers, but most often consists of a sequence of positive numbers beginning with zero.


Iteration number

An iteration is the repetition of a series of instructions distinguished by initial conditions, a repetitious step and a terminating condition. An iteration number is the number of times the repetition occurs.


JPG

JPG, also called JPEG, is an acronym for Joint Photographic Experts Group. JPG is a compression technique for color images. Although it can reduce file sizes to about 5% of their normal size, some detail is lost in the compression.


Label

In a notebook cell, a label is any entry that begins with a letter or a label-prefix character. You can type a label, or it can result from a string formula.

In a chart, a label is an entry of any type that you assign to the chart to define plotted values.


Label series

Label series are cells containing the labels that correspond to the values in a data series. These labels are placed over bars in a bar chart, or over data points in a line chart. In pie and column charts, the label series is the same as the x-axis series, which places a text label next to the data label on each pie slice or column section.


Legend

A legend is a key displayed beside or beneath a chart that specifies the colors, marker symbols, or fill for each series graphed.


Legend series

Legend series are label cells that describe what the data in a chart represents. In 2-D and some 3-D charts, these labels appear beside the series markers in the legend box. In many 3-D charts, legend labels appear along the z-axis. In multiple charts, legend labels appear as the "titles" of the sub-charts that represent each data series. Legend labels do not appear in pie and column charts.


Light Table

The Light Table is a resizeable window that displays all the charts in a slide show in miniature form and in the order in which they will appear. You can use the Light Table window to change the slide order, transition effect, display time, and transition speed assigned to each slide.


Link

A link is a reference to a cell or cells in another notebook, or a DDE or OLE operation with another application. You can also link a custom dialog box control to a notebook cell or another control.

For example, this notebook link refers to cells D6..E7 on sheet C of notebook SALES: [SALES]C:D6..E7. If that selection of cells is named February, you could also enter the link as [SALES]C:February.


Link command

A link command is a command attached to a dialog box control that runs when an event occurs.


Locked titles

Locked titles are columns or rows fixed on screen at the left and/or above notebook data to serve as identification headings. They remain on screen when you scroll the spreadsheet.


Lookup

Lookup is a function which looks up an index in an array.


Macro

A macro is a sequence of keystrokes or commands, stored in a notebook, that you can play to perform an action. Macros are useful whenever a long or complicated procedure is done frequently.


Macro command

A macro command is one of a set of special commands that can be used within macros.


Macro library

A macro library is a notebook used to store macros. When you run a macro, if it is not stored in the active notebook, Quattro Pro looks for it in any open macro libraries. You designate a notebook as a macro library with the notebook Macro library property.


Master slide

A master slide is an optional slide selected in the Light Table window of a slide show. It maintains common elements (such as a corporate logo and other chart annotations) and a common background style for all slides in a slide show. The master slide does not display when you run the slide show unless it is also included as a separate slide.


Matrix

A matrix is a rectangular array of numbers used to solve linear formulas and equations.


Menu Bar

The menu bar contains Quattro Pro commands for file management, editing data, setting properties and formats, configuring windows and toolbars, accessing Help, and many more Quattro Pro tasks.


MDI

MDI is an abbreviation for Multiple Document Interface. It is an API (Application Programming Interface) that allows developers to create multiple window applications. MDI applications feature a Main window and child windows, accessible from the Main window.


Menu-equivalent commands

Menu-equivalent commands are special commands that correspond to menu items. They are used in macros.


Menu system

A menu system is the arrangement of options that appear at the top of the Quattro Pro window, and their sub-options and options. You can edit the menu system.


Menu system definition

A menu system definition consists of notebook cells containing the information that makes up a menu system: menu titles, menu options, their shortcuts, and their underlined letters.


Metafile

A metafile is a command list that draws graphics when launched. The commands it contains can create graphic objects like shapes, lines, text, and commands to control the properties of these objects.


Meta text

Meta text is the text contained within the meta tags of an HTML document. It identifies the contents of a Web page. Meta text includes information such as the general description of the Web page, keywords for search engines, and copyright information.


Mode

Notebooks can be in different modes. Actions you take have different effects depending on the current mode. For example, pressing the arrow keys in READY mode moves the selector between cells; doing so in EDIT mode moves the insertion point in the entry. The current mode is shown by an indicator on the application bar.


Mortgage Refinancing

Quattro Pro lets you create a table of information to compare candidate loans with the current mortgage you want to refinance. You can use the Mortgage Refinancing Table to determine whether you should terminate your current mortgage for one with a different term and interest rate. For more information about interpreting and creating a Mortgage Refinancing Table, see "Interpreting a mortgage refinancing table."


Moving Average

The Moving Average tool generates forecast values by finding the average over a specified number of preceding intervals for each value in a data set. Unlike an average of all the values in the set, the moving average lets you focus on rising and falling trends in the data.


Multidimensional database

A multidimensional database is a database management system (DBMS) organized around groups of records that share a common field value. Multidimensional databases are often generated from relational databases. Although relational databases make it easy to work with individual records, multidimensional databases are designed for analyzing large groups of records, enabling fast access and data analysis.

The term OLAP (Online Analytical Processing) has become nearly synonymous with multidimensional databases, whereas OLTP (Online Transaction Processing) generally refers to relational DBMSs.


Multiple selection

Multiple selections are selections of cells that you select by holding down the CTRL key while dragging each selection. Any action you perform will affect all the separate selections. You may give the multiple selection a single name (see named cells).


Named cells

Named cells are selections of cells that have been assigned a name. You can reference such cells by name instead of by coordinates.


Noncontiguous selection

Noncontiguous selections are selections of cells that are located at various places on the spreadsheet rather than in one block. Select a noncontiguous selection by holding down CTRL while dragging each selection of cells. You can reference a noncontiguous selection in a formula as a list of coordinates separated by commas or you can reference it as a single name.


Non-recordable tasks

Quattro Pro macros and PerfectScript macros let you record mouse actions and keystrokes but you cannot record text strings or insert commands. These items must be typed into the macro.


Notebook

A notebook is a data file that is a collection of spreadsheets. The default file-name extension for a notebook is .QPW.


Notebook database

A notebook database is a database that is created and stored using Quattro Pro. You can create databases in notebooks because Quattro Pro recognizes the cells containing the field names and data records as database cells. You can use Data Forms to help you set up your notebook database by clicking Tools [image] Data tools [image] Form.


Numeric format

The numeric format is the format for a value. You can change the numeric format for a cell or a selection of cells. Changing the format of a value does not affect the actual value in the cell.


Numeric values

Numeric values are values that appear in an argument.


Object

Objects include cells, spreadsheets, notebooks, charts, chart items, dialog box controls, drawn shapes, and the application itself. You can modify an object through their Properties.


Object (Object-oriented programming)

In object-oriented programming, an object is a data item with instructions for the operations to be performed on it.


Object group

In a chart, an object group is a set of objects that have been grouped using the Format [image] Group option.


Object ID

The object ID is the number attached to an object, allowing it to be manipulated by macros and link commands.


Object Inspector

The Object Inspector is the dialog box or list that appears when you right-click a selected object and click the Properties option in a QuickMenu. Object Inspectors contain properties you can set to change the characteristics of objects.


Object name

The object name is the name used to reference an object (for example, a chart, map, drawn shape, dialog box, etc.) in a macro, link command, or spreadsheet function.


Object oriented programming

Object-oriented programming is a style of programming that places emphasis on creating and using objects.


Objects sheet

The Objects sheet is the last spreadsheet in a notebook, and contains icons representing the charts and dialog boxes you have created. Double-click an icon on the Objects sheet to edit the object.

To display the Objects sheet, click the Quick tab button at the bottom left of the notebook window. Click the Quick tab button again to return to the current sheet.


OLE

OLE is an acronym for Object Linking and Embedding. It is a method of bringing data objects (such as notebook cells, text selections, charts, drawings, or other document elements) from one Windows application into another.


OLE object

An OLE object is an object created in another Windows application that can be inserted into Quattro Pro as a floating graphic (object). Double-clicking an OLE object starts the application in which the object was created so you can use the object.


OLAP

OLAP is an acronym for Online Analytical Processing. It describes a form of technologies that are designed for fast, interactive data access and analysis. OLAP transforms raw data into meaningful, strategic information by creating a model that supports explanatory reporting and forecasting.


Open Database Connectivity

ODBC is an acronym for Open Database Connectivity. It is a standard database access method. Its goal is to make it possible to access any data from any application, regardless of which database management system (DBMS) is handling the data. ODBC manages this by inserting a middle layer, called a database driver, between an application and the DBMS.


Operator

An operator is a mathematical symbol used in a formula to express a relationship between two values. For example, + and / are operators in the formula +A6+10/B2.


Optimizer

Optimizer is a tool that lets you solve models for an optimal solution based on constraints. You can use Optimizer by clicking Tools [image] Numeric tools [image] Optimizer.


Orientation

The orientation is the direction a notebook prints in. Landscape orientation prints sideways across the length of the paper and Portrait orientation prints across the width of the paper. The default orientation is Portrait.


Output array

The mathematical results of an array displayed in array format.


Output cells

In a database query operation, the output cells are the area of the notebook where records that match the specified search criteria are copied. The output cells must include the names of the fields you want copied for those records.

In a parse operation, the output cells are the area where the parsed data is copied.


Page break

A page break is the place where one printed page ends and another begins. You can have soft page breaks (those that are calculated for you) and hard page breaks (those that you create yourself).


Pages

Fields placed in the Pages section of the Layout area appear in the upper left corner of the CrossTab report. These fields have drop down lists so you can select the field item that you want to view.

Dragging a field to the Pages section is optional [image] you can create a CrossTab report without a field in the Pages section.


Pane

A pane is a part of a window. You can break a notebook window into two panes and view different parts of the notebook in each.


Parameter

A parameter can be two things in Quattro Pro:

•	A condition or value used to customize the application.

For example, in a Web query, a parameter is a specific value that the user must provide either in the query file, or when the query is executed. The parameter is the value that is searched for when you run the query (e.g., company's stock symbol). Parameter values can be either static or dynamic.

•	In macros, a parameter (sometimes called an argument) is a value that passes to a routine or programming function that provides more information about a macro command.


Parameter name

The parameter name shows the name of the query. Queries have been predefined to extract information from designated fields in a database.


Parse

You can split a column of long labels (such as those created by importing a text file) into two or more columns of data, usually by copying the data to a new destination. To do this, use Tools [image] Data tools [image] QuickColumns.


Password protection

Quattro Pro lets you apply password access rights to notebooks. Quattro Pro prompts anyone attempting to open, print, or view the notebook for the correct password. In Quattro Pro, passwords are always case-sensitive.


Paste special

Pasting information using the Clipboard also pastes cell properties, formulas, and labels. Paste special lets you control what you paste by including either more or less options than the Paste command. For example, you can paste data without properties, or paste properties without data. You can paste from other applications, or control the format of the data you paste in the notebook. You can do simple math, or you can copy row and column sizes.


PCX

PCX is a file format developed by ZSOFT for its PC Paintbrush program. PCX is a common graphics file format supported by many graphics programs, as well as most optical scanners, desktop publishing systems, and fax modems.


Picture object

A picture object is a graphic containing an image in the metafile format that was pasted from another application.


Pie charts

Pie charts are circular chart types. Use pie charts to show the proportions of parts to a whole. Pie charts plot a single series with each value plotted as a percentage of the circle. You can explode slices of the pie chart for added emphasis.


Pin overlay

A pin overlay is a transparency layer you can add to a map to mark specific locations. The coordinates of the specific locations, (or pin ID's) are usually based on longitude and latitude coordinates. Pin overlays are often used to mark cities on maps.


Population

The population is the entire set of observations of interest.


POST parameter

A POST parameter is not included as part of the URL in a Web query file. They are used when the Web query references POST forms or data.


Play

You can give control of an OLE object to its server application by double-clicking the object. The activity that begins when you play an object (such as playing a sound, displaying a slide show, or editing the object) is determined by the server application.


Precedence

Precedence is the order in which operators are handled in a formula. For example, the multiplication operator (*) has a higher precedence than the addition operator (+); values are multiplied first, then added. Use parentheses to override default precedence. For example, in the following expression, the values will be added first, then multiplied: 7*(6+9).


Primary notebook

A primary notebook is a notebook containing a link to another notebook.


Product commands

A product command is a PerfectScript command that is specific to a product. Product commands perform functions that let you use WordPerfect Office features in your macros. Many product commands require you to specify parameters and enumerations; these give the applications information about which options to select in dialog boxes and whether certain features should be displayed or hidden.


Project templates

Quattro Pro project templates provide you with a skeleton structure for detailed projects. You fill in the details and provide data to complete the project.


Properties

Properties are the characteristics, attributes, or behavior of an object. For example, Alignment and Numeric Format are examples of cell properties. In Quattro Pro, you can access the properties of an object by right-clicking the object.


Protection

Protection is a security measure that prevents the contents of an entire sheet from being changed. Specific cells and graphics (such as charts and OLE objects) within the sheet can then be unprotected.


Property Bar

The property bar contains buttons you can press to perform frequent tasks. The property bar appears above the column letters, and changes depending on what you are working on. For example, when you are working on a graphic, the property bar displays graphics tools. When you are working on a chart, the property bar displays chart tools.


Query

A query is a request that retrieves data from a database. For example, a sum or list of records in a table.


QuickMenu

QuickMenu is a menu that appears when you right-click most items that lists common features. For example, if you right-click a block of selected cells, the QuickMenu menu provides options such as Cut and Copy.


Quick tab button

The Quick tab button is a button at the bottom of the notebook window that lets you jump back and forth between the current sheet and the Objects sheet, which contains icons for all charts and custom dialog boxes in the notebook.

On sheets A through IV, the Quick tab button jumps to the Objects sheet.

On the Objects sheet, the Quick tab button jumps to the current spreadsheet.


QuickTips

QuickTips is an identifying name that appears when you use the mouse to point to an item, such as a toolbar button.


Random Number

The Random number tool generates random variables from various distributions. You can select one of seven types of distributions.


Range

In charting, the range is the scale of numbers against which a data series is plotted.


Rank And Percentile

The Rank and percentile tool computes the ordinal and percent rank of each value in a sample.


Read-only files

Read-only files are files that are already opened by another user or are marked read-only. You have to save a read-only file with a different name.


Recalculation

Recalculation is the act of recomputing formulas after a change in a notebook.


Record

A record is a set of information in a database. In notebook databases, records are set up as rows of data.


Redraw options

You can have a map's color and pattern data update automatically or manually to reflect changes made to the source data.


Reference cell

Cells referenced by a formula, link command, or macro.


Refresh

Updates information from Web queries or Web links in the current document by retrieving any changes from the source data.


Region overlay

A region overlay is the layer of the map that displays a selected region. Every map consists of one region overlay. Multiple region overlays can be used to create maps spanning several regions.


Regression analysis

Regression analysis is a type of analysis that shows how one set of variables is affected by one or more other sets of variables.


Relative cell reference

A relative cell reference is a cell reference that is tracked by its position in relation to the cell containing the formula, not by its absolute address. When you move or copy a formula containing a relative cell reference, the reference is adjusted to reflect its new location.


Replacement string

In a search-and-replace operation, the replacement string is the group of characters which replaces the find string.


Resolution

The resolution refers to the number of dots per inch (DPI) appearing on a printed page. Higher resolutions provide better print quality than lower resolutions.


Right value

The right value is the constant in a constraint expression; that is, the value of the right-most term.


Row and column headings

A row heading is characterized by a number. When you click a row heading, you select the entire row. A column heading is characterized by a letter. When you click a column heading, you select the entire column.


Rows

Fields placed in the Rows section of the Layout area are displayed horizontally along the left side of the spreadsheet.

You must drag at least one field into the Rows section of the Layout area in order to create a CrossTab report.


Sample

The sample is the subset of a population.


Sampling

The Sampling tool creates a random or periodic sample from a given population of values. You can use the Sampling tool to work with a subset of data from a large database. If the population consists of periodic data, you can create a periodic sample to select data from a particular cycle.


Scale

The scale is the range of values assigned to an axis and used for plotting data on a chart. Each numeric axis is scaled to best display the data plotted on it. You can also adjust the scale manually by modifying the axis properties.


Scaling

Print scaling lets you reduce or enlarge the printed output. You can adjust the output by a percentage. For example, specifying 110% enlarges output by 10%, and specifying 90% reduces it by 10%. Or you can specify a maximum width or height in pages.


Scenario

A scenario is a snapshot of a data model. Scenarios show changing data or variable values plugged into a model and the values that result.


Screen slide

A screen slide is the display a user would see if the graphic was converted into a slide in a slide show.


Search criteria

Search criteria are the specifications of which field(s) in a database to search and what data to search for. The first row of the criteria table includes fields to use as search keys. The following rows may include exact values and strings, or conditional formulas to match.


Secondary Y-Axis

The secondary y-axis is an optional vertical scale on the right side of standard (non-rotated) 2-D charts. You can plot any series in 2-D bar, line, variance, and high-low charts on a secondary y-axis.

Adding a secondary y-axis is sometimes used when you have a series that has much higher values than other series in a chart, causing the primary y-axis range to be so large that the lowest values are hardly visible above the x-axis. By plotting the large series against the secondary y-axis, the primary y-axis adjusts to accommodate the other series.


Seed value

The first value in a series. The seed value is used in initiating a series.


Selector

The selector is the bordered rectangle that indicates the active cell.


Sensitivity table

A sensitivity table shows the results of varying one or two essential values in a formula. It is also called a What-if table, because it shows what would happen to other figures if certain values change.


Separator

A separator breaks a toolbar into sections. You can use a separator to categorize toolbar buttons.


Series

The series are cells of data plotted as a group on a chart. Each value in a series is represented by a bar in a bar chart, by a point on a line in a line chart, by a "slice" in a pie chart, and so forth.


Series labels

Series labels are a group of text labels, one of which is placed over each bar in a bar chart, or over each data point in a line chart.


Series list

A list of values which form a series.


Server application

The server application is the application sending data to another through a DDE or OLE link.


Sheet

A sheet is one layer of a notebook. Each notebook over 18,000 spreadsheets and one Objects sheet. Select sheets using the tabs at the bottom of the notebook.


Slack

The slack is the difference between the constraint constant value, also known as the right value, and the value actually used in the solution.


Slide show

A slide show is a series of text and data charts shown full screen in a sequence you choose. You can change the sequence, add transition effects, and control the amount of time each chart stays visible.


Soft page break

Soft page breaks are created automatically according to the paper size selected.


Solve For

The Solve for tool lets you calculate formulas backwards, starting with the result and solving for a variable that produces the result. Specify the solution you want, then indicate which variable can be adjusted to reach the result.


Sort key

The sort key is a column used to sort records. You can sort records in a database by the entries in a given field, such as Date. In other applications, sort keys are sometimes called "sort fields."


Sort selection

A sort selection includes all cells selected from the spreadsheet to sort. If you do not specify all the cells in each row of data you sort, the columns will not match when sorted.


Source cells

Source cells are the original location of data to be copied or moved to destination cells. For example, you can select source cells that display in a list box. When a user chooses an item from the list, the selection displays in a destination cell.


Source Data box

Source data is the data you want to summarize in a CrossTab report. This data is contained either in a Quattro Pro database (a selection of cells), or an external database. You can type the notebook location of your data in the Source data box or use an external data source. All of the fields in the source data appear in the Fields list. You can drag the fields into the different areas of the layout in the CrossTab report dialog box.


Source data

The original data being referenced. Source data is used when linking or embedding files and data. The data originates in another file or application and is copied to, embedded in or linked to a container file.

In a Web query, the source data is the original data from which you obtain the search results.


Spillover text

Spillover text is part of a long label displayed in empty cells to the left or right of where the label was entered.


Spreadsheet

A spreadsheet is one sheet of a notebook. It is organized by rows and columns into cells.


Spreadsheet function

Spreadsheet functions are a set of standard built-in formulas used to simplify complex calculations. Quattro Pro has more than 500 built-in formulas. These spreadsheet functions cover a range of calculations, including database, financial, engineering, and statistical calculations. Some common spreadsheet functions are @SUM and @AVG, which add or average the cell values you reference.


SQL

SQL is an acronym for Structured Query Language. It is a language for constructing, interrogating, and processing data in relational database management systems (RDBMS) on any hardware platform. It is the standard language for network queries across different hardware and software platforms using SQL formats.

It descended from SEQUEL (or Structured English QUEry Language) and was originally designed for databases used in client/server environments.


Standard deviation

The standard deviation is the square root of the variance and it is used most often to describe variability.


Startup folder

The startup folder is the folder used by default for saving and loading files. The startup folder is the directory from which you installed Quattro Pro unless you specify a different folder with the Folder option of the application File options property.


Static overlay

A static overlay is a pre-set overlay included with Quattro Pro. For example, the World Grid overlay adds longitude and latitude lines to your map.


Static parameter

A static parameter is included in the query file. When you create and run a Web query with a static parameter, the parameter name and value is sent directly to the server without prompting the user to specify a parameter value. For example, you can create a Web query to retrieve the stock information for a specific company (a static parameter). When you run the query, the results always retrieve the latest stock information for only that company.


Step value

The constant value to add, multiply or use as an exponent with the value specified in the Start box or previous value.


String values

String values are the labels that appear in an argument.


Style

A style is the set of cell property settings (such as font, shading, and alignment) gathered under a name. You use a style by choosing it from the Style list in the toolbar. You can create new styles by clicking Format [image] Styles.


Subscript

Text that appears lowered and uses a 7 point font size. Subscript is used in mathematics to refer to a number with a base value e.g. x2.


Summary cells

For notebook outlines, the summary cells are the cells containing formulas that summarize (average, subtotal, total, etc.) data in detailed cells.


Superscript

Text that appears raised and uses a seven point font size. Superscript is often used for footnotes or in mathematical equations to indicate exponents e.g. x2.


Supporting file

A supporting file is a file that is referenced by a link from another notebook. The supporting file could be another notebook, another spreadsheet file that Quattro Pro can open, or a file on the Internet.

See also primary notebook.


Syntax

Syntax refers to the rules for the way formulas, spreadsheet functions, and macros must be entered.


System notebook

A system notebook is a notebook that, when hidden, remains open when you close all other notebooks. Application developers can use system notebooks to hold application macros and ensure their availability while Quattro Pro is running.


t-Test

The t-Test tool tests the hypothesis that means from two small samples are equal. t-Tests are provided for samples with matched pairs, for independent samples with equal variances, and for independent samples with unequal variances.


Tab

A tab is a marker you can click to move to the associated sheet of the notebook. Initially, tabs contain the letters of sheets, but you can specify full sheet names with the sheet Name property. Tabs display at the bottom of the notebook window. Also called sheet tab.


Tags

A tag is an XML markup code. XML elements are generally identified with a start tag and an end tag. For example, the start tag for the element Name is <Name> and the end tag is </Name>. The end tag is identified with a backslash.


Template

A template provides a skeleton structure for detailed projects and objects. You fill in the details and provide data to complete the project. You can use a template to save standard property settings or display settings, for example.


Text box

A text box is a graphic design element that can contain word-wrapped text. Text boxes are not based on spreadsheet data; they are blank charts that serve as the foundation for text and pictures you add. Text charts are sometimes called text boxes.


Tick mark

A tick mark is a small line on a chart axis indicating a value.


TIF

TIF is an acronym for Tagged Image File Format. TIF is a standard file format for storing images as bitmap images. It is used especially for scanned images because it can support any size, resolution, and color depth.


Titles

In a sheet, titles are the first cell in a row or column that you can lock into view.

In a chart, titles are lines of explanatory text. You can have two major titles above the chart and one each along the x-axis, the y-axis, and the secondary y-axis.


Toolbar

The Toolbar is the row of buttons and tools you can click just below the menu bar. The contents of the toolbar change according to the current activity.


Transition Effects

Transition effects determine how your slide show moves from one slide to the next.


Twip

A twip is a unit of measurement equal to 1/1440th of an inch.


Two's complement notation

Two's complement notation is a code used to give meaning to a binary string. The sign bit of two's complement notation is the leftmost bit of the word. A number is positive if the sign bit is 0 and negative if it is 1. Negative integers are converted to two's complement by inverting each bit (that is, changing each 1 to a 0 and each 0 to a 1), and then adding 1.


URL

URL is an acronym for Uniform Resource Locator. A URL is a convention for naming an Internet resource, such as a World Wide Web page.

An example

•	http://www.corel.com


Value

A value is any numeric entry in the notebook, entered either as a number, a date, or a formula that calculates a number. In macros, a value can also refer to an alphanumeric variable.


Value (of an object)

A value (of an object) is the current value of a dialog box control. For example, in a combo box, the current selection is the value of the combo box.


Variable

A variable is a part of a formula that can have more than one value. For example, in the formula +B3+8, B3 is a variable whose value changes depending on what is entered in cell B3. The other part of this formula, 8, is a constant. Its value never changes.


Variance

The variance is the average of the squared deviations of scores from the mean of the distribution.


Vector graphics

Images are stored as algebraic equations defining series of points joined by lines. Graphical elements in a vector file are called objects. Each object is a self-contained entity with properties such as color, shape, outline, size, and position on the screen included in its definition.

Since each object is a self-contained entity, you can move and change its properties over and over again while maintaining its original clarity and crispness and without affecting other objects in the image. Compare to bitmap images which are created pixel by pixel in paint programs and by scanners.

Vector graphics are created in illustration applications, such as CorelDRAW, or bitmap image tracing applications, such as Corel OCR-TRACE. Vector formats are not restricted to certain color depths.


Well-formed

A well-formed XML document is one that complies with the well-formedness constraints given in the XML specification issued by the World Wide Web Consortium (W3C).


What-If table

A What-If table is a table that shows the results of varying one or two essential values in a formula. It is also called a sensitivity table because it is sensitive to value changes.


WiIdcard

Wildcards are placeholder characters that can stand for one or more characters. You can use wildcards in search conditions in a find string, when querying a database, when accessing files, and when linking notebooks. There are three wildcards: * represents any number of characters, ? represents a single character, and ~ searches for all labels except those in the search criteria,


Workspace

The workspace is the arrangement of windows and files, including the position and size of windows, and the files contained in each. You can save the current workspace with File [image] Workspace [image] Save.

Workspace files have a .WBS file-name extension.


X-axis

The x-axis is the horizontal line that forms the bottom border of the chart pane. X-axis divisions typically represent categories or time periods. Column labels are interpreted as x-axis labels and each row in your selected block is interpreted as a data series.


X-axis series

X-axis series are cells that contain the labels that are placed at each division of the x-axis. (In XY charts, the x-axis series contains data, instead of labels.) In pie and column charts, the x-axis series places a text label next to the data label on each pie slice or column section.


XML declaration

In Quattro Pro, an XML declaration identifies an XML file and is automatically added to the file when it is published as XML. The syntax for the XML declaration is <?XML VERSION='1.0'?>.


XML/HTML

XML is an abbreviation for eXtensible Markup Language. XML is designed for World Wide Web documents. It enables designers to create their own customized tags to provide functionality not available with HTML.

HTML is an abbreviation for HyperText Markup Language. This is an authoring language used to create documents on the World Wide Web. HTML uses hyperlinks, which allow you to jump World Wide Web page to page.


Y-axis

The y-axis is the vertical line on the left side of the chart pane. It contains a scale, or range of numbers against which a series is plotted. Y-axis labels show the values being represented.


Z-axis

The z-axis projects from the right edge of the x-axis to the back wall of the chart. It is present in many 3-D charts. If a legend series is defined, the legend labels appear along this axis.


Zoom factor

The zoom factor is the enlargement or reduction of the screen display of cells in a notebook. You can change the zoom factor for the entire notebook or for individual sheets. Percentage settings greater than 100% enlarge cells, and settings under 100% reduce them. Zoom factor settings only affect the screen display, not printed size.


Z-Test

The Z-Test tool tests the hypothesis that the means of two large samples (or populations) are equal. It performs a two-sample Z-test.


Adding graphics to spreadsheets

Quattro Pro lets you display spreadsheet data in a wide variety of graphics formats.

In this section, you'll learn about

•	drawing shapes and lines

•	creating text box graphics

•	arranging graphics

•	managing and sharing graphics

•	changing the properties of a shape

•	working in the draw picture window


Drawing shapes and lines

Drawing shapes and lines enhances the look of a spreadsheet. You can access tools for drawing shapes and lines from a toolbar. Quattro Pro lets you draw lines and shapes in a floating graphics window or on a spreadsheet. Some of the shapes available in Quattro Pro include squares, arrows, flowchart shapes, callout shapes, and stars.

 How to


To display the Drawing tools toolbar

1	Click View [image] Toolbars.

2	Enable the Drawing tools check box in the Toolbar list.

 Tip

•	You can dock a floating toolbar, by dragging it to the toolbar area.

 Related topics


To draw a line

1	Click the spreadsheet.

2	Open the Line flyout on the Drawing tools toolbar, and click one of the following buttons:

•	Line [image] lets you draw a straight line

•	Freehand [image] lets you draw a freehand line

•	Arc [image] lets you draw an arc

•	Line double dot [image] lets you draw a line with a dot on each end

•	Arrow [image] lets you draw a straight arrow

•	Double arrow [image] lets you draw a line with an arrow on each end

•	Line dot arrow [image] lets you draw a line with a dot on one end and an arrow on the other

3	Position the pointer where you want to start the line.

4	Drag to draw the line.

 Tips

•	You can draw lines in a floating graphics window by clicking in the center of the window.

•	You can also draw a line by clicking Insert [image] Shapes, and clicking Line.

•	You can close an open shape created with the Freehand drawing tool by double-clicking the shape (you will see small white circles wherever the line curved when creating the shape), and dragging one of the end points to join with the other end point. The closed shape automatically has a default fill color. For information about changing the fill color of drawn objects, see "To fill a shape."

 Related topics


To draw a polyline or polycurve

1	Click the spreadsheet.

2	Open the Line flyout on the Drawing tools toolbar, and click one of the following buttons:

•	Polycurve [image] lets you insert a line with multiple curves

•	Polyline [image] lets you draw a line with any number of straight segments

•	Polyline arrow [image] lets you draw a polyline with an arrow on the end

•	Polyline double arrow [image] lets you draw a polyline with an arrow on each end

•	Polyline dot arrow [image] lets you draw a polyline with a dot on one end and an arrow on the other

3	Position the pointer where you want to start the line.

4	Drag the pointer to draw a segment.

5	Double-click to end the polyline or polycurve.

 Tip

•	You can draw a polyline or polycurve in a floating graphics window by clicking in the center of the window.

 Related topics


To draw a shape

1	Click the spreadsheet.

2	Open one of the following flyouts on the Drawing tools toolbar:

•	Basic shapes

•	Arrow shapes

•	Flowchart shapes

•	Callout shapes

•	Star shapes

3	Click to choose a shape.

4	Drag the pointer to draw.

 Tips

•	You can draw a shape in a floating chart window by clicking in the center of the window.

•	If you want to create a perfect square or circle, hold down Shift while dragging.

•	You can also draw shapes by clicking Insert [image] Shapes, and clicking a shape.

 Related topics


Creating text box graphics

Quattro Pro lets you create a text box. You can link a label cell to a text box so that the text box displays the text in the cell.

 You can add bullets to a text box by typing a reference code. The following shows the available bullets and the codes that create them:

Once you create a text box, you can modify its properties to achieve a variety of different effects. You can customize text box borders and box type. Quattro Pro also lets you convert regular text in 3-D text or create a text box with a transparent box border.

 How to


To create a text box

1	Click Insert [image] Shapes [image] Text box.

2	Drag to create the text box.

 Tips

•	You can also create a text box by clicking the Text box button on the Drawing tools toolbar.

•	You can add a text box to a chart or map by clicking the center of the chart or map.

 Related topics


To link a label cell to a text box

1	Click a text box.

2	Type a backslash (\), a forward slash (/), the cell reference, and a closing backslash.

For example, \/A:A1\

3	Click outside the text box.

 Related topics


To add bullets to a text box

1	Click a text box.

2	In a text box, type a bullet code,

For example, \BLT1\ or \BLT2\.

3	Click outside the text box.

 Note

•	For a complete list of bullet codes, see "Creating text box graphics."

 Related topics


To customize a text box border or box type

1	Click a text box.

2	Click Format [image] Selection properties.

3	Click any of the following tabs, and modify any settings:

•	Alignment [image] lets you change alignment

•	Text font [image] lets you change face, size, and appearance

•	Text settings [image] lets you change the fill style and color of the text

•	Box settings [image] lets you change the frame around the text box

•	Fill settings [image] lets you change the background of the text box

 Related topics


To convert text in a text box to 3-D

1	Click a text box.

2	Click Format [image] Selection properties.

3	Click the Text settings tab.

4	Choose 3-D from the Fill style list box.

5	Click a 3-D style from the 3-D style palette.

6	Open the Color palette, and click a color.

7	Open the Background color palette, and click a background color.

8	Move the Perspective slider.

If you want to shade the text, enable the Shaded check box.

 Related topics


To create a text box with a transparent box border

1	Click a text box.

2	Click Format [image] Selection properties.

3	Click the Box settings tab.

4	Open the Fill color palette, and click No color.

5	Click No frame on the palette.

 Related topics


Arranging graphics

Quattro Pro lets you select multiple graphics. Once you have selected a graphic, you can move it. You can also move or size a text box.

You can group two or more graphics in a floating graphics window to manipulate them as a single graphic in subsequent operations. Once you group graphics, you can move and resize them as a single object.

Multiple selected graphics can be aligned within the floating graphics window. You can also position and space graphics with the window.

A layer is one of a series of transparent planes on which you can place objects in a drawing. You can control how objects overlay each other by moving the layer and the objects they contain. Use layers to organize different components of complex drawings.

 How to


To select multiple graphics

1	Click the Select objects button on the Drawing tools toolbar.

2	Marquee select the graphics.

You can also
Select a graphic	Click the graphic.
Select a group of graphics	Click a graphic in a group.
Select multiple graphics individually	Click a graphic. Hold down Shift and click additional graphics.
Deselect a graphic	Hold down Shift, and click a graphic.
 Related topics


To move a graphic

1	Select a graphic.

2	Drag the graphic to a new location.

You can also
Change the height or width of a graphic	Select a graphic, and drag a top, bottom, or side selection handle
Change the height or width of a graphic proportionally	Select a graphic, and drag a corner selection handle diagonally.
 Related topics


To move or size a text box

1	Select the text box border.

2	Drag one of the following:

•	the border [image] lets you move the text box to a new location

•	a sizing handle [image] lets you size the text box

•	a corner selection handle [image] lets you size the text box proportionately

 Related topics


To group graphics

1	Click in the floating graphics window.

2	Hold down Shift, and click the graphics.

3	Click Format [image] Group.

You can also
Group a graphic using a toolbar button	Click the Group button on the property bar.
Ungroup a graphic using a toolbar button	Click the Ungroup button on the property bar.
Nest groups within groups	Select groups and individual graphics. Click Format [image] Group.
 Tip

•	You can also group graphics in the draw picture window by clicking in the window.

 Related topics


To align multiple graphics

1	Click in the floating graphics window.

2	Hold down Shift, and click the graphics.

3	Click Format [image] Align.

4	Click one of the following alignment options:

•	Align left

•	Align right

•	Align top

•	Align bottom

 Related topics


To position multiple graphics

1	Click in the floating graphics window.

2	Hold down Shift, and click the graphics.

3	Click Format [image] Position.

4	Click one of the following alignment options:

•	Center horizontally

•	Center vertically

 Related topics


To adjust spacing between multiple graphics

1	Click in the floating graphics window.

2	Hold down Shift, and click the graphics.

3	Click Format [image] Space.

4	Click one of the following alignment options:

•	Horizontal space

•	Vertical space

5	In the Distance dialog box, type a value in the Space between objects box.

 Related topics


To arrange graphic layers

1	Select a graphic.

2	Click Format [image] Object order.

3	Click of the following options:

•	Bring forward [image] moves the graphic one layer closer to the top

•	Send backward [image] moves the graphic one layer closer to the bottom

•	Bring to front [image] brings the graphic to the front of the layers

•	Send to back [image] sends the graphic to the bottom layer

 Tip

•	You can also arrange graphic layers by clicking the Object layer button on the Drawing tools toolbar.

 Related topics


Viewing graphics

Quattro Pro lets you change the aspect ratio of a graphic in a floating graphics window.

You can enlarged a floating graphics window to increase your view of a graphics. You can continue to edit a graphic that is in this view.

You can also display a full-screen view of a graphic in a floating graphics window.

 How to


To change the aspect ratio of a graphic in a floating graphics window

1	Click the floating graphics window.

2	Click View.

3	Click any of the following view options:

•	Floating chart [image] retains the proportions of the floating graphic, even when you print the graphic or display it on its own page

•	Screen slide [image] displays the correct proportions for graphics that you plan to use in an onscreen slide show

•	35mm slide [image] displays the correct proportions for a graphic that you plan to send to a slide service for processing into 35 mm slides

•	Printer preview [image] displays how the graphic looks when printed with the current page setup

 Related topics


To view a graphic in an enlarged floating graphics window

•	Right-click the floating graphics window, and click Open.

 Related topics


To display a full-screen view of a floating graphics window

1	Click the floating graphics window.

2	Click Graphics [image] View.

 Related topics


Managing and sharing graphics

Quattro Pro lets you delete a shape or line on a spreadsheet. You can also delete a graphic in a floating graphics window or delete the whole floating graphics window.

Quattro Pro lets you export a floating graphics window to file. You can import a copy of a graphic created in other applications into a spreadsheet or a floating graphics window. You can also add an Internet graphic to a spreadsheet.

You can paste an image into Microsoft Paint to save it as a separate object. Any annotations added to a chart or map remain with the chart or map when exported.

Before you can import or export a graphic, check to see whether the graphic format is one of the types compatible with this version of Quattro Pro. For more information about compatible graphic formats, see "Graphic formats for importing" and "Graphic formats for exporting."

 How to


To delete a shape or line on a spreadsheet

1	Click a shape or line.

2	Click Edit [image] Clear [image] Cells.

 Tip

•	You can also press Delete to remove a selected shape or line.

 Related topics


To delete a floating graphic window

1	Select the graphic.

2	Click Graphics [image] Delete chart.

 Related topics


To export a floating graphics window to file.

1	Click the in floating graphics window.

2	Click Chart [image] Export to file.

3	Click the browse button next to the Filename box.

4	Choose a file format from the File type list box.

5	Choose the drive where you want to save the file from the Save In list box.

6	Double-click the folder in which you want to save the file.

7	Type a filename in the Filename list box, then click Save.

If you want to save the floating graphics window without colors enable the Bitmap Gray Scale check box.

 Notes

•	The Bitmap Gray Scale option is not available for .EPS files.

•	.GIF files must be exported when you are in 256-color (or less) mode.

•	.JPG files can only be exported in true color mode.

 Related topics


To import graphics in other formats

1	Click a spreadsheet.

2	Click Insert [image] Graphics [image] From file.

3	Choose the drive and folder where you want the graphic stored.

4	Double-click a file.

 Tip

•	You can also import graphics in other formats by clicking in a floating graphics window.

 Related topics


To add an Internet graphic to a spreadsheet

1	Start Netscape Navigator

2	Open the notebook in which to put the graphic.

3	Locate the graphic on the Internet.

4	Drag the graphic to your spreadsheet.

 Note

•	You must have Microsoft Internet Explorer installed to use the drag and drop feature in Netscape Navigator. For more information about working with Internet graphics, see "Linking to Web graphics."

 Tip

•	You can also add an Internet graphic to a spreadsheet by clicking Insert [image] File, and specifying the name of a graphic file.

 Related topics


To paste a Quattro Pro image into Microsoft Paint

1	Select the area you want to include in the image.

The area must be contiguous.

2	Click Edit [image] Copy.

3	Click Start [image] Programs [image] Accessories [image] Microsoft Paint.

4	Click Edit [image] Paste.

 Related topics


Changing the properties of a shape

Quattro Pro lets you modify any shape you create or insert. You can change the border style of a shape and add a shadow to the border.

Quattro Pro lets you fill a shape with a pattern, gradient, texture or picture. Once you fill a shape with a picture, or texture, you can modify the fill settings.

You can make shapes in a spreadsheet transparent. One way to use a transparent shape is for creating a watermark on a spreadsheet. If you mark the shape as transparent, the background color won't display.

 How to


To change the border style of a shape

1	Select a shape.

2	Click Format [image] Selection properties.

3	Click the Line tab.

4	Open the Style picker, and click a border style.

You can also
Change the border color	Open the Color picker, and click a color.
Change the border width	Open the Width picker, and click a width.
Change the corner style	Open the Joints picker, and click a corner style.
Change the starting cap style of a line	Open the Starting cap picker, and click a starting cap.
Change the ending cap style of a line	Open the Ending cap picker, and click an ending cap.
 Related topics


To add a shadow to the border of a shape

1	Select a shape.

2	Click Format [image] Selection properties.

3	Click the Shadow tab.

4	Click a direction on the Direction of shadow palette.

5	Open the Shadow color picker, and click a color.

If you want a transparent shadow, enable the Use a transparent shadow check box.

 Tip

•	You can change the width of the shadow offset by typing a value in the Side-to-side offset box or the Up-and-down offset box.

 Related topics


To fill a shape

1	Select a graphic.

2	Click Format [image] Selection properties.

3	Click the Fill tab.

4	Click Pattern in the Fill styles area.

5	Click a pattern on the palette.

6	Open the Fill color picker, and click a color.

7	Open the Pattern color picker, and click a color.

If you want to reverse the colors of the pattern, click Reverse colors.

You can also
Display no background	Click No fill in the Fill styles area.
Display a gradient background	Click Gradient in the Fill styles area.
Display a textured background	Click Texture in the Fill styles area. Choose a category from the Category list box. Click a texture on the palette.
Display a picture background	Click Picture in the Fill styles area. Choose a category from the Category list box. Click a picture on the palette.
 Related topics


To modify texture settings of a texture-filled shape

1	Select a shape.

2	Click Format [image] Selection properties.

3	Click the Fill tab.

4	Click Texture in the Fill styles area.

5	Click Texture settings.

6	In the Texture settings dialog box, enable one of the following options:

•	Anchor the texture to the page [image] repeats the texture in relation to the entire page so that as you move or size the object, it shows a different part of the texture

•	Anchor the texture to the object [image] repeats the texture in the object so that the texture remains with the object as you size or move it

7	In the Fill method area, click one of the following buttons:

•	Alternating [image] fills every other enclosed area

•	Winding [image] fills the enclosed areas, including overlapping areas

 Related topics


To modify the picture settings of a bitmap image in a shape

1	Click a shape.

2	Click Format [image] Selection properties.

3	Click the Fill tab.

4	Click Picture in the Fill styles area.

5	Click Picture settings.

6	In the Picture settings dialog box, enable one of the following options in the Layout area:

•	Tile [image] displays the bitmap image in a tiled pattern

•	Brick horizontal [image] displays the bitmap image in a horizontally offset brick pattern

•	Brick vertical [image] displays the bitmap image in a vertically offset brick pattern

•	Stretch/shrink to fit area [image] enlarges or reduces the bitmap image to fill the shape

•	Scale to fit area [image] adjusts the bitmap image proportionally to fit the shape

•	Stack [image] stacks the bitmap image on top of itself

7	In the Fill method area, click one of the following buttons:

•	Alternating [image] fills every other enclosed area

•	Winding [image] fills the enclosed areas, including overlapping areas

 Related topics


To make a shape transparent

1	Click a shape.

2	Click Format [image] Selection properties.

3	Click the Fill tab.

4	Click Pattern.

5	Click Pattern settings.

6	In the Pattern settings dialog box, enable one of the following options in the Transparent color area:

•	Fill color [image] makes the fill color transparent

•	Pattern color [image] makes the pattern color transparent

7	In the Fill method area, click one of the following buttons:

•	Alternating [image] fills every other enclosed area

•	Winding [image] fills the enclosed areas, including overlapping area

 Note

•	You can make only one color in a pattern transparent.

 Related topics


Working in the draw picture window

Opening the draw picture window gives you access to the Corel Presentations drawing tools. For instance, some of these tools include special drawing toolbars that let you click buttons to select drawing tools, line widths, color selections, and special effects.

You can also align or center drawn graphics in the draw picture window and adjust the amount of space between graphics. You can align

•	single objects [image] align with respect to the draw window margins

•	multiple objects [image] align all objects within the selection area

 How to


To open the draw picture window

•	Click Insert [image] Graphics [image] Draw picture.

 Note

•	For more information on the draw picture window, consult the Corel Presentations Help.

 Related topics


To align or center graphics in the draw picture window

1	Select a graphic.

2	Click Edit [image] Arrange [image] Align objects.

3	Click one of the following alignment types:

•	Left [image] aligns the left sides of the selected graphic with the left margin of the draw window

•	Right [image] aligns the right sides of the selected graphic with the right margin of the draw window

•	Top [image] aligns the top edges of the selected graphic with the top margin of the draw window

•	Bottom [image] aligns the bottom edges of the selected graphic with the bottom margin of the draw window

•	Center left/right [image] aligns the graphic vertically in the center of the draw window

•	Center top/bottom [image] aligns the graphic horizontally in the center of the draw window

•	Center both [image] moves multiple selected graphics to the center of the draw window

 Related topics


To space graphics in the draw picture window

1	Select the graphics.

2	Click Edit [image] Arrange [image] Space evenly.

3	Click one of the following spacing types:

•	Left/right [image] spaces the graphics horizontally

•	Top/bottom [image] spaces the graphics vertically

 Tip

•	You can also align chart and dialog box graphics by right-clicking the chart or the dialog box title bar and clicking Grid [image] Snap to grid.

 Related topics


Using Microsoft IntelliMouse

Quattro Pro provides Microsoft IntelliMouse users with enhanced zooming and scrolling capabilities.

For the IntelliMouse to work correctly, it must be installed properly with the necessary software. For more information about using your IntelliMouse, see its accompanying documentation.

In this section, you'll learn about

•	zooming and scrolling with Microsoft IntelliMouse


Zooming and scrolling with Microsoft IntelliMouse

Enhanced zoom control lets you zoom in or out to the view you need when working with spreadsheets.

Quattro Pro lets you scroll with IntelliMouse and change the IntelliMouse settings.

Quattro Pro also lets you use AutoScroll with your Microsoft IntelliMouse. AutoScroll lets you quickly scroll through a spreadsheet. AutoScroll is enabled each time you click the IntelliMouse Wheel. When you click the IntelliMouse wheel (or center mouse button of any three-button mouse), a graphic spot displays where you clicked. You can then move the mouse to scroll the screen from the spot in the direction you move the mouse. The farther away from the spot you move the mouse, the faster the screen scrolls.

 How to


To zoom in or out with Microsoft IntelliMouse

•	Hold down CTRL and rotate the IntelliMouse wheel.

Quattro Pro increases or decreases the zoom level incrementally for each notch on the IntelliMouse wheel.

 Related topics


To scroll using Microsoft IntelliMouse

•	Rotate the IntelliMouse wheel in the direction you want to scroll (up or down).

 Related topics


To change Microsoft IntelliMouse settings

1	Click the Start button on the Windows taskbar, and click Settings [image] Control panel.

2	Double-click the Mouse icon.

3	In the Mouse properties dialog box, click the Wheel tab.

4	In the Wheel area, enable the Turn on the wheel check box.

5	Click Settings.

6	In the Settings for wheel dialog box, enable the Reverse the response your programs have when you roll the wheel check box.

7	Enable the Scroll option in the Scrolling area.

8	Type a value in the Lines at a time box.

 Note

•	Quattro Pro is permanently set to scroll forward or back three rows for each notch on the IntelliMouse wheel.

 Related topics


To AutoScroll with Microsoft IntelliMouse

1	Click the Start button on the Windows taskbar and click Settings [image] Control panel.

2	Double-click the Mouse icon.

3	In the Mouse properties dialog box, click the Wheel tab.

4	In the Wheel button area, enable the Turn on the wheel button check box.

5	Choose Default from the Button assignment list box.

6	Using the IntelliMouse wheel, click in Quattro Pro to position the AutoScroll central point.

The AutoScroll central point determines the direction and speed of AutoScroll.

7	Move your mouse in the direction you want to scroll.

 Tip

•	If you want to stop AutoScroll, you can press any key or mouse button.

 Related topics


Working with the Internet

Quattro Pro provides the power of spreadsheet functions combined with Internet connectivity. With Quattro Pro, you can use HTML and XML to publish spreadsheets to the World Wide Web. You can also use Web querying and Web linking capabilities to add a dynamic element to your work.

In this section, you'll learn about

•	publishing spreadsheet data in HTML

•	setting HTML style options

•	using XML with Quattro Pro

•	working with Web queries

•	working with Web links

•	linking to Web graphics

For more information about working with the Internet, see "Reference: Working with the Internet."


Publishing spreadsheet data in HTML

Using Quattro Pro, you can save spreadsheet ranges as Hypertext Markup Language (HTML) documents. You can also save charts as HTML documents. As well, you can reorganize HTML documents to move or delete cell ranges.

To an HTML document you can add such information as when the document was last updated, who wrote the document and their email address, and the title of the document. You can also add hidden meta text to the HTML file which allows you to specify keywords to produce hits when performing searches on the Internet.

 How to


To save a spreadsheet range as an HTML document

1	Click File [image] Publish to Internet.

2	In the Ranges and charts to convert area, click the Range picker and select a range of cells.

3	Click Add.

4	In the Export range as area, enable one of the following options:

•	Table [image] exports HTML table formatting tags

•	Text [image] exports only text, excluding HTML table formatting tags

5	Type a path and filename in the Save file box.

 Related topics


To save a table or chart as an HTML document

1	Click File [image] Publish to Internet.

2	In the Ranges and charts to convert area, click Chart.

3	In the View chart dialog box, choose a chart from the Selected chart list.

4	Type a path and filename in the Save file box.

If you want to save tables or charts in an existing HTML file, enable the Insert only tables and charts into existing HTML file check box.

 Note

•	When using Insert only tables and charts into existing HTML file, the selected ranges are inserted into the file specified in the Save file box at the <!- -## TABLE ##- - > tag if the file contains an HTML table, or at the <!- -## CHART## - - > tag if the file contains an HTML chart. If the specified file does not contain a <!- -## TABLE ##- -> or <!- - ## CHART ##- -> tag, the selected ranges are appended to the end of the file.

 Related topics


To reorganize an HTML document

1	Click File [image] Publish to Internet.

2	Choose a cell range or chart from the Ranges and charts to convert list.

3	Click one of the following:

•	Delete [image] deletes the cell range or chart from the HTML file

•	Move up [image] moves the cell range or chart up one item in the list of ranges

•	Move down [image] moves the cell range or chart down one item in the list of ranges

 Related topics


To add document information to an HTML document

1	Click File [image] Publish to Internet.

2	Type a path and filename in the Save file box.

3	In the Document info area, type information in any of the following boxes:

•	Last updated on [image] lets you add the date on which the document was last updated; by default, Quattro Pro automatically enters the date saved according to your system's internal date

•	By [image] lets you add the name of the person who updated the document; by default, Quattro Pro automatically enters the name stored in the login setting

•	Email [image] lets you add an email address to which Internet users can send email

•	Title [image] lets you add a title to display in the title bar of the document

 Tip

•	You can also choose an HTML document by clicking Browse.

 Related topics


To add meta text to an HTML document

1	Click File [image] Publish to Internet.

2	Type a path and filename in the Save file box.

3	In the Meta text area, type information in any of the following boxes:

•	Header [image] lets you add a name to display in the heading section of the HTML source code

•	Description below header [image] lets you add keywords or a description of the document

 Notes

•	If you entered a subject in the document summary, it displays in the Header box. In the HTML source code, the header text displays as meta text in the heading section. For more information about document summaries, see "To record summary information about a notebook."

•	If you entered comments in the document summary, they display in the Description below header box. In the HTML source code, the keywords and description display as meta text in the heading section. For more information about document summaries, see "To record summary information about a notebook."

 Tip

•	You can also choose an HTML document by clicking Browse.

 Related topics


Setting HTML style options

You can set the graphic type when you export a chart to an HTML document. For example, you can set the graphic to appear as a Graphics Interchange Format (*.GIF), or as a Joint Photographic Experts Group (*.JPG) file.

You can set page layout options to display spreadsheet data on a single page, on a frame-enhanced page, or on multiple pages. A frame-enhanced page is divided into three frames. One frame contains a list of hyperlinks to each Web page created. When you click a hyperlink, the corresponding Web page displays in the second frame. The third frame contains the HTML document information (for example, email address, author, or date the document was last updated). When you display data on multiple pages, Quattro Pro creates a separate index page, instead of a frame, which contains hyperlinks to each Web page created. When you click a hyperlink, the corresponding Web page displays in the browser.

By default, Quattro Pro uses the color settings associated with your Web browser for the text, hyperlinks, and background on a Web page. You can customize these color settings.

 How to


To set the graphic type for an HTML document

1	Click File [image] Publish to Internet.

2	Type a path and filename in the Save file box.

3	Click Options.

4	In the Publish to HTML options dialog box, enable one of the following options:

•	Graphics Interchange Format (*.GIF)

•	Joint Photographic Experts Group (*.JPG)

 Tip

•	You can also choose an HTML document by clicking Browse.

 Related topics


To set the page layout for an HTML document

1	Click File [image] Publish to Internet.

2	Type a path and filename in the Save file box.

3	Click Options.

4	In the Publish to HTML options dialog box, enable one of the following options:

•	Single page [image] publishes cell ranges or charts on one Web page

•	Frame-enhanced page [image] publishes cell ranges or charts using a frame-enhanced Web page

•	Multiple pages [image] publishes cell ranges or charts on multiple Web pages

 Notes

•	Frame-enhanced pages can be viewed only by Web browsers that support frames.

•	When you enable the frame-enhanced page or multiple pages options Quattro Pro creates separate Web pages for each range of selected data to convert to HTML.

 Tip

•	You can also choose an HTML document by clicking Browse.

 Related topics


To customize color settings for an HTML document

1	Click File [image] Publish to Internet.

2	Type a path and filename in the Save file box.

3	Click Options.

4	In the Publish to HTML options dialog box, enable the Use my color settings option.

5	In the Color settings area, make choices for any of the following settings:

•	Text color [image] lets you select the color of the text

•	Link color [image] lets you select the color of the hyperlinks

•	Background color [image] lets you select the color of the page background

•	Background wallpaper [image] lets you select a graphics file to display as the background

 Notes

•	Quattro Pro automatically applies colors used in the spreadsheet to the HTML document for such items as text and background colors.

•	Quattro Pro converts colors in a spreadsheet to their corresponding Red Green Blue (RGB) hex values in the HTML document. For information about RGB hex values, see "Color control."

 Tip

•	You can also choose an HTML document by clicking Browse.

 Related topics


Using XML with Quattro Pro

Quattro Pro gives you the flexibility to manually or automatically create XML tags. Tags can be created automatically either from labels or from row and column titles. You can also display an output of the XML tags that have been created.

As well, you can use Quattro Pro to create top-level root elements and then publish tagged data as an XML file.

 How to


To manually create XML tags

1	Select a cell or range of cells containing text to use to create XML tags.

2	Click Insert [image] XML tags.

3	In the Tag box, type the name of the tag.

4	Click Add.

 Related topics


To automatically create XML tags from labels

1	Select a cell or range of cells to use to create XML tags.

2	Click Insert [image] XML tags.

3	Click Labels.

4	In the Direction area enable one of the following options:

•	Right [image] creates XML tags for the cell immediately to the right of any valid cells in the selected range

•	Left [image] creates XML tags for the cells immediately to the left of any valid cells in the selected range

•	Down [image] creates XML tags for any cells immediately below all valid cells in the selected range

•	Up [image] creates XML tags for any cells immediately above all valid cells in the selected range

 Note

•	For additional information about creating XML tags, see "Example: XML tag creation."

 Related topics


To automatically create XML tags from row or column titles

1	Click Insert [image] XML tags.

2	Click Generate.

3	In the Generate XML tags dialog box, click the Range picker, and select the cells to tag.

Include the designated labels or headings to use to create the XML tags in the selected cell range.

4	In the Create XML tags area, enable any of the following check boxes:

•	Under top row [image] creates an XML tag for each cell in the selected range, excluding the top row. The XML tags created are based on the text in the top row.

•	Right of left-most column [image] creates an XML tag for each cell in the selected range, excluding the left-most column. The XML tags created are based on the text in the left-most column.

•	Above bottom row [image] creates an XML tag for each cell in the selected range, excluding the bottom row. The XML tags created are based on the text in the bottom row.

•	Left of right-most column [image] creates an XML tag for each cell in the selected range, excluding the right-most column. The XML tags created are based on the text in the right-most column.

•	Tag cells at intersections [image] creates a compound XML tag definition for each intersecting cell that includes a row and column label. The XML tags created incorporate both the row and column labels.

 Note

•	For additional information about creating XML tags, see "Example: XML tag creation."

 Related topics


To display XML tags

1	Click Insert [image] XML tags.

2	Click Output.

3	In the Tag table dialog box, type a cell location in the Cells box.

 Note

•	The cell you specify in the Cells box should be in a new area of the spreadsheet, where existing data won't be overwritten by the output column.

 Related topics


To create a top-level root element

1	Type a period in each cell around the perimeter of the cell block you want to publish.

2	Click Insert [image] XML tags.

3	In the XML tags dialog box, choose the cell range of all the cells you want to include in the root element.

Include the designated labels, headings, and periods used to create the XML tags in the selected cell range.

 Note

•	XML files can contain only one root element. When publishing with the default range, several root elements are created at the same level so that XML-compliant parsers return an error message.

 Tip

•	You can also choose the cell range of all the cells you want to include in the root element by clicking Generate and dragging to select the cells.

 Related topics


To publish tagged data as an XML file

1	Click File [image] Publish to [image] Publish to XML.

2	Click the Range picker and select a range of cells.

3	Type a path and filename in the Save file box.

4	Click Publish.

 Related topics


Working with Web queries

You can create and run a Web query to retrieve information stored on the Internet and insert it directly into a spreadsheet without using a browser. For example, you can use a Web query to retrieve the latest stock quotes from the Internet and place them in a spreadsheet table. By default, when you run a Web query, you automatically create a link between the retrieved data and the Internet source data.

You can change the way in which information is obtained when you run a query. As well, various Web query options can be set to help you customize the formatting of the query.

You can insert specific Web query data into a notebook at selected positions in a range of cells. Refresh intervals can be set to keep data current.

 How to


To create a Web query

1	Click Tools [image] Internet [image] Create Web query.

2	In the URL box, type a URL.

Include the search parameters of the URL in the text string (for example, to retrieve stock quotes type http://quote.pathfinder.com/money/quote/qc?symbols=["symbols", "Enter one or several company symbols separated by spaces:"]).

3	Type a path and filename in the Save to box.

 Tip

•	If a parameter is not part of the URL, type it in the POST parameters box.

 Related topics


To run a Web query

1	Click Tools [image] Internet [image] Run Web query.

2	Choose the drive and folder where the Web query is stored.

3	Double-click the filename.

4	In the Run Web query dialog box, click the Data tab.

5	Enable the New notebook option.

6	Click OK.

If a parameter is required for the query, type it in the Enter parameter value dialog box which appears.

7	In the Web query preview dialog box, select the cell or range of cells in the preview window that you wish to query.

8	Click the Range picker and select the cell or range of cells on the spreadsheet to link to the Internet source data.

 Notes

•	If you don't want to preview the Web document, disable the Preview Web document before loading in the notebook check box in the Run Web query dialog box.

•	Quattro Pro uses an .iqy file to run a Web query. You can use the query files provided with Quattro Pro, or you can create your own .iqy files. For information on creating Web query files, see "To create a Web query." Sample query files are stored in the queries folder that is installed with WordPerfect Office, or you can run .iqy files that you find on the Internet or obtain through your Web administrator.

 Tip

•	If you are not sure how much area you require when putting Web query results into an existing notebook, type the coordinates of a single cell as the starting location. Ensure that the area beneath and to the right of the cell is clear of data.

 Related topics


To change how a Web query obtains a parameter value

1	Click Tools [image] Internet [image] Run Web query.

2	Choose the drive and folder where the Web query is stored.

3	Double-click the filename.

4	In the Run Web query dialog box, click the Parameters tab.

5	In the Get the data for parameter using area, enable one of the following options:

•	The following prompt string [image] displays a dialog box with the instructions you type in the box. The dialog box displays during the query, and typically the instructions prompt a particular value to be entered.

•	The following value [image] lets you specify a value (for example, a company stock symbol) by typing it in the box

•	The value from the following cell [image] lets you type the cell address or range in the notebook from which a value (for example, a company stock symbol) can be retrieved

 Related topics


To set Web query options

1	Click Tools [image] Internet [image] Run Web query.

2	Choose the drive and folder where the Web query is stored.

3	Double-click the filename.

4	In the Run Web query dialog box, click Options.

5	In the Web query options dialog box, enable any of the following options:

•	Save Web query as Web link [image] creates a link between the source data and the retrieved Web query data in the spreadsheet

•	Import only tables from HTML file [image] inserts only tables from the HTML file to the spreadsheet

•	Automatically size columns to fit data [image] adjusts the column width to fit the data from the HTML document

•	Retain HTML formatting and layout [image] applies the format and layout of the HTML document to the spreadsheet

•	Refresh data on file open [image] updates the Web query data in your spreadsheet each time the file is opened

 Related topics


To insert specific Web query data

1	Click Tools [image] Internet [image] Run Web query.

2	Choose the drive and folder where the Web query is stored.

3	Double-click the filename.

4	In the Run Web query dialog box, click the Data tab.

5	Enable the Existing notebook option.

6	Click OK.

If a parameter is required for the query, type it in the Enter parameter value dialog box which appears.

7	In the Web query preview dialog box, select the cell or range of cells in the preview window that you wish to query.

8	Click the Range picker and select the cell or range of cells on the spreadsheet to link to the Internet source data.

9	Click Link, and enable one of the following options:

•	Wrap data to beginning of range [image] loads the source data at the beginning of a cell or cell range and replaces existing data. If the cell range is full of refreshed data, you can clear the range before loading the next value into the first cell of the range by enabling the Clear data on wrap check box.

•	Insert data at end of range [image] loads the source data at the end of the cell range, and shifts the previous values up or left in the range with each subsequent refresh

•	Insert data at beginning of range [image] loads the source data at the beginning of the cell range, and shifts all previous values down or to the right in the range with each subsequent refresh

 Note

•	For information on setting a refresh interval for your web query, see To set a Web query refresh interval.

 Related topics


To set a Web query refresh interval

1	In the Web query preview dialog box, click Link.

2	In the Refresh interval area, specify one of the following settings:

•	Refresh every [image] select a unit and time interval from the list box. Acceptable ranges are as follows: seconds 1 to 59, minutes 1 to 59, hours 1 to 24, days 1 to 10.

•	Start refresh at [image] type a start time, and choose either A.M. or P.M

•	End refresh at [image] type an end time, and choose either A.M. or P.M

•	Start day [image] choose a start day from the list box

•	End day [image] choose an end day from the list box

 Related topics


Working with Web links

Using Quattro Pro, you can create Web links, which allow you to retrieve data from the Internet and place it into a notebook. You can access (HTTP), gopher, and File Transfer Protocol (FTP) sites.

You can refresh Web link data in a range of cells. For example, you can track a company's stock price changes over the course of a day at hourly intervals. As well, you can manually refresh Web links, or set automatic refresh intervals to update linked data. You can also edit and delete Web links.

 How to


To create a Web link

1	Click File [image] Open.

2	Type a URL in the Filename box.

3	Click Open.

4	Find the cell containing the relevant information and note its location.

5	Select the destination cell where you want the link to display.

6	Type +[URL]Sheet:Cell reference

Sheet:Cell reference is where the information displayed when you opened it in a notebook. For example, +[http://www.corel.ca/product/prod.htm]C:B9

7	In the Link to box, type the cell location where you want the information to display.

 Note

•	Web links are saved along with the notebook.

 Tip

•	You can also select the cell where you want the information to display by clicking the Range picker and selecting the cell.

 Related topics


To refresh Web link data in a range of cells

1	Select a cell that contains a Web link.

2	Click Tools [image] Internet [image] Edit Web link.

3	In the Link to box, click the Range picker and select the range of cells.

4	Enable one of the following options:

•	Wrap data to beginning of range [image] loads the source data at the beginning of a cell or cell range, and replaces existing data

•	Insert data at end of range [image] loads the source data at the end of the cell range, and shifts the previous values up or left in the range with each subsequent refresh

•	Insert data at beginning of range [image] loads the source data at the beginning of the cell range, and shifts all previous values down or to the right in the range with each subsequent refresh

 Related topics


To manually refresh a Web link

1	Click Edit [image] Links [image] Refresh links.

2	Click a link.

 Related topics


To set a Web link refresh interval

1	Select a cell that contains a Web link.

2	Click Tools [image] Internet [image] Edit Web link.

3	In the Refresh interval area, specify one of the following settings:

•	Refresh every [image] select a unit and time interval from the list box. Acceptable ranges are as follows: seconds 1 to 59, minutes 1 to 59, hours 1 to 24, days 1 to 10.

•	Start refresh at [image] type a start time, and choose either A.M. or P.M

•	End refresh at [image] type an end time, and choose either A.M. or P.M

•	Start day [image] choose a start day from the list box

•	End day [image] choose an end day from the list box

 Related topics


To edit a Web link

1	Select a cell containing a Web link.

2	Click Tools [image] Internet [image] Edit Web link.

3	Modify any settings.

 Related topics


To delete a Web link

1	Click Edit [image] Links [image] Delete links.

2	Click a link.

 Related topics


Linking to Web graphics

Quattro Pro lets you insert Web graphics into a spreadsheet by dragging them from your Web browser. When you drag a graphic from the browser to a spreadsheet, you create a link to that graphic that is similar to a hyperlink. Quattro Pro supports dragging graphics from the Internet using the Netscape Navigator browser. For information about hyperlinks, see "To insert a hyperlink."

You can also create a live image link to dynamic graphics on the Internet. Live image links are updated automatically at set refresh intervals. For example, if you create a live image link to a dynamic weather map, Quattro Pro displays the weather map as a graphic on the spreadsheet and updates the graphic with weather changes at specified refresh intervals.

 How to


To insert a Web graphic

1	Open Netscape Navigator.

2	Locate a URL that contains a graphic.

3	Drag the graphic from Netscape Navigator to a notebook.

 Related topics


To create a live image link to a dynamic Web graphic

1	Open Netscape Navigator.

2	Locate a URL that contains a dynamic graphic.

3	Drag the graphic from Netscape Navigator to a notebook.

4	Double-click the graphic.

5	In the Refresh area, enable any of the following check boxes:

•	Refresh every [image] updates the live link at regular intervals according to the unit and time interval you choose

•	Refresh on open [image] updates the live link each time you open the notebook

 Notes

•	Live image links work in conjunction with the settings in the Windows Control Panel of your desktop. Before creating a live image link, you must change your temporary Internet file settings to check for newer versions of stored pages on every visit to the page.

•	You must have Microsoft Internet Explorer (to change the Internet settings) and Netscape Navigator 4.5 or later (to use the drag-and-drop feature) installed on your system to create a live image link.

 Tip

•	If Quattro Pro is minimized, drag the graphic from Netscape Navigator to the Windows taskbar. Quattro Pro automatically maximizes the application window, and you can drop the graphic on the open notebook.

 Related topics


Reference: Working with the Internet

Extensible Markup Language (XML) is an open international standard issued by the World Wide Web Consortium (W3C). XML provides both a platform-independent and an application-independent environment for defining document architecture and document markup. Quattro Pro allows you to automatically create XML tags based on data.

 How to


Example: XML tag creation

When you automatically create XML tags for a range of cells, Quattro Pro applies the label in each row or column to all selected cells in that row or column. If you create XML tags in more than one location, Quattro Pro creates a set of tags for each set of labels. For example, if you select A1..C4 from the figure below and create XML tags for cell ranges located under the top row and right of the left-most column, five names are created: Jan., B2..B4; Feb., C2..C4; Housing, B2..C2; Utilities, B3..C3; and Food, B4..C4.

If you create XML tags at cell intersections, Quattro Pro adds an additional tag to each cell by combining the two sets of labels. The following is a table of the additional XML tags for this example.

Cell	Name
B2	JAN._HOUSING
B3	JAN._UTILITIES
B4	JAN._FOOD
C2	FEB._HOUSING
C3	FEB._UTILITIES
C4	FEB._FOOD
 Related topics


Reference: Examples of linking controls


Examples of linking controls

You can create dialog boxes and forms with a variety of controls. You must link each control to an action before it can perform a task. For example, you can write a link command for a button that displays another dialog box when clicked.

 How to


Linking bitmap buttons

The following examples give you an idea of the items you can select from the events list, the link commands list, and the other lists in the Object Link dialog box.

Example 1

Displays the dialog box named Warning2 when the button is clicked.

List	Choose
On	ON
Link Events	Clicked
Link Command	EXECUTE
Object Selector list	Warning2
Selected object Properties	Execute
Example 2

Hides the button named BitmapButton1 when the dialog box initially displays.

List	Choose
On	ON
Link Events	Init
Link Command	SET
Link Control Properties	Yes TO
Object Selector	BitmapButton1
Selected Object Properties	Hidden
 Related topics


Linking push buttons

A push button runs a specified command when clicked by the user.

Example 1

Makes the list box named ListBox6 run any link commands attached to it that respond to the event trigger.

List	Choose
On	ON
Link Events	Clicked
Link Command	TRIGGER
Object Selector	ListBox6
Selected Object Properties	Trigger
 Related topics


Linking check boxes

Example 1

Sets the text appearing by the check box button when the dialog box initially displays. The text is taken from the cell A:C23.

List	Choose
On	ON
Link Events	Init
Link Command	RECEIVE
Link Control Properties	Label_Text FROM
Object Selector	A:C23
Selected Object Properties	Value
 Related topics


Linking combo boxes

By default, a drop-down list is created that has an edit field where users can enter information, or they click the down arrow and choose an option from the list.

Example 1

Sets the typeface of the label named Label5 as the user scrolls through the combo box's list of items.

List	Choose
On	ON
Link Events	ValueChanged
Link Command	SEND
Link Control Properties	Value TO
Selected Object	Label5
Selected Object Properties	Label_Font.TypeFace
 Related topics


Linking edit fields

Example 1

Displays the point size of the active cells (or cell). This link command is triggered by another link command (see Link timer controls for an example of a link command that does this).

List	Choose
On	ON
Link Events	Init
Link Command	RECEIVE
Link Control Properties	Value FROM
Selected Object	A:A1
Selected Object Properties	Value
Example 2

As the user types text into the edit field, the text is copied into the active cell and stored there as a label (using the String_Value property).

List	Choose
On	ON
Link Events	Valuechanged
Link Command	SEND
Linked Control Properties	Value TO
Selected Object	A:A1
Selected Object Properties	String_Value
Example 3

When the user types text into the edit field and presses ENTER, the text is entered into the active cell exactly as it was typed by the user.

List	Choose
On	ON
Link Events	Enter
Link Commands	SEND
Linked Control Properties	Value TO
Selected Object	A:B1
Selected Object Properties	Value
Example 4

Sends the edit field's value to A:A34 whenever the user presses ENTER. Using Number_Value ensures that the entry is always stored as a value.

List	Choose
On	ON
Link Events	Enter
Link Commands	SEND
Link Control Properties	Value TO
Selected Object	A:A34
Selected Object Properties	Number_Value
Example 5

If the edit field is named EditInteger3, this link command sets the edit field's maximum acceptable value to the current value whenever the user presses ENTER. This is handy for setting up an edit field that has no maximum value, but still has a minimum value (set by the Minimum property).

List	Choose
On	ON
Link Events	Enter
Link Command	SEND
Link Control Properties	Value TO
Selected Object	EditInteger3
Selected Object Properties	Maximum
 Related topics


Linking file controls

Example 1

Sets the initial wildcard displayed by the file select control named FileCtrl6. All files with the extension .bdg are displayed.

List	Control
On	ON
Link Events	Init
Link Commands	SET
Linked Control Properties	*.BDG TO
Selected Object	FileCtrl6
Selected Object Properties	Value
Example 2

Sets the initial directory displayed by the file select control named FileCtrl6 to FILES on the C: drive.

List	Choose
On	ON
Link Events	Init
Link Commands	SET
Linked Control Properties	C:\FILES\ TO
Selected Object	FileCtrl6
Selected Object Properties	Value
 Related topics


Linking group boxes

Example 1

Sets the text of the label named Label5 whenever a different radio button in the group box is chosen.

List	Choose
On	ON
Link Events	Valuechanged
Link Commands	SEND
Linked Control Properties	Value TO
Selected Object	Label5
Selected Object Properties	Label_Text
 Related topics


Linking scroll bars

Example 1 (Horizontal scroller link)

Sets the active cell to the scroll bar's value.

List	Choose
On	ON
Link Events	Valuechanged
Link Commands	SEND
Link Control Properties	Value TO
Selected Object	A:A1
Selected Object Properties	Value
Example 2 (Horizontal scroller link)

Sets the initial value of the scroll bar to the value stored in A:C67.

List	Choose
On	ON
Link Events	Init
Link Commands	RECEIVE
Linked Control Properties	Value FROM
Selected Object	A:C67
Selected Object Properties	Value
Example 3 (Vertical scroller link)

Sets the text color of the active cell (or cells) whenever the scroll bar's value is changed. Make sure the scroll bar is restricted to the range 0 through 15.

List	Choose
On	ON
Link Events	Valuechanged
Link Commands	SEND
Linked Control Properties	Value TO
Selected Object	A:A12
Selected Object Properties	Text_Color
 Related topics


Linking list boxes

Example 1

Sets the list displayed to the cells stored as a label in cell A:A25 when the dialog box initially displays.

List	Choose
On	ON
Link Events	Init
Link Commands	RECEIVE
Linked Control Properties	List FROM
Selected Object	A:A25
Selected Object Properties	Value
Example 2

Sets the list displayed to the cells stored as a label in cell A:A25 when another control uses the link command TRIGGER to generate the trigger event.

List	Choose
On	ON
Link Events	Trigger
Link Command	RECEIVE
Link Control Properties	List FROM
Selected Object	A:A25
Selected Object Properties	Value
Example 3

Sets the title of the pick list button named PickList5 to Blocks when the dialog box initially displays.

List	Choose
On	ON
Link Events	Init
Link Commands	SET
Linked Control Properties	Blocks TO
Selected Object	PickList5
Selected Object Properties	Label_Text
 Related topics


Linking radio buttons

Example 1

Displays the message stored in the cells A:A1..C3 whenever the radio button is selected by the user.

List	Choose
On	ON
Link Events	Activate
Link Commands	DOMACRO
Selected Object	{MESSAGE A:A1..C3,0,0,0}
Example 2

Sets the initial text appearing by the radio button to whatever is stored in cell A:C3.

List	Choose
On	ON
Link Events	Init
Link Commands	RECEIVE
Link Control Properties	Label_Text FROM
Selected Object	A:C3
Selected Object Properties	Value
 Related topics


Linking spin controls

Example 1

Sets the shading blend of the active cell or cells. Make sure the spin control is restricted to the range 0 through 6.

List	Choose
On	ON
Link Events	Valuechanged
Link Command	SEND
Link Control Properties	Value TO
Selected Object	A:A1
Selected Object Properties	Value
Example 2

Sets the height of the rectangle named Rectangle2 whenever the spin control's value changes.

List	Choose
On	ON
Link Events	Valuechanged
Link Commands	SEND
Link Control Properties	Value TO
Selected Object	Rectangle2
Selected Object Properties	Dimension.Height
 Related topics


Linking timer controls

Example 1

Tells the edit field named EditField6 to run any link commands attached to it that respond to the event trigger. Use this to create edit fields that constantly retrieve settings from the active object (cells, notebook, sheet, and so on).

List	Choose
On	ON
Link Events	Timer
Link Commands	TRIGGER
Selected Object	EditField6
Selected Object Properties	Trigger
Example 2

Displays a message stored in the cells A:A1..C3 when the time specified in the timer control's Alarm Time property is reached.

List	Choose
On	ON
Link Events	Alarm
Link Command	DOMACRO
Selected Object	{MESSAGE A:A1..C3,0,0,0}
 Related topics


Moving between Lotus 1-2-3 and Quattro Pro

You can open Lotus 1-2-3 files in Quattro Pro to work on them. When you finish working on a file, you can save it to a Quattro Pro file format.

In this section you'll learn about

•	opening and saving Lotus 1-2-3 files in Quattro Pro

For more information about moving between Lotus 1-2-3 and Quattro Pro, see "Reference: Moving between Lotus 1-2-3 and Quattro Pro."


Opening and saving Lotus 1-2-3 files in Quattro Pro

You can open a Lotus 1-2-3 file, including version 2 and 3, in Quattro Pro. Once you have opened and worked on a file, you can save it as a Quattro Pro notebook. You can also use Lotus 1-2-3 menus in Quattro Pro if you are switching to Quattro Pro from Lotus 1-2-3. This lets you work in a familiar environment until you are accustomed to the Quattro Pro menu structure.

Lotus 1-2-3 workbooks that contain custom spreadsheet names may not open in Quattro Pro if characters used in the names are not recognized by Quattro Pro. If this happens, Quattro Pro displays a message warning you about the invalid spreadsheet name. You can change the spreadsheet name to make it compatible with Quattro Pro. To change a spreadsheet name to a valid Quattro Pro spreadsheet name, see "To fix invalid spreadsheet names."

 How to


To open a Lotus 1-2-3 file in Quattro Pro

1	Click File [image] Open.

2	Choose the drive and folder where the Lotus 1-2-3 file is stored.

3	Choose a Lotus 1-2-3 file type from the File type list box.

4	Double-click the filename.

 Notes

•	When you open a Lotus 1-2-3 file version 3.x, any Impress file it includes also opens. When you open other Lotus 1-2-3 files, any included Impress or Allways files also open. For information about Impress and Allways files, see "WYSIWYG/Impress options supported by Quattro Pro" or "Allways options supported by Quattro Pro."

•	If the only version 3 features in a Lotus 1-2-3 file are Lotus Multibyte Character Set (LMBCS) characters or 3-D worksheets, Quattro Pro opens the file and converts it. If, however, there are other version 3 features in a Lotus 1-2-3 file, any of the following may happen:

•	Any @function not in Quattro Pro converts to the value (string or numeric) of the original cell;

•	Any .wk3 chart feature not supported in Quattro Pro is lost;

•	Due to the way Quattro Pro stores numbers, any number larger than 10 to the power of 308 converts to ERR, and any number smaller than 10 to the power of negative 308 converts to zero;

•	The numeric formats automatic, negative color, label, and parenthesis convert to the general format in Quattro Pro;

•	Numeric formatting of blank cells is not identical to the original cells when they are converted.

 Related topics


To save a Lotus 1-2-3 file as a Quattro Pro notebook

1	Click File [image] Save as.

2	Choose the drive and folder where you want to save the file.

3	Type a filename in the Filename box.

By default, the file is given a .qpw filename extension.

 Related topics


To use the Lotus 1-2-3 menu in Quattro Pro

1	Click Tools [image] Settings.

2	Click WorkSpaces.

3	Enable the Lotus 1-2-3 check box in the WorkSpaces list.

 Related topics


Reference: Moving between Lotus 1-2-3 and Quattro Pro

Many features and menu items in Lotus 1-2-3 are similar to those in Quattro Pro, despite different naming conventions. Quattro Pro translates most Lotus 1-2-3 formats, navigational tools, and print options. You can also import graphics and draw layer objects from Lotus 1-2-3 to Quattro Pro.

Quattro Pro also supports many Lotus 1-2-3 formulas and functions. Any 1-2-3 @functions that are not imported are translated as values. The cells containing these values are shaded red to warn you that the formula has not been brought into Quattro Pro.

Quattro Pro has limited ability to recognize Lotus 1-2-3 passwords and file versions. However, Quattro Pro can import Lotus 1-2-3 files created with either the WYSIWYG or Impress add-in. Spreadsheets created with Lotus 1-2-3 version 2.x and designed using Allways can be opened directly in Quattro Pro.

 How to


Lotus 1-2-3 file formats supported by Quattro Pro

In Quattro Pro, you can open and save files in the following Lotus 1-2-3 file formats:

Lotus file extension	Lotus version
.123	Lotus 1-2-3 97/9
.wk4	Lotus 1-2-3, versions 4, 5
.wk3	Lotus 1-2-3, version 3.x, and 1-2-3 for Windows
.wk1	Lotus 1-2-3, version 2.x
.wks	Lotus 1-2-3, version 1.0
.wke	Lotus 1-2-3, educational version
Read/write support

Quattro Pro includes read/write support for Lotus 1-2-3 files created from the DOS version 4.0+ and Windows version 5.0+. These files have a .wk4 extension. Support continues for .wk1, .wk3, .fm3, .all, and .wks formats.

Older versions of Lotus 1-2-3 that used companion .fmt files to store formats and attributes are not supported; data imports without the formatting stored within the .fmt file.

Lotus 1-2-3 links in Quattro Pro

When opening a Lotus 1-2-3 file, links are converted to the syntax used by Quattro Pro.

Here is an example:

Quattro Pro syntax	Lotus 1-2-3 2.x syntax
[filename]celladdress	<<filename>>celladdress
+[BUDGET.WK1]B4	+<<BUDGET.WK1>>B4
Macro conversion

Quattro Pro does not support Lotus 1-2-3 macros.

 Related topics


Lotus 1-2-3 for DOS menu items and Quattro Pro equivalents

To access Lotus 1-2-3 Release 2.01...	In Quattro Pro
Format	Click Format [image] Styles. Click Format in the Includes properties area.
Label prefix	Click Format [image] Styles. Click Alignment in the Includes properties area.
Global column width	Click Format [image] Sheet. Click the Default width tab.
Recalculation	Click Format [image] Notebook. Click the Recalc settings tab.
Protection	Click Format [image] Notebook. Click the Password level tab.
Left margin setting	Click File [image] Page Setup. click the Print margins tab and type a value in the Left box in the Margins area.
Right margin setting	Click File [image] Page Setup. click the Print margins tab and type a value in the Right box in the Margins area.
Top margin setting	Click File [image] Page Setup. click the Print margins tab and type a value in the Top box in the Margins area.
Bottom margin setting	Click File [image] Page Setup. click the Print margins tab and type a value in the Bottom box in the Margins area.
Page Length	Click File [image] Page Setup. click the Paper type tab.
Setup	Click File [image] Print
Directory	Click Tools [image] Settings. Click the File options tab. Choose a folder form the Default folder box
International	Tools [image] Settings. Click the International tab.
Help	Click Help [image] Help topics.
Zero	Click Format [image] Sheet. Click the Display tab. Enable an option in the Display zeros area.
Insert	Click Insert
Column	Click Insert [image] Column
Row	Click Insert [image] Row
Delete	Click Edit [image] Delete. Enable the Rows or Columns option in the Dimension area.
Set Width	Click Format [image] Selection. Click the Row/column tab. Enable the Set width option.
Hide	Click Format [image] Selection. Click the Row/column tab. Enable the Hide option in the Reveal/hide area.
Display	Click Format [image] Selection. Click the Row/column tab. Enable the Reveal option in the Reveal/hide area.
Erase	Click File [image] Close
Titles	Click View [image] Locked titles
Windows	Click View [image] Split window
Iterations	Click Format [image] Notebook. Click the Recalc Settings tab. Type a value in the # of Iterations box.
Format	Click Format [image] Styles.
Label Prefix	Click Format [image] Styles Click Alignment.
Protection	Click Format [image] Sheet. Click the Protection tab.
Page	Click Insert [image] Page break
Fixed	Click Format [image] Selection. Click the Numeric format tab.
Label	Click Format [image] Styles Click Alignment.
Erase	Click Edit [image] Clear [image] Values.
Name	Click Insert [image] Name [image] Cells.
Justify	Click Format [image] Text reformat.
Protect	Click Format [image] Selection. Click the Constraints tab. Enable the Protect option in the Cell Protection area.
Unprotect	Click Format [image] Selection. Click the Constraints tab. Enable the Unprotect option in the Cell Protection area.
Transpose	Click Tools [image] Numeric tools [image] Transpose.
Copy	Click Edit [image] Copy.
Retrieve	Click File [image] Open.
Save	Click File [image] Save.
Xtract	Click Tools [image] Data tools [image] Extract to file
List	Click File [image] Open.
Worksheet	Click File [image] Open.
Print	Click File [image] Open.
Import	Click File [image] Open.
Printer	Click File [image] Print.
Range	Click File [image] Print. Click the Print tab. Type a value in the To and From boxes in the Range area.
Print Options	Click File [image] Page setup.
Header	Click File [image] Page setup. Click the Header/footer tab and enable the Header check box.
Footer	Click File [image] Page setup. Click the Header/footer tab and enable the Footer check box.
Borders	Click File [image] Page setup. Click the Options tab. Enable the Row/column borders check box.
Pg Length	Click File [image] Page setup. Enable the Paper type tab.
Formatted	Click File [image] Page setup. Click the Print margins tab. Enable the Break pages check box.
Unformatted	Click File [image] Page setup. Click the Print margins tab. Disable the Break pages check box.
Clear	Click File [image] Page setup. Click any tab and click Load defaults.
Go	Click File [image] Print. Click Print
Type	Click Chart [image] Galery
X	Click Chart [image] Axes [image] X-axis
A [image] F	Chart [image] Series.
View	Click Chart [image] View Chart
Save	Click File [image] Save
Legend	Click Chart [image] Legend
Format	Select the series. Right-click, and click Series properties [image] Type options
Titles	Click Chart [image] Titles
Grid	Click Chart [image] Axes, and choose an axes type. Click the Grids and ticks tab. Enable the Major grid style or Minor grid style check boxes.
Scale	Click Chart [image] Axes, and choose an axes type. Click the Scale tab.
Color	Not supported by Quattro Pro
B&W	Not supported by Quattro Pro
Data Labels	Select the series. Right-click and click Series properties [image] Data labels.
Fill	Click Edit [image] Fill [image] Fill Series.
Table	Click Tools [image] Numeric Tools [image] What-If.
Sort	Click Tools [image] Sort.
Query	Click Tools [image] Data tools [image] Notebook query.
Distribution	Click Tools [image] Numeric Tools [image] Frequency.
Invert	Click Tools [image] Numeric Tools [image] Invert.
Multiply	Click Tools [image] Numeric Tools [image] Multiply.
Regression	Click Tools [image] Numeric Tools [image] Regression.
Parse	Click Tools [image] Data tools [image] QuickColumns
 Related topics


Lotus 1-2-3 features and Quattro Pro equivalents

Many features in Lotus 1-2-3 are similar to those in Quattro Pro, despite different naming conventions. The following table can assist you in moving from Lotus 1-2-3 to Quattro Pro.

For Lotus 1-2-3 features	Quattro Pro reference
Templates	Working with project templates
Background recalc	Working with formulas
Automatic column widths	To increase the column width while typing values
Automatic summing	Performing running calculations
Automatic sort	Sorting data
QuickFill/AutoFill	Filling cells and spreadsheet tabs automatically
Automatic formats	Using formatting tools to format a spreadsheet
Mail enabled	To send a notebook by email
Center across block	To center text across multiple cells
Nameable sheet tabs	Naming spreadsheets
@Functions	Working with spreadsheet functions
Matrix operations	Performing matrix operations
What-If tables	Analyzing data
Goal Seeker	Using goal seeking
Nonlinear Solver	Finding optimum solutions for linear and nonlinear problems
Multi-variable Backsolver	Finding optimum solutions for linear and nonlinear problems
Floating text boxes	Creating text box graphics
Notebook drawing layer	Drawing shapes and lines
Trace mode	To set a trace cell for a Quattro Pro macro
Visual Dialog Builder	Working with custom dialog boxes and controls
Toolbar Designer	To create a toolbar
Impress	WYSIWYG/Impress options supported by Quattro Pro
Allways	Allways options supported by Quattro Pro
Comma separated values (CSV)	To import a text file
Search/replace	To find and replace data
Queried import	Querying external databases
Visual Query-By-Example (QBE)	To use Query By Example
Sort databases	Sorting data
Auto filter	Filtering data
Group and outline	Working with outlines
Password-protect file	Using password protection
Cell notes	Restricting and annotating cell data
External range links	Creating notebook links
Automatic file backup	To back up your notebooks automatically
 Related topics


Lotus 1-2-3 97/9 spreadsheet attributes imported by Quattro Pro

The spreadsheet attributes that you can import include cell attributes, general spreadsheet attributes, and chart attributes.

Cell attributes

•	label cell (cell text)

•	number cell

•	formula cell

•	font face, size, color, alignment and orientation

•	numeric format

•	cell color (background and foreground)

•	cell pattern

•	cell border (line style and color)

General spreadsheet attributes

•	Spreadsheet and notebook defaults (currently row height and column width only)

•	grouped sheets

•	named sheet (custom sheet name)

•	row height

•	column width

•	hidden row/column

•	locked row/column

•	cell pointer location

•	zoom

•	named style (customization of cell using named style)

•	named range

Chart attributes

•	chart type

•	chart data series (series by row or column)

•	chart title

•	text (font and attributes)

•	frame size and origin

•	frame location

•	border (style, width, and color)

•	frame background and patterns

•	axis title

•	text, font, and attribute

•	legend

•	Text, font, and attributes

•	frame size and origin

•	frame location

•	border (style, width, and color)

•	frame background and pattern

•	chart frame

•	frame size and origin

•	border (style, width, and color)

•	background color and pattern

•	plot frame

•	frame size and origin

•	border (style, width, and color)

•	background color and pattern

•	axis properties

•	check mark attributes

•	scaling information [image] max, min, major, minor, and so on.

•	series properties

•	color, border and pattern

•	graph type

•	series label text and attributes

•	Plot against axis

•	other

•	chart name

•	multiple chart in multiple spreadsheets

•	3-D and specialty charts

 Related topics


Cell attributes and styles imported and exported between Quattro Pro and Lotus 1-2-3

Importing cell attributes

The following cell attributes are supported by Quattro Pro when importing a Lotus 1-2-3 file:

•	font [image] name, style, size, color, bold formatting, italic formatting, underline. double underline and wide underline are treated as underline. Strikethrough is not supported.

•	line drawing (single, double, thick, color)

•	cell width

•	row height

•	wrap text

•	align across columns

•	horizontal alignment [image] general, left, right, and center. Evenly spaced text alignment is not supported.

•	vertical alignment [image] top, middle, bottom

•	orientation [image] horizontal, vertical, and angle text. However, the three kinds of vertical orientation are all imported as a single vertical type.

•	cell pattern

•	cell pattern color (foreground color)

•	cell background color

•	hidden rows and columns

•	numeric format (minor limitations exist)

•	named styles (font color property of the named style is not stored during import)

Exporting cell attributes

Most of the cell attributes that can be imported can also be exported from Quattro Pro to Lotus 1-2-3 in all versions but Lotus 1-2-3 97/9. Here are some exceptions:

•	cell text [image] Accounting styles and StrikeThrough are not supported.

•	alignment [image] Indent is not supported by Lotus 1-2-3.

•	orientation [image] Vertical and angle text are not exported.

•	row height and column width [image] Row height and column width are not supported by Lotus 1-2-3.

Named styles

Only four customized named styles are exported. Quattro Pro imports and exports styles up to the maximum the file format allows:

•	.fm3, .wk1, .wk3, and .all files can contain up to eight named styles.

•	.wk4 files can contain up to 16 named styles.

 Related topics


Print options, windows, and navigation tools imported and exported between Quattro Pro and Lotus 1-2-3

Print options

On import and export, the following print options are converted:

•	orientation

•	margins (top, left, right, bottom)

•	header size (inches)

•	footer size (inches)

•	header text

•	footer text

•	print grid lines

Window split

Quattro Pro imports the window split attribute from Lotus 1-2-3 files. Quattro Pro exports the window split attribute to all Lotus 1-2-3 files that support it.

Locked titles

Quattro Pro imports Lotus 1-2-3 frozen titles. Quattro Pro exports its locked titles as Lotus 1-2-3 frozen titles.

Zoom

Lotus 1-2-3 does not have a zoom setting for each spreadsheet; it has a single setting. This setting is applied to each spreadsheet on import to Quattro Pro. When exporting to Lotus 1-2-3, Quattro Pro takes its zoom setting and writes it as zoom setting in Lotus 1-2-3.

 Related topics


Objects imported and exported between Quattro Pro and Lotus 1-2-3

Charts types

Lotus 1-2-3 charts that match Quattro Pro chart types convert; otherwise, Quattro Pro converts the Lotus 1-2-3 chart to the Quattro Pro chart that it most closely resembles, adding properties where it can to make the chart look as much as possible like the Lotus 1-2-3 chart.

Lotus 1-2-3 chart attributes not supported by Quattro Pro

•	titles [image] sub-sub-titles

•	axis titles [image] subtitles

Shapes

The following shapes and controls are imported and exported:

•	text box

•	font attributes [image] color, size, bold formatting, underline, and so on

•	frame attributes [image] foreground and background colors and patterns (including gradient fill)

•	border attributes [image] color, width, and style only import into Quattro Pro.

•	button

•	button text/macro text font attributes [image] color, size, bold formatting, underline, and so on

•	drawing shapes

•	arrows

•	lines

•	rectangles (filled)

•	rounded rectangles (filled)

•	ellipses (filled)

•	text

•	buttons

 Notes

•	Area attributes (foreground and background colors and patterns (including gradient fill)) and line/border attributes (color, width, and style) are supported.

•	Quattro Pro does not support importing and exporting shapes such as polylines, polygons, and freehand drawings.

•	Export of line/arc with proper orientation is not supported.

•	When saving Lotus 1-2-3 .wk4 files, Quattro Pro includes the Quattro Pro objects. No object information is written to .wk3 or .wk1 files.

•	Inserted graphs

•	When importing files, Quattro Pro converts Lotus 1-2-3 inserted graphs to the nearest Quattro Pro graph type. When exporting files, Quattro Pro converts its inserted graphs to the nearest Lotus 1-2-3 equivalent.

•	Graphics

•	Quattro Pro imports the following graphic formats:

•	Windows bitmap (.bmp)

•	Windows metafile (.wmf)

•	Graphics Interchange format (.gif)

•	JPEG (.jpeg)

 Note

•	Lotus 1-2-3 does not support the import of graphics from Quattro Pro.

•	OLE 2 links and objects

•	Quattro Pro does not support Lotus 1-2-3 OLE 2 links and objects.

 Related topics


Formulas and functions imported and exported between Quattro Pro and Lotus 1-2-3

@Function conversion

Quattro Pro converts Lotus 1-2-3 @functions to Quattro Pro spreadsheet functions when there is a functional match. That is, if Quattro Pro has an @function that takes the same parameters and returns the same result, the Lotus 1-2-3 @function is converted, even if it has a different name. If a Lotus 1-2-3 @function does not have an equivalent in Quattro Pro, the formula is converted as a value and cell shading is set to red. Quattro Pro also exports its @functions to Lotus 1-2-3 @functions when there is a functional match. For a list of all the Lotus 1-2-3 @functions that Quattro Pro supports, see "Lotus 1-2-3 spreadsheet functions supported by Quattro Pro".

Formula annotations

Quattro Pro supports formula annotations (comments after a semicolon).

 Related topics


Lotus 1-2-3 spreadsheet functions supported by Quattro Pro

Quattro Pro imports the following Lotus 1-2-3 spreadsheet functions:

@@

@ABS

@ACCRUED

@ACOS

@ACOSH

@ACOT

@ACOTH

@ACSC

@ACSCH

@ASEC

@ASECH

@ASIN

@ASINH

@ATAN

@ATAN2

@ATANH

@AVEDEV

@AVG

@BESSELI

@BESSELJ

@BESSELK

@BESSELY

@BETA

@BETAI

@CELL

@CELLPOINTER

@CHAR

@CHIDIST

@CHITEST

@CHOOSE

@CLEAN

@CODE

@COLS

@COMBIN

@CORREL

@COS

@COSH

@COT

@COTH

@COUNT

@CRITBINOMIAL

@CSC

@CSCH

@CTERM

@DATEDIF

@DATEINFO

@DATEVALUE

@DAVG

@DAY

@DCOUNT

@DDB

@DEVSQ

@DMAX

@DMIN

@DSTD

@DSTDS

@DURATION

@DVAR

@DVARS

@ERF

@ERFC

@ERFD

@ERR

@EVEN

@EXACT

@EXP

@EXP2

@FACT

@FACTLN

@FALSE

@FDIST

@FIND

@FTEST

@FV

@GAMMA

@GAMMALN

@GEOMEAN

@HARMEAN

@HLOOKUP

@HOUR

@IF

@INDEX

@INT

@ISERR

@ISNA

@ISNUMBER

@ISSTRING

@LEFT

@LENGTH

@LN

@LOG

@LOWER

@MAX

@MAXLOOKUP

@MDURATION

@MEDIAN

@MID

@MIN

@MINLOOKUP

@MINUTE

@MOD

@MODULO

@MONTH

@N

@NA

@NETWORKDAYS

@NOW

@ODD

@PAYMT

@PERCENTILE

@PERMUT

@PI

@PMT

@POISSON

@PRICE

@PROPER

@PV

@PVAL

@QUOTIENT

@RAND

@RATE

@REGRESSION

@REPEAT

@REPLACE

@RIGHT

@ROUND

@ROUNDDOWN

@ROUNDUP

@ROWS

@S

@SEC

@SECH

@SECOND

@SERIESSUM

@SETSTRING

@SHEETS

@SIGN

@SIN

@SINH

@SLN

@SQRT

@SQRTPI

@STD

@STDS

@STRING

@SUM

@SUMSQ

@SUMXMY2

@SYD

@TAN

@TANH

@TDIST

@TERM

@TIME

@TIMEVALUE

@TODAY

@TRIM

@TRUE

@TRUNC

@TTEST

@UPPER

@VALUE

@VAR

@VARS

@VLOOKUP

@WEIGHTAVG

@WORKDAY

@XINDEX

@YEAR

@YIELD

@ZTEST

 Related topics


File management features imported and exported between Quattro Pro and Lotus 1-2-3

Password protection

When importing .wk3 and .wk4 files, Quattro Pro cannot decipher passwords, so it displays a warning message. However, Quattro Pro can decipher passwords in .wk1 files and, when it opens them, prompts the user for the password.

Quattro Pro does not export passwords to Lotus 1-2-3 .wk3 or .wk4 files; a warning message appears indicating this attribute cannot be saved. Passwords can be exported to .wk1 files.

Version information

Lotus 1-2-3 for Windows version 5 and later can contain several different versions within a spreadsheet file. You can select which version to see and edit. Quattro Pro opens only data from the version that was active when the file was last saved in Lotus 1-2-3.

 Related topics


WYSIWYG/Impress options supported by Quattro Pro

When you open a Lotus 1-2-3 .wk1, .wks, or .wk3 file with a corresponding .fmt or .fm3 file, you can choose whether to read the .fmt or .fm3 file and apply the WYSIWYG/Impress formatting to it.

When opening a .wk1 or .wks file, you can choose to open a corresponding .all file if there is one in the current folder. If there is also a corresponding .fmt file, you must confirm your choice. The .enc and .cnf files created by WYSIWYG/Impress are not imported.

WYSIWYG/Impress options

Quattro Pro imports the following WYSIWYG/Impress options:

•	format options [image] assigned fonts, lines (except shadow), shading, bold formatting, underlining (except double and wide), and italic formatting

•	inserted charts

•	blank charts (usually containing annotations)

•	print settings [image] configuration/orientation, layout/compression (which converts to Print-to-fit), layout margins, layout titles, print scaling, and grid on printing

•	label alignment (except spillover to the left)

•	worksheet settings [image] row height

•	colors (global negative, lines, text color)

•	up to 255 different combinations of font, bold formatting, underline, and italic formatting. Any additional combinations convert to the font used in the Quattro Pro Normal style.

Quattro Pro does not import the following WYSIWYG/Impress options:

•	column page breaks

•	label alignment with spillover to the left

•	formatting embedded in text

•	display options [image] colors, mode, font directory, and rows

•	format options [image] line shadow and colors (except global negative, line, double or wide underline, and text color)

•	print layout settings [image] page size and borders on bottom

•	print settings [image] frame and settings

•	print configuration settings (printer type, port bin, and so on)

 Related topics


Allways options supported by Quattro Pro

When you open a .wk1 file that has a corresponding .all file Allways formatting is automatically added to the .wk1 file.

Allways options

Quattro Pro imports the following Allways options:

•	format [image] font selection, line style, shading, bold formatting, underline, and font colors

•	layout options [image] margins, titles, borders, line weight, paper type, and grid on printing

•	print range

•	worksheet [image] column width and row heights

•	up to 255 different combinations of font, bold formatting, underline, and italic formatting. Any additional combinations convert to the font specified as Normal style.

Quattro Pro does not import the following Allways options:

•	inserted charts

•	worksheet [image] page breaks, column page breaks, and display zoom

•	label alignment with spillover to the left (usually found in centered labels)

•	display (screen) colors

•	layout options [image] page size and borders on the bottom

•	print [image] printer type, orientation, print settings, and port bin

Note

•	Quattro Pro imports only .ALL files (not .AFS, .ALS, or .ENC files). To import multiple saved formats or font sets, create a separate .WK1 file for each saved file format with a corresponding .ALL file.

 Related topics


Managing files and data

File management is an important part of any project. You can open many different file formats in Quattro Pro, and you can import, insert, or combine data. You can also link data between notebooks or between Quattro Pro and another application.

In this section, you'll learn about

•	opening and saving files

•	sending files

•	inserting, importing, and combining files

•	importing text into columns

•	linking and embedding objects

•	editing and updating objects and links

•	creating notebook links

•	editing and updating notebook links

For more information about managing files and data, see "Reference: Managing files and data."


Opening and saving files

Using Quattro Pro, you can open files from other applications. For example, if you use Microsoft Excel or Lotus 1-2-3, you can open these files in Quattro Pro. You can also open files from the Internet.

Quattro Pro can open a Quicken Interchange Format (.qif) file.

You can save Quattro Pro data as database files, in dBASE or Paradox file format. The field names are based on the data in the first row of the first sheet. If the first row contains data that is invalid as a database field name, for example, containing numbers, spaces, symbol characters, or duplicate labels, Quattro Pro uses the spreadsheet column letters to represent the field names. You can save Quattro Pro files in other formats as well.

For additional information, see "Supported file formats" and "File-handling options."

 How to


To open a file from another application

1	Click File [image] Open.

2	Choose the drive and folder where the file is stored.

3	Choose the filename extension from the File type list box.

4	Double-click the filename.

 Notes

•	If the drive you require is not displayed in the Look in list box, you may have to map the drive. If the drive will not map to the path you specify, you may not have access to that location.

•	If you are using Quattro Pro for MS-DOS, you can open .sqz files by saving them as .wq1 files first.

 Related topics


To open a file from the Internet

1	Click File [image] Open.

2	Type a URL in the Filename box.

3	Click Open.

 Note

•	Quattro Pro makes a local copy of the file; you do not have to be continuously connected to the Internet to work with the file.

 Related topics


To open a Quicken Interchange Format (.qif) file

1	Click File [image] Open.

2	Choose the drive and folder where the file is stored.

3	Choose Quicken Interchange Format (.qif) from the File type list box.

4	Double-click the filename.

 Notes

•	When you open a .qif file in Quattro Pro, each spreadsheet row contains a single transaction record with the date, check number, payee, memo, cleared status, and amount columns. In addition, the assigned categories are broken down into columns. You can sum the category amounts for each column, create custom reports and charts, or use the transaction data within Quattro Pro as actual data.

•	When opening split transactions (multiple categories assigned to a single transaction), Quattro Pro places the correct amount in each category column. If a split transaction is composed of only a single category but has multiple descriptions, the category column contains a formula that includes all of the individual amounts.

 Tip

•	When you save the opened .qif file, you must save it as a Quattro Pro file. You can save it in a different file format, but some formatting may be lost.

 Related topics


To save a database file

1	Click File [image] Save as.

2	Choose one of the following from the File type list box:

•	dBASE

•	Paradox

3	Type the filename in the Filename box.

4	Click Save.

5	Choose a field from the Fields list, and make any changes to the field name or field type.

6	Click Write.

 Notes

•	If you have used unique Quattro Pro features, a message may display stating that you are saving in a file format other than Quattro Pro. Click the database format to continue saving the database file.

•	To mark a field to be deleted, click it in the list, and press Delete. An asterisk displays next to the field name. To restore the field, press Delete again.

 Related topics


To save a Quattro Pro file in another format

1	Click File [image] Save as.

2	Choose a file type from the File type list box.

3	Type a filename in the Filename list box.

4	Click Save.

 Related topics


Sending files

You can send notebooks to new locations. You can also send notebooks by email. If you have an email application installed on your computer or network, you can access it from within Quattro Pro.

 How to


To send a notebook to another location

1	Click File [image] Send to.

2	Click the location where you want the file sent.

 Note

•	To add destinations to the Send to submenu, see Windows Help.

 Related topics


To send a notebook by email

1	Click File [image] Send to [image] Send mail.

2	Set email options according to your system.

3	Send the email.

 Related topics


Inserting, importing, and combining files

Quattro Pro lets you insert a file into a notebook.

You can also import both delimited and fixed-width text files. When you import text, you can specify how the text should be arranged on the spreadsheet. Arranging data into columns and rows is called parsing. For example, you can parse a column of long labels into two or more columns of data.

When you open a text file that includes tabs indicating new segments of data, Quattro Pro starts a new column each time it encounters a tab in the text.

Every sheet in the inserted or imported file that contains data is placed on a new sheet in the active notebook. If only one sheet is inserted, the sheet is given the name of the inserted file. If multiple sheets are inserted, the new sheets are named in the default letter sequence.

You can save notebooks as tab- or comma-delimited text files. You can also import unformatted text.

You can combine files by adding, subtracting, multiplying, or dividing the cells of two notebooks. You can also combine files by using math operators. Adding data is useful for combining files for a cumulative total. For example, you could compile year-to-date figures from monthly notebooks to create a cumulative notebook showing year-to-date expense totals.

For additional information, see "Rules for combining files."

 How to


To insert a file into a notebook

1	Close the file you want to insert.

2	Click Insert [image] Insert file.

3	Choose a filename.

If you want to insert a file from another application, include its filename extension.

4	Type the cell location before which you want to place the inserted file in the Before sheet box.

 Notes

•	If the file is inserted within the boundaries of a named selection of cells, or cells referenced by a formula, references expand to include the new spreadsheets.

•	If inserting a file expands a named selection of cells or cell reference beyond the limit of a notebook (beyond spreadsheet ZZZ), the reference becomes ERR.

 Related topics


To import a text file

1	Click File [image] Open.

2	Choose the drive and folder where the file is stored.

3	Choose ASCII Text (*.txt) from the File type list box.

4	Double-click the filename.

5	From the Parse settings list box, choose one of the following:

•	Automatic [image] automatically determines how best to parse the imported text file

•	Delimited auto [image] automatically parses imported delimited text files

•	Fixed width auto [image] automatically parses imported fixed-width text files

 Notes

•	Lines larger than 4 KB are not imported. If the total number of lines (rows) you import exceeds the limit of the number of rows you specified for a spreadsheet, the data is truncated to this limit.

•	Files must be unformatted and saved as plain ASCII text files without any control codes or other word-processor formatting. Before you open a text file, remove any special formatting characters such as bold, underlining, or centering.

 Related topics


To save a text file

1	Select a cell on the relevant sheet.

2	Click File [image] Save as.

3	Type the filename with the extension .txt in the Filename box.

4	Choose ASCII Text (tab delimited or comma delimited) from the File type list box.

 Note

•	Only the contents of the current sheet (or, if it is empty, the first non-empty sheet) of a notebook are saved.

 Related topics


To import unformatted text

1	In the source application, select the data to paste into Quattro Pro.

2	Click Edit [image] Copy.

3	In Quattro Pro, click Edit [image] Paste special.

4	Choose Unformatted text from the As box.

5	Enable the Paste option.

 Related topics


To combine files by using math operations

1	Click File [image] Open.

2	Choose the drive and folder where the destination notebook is stored.

3	Double-click the filename.

This notebook contains the existing values; data in this notebook will be altered.

4	Click Tools [image] Data tools [image] Combine files.

5	Click Browse and select the source notebook.

This notebook contains the incoming values; no changes are made to this notebook.

6	In the Source area, enable one of the following options:

•	Entire file [image] combines all data in the two files

•	Cell(s) [image] combines only data in the cells which you specify

7	In the Operation area, enable one of the following options:

•	Copy [image] inserts the exact contents of the source notebook

•	Add [image] adds the incoming values to the existing values

•	Subtract [image] subtracts the incoming values from the existing values

•	Multiply [image] multiplies the incoming values by the existing values

•	Divide [image] divides the existing values by the incoming values

 Note

•	For additional information, see "Rules for combining files."

 Tip

•	You can also combine files by copying the data from the source notebook and pasting it over the corresponding data in the destination notebook with the Paste special command.

 Related topics


Importing text into columns

You can import a text file and rearrange the text into columns at the same time. You can adjust the widths of imported columns and specify a parsing format for imported text.

You can customize how delimited and fixed-width text files are parsed. You can also add a fixed-width parse break to imported text.

 How to


To import a text file into columns

1	Click Tools [image] Data tools [image] QuickColumns.

2	Click the Browse button in the Text source box, and choose the text file.

3	Click the Range picker in the Text source box and select the source cells.

4	Click the Range picker in the Destination box and select a location for the imported data.

5	From the Parse settings list box, choose one of the following:

•	Automatic [image] automatically determines how best to parse the imported text file

•	Delimited auto [image] automatically parses imported delimited text files

•	Fixed width auto [image] automatically parses imported fixed-width text files

If you want to view how data displays in the spreadsheet, click Format.

 Note

•	The QuickColumn Expert parses one column at a time.

 Tips

•	The Destination box displays the active cell in the spreadsheet. Instead of specifying all the destination cells, you can specify one cell in which to begin inserting the parsed cells.

•	You can load previously saved parse settings by pressing the Browse button beside the Parse settings list box, and locating the .qpx file you want to load.

 Related topics


To adjust the column width for imported text

1	Click Tools [image] Data tools [image] QuickColumns.

2	Click Format.

3	In the column heading, point to the border until it changes to a double arrow.

4	Drag the border until the column reaches the required width.

 Note

•	When you adjust columns that contain fixed-width text, the adjustment may change where the data is placed in the destination cells. When you adjust columns that contain delimited text, the adjustment resizes the entire column and does not affect where the data is placed.

 Related topics


To specify a parsing format for imported text

1	Click Tools [image] Data tools [image] QuickColumns.

2	Click Format.

3	In the Format area, select a row or column.

4	Choose a parsing action from the Action list box:

•	Skip [image] skips a row or column

•	Parse [image] parses a row or column

•	Label [image] copies a row as an unparsed label to the destination cells

You can also
Insert a row, column, or sheet into a parsed text file	Click Break data flow control, and enable a break option.
Merge parsed cells	Click Merge data control.
Switch a column to a row	Select a column, and click Transpose data control.
Switch a row to a column	Select a row, and click Transpose data control.
Specify delimiters as text	Select a row, and click Delimiter to text.
Restore format options	Click Revert text.
Set the style for a column	Select a column, and choose a style from the Style list box.
Set the alignment for a column	Select a column, and choose an alignment from the Alignment list box.
Set the delimiter for a column	Right-click a column. In the Column delimiters dialog box, enable any column delimiter check box.
 Related topics


To customize parse settings for delimited text files

1	Click Tools [image] Data tools [image] QuickColumns.

2	Click the Browse button in the Text source box, and choose the text file.

3	Click the Range picker in the Text source box and select the source cells.

4	Click the Range picker in the Destination box and select a location for the imported data.

5	Choose Delimited auto from the Parse settings list box.

6	Click Settings.

7	In the General area of the Parse settings dialog box, enable any of the following options:

•	Apply formatting to spreadsheet [image] automatically applies the existing spreadsheet formatting to the imported text

•	Set spreadsheet column widths [image] automatically applies the existing spreadsheet column width to the imported text

•	Set page length to [image] lets you label or skip certain rows without parsing

If you enable the Set page length to check box, choose an action from the Action list box, and type a value in the Lines box.

8	Enable check boxes to establish delimiters (data breaks) in each of the following areas:

•	End of cell [image] establishes the selected character or characters as the start of a new cell within a row

•	End of row [image] establishes the selected character or characters as the start of a new row

•	End of sheet [image] establishes the selected character or characters as the start of a new spreadsheet

If you want to save your parse settings for future use, click Save and type a filename with a .qpx extension.

 Tip

•	If you want data enclosed in a specific text qualifier to be parsed as a label, enable the Text qualifier check box in the Data type area, and type a text qualifier in the Text qualifier box.

 Related topics


To customize parse settings for fixed-width text files

1	Click Tools [image] Data tools [image] QuickColumns.

2	Click the Browse button in the Text source box, and choose the text file.

3	Click the Range picker in the Text source box, and select the source cells.

4	Click the Range picker in the Destination box, and select a location for the imported data.

5	Choose Fixed width auto from the Parse settings list box.

6	Click Settings.

7	In the Data type area, enable any of the following check boxes:

•	Skip first character [image] skips the first character in each line of text

•	Ignore nonconforming rows [image] skips lines in the text that the QuickColumns Expert cannot parse

•	Join broken lines at ## characters [image] unwraps lines before parsing. For example, if the text was generated by an application that wrapped text lines that exceeded 80 characters, enable this check box and type 80 in the Characters box.

 Related topics


To add a fixed-width parse break

1	Click Tools [image] Data tools [image] QuickColumns.

2	Click Format.

3	Click Set parse breaks.

4	In the Set parse breaks dialog box, type a value in the Parse break position box.

5	Click Set.

You can also
Repeat parse breaks at regular intervals	Enable the Repeat every check box, and type a value in the Characters box.
Delete a parse break	Use the Navigate parse break buttons to select a parse break, and click Clear.
Delete all parse breaks	Click Clear all.
Restore default parse breaks options	Click Default.
 Related topics


Linking and embedding objects

Quattro Pro lets you use Object Linking and Embedding (OLE) to import and export projects and objects. Object linking and embedding works through two client-server protocols: OLE and Dynamic Data Exchange (DDE). DDE allows two applications running simultaneously to interact.

This version of Quattro Pro supports OLE 2.0 as a container (client) and server. Quattro Pro also acts as a client and server for OLE 1.0 and DDE. Several Quattro Pro macros can help application developers initiate and conduct DDE exchanges or "conversations." Application developers can use Quattro Pro macro commands and other features to create and control OLE objects in other applications that support OLE automation as a client.

In Quattro Pro, you can link to an object in another application. For example, you can create a link to a graphic in CorelDRAW, a bitmap in Corel PHOTO-PAINT, a memo in WordPerfect, or a slide in Corel Presentations.

When you link a file, the information resides in the source file, and a linked copy of the source file exists in the notebook. When information changes in the source application, it is automatically updated in the notebook. You may want to link to a file for a large object such as a bitmap, especially when it is used several places in a notebook, to keep the notebook file size at a minimum. Linking large objects makes the file size smaller because the object is stored in the source file, not in the file.

You can embed objects. When you embed an object, a copy of the object is inserted into the notebook. The copy remains separate from the original object. Objects in Quattro Pro can also be copied to other applications.

OLE objects can be resized to fit the constraints of a notebook. For additional information, see "Troubleshooting with OLE."

 How to


To link an object

1	Select the cell where you want to link an object.

2	Click Insert [image] Object.

3	Enable the Create from file option.

4	Click Browse.

5	Choose the drive and folder where the object is stored.

6	Double-click the filename.

7	Enable the Link check box.

If you want to display the object as an icon, enable the Display as icon check box.

You can also
Link an object from Windows Explorer	Drag the object filename from Windows Explorer into the document.
Link an object to another application	In Quattro Pro, select the object. Hold down Ctrl, and drag it into the application window.
 Related topics


To embed an object

1	Select the cell where you want to embed an object.

2	Click Insert [image] Object.

3	Enable the Create from file option.

4	Click Browse.

5	Choose the drive and folder where the object is stored.

6	Double-click the filename.

If you want to display the object as an icon, enable the Display as icon check box.

 Note

•	If you enable the Create new option, a new blank object displays. If the source application supports in-place editing, the object is activated for in-place editing; otherwise, a new window opens and the source application runs in the new window. Use the source application's editing commands and tools to create and manipulate data.

 Tip

•	You can also embed an object in another application by dragging. Select an object in Quattro Pro. Hold down Shift, and drag the object to the application window.

 Related topics


To copy an object to another application

1	Select an object in Quattro Pro.

2	Click Edit [image] Copy.

3	Open the destination application.

4	In the destination application, select the Paste special option, and choose a Quattro Pro format.

 Related topics


To resize an OLE object

1	Right-click an OLE object, and click Properties.

2	Click the OLE tab.

3	Disable the Automatic resizing check box.

4	Drag the borders of the OLE object to the required size.

 Related topics


Editing and updating objects and links

Any objects you link or embed can be edited. When you edit a linked object, any changes you make to the object are also made to the object in the source file. When you edit an embedded object, you can edit it in the destination application, or you can open the source application, edit the object, and update the object to insert the changes in the destination application.

You can update linked objects manually or have Quattro Pro automatically update links to reflect any changes made in the source file.

You can edit Dynamic Data Exchange (DDE) links. DDE is a communication system used by Windows, OS/2, and Mac OS operating systems to allow two applications running simultaneously to interact.

You can change the source of a linked OLE object. Most objects are inserted as OLE links. For example, if a linked file is moved to a different folder, you can relink to the file in its new location.

A linked or embedded object can be converted to a different format.

Some objects, when activated, can display in more than one source application for editing. If more than one activation choice is available for the object, you can change its activation effect.

You can display an object as an icon. In this format, the object takes up very little space until you need to view or edit it.

 How to


To edit a linked or embedded OLE object

1	Right-click a linked or embedded OLE object, and click Object [image] Edit.

2	Edit the object.

3	Click outside the object box.

 Tip

•	You can also double-click most objects to edit them. However, when you double-click a sound or video clip, the clip plays.

 Related topics


To update a linked OLE object

1	Select a linked OLE object.

2	Click Edit [image] OLE links.

3	Click Update now.

If you want to update the linked object automatically, enable the Automatic option.

 Related topics


To edit a DDE link

1	Open two linked applications.

2	Edit the source file.

The changes are updated in your linked notebook.

 Note

•	The type of link you create depends on the types of links the source application supports and which format you select in Paste special. When you click a format, text below the format name describes how each format will display in your document.

 Tips

•	To update DDE links, open the linked object's source and destination files in their respective applications. When you open a file that contains DDE links, and all supporting DDE server applications are not open, a dialog displays prompting you to open the corresponding application.

•	If you want to change the source of a linked DDE object you have to change the Link name, Application, Topic/Filename, and Item of the object.

 Related topics


To change the source of a linked OLE object

1	Select a linked OLE object.

2	Click Edit [image] OLE links.

3	Click Change source.

4	Choose the drive and folder where the file is stored.

5	Double-click the filename.

 Related topics


To convert an OLE object format

1	Right-click an OLE object, and click Object [image] Convert.

2	Enable the Convert to option.

3	Choose a format from the Object type list.

 Note

•	When you convert an object format, the object is permanently converted to the selected format.

 Related topics


To change an OLE object's activation effect

1	Right-click an OLE object, and click Object [image] Convert.

2	Enable the Activate as option.

3	Choose a format from the Object type list.

 Related topics


To display an OLE object as an icon

1	Right-click an OLE object, and click Object [image] Convert.

2	Enable the Display as icon check box.

 Tip

•	You can change the icon that displays by clicking Change icon.

 Related topics


Creating notebook links

You can insert links into Quattro Pro notebooks. There are several advantages to setting up notebook links instead of using multisheet notebooks. You can eliminate redundancy, ensure data is always up to date, save disk space, divide tasks among several people, and build larger models that exceed the limits of a single notebook.

You can link notebooks by selecting cells in the source notebook (when both notebooks are open). When you are consolidating information from several files that have the same layout, you can use wildcards to link to the same place in all of them. You can also link cells.

Links between Quattro Pro and other applications can be created. For example, you can write a memo in WordPerfect and link a cell in Quattro Pro to it.

You can create hyperlinks in a notebook to jump to another file or an Internet site.

 How to


To insert a notebook link

1	Select a cell in which you want to place a link.

2	Type a plus sign (+), and type the link address as [Drive:\Path\Filename.Extension]Sheet:Cell reference, where:

•	Drive [image] is the drive containing the notebook. This is necessary only if the notebook you are linking is not on the same drive as the primary notebook.

•	Path [image] is the path to the folder containing the notebook. This is necessary only when the notebook is not in the same folder as the primary notebook.

•	Filename [image] is the name of the notebook

•	Extension [image] is a three-letter suffix separated from the filename by a period (.). It is necessary only when the notebook has a different extension from the primary notebook.

•	Sheet [image] is any valid sheet name, sheet range, or group name (such as C, Sales, D..F, or YearToDate)

•	Cell reference [image] is any valid cell address, pair of coordinates, or cell name. However, cell coordinates are valid only when the link contains a spreadsheet function to operate on the cells.

 Note

•	Because link statements are not case-sensitive, you can type all parts of the link in either uppercase or lowercase. Do not include blank spaces in any part of the reference.

 Related topics


To link notebooks by selecting cells

1	Click File [image] Open.

2	Choose the drive and folder where the notebook is stored.

3	Double-click the filename.

4	Select a cell.

5	Type a plus sign (+) in the cell.

6	On the application bar, click the name of the supporting file.

7	Click the cell that contains the link you want to place in the primary notebook.

If the formula is incomplete, finish typing it.

8	Press Enter.

 Tip

•	You can also activate the target notebook by clicking Window and choosing the window from the numbered list at the bottom of the menu.

 Related topics


To link notebooks by using wildcards

1	Click File [image] Open.

2	Open the primary notebook and any relevant supporting files.

3	Type a wildcard character in place of the filenames in the link.

 Notes

•	When you finish entering the link, the formula is revised to include specific filenames. This means that if you open new files after using a wildcard in a link, they are not referenced in the formula.

•	You can use the wildcards question mark (?) and asterisk (*) in links. A question mark (?) represents any single character, and an asterisk (*) represents any number of characters. For additional information, see "File-handling options."

 Related topics


To link cells

1	In the source notebook, select the cells you want to link.

2	Click Edit [image] Copy.

3	In the destination notebook, select the upper-left cell of the destination cells for the links.

4	Click Edit [image] Paste special.

5	Click Link.

 Note

•	Each copied cell contains a formula beginning with a plus sign (+) followed by the filename in parentheses (if different from the active notebook), the sheet name and a colon (if different from the active sheet), and the cell address.

 Related topics


To link data between applications

1	In the source application, select the data you want to link to from Quattro Pro.

2	Click Edit [image] Copy.

3	In Quattro Pro, click the cell where you want to place the linked data.

4	Click Edit [image] Paste special.

5	Enable the Paste link option.

6	Choose a file format from the As box.

 Notes

•	You can link contiguous and noncontiguous selections.

•	Each copied cell contains a formula beginning with a plus sign (+) followed by the filename in parentheses (if different from the active notebook), the sheet name and a colon (if different from the active sheet), and the cell address.

 Related topics


To insert a hyperlink

1	Select a cell on the active spreadsheet.

2	Click Tools [image] Hyperlink.

3	Type a text description of the link in the Text to link box.

4	Type a link source in one of the following boxes:

•	Link to file or URL [image] allows you to link to a file or URL

•	Specific location [image] allows you to link to a cell address in the same notebook

 Note

•	You can also create a Web link to a specific Web site, such as one that provides a stock quote. For more information, see "Working with Web links."

 Tips

•	If you want Quattro Pro to use a relative path to the file you've linked to, enable the Use relative path check box. If you move a file that contains a hyperlink, ensure that you also move any linked files as necessary to maintain the hierarchy.

•	You can also use UNC paths in your relative addressing as long as the network path you are using has previously been mapped. For example, if you map network drive \\documents\spreadsheets to drive F: on your computer, then the hyperlink \\documents\spreadsheets\financials.qpw could be used to access the file financials.qpw.

 Related topics


Editing and updating notebook links

You can open files linked to the active notebook, and you can update links to unopened files so that they reflect any changed information. Updating links is useful when you are working on a network; while you are using one notebook, others can be working on supporting files, which remain closed to you.

You can also change notebook links to another file; all link references to the selected file change to the new filename in the active notebook. As well, you can delete both notebook links and hyperlinks.

 How to


To open a file linked to the active notebook

1	Click Edit [image] Links [image] Open links.

2	Select a file.

 Note

•	When you open files linked to the active notebook, only files that are directly linked to the active notebook are opened. You must repeat the procedure for all directly linked files that contain additional file links.

 Related topics


To update a link to an unopened file

1	Click Edit [image] Links [image] Refresh links.

2	Select a file.

 Note

•	When you update a link to an Internet file specified by a URL, the file is reloaded from the Internet, not from a local temporary file.

 Related topics


To change a notebook link to another file

1	Click Edit [image] Links [image] Change links.

2	Select a file.

3	Type the name of the new file in the To box.

 Notes

•	All link references to the selected file change to the new filename in the active notebook.

•	The new supporting file must have the same layout as the previous one because the same relative cells are referenced. If it does not, formulas that reference linked cells may show errors or produce meaningless values.

 Related topics


To delete a notebook link

1	Click Edit [image] Links [image] Delete links.

2	Select a file.

 Notes

•	The Undo command cannot restore deleted links.

•	When you delete a notebook link Quattro Pro replaces all link references to the deleted files with ERR values, but it does not remove any formulas containing ERR values. You can edit the formulas to replace the ERR values with valid references.

 Related topics


To delete a hyperlink

1	Select a cell containing a hyperlink.

2	Click Tools [image] Hyperlink.

3	Click Remove link.

 Related topics


Reference: Managing files and data

Quattro Pro provides extensive file-handling options and a large range of supported file formats. Many graphics formats can be imported into Quattro Pro projects and exported from Quattro Pro into other applications.

 How to


File-handling options

Folders

When you first open the Open file dialog box, it displays files in the startup folder. The startup folder is the folder from which you initially start Quattro Pro, but you can change it.

If you save or load a file in a folder other than the startup folder, this last-used folder becomes the default folder. Then the next time you save or load a file, the default folder initially displays in the dialog box. The last-used folder is always the default folder displayed until you restart Quattro Pro, when the startup folder again displays.

Wildcards

You can use the wildcard characters asterisk (*) and question mark (?) in any part of the Filename box to limit the files displayed. An asterisk represents any number of characters in its position; a question mark represents any single character in its position. For instance, *.prn lists all files with the filename extension .prn, and budget?.qpw lists all notebooks that begin with budget followed by one character before the .qpw extension.

The following examples show how different wildcard characters work in notebook links:

•	[] [image] links to the active notebook

•	[*] [image] links to all open notebooks

•	[AB*] [image] links to all open notebooks whose names begin with AB

•	[A*B] [image] links to all open notebooks whose names begin with A and end with B

•	[A?B] [image] links to all open notebooks with three-character names that begin with A and end with B

•	[AB???] [image] links to all open notebooks with five-character names that begin with AB

@SUM([*]A:A1) [image] adds the values in cell A1 in sheet A of all open notebooks (except the active one), and places the result in the active cell

@AVG([*]BUDGET:B3..C10) [image] finds the average of all values in cells B3..C10 in the sheet named BUDGET of each open notebook

@SUM([*]TOTALS) [image] sums the values of all cells in the selection TOTALS in any open notebooks containing TOTALS. These selections need not be the same size or in the same relative positions.

Read-only files

If you are working on a network and the file you are trying to open or retrieve has already been opened by another user, you will view a read-only prompt. You can choose to open the file with read-only rights (where you can save it under a different name) or cancel the operation.

Alternate file-handling dialog boxes

If you are using a document managing system that is compliant with the Open Document Management API (ODMA) standard, you will see alternate file-handling dialog boxes in the following Quattro Pro areas: File [image] Open, File [image] Close, File [image] Save as, File [image] Send to, and Insert [image] External data [image] Import database file.

 Related topics


Supported file formats

You can use spreadsheet files from a variety of applications with Quattro Pro. A list of supported file formats identifies the Quattro Pro filters available to convert files created in other applications. You can also save a Quattro Pro file in most of the formats listed.

To see a list of supported file formats, click File [image] Save as, and scroll through the listed file types in the File type list. If you can't find the format you need and you are saving the document for use in another application, consult the application's documentation for suggested compatible file formats.

File formats marked with an asterisk (*) can be opened only, not saved.

Type	Application
.qpw	Quattro Pro 9 and 10 for Windows 95, 98, NT, ME, and 2000
.wb3	Quattro Pro 7 and 8 for Windows 95 and Windows NT
.wb2	Quattro Pro for Windows, version 6.0
.wb1	Quattro Pro for Windows, versions 1.0 and 5.0
.wq1	Quattro Pro for DOS
.wq2*	Quattro Pro for DOS, versions 5.0 and 5.5
.xls	Microsoft Excel, versions 5.0, 7.0, 97, and 2000
.123*	Lotus 1-2-3 97/9, and 9.5 Millennium Edition
.wk4	Lotus 1-2-3, versions 4, 5
.wk3	Lotus 1-2-3, version 3.x, and Lotus 1-2-3 for Windows
.wk1	Lotus 1-2-3, version 2.x
.wks	Lotus 1-2-3, version 1.0
.wke	Lotus 1-2-3, educational version
.db	Paradox
.dbf	dBASE III, dBASE II, III Plus, and IV, and dBASE for Windows
.txt	Tab-delimited text
.csv	Comma-delimited values
.dif	Data Interchange Format
.slk	Symbolic Link
.html/.htm	HTML version 3 (tables only), includes XML
.wpd*	WordPerfect (all versions)
.qif*	Quicken Interchange Format
 Related topics


Quattro Pro for MS-DOS

You can display Quattro Pro for MS-DOS menus within Quattro Pro. You can also open files and play macros originally created in Quattro Pro for MS-DOS. Quattro Pro supports all Quattro Pro for MS-DOS functions and most features. However, once you change a MS-DOS notebook in Quattro Pro, you should save it as a .qpw file to avoid losing new features and @functions not available in the MS-DOS program.

Enabling the Quattro Pro for MS-DOS menu

There are some Quattro Pro commands that are not accessible from the Corel Quattro Pro for MS-DOS menus. Any features of Corel Quattro Pro for MS-DOS that are not available will display grayed in the menus.

To enable the Corel Quattro Pro for MS-DOS menu, click Tools [image] Settings, click the Macro tab, and enable the Slash key compatibility check box. Then, to display this menu, press the forward slash (/).

Using Quattro Pro for MS-DOS editing keys

You can use Quattro Pro for MS-DOS editing keys in later versions of Quattro Pro. When the Compatibility keys check box is enabled, a variety of keys work the same way as in Quattro Pro for MS-DOS. When the check box is disabled, these keys work as they would in most Windows applications. For example, pressing TAB moves the cursor five spaces to the right when the Compatibility keys check box is enabled. When it is disabled, pressing TAB moves the cursor to the next word.

To use Quattro Pro for MS-DOS editing keys, click Tools [image] Settings, then select the General tab, and enable the Compatibility keys check box.

Running a Quattro Pro for MS-DOS macro

You can run Corel Quattro Pro for MS-DOS keystroke macros in Quattro Pro. Macros using Corel Quattro Pro for MS-DOS menu equivalents are still compatible.

To run a Corel Quattro Pro for MS-DOS macro, press the forward slash (/), and click Tools [image] Macro [image] Execute. To ensure that the macro will not skip to the wrong cell, click Tools [image] Settings, select the General tab, and disable the Move cell selector/enter key check box.

 Notes

•	If you are working in Quattro Pro for MS-DOS, you can open .sqz files by saving them as .wq1 files first.

•	Macros assigned to ALT keys in the MS-DOS version of Corel Quattro Pro run in the Windows version using CTRL + SHIFT. This change allows the ALT keys to be used for Windows standard menu shortcuts.

 Related topics


Graphic formats for importing

You can import graphics files in any of the following file formats; however, you should install the required filters when you install the application.

Type	Format Description
.bmp	Bitmap image [image] the format used in Windows paint programs such as Paint and in the Windows Control Panel for wallpaper
.cdr	CorelDRAW [image] the filename extension for files created in CorelDRAW
.cgm	Computer Graphics Metafile [image] the most common vector-based clipart format. To install .cgm import, you must select it under Accessories during a custom installation.
.clp	QP DOS Clipboard [image] a graphic format used by Quattro Pro for DOS
.cpt	Corel PHOTO-PAINT [image] the filename extension for bitmap image files created by Corel PHOTO-PAINT.
.emf	Enhanced Metafile Format [image] the native internal file format of Windows 95 and Windows NT. It supports both bitmap and vector information and 24-bit RGB color.
.eps	Encapsulated PostScript [image] the file format universally understood by PostScript printers and image setters. The file contains PostScript code for high-quality output, plus a bitmap image for lower-resolution screen display. (If the .eps file does not contain a bitmap image, you cannot import it into Quattro Pro.)
.gif	Graphics Interchange Format [image] a bitmap image format originating on CompuServe Information Service (CIS) and widely used on other electronic bulletin boards
.jpg	JPEG [image] a standard format developed by the Joint Photographic Experts Group, allowing the transfer of files between a wide variety of platforms, using superior compression techniques
.pcx	PC Paintbrush [image] a bitmap image format supported by many programs, including Paint and Quattro Pro for DOS
.pic	Lotus PIC [image] the chart format used in the DOS versions of Lotus 1-2-3
.tga	Truevision Targa bitmap image [image] the extension for files in Targa format, a bitmap image format commonly used to store digitized color photographs
.tif	Tag Image File Format [image] a bitmap image file format often used for scanned or gray scale images. Because .tif files can be large, they are often compressed.
.wmf	Windows Metafile [image] a file format used by many Windows programs
.wpg	WordPerfect Graphic [image] a graphic format used by Corel Presentations
 Related topics


Graphic formats for exporting

You can export graphics files to any of the following file formats. If you are exporting a chart to send to a 35mm slide bureau, be sure to set the chart's aspect ratio to 35mm Slide. For more information, see "To change the aspect ratio of a map."

Type	Format Description
.bmp	Bitmap image [image] the format used in Windows paint programs such as Paint and in the Windows Control Panel for wallpaper
.cgm	Computer Graphics Metafile [image] the most common vector-based clipart format
.emf	Enhanced Metafile Format [image] the native internal file format of Windows 95 and Windows NT. It supports both bitmap and vector information and 24-bit RGB color.
.eps	Encapsulated PostScript [image] the file format universally understood by PostScript printers and image setters. The file contains PostScript code for high-quality output, plus a bitmap image for lower-resolution screen display.
.gif	Graphics Interchange Format [image] a bitmap image format originating on CompuServe Information Service (CIS) and widely used on other electronic bulletin boards. .gif files can be exported only in 256 color (or less) mode.
.jpg	JPEG [image] a standard format developed by the Joint Photographic Experts Group, allowing the transfer of files between a wide variety of platforms, using superior compression techniques. .jpg files can export only in true color mode (available when using the high color (16-bit) palette).
.pcx	PC Paintbrush [image] a bitmap image format supported by many programs, including Paint and Quattro Pro for DOS
.tif	Tag Image File Format [image] a bitmap image file format often used for scanned or gray scale images. Because .tif files can be large, they are often compressed.
.wmf	Windows Metafile [image] a file format used by many Windows programs
.wpg	WordPerfect Graphic [image] a graphic format used by Corel Presentations
 Related topics


Rules for combining files

When you combine files with math operations, keep the following in mind:

•	Save the destination notebook, so that you can close and reopen it if you do not get the results you want from combining files.

•	If you are combining only part of a file with the active notebook, find out the cell name or coordinates you will be copying.

•	Make sure you set up the source and destination areas similarly. For example, put headings in the same position. Data that is copied takes on the properties of the open notebook, retaining only its numeric format.

•	Check that the receiving notebook contains only values where you are combining data. If cells contains formulas, convert them to values (by clicking Edit [image] Convert to values) before using a mathematical operation. The mathematical operation will not occur in cells with formulas or labels.

•	In the active notebook, cells that contain labels, formulas, ERR, or NA are not altered by the incoming data.

•	When adding incoming values to those in the notebook, you can specify that all incoming formulas convert to their end values, and that labels and blank cells be ignored. Formulas resulting in ERR, NA, or strings can be also ignored.

•	References in formulas adjust to reflect their new positions, even when they are absolute. (Absolute formulas remain absolute in the new notebook after their initial adjustment; they retain the dollar signs ($), but their references adjust.) If a formula refers to cells outside of the selection being copied, the result may be inaccurate.

•	Value entries in the destination cells of the receiving notebook are replaced by the results of the mathematical operation you choose to perform with the original and incoming values.

•	Named cells are converted to cell coordinates when they are copied, to avoid confusion with names in the open notebook.

•	Column widths in the destination notebook can be adjusted to correspond to incoming source data.

 Related topics


Troubleshooting with OLE

When you click an object and receive the message "Can't Turn Into An OLE Object," there are several possible reasons:

•	The object is not an OLE object and has no source file. This means you can use the object in the document, but you cannot edit it.

•	The information may have been created in an application that does not support DDE or OLE linking. For example, if you are trying to link to a spreadsheet or database application, you should use a spreadsheet or database link. You can use the Windows Object Packager utility to create an OLE package. Consult Windows documentation.

•	The application necessary to edit the object is not available. For example, if the object is linked to Corel Presentations, Corel Presentations must be installed.

If the OLE object doesn't open when you double-click it, consider the following:

•	The source application may have an open dialog box. Switch to the source application, and close the dialog box. Double-click the object again in Quattro Pro.

•	You may not have copied the object as an OLE object.

•	Your system may not have enough resources to open the application. Close unnecessary applications or windows, and double-click the object again.

•	If it is a linked object, make sure the source file has not been moved, renamed, or deleted. If the source file has been moved or renamed, select the object, click Edit [image] OLE links, and click Change source to change the source of the link.

 Related topics


Adding maps to spreadsheets

Maps can expose trends in adjoining regions that would be hidden in a spreadsheet table or a numeric chart. You create maps just as you create charts, and they can be placed next to data or on their own page. The mapping component of Quattro Pro can be included with a custom installation, or installed using Install-As-You-Go.

In this section, you'll learn about

•	creating and positioning maps

•	presenting data on maps

•	editing maps

•	customizing map legends

For more information about adding maps to spreadsheets, see "Reference: Adding maps to spreadsheets."


Creating and positioning maps

You can create a map from the sample data provided with Quattro Pro. Sample data is stored in datamap files and can be copied to a spreadsheet and combined with your own data. These files are installed with the Quattro Pro mapping component and contain statistical and geographic data related to various world regions.

You can use a Quattro Pro mapping expert to create maps representing data. This expert allows you to create floating maps or full-page maps. Quattro Pro calculates the full range of map data and assigns each map region one of six colors or patterns, depending on where that region lies in the data range.

After creating a map, you can move it anywhere on a spreadsheet and adjust its size to fit in a specified area. The region displayed on a map is an object. Legends, titles, and any additional graphics you add to a map are also map objects. Each object can be moved or resized independently.

You can also change the aspect ratio of a map. When you change a map's aspect ratio, you are changing the height and width proportions of the map.

Quattro Pro lets you view a map (or a portion of a map) with increased or reduced magnification. For example, if you zoom in on a map of Africa you can view a single country (for example, Egypt) on the map.

For additional information about sample datamap files, see "Example: Setting up map data."

 How to


To copy data from a datamap file to a new notebook

1	Click File [image] Open.

2	Choose the drive and folder where the datamap file is stored.

Datamap files are usually located in the programs\datamaps folder.

3	Choose All files from the File type list box.

4	Double-click the datamap (.wb3) file you want to open.

5	Select the data you want to copy to your notebook.

6	Click Edit [image] Copy.

7	Click File [image] New.

8	Click Edit [image] Paste.

 Related topics


To create a map

1	Select the cells containing the map data.

The first selected cell must contain the first map region name.

2	Click Insert [image] Graphics [image] Map.

3	Follow the directions provided by the Map Expert.

If the Check regions dialog box is displayed, you can replace the unknown region by choosing a region from the Region list box, and clicking Replace. You can also leave the unknown region by clicking Skip or Skip all.

To add cities to your map, click Mark points on your map during the Map Expert process.

4	Position the pointer at the upper-left corner of the desired position for the map.

5	Drag diagonally until the map is the required size.

 Tip

•	To create a map on a separate page, enable the Map window option in the Destination area. To create a blank map, don't type any cell references in the Color or Pattern boxes.

 Related topics


To move a map

1	Select the border of a map.

2	Drag the border to move the map to a new position.

 Tip

•	If you want to move multiple map objects as a unit; select an object, hold down Shift, and select additional objects.

 Related topics


To resize a map

1	Select the border of a map.

2	Drag a sizing handle to change the width or height of the map.

 Tips

•	If you want to change the width and height without changing map proportions, drag a corner sizing handle.

•	If you want to resize multiple map objects as a unit; select an object, hold down Shift, and select additional objects.

 Related topics


To change the aspect ratio of a map

1	Select a map.

2	Click View, and click one of the following menu commands:

•	Floating chart [image] retains the proportions of the floating map, even when you print the map or display it on its own page

•	Printer preview [image] displays how the map looks when printed with the current page setup

•	Screen slide [image] displays the correct proportions for a map that you plan to use in an onscreen slide show

•	35mm slide [image] displays the correct proportions for a map that you plan to send to a slide service for processing into 35mm slides

 Note

•	For information about printing maps, see "To print a chart or map."

 Related topics


To zoom in on a map

1	Select a map.

2	Right-click an area, and click Zoom in.

You can also
Return a map to its original magnification	Right-click an area, and click Zoom to normal.
Reduce the magnification of a map	Right-click an area, and click Zoom out.
Center a map on a point	Right-click an area, and click Center.
 Related topics


Presenting data on maps

Colors and patterns can show ranges related to the data on a spreadsheet. You can include this information when you create a map, or you can add it to the map later. You can also remove the colors or patterns related to a data selection.

A map consists of one or more overlays with or without spreadsheet data. For example, a map of the United States usually shows state borders, but it may also show highways or the location of major cities. Each of these sets of boundaries or locations is called an overlay, because they can be laid on top of each other, like overhead transparencies or sheets of tracing paper. There are three types of overlays you can add to a map: region, static, and pin.

You can add region overlays to a map to display regional boundaries. You can also extend a map to include other regions. If you add another region to a map, make sure you add its region, color, and pattern data to the spreadsheet.

Unlike other types of overlays, static overlays do not require any notebook data. Static overlays display correctly only if they are appropriate for the current map. For example, a static overlay of United States highways is of no use in a map of Japan, so it will not display. Quattro Pro includes two static overlays: the U.S. Interstate Highways overlay, and the World Grid overlay. The U.S. Interstate Highways overlay marks in the major highways that cross the United States. The World Grid overlay adds longitude and latitude lines to the map.

Pin overlays can display locations of cities or towns. You can add pin overlays when you create a map or you can add them later. Before you add a pin overlay, make sure the spreadsheet data is organized correctly.

You can also add locations to a map using longitude and latitude. For example, you can show the location of important buildings, geographic landmarks, and towns or cities not included in one of the pin overlays.

You can change the appearance of a pin label by applying different font properties. As well, you can change the pin symbol that displays next to any label. For example, you can display symbols that represent schools, direction arrows, or other landmarks on a map.

 How to


To add color and pattern data to a map

1	Right-click a map, and click Map data.

2	In the Color data box, type the cell references for the data you want represented by colors.

3	In the Pattern data box, type the cell references for the data you want represented by patterns.

 Tips

•	You can also add color and pattern data to a map by double-clicking the Map icon on the Objects sheet.

•	To remove color or pattern data, select the data to remove and press Delete.

 Related topics


To add a region overlay to a map

1	Right-click a map, and click Map data.

2	Click Add overlay.

3	In the Map Data dialog box, click the Region tab.

4	Choose a region from the list.

 Note

•	When you create a map with the Map Expert, the first region overlay is added automatically.

 Related topics


To include another region on a map

1	Right-click a map, and click Map data.

2	Click Add overlay.

3	In the Map Data dialog box, click the Region tab.

4	Choose a region from the list.

5	Click OK.

6	In the Region names box, type the cell addresses for the new region.

7	In the Color data box, type the cell addresses for the new region data you want represented by color.

8	In the Pattern data box, type the cell addresses for the new region data you want represented by patterns.

 Note

•	Quattro Pro can recognize regions belonging to installed maps only. For example, if a map contains data from states in India, Quattro Pro will not recognize those states as part of India unless the map India by State is installed.

 Related topics


To add a static overlay to a map

1	Right-click a map, and click Map data.

2	Click Add overlay.

3	In the Map Data dialog box, click the Static tab.

4	Choose a grid from the list.

 Related topics


To add a location to a map using a pin overlay

1	Right-click a map, and click Map data

2	Click Add overlay.

3	In the Map Data dialog box, click the Pin tab.

4	Enable the Use pin name option.

5	Choose a city overlay from the list.

6	In the Pin ID cells box, type the cell references containing the pin IDs.

7	In the Pin label cells box, type the cell references containing the pin labels.

 Related topics


To add a location to a map using longitude and latitude

1	Right-click a map, and click Map data

2	Click Add overlay.

3	In the Map Data dialog box, click the Pin tab.

4	Enable the Use lat/long option.

5	In the Name box, type a name for the overlay.

6	Click OK.

7	In the Latitude cells box, type the cell references containing the latitude values.

8	In the Longitude cells box, type the cell references containing the longitude values.

9	In the Pin label cells box, type the cell references containing the pin labels.

 Related topics


To change the appearance of pin labels on a map

1	Select a map.

2	Right-click a region on the map, and click Selection properties.

3	Click the Pin symbol tab.

4	Enable the Display pin labels check box.

5	Click the Font tab.

6	Modify any font properties.

 Note

•	Pin labels display on a map only if you select them along with the pin names or latitude and longitude coordinates. If you do not include the labels in the selection, pin locations are marked with a symbol or left blank.

 Related topics


To change the appearance of pin symbols on a map

1	Select a map.

2	Right-click a region on the map, and click Selection properties.

3	Click the Pin symbol tab.

4	Enable the Display pin symbol check box.

5	Modify any font properties.

6	Choose a new symbol from the Symbol list.

 Note

•	Pin labels display on a map only if you select them along with the pin names or latitude and longitude coordinates. If you do not include the labels in the selection, pin locations are marked with a symbol or left blank.

 Related topics


Editing maps

You can edit a map and its map objects by modifying the properties associated with each. As well, you can have your map redrawn automatically when you make changes to the spreadsheet data, or you can choose to manually update your map.

You can change a map border to coordinate with a color scheme used on the map. As well, you can change a map background to display colors, patterns, or wash effects.

Selecting different text properties like font, size, and color for titles, subtitles, and legend titles lets you change the appearance of titles. As well, you can edit map titles. For example, if you change the data shown in a map, you can update the titles to accurately reflect what data the map now displays.

You can also change the alignment of titles and subtitles.

 How to


To edit a map

1	Select a map.

2	Right-click an object on the map, and click Selection properties.

3	Modify any formatting settings.

 Related topics


To redraw a map

1	Select a map.

2	Right-click a region on the map, and click Selection properties.

3	Click the Redraw options tab.

4	Enable one of the following options:

•	Automatic [image] the map is updated every time the source data changes

•	Manual [image] the map is updated only when you click Redraw

 Related topics


To change the border of a map

1	Select the border of a map.

2	Click Format [image] Selection properties.

3	Click the Border color tab.

4	Click the color palette.

5	Click a color on the palette.

6	Click the Box type tab.

7	Choose a new line style.

If you want to create a drop shadow behind the border, enable the Drop shadow check box.

 Related topics


To change the background of a map

1	Select a map.

2	Right-click the background of the map, and click Selection properties.

3	Enable one of the following options:

•	Pattern [image] lets you choose a solid color or two-color pattern

•	Wash [image] lets you choose a wash effect using one or two colors

•	Bitmap [image] lets you insert a bitmap image of your choice as the background

•	None [image] lets you leave the background blank

4	Modify any color or style settings.

 Note

•	Background fill options are overridden if you make the background transparent. For information about making a background transparent, see "To make a map background transparent."

 Related topics


To make a map background transparent

1	Select the border of a map.

2	Click Format [image] Selection properties.

3	Click the Box type tab.

4	Enable the Transparent check box.

 Related topics


To edit a map title

1	Right-click a map, and click Titles.

2	In the Main title box, type a new main title.

3	In the Subtitle box, type a new subtitle.

4	In the Legend box, type a new legend title.

 Related topics


To change text properties for a map title

1	Select a map.

2	Right-click a title on the map, and click Selection properties.

3	Click the Text font tab.

4	Modify any settings.

5	Click the Text settings tab.

6	Modify any settings.

 Related topics


To change the alignment of map titles

1	Select a map.

2	Right-click a title on the map, and click Selection properties.

3	Click the Alignment tab.

4	Choose a new alignment.

 Related topics


Customizing map legends

In Quattro Pro, legends are map objects that help control how data is represented on the map. You can add a map legend title at any time. You can also add new text to the legend.

You can edit the colors or patterns displayed in a legend. The position of a map legend can also be changed.

 How to


To add a title to a map legend

1	Select a map.

2	Right-click the legend, and click Selection properties.

3	Click the Title tab.

4	Enable the Show legend title check box.

5	Type the title in the Legend title box.

 Related topics


To add text to a map legend

1	Select a map.

2	Right-click the legend, and click Selection properties.

3	Click one of the following tabs:

•	Colors

•	Patterns

4	Type text in the Legend text boxes.

 Tip

•	If you want to display only numeric values in the legend, leave the Legend text boxes blank.

 Related topics


To edit colors or patterns in a map legend

1	Select a map.

2	Right-click the legend, and click Selection properties.

3	Click one of the following tabs:

•	Colors

•	Patterns

4	Select a new color or pattern next to each color or pattern bin.

You can also
Exclude color or pattern data from a map legend	Enable the Set bin values manually and Require exact match check boxes.
Change values in a map legend	Enable the Set bin values manually check box and enter new values in the Maximum value boxes.
Hide color or pattern data in a map legend	Disable the Show legend check box.
 Related topics


To change the position of a map legend

1	Select a map.

2	Right-click the legend, and click Selection properties.

3	Click the Legend position tab.

4	Choose a new legend position.

 Tip

•	You can also change the position of a map legend by dragging it to a new position.

 Related topics


Reference: Adding maps to spreadsheets

When creating a map, Quattro Pro automatically selects the most appropriate map from those available, and then assigns colors or patterns to each region. Before you create a map, it is important to arrange the data from which a map will be created in a suitable format.

 How to


Example: Setting up map data

Quattro Pro automatically fills in a map with the data you provide. For Quattro Pro to interpret data correctly, enter it on the spreadsheet in the following sequence:

If you include latitude and longitude decimal values to identify a location, enter them in the following order:

•	Column A contains region names or IDs. You can list country names in full, (for example, United Kingdom, France, Germany), or you can list standard abbreviations (for example GB, FR, DE).

•	Column B contains color data associated with each region name. Variations in this set of data display as different colors in the map. Color data can be either numbers or text.

•	Column C contains pattern data associated with each region name. Variations in this second set of data display as different patterns in the map. Pattern data can be either numbers or text.

•	Column D contains either (1) the pin location or (2) latitude.

•	Column E contains either (1) the pin label or (2) longitude.

•	Column F contains pin labels if you have entered latitude and longitude in Columns D and E.

•	Latitude is expressed as degrees, minutes, and seconds north or south of the equator.

•	Longitude is expressed as degrees, minutes, and seconds east or west of the prime meridian that runs through Greenwich, England.

For Quattro Pro to interpret latitude and longitude coordinates, you must convert them to decimals. The simplest way to convert coordinates to decimals is to use the @LLDEC function to create a new series. The resulting coordinates are preceded by a minus sign if they are south of the equator or west of the prime meridian. For example, the longitude coordinate 38×20'40"W converts to -38.334444. For more information about converting latitude and longitude values to decimals, see the Quattro Pro spreadsheet function @LLDEC in the Reference Information/Functions Help section of the online Help.

Map data is easier to select when you arrange it in adjacent columns. If a notebook has blank columns or columns containing other data between the map data columns, you need to exclude those columns.

 Related topics


Reference: Quattro Pro keyboard shortcuts


Quattro Pro keyboard shortcuts

Quattro Pro offers many ways to save you time. For example, instead of using menus and menu commands, you can access many of the dialog boxes and commands by using keyboard shortcuts.

Quattro Pro can display keyboard shortcuts beside each menu command in the menu bar. You can disable this feature if you do not want shortcuts displayed.

You can customize many of the keyboard shortcuts. For more information about customizing keyboard shortcuts, see "Customizing keyboards."

Depending one what mode you are in keyboard shortcuts may be repeated but their functions change.

 How to


Shortcuts for common tasks

The following keys provide useful shortcuts for many tasks:

Key(s)	Description
Alt + (underscored letter)	Opens relevant menu. For example, pressing Alt + F opens the File menu.
underscored letter	Once a menu is open, press the underscored letter alone to select a command. For example, if the File menu is open, pressing P selects the Print command.
Alt, then Ctrl + Tab	Selects the first item on the first toolbar. Press Tab to move the focus to the right, press Shift + Tab to move it to the left, and press Spacebar to select an command. Press Ctrl + Tab again to move to the next toolbar.
Ctrl + N	File [image] New
Ctrl + O	File [image] Open
Ctrl + F4	File [image] Close
Ctrl + S	File [image] Save
F3	File [image] Save as
Alt + F + G	File [image] Page setup
Ctrl + P	File [image] Print
Alt + F4	File [image] Exit
Ctrl + Z	Edit [image] Undo
Ctrl + Shift + Z	Edit [image] Redo
Ctrl + X, or Shift + Del	Edit [image] Cut
Ctrl + C, or Ctrl + Ins	Edit [image] Copy
Ctrl + V, or Shift + Ins	Edit [image] Paste
Ctrl + B	Makes selected text bold
Ctrl + I	Makes selected text italic
Ctrl + E	Centers selected text
Ctrl + U	Underlines selected text
Ctrl + L	Left aligns selected text
Ctrl + R	Right aligns selected text
Backspace	Erases the character to the left of the cursor when the cursor is in a cell. Erases everything in a cell when the cell is selected.
Spacebar	Enables or disables the area within the cursor's focus (such as check boxes or links in a list)
Caps lock	Enters Caps mode, in which all letters you type are displayed in uppercase letters. Press again to exit Caps mode
Ctrl + D	Inserts the date
Ctrl + Enter	Inserts a hard page break
Ctrl + Break	If pressed while a macro is executing, terminates the macro
Del	Erases the contents (but not properties) of the current cell or selected cells
Ctrl + Del	In Group mode, acts like Del, but "drills" the deletion through the group (deletes the selected cell, cells, or graphics on all grouped spreadsheets)
\ (Backslash)	Lets you type one or more characters to repeat across an entire cell width
Enter	In a notebook, writes the entry on the input line into the current cell, and returns to Ready mode. In a menu, choice list, or dialog box, chooses the selected item.
Esc	Cancels whatever task you are doing. For example, it can back you out of a menu, exit a dialog box, or erase any changes you made in the input line.
Num lock	Toggles performance of the numeric keypad keys between numeric keys and Arrow keys
Pause	Enters Macro Debug mode
Scroll lock	Toggles performance of the Arrow keys. When you first press Scroll lock, the SCRL indicator is enabled on the status bar and the Arrow keys scroll the contents of the active window without changing which cell is selected. When you press Scroll lock again, you can change which cell is selected with the Arrow keys.
Ctrl + Page down or Page up	In a notebook, moves from one spreadsheet to the next or previous spreadsheet. In a dialog box with multiple settings, changes panes (groups of property options).
Ctrl + Shift + Page down or Page up	Lets you selects multiple spreadsheets
Up or Down Arrow	In a dialog box text box, enters Point mode.
Tab	In a notebook, moves right one column. In a dialog box, moves between controls. In a Help window, use to move between jumps, and press Enter to select jumps.
Ctrl + Tab	In a graphics window, press Ctrl + Tab to select an object in the chart.
Shift + Tab	In a notebook, moves left one cell. In a dialog box, moves to the previous control. In a graphics window, moves to the beginning of the current word in a text box. Use Ctrl + Shift + Tab to select the previous item in a chart.
Ctrl + Left Arrow	In a notebook, moves left one screen
Ctrl + Right Arrow	In a notebook, moves right one screen
Ctrl + Shift + F	Displays the SpeedFormat dialog box
Ctrl + W	Displays the Symbols dialog box
Ctrl + Shift + L	Displays a list of series names from which you can choose to fill cells. Equivalent to clicking the QuickFill button on the notebook bar.
Ctrl + Shift + S	Activates the Styles list box on the property bar
Ctrl + Shift + N	Equivalent to clicking File [image] New from template. Displays the PerfectExpert.
Alt + Down Arrow	In box, in a dialog box, with a Browse button, activates the Open File dialog box.
Ctrl + F	Opens the Find and replace dialog box
 Related topics


Edit mode keys

The following keys are available in Edit mode.

Key(s)	Function
Esc	Exits Edit mode. If you click Tools [image] Settings, and in the list of categories, double-click Workspace, Application and click General, and then enable the Compatible keys check box, pressing Esc erases the contents of the input line, and pressing Esc a second time exits Edit mode.
Enter	Enters the data and exits Edit mode
Ctrl + Enter	In Group mode, acts like Enter, but "drills" data through all grouped spreadsheets at once
Up Arrow	If data is wrapped on more than one line, moves the cursor up a line. If you click Tools [image] Settings, and in the list of categories, double-click Workspace, Application and click General, and then enable the Compatible keys check box, pressing Up Arrow enters the data, exits Edit mode, and moves up one cell. When the cursor follows an operator in a formula, enters Point mode.
Down Arrow	If data is wrapped on more than one line, moves the cursor down a line. If you click Tools [image] Settings, and in the list of categories, double-click Workspace, Application and click General, and then enable the Compatible keys check box, Down Arrow enters the data, exits Edit mode, and moves down one cell. When the cursor follows an operator in a formula, enters Point mode.
Page down	Enters the data, exits Edit mode, and moves down one screen. When the cursor follows an operator in a formula, enters Point mode.
Page up	Enters the data, exits Edit mode, and moves up one screen. When the cursor follows an operator in a formula, enters Point mode.
Ins	Toggles between Insert and Overwrite modes (Insert is the default)
Backspace	Deletes characters to the left of the cursor
Del	Deletes characters to the right of the cursor, selected cells, or a graphic
Ctrl + Backspace	Erases the contents of the input line
Ctrl + Right Arrow	Moves to the next page
Tab	Moves to the next cell. The cursor moves to the next page if you click Tools [image] Settings, and in the list of categories, double-click Workspace, Application and click General, and then enable the Compatibility keys check box.
Shift + Tab	Moves to the previous cell
Ctrl + Left Arrow	Moves to the next page
Ctrl + Shift + Right Arrow	Selects content from the cursor to the next page.
Ctrl + Shift + Left Arrow	Selects content from the cursor to the previous page.
F2	Toggles to display an indicator on the application bar that tells you what type of data you are editing [image] either value or label
Shift + F3	Displays a list of macro commands
Alt + F3	Displays a list of spreadsheet functions
F9	Calculates and then displays formula results on the input line
 Related topics


Object keys

The following list describes the shortcut keys available when working with objects, such as shapes, charts, and maps.

Key(s)	Description
Spacebar + Arrow keys	Controls horizontal and vertical pointer movement when you draw an object. If an object is selected, lets you control the object's movement.
Spacebar + Home	Moves the pointer up and left diagonally when you draw an object. If an object is selected, moves the object up and left diagonally.
Spacebar + Page up	Moves the pointer up and right diagonally when you draw an object. If an object is selected, moves the object up and right diagonally.
Spacebar + End	Moves the pointer down and left diagonally when you draw an object. If an object is selected, moves the object down and left diagonally.
Spacebar + Page down	Moves the pointer down and right diagonally when you draw an object. If an object is selected, moves the object down and right diagonally.
Ctrl + ]	Selects the object that was created first on the active spreadsheet, and selects the remaining objects in the order in which they were created
Ctrl + [	Selects the object that was created last on the active spreadsheet, and selects the remaining objects in the reverse order in which they were created
F12	Opens a dialog box specific to the object selected
Esc	Closes the current dialog box. Also cancels the selection of a selected object.
Delete	Deletes the selected object
 Related topics


Formula Composer keys

The following list describes the shortcut keys available when working in the formula outline pane of the Formula Composer.

Key(s)	Description
Ctrl + Plus sign	Expands the outline by one level
Ctrl + Shift + 8	Expands the whole outline for the formula
Ctrl + Minus sign	Collapses the current branch of the outline
Ctrl + F	Goes to a referenced cell in the formula
Ctrl + B	Returns to the previous cell containing a formula that references the current cell
Ctrl + E	Converts the current expression to a value
Ctrl + O	Replaces the current expression with an @function
Ctrl + P	Switches to Point mode to specify a cell reference by pointing to a cell (or cells) on a spreadsheet
Ctrl + N	Replaces the current expression with a cell name
 Related topics


Point mode keys

The following keys are available in Point mode.

Key(s)	Function
Arrow keys + Period key	Press the Arrow keys to select the first cell and press the period key. Press the Arrow keys to move to the last cell you want to select.
Enter	Enters the selected cells in the formula or dialog box and, exits Point mode
Esc	If pressed while pointing to cells, returns you to the anchor cell
Backspace	If pressed while pointing to cells, returns you to the cell that was active before you entered Point mode
F4	Makes the cell address to the left of the cursor absolute. Press repeatedly to cycle through the absolute combinations; for example, $A:$B$4, $A:B$4. (Does not disturb the selected cell.)
Alt + F5	Turns Group mode on or off
F6	If the window is split into two panes, jumps to the other pane
Ctrl + F6	If multiple windows are open, jumps to the next window
 Related topics


Print preview keys

The following table lists keys you can use while previewing.

Key	Effect
Esc	Exits the preview
F1	Displays online Help
Page up	Displays the previous spreadsheet
Page down	Displays the next spreadsheet
+ (plus key)	Zooms in a level, increasing detail
- (minus key)	Zooms out a level, decreasing detail
Up Arrow	Scrolls a zoomed display up
Down Arrow	Scrolls a zoomed display down
Right Arrow	Scrolls a zoomed display right
Left Arrow	Scrolls a zoomed display left
Home	Displays the top-left corner of a zoomed spreadsheet
End	Displays the bottom-right corner of a zoomed spreadsheet
 Related topics


Navigation keys

The following keys let you move more easily through notebooks.

Key(s)	Description
Left Arrow	Moves left one cell
Right Arrow	Moves right one cell
Up Arrow	Moves up one cell
Down Arrow	Moves down one cell
Ctrl + Page down	Moves forward one spreadsheet
Ctrl + Page up	Moves backward one spreadsheet
Page up	Moves up one screen
Page down	Moves down one screen
Home	Moves to the upper-left cell (A1) of the active spreadsheet
Ctrl + Home	Moves to the upper- left cell (A1) of the first spreadsheet
End + Home	Moves to the lower-right corner of the filled part of a notebook
End + Arrow key	If the cursor is in a filled cell, the selector moves in the direction of the arrow to the next filled cell before an empty one
Tab	In a notebook, moves right one cell. In a dialog box, moves between controls. In a graphics window, inserts a tab space in text boxes. Press Ctrl + Tab to select the next graphic in a chart.
Shift + Tab	In a notebook, moves left one cell. In a dialog box, moves to the previous control. In a graphics window, moves to the beginning of the current word in a text box. Press Ctrl + Shift + Tab to select the previous graphic in a chart.
Ctrl + Left Arrow	Moves left one screen
Ctrl + Right Arrow	Moves right one screen
Ctrl + G, or F5	Moves to the cell you specify
 Related topics


Function keys

The following list describes the use of each function key when pressed alone, and when pressed together with Ctrl, Shift, or Alt.

Key(s)	Description
F1	Opens Help
Shift + F1	Displays a question mark (?) and a pointer, so you can click a user interface element about which you want information. For example, if you click Shift + F1 and click a toolbar button, Help for that button displays.
Ctrl + F1	Opens the Writing tools dialog box and lets you check the spelling of a document.
F2	Activates Edit mode so you can change a cell entry
Shift + F2	Activates Debug mode so you can execute a macro step by step
Alt + F2	Displays the Play macro dialog box
Ctrl + F2	Opens the Formula composer dialog box
F3	When you are prompted for cells, or in Edit mode with the cursor positioned after an operator, displays a list of cell names. To expand the list to show cell coordinates, press + (plus sign). Press - (minus sign) to remove coordinates. Press F3 again to "zoom" the names list to the full screen.
Shift + F3	Displays a list of available macros, by category
Alt + F3	In Value or Edit mode, displays a list of spreadsheet functions, by category
Ctrl + F3	Lets you create a named cell or cell area
F4	In Edit, Value, or Point mode, makes the cell address to the left of the cursor absolute. Press repeatedly to cycle through the eight absolute combinations; for example, $A:$B$4, $A:B$4. You can use F4 when typing or editing a formula.
Alt + F4	Exits Quattro Pro
Ctrl + F4	Closes a window (notebook, dialog box, graphics window, light table window, or dialog window)
F5 or Ctrl + G	Opens the Go to dialog box
Shift + F5	Works like the Quick tab button next to the spreadsheet tabs ; displays the Objects spreadsheet, and then returns to a spreadsheet
Alt + F5	Switches Group mode on and off
F6	If the window is split into two panes, jumps to the other pane
Shift + F6	Displays the previous open window
Ctrl + F6	Displays the next open window
F7	Refreshes output of the previous Notebook query
Shift + F7	In Edit mode, lets you use the Arrow keys to select cells containing text
F8	Refreshes output of the previous What-If tables
Shift + F8	Combines selected cells into a group
Ctrl + F8	Separates a group into individual cells
F9	In Ready mode, recalculates the formulas in a notebook. In Edit mode, calculates and displays on the input line the results of formulas. For example, if you type 8*9 on the input line, and press F9, the formula is replaced with the result, 72. To recalculate the entire notebook afterwards, press F9 again in Ready mode.
Shift + F9	Expands the details of a currently collapsed outline group
Alt + F9	Opens the Data sort dialog box
Ctrl + F9	Collapses the details of a currently expanded outline group
F10	Works like / or Alt; moves the selector to the menu bar.
Shift + F10	Provides a shortcut to the right-click menu
F11	Displays the current chart
Alt + F11	Opens the Visual Basic Editor
F12	Displays the properties for the active cell or cells
Shift + F12	Displays the properties for the active window or notebook
Alt + F12	Displays the properties for the application
Ctrl + F12	Displays the properties of the active spreadsheet
 Related topics


CrossTab report keys

The following shortcut keys can be used in the CrossTab report dialog box when creating a CrossTab report.

Keys	Description
Tab	Lets you move between different areas of the CrossTab report dialog box
Arrow keys	Let you move between the different options in an area of the CrossTab report dialog box.
Ctrl+P	Places the selected field in the Pages section of the layout.
Ctrl+C	Places the selected field in the Columns section of the layout.
Ctrl+R	Places the selected field in the Rows section of the layout.
Ctrl+D	Places the selected field in the Data section of the layout.
Ctrl+F or Delete	Places the selected field from a section in the layout back in the Fields list.
Alt+F	Selects the Fields list.
 Related topics


Excel compatibility keys

The following keys are active only when the Microsoft Excel menu is displayed.

Key(s)	Description
F7	Opens the Writing tools dialog box and lets you check the spelling in a spreadsheet
Ctrl + K	Opens the Edit hyperlink dialog box
Ctrl + H	Opens the Find/replace dialog box
Ctrl + R, or Ctrl + D	Opens the QuickFill dialog box
Alt + F8	Opens the Play macro dialog box
Ctrl + 1	Opens the Format selection dialog box
 Related topics


Using OLE automation

Object Linking and Embedding (OLE) is the process of inserting an object (for example, a file or graphic) created in one application into a file in another application. OLE capabilities within Quattro Pro allow you to import and export projects, objects, and graphics. You have the ability to integrate data and objects from the source application, usually referred to as the object, within another application that acts as a container for the object.

In this section, you'll learn about

•	using Quattro Pro with Lotus Notes

For more information about using OLE automation, see "Reference: Using OLE automation."


Using Quattro Pro with Lotus Notes

Lotus Notes is a database application with messaging capabilities. Notes/FX (Notes Field Exchange) lets you embed a Quattro Pro notebook in a Lotus Notes field, using it to exchange data between the applications. Either application can use the data.

The first step in linking a notebook with a Lotus Notes database is to create a field block in Quattro Pro. This helps set the fields you want the Lotus Notes database to recognize as common to both applications. For additional information, see the reference topic "Example: Setting up Notes/FX field blocks."

Next, you must create a new database in Lotus Notes. Then, you can embed a Quattro Pro notebook in Lotus Notes. Once you set up a form in Lotus Notes with fields configured to match those in the Notes/FX field block file, you can create a Lotus Notes view. In Lotus Notes, a view displays data from the database in a specified order. The columns you create display the data entered into a single field on a database form.

Activating the Notes database form allows you to enter data in Quattro Pro Notes/FX that displays in the Lotus Notes database view.

 How to


To create a field block in Quattro Pro

1	Organize data into two columns in a new notebook.

2	Select the field block.

3	Click Insert [image] Name [image] Name cells.

4	In the Name box, type Notes Fields.

5	Click Add.

6	Click Close.

7	Click File [image] Properties.

8	Type information in the following boxes:

•	Title [image] lets you type a title; for example, Current Value

•	Subject [image] lets you type a subject; for example, Present Value Calculation

•	Keywords [image] lets you add keywords. Keywords should be separated with a comma if they are used as field names in the field block; for example, payment, rate, period, result, author, date, datablock, and the name given to the field block.

•	Comments [image] lets you add comments

 Notes

•	The Statistics tab in the Properties dialog box shows you the name, location, title, creation date, date last saved, and revision number of a file.

•	For additional information on field blocks, see the reference topic "Example: Setting up Notes/FX field blocks."

 Related topics


To create a Lotus Notes database

1	Start Lotus Notes.

2	Click File [image] Database [image] New.

3	Choose Local from the Server list box.

4	Type a name for the database in the Title box.

5	Type a filename in the Filename box.

6	Choose Blank from the Template list.

 Related topics


To embed a Quattro Pro notebook in Lotus Notes

1	Double-click the Database icon on the Lotus Notes workspace.

2	Click Create [image] Design [image] Form.

3	Create edit fields with descriptors and properties that correspond to fields in the Notes/FX field block.

For example: Payment (number, editable)

4	Place the pointer in the Rich text box, and click Create [image] Object.

5	Enable the Create an object from file option, and select the Quattro Pro file.

6	Click Design [image] Form properties.

7	On the Launch tab, choose Quattro Pro from the AutoLaunch list.

8	Select the Creating, Editing, and Reading options from the Launch when list.

If you want the form to launch only when the Launch button on the activated form window is clicked, disable these three items.

9	On the Basics tab, and type a name for the form in the Form name box.

 Note

•	You can customize the appearance of the form (for example, changing the background color or font colors of labels). For information about making changes to the form, see the Lotus Notes online Help.

 Tips

•	You can label an edit field with a descriptor by typing directly on the form next to where you want the edit field to display.

•	You can also create an edit field on a Lotus Notes form by clicking Create [image] Field, or by clicking the Create field SmartIcon on the SmartIcon toolbar.

 Related topics


To create a Lotus Notes view for embedded Quattro Pro fields

1	Open a Lotus Notes database.

2	Click Create [image] Design [image] View.

3	Type a name for the view.

4	Click View, and double-click the view.

5	Click Create [image] Insert new column.

6	Label the column with the name of the first field on the form.

7	In the design pane, enable the Field option.

8	Select the field name from the list.

9	Repeat steps 4 to 6 for the remaining form fields.

 Note

•	You can customize the view to display alternating colors for the database entries or display special fonts in column headings. For information about ways to customize a view, see the Lotus Notes online Help.

 Tips

•	If a database has only one view, that view displays by default when you open the Lotus Notes database. To display a specific view when there are multiple views, select the view name in the Folders and view section of the navigation tree.

•	If you want to add a column to the right of the default column, double-click on the column bar.

 Related topics


To enter data in Quattro Pro Notes/FX

1	Open a previously-created database.

2	Click Create, and select a form.

3	Click File [image] Open.

4	In Quattro Pro, type new data.

5	Click File [image] Properties and type information in the following boxes:

•	Title [image] lets you type a title; for example, Current Value

•	Subject [image] lets you type a subject; for example, Present Value Calculation

•	Keywords [image] lets you add keywords. Keywords should be separated with a comma if they are used as field names in the field block; for example, payment, rate, period, result, author, date, datablock, and the name given to the field block.

•	Comments [image] lets you add comments

 Note

•	To close the Lotus Notes form after entering data in the Quattro Pro embedded field, click Close in the upper-right corner of the Lotus Notes dialog box.

 Tips

•	If Quattro Pro doesn't automatically start when you click File [image] Open, click the Launch button to start Quattro Pro, and open the file containing the Notes/FX field block.

•	If a database has only one view, that view displays by default when you open the Lotus Notes database. To display a specific view when there are multiple views, select the view name in the Folders and view section of the navigation tree.

 Related topics


Reference: Using OLE automation

OLE automation is an object-based standard that gives one application (an OLE automation server) the ability to provide objects to other applications or development tools (OLE automation controllers). Quattro Pro can function as either an automation controller or an automation server.

When using Quattro Pro as an automation controller, the OLE automation feature lets you create and manipulate objects in other applications that support OLE 2.0 automation as a container. Several Quattro Pro macros can help application developers initiate and conduct DDE exchanges, called conversations.

OLE automation lets you operate another application from within Quattro Pro. For this to happen, an object model must be created for the automated application. In the case of a television, objects might represent the volume control, the power control, the channel selector, and various tuning controls for color quality and image centering. Properties are the settings used to control object appearance and other attributes, while methods are the actions you can perform with or on each object.

When using Quattro Pro as an automation server, the OLE automation feature lets you expose Quattro Pro's programmable objects to an OLE automation controller. For example, other applications, such as WordPerfect, and development tools, such as Microsoft Visual Basic, can utilize the functionality of Quattro Pro to create items such as charts and reports.

OLE automation works through automation expressions created with macro statements. The process to follow for working with OLE automation and macros involves opening an application and creating a new object or getting an existing object, using macro commands and an application's automation methods to set properties and perform other actions, and closing the object and exiting the application.

 How to


Example: Setting up Notes/FX field blocks

The Notes/FX feature uses a field block to determine how Lotus Notes exchanges data. The field block is defined in two columns of information or database cells. The first column lists the field names, which exchanges data with similarly named fields in Lotus Notes. The second column contains a field value or block reference.

Here is an example of a field block:

The labels in A6..A9 are field names; B6..B9 contains field values.

There are three types of fields: data fields, predefined fields, and reference fields.

Data fields

Data fields contain data from a Lotus Notes database. You can edit data fields in Lotus Notes. The data is always stored in Lotus Notes. In the example above, Author and Date are data fields. The following table illustrates the bidirectional fields used to share data between Quattro Pro and Lotus Notes:

QP property	Lotus Notes field & data type
Title	Title (text)
Subject	Subject (text)
Author	Author (text)
Keywords	Keywords help Notes categorize notebooks using keywords input in the Quattro Pro file properties (text)
Comments	Comments (text)
Predefined fields

Predefined fields contain a calculated value, such as the size of a notebook or its creation date. In the example shown above, SizeInK is a predefined field. Here are the predefined fields supported by Quattro Pro with the related Notes fields and data types:

QP property	Lotus Notes field & data type
SizeInK	SizeInK for size of the notebook embedded in Notes (number)
LastRevisionDate (Last Saved)	LastRevisionDate (LastSavedDate) (time)
Last Saved By	LastSavedBy (text)
Revision Number	NumberOfRevision (number)
Sheet Titles	SheetTitles are the custom names used in the notebook (text)
SizeInSheets	SizeInSheets are the number of sheets used in the notebook (number)
DocumentClass	DocumentClass is always set to "Notebook" and refers to the OLE class name of the embedded notebook (text)
Reference fields

Reference fields are block coordinates that reference a block of data. In the above example, DataBlock is a reference field. You also reference this block of cells when naming the field block.

 Related topics


Automation terms

These terms are important for understanding OLE automation features. The terms are listed from the most basic to the most complex. For the best understanding, read their definitions in order.

Automation objects

An automation object represents all or part of an application that has been exposed for OLE automation. Most applications that support OLE automation as clients expose the main application object.

Automation objects have properties and methods that can be used to change the attributes of objects and act on them. To learn which objects are exposed for OLE automation, check the documentation accompanying the application.

Methods and collections

Methods are associated with automation objects. Methods act on objects and usually return the result of the action. To learn which methods are available for each object, check the documentation for the application.

A collection is a group of related automation objects, usually listed as a plural. For example, if MenuItem is an object, MenuItems could be a collection of all menu items. Like objects, collections can have their own sets of properties and methods.

Properties

Properties are characteristics of an automation object that describe its current state, usually appearance or behavior. You can use methods to change some property settings. Other properties can be changed directly by specifying a different argument.

Values

In OLE automation, a value can be a number, a double-quoted string, an automation object, or empty. Values can be stored as variables and included in expressions.

Variables

In OLE automation, a variable is a place to store a value. A variable can be a cell (used to store a string, a number, or nothing), a member of an automation object, or a named variable (used to store values of any type, often automation objects, in contrast with cells, which can hold only strings and numbers).

Named variables

Named variables are automation expressions created with the {ASSIGN} macro. They cannot be used in formulas directly, but they can be used indirectly if you first assign them to a cell name or reference. Named variables last as long as Quattro Pro is running. To delete one before closing Quattro Pro, use the {DELVAR} macro.

When an expression is parsed, names are first assumed to identify a cell, cells, and then named variables. This means that a named variable cannot have the same name as a cell reference, a group of cells, or a cell name in the notebook that contains the currently executed macro. Otherwise, it is not accessible.

The name of a named variable cannot contain any formula operators or leading or trailing spaces, although spaces within the name are acceptable.

Expressions

An expression symbolizes a value or variable, depending on its use. An expression can be a string, a number, a cell (cell reference, cell coordinates, or cell name), the name of a named variable, a formula expression, or an automation expression.

If an expression is used to express a value and it represents a variable, the value of the variable is returned. For example, if a value is expected from expression A1, the value stored in A1 is used.

If an expression is used to express a variable and it represents a value, the value is converted to a cell or named variable if the value is a string. For example, +"A"&"1" results in a cell variable representing the cell reference A1.

Arguments

An argument is information supplied to part of an automation expression, or to a property, method, or formula.

Automation expressions

An automation expression is an automation object (or object hierarchy) plus any associated property or method and arguments, if any.

In its simplest form, the syntax is object.property or object.method. Because automation objects are usually found in hierarchies, members of successive hierarchical levels can be used to specify the exact target object. Elements of automation expressions are separated by periods.

 Related topics


OLE automation syntax

Automation expressions introduce OLE automation expressions and their basic syntax. The full syntax is one of the following:

starting_object

starting_object.member_cascade

where:

•	starting_object is an object function or named variable that represents an object

•	object function is CreateObject(args) or GetObject(args)

•	member_cascade is member or object_member.member_cascade

•	member is name or name(args) or [unquoted string]

•	object_member is member representing an object

•	args is empty or arg or arg, arg

•	arg is a value expression

All OLE automation methods and properties can be included as a member, usually at the end of an expression. A property or method without arguments can be used without parentheses.

The object connector, shown above as a period (.), is determined by the international setting for a decimal point. The list separator, shown above as a comma (, ) is determined by the international separator character setting.

 Related topics


OLE automation object functions

Quattro Pro uses two OLE automation object functions, GetObject and CreateObject, to create and retrieve objects from other applications and insert them in notebooks. These functions perform different tasks depending on the arguments used with them and the application that provides the objects. Both functions accept the progID argument, which is a programmatic identifier registered by an application during its installation (for example, Excel.Application or Visio.Application). These object functions can be used in OLE automation expressions within Quattro Pro macros.

CreateObject

CreateObject(progID) locates the target application, loads it, creates an object, and returns the object. The application can be loaded only if its path is registered or specified in PATH. For example, CreateObject("Visio.Application") returns a Visio graphics object.

Each OLE application is registered with a unique name (CLSID) in the registry when it is installed. The registry location is HKEY_Classes_Root/application name/CLSID/curver. This name is used within CreateObject.

This object function is not the same as the macro {CREATEOBJECT}.

GetObject

This object function retrieves an existing object from somewhere, depending on the given arguments:

•	GetObject(filename) [image] returns an object from the specified file. The filename should be fully qualified with the path and filename extension. GetObject loads the application that can open the file and returns an object from the file to the active notebook. If the filename identifies a specific object, such as "c:\excel\a.xls!a1:b10", GetObject returns an object represented by A1:B10 in that file.

•	GetObject(filename, progID) [image] loads the specified application and returns the specified file. Although this expression seems to work like GetObject(filename), it can return objects, such as charts, that the other expression cannot access. For example, GetObject("c:\excel\test.xls!chart 1", "Excel.Application") returns a Microsoft Excel chart automation object, but GetObject("c:\excel\test.xls!chart 1") fails.

•	GetObject(, progID) or GetObject("", progID) [image] GetObject("chart 1", "Excel.Application") returns the active object of the specified application. For example, the expression returns chart 1 from the active Microsoft Excel notebook.

•	GetObject(object_name) [image] locates an embedded automation object inside Quattro Pro. All of the following syntax expressions are acceptable:

GetObject("object")

GetObject("page:object")

GetObject("[notebook]page:object")

GetObject("[]page:object")

 Notes

•	If GetObject(object_name) fails, try GetObject(filename).

•	CreateObject and GetObject expressions work with the {ASSIGN} macro to create a named variable that refers to the returned object. For example, the following macro expression creates the variable Chart1 that represents the returned object: {ASSIGN Chart1, GetObject("chart 1", "Excel.Application")}.

 Related topics


OLE automation and macros

These macro commands directly support OLE automation in Quattro Pro:

Command	Definition
{ASSIGN}	Assigns a value to a variable. If you use {ASSIGN} to create a named variable, the variable exists until you exit Quattro Pro. To delete a variable before exiting, use {DELVAR VarName}.
{DELVAR}	Deletes the named variable VarName and frees any object assigned to that variable
{EXECAUTO}	Evaluates one or more automation expressions, but drops any returned values from expressions
{GETLABEL}	Pauses the macro, displays Prompt, and stores subsequent keystrokes as a label in VariableExpression
{GETNUMBER}	Pauses the macro, displays Prompt, and stores subsequent keystrokes as a numeric value in VariableExpression
{IFAUTOOBJ}	Checks to see whether the ObjectExpression is an OLE automation object before continuing with the macro
{SETLCID}	Sets the locale ID (local ID in PerfectScript) as the default locale ID or to one specified by LocaleID. The locale ID is a fixed number that specifies language, the separator character, and a variety of other international settings; use {SETLCID} to ensure that the automation controller is using the default ID or the ID of a specific target object.
Because macro command arguments are value expressions, you can pass an automation expression as an argument to any macro command. For example, if calc.accum represents the accum value of the calc named variable, and excel.ActiveCell.Value represents the current value of the Microsoft Excel ActiveCell object, then both these macros are valid:

{DOWN calc.accum}

{DOWN excel.ActiveCell.Value}

Quattro Pro does not support the use of automation expressions in formula expressions. So the following macros are invalid:

{IF named_variable>0} {do something}

{LET A2, named_variable+A1}

{IF named_variable.member>0}

To solve this problem, first assign the value of an automation expression to a cell, and then use that cell in a formula expression:

{ASSIGN A1, named_variable}

{IF A1>0}{do something}

 Related topics


OLE automation expression examples

OLE automation expressions are used within Quattro Pro macros to perform OLE automation tasks. Automation expression syntax defines acceptable syntax for OLE automation expressions. The following are acceptable expression forms. Note that progID is the program identifier registered for an application during its installation.

named_variable

CreateObject(progID)

GetObject(filename and/or progID)

named_variable.member

named_variable.member1.member2(arg1, arg2)

named_variable.member1(arg1, arg2).member2

 Related topics


OLE automation macro examples

The automation expressions execute in the background of the application. For example, the following macro opens the Microsoft Excel file, test.xls, and saves it as test2.xls:

{ASSIGN Test, GetObject("c:\excel\test.xls!C2:C6")}

{EXECAUTO Test.SaveAs("c:\excel\test2.xls")}

{ASSIGN File, GetObject("c:\excel\test2.xls")}

{ASSIGN Myrange, File.Range("Myrange")}

{IFAUTOOBJ Myrange}{LET G39, "New"}{RETURN}

{LET G39, "Empty"}

If you try to assign another variable to test2.xls without using {DELVAR} to delete the variable File, which represents test2.xls, you are prompted that test2.xls already exists and is open. The following macro opens the graphics application Visio, creates a new file, draws a rectangle in the workspace, saves the file, and then exits Visio:

{ASSIGN VisioApp, CreateObject("Visio.Application")}

{IFAUTOOBJ VisioApp}{EXECAUTO VisioApp.Documents.Add("")}

{EXECAUTO VisioApp.ActivePage.DrawRectangle(1, 7, 5, 10)}

{EXECAUTO VisioApp.ActiveDocument.SaveAs(TestFile)}

{EXECAUTO VisioApp.Quit()}

TestFile is the cell name of a cell containing this string: C:\DATA\OLE2\VISIAUTO.VSD. The macro statement that saves the active document as TestFile actually creates visiauto.vsd in the specified directory. The next macro names a variable Test, assigns zero to it, prompts for an entry other than zero, and then stores it in Test:

{ASSIGN Test, 0}

{GETNUMBER "Enter a number other than 0:", Test}

{ASSIGN VariableValue, Test}

{DELVAR Test}

{IF VariableValue<>0}{LET A1, "PASS"}{RETURN}

{LET A1, "FAIL"}

After assigning the value in Test to VariableValue (the name of a cell), and deleting Test, it evaluates VariableValue and determines whether Test received a new value that was assigned to VariableValue.

 Related topics


Macro syntax and arguments

Macro commands, like functions, have specific grammatical rules, or syntax. The syntax for macros is:

{COMMANDNAME Argument1, Argument2, Argument3...}

COMMANDNAME is the exact name of the command. Arguments are values providing instructions to the command. Not all macro commands require arguments, but when they do, they require a specific type of information. The following examples are in Quattro Pro script form. To use them in PerfectScript, modify these in the PerfectScript code accordingly. For information about converting Quattro Pro script to PerfectScript, see "Choosing a macro creation tool." Some examples of macro commands are:

{Query.Criteria_Table B27..B29}

{BlockCopy A1, A2..A37}

{Search.Find "3rd Quarter Profits"}

{BEEP 3}

{GETNUMBER "How old are you?", AGE}

{CONTENTS E15, F15, 15}

Many command equivalents contain a period (.) in their command name. The syntax rules for Quattro Pro macro commands are as follows:

•	You must type the entire macro command in a single cell.

•	You can type the command in uppercase or lowercase.

•	The command must begin and end with braces { }.

•	There must be a space between the command name and the first argument. For example, {GETNUMBER"Number?", A1} results in a syntax error; {GETNUMBER "Number?", A1} works correctly.

•	Separate multiple arguments with commas. To use semicolons or periods as separators instead, change the setting in Tools [image] Settings [image] International [image] Punctuation.

•	Arguments must be the correct type (for example, number, string, location, or condition). If a string is required, the argument must be a valid character string; otherwise, a syntax error occurs.

•	If an argument contains spaces or punctuation, enclose it in quotation marks; for example, {GETLABEL "Hello, world", A4} is allowed, but {GETLABEL Hello, world, A4} is not.

•	You can include more than one macro command in a cell; for example, {BEEP}{GETLABEL "Hello, world", A4}{QUIT}.

Because macro commands are labels, a syntax error is not recognized when you mistype a macro command; an error occurs instead when you try to play (or run) the macro. To save debugging time, pay careful attention to the format of macro commands as you enter them, and record macros whenever possible.

 Related topics


Macro command arguments

Arguments in macro commands require specific information to be supplied with the command. There are four types of arguments: numbers, strings, locations, and conditions.

Number arguments

Number arguments require any numeric value, entered as

•	an actual number (such as 2 or 0.45)

•	a formula resulting in a number (such as A3*15)

•	a cell address or named cell containing a numeric value or formula (such as C10, where C10 contains a valid number or formula)

String arguments

String arguments require a text string, entered as:

•	an actual string in quotation marks ("Quattro Pro")

•	a reference to a cell or named cell containing a label

•	a comma-separated list of property or command-equivalent settings, enclosed in quotation marks (for example, "Currency, 2"). If a setting in the list usually requires a single quotation mark, enter two quotation marks (for example, "Prefix, ""Windows Default"", No"). If a setting contains spaces or punctuation, enclose it in two sets of quotation marks

•	a formula resulting in a label, such as UPPER("hello")

Location arguments

Location arguments require a reference to a cell or cells. The reference can be

•	a cell name

•	selections referencing one or more cells; for example, A1, A1..A4 or A..B:C4..D22

•	the relative reference of cells; for example, []C(0)R(0), []P(-2):C(0)R(22), or []C(0)R(0)..C(3)R(10)

•	coordinates for noncontiguous selections, enclosed in parentheses; for example, (A1, B1..B7, C1..C7) or (A1, B:C27..C52)

•	a label or text formula resulting in any of the above options; for example, +"A"&"2" which results in A2

Condition arguments

Condition arguments require a logical expression. A logical expression is a formula that can be evaluated as either true or false; for example, +C4 > 500.

Some commands accept a combination or choice of argument types; for example, {LET} stores either a label or a number in a cell, depending on the argument type.

 Note

•	Unlike functions, cell references in macros are not updated when the macro is copied. So, if you move the contents of a cell or insert or delete a row or column, the macro reference might be wrong. For this reason, use cell names whenever possible. Quattro Pro updates cell names to reference the correct location.

 Related topics


Macro subroutines

A subroutine is a macro stored separately from macros that use it. You name the subroutine the same way macros are named. You can call the subroutine from another macro, and Quattro Pro plays the subroutine's macro commands. After playing the subroutine, the command immediately following the call (in the main macro) plays. Using subroutines makes the macro more readable and easier to debug.

To call a subroutine from within a macro, type its name inside braces. For example, {go_right} calls the subroutine named go_right.

You can pass arguments to a subroutine for use by its commands. These arguments are stored in cells referenced by the subroutine. For example, {set_cost C10, 36} calls the subroutine set_cost and passes two arguments (C10 and 36) to it.

For a subroutine to know what to do with the arguments, you must define them within the subroutine by using {DEFINE}. This macro command tells Quattro Pro where to store the arguments and whether they should be interpreted as values or labels.

Whenever you call a subroutine, Quattro Pro stores the return point in an internal list called a stack. One return point in this stack clears when the subroutine encounters a {RETURN} command or empty cell. If you do not clear all of these locations, the stack fills up, causing the error "Too Many Nesting Calls".

The {BRANCH} command can move to or return from any cell in a macro. Use {BRANCH} instead of a subroutine when a macro

•	does not need to pick up where it left off after calling the subroutine

•	needs to return to a different point in the macro than the point directly following the subroutine call

•	calls the main macro as a subroutine

 Related topics


Command equivalents

Command equivalents perform operations usually done with menus or dialog boxes. Options usually set in a dialog box are passed as arguments to a command equivalent, in the same manner as passing them to a subroutine. Command equivalents make macros easier to read and understand and let the macro play in any Quattro Pro menu system.

Menu choices with many settings (such as File [image] Print) have a set of command equivalents that emulate their operation. The following example shows a macro that emulates Edit [image] Find and replace:

search_string March

\a	{GETLABEL "Search For? ", search_string}

{Search.Block A:A16..D26}

{Search.Find +search_string}

{Search.ReplaceBy April}

{Search.Direction Row}

{Search.Match Part}

{Search.Case Any}

{Search.Replace}

\y	{Search.Next}

Notice that each command equivalent sets one option in the Find and replace dialog box. You do not have to set each option every time. If one of the command-equivalents is omitted, the default setting is used. The final command ({Search.Next}) performs the Find operation. You can use command equivalent names with COMMAND to find current settings. For example, @COMMAND("BlockFill.Series") returns the current setting of Series in Edit [image] Fill [image] Fill series.

Menu choices with a few settings have one command equivalent that emulates their operation. Command equivalents without a period are typically of this type.

When you specify a command equivalent with a question mark (?) after the command name, the macro command displays a dialog box that the user can manipulate. If the name of the command equivalent contains a period, use only the part of the command name that precedes the period. For example, {BlockFill?} displays the Edit [image] Fill [image] Fill series dialog box for the user to manipulate. When the user clicks OK, the fill occurs and the macro resumes.

When you specify a command equivalent with an exclamation mark (!) after the command name, the macro command displays a dialog box that the macro can manipulate. You can make the dialog box revert to user control at any point in the macro using the command {PAUSEMACRO}.

 Related topics


DDE macro commands

Dynamic Data Exchange (DDE) lets Windows-based applications communicate with one another. Use {INITIATE} to open a channel of communication with another application. This is called initiating a conversation. Every DDE conversation consists of a client and a server. The application initiating the conversation is the client; the other application is the server. When you initiate a conversation, you can use {POKE} to send data, {REQUEST} to receive data, or {EXECUTE} to play macros in the server, {TERMINATE} ends the conversation.

The data source that a DDE conversation connects with in the server application is called a topic. Many DDE applications support the topic system and items available from it.

Other DDE applications can call Quattro Pro as their server. To do so, use the server name "QPW" and specify "System" or the filename of an open notebook as the topic. When a notebook is the topic, you can enter cell addresses or coordinates as the item to request, or you can play macro commands. When System is the topic, you can play Quattro Pro macros or request the items listed in the following table:

Item	Returns
SysItems	A list of the items you can request from the system
Topics	A list of topics currently available from the server application
Status	The current status of the application. In Quattro Pro, this is the text of the application bar indicator (READY, WAIT, LABEL, etc.).
Formats	A list of Clipboard formats supported by the application
Selection	The coordinates of the active cells
To play macro commands in Quattro Pro using DDE, establish a link to Quattro Pro using "QPW" as the DDE topic. To play PerfectScript macro commands in Quattro Pro using DDE, establish a link using "QPMacros" as the DDE topic. Then use the {EXECUTE} command provided by the DDE client application to play the command.

 Note

•	You can also request any property from Quattro Pro. The property must be enclosed in parentheses and quotation marks, for example, "(Application.Display)".

 Related topics


Object macro commands

Object macro commands can create Quattro Pro objects, change their property settings, or move them to new positions. Object commands can create drawn objects, dialog controls, and floating objects.

Drawn objects

Drawn objects are objects in a graphics window that you usually create using the toolbar. When creating a drawn object with a macro command, specify the position for the object by stating how far (how many pixels) it should appear from the upper-left corner of the chart background. (A pixel is the smallest dot that Windows can display on your screen.)

You can create drawn objects with {CREATEOBJECT}. The following command activates a graphics window and creates a line near the upper-left corner of the chart:

{GraphEdit "PROFITS"}

{CREATEOBJECT "Line", 0, 0, 25, 25}

Dialog controls

Dialog controls are objects in a dialog window. When creating a dialog control using a macro command, specify the position by stating how far (how many pixels) it should appear from the upper-left corner of the dialog window.

You can create dialog controls with {CREATEOBJECT}. For example, the following command creates a push button in the active dialog window:

{CREATEOBJECT "Button", 43, 41, 58, 77}

Floating objects

Floating objects are form control buttons and charts that display on the spreadsheet. Unlike chart objects and dialog controls, the position of a floating object is specified as an offset from a cell in the notebook. The offset is specified in twips; each twip is 1/1440th of an inch.

You can create floating objects with {FLOATCREATE}. For example, the following macro command creates a button that is half an inch from the left edge of A:A1:

{FLOATCREATE "Button", A:A1, 720, 0, A:B2, 720, 360, "Bt1"}

In this example, A:A1, 720, 0 specifies that the upper-left corner of the button is in A:A1, is 720 twips (half an inch) from the left side of the cell, and is zero twips from the top of the cell. A:B2, 720, 360 specifies that the lower-left corner of the button is in A:B2, 720 twips from the left side of A:B2, and a quarter inch (360 twips) from the top of A:B2.

After you create an object with a macro command, use {SETPROPERTY} to set its name or {GETPROPERTY} to store its name in a cell. Then you can change its properties with macro commands at any time.

Selecting, positioning, and sizing objects

Dialog controls and floating objects are selected after you create them, so you can reposition them or change their property settings. There are three commands that select Quattro Pro objects:

•	{SELECTBLOCK} [image] selects cells

•	{SELECTOBJECT} [image] selects chart objects or dialog controls. When a chart object or dialog control is selected, you can use {MOVETO} and {RESIZE} to move and resize it.

•	{SELECTFLOAT} [image] selects a floating object. When a floating object is selected, you can use {FLOATMOVE} and {FLOATSIZE} to move and resize it.

Changing or reading property settings

You can use {SETPROPERTY} and {SETOBJECTPROPERTY} to change the property settings of Quattro Pro objects. For example, the following macro selects cells and changes their text color:

{SELECTBLOCK A:A1..C22}

{SETPROPERTY "Text_Color", 5}

{SETPROPERTY Text_Color, "6"}

You can also change a property setting without selecting the cells using the following command:

{SETOBJECTPROPERTY "A:A1..C22.Text_Color", 5}

You can use {GETPROPERTY} and {GETOBJECTPROPERTY} to read property settings. {GETPROPERTY} reads settings of the selected object; {GETOBJECTPROPERTY} lets you read property settings without selecting an object.

 Related topics


Organizing and manipulating data

Quattro Pro lets you organize and manipulate data in different ways, giving you many options for displaying data.

In this section, you'll learn about

•	sorting data

•	filtering data

•	consolidating data

•	working with outlines


Sorting data

Sorting data lets you order multiple criteria based on sort keys within a sort selection. For example, you can sort data in ascending order.

Sorting data in ascending order organizes a selection in the following sequence:

•	values in numeric order

•	labels beginning with special characters in ASCII order

•	labels beginning with numbers in numeric order

•	labels beginning with letters in alphabetic order

•	blank cells

For example, if you sort data in an address book in ascending order using the sort key "LAST_NAME," all last names display in alphabetic order, starting with "A."

Up to five sort keys can be specified. Sorting begins with the first key; however, if there are two identical entries, Quattro Pro looks at the second key for those particular entries. If the first two fields are identical, the third key determines sort order, and so on.

For example, if you select LAST_NAME as the first and only sort key, and sort in ascending order, the following list would be sorted as follows:

If you add the FIRST_NAME field as the second sort key, the Fernandez records would sort in this order:

You can also sort data automatically, reverse previous sort settings, and preserve the original sort order so you don't lose a particular organization of data.

Data added to a spreadsheet after sorting data is not displayed in the sorted order. To include the new data in the correct sort order, you must re-sort the data . Likewise, formulas that refer to cells outside of their row do not update when you re-sort data. If your sort selection contains formulas that reference cells outside the sort selection (for example, +A2), make them absolute (+$A$2) or convert them to their end values before sorting. For more information about making cell addresses absolute, see "Setting cell addresses." For more information about converting formulas to values, see "To convert a formula to a value."

 How to


To sort data

1	Click Tools [image] Sort.

2	Click the Range picker in the Cell box, and select the cells containing the data to sort.

If the data contains a heading row, enable the Selection contains a heading check box.

3	In the Top to bottom area, choose a sort key from the 1st list box.

If you want to change the sort options, click Options, and change the settings you want.

4	If you want to sort in ascending order, enable the Ascending check box.

 Note

•	By default, the data sorts by columns (top to bottom).

 Tip

•	You can also select a sort key option by double-clicking in the 1st list box in the Top to bottom area, and selecting cells with the Range picker.

 Related topics


To sort data automatically

1	Select the cells to sort.

2	Hold down Shift + Ctrl, and click the column to use as the first sort key.

If you want to use a second sort key, click that column next, and so on. You can specify up to five sort keys.

3	Click one of the Sort buttons on the toolbar.

 Note

•	The sort settings are saved until you select different ones.

 Related topics


To reuse previous sort settings

1	Click Tools [image] Sort.

2	Choose a sort setting from the Previous sorts list box.

 Note

•	The Data sort dialog box retains up to five previous sort settings at a time. Previous sort settings are saved with the notebook.

 Related topics


To preserve the original sort order

1	Insert an extra column in the sort area before sorting data.

2	Click Edit [image] Fill [image] Fill series.

3	Click the Range picker in the Cells box, and select the cells in the new column to the end of the data set.

 Tip

•	You can restore the original sort order by clicking a cell in the new column and clicking the top (ascending) Sort button.

 Related topics


Filtering data

Filters provide a quick way to work with a subset of column data. When you filter data, Quattro Pro displays only the rows containing the values you specify, temporarily hiding other rows in the list until you undo the filter. For example, you can filter a birthday list with columns for first name, last name, year, month, and day, to display only the names of people who were born in January. You can perform a data filter or customize your filter.

When you apply a filter to a column, the triangle on the filter button above that column turns blue. You can remove the filter button when you no longer need it.

You can specify different types of filters within one notebook. For example, in a column of income data, you can apply a Top 10 filter to display the top 10% of incomes. In a name column, you can apply a custom filter and specify names that begin with S. The filter results display only people in the top 10% income bracket whose names begin with S.

 How to


To filter data

1	Click a cell in the data to filter.

If you want to display only blanks or non blanks in a range of data, select all of the cells you want to filter.

2	Click Tools [image] QuickFilter.

3	Click the filter button on the column to filter, and click one of the following options:

•	Blanks [image] displays only rows that do not contain data in the sort or filter columns

•	Non blanks [image] displays only rows that contain data in the sort or filter columns

 Tips

•	You can filter by a single value by choosing a specific value from the QuickFilter list box.

 Related topics


To apply the Custom filter

1	Click a cell in the data to filter.

2	Click Tools [image] QuickFilter.

3	Click the filter button on the column to filter, and click Custom.

4	Choose a phrase from the list box on the left.

5	Choose an item or type a value (letter or number) from the center list box.

If you want to specify more than one condition, choose either And or Or from the list box on the right, and specify another row of options.

 Note

•	You can specify up to three filter conditions.

 Related topics


To undo a filter

•	Click the filter button in a column, and click Show all.

 Related topics


To remove the QuickFilter button

•	Click Tools [image] QuickFilter.

 Related topics


To apply the Top 10 filter

1	Click a cell in the data to filter.

2	Click Tools [image] QuickFilter.

3	Click the filter button on the column to filter, and click Top 10.

4	To specify either the top or bottom values or percentages, choose Top or Bottom from the list box on the left, and type a number in the center box.

5	Click one of the following from the list box on the right:

•	Value [image] displays a specific number of values

•	Percent [image] displays a percentage of the values

 Related topics


Consolidating data

Consolidating data combines data cells from different source areas into one location by using @function operators. For example, you can add each item in a row of figures to the corresponding items in another row of figures. You can also use row or column labels to consolidate areas of equivalent data entered in different row and column orders. As long as the data has identical row or column labels or both, you can combine it and sort the results in any order you specify.

The following example combines source A with source B to create source C. The identical row labels in source A and B are matched even though the order of the row labels is different in each source.

You can create and edit consolidation settings, and you can add or remove source cells. You can also reuse previous settings as required. If you no longer need a consolidation setting, you can delete it.

 How to


To perform consolidations

1	Click Tools [image] Consolidate [image] New.

2	Click the Range picker in the Source cells box, select the source cells (rows with rows, columns with columns), and click Add.

If you want to specify source cells in a different notebook, click Browse.

3	Click Next, and specify an operator.

4	Click Next.

5	Click the Range picker in the Destination cells box, and select the destination cells.

If you want to match cells by label rather than position, click one or more label options in the Use label from area, and click Next.

6	Enter a consolidation name in the Consolidation name box.

 Notes

•	If the destination area is smaller than the source areas, results are limited to the size of the destination area.

•	When the source and destination areas have different dimensions, the Consolidator tool combines equivalent cells when possible. Cells without equivalent dimensions are handled differently depending on the operator.

•	You can type labels in the destination cells or leave them blank and follow the label order of the first source. If you click both column and row labels, the Consolidator tool matches column labels first, then matches row labels within columns.

 Related topics


To edit a consolidation setting

1	Click Tools [image] Consolidate [image] Edit.

2	Choose a consolidation setting from the Consolidations list.

3	Edit the consolidation setting.

4	Click Consolidate.

 Related topics


To add source cells

1	Click Tools [image] Consolidate [image] Edit.

2	Choose a consolidation setting from the Consolidations list.

3	Click Add.

4	In the Add source cells dialog box, click the Range picker in the Source cells box, and select the source cells.

 Note

•	Quattro Pro treats each noncontiguous source cell selection as a separate entry. If you select 3-D source cells, the Consolidator tool treats the selection on each spreadsheet separately and combines each selection with those on the other sheets.

 Tips

•	You can select noncontiguous cells by holding down Ctrl and clicking the cells.

•	You can selected cells in another notebook by clicking Browse.

 Related topics


To remove source cells

1	Click Tools [image] Consolidate [image] Edit.

2	Choose a consolidation setting from the Consolidations list.

3	Choose the source to remove from the Source cells list.

4	Click Remove.

 Related topics


To reuse a consolidation setting

1	Click Tools [image] Consolidate [image] Edit.

2	Choose a consolidation setting from the Consolidations list.

3	Click Consolidate.

 Note

•	Quattro Pro combines the current contents of the source cells; new results appear in the destination area.

 Related topics


To delete a consolidation setting

1	Click Tools [image] Consolidate [image] Edit.

2	Choose a consolidation setting from the Consolidations list.

3	Click Delete.

 Related topics


Working with outlines

An outline summarizes data in a part or all of a notebook by sorting row or column cells in groups to show summary cells, such as totals and averages, while hiding detail cells. Before you can automatically create an outline, your notebook must contain detail cells that are summarized in summary cells. Combining detail cells with the associated summary cells forms an outline group. You can create outline groups automatically, based on the summary cells in a spreadsheet. For example, if an organization has several departments, and each employee within each department contributes a standard amount to charity each year, you can automatically create an outline to display only the total amount (summary cells) contributed by each department, while hiding each employee contribution (detail cells).

You can create outline groups manually by selecting the detail and summary cells to include in each outline group. You have the option to manually create an outline if the rows and columns of summary cells contain values, instead of formulas, or if summary cells are not adjacent to detail cells.

You can specify the row or column location of the summary cells in an outline.

Once you create an outline, you can group the cells in the outline. Outline groups can include other outline groups. For example, if column C contains subtotals for columns A-B, column E contains subtotals for columns A-D, and column G contains grand totals of columns A-F, you can create outline groups for columns A-C, A-E, and A-G.

The following diagram shows a multilevel outline of the example above.

You can also remove outline groups, or expand and collapse them within your outline.

You can subtotal an outline group.

 How to


To create an outline automatically

1	Add summary data cells in rows or columns in a spreadsheet.

2	Click any cell in the notebook.

3	Click Tools [image] Outline [image] Auto outline.

 Note

•	The outline indicators in the panel on the side or top of the notebook show each outline group.

 Related topics


To create a group outline manually

1	Add summary data cells in rows or columns in a spreadsheet.

2	Select the cells for the outline, including the summary cells.

3	Click Tools [image] Outline [image] Group outline.

 Notes

•	The outline indicators located in the outline panel on the side or top of the notebook identify expanded outlines.

•	When selecting cells for an outline group, select cells in the rows or columns and make sure to include the summary row or column cells.

 Related topics


To position outline summary cells

1	Click Tools [image] Outline [image] Outline options.

2	In the Show row summary area, enable one of the following options:

•	Above collapsed rows

•	Below collapsed rows

3	In the Show column summary area, enable one of the following options:

•	Left of collapsed columns

•	Right of collapsed columns

 Tip

•	The summary indicator, which displays in each outline group in the outline panel on the side or top of a notebook, shows the location (in what row or column) of the summary cells for the outline group.

 Related topics


To separate outline cells

1	Select outline cells.

2	Click Tools [image] Outline [image] Ungroup outline.

 Tip

•	When selecting cells to group or ungroup, include the summary row or column cells. Hold down CTRL to select noncontiguous cells.

 Related topics


To remove all outline groups from the current sheet

•	Click Tools [image] Outline [image] Ungroup all.

 Related topics


To expand or collapse an outline group

1	Select the outline group you want to expand or collapse, and click Tools [image] Outline.

2	Choose one of the following:

•	Expand outline [image] expands details of the currently collapsed outline group

•	Collapse outline [image] collapses details of the currently expanded outline group

You can also
Expand or collapse a level of outline groups	In the outline panel, click the row or column level you want to expand or collapse.
Show or hide the outline panel	Click Tools [image] Outline [image] Show outline.
 Related topics


To subtotal an outline group

1	Click Tools [image] Data tools [image] QuickSubtotal [image] Edit QuickSubtotal.

2	Choose an outline group from the Group list box.

3	Choose a function from the Function list box.

4	Choose a column to subtotal from the Subtotal list box.

You can also
Total a subtotaled outline group	Enable the Total check box.
Add a page break between groups	Enable the Page break between groups check box.
Display subtotals above the data for each group	Enable the Totals above data check box.
Add a row of subtotal options	Click Add.
Delete a row of subtotal options	Click Remove.
 Note

•	You must first sort data before subtotaling an outline group.

 Tip

•	You can remove all subtotals in a spreadsheet by clicking Tools [image] Data tools [image] QuickSubtotal [image] Remove QuickSubtotal.

 Related topics


Popgraphics-Charts


 The Quick chart button automatically creates a chart of selected data when clicked.


 The Range picker lets you select data or cells of data.


 The line chart icon creates a line chart when clicked.


 The rotated line chart icon creates a rotated line chart when clicked.


 The 3-D ribbon chart icon creates a chart displaying flattened lines on a 3 dimensional background.


 The 3-D unstacked area chart icon creates an area chart on a 3 dimensional background.


 The area chart icon creates a 2-D area chart.


 The 3-D area chart icon creates a stacked, 3 dimensional chart.


 The 3-D Floating Marker chart icon creates a 3 dimensional chart with data points plotted with 3-D marker shapes.


 The Bar chart icon creates a 2-D bar chart.


 The 2.5-D Bar chart icon creates a chart showing values as vertical plates.


 The 3-D Bar chart icon creates a chart with series data displayed as columns.


 The Multiple Bar chart icon creates multiple charts with each series plotted in its own chart.


 The Rotated Bar chart icon creates a chart with values plotted as horizontal bars against reversed axes.


 The Rotated 2.5-D Bar chart icon creates a chart with the values of each series plotted as horizontal plates on a 3-D grid.


 The Rotated 3-D Bar chart icon creates a chart which displays series values as horizontal columns on a 3-D grid.


 The Stacked Bar chart icon creates a chart which plots the corresponding values of different series in vertical stacks.


 The Comparison Stacked Bar chart icon creates a chart with lines connecting boundaries between series.


 The 3-D Stacked Bar chart icon creates a chart which shows individual and cumulative values.


 The 100% Stacked Bar chart icon creates a chart which displays the percentage of the total contributed to each series.


 The Pie chart icon creates a circular chart displaying percentage values for one data series.


 The 3-D Pie chart icon creates a chart displaying each value as a slice of the pie, with a thicker look.


 The Multiple Pie chart icon creates multiple charts which allow you to compare proportions of the series values.


 The Multiple 3-D Pie chart icon creates several 3-D pie charts which allow you to compare individual series values and how proportions change from series to series.


 The Doughnut chart icon creates a circular chart, similar to a pie chart, except each chart has a hole in the middle.


 The Multiple Columns chart icon creates single charts and multiple charts where series values are represented as sections of a vertical bar.


 The Multiple 3-D Column charts icon creates single and multiple charts displaying series values as 3-D columns.


 The XY chart icon creates a chart displaying data plotted against numeric x and y axes.


 The High-Low chart icon creates a chart displaying data like stock prices.


 The High-Low Bar chart icon creates a High-Low chart using bars to display the data series.


 The Radar chart icon creates a circular chart with a line for each x-axis value extending from the center to the edge, like a spider-web.


 The 3-D Surface chart icon creates a chart which shades the area between each series with a different color.


 The 3-D Contour chart icon creates a chart with shading that follows the gridlines, allowing for comparisons of values.


 The 3-D Shaded Surface chart icon creates a chart with data displayed in a single surface with differences in color shading.


 The Line-Bar chart icon creates a combination chart using lines and bars to compare the data series.


 The Property button displays the properties dialog box for the selected object.


 The Quick tab button displays the Objects sheet when clicked.


 The Map button lets you create a map on the spreadsheet when clicked.


 The Insert clipart button lets you access the scrapbook and other clipart resources containing clipart graphics.


 The Area Bar chart icon is a combination chart using the area and bar styles to display data series.


 The 2.5-D stacked bar chart lets you create a stacked bar chart where the bars are plates.


Graphics popups


 The Arrow button lets you draw an arrow on a spreadsheet.


 The Line button lets you draw a straight line on a spreadsheet.


 The Rectangle button lets you draw square and rectangular shapes.


 The Ellipse button lets you draw circles and elliptical shapes.


 The Rounded rectangle button lets you draw rectangular shapes with rounded corners.


 The Text box button lets you create text boxes.


 The Order objects button lets you move objects to different layers, in front of or behind other objects.


 The Group button lets you group shapes and graphics, so that the objects move, resize, or customize as a unit.


 The Ungroup button lets you separate grouped graphic objects into individual objects.


 The Pick tool lets you select shapes and graphic objects.


 The Select object tool lets you draw an invisible square around a group of objects. For example, you can place a square around a section of the spreadsheet to include all the graphics and objects inside the square.


Macros


 The Insert macro button displays the Macro selection list to select different macro commands. Click in the input line to activate this button.


 The Push button in the Form control flyout on the Chart and drawing tool toolbar creates a button on the spreadsheet which can be attached to a macro or linked to either a URL address or a custom dialog box.


 The Play button runs the applications you create in Visual Basic for Applications.


Dialog boxes


 The Push button tool in the Form control flyout creates a button on a dialog box or form which can be attached to a macro or linked to either a URL address or another custom dialog box.


 The Check box tool in the Form control flyout creates a check box on a dialog box or form which users can enable or disable once activated by the developer.


 The Radio button tool in the Form control flyout creates a radio button on a dialog box or form which users can enable or disable once activated by the developer.


 The Test button on the property bar tests the activation of each control you add to a dialog box.


 The New dialog button lets you create a new dialog box or form within a notebook. It performs the same function as clicking Tools [image] Menu [image] Dialog designer.


 The Edit field tool in the Form control flyout creates an input field into which users can type or edit typed information.


 The Label tool in the Form control flyout lets you place a label near another control on a dialog box to help identify that control.


 The Bitmap button tool in the Form control flyout lets you create a button with a graphic displayed on the face instead of a label.


 The Browse button lets you search for folders and files.


 The Color control in the Form control flyout lets you create a color selector dialog from which users can select colors.


 The Combo box tool in the Form control flyout lets you add a combo box (or list box) to a dialog box.


 The File control tool in the Form control flyout lets you add a file selection control to a dialog box. This control also comes with a default Browse button.


 The Group bx control acts as a container for radio buttons, check boxes, and buttons. This container lets you manage several controls as a unit.


 The Horizontal Scroll Bar control can be added to a spreadsheet or a dialog box to let users view a range of data.


 The Vertical Scroll Bar control can be added to a spreadsheet or a dialog box to let users view a range of data.


 The List Box control lists data available for selection. This data is usually sorted alphanumerically in ascending order. The item selected in the list becomes the value of the list box.


 The Rectangle control lets you visually organize controls in a dialog box, similar to the way a group box acts as a container for other controls.


 The Spin control lets you add a control made up of an edit field with two arrows pointing up and down. The user can either click an arrow to increase or decrease the spin control's value, or type the value.


 The Tab control lets you add tab pages to a dialog box. This is useful for grouping controls or for avoiding a cluttered look on a dialog box.


 The Timer control lets you add a time control to a dialog box which can be configured to be a clock, a timer, or an alarm.


 The Change decimal place button lets you change the number of decimal places in a value.


 The Set parse break button lets you add a fixed-width parse break.


Buttons for Getting Started


 The Pane splitter button is used to split the active window into two windows.


 The Tab scroll buttons allow you to navigate the spreadsheets in a notebook.


 The Select table button automatically selects data throughout a table.


 The Quick tab button returns you to your spreadsheet.


 The Browse By button lets you quickly find all instances of a particular category of data.


 Tab scroll buttons help you navigate a spreadsheet. The first button displays a group of sheets in front of the active spreadsheet (backward toward the first spreadsheet), the last button at the right displays a group of sheets behind the active spreadsheet (forward toward the last spreadsheet), and the middle buttons move forward and backward one spreadsheet at a time. To move directly to the Objects sheet, click the Quick tab button.


 The Zoom to fit button automatically fills the screen with the current selection of cells.


 The Toggle menu button lets you display the menu commands on any file management dialog box. Enable and disable the menu by clicking the button.


Buttons for Slide Shows


 The Close button closes the active window.


Button for Intellimouse


 The Auto Scroll central point determines the direction and speed of the Auto Scroll feature for the Microsoft Intellimouse.


Buttons for managing files and data


 What's this? Help provides quick help information specific to your current task.


 The Previous/next button takes you to the previous or next spreadsheet.


 The Start/stop review button begins or ends a review of a shared notebook.


 The Select colors button allows you to assign different colors to users in a workgroup.


 The User list button lets you view which users have accessed the shared notebook. It also displays when the notebook was opened, and its current status, for example, "Editing."


 The Previous cell button takes the user to the previous changed cell.


 The Next cell button takes the user to the next changed cell.


 The Accept button accepts the change that is currently displayed in the selected cell. All changes listed in the change history are discarded when this button is pressed.


 The Accept all button accepts all the changes currently displayed. All changes listed in the change history are discarded when this button is pressed.


 The Reject button rejects the change that is currently displayed in the selected cell.


 The Reject all button rejects all the changes currently displayed. All changes rejected are discarded when this button is pressed.


 The Cell comments button displays or hides cell comments in a shared notebook.


 The Break data flow button lets you insert a row, column, or spreadsheet into your parsed text file.


 The Delimiter to text button removes columns and moves the selected text into the first cell selected. However, the delimiter remains to separate text.


 The Merge data button removes the delimiter and, therefore, the column break. The data merges into the first cell selected.


 The Transpose button switches columns with rows and rows with columns.


Print Preview


 The Zoom in button increases the Zoom factor to focus on part of the page.


 The Zoom out button reduces the Zoom factor to pull back from the page.


 The Zoom button zooms the spreadsheet by a specified percentage.


 The Cancel preview button exits the Print preview screen.


Page Setup


 Portrait orientation prints data vertically, on individual pages.


 Landscape orientation prints data horizontally, on individual pages.


 The Range picker allows you to select the cells directly from the spreadsheet.


Print


 The Print button opens the Spreadsheet print dialog box.


Sorting


 The Sort button sorts data in ascending or descending order.


Outlines


 Indicates that the detailed cells in rows are expanded in the outline group. Click the indicator to collapse the outline group.


 Indicates that the detailed cells in columns are expanded in the outline group. Click the indicator to collapse the outline group.


 The Group button combines selected cells into an outline group.


 The Ungroup button separates the selected outline group into individual cells.


 The Ungroup all button clears all outline groups on the current spreadsheet.


 The Show group button expands the detail cells for the currently collapsed outline group.


 The Hide group button collapses the detail cells for the currently expanded outline group.


 The Show/hide outline button shows or hides the outline panel on the current spreadsheet.


 The Summary indicator identifies the location of the summary row or column.


 The Plus indicator identifies a collapsed outline group (i.e. the detail cells are hidden).


 The Minus indicator identifies an expanded outline group (i.e. the detail cells are displayed).


 The Outline level indicator shows or hides outline groups in specific levels of the outline.


 The Outline options button lets you position outline summary cells.


Edit and Formatting


 The Text color button changes the text color of the selected area.


 The Undo button reverses the last change made.


 The Redo button reverses the last Undo action.


 The Copy button copies the selection to the Clipboard.


 The Cut button moves the selection to the Clipboard.


 The Paste button inserts the Clipboard contents into the notebook.


 The What's this? button provides information about items in a dialog box.


 The QuickFormat button pastes the format of the current selection to all subsequent selections until QuickFormat is disabled.


 The SpeedFormat button applies a predefined format to the selection.


 The Alignment button lets you change the horizontal alignment of text in a cell.


 The Join cells button joins and centers cells.


 The Fill button changes the color of the cell background.


 The Line button lets you select the border type to add to a cell or selection of cells.


 The Bold button darkens the text.


 The Italic button adds italics to the current font.


 The Underline button underlines text.


 The Strikeout button strikes a line through the text.


 The Subscript button changes selected text to subscript.


 The Superscript button changes selected text to superscript.


 The Column QuickFit button adjusts a column's width to its longest cell entry.


 The Row QuickFit button adjusts a row's height to its tallest cell entry.


 The Column/row QuickFit button adjusts a column's width and row height to its longest and tallest cell entry.


 The double arrows let you resize columns or rows using the mouse.


Database buttons


 The First record button takes you directly to the first record in the database.


 The Last record button takes you directly to the last record in the database.


 The Record back button moves you back one record in the database.


 The Record forward button moves you forward one record in the database.


 You can quickly navigate through database records when you drag the Slider along its bar using your mouse.


 The Arrow up button moves highlighted fields up one position in the Selected Fields list.


 The Arrow down button moves highlighted fields down one position in the Selected Fields list.


 The Trash can button removes highlighted fields from the Selected Fields list.


 The Table link button lets you insert data tables from external databases.


 You can use the Sort button to sort notebook database records alphabetically or numerically.


 The Browse button lets you search for a path and enters the path for you so you do not have to type it in.


CrossTabs buttons


 When the cursor changes to cross hairs, you can drag the selection to another location on the spreadsheet.


 The Report button lets you build a CrossTab report in the CrossTab report dialog box.


 The Undo button reverses the last change that you made.


 The Options button allows you to modify the appearance and output of your CrossTab report.


 The Field options button allows you to modify the field name and position, hide field items, and perform row and column summaries.


 If you have more than one field in the row or column of a CrossTab report, you can hide the details of a field when you click the Hide details button.


 The Show details button reveals the details of a field, and acts like an undo of the Hide details button.


 The Refresh button updates the CrossTab report when changes are made to the original data.


 The Copy static button makes an exact copy of a CrossTab report. The copy is no longer connected to the original data, and changes in the data are not reflected in the copy.


 The Expand button expands a CrossTab report by field, placing it on the next available, unprotected sheets of the notebook.


 The Remove button deletes the active CrossTab report.


 The Drill down button is active in OLAP CrossTab reports only. You can drill down a field to view all of its items.


 The Roll up button is active in OLAP CrossTab reports only. You can roll up a field to hide all of its details.


 The Remove element button is active in OLAP reports only. This button lets you remove an element in the CrossTab report, such as a field, or subfield.


 The Plus button allows you to drill down a field, revealing more details about the field.


 The Minus button allows you to roll up a field which you have drilled down. Rolling up hides subfield information.


 The Import report button allows you to import a CrossTab report from an OLAP data source.


Creating spreadsheet buttons


 The QuickFill button lets you automatically insert a series to a selection of cells.


 The WordPerfect characters button provides a list of symbols used by WordPerfect.


Formulas and functions


 A red triangle in the upper-right corner of a cell indicates that the cell contains a comment.


 Standard view


 Argument view


 Outline view


 The Expand button expands a formula outline.


 The Collapse button collapses the formula outline.


 The Function button lists all the spreadsheet functions available and allows you to nest a function in another spreadsheet function or formula.


 The Name button inserts a cell name into a formula.


 The Formula Composer button helps you create formulas.


 The Circular cell reference indicator on the application bar informs you of a circular cell reference in your spreadsheet. A circular cell reference is a formula whose result is dependent upon itself. For example, placing the formula +A1+A2 in cell A1 produces a circular cell reference. This formula relies upon its own result to calculate the formula. This type of formula is never truly updated because recalculating it produces a result and a modification to the supporting cell at the same time.


 The Follow formula button shows all the relationships between cells.


 The Back button returns the formula to Standard view.


 The Trace precedents button displays all the cells that provide data to or influence the selected cell.


 The Remove all arrows button removes all the arrows that indicate relationships between cells.


 The Trace dependents button traces all formulas that depend on data from the selected cell.


 The No line border type removes lines in a border.


 The No change border type returns to the border last in effect.


The QuickFunction flyout lists the functions available from the toolbar.


 The Maximize button restores the dialog box to its default size.


 The QuickSum button allows you to make quick sums from the toolbar.


The Color palette lets you choose from a wide range of colors.


The Border type palette lets you choose from a wide range of borders.


 The Polyline tool lets you draw a line with any number of straight segments.


 The Freehand tool lets you draw a freehand line.


 The Polycurve tool lets you draw a line with multiple curves.


 You can choose from a variety of 3-D styles for you text.


 The No color button makes a border transparent.


 The Gradient button lets you apply a gradient fill to the selected item.


 The gradient palette lists the gradient styles available.


The Star shapes flyout lists the star shapes available from the toolbar.


 The Texture button lets you apply a texture fill to the selected item.


 The Double arrow button lets you draw a line with an arrow at each end.


The Flowchart shapes flyout lists the flowchart shapes available from the toolbar.


 The Line dot arrow button lets you draw a line with a dot at one end and an arrow at the other.


 The No fill button removes a fill from the selected item.


 The Starting cap picker lists the starting caps available.


The pattern palette lists the pattern styles available.


 The Pattern button lets you apply a pattern fill to the selected item.


 The Line double dot button lets you draw a line with a dot at each end.


The Callout shapes flyout lists the callout shapes available from the toolbar.


 The Width picker lists the available border width of shapes.


The Arrow shapes flyout lists the arrow shapes available from the toolbar.


 The Polyline double arrow button lets you draw a polyline with an arrow at each end.


 The Polyline dot arrow button lets you draw a polyline with a dot at one end and an arrow at the other.


 The No frame button removes the border from a text box.


 The Picture button lets you apply a picture fill to the selected item.


The Basic shapes flyout lists the basic shapes available from the toolbar.


 The Arc button lets you draw an arc.


 The Joints picker lists the corner finishes available for borders.


 The Polyline arrow button lets you draw a polyline with an arrow at one end.


 The typeover button lets you overwrite data in a cell.


 The Ending cap picker lists the ending caps available.


 The Undo flyout list the actions available to undo.


 The Redo flyout list the actions available to redo.


 The Line flyout lists the lines available from the toolbar.


 The microphone icon lets you access Dragon NaturallySpeaking menu commands.


Printing

Quattro Pro provides extensive printing options. For example, you can specify a printer or preview a print job to see how it will look when you print.

In this section, you'll learn about

•	previewing a print job

•	setting up a printer

•	printing the active spreadsheet or notebook

•	printing data

•	printing charts and maps

•	printing selected print areas

•	printing to a file

•	printing headers and footers

•	printing headings

•	customizing print settings

•	saving, restoring, and naming default print settings

•	spacing a print job


Previewing a print job

You can preview a print job before you print it.

When you are previewing a print job, you can view data in more or less detail by zooming.

 How to


To preview a print job

•	Click File [image] Print preview.

You can also
Print from print preview	Click the Print button on the toolbar.
Exit print preview	Click the Cancel preview button on the toolbar.
 Note

•	Before you can preview a print job, a printer must be installed on your computer.

 Related topics


To increase or decrease the zoom level while previewing a print job

1	Click File [image] Print preview.

2	On the toolbar, click one of the following buttons:

•	Zoom in [image] increases the zoom level

•	Zoom out [image] decreases the zoom level

 Tip

•	You can also increase the zoom level by left-clicking a page or decrease the zoom level by right-clicking a page.

 Related topics


Setting up a printer

Many printer settings are printer-specific; therefore, not all printer settings may be available for your printer. Consult your printer manual for more information. Before you can print in Quattro Pro, you need to have a printer set up on your computer. If multiple printers are connected to your computer, you can specify which printer to use in Quattro Pro, or you can add a new one.

 How to


To specify a printer for Quattro Pro

1	Click File [image] Print.

2	Choose a printer from the Name list box.

 Related topics


To add a printer

1	Click File [image] Print.

2	Click the Details tab.

3	Click Add printer.

4	Follow the instructions in the Add printer wizard.

 Related topics


Printing the active spreadsheet or notebook

Quattro Pro lets you print part of a notebook or an entire notebook. For example, you can print a simple list or a multiple-page report. Once you have started printing your work, you can cancel the print job.

You can print the spreadsheet grid lines to make a report look more like the notebook on the screen.

You can also print cell comments

 How to


To print the active spreadsheet or a notebook

1	Click File [image] Print.

2	Click the Print tab.

3	Enable one of the following options:

•	Current sheet [image] prints the active spreadsheet

•	Notebook [image] prints a notebook

4	Type a value in the Number of copies box.

5	Enable one of the following options:

•	Collate [image] prints multiple copies sorted by sets of copies

•	Group [image] prints multiple copies sorted by page

6	Click Print.

 Related topics


To cancel a print job

1	Click File [image] Print.

2	Click the Print tab.

3	Click Status.

4	In the dialog box that displays, choose a print job.

Current print jobs display in the order they were sent.

5	Click Document [image] Cancel printing.

 Note

•	If your printer has a large memory buffer, printing may continue for a few moments after you cancel the print job.

 Related topics


To print grid lines or cell formulas

1	Click File [image] Page setup.

2	Click the Options tab.

3	Enable one of the following check boxes:

•	Cell formulas

•	Gridlines

4	Click Print.

 Related topics


To print cell comments

1	Click View [image] Comments.

2	Click File [image] Print.

 Note

•	If the cell contains a formula that is set to print, spreadsheet comments will not print.

 Related topics


Printing data

Quattro Pro lets you print data without soft page breaks. Turning off page breaks is useful for producing long printouts on continuous-form paper. When you turn off page breaks, soft page breaks are ignored, but hard page breaks still exist. For more information about setting page breaks, see "Working with page breaks."

You can also print a notebook on a set number of pages.

 How to


To print data without soft page breaks

1	Click File [image] Page setup.

2	Click the Print margins tab.

3	Disable the Break pages check box.

 Related topics


To print data on a set number of pages

1	Click File [image] Page setup.

2	Click the Print scaling tab.

3	Enable the Shrink to option.

4	Type a value in the following boxes:

•	Desired width

•	Desired height

 Related topics


Printing charts and maps

Any graphics (charts, buttons, drawn shapes) in a selected print area print with the notebook data. You can print maps the same way. Quattro Pro also lets you print multiple charts or maps. You can save time when printing graphics if you display only the outline of graphics on the screen.

 How to


To print a graphic

1	Click File [image] Print.

2	Click the Print tab.

3	In the Print area, enable the Selection option.

4	Click the Range picker tool.

5	Select the cells containing the graphic.

6	Press ENTER.

7	Click Print.

 Related topics


To print a chart or map

1	Click the border of a chart or map.

2	Click File [image] Print.

3	Enable the Selected chart option.

 Tips

•	You can also select a chart or map by clicking a chart or map icon on the Objects sheet.

•	You can print more than one chart or map by holding down SHIFT and then clicking the charts or maps.

 Related topics


To print all charts or maps

1	Click View [image] Objects page.

2	Click Edit [image] Select all.

3	Click File [image] Print.

 Tip

•	You can also print all charts or maps by clicking the Quick tab button to the left of the spreadsheet tabs.

 Related topics


To save time when printing graphics

1	Click Format [image] Notebook properties.

2	Click the Display tab.

3	Enable the Show outline option.

 Related topics


Printing selected print areas

You can choose to print selected areas of the document. Quattro Pro lets you print both contiguous and noncontiguous cells including 3-D selections. When you print noncontiguous selections, each selection will print just below the selection preceding it. You can also change the print selection or print only certain pages of a spreadsheet.

Quattro Pro will not split a column. If the full column will not fit on a page, it prints on the next page. If the data in the print selection is wider than one page, as many columns as possible print on the first page and all rows for those columns are printed. Then, the next columns are printed, starting at the first row of data until all data in the selection has printed. The data prints on as many pages as necessary.

 How to


To print contiguous blocks of cells

1	Click File [image] Print.

2	Click the Print tab.

3	In the Print area, enable the Selection option.

4	Click the Range picker tool.

5	Select the cells containing the graphic.

6	Press ENTER.

7	Click Print.

 Related topics


To print noncontiguous blocks of cells

1	Click File [image] Print.

2	Click the Print tab.

3	In the Print area, enable the Selection option.

4	Click the Range picker tool.

5	Select a cell or group of cells.

6	Hold down CTRL, and select other groups of cells.

7	Press ENTER.

8	Click Print.

 Related topics


To print 3-D selections of cells

1	Click File [image] Print.

2	Click the Print tab.

3	In the Print area, enable the Selection option.

4	Click the Range picker tool, and select the cell or group of cells on the first spreadsheet.

5	Hold down SHIFT, and click the tabs for the spreadsheets that contain the remaining data for the 3-D block.

The spreadsheet tabs selected display a black underline.

6	Press ENTER.

7	Click Print.

 Related topics


To change the cell selection

1	Click File [image] Print.

2	Click the Print tab.

3	In the Print area, enable the Selection option.

4	Click the Range picker tool.

5	Select the new cells you want.

6	Press Enter.

The new coordinates display in the Selection box.

 Related topics


To print certain pages of the active spreadsheet

1	Click File [image] Print.

2	Click the Print tab.

3	In the Print area, enable the Current sheet option.

4	Type values in the following boxes:

•	From [image] the first page to print

•	To [image] the last page to print

5	Click Print.

 Related topics


Printing to a file

If you want to print from a computer on which Quattro Pro is not installed, or if you take your printing to a service bureau with high-quality printers, you can store the document as a print file. This file, called a binary file, contains instructions in the printer's native language for creating the document. For example, if your printer is a PostScript printer, Quattro Pro creates a PostScript file. If your printer is an HP LaserJet, it creates a PCL (Printer Control Language) file.

Quattro Pro lets you revert to printing a documents on a specific printer.

 How to


To print to a file

1	Click File [image] Print.

2	Click the Details tab.

3	Choose a printer from the Name list box.

4	Enable the Print to file option, and specify a filename.

If you do not specify a filename extension, the extension .prn is used.

5	Click Print.

 Tip

•	If you want to store the file in a directory other than the default, or on a floppy disk, specify the complete path to the file in the Print to file box.

 Related topics


To print to a selected printer

1	Click File [image] Print.

2	Click the Details tab.

3	Choose a printer from the Name list box.

4	Enable the Port option.

 Related topics


Printing headers and footers

Quattro Pro lets you print headers or footers. You can also hide headers or footers if you do not want them to display on the printout.

 How to


To print a header or footer

1	Click File [image] Page setup.

2	Click the Header/footer tab.

3	In the Header or Footer area, enable the Create check box.

4	In the Create box, type the text to display in the header or footer.

5	Click Print.

 Note

•	The Create check box is automatically enabled if headers and footers already exist in a document.

 Related topics


To hide a header or footer

1	Click File [image] Page setup.

2	Click the Header/footer tab.

3	In the Header or Footer area, disable the Create check box.

 Note

•	Hiding a header or footer does not delete it from the document.

 Related topics


Printing headings

Quattro Pro lets you repeat a row or column title on each page of a spreadsheet. You can print row and column titles, and you can choose to print as headings the row letters and column numbers that display on your screen.

 How to


To print row titles as the top heading on each even-numbered page

1	Click File [image] Page setup.

2	Click the Options tab.

3	In the Top heading box, click the Range picker tool.

4	Select the address of any cell in the row whose title you want to print.

5	Click Print.

Do not include top headings in the print selection, or they will print twice.

 Notes

•	The entire row is used as the heading, regardless of the cell you select.

•	If the heading extends beyond the width of the even-numbered page, printing of the heading will continue on the odd-numbered page.

 Related topics


To print column titles as the left heading on each page

1	Click File [image] Page setup.

2	Click the Options tab.

3	In the Left heading box, click the Range picker tool.

4	Select the address of any cell in the column whose title you want to print.

5	Click Print.

Do not include left headings in the print selection, or they will print twice.

 Note

•	The entire column is used as the heading, regardless of the cell you select.

 Related topics


To print top column letters and left row numbers as headings

1	Click File [image] Page setup.

2	Click the Options tab.

3	Enable the Row/column borders check box.

4	Click Print.

 Related topics


Customizing print settings

In Quattro Pro, the default page setting prints data on 8.5" by 11" paper in portrait orientation. You can change the paper size and orientation to suit the data. When you change the print orientation, the margins change to match the new orientation setting. For example, the top margin stays with the top of the notebook data printed, along with the header and top heading (if any).

Quattro Pro also lets you center print selections between the left and right margins.

You can shrink the width and height if a print selection. You can also shrink or enlarge print selections by an exact percentage. For example, specifying 110% enlarges output by 10%; specifying 90% reduces it by 10%.

If the printed document is not readable because of colored background or text, you can adjust the settings to print all backgrounds white, all text black, and all lines black.

 How to


To change paper size

1	Click File [image] Page setup.

2	Click the Paper type tab.

3	Choose a paper size from the Type list.

 Related topics


To change paper orientation

1	Click File [image] Page setup.

2	Click the Paper type tab.

3	Enable one of the following options:

•	Portrait

•	Landscape

 Related topics


To center print selections between left and right margins

1	Click File [image] Page setup.

2	Click the Options tab.

3	Enable the Center cells check box.

 Note

•	Extra blank columns on the right or left side of a print selection affect centering. Do not include these blank columns in the print selection if you want the data to be centered.

 Related topics


To shrink the width and height of a print selection

1	Click File [image] Page setup.

2	Click the Print scaling tab.

3	Enable the Shrink to option.

4	Type a value in the Desired width box.

5	Type a value in the Desired height box.

 Related topics


To shrink or enlarge a print selection

1	Click File [image] Page setup.

2	Click the Print scaling tab.

3	Enable the Scale to option.

4	Type a value in the % of normal size box.

 Related topics


To print in black and white

1	Click File [image] Print.

2	Click the Details tab.

3	Enable the Adjust image to print black and white check box.

 Related topics


Saving, restoring, and naming default print settings

Initially, Quattro Pro installs default print settings. You can change the default print settings and save the changes as new default settings. You can restore the original settings by reloading the defaults.

You can also save the current print settings as named settings. Any named settings you have created are not affected when you restore the default settings. Named print settings are saved with the notebook, and you can update or delete them as necessary. You can use the named settings to print reports, pages, or spreadsheets within the same notebook.

 How to


To save changes to the default print settings

1	Click File [image] Print.

2	Modify any print settings.

3	Click Save settings.

4	Click Page setup.

5	In the Spreadsheet page setup dialog box, modify any page setup settings.

6	Click Save defaults.

7	Click OK.

8	Click Close.

 Related topics


To restore the default print settings

1	Click File [image] Page setup.

2	Click Load defaults.

 Related topics


To save the current print settings as a named setting

1	Click File [image] Page setup.

2	Click the Named settings tab.

3	Type a setting name in the New set box.

4	Click Add.

 Related topics


To update or delete a named setting

1	Click File [image] Page setup.

2	Click the Named settings tab.

3	Click one of the following buttons:

•	Update

•	Delete

 Related topics


To print using a named setting

1	Click File [image] Print.

2	Click Page setup.

3	In the Spreadsheet page setup dialog box, click the Named settings tab.

4	Choose a named setting from the Named settings box.

5	Click Use.

6	Click OK.

7	Click Print.

 Related topics


Spacing a print job

You can keep or collapse the blank lines between each cell selection. You can add space between print selections or between each printed spreadsheet. One line of space equals a sixth of an inch. Quattro Pro also lets you choose to print each selection or spreadsheet on a new page.

 How to


To keep or collapse blank lines between cell selections

1	Click File [image] Page setup.

2	Click the Options tab.

3	In the Print between selections area, enable one of the following options:

•	In place [image] keeps blank lines between cell selections

•	Collapse blanks [image] collapses blank lines between cell selections

 Related topics


To add space between each printed selection

1	Click File [image] Page setup.

2	Click the Options tab.

3	In the Print between selections area, enable the Lines option, and type the number of lines you want to print between each selection.

 Tip

•	You can also add space between each printed selection by holding down Ctrl and selecting a blank group of cells between each selection.

 Related topics


To add space between each printed spreadsheet

1	Click File [image] Page setup.

2	Click the Options tab.

3	In the Print between 3-D sheets area, enable the Lines option, and type the number of lines you want to print between each spreadsheet.

 Related topics


To start each printed selection on a new page

1	Click File [image] Page setup.

2	Click the Options tab.

3	In the Print between selections area, enable the Page advance option.

 Related topics


To start each printed spreadsheet on a new page

1	Click File [image] Page setup.

2	Click the Options tab.

3	In the Print between 3-D sheets area, enable the Page advance option.

 Related topics


Working with project templates

Project templates provide a basic format and structure for spreadsheets and data entry forms commonly used in business and at home.

In this section, you'll learn about

•	creating projects using templates

•	working with project template categories


Creating projects using templates

Project templates let you create new notebooks from preformatted spreadsheets.

The following is an example of a project template.

For information about creating a notebook from a project templates see "To create a notebook using a project template."

You can view a list of all the Quattro Pro files you've worked. Quattro Pro can display project templates each time you open the application. If you plan to use a project template often, you can add it to the Favorites list. You can also change the description of a project, including its name.

 How to


To display a list of previous projects

1	Click File [image] New from project.

2	Click the Work on tab.

 Tip

•	You open a project from list of previous projects by double-clicking on the project.

 Related topics


To display project templates when Quattro Pro opens

1	Click File [image] New from project.

2	Click Options [image] Show this dialog at startup.

 Note

•	A check mark beside the command name indicates that this feature is enabled.

 Related topics


To copy templates from previous versions of WordPerfect and Quattro Pro

1	Open Windows Explorer, and browse to find the template file you want to copy.

2	Select the file, and click Edit [image] Copy.

3	Open the template folder where you want to place the copy.

The path is C:\program files\corel\wordperfect office 11\template.

4	Click Copy [image] Paste.

 Tips

•	You can access the copied files by clicking File [image] New from project.

•	You can also obtain additional predefined project templates from the Corel Web site at http://www.corel.com

 Related topics


To add a project to the Favorites folder

1	Click File [image] New from project.

2	Click the Create new tab.

3	Choose a category from the Categories list box.

4	Choose a project from the Projects list.

5	Click Copy to favorites.

 Tip

•	You can display items in the Favorites folder by clicking File [image] New from project, and choosing Favorites from the Categories list box.

 Related topics


To change a project description

1	Click File [image] New from project.

2	Click the Create new tab.

3	Choose a category from the Categories list box.

4	Choose a project from the Projects list.

A description of the project appears below the Projects list.

5	Click Options, and click Project properties.

6	In the Modify a project dialog box, type new information in any of the following boxes:

•	Display name [image] to change the project name

•	Description [image] to change the project description

 Related topics


Working with project template categories

The default project template categories are based on WordPerfect Office applications. You can create new categories and rename or delete existing categories. You can also add project templates to categories.

Adding a document, or executable file such as a spreadsheet or slide show to a project template category lets you use that file as a template on which to base similar documents, spreadsheets, or slide shows.

Moving project templates among categories gives you flexibility in organizing your work.

 How to


To create a project template category

1	Click File [image] New from project.

2	Click the Create new tab.

3	Click Options, and click Create category.

4	In the Display name box, type a name for the new category.

 Tip

•	If you want the category to appear near the top of the list, begin the name with a bracket ( [ ) or asterisk ( * ).

 Related topics


To rename a project template category

1	Click File [image] New from project.

2	Click the Create new tab.

3	Choose a category from the Categories list box.

4	Choose a project from the Project list.

5	Click Options, and click Rename category.

6	Type a new name in the Display name box.

 Related topics


To delete a project template category

1	Click File [image] New from project.

2	Click the Create new tab.

3	Choose a category from the Categories list box.

4	Choose a project from the Project list.

5	Click Options, and click Remove category.

 Note

•	Deleting a category does not delete project templates from the hard drive. If you delete a category that contains project templates not stored in another category, Quattro Pro creates a new category, "[Deleted Projects]," that contains these project templates.

 Related topics


To add a project to a project template category

1	Click File [image] New from project.

2	Click the Create new tab.

3	From the Categories list box, choose the category to which you want the project.

4	Click Options, and click Add project.

5	Enable the I want to add an existing project option.

6	Click Next.

7	Type the project's filename.

 Tip

•	You can also click Browse to search for a filename.

 Related topics


To add a document or executable file to a project template category

1	Click File [image] New from project.

2	Click the Create new tab.

3	From the Categories list box, choose the category where you want the new project to appear.

4	Click Options, and click Add project.

5	Enable the I want to add another document option.

6	Click Next.

7	In the first box, type a project name.

8	In the second box, type a project description, and click Next.

9	Type the projects filename.

 Notes

•	The new project is added to the Quattro Pro custom templates category.

•	When you open a document that you added to a project templates category, it opens in its own application.

 Tip

•	You can also click Browse to search for a filename.

 Related topics


To move a project to another project template category

1	Click File [image] New from project.

2	Click the Create new tab.

3	Choose a category from the Categories list box.

4	Choose a project from the Projects list.

5	Click Options [image] Move project, and click a category.

 Tip

•	You can copy a project to another project template category by clicking Options [image] Copy project. A copied project exists in both the original and the new category; a moved project exists only in the new category.

 Related topics


Using passwords and startup switches

Various levels of passwords can be added to notebooks to keep confidential information secure. Startup switches allow you to control what happens when Quattro Pro is started. Quattro Pro allows you to choose from a variety of password-protection levels and startup switches, depending on the type of work you are doing.

In this section, you'll learn about

•	using password protection

•	using startup switches


Using password protection

You can assign a password to a notebook so that it can be opened only by authorized users. Using password levels, you can restrict users from viewing specific information or the entire notebook, and keep data from accidentally being changed. Notebooks with low, medium, high, and controls-only password protection are opened using different procedures.

You can change the password associated with a notebook. As well, you can disable a notebook's password.

 How to


To assign a password to a notebook

1	Click Format [image] Notebook properties.

2	Click the Password level tab.

3	Enable one of the following options:

•	None

•	Low

•	Medium

•	High

•	Edit with controls only

4	Click OK.

5	In the Enter password dialog box, type a password.

6	In the Verify password dialog box, type the password again.

 Note

•	Be sure to write down the password and keep it in a safe place. If you lose it, you are locked out of all or part of the protected notebook, depending on the password level.

 Related topics


To open a file with low-level password protection

1	Click File [image] Open.

2	Choose the drive and folder where the file is stored.

3	Double-click the filename.

4	Click Format [image] Notebook.

5	Click the Password level tab.

6	Click Disable password.

7	In the Enter password dialog box, type the password.

 Notes

•	If the password is not disabled you cannot to view or edit formulas in the notebook.

•	Passwords are case-sensitive (for example, "MYBUDGET" and "mybudget" are different passwords).

 Related topics


To open a file with medium-level password protection

1	Click Start on the Windows taskbar, and click Run.

2	Type qpw.exe /s[password] [path] in the Open list box.

For example, if you want to open a file called topsecurity.qpw that you've saved in the folder myfiles with the password sesame, you would type qpw.exe /ssesame c:\myfiles\topsecurity.qpw.

 Note

•	Medium-protected notebooks can be opened only by using a startup switch. For more information on startup switches, see "Using startup switches."

 Tip

•	Passwords are case-sensitive (for example, "MYBUDGET" and "mybudget" are different passwords).

 Related topics


To open a file with high-level password protection

1	Click File [image] Open.

2	Choose the drive and folder where the file is stored.

3	Double-click the filename.

4	In the Verify password dialog box, type the password.

 Note

•	An alternate dialog box displays when you are using a document management system (DMS) that complies with the Open Document Management API (ODMA) standard. The DMSPath string identifies the location of the file; it varies depending on the DMS you are using. The following is a description of the syntax used and an example of a path name:

•	Syntax [image]::ODMA\\DMSPath

•	Example [image]::ODMA\SOFTSOL\311\TEST\10\1 (this example is for SoftSolutions)

 Tip

•	Passwords are case-sensitive (for example, "MYBUDGET" and "mybudget" are different passwords).

 Related topics


To open a file with controls-only password protection

1	Click File [image] Open.

2	Choose the drive and folder where the file is stored.

3	Double-click the filename.

 Note

•	If you want to make changes to a spreadsheet that has controls-only password protection without using form controls, you must change the password level to None. For more information on assigning password levels, see "To assign a password to a notebook."

 Tip

•	Passwords are case-sensitive (for example, "MYBUDGET" and "mybudget" are different passwords).

 Related topics


To change a password for a notebook

1	Click Format [image] Notebook.

2	Click the Password level tab.

3	Click Change password.

4	Type the old password in the Old password box.

5	Type a new password in the New password box.

6	Type the new password again in the Confirm password box.

 Related topics


To disable a password for a notebook

1	Click Format [image] Notebook.

2	Click the Password level tab.

3	Click Disable password.

4	In the Enter password dialog box, type the password.

 Note

•	The password is disabled for the current session only (until the file is closed).

 Related topics


Using startup switches

You can start Quattro Pro using a startup switch. Some of these switches are for your convenience, but others may be necessary to run Quattro Pro on your particular system. You can also set permanent startup switches for Quattro Pro from both the Start menu and a desktop icon.

The following startup switches are available:

Switch	Function
/d	Developer mode [image] This is for use by end users (for example, type qpw.exe /d). For information about working in Developer mode, see "Working in Developer mode."
/s	No password box [image] This command lets you open a password-protected file without using the password dialog box (for example, type qpw.exe /spassword c:\myfiles\filename.qpw).
/b	User splash screen [image] This lets you use your own bitmapped image as the splash screen (for example, type qpw.exe /b[path to bitmap]).
/n	No splash screen [image] This starts Quattro Pro without displaying the splash screen (for example, type qpw.exe /n).
/r1	Repair damaged files [image] This repairs a file by removing all of the objects. Typically, corrupted objects are the cause of a damaged file (for example, type qpw.exe /r1[path of damaged file]). After a damaged file has been opened using the /r1 switch, Quattro Pro returns to normal mode to allow you to save objects in the file again. Note that if you open Quattro Pro with the /r1 switch but without the path of a damaged file Quattro Pro will remain in repair mode until you exit the application.
/r2	Repair damaged files [image] This repairs a file by removing all of the objects and formulas. This should be used if /r1 does not work (for example, type qpw.exe /r2[path of damaged file]). After a damaged file has been opened using the /r2 switch, Quattro Pro returns to normal mode to allow you to save objects and formulas in the file again. Note that if you open Quattro Pro with the /r2 switch but without the path of a damaged file Quattro Pro will remain in repair mode until you exit the application.
/wrr	Workgroups repair review [image] If a system failure occurs while you are reviewing a shared notebook, the file still indicates that a review is taking place. As a result, no other user can save their changes or start a review. To prevent the file from being permanently locked up, the startup switch /wrr frees the file from the Review mode. /wrr must be followed by the filename (for example, type qpw.exe /wrr[path of shared notebook]).
/wru	Workgroups repair user info [image] If a system failure occurs while editing a shared notebook, the file still indicates that the notebook is being used. As a result, a review cannot be started (as long as any other user is editing the notebook). To prevent the file from being permanently locked up, the startup switch /wru resets the User to non-editing mode. /wru must be followed by the filename and the user name (for example, type qpw.exe /wru[path of shared notebook] [user name]).
 How to


To start Quattro Pro using a startup switch

1	Click Start on the Windows taskbar, and click Run.

2	In the Open list box, type the Quattro Pro command with its path, followed by a space and the startup switch.

For example, type qpw.exe /d.

 Note

•	If a path contains spaces, enclose it with quotation marks. For example, to open a file called topsecurity.qpw that you have saved in the folder my personal files with the password SESAME, type qpw.exe /sSESAME "C:\my personal files\topsecurity.qpw".

 Tip

•	You can use more than one startup switch by adding a space between each parameter.

 Related topics


To set a permanent startup switch from the Start menu

1	Right-click Start on the Windows taskbar, and click Open.

2	Choose the drive and folder where the WordPerfect Office 11 folder is stored.

3	Double-click the folder.

4	Right-click the Quattro Pro program icon, and click Properties.

5	Click the Shortcut tab.

6	In the Target box, append the startup switch to the path.

 Note

•	If a path contains spaces, enclose it with quotation marks. For example, to open a file called topsecurity.qpw that you have saved in the folder my personal files with the password SESAME, type qpw.exe /sSESAME "C:\my personal files\topsecurity.qpw".

 Tip

•	You can use more than one startup switch by adding a space between each parameter.

 Related topics


To set a permanent startup switch from a desktop icon

1	Right-click the Quattro Pro icon on your desktop, and click Properties.

2	Click the Shortcut tab.

3	In the Target box, append the startup switch to the path.

 Note

•	If a path contains spaces, enclose it with quotation marks. For example, to open a file called topsecurity.qpw that you have saved in the folder my personal files with the password SESAME, type qpw.exe /sSESAME "C:\my personal files\topsecurity.qpw".

 Tip

•	You can use more than one startup switch by adding a space between each parameter.

 Related topics


Welcome to Quattro Pro

Quattro Pro lets you create professional spreadsheet-based documents to help you manage data. It provides all the tools you need to produce tables, financial forms, lists, databases, charts, reports, or any other type of data-oriented document. With Quattro Pro, you can create a notebook that contains a single spreadsheet or an entire project, complete with spreadsheets, reports, and charts. A notebook is saved as a single file that you can publish to paper, electronic media, and the World Wide Web.

Quattro Pro does not limit you to a spreadsheet presentation. You can present your spreadsheet data in charts, or present only relevant information in dynamic CrossTab reports, which continually reflect the current state of the data they summarize. Once you enter data, you can edit the format and structure of your notebooks at any time.

In this section, you'll learn about

•	Corel Corporation

•	using Quattro Pro documentation

•	what's new in Quattro Pro

•	what's different in Quattro Pro


About Corel Corporation

Founded in 1985, Corel Corporation (www.corel.com) is a leading technology company specializing in content development (both text and graphics), business process management and XML-enabled enterprise solutions. The company's goal is to give consumers and enterprise customers the ability to create, exchange and instantly interact with content that is always relevant, accurate and available. With its headquarters in Ottawa, Canada, Corel's common stock trades on the Nasdaq Stock Market under the symbol CORL and on the Toronto Stock Exchange under the symbol COR.

 How to


To access the Corel Web site

You can access the Corel Web site directly from Quattro Pro. The Corel Web site gives you information about projects and templates, macros, and Web queries. You can also get technical support information, helpful tips and tricks, information about training and certification, and information about service bureaus.

Click...	To get information about...
File [image] New from project	Projects and templates
Help [image] Corel on the Web [image] Macros online	Macros
Help [image] Corel on the Web [image] Web queries online	Web queries
Help [image] Corel on the Web [image] Technical support	Technical support
Help [image] Corel on the Web [image] Tips and tricks	Tips and tricks
Help [image] Corel on the Web [image] Training and certification	Training and certification
Help [image] Corel on the Web [image] Approved service bureaus	Service bureaus
 Related topics


Using Quattro Pro documentation

Quattro Pro includes online and paper documentation to help you learn and use the application efficiently.

Online Help [image] Online Help lets you quickly retrieve all the information you need. Help appears in a separate window on your screen. For quick access, you can keep the Help window displayed on top of the application window.

Context-sensitive Help [image] Context-sensitive Help displays information relevant to the task you are currently performing. Context-sensitive Help provides help for such items as toolbar buttons, dialog boxes, and dialog box controls.

QuickTips [image] The QuickTips feature provides information about menu items and toolbar buttons. QuickTips are displayed in a balloon when you position the cursor over a menu item or toolbar button.

User Guide [image] If you use Quattro Pro as part of WordPerfect Office, you can refer to the Quattro Pro section of the WordPerfect Office User Guide for help.

 How to


To follow documentation conventions

Before you start using Quattro Pro, it's important to understand the conventions used in the documentation.

When you see this...	Do this...
Click File [image] New	Click the File menu with the mouse, and click New in the menu.
Click Insert [image] Graphics [image] Clipart	Click the Insert menu, click Graphics, and click Clipart in the submenu that appears.
Enable a check box	Click the check box to place a check mark or an "X" inside the box.
Disable a check box	Click the check box to remove the check mark or "X".
Select text	Click and drag to highlight text.
Click an object	Click anywhere on an object.
Right-click, and click Paste	Click the right mouse button, and click Paste in the submenu that appears.
Press Enter	Press the Enter key.
Press Ctrl + Shift	Press the Ctrl key and the Shift key at the same time.
 Related topics


To access online Help

1	Click Help [image] Help Topics.

2	Click one of the following tabs:

•	Contents [image] allows you to browse through topics by category

•	Index [image] allows you to see a list of index entries. Type the first few letters of the subject about which you want information.

•	Find [image] allows you to search for a specific word or phrase in the online Help. All topics containing the word you type are listed. Type more than one word to narrow the search.

•	Corel Knowledge Base [image] allows you to search for information on the Corel home page on the Internet.

 Tip

•	To keep the Help window on top of your application, open a Help topic, then click Options [image] Keep Help on top [image] On top.

 Related topics


To access additional Help resources

1	Click Help [image] Help Topics.

2	Click the Contents tab.

3	Scroll down and double-click the Reference information book.

4	Double-click one of the following books:

•	Quattro Pro Macros Help [image] contains information on Quattro Pro macro commands

•	Quattro Pro VBA Help [image] contains information on Visual Basic for Applications

•	Quattro Pro Functions Help [image] contains information on functions that can be used in Quattro Pro

•	Quattro Pro Templates Help [image] contains information on templates that can be used in Quattro Pro

•	Quattro Pro Glossary [image] contains a listing of terms used in Quattro Pro

•	Quattro Pro keyboard shortcuts [image] contains a listing of keyboard shortcuts used in Quattro Pro

 Note

•	For a complete listing of available macro commands, including PerfectScript macro commands, go to the WordPerfect Office Macro Command Center, which can be accessed through the Macros Help link in the Reference information section of the online Help.

 Related topics


To print online Help topics

You can print specific online Help topics or entire sections of online Help.

To...	Do this...
Print an entire section	On the Contents page, choose the section to print, and click Print.
Print a selected topic	Right-click the window, and click Print topic.
 Related topics


To access context-sensitive Help

The most common ways to access context-sensitive Help are as follows:

To get help on...	Do this...
A menu item	Right-click the menu item for which you want help, and click What's this?
A toolbar button	Press Shift + F1, and click the toolbar button for which you want help.
A dialog box	In the dialog box for which you want help, click the Help button.
A dialog box control	In a dialog box, click the What's this? button, and click the dialog box control for which you want help.
An object	Press Shift + F1, and click the object for which you want help.
 Related topics


To view program and system information

1	Click Help [image] About Quattro Pro.

2	Click one of the following buttons:

•	Edit serial/PIN [image] allows you to change your serial and PIN numbers

•	System info [image] allows you to view system information

•	Copyright [image] allows you to view copyright information

•	License [image] allows you to view license information

 Notes

•	System information consists of details about any of the following categories: system, display, printing, Corel .EXE and .DLL files, and system .DLL files. For example, you can see how much memory you have on the drive to which you want to save a file. You can save any system information in a text file called SYSINFO.TXT.

•	Program information consists of the application name, version number, serial number, and user name. This information doesn't change. You'll find it particularly useful if you ever need help from Corel Technical Support Services.

 Related topics


What's new in Quattro Pro

Quattro Pro features

Quattro Pro has new and enhanced features to help you create and present spreadsheet information. The following table shows the new features and what they do.

Feature	What it does
XML	Lets you import, export, and publish Quattro Pro spreadsheets to the XML format
Insert/Paste	Lets you automatically insert the correct number of cells for the data you copy or cut from one area to another
QuickSubtotals	Lets you subtotal an outline group
Data sorting and filtering	Lets you sort and filter data in a CrossTab report
 Note

•	For a list of changed features in Quattro Pro, see "What's different in Quattro Pro."

ZIM SMS Office

ZIM SMS Office is a wireless office tool that lets you use Short Message Service (SMS) text messaging to collect data from contacts in a Microsoft Outlook address book and display the data in a Quattro Pro spreadsheet. You can also use ZIM SMS Office to automatically send e-mail, agenda items, and reminders to your SMS-enabled cellular phone, and more.

When you install ZIM SMS Office, the ZIM toolbar appears in Quattro Pro, which lets you access ZIM SMS Office features. For more information about using ZIM SMS Office, see its accompanying documentation.

 How to


To install ZIM SMS Office

1	Insert the WordPerfect Office 11 CD into the CD drive.

2	Click ZIM SMS Office.

3	Follow the instructions on your screen.

 Notes

•	Before you can install ZIM SMS Office, you must have Microsoft Outlook 2000 or 2002 installed on your computer.

•	Access to SMS text messaging is available through Zim Technologies International. For more information, see www.zimsms.com.

 Related topics


What's different in Quattro Pro

With every new version of Quattro Pro, certain items are enhanced, others are renamed, and still others are found in a new location. The following table shows the items that have changed in Quattro Pro.

Feature	What's different
Microsoft Excel workbooks	Enhancements that let you open and save Microsoft Excel 2000 and Microsoft Excel XP workbooks
Notebook links	Enhancements to the user interface make reading long filenames easier
Find and replace	Lets you search the active spreadsheet or the entire notebook
QuickColumns	A redesigned user interface that makes it easier to import text into columns
Moving decimals	Lets you more easily move decimals in a value by using buttons on the Notebook/Cell property bar
 Note

For a list of new features in Quattro Pro, see "What's new in Quattro Pro."


Using Workgroups

Quattro Pro lets you work collaboratively on a network. For example, you can share a notebook with other users and compare two different notebooks. You can also review a notebook, accepting or rejecting the changes that have been made.

In this section, you'll learn about

•	sharing notebooks

•	comparing notebooks

•	reviewing notebooks


Sharing notebooks

Some projects require input from several sources. Sharing a notebook is a convenient way of giving multiple users access to a single notebook. All users can make changes to cell data, and Quattro Pro records what each user enters in each cell.

Quattro Pro provides setup options to facilitate notebook sharing. For example, you can determine how notebook changes are updated, specify which changes will display in history during updates, and choose the number of days Quattro Pro keeps changes in its history.

If two users have a notebook open at the same time, a conflict arises if one user saves changes and the second user attempts to edit the data that has just been saved. You can resolve such conflicts when they arise.

 How to


To share a notebook

1	Click Tools [image] Workgroup [image] Sharing.

2	Enable the Enable notebook sharing check box.

3	In the Updating changes area, enable one of the following options:

•	When saving the notebook [image] changes to the notebook update only when saved by a user.

•	Every ## minutes [image] changes to the notebook are automatically updated at the specified interval.

If you want to specify how long changes are kept in history, enable the Keep change history for ## days check box and specify an interval. If you disable this check box, any changes you make are permanent and are not recorded in the change history.

4	In the Resolving conflicts area, enable one of the following options:

•	Ask me which changes to keep [image] Quattro Pro prompts you when a conflict has arisen between data you have entered in a cell and data previously entered (and saved) by another user during your session.

•	Keep the changes being saved [image] Quattro Pro accepts the last changes saved when two users are using a notebook at the same time.

 Notes

•	You should save the notebook in a shared folder that has full read and write access to allow other users to access the file.

•	For information on stopping a review when starting Quattro Pro after a system failure, see "Using startup switches."

 Related topics


To resolve a conflict in a shared notebook

1	In the Conflict resolution dialog box, note the conflicting data.

This dialog box automatically displays when a conflict occurs.

2	Click one of the following:

•	Accept mine [image] accepts your change

•	Accept other [image] accepts the other user's changes

•	Keep original [image] reverts to the original cell data

•	Accept all mine [image] accepts all of your changes, and rejects the other user's

•	Accept all other's [image] accepts all changes previously made by another user

 Tip

•	If you want to specify that, in the event of a conflict, the changes made by the last user to save the notebook take precedence over any changes made and saved previously, click Tools [image] Workgroup [image] Sharing, and enable the Keep the changes being saved check box.

 Related topics


Comparing notebooks

Quattro Pro lets you compare data between two notebooks, cell by cell. Comparing notebooks lets you quickly discover how data in one notebook differs from data in another notebook. For example, if a notebook lists wine sales by month for one year, and a second notebook lists wine sales by month for a different year, you can compare these two notebooks to discover sales trends.

 How to


To compare two notebooks

1	Click File [image] Open.

2	Choose the drive and folder where the first notebook is stored.

3	Double-click the filename.

4	Click Tools [image] Workgroup [image] Compare notebook.

5	Choose the drive and folder where the second notebook is stored.

6	Double-click the filename.

 Notes

•	Cells that differ between the two notebooks have comments added to them that explain the change. Point to these cells to show the change comments.

•	You cannot perform a comparison if both notebooks are open.

 Related topics


Reviewing notebooks

You can access commands to use in the review process. For example, you can accept all changes made by a particular user and discard all changes made by another. Reviewing a shared notebook allows you to restore original data that was changed after the notebook was shared. You can then review a shared notebook to determine which of the changes to keep or discard.

As well, you can choose whether cell comments display automatically, or only when you position the pointer over a comment cell.

 How to


To access review commands

1	Click View [image] Toolbars.

2	Enable the Review check box in the Toolbar list.

The following buttons are available on this toolbar:

•	Review start/stop

•	Select color

•	User list

•	Previous

•	Next

•	Accept

•	Accept all

•	Reject

•	Reject all

•	Show/Hide comments

 Note

•	Take care before choosing Accept, Reject, Accept all, or Reject all. When you click any of these buttons, the change history is discarded.

 Related topics


To review a shared notebook

1	Click File [image] Open.

2	Choose the drive and folder where the notebook is stored.

3	Double-click the filename.

4	Click Tools [image] Workgroup [image] Review notebook [image] Review start/stop.

5	Review the notebook.

 Notes

•	Take care before choosing Accept, Reject, Accept all, or Reject all. When you click any of these buttons, the change history is discarded.

•	For information on canceling a review when starting Quattro Pro after a system failure, see "Using startup switches."

 Related topics


To display or hide cell comments when reviewing a notebook

•	Click Tools [image] Workgroup [image] Review notebook [image] Show/Hide comments.

 Note

•	During a review, edited cells are tagged by a red triangle in the upper-right corner. When you point to a tagged cell, a comment displays listing the history of changes, and you can choose which revision to accept.

 Related topics


Moving between Microsoft Excel and Quattro Pro

You can open Microsoft Excel workbooks in Quattro Pro without truncating data, and Quattro Pro supports many of the features of Microsoft Excel.

In this section, you'll learn about

•	opening and saving Microsoft Excel workbooks in Quattro Pro

•	working with Microsoft Excel 97 menus and tabs in Quattro Pro

For more information about moving between Microsoft Excel and Quattro Pro, see "Reference: Moving between Microsoft Excel and Quattro Pro."


Opening and saving Microsoft Excel workbooks in Quattro Pro

You can open Microsoft Excel version 3, 5, 7, 97, 2000, and XP workbooks in Quattro Pro. If you modify the workbook, you can save it as a Quattro Pro notebook so that you don't lose Quattro Pro formulas or features not supported in Microsoft Excel.

Microsoft Excel workbooks that contain custom spreadsheet names may not open in Quattro Pro if characters used in the names are not recognized by Quattro Pro. If this happens, Quattro Pro displays a dialog box warning you about the invalid spreadsheet name. You can change the spreadsheet name to make it compatible with Quattro Pro.

You can also save a Quattro Pro notebook as a Microsoft Excel file; however, some file format features unique to Quattro Pro may be lost.

For a list of conversion considerations, see "Reference: Moving between Microsoft Excel and Quattro Pro."

 How to


To open a Microsoft Excel workbook in Quattro Pro

1	Click File [image] Open.

2	Choose the drive and folder where the workbook is stored.

3	Double-click the workbook's filename.

 Related topics


To save a Microsoft Excel workbook as a Quattro Pro notebook

1	Click File [image] Save as.

2	Choose the drive and folder where you want to save the file.

3	Type a filename in the Filename box.

By default, the file is given a .qpw filename extension.

 Tip

•	You can save a Microsoft Excel workbook, opened in Quattro Pro, as a .xls file by clicking File [image] Save.

 Related topics


To fix invalid spreadsheet names

1	Open a Microsoft Excel file in Quattro Pro.

In the Quattro Pro dialog box, the invalid spreadsheet name displays in the Invalid name box.

2	Enable one of the following options in the Rename options area:

•	Fix invalid spreadsheet name [image] changes the spreadsheet name to include only valid Quattro Pro characters. The new name displays in the New name box.

•	Do not fix invalid spreadsheet name [image] keeps the original spreadsheet name

If you want to make additional changes to the name, type them in the New name box, using valid Quattro Pro characters.

 Notes

•	If you enable the Do not fix invalid spreadsheet name option and try to use the Microsoft Excel spreadsheet name, you cannot initiate formulas and macros.

•	If you enable the Fix invalid spreadsheet name option but have used the original spreadsheet name in cell references, you must search for these references and replace them with the new name.

 Related topics


To save a Quattro Pro notebook as a Microsoft Excel file

1	Click File [image] Save as.

2	Choose the drive and folder where you want to save the file.

3	Type a filename in the Filename box.

4	Choose a Microsoft Excel file type from the File type list box.

 Related topics


Working with Microsoft Excel 97 menus and tabs in Quattro Pro

You can use Microsoft Excel 97 menus and tabs in Quattro Pro if you are switching to Quattro Pro from Microsoft Excel 97. This lets you work in a familiar environment until you are accustomed to the Quattro Pro menu structure.

You can change spreadsheet tabs in a Quattro Pro notebook to adopt the Microsoft Excel 97 spreadsheet naming convention.

 How to


To use Microsoft Excel 97 menus and tabs in Quattro Pro

1	Click Tools [image] Settings.

2	Click WorkSpaces.

3	Enable the Microsoft Excel check box in the WorkSpaces list.

 Related topics


To switch to the Microsoft Excel naming convention for spreadsheet tabs

1	Click Tools [image] Settings.

2	In the list of categories, double-click Workspace, Application, and click Compatibility.

3	In the Sheet tab display area, enable the Display as numbers check box.

 Related topics


Reference: Moving between Microsoft Excel and Quattro Pro

Quattro Pro translates most Microsoft Excel formats, navigational tools, print options, formulas, and spreadsheet functions. Occasionally, some information in a workbook cannot be imported or exported or may not display in the same way after the conversion process.

 How to


Microsoft Excel features and Quattro Pro equivalents

Many features in Microsoft Excel are similar to those in Quattro Pro, despite different naming conventions. The following table can assist you in moving from Microsoft Excel to Quattro Pro.

Microsoft Excel features...	Quattro Pro reference...
Templates	Working with project templates
Calculation methods	Working with formulas
AutoFit	To increase the column width while typing values
AutoSum	Performing running calculations
AutoFill	Filling cells and spreadsheet tabs automatically
AutoFormat	Using formatting tools to format a spreadsheet
Mail enabled	To send a notebook by email
Wizards	Working with Quattro Pro Experts
Center across block	To center text across multiple cells
Nameable sheet tabs	Naming spreadsheets
Function Wizard	Composing formulas
Goal Seeker	Using goal seeking
Nonlinear Solver	Finding optimum solutions for linear and nonlinear problems
Multi-Variable Backsolver	Finding optimum solutions for linear and nonlinear problems
Array formulas	Working with arrays
Floating text boxes	Creating text box graphics
Notebook drawing layer	Drawing shapes and lines
Trace mode	To set a trace cell for a Quattro Pro macro
Break points	Setting macro breakpoints
Visual Dialog Builder	Working with custom dialog boxes and controls
Built-in full debugger	Debugging Quattro Pro macros
Toolbar Designer	To create a toolbar
Search/replace	To find and replace data
Queried import	Querying external databases
Sort databases	Sorting data
Cell-Based auditing	Tracing errors in formulas
Password-protect file	Using password protection
Cell notes	To add a cell comment
External range links	Creating notebook links
Automatic file backup	To back up your notebooks automatically
 Related topics


Microsoft Excel spreadsheet data imported by Quattro Pro

Quattro Pro reads Microsoft Excel version 3, 5, 7, and 97 workbook files and imports the following Microsoft Excel data:

•	values and labels

•	most cell formatting

•	embedded charts

•	links to different workbooks or files

•	most functions

•	arithmetic formulas

•	chart spreadsheets (converted to floating graphs)

•	OLE objects contained in Microsoft Excel spreadsheets

Hyperlinks

Hyperlinks saved in Microsoft Excel files do not work in Quattro Pro.

Spreadsheet and file types

Quattro Pro imports and exports only .xls workbook files. In Microsoft Excel version 5 and later, this includes multiple-spreadsheet support. Quattro Pro does not recognize Microsoft Excel chart pages or macro pages, chart files (.xlc), templates (.xlt), add-ins (.xla, .xll), or toolbars (.xlb).

Password protection

Microsoft Excel password protection is not supported. Quattro Pro displays a warning if a user attempts to open a protected Microsoft Excel file.

Visual Basic for Applications

Quattro Pro cannot read, write, or interpret Visual Basic for Applications (VBA) scripts written from within Microsoft Excel. Quattro Pro cannot translate its own VBA scripts into Microsoft Excel–compatible scripts.

Microsoft Excel macros

Quattro Pro does not support Microsoft Excel macros.

Microsoft Excel functions

Quattro Pro converts any Microsoft Excel function that it does not support to a value, and shades it red. Before converting a Microsoft Excel file to Quattro Pro, make sure no cells in the Microsoft Excel file are shaded red or contain red text.

 Note

•	If Quattro Pro does not understand any of the Microsoft Excel commands, the commands and any associated comments appear as comments in the converted file.

 Related topics


Microsoft Excel cell attributes and styles imported by Quattro Pro

When you open a Microsoft Excel file in Quattro Pro, most cell properties, styles, and named blocks are imported and translated automatically.

Cell properties and styles

Styles are imported from and exported to .xls files. When importing files to Quattro Pro, the style names and formatting are translated into Quattro Pro styles. The formatting includes the following cell attributes:

•	font (style, size, bold, italic, underline, color)

•	line drawing (single, double, thick, color)

•	cell width

•	numeric format (transfers to the most closely resembled format)

•	row heights (can be imported into Quattro Pro, but cannot be exported into Microsoft Excel)

Shrink to fit

The Microsoft Excel Shrink to fit feature is not supported by Quattro Pro.

Currency formats

Not all Microsoft Excel currency formats are supported by Quattro Pro; conversely, not all Quattro Pro currency formats are supported by Microsoft Excel.

Named blocks

Quattro Pro imports Microsoft Excel named ranges, including 2-D and 3-D ranges. Quattro Pro also exports its named 2-D and 3-D ranges into Microsoft Excel spreadsheets.

 Related topics


Microsoft Excel print options, windows, and charts imported by Quattro Pro

When you import Microsoft Excel files, most print options, window configurations, and charts translate seamlessly into Quattro Pro. When exporting a Quattro Pro notebook to an .xls file, charts are converted to the nearest Microsoft Excel equivalent.

Print options

The following print options are imported into Quattro Pro from Microsoft Excel files:

•	orientation

•	margins (top, left, right, bottom)

•	header size (inches)

•	footer size (inches)

•	header text

•	footer text

•	print grid lines

Chart types

Microsoft Excel charts that match Quattro Pro chart types convert; otherwise, Quattro Pro converts the Microsoft Excel chart to the Quattro Pro chart that it most closely resembles, adding properties where it can to make the chart look as much as possible like the Microsoft Excel chart. Bitmap images and textures added to Microsoft Excel charts do not convert. They become solid colors in Quattro Pro.

Microsoft Excel chart types not supported by Quattro Pro

•	stacked line chart and 100% stacked line chart

•	bar of pie chart and pie of pie chart

•	100% stacked area chart and 3-D 100% stacked area chart

•	no direct support for color radar chart

•	no direct support for contour chart

•	no direct support for scatter chart

•	no direct support for multiple-series donut chart

Microsoft Excel chart attributes not supported by Quattro Pro

•	title [image] vertical alignment and orientation

•	minor gridlines

•	limited support for bar overlapping

•	limited pattern support for axis or gridlines

•	limited support for gradient fill styles

•	limited support for legend positioning

•	fill settings for XY titles

Microsoft Excel 97 chart items possibly missing when converting to Quattro Pro

When opening Microsoft Excel 97 workbooks in Quattro Pro, embedded charts may display problems. The data is converted, but the following items may be missing from the chart:

•	any lines, labels, or attributes related to the secondary y-axis

•	both the primary and secondary y-axis scales

 Related topics


Spreadsheet objects transferred between Microsoft Excel and Quattro Pro

With some exceptions, OLE objects and other objects such as graphs can be transferred between Microsoft Excel and Quattro Pro.

OLE 2.0 links and objects

Quattro Pro loads OLE 2.0 links embedded in an .xls file. However, Quattro Pro does not export OLE 2.0 links when saving in a Microsoft Excel format.

Quattro Pro imports OLE 2.0 objects embedded in Microsoft Excel spreadsheets. However, Quattro Pro does not export OLE 2.0 objects when saving in a Microsoft Excel format.

Inserted graphs

Quattro Pro maps an inserted Microsoft Excel graph to the nearest Quattro Pro style. Quattro Pro also exports its inserted graphs, mapping them to the nearest match in Microsoft Excel.

Draw layer objects

Draw layer objects are imported into Quattro Pro's draw layer. Draw layer objects include arrows, text boxes, buttons, line segments, rectangles, filled rectangles, rounded rectangles, and ellipses. Polygons and freehand drawings are not imported.

In situations where there is no comparable spreadsheet AutoShape, shape, or drawing tool within Microsoft Excel or Quattro Pro, the shape will be replaced with the best possible fit or deleted. Text callout shapes will lose the text within them on import.

Quattro Pro's draw layer objects are not exported to .xls files.

Maps

Importing and exporting maps between Quattro Pro and Microsoft Excel is not supported. Map source data is retained, but the map chart is deleted.

 Related topics


Microsoft Excel formulas and functions imported by Quattro Pro

Quattro Pro maps as many Microsoft Excel formulas to spreadsheet functions as possible when it opens a Microsoft Excel file. Those without a Quattro Pro equivalent are translated as values, and the background color of the cell changes to red. When you save a file in a Microsoft Excel format, Quattro Pro translates spreadsheet functions to the nearest equivalent Microsoft Excel function. For a complete list of all the Microsoft Excel functions Quattro Pro supports, see "Microsoft Excel functions supported by Quattro Pro." For a list of Microsoft Excel functions that Quattro Pro does not support, see "Microsoft Excel functions not supported by Quattro Pro."

Array formulas

Array formulas are not imported.

Hidden formulas

When importing Microsoft Excel files, Quattro Pro converts Microsoft Excel hidden formulas to a protected cell with the format hidden. Quattro Pro does not, however, export hidden formulas.

User-defined functions

When Quattro Pro opens Microsoft Excel spreadsheets containing user-defined functions, they are converted to values, and the cells are shaded red. Quattro Pro does not export user-defined functions.

 Note

•	There may be slight differences between function outcomes in Microsoft Excel and Quattro Pro due to the rounding of decimal places. The cells in each application should be formatted identically to ensure matching results.

 Related topics


Microsoft Excel analysis tools not imported by Quattro Pro

Scenario Manager data

Microsoft Excel Scenario Manager data is ignored in Quattro Pro.

Solver information

Microsoft Excel Solver information is not imported to Quattro Pro Optimizer.

 Related topics


Microsoft Excel functions supported by Quattro Pro

Quattro Pro imports the following Microsoft Excel spreadsheet functions:

ABS

ACCRINT

ACCRINTM

ACOS

ACOSH

ADDRESS

AND

ASIN

ASINH

ATAN

ATAN2

ATANH

AVERAGE

BESSELI

BESSELJ

BESSELK

BESSELY

BETADIST

BETAINV

CEILING

CELL

CHAR

CHIDIST

CHIINV

CHITEST

CHOOSE

CLEAN

CODE

COLUMN

COLUMNS

COMPLEX

CONCATENATE

CONFIDENCE

CONVERT

CORREL

COS

COSH

COUNT

COUNTA

COUNTIF

COUNTBLANK

COUPDAYBS

COUPDAYS

COUPDAYSNC

COUPNCD

COUPNUM

COUPPCD

COVAR

CRITBINOM

CUMIPMT

CUMPRINC

DATE

DATEVALUE

DAVERAGE

DAY

DAYS360

DB

DCOUNTA

DCOUNT

DDB

DEGREES

DELTA

DEVSQ

DISC

DMAX

DMIN

DOLLAR

DOLLARDE

DOLLARFR

DSTDEV

DSTDEVP

DSUM

DURATION

DVAR

DVARP

EFFECT

EOMONTH

ERF

ERFC

EVEN

EXACT

EXP

EXPONDIST

FACT

FACTDOUBLE

FALSE

FDIST

FIND

FINV

FISHER

FISHERINV

FIXED

FLOOR

FREQUENCY

FTEST

FV

GAMMADIST

GAMMAINV

GAMMALN

GCD

GEOMEAN

GESTEP

GROWTH

HARMEAN

HOUR

HYPGEOMDIST

IF

IMABS

IMAGINARY

IMARGUMENT

IMCONJUGATE

IMCOS

IMDIV

IMEXP

IMLN

IMLOG10

IMLOG2

IMPOWER

IMPRODUCT

IMREAL

IMSIN

IMSQRT

IMSUB

IMSUM

INDEX

INDIRECT

INT

INTERCEPT

INTRATE

IPMT

IRR

ISERR

ISERROR

ISEVEN

ISLOGICAL

ISNA

ISNONTEXT

ISNUMBER

ISODD

ISTEXT

KURT

LARGE

LCM

LEFT

LEN

LINEST

LN

LOG

LOG10

LOGEST

LOGINV

LOGNORMDIST

LOWER

MATCH

MAX

MDETERM

MDURATION

MEDIAN

MID

MIN

MINUTE

MINVERSE

MIRR

MMULT

MOD

MODE

MONTH

MROUND

MULTINOMIAL

N

NA

NEGBINOMDIST

NETWORKDAYS

NOMINAL

NORMDIST

NORMINV

NORMSDIST

NORMSINV

NOT

NOW

NPER

NPV

ODD

ODDFPRICE

ODDFYIELD

ODDLPRICE

ODDLYIELD

OFFSET

OR

PEARSON

PERCENTILE

PERCENTRANK

PERMUT

PI

PMT

POISSON

POWER

PPMT

PRICE

PRICEDISC

PRICEMAT

PROB

PRODUCT

PROPER

PV

QUARTILE

QUOTIENT

RADIANS

RAND

RANDBETWEEN

RANK

RATE

RECEIVED

REPLACE

REPT

RIGHT

ROMAN

ROUND

ROUNDDOWN

ROUNDUP

ROW

ROWS

RSQ

SECOND

SIGN

SIN

SINH

SKEW

SLN

SLOPE

SMALL

SQRT

SQRTPI

STANDARDIZE

STDEV

STDEVP

STEYX

SUBSTITUTE

SUBTOTAL

SUM

SUMIF

SUMSQ

SUMX2MY2

SUMX2PY2

SUMXMY2

SYD

T

TAN

TANH

TBILLEQ

TBILLPRICE

TBILLYIELD

TDIST

TIME

TIMEVALUE

TINV

TODAY

TRANSPOSE

TREND

TRIM

TRIMMEAN

TRUE

TRUNC

TTEST

TYPE

UPPER

VALUE

VAR

VARP

VDB

WEIBULL

WEEKDAY

WORKDAY

XIRR

XNPV

YEAR

YEARFRAC

YIELD

YIELDDISC

YIELDMAT

ZTEST

 Related topics


Microsoft Excel functions not supported by Quattro Pro

The following Excel functions are not supported by Quattro Pro. Only the values are imported, and the cells are shaded red to indicate that the formula was not imported.

AMORDEGRC

AMORLINC

AREAS

BIN2DEC

BIN2HEX

BIN2OCT

COMBIN

DCOUNT

DEC2BIN

DEC2HEX

DEC2OCT

DGET

DPRODUCT

EDATE

ERROR.TYPE

FORECAST

FVSCHEDULE

HEX2BIN

HEX2DEC

HEX2OCT

HLOOKUP

INFO

ISBLANK

ISREF

LOOKUP

OCT2BIN

OCT2DEC

OCT2HEX

SEARCH

SUMPRODUCT

TEXT

VLOOKUP

 Related topics


Reference: Using Accessibility features


Using Accessibility features

Corel is committed to supporting the special-needs community. We are a proud supporter of accessible software that promotes quality of life, employability, and independence for disabled persons. We are striving to enhance our products so that they allow persons with disabilities to work more easily and efficiently with our software.

We welcome your feedback and suggestions. For more information, you can visit our Accessibility web page. If you have comments or questions about Corel products and Accessibility, please send email to: accessibilityproductmgr@corel.com

 How to


Accessing Quattro Pro documentation in ASCII text format

The documentation for Quattro Pro and WordPerfect Office is available in ASCII text format.

To access Quattro Pro documentation in ASCII text format

1	Insert the WordPerfect Office 11 CD into the CD drive.

2	On the Windows taskbar, click Start [image] Settings [image] Control panel.

3	Double-click the Add/Remove programs icon.

4	Choose WordPerfect Office 11 from the Currently installed programs list.

5	Click Change/Remove.

6	In the installation wizard, enable the Modify option.

7	Click Next.

8	Double-click WordPerfect Office 11 [image] Utilties [image] Accessible Help files.

9	Select the files and follow the instructions in the installation wizard.

The files are installed in the following location: Program files\Corel\WordPerfect Office 11\Shared\Help.

 Related topics


Customizing keyboards, toolbars, and menus

Customizing keyboards

To assign a shortcut key to a command

To print a list of shortcut keys

To export a list of shortcut keys to a text file

To restore all keyboard assignments to their original settings

Quattro Pro keyboard shortcuts

Shortcuts for common tasks

Edit Mode keys

Object keys

Formula Composer keys

Point Mode keys

Print Preview keys

Navigation keys

Function keys

CrossTab report keys

Excel Compatibility keys

Working with toolbars

To create a toolbar

To edit a toolbar

To display a toolbar

To move a toolbar

To rename a toolbar

To delete a toolbar

To reset a toolbar

To display a graphic or text on a toolbar button

To display text under all toolbar buttons

To add a toolbar button that launches an application or document

To add a toolbar button that plays a macro

Customizing menus

To customize a menu

To change the access key on a menu item

 Related topics


Modifying display and navigational features

Displaying, arranging, resizing, and hiding windows

To select a notebook window

To arrange notebook windows

To hide a notebook window

To select a notebook view

To display formulas instead of formula results

To display spreadsheet comments

To display a new view of a notebook window

To split a window into two panes

To synchronize window panes

To resize window panes

Zooming data and hiding and displaying screen components

To zoom a notebook

To zoom data to fit on the screen

To hide notebook features

To hide parts of the screen

To hide borders on a spreadsheet

To hide grid lines on a spreadsheet

Using Microsoft IntelliMouse

Zooming and scrolling with Microsoft IntelliMouse

To zoom in or out with Microsoft IntelliMouse

To scroll using Microsoft IntelliMouse

To change Microsoft IntelliMouse settings

To AutoScroll with Microsoft IntelliMouse

 Related topics


Entering and correcting data

Filling cells and spreadsheet tabs automatically

To automatically insert repeated data

To fill empty cells automatically

To fill cells automatically using seed values

To fill spreadsheet tabs automatically

Creating a series to fill cells

To create a QuickFill formula series

To create a QuickFill list series

To modify a QuickFill series

To rename a QuickFill series

To delete a QuickFill series

To add elements from a cell to a Quickfill series

To create a custom series to fill cells

Checking spelling

To check spelling

To add words to the list of commonly misspelled words

To delete words from the list of commonly misspelled words

To disable automatic replacement of commonly misspelled words

 Related topics


Changing text size and appearance

Changing text font and appearance

To change text font and style

To change text appearance

To change the font size in a Help topic

To change Help text hyperlink colors

Changing colors in the notebook palette

To define a new color for the notebook palette

To reset the default palette

 Related topics


To change the font size in a Help topic

1	In the Help window, click Options [image] Font.

2	Click one of the following font sizes:

•	Small [image] decreases the font size

•	Normal [image] sets the default font size

•	Large [image] increases the font size

 Related topics


To change Help text hyperlink colors

You can customize the color of text hyperlinks in the Windows Help Viewer. By default, hyperlinks are dark green. When setting these colors, the values (r,g,b) represent whole numbers that, in turn, represent the red, green, and blue components of the hyperlink color. The range for each value is 0 to 255. You can use (r,g,b) to set almost any hyperlink color for Help files. Some of the basic colors and their corresponding (r,g,b) values are:

•	Black [image] (0,0,0)

•	Green [image] (0,255,0)

•	White [image] (255,255,255)

•	Yellow [image] (255,255,0)

•	Blue [image] (0,0,255)

•	Purple [image] (255,0,255)

•	Red [image] (255,0,0)

•	Dark Grey [image] (127,127,127)

In Windows 95 and Windows 98

1	From the Windows taskbar click Start [image] Run.

2	Type win.ini and click OK.

3	Find the section named [WINDOWS HELP]. If this section doesn't exist, create it at the bottom of the file.

4	On the line immediately following [WINDOWS HELP], type JumpColor=(r,g,b).

5	Save and close the win.ini file.

6	Re-launch your application.

In Windows NT and Windows 2000

1	From the Windows taskbar click Start [image] Run.

2	Type regedit and click OK.

3	In the Registry Editor, navigate to HKEY_CURRENT_USER\Software\Microsoft\Windows Help.

4	In the right-pane window, right-click New [image] String Value.

5	Edit the newly created String Value so that its name is JumpColor and its data is (r,g,b).

 Related topics


For more information, click one of the following:

•	Protecting data

•	Restricting data


 For more information, click one of the following:

•	Creating custom formats

•	To format dates and times


For more information, click one of the following:

•	Recalculating formulas

•	To set the recalculation order

•	To convert a formula to a value


Chart and Map Legend, Button Properties


For more information, click one of the following:

•	Creating text box graphics

•	To add a cell comment

•	Changing text font and appearance


For more information, click one of the following:

•	Presenting spreadsheet data in a chart

•	Working with chart series

•	Working with chart text

•	Formatting the x and y axes

•	Working with 3-D charts

•	Editing charts

•	Analyzing chart data


For more information, click one of the following:

•	To save a table or chart as an HTML document

•	Creating and positioning maps

•	Editing maps

•	To define a new style


For more information, click one of the following

•	Changing the fill and border of 3D chart walls

•	Applying fills to legend boxes

•	Changing the fill and border of chart frames

•	Changing the background fill

•	Changing series fill and border style

•	Changing the fill and border style of data points

•	Applying fills to text

•	Adding fills to text boxes


For more information, click one of the following:

•	Recording and editing Quattro Pro macros

•	Recording and editing PerfectScript macros


For more information, click one of the following:

•	To copy a formula

•	Filling cells and spreadsheet tabs automatically

•	Undoing actions


For more information, click one of the following:

•	Label text property

•	Help line property

•	Title property

•	Group text property

•	Selection text property

•	Page name text property


For more information, click one of the following:

•	Zooming data and hiding and displaying screen components

•	To set the recalculation order

•	To create a macro library

•	To assign a password to a notebook

•	To create a system notebook

•	Changing colors in the notebook palette


For more information, click one of the following:

•	Working with styles

•	Aligning data

•	Creating custom formats

•	To format dates and times

•	Protecting data

•	To define a new style

•	Changing text font and appearance

•	Changing colors in the notebook palette


For more information, click one of the following:

•	Specifying Quattro Pro settings

•	Saving and closing notebooks

•	To increase the column width while typing values

•	To copy a formula

•	To automatically insert repeated data

•	Undoing actions

•	To change compatibility options


For more information, click one of the following:

•	Customizing menus

•	Customizing keyboards

•	Working with toolbars

•	Working with the application bar

•	To make the user interface transparent


For more information, click one of the following:

•	Customizing menus

•	To assign a shortcut key to a command

•	Working with toolbars

•	To edit a toolbar

•	To attach a macro to a toolbar button


For more information, click one of the following:

•	Editing maps


For more information, click one of the following:

•	To split a window into two panes

•	To change compatibility options


For more information, click one of the following:

•	To set a standard breakpoint in a Quattro Pro macro

•	To set a conditional breakpoint in a Quattro Pro macro


For more information, click one of the following:

•	To edit macro cells from the Macro debugger

•	Debugging Quattro Pro macros


For more information, click one of the following:

•	Creating one-variable What-If tables

•	Creating two-variable What-If tables


For more information, click one of the following:

•	Joining cells

•	Changing font appearance

•	Working with fills, patterns, and borders

•	Zooming data and hiding and displaying screen components


For more information, click one of the following:

•	Entering values

•	Entering labels and special characters

•	Undoing actions

•	Editing cell content

•	Aligning data


For more information, click one of the following:

•	Composing formulas

•	Editing cell content

•	Creating scenarios

•	Consolidating data


For more information, click one of the following:

•	Checking spelling

•	Using writing tools


For more information, click one of the following:

•	Checking spelling

•	Previewing a print job

•	Saving and closing notebooks


For more information, click one of the following:

•	Debugging Quattro Pro macros

•	Debugging PerfectScript macros


Example 1
Showcase Quattro Pro

Click a picture button on the bottom once to see an enlarged view of the picture and twice to see the related overview text. For specific information about elements of the picture, click a red arrow.


Example 2
Showcase Quattro Pro

Click a picture button on the bottom once to see an enlarged view of the picture and twice to see the related overview text. For specific information about elements of the picture, click a red arrow.


Example 3
Showcase Quattro Pro

Click a picture button on the bottom once to see an enlarged view of the picture and twice to see the related overview text. For specific information about elements of the picture, click a red arrow.


Example 4
Showcase Quattro Pro

Click a picture button on the bottom once to see an enlarged view of the picture and twice to see the related overview text. For specific information about elements of the picture, click a red arrow.


Example 5
Showcase Quattro Pro

Click a picture button on the bottom once to see an enlarged view of the picture and twice to see the related overview text. For specific information about elements of the picture, click a red arrow.


Example 6
Showcase Quattro Pro

Click a picture button on the bottom once to see an enlarged view of the picture and twice to see the related overview text. For specific information about elements of the picture, click a red arrow.


Example 1
Showcase the Quattro Pro desktop

Click on the graphic below for more information about using the Quattro Pro desktop.


Example 1
Showcase CrossTab reports

Click a picture button on the bottom once to see an enlarged view of the picture and twice to see the related overview text. For specific information about elements of the picture, click a red arrow.


Example 2
Showcase CrossTab reports

Click a picture button on the bottom once to see an enlarged view of the picture and twice to see the related overview text. For specific information about elements of the picture, click a red arrow.


Example 3
Showcase CrossTab reports

Click a picture button on the bottom once to see an enlarged view of the picture and twice to see the related overview text. For specific information about elements of the picture, click a red arrow.


Reference: Quattro Pro Templates Help


Quattro Pro Templates Help

Some of the templates in Quattro Pro were developed by KMT Software, Inc. View the ABOUT.QPW template to learn about other Quattro Pro and WordPerfect Office products. If you are interested in having KMT Software, Inc. develop templates for your organization, call 978-287-4125 or send e-mail to sales@kmt.com. For more information about KMT Software, Inc., visit the KMT Software, Inc. web site at www.kmt.com.

Quattro Pro templates can be accessed by clicking File [image] New from project and selecting the desired template from the list. Please note that WordPerfect Office contains a minimal set of project templates; for more templates, visit the Corel OfficeCommunity.

 How to


Cash Budget

Use this template to plan the cash flow for your business. The beginning cash balance is entered in the first month and calculated for all subsequent months. Note that the Total column summarizes the entire year, from the first month's beginning balance to the last month's ending balance. Change the starting month by typing the first three letters of the month at the top of the first column. The other month headings will be calculated by formulas.

 Related topics


Future Value of a Lump Sum

This template allows you to calculate the future value of a single (lump sum) future amount. It also allows you to calculate an effective interest rate and number of investment periods. You can select the frequency of compounding (how often the interest is added to your balance). Compounding frequencies include annual, semi-annual, quarterly, bi-monthly, monthly, and continuous.

 Related topics


Grading Sheet

Use this template to keep track of student grades. The grade tables at the top of the template can be customized to fit your needs or the rules of your school. You can also assign weights (proportions) to be factored into a student's final average for the course.

 Related topics


Home Equity Comparison

Use this template to prepare a comparison of home equity loans. Before you submit an application, to do some shopping around to compare the fees, annual percentage rates, closing costs, and repayment arrangements. You may want to use this template with the "Home Equity Qualification" template.

 Related topics


Home Rent or Buy Analysis

Use this template to explore the economic factors of renting an apartment versus buying your own home.

 Related topics


Personal Budget

This template is used for your personal financial planning. It includes many categories of income and expenses, and can be customized to suit your needs. Monthly figures and percentages are calculated automatically.

 Related topics


Retirement Budget

Use this template to estimate your retirement needs for income and the potential sources of that income. The field called "Annual income to be made up" can be used in the Retirement Income Plan template. Enter this figure as "Annual retirement income required" in the Retirement Income Plan template.

 Related topics


Retirement Income Plan

Use this template to arrive at a rough approximation of your retirement investment plan. Update your assumptions about inflation and earnings on a regular basis as your needs change or as the economy changes. The term "expectancy" is defined as the number of years you expect to live after retirement. The "Deposits per year" field allows you to choose income streams by week, month, and so on. Be sure to match this number to the interval of your deposits. For example, monthly income equals 12 deposits per year.

 Related topics


School Budget

Use this budget template to compare the amounts you expect to spend for the education of a child and to record what was actually spent, making next year's budget easier to create. Simply enter data in the Budget and Actual columns of the template. The worksheet will automatically calculate the budget.

 Related topics


Statement of Net Worth

This template produces a "snapshot" of your financial condition. The version shown here may be more detailed than you need, but it is easy to adapt.

 Related topics


Working with 3-D charts

You can edit the properties of 3-D charts. For example, you can change the viewing angle and the fill of the walls of a 3-D chart.

In this section, you'll learn about

•	changing the viewing angle of 3-D charts

•	managing viewing angles

•	changing the fill and border of 3-D chart walls


Changing the viewing angle of 3-D charts

You can change the appearance of a 3-D chart by modifying its viewing angle. You can apply a preset viewing angle from the list provided in Quattro Pro, or you can create a custom look by rotating, panning, and moving the chart. You can also change the length and thickness of the chart walls.

 How to


To apply a preset viewing angle to a 3-D chart

1	Click a 3-D chart.

2	Click Chart [image] 3-D options.

3	Choose a viewing angle from the list.

 Related topics


To rotate a 3-D chart

1	Click a 3-D chart.

2	Click Chart [image] 3-D options.

3	Click Advanced options >>.

4	Click the Rotate tab.

5	Click any of the following:

•	X arrows [image] let you rotate the chart around the x-axis

•	Y arrows [image] let you rotate the chart around the y-axis

•	Z arrows [image] let you rotate the chart around the z-axis

 Tip

•	You can also rotate a 3-D chart by clicking the purple arrows to the left of the X, Y, and Z arrows, or by dragging the chart in the preview window.

 Related topics


To pan a 3-D chart

1	Click a 3-D chart.

2	Click Chart [image] 3-D options.

3	Click Advanced options >>.

4	Click the Pan tab.

5	Click any of the following:

•	X arrows [image] let you move the chart to the left and right

•	Y arrows [image] let you move the chart up and down

•	Zoom arrows [image] let you zoom in on and out of the chart

 Tip

•	You can also pan a 3-D chart by clicking the purple arrows to the left of the X, Y, and Zoom arrows, or by dragging the chart in the preview window.

 Related topics


To move a 3-D chart

1	Click a 3-D chart.

2	Click Chart [image] 3-D options.

3	Click Advanced options >>.

4	Click the Move tab.

5	Click any of the following:

•	X arrows [image] let you move a chart along the x-axis

•	Y arrows [image] let you move a chart along the y-axis

•	Z arrows [image] let you move a chart along the z-axis

 Tip

•	You can also move the chart by clicking the purple arrows to the left of the X, Y, and Z arrows or by dragging the chart in the chart preview window.

 Related topics


To change the length of a 3-D chart wall

1	Click a 3-D chart.

2	Click Chart [image] 3-D options.

3	Click Advanced options >>.

4	Click the Walls tab.

5	In the Length area, click any of the following:

•	X arrows [image] let you change the length of a wall along the x-axis

•	Y arrows [image] let you change the length of a wall along the y-axis

•	Z arrows [image] let you change the length of a wall along the z-axis

If you want to adjust the length of all the chart walls proportionally, enable the Link check box in the Length area.

 Tip

•	You can also change the length of a 3-D chart wall by clicking the purple arrows to the left of the X, Y, and Z arrow buttons, or by dragging the chart walls in the preview window.

 Related topics


To change the thickness of a 3-D chart wall

1	Click a 3-D chart.

2	Click Chart [image] 3-D options.

3	Click Advanced options.

4	Click the Walls tab.

5	In the Thickness area, click any of the following:

•	X arrows [image] let you change the thickness of a wall along the x-axis

•	Y arrows [image] let you change the thickness of a wall along the y-axis

•	Z arrows [image] let you change the thickness of a wall along the z-axis

If you want to adjust the thickness of all the chart walls proportionally, enable the Link check box in the Thickness area.

 Tip

•	You can also change the thickness of a 3-D chart wall by clicking the purple arrows to the left of the X, Y, and Z arrow buttons.

 Related topics


Managing viewing angles

After you create a custom viewing angle, you can save it so that you can use it for new charts. You can also rename and delete viewing angles.

 How to


To save a viewing angle

1	Click a 3-D chart.

2	Click Chart [image] 3-D options.

3	Click Advanced options >>.

4	Create the viewing angle you want.

5	Click Save as.

6	In the Enter 3-D viewing angle preset name dialog box, type a name in the Preset name box.

 Tip

•	You can edit the viewing angle you save by choosing it from the presets list box, making any changes, and clicking Save.

 Related topics


To rename a viewing angle

1	Click a 3-D chart.

2	Click Chart [image] 3-D options.

3	Click Advanced options >>.

4	Choose a viewing angle from the list box under the chart preview window.

5	Click Rename.

6	In the Enter 3-D viewing angle preset name dialog box, type a name in the Preset name box.

 Related topics


To delete a viewing angle

1	Click a 3-D chart.

2	Click Chart [image] 3-D options.

3	Click Advanced options >>.

4	Choose the viewing angle from the list box under the chart preview window.

5	Click Delete.

 Related topics


Changing the fill and border of 3-D chart walls

You can apply a pattern or gradient fill to a 3-D chart wall. A pattern fill consists of two colors arranged to form a design. A gradient fill creates smooth transitions between two colors by gradually changing their transparency as it progresses from one color to another.

You can also apply a texture or picture fill to a 3-D chart wall. Quattro Pro provides a selection of texture and picture fills that you can use.

Gradient fill and picture fill properties can be changed. For example, you can choose from three different gradient types: linear, circular, and rectangular. Each gradient type creates a unique transition between the two colors.

You can also change the border of the 3-D chart wall, by specifying the border's width and color.

 How to


To apply a pattern fill to a 3-D chart wall

1	Click a 3-D chart, and click a chart wall.

2	Right-click the selected wall, and click 3-D wall properties.

3	Click the Fill tab.

4	Click Pattern.

5	In the Colors area, open the Foreground color picker, and click a color.

6	Open the Background color picker, and click a color.

If you want to reverse the foreground and background colors, click Reverse colors.

7	Click a pattern on the pattern palette.

 Related topics


To apply a gradient fill to a 3-D chart wall

1	Click a 3-D chart, click a chart wall.

2	Right-click the selected wall, and click 3-D wall properties.

3	Click the Fill tab.

4	Click Gradient.

5	In the Colors area, open the Foreground color picker, and click a color.

6	Open the Background color picker, and click a color.

If you want to reverse the foreground and background colors, click Reverse colors.

7	Click a gradient style on the gradient palette.

 Related topics


To apply a texture fill to a 3-D chart wall

1	Click a 3-D chart, and click a chart wall.

2	Right-click the selected wall, and click 3-D wall properties.

3	Click the Fill tab.

4	Click Texture.

5	Choose a texture category from the Category list box.

6	Click a texture style on the texture palette.

 Tip

•	You can apply a custom texture not included with Quattro Pro by clicking Browse and choosing a texture.

 Related topics


To apply a picture fill to a 3-D chart wall

1	Click a 3-D chart, and click a chart wall.

2	Right-click the selected wall, and click 3-D wall properties.

3	Click the Fill tab.

4	Click Picture.

5	Choose a picture category from the Category list box.

6	Click a picture on the picture palette.

 Tip

•	You can apply a custom picture not included with Quattro Pro by clicking Browse and choosing a picture.

 Related topics


To modify the gradient fill properties of a 3-D chart wall

1	Click a 3-D chart, and click a chart wall.

2	Right-click the selected wall, and click 3-D wall properties.

3	Click the Fill tab.

4	Click Gradient.

5	Click Gradient settings.

6	In the Gradient settings dialog box, change any options.

 Related topics


To modify the picture fill properties of a 3-D chart wall

1	Click a 3-D chart, and click a chart wall.

2	Right-click the selected wall, and click 3-D wall properties.

3	Click the Fill tab.

4	Click Picture.

5	Click Picture settings.

6	In the Picture settings dialog box, change any options.

 Related topics


Analyzing chart data

You can analyze a data series to reveal new information about the data set.

In this section, you'll learn about

•	plotting trendlines

•	plotting error bars

For more information about creating charts, see "Reference: Analyzing chart data."


Plotting trendlines

You can calculate new data points and graph them without changing the data on a spreadsheet by plotting trendlines. Trendlines represent the chart data after it has passed through an equation designed to analyze a specific trend or to answer a question.

You can specify how the trendline is displayed.

 How to


To plot a trendline

1	Click a chart, and click a chart series.

2	Right-click the selected series, and click Series properties.

3	Click the Trendline tab.

4	Choose one of the following analysis methods from the Method box:

•	Moving average

•	Linear fit

•	Exponential fit

•	Standard deviation

•	Common log fit

•	Natural log fit

•	Polynomial

•	Aggregation

5	Modify any analysis options.

 Note

•	You can plot trendlines on 2-D charts only.

 Related topics


To specify trendline display options

1	Click a chart, and click a chart series.

2	Right-click the selected series, and click Series properties.

3	Click the Trendline tab.

4	In the Display area, choose one of the following from the list box:

•	Trendline [image] places the trendline on the current data series

•	Modify the series [image] replaces the current data series with the trendline

5	Enable any of the following check boxes:

•	Equation on chart

•	R-squared value on chart

 Related topics


Plotting error bars

Quattro Pro lets you graphically express the potential error amount for each data point in a chart. Horizontal bars above and below a data point indicate the interval of values in which the exact coordinates of the data point may lie under the assumed amount of error.

You can plot Y-direction and X-direction error bars, depending on the chart type.

The error bars can be deleted when you no longer need them.

 How to


To plot Y-direction error bars

1	Click a chart, and click a chart series.

2	Right-click the selected series, and click Series properties.

3	Click the Error bars tab.

4	In the Y direction area, click one of the following:

•	Both

•	Negative

•	Positive

5	Choose a method of calculating the error from the Error amount list box.

 Note

•	For more information about calculating the error amount of the y-axis, see "Calculating error amounts."

 Related topics


To plot X-direction error bars

1	Click a chart, and click a chart series.

2	Right-click the selected series, and click Series properties.

3	Click the Error bars tab.

4	In the X direction area, click one of the following:

•	Both

•	Negative

•	Positive

5	Choose a method of calculating the error from the Error amount list box.

 Note

•	For more information about calculating the error amount of the x-axis, see "Calculating error amounts."

 Related topics


To delete Y-direction error bars

1	Click a chart, and click a chart series.

2	Right-click the selected series, and click Series properties.

3	Click the Error bars tab.

4	In the Y direction area, click None.

 Related topics


To delete X-direction error bars

1	Click a chart, and click a chart series.

2	Right-click the selected series, and click Series properties.

3	Click the Error bars tab.

4	In the X direction area, click None.

 Related topics


Reference: Analyzing chart data

This topic contains reference information about the methods Quattro Pro provides for analyzing chart data.

 How to


Moving average

The moving average method smoothes fluctuating data points by plotting progressive averages. This helps eliminate cyclic, seasonal, and fluctuating patterns and can accentuate a trend's direction and substantiate trend reversals. Line and area charts are most effective for displaying moving averages.

Starting with the first point in the series, Quattro Pro calculates and plots the average for a specified previous number of points, called a period. At each following point, Quattro Pro maintains the specified period: it drops the oldest value (the one farthest from the new point) so the number of points averaged is always the specified period. Quattro Pro then calculates and plots the new average, and continues in this way. For example, if daily sales vary widely, you can determine a general trend by smoothing data points with the period set at three points to be averaged. In this case, each day's sales would be averaged with the previous two so that each point is tempered by previous points and data is smoothed to show a general trend.

The chart below displays two moving averages with daily data. The moving average with a period of three provides a smoother line through the daily data. A moving average with a period of nine provides an even smoother effect, although it is less true to the daily totals.

A sample moving average chart

 Note

•	Moving averages can only be determined for chart series that contain three or more data points.

 Related topics


Aggregation

Aggregation combines multiple data points and plots them as a single point that can be the sum, average, standard deviation, minimum, or maximum of the data. Plotting aggregates reveals relationships not immediately apparent in the spreadsheet, such as weekly averages for information recorded daily. The example below shows daily sales data aggregated so that each point represents a weekly sales average.

A sample aggregation chart

In the example above, series period is set to days, aggregation period is set to weeks, and function is set to AVG. It helps to think of the aggregation commands as useful standards for simple periodic aggregation. For example, when you specify days for the series period, months for the aggregation period, and AVG for function, Quattro Pro will average 30 data points, plot the average, average the next 30 points, plot the average, and so on.

Line charts work well with aggregation because they easily show trends. Bar charts are also impressive when plotting aggregated data over time, although trends are not as easy to see when you chart multiple series in the same chart.

You can modify aggregate charts for the following options: series period, aggregation period, and function. Since you will often aggregate a series according to a time period, the aggregation commands are based on one day representing a period of one. For the purposes of aggregation, Quattro Pro uses the following standards.

Time Period	Equals
Week	7 days
Month	30 days = 4 weeks
Quarter	90 days = 12 weeks = 3 months
Year	360 days = 51 weeks = 12 months = 4 quarters
 Related topics


Linear fit

Regression analysis is a mathematical method that shows relationships between multiple variables, so it is often used to predict values of one variable by taking into account the values of the others. In Quattro Pro, a linear fit series generates a regression line that best fits the data. Linear fit is useful for showing a general trend among fluctuating points.

Linear fit calculates and plots regression information in a line, even if the data does not have a general trend.

The linear fit trendline is of the form (insert graphic here) where x and y are the values of the two variables for which a relationship is being developed. Such a model would be used when one assumes a linear relationship between the dependent variable, Y, and the independent variable, X. The estimated regression coefficients are determined as follows:

 Related topics


Exponential fit

The exponential fit method generates a curve to fit data that increases or decreases geometrically (through multiplication rather than addition). For this feature to work, all values in the series must be greater than zero.

If you specify an area larger than the number of existing data points, additional values are projected, based on the plotted curve.

In any exponential fit charts, you can display different data series and data relationships. For example, you can compare weekly maximum sales totals with weekly sales averages.

The original and transformed model equations for the exponential fit are:

•	Original equation of fit:

•	Transformed equation:

where

,

Once the coefficients A[1] and A[2] are found using least squares techniques, an exponential transformation is applied in order to maintain the integrity of the model of interest.

 Related topics


Standard deviation

The standard deviation fit plots solid horizontal lines at values corresponding to the mean plus/minus the standard deviation for the data set plotted in the chart. Doing so enables the user to get a visual interpretation both of outlying observations that may be of particular interest for future investigation, as well as the proximity of other data points to the overall average.

 Related topics


Common log fit

The common log fit summarizes trends using the following model equations:

•	Original equation of fit:

•	Transformed equation:

where

,

Coefficients are determined using least squares techniques and inverse transformations are then applied where necessary in order to maintain the integrity of the models of interest.

When performing a common log fit, values may be either positive or negative.

 Related topics


Natural log fit

The natural log fit summarizes trends using the following model equations:

•	Original equation of fit:

•	Transformed equation:

Coefficients are determined using least squares techniques and inverse transformations are then applied where necessary in order to maintain the integrity of the models of interest.

When performing a natural log fit, all values in the chart series must be greater than zero.

 Related topics


Polynomial

A polynomial trendline can be used to model fluctuation in a given data series. Depending on the manner in which data changes over time, you can use polynomials of different orders to adequately fit the data; an order of 2 is useful in instances where there is only one maximum or minimum value in an otherwise parabolically shaped data series, whereas polynomials of higher order can model data with more "hills and valleys." This form of trendline is useful in cases where the relationship between two variables is thought to be curvilinear rather than linear.

The model being fit under this scenario is given by:

where [image]. Thus, the feature can fit polynomials up to and including an order of 4. Coefficients for the polynomial fit are determined using least squares techniques.

 Related topics


Calculating error amounts

Error amounts
Fixed amount	The error amount is the value that you specify.
Percentage	The error amount is calculated based on the percentage you specify of the initial data point.
Standard deviation	The error amount is calculated based on the standard deviation formula.
Standard error	The error amount is calculated based on the standard error formula.
Custom	The error amount represents the negative and positive values you specify.
 Related topics


Presenting spreadsheet data in a chart

Quattro Pro lets you present data graphically by plotting it in a chart.

In this section, you'll learn about

•	creating charts

•	adding titles to charts

•	adding linked data to charts

For more information about creating charts, see "Reference: Presenting spreadsheet data in a chart."


Creating charts

Creating a chart lets you represent spreadsheet data graphically. You can create a chart automatically and have all the chart options chosen for you, or you can create a chart by using the Chart Expert, which guides you through the steps of creating a chart that best suits a data set.

 How to


To create a chart automatically

1	Select the cells you want to plot.

If the surrounding cells contain explanatory labels, you can include them in the selection for use as the chart axis labels or the chart legend.

2	Click the QuickChart button on the toolbar.

3	On the spreadsheet, click where you want to insert the chart.

 Note

•	When you create a chart automatically, it is placed on the spreadsheet in a floating graphics window; however, you can view it on its own page. For information about viewing a chart on its own page, see "Managing and sharing graphics."

 Tip

•	If you want to customize the size of the chart, click and drag diagonally on the spreadsheet.

 Related topics


To create a chart by using the Chart Expert

1	Click Insert [image] Chart.

2	Follow the steps of the Expert.

 Related topics


Adding titles to charts

You can customize a chart by adding titles. You can add titles to the chart, or to a specific axis.

You can add a title for any numeric chart type.

 How to


To add a title

1	Click a chart.

2	Click Chart [image] Titles.

3	Enable the Main title check box, and type a title in the box.

You can also
Add a subtitle	Enable the Subtitle check box, and type a subtitle in the box.
Add a footnote	Enable the Footnote check box, and type a footnote in the box.
Add an axis title	Enable one of the axis check boxes, and type a title in the box.
 Related topics


Adding linked data to charts

You can display the data from linked cells on a chart. This is useful when you use a chart type that shows information that lacks specific numeric content (for example, in a surface chart). If you select multiple cells, a linked picture of them appears on the chart. If you select a single cell, the data in that cell displays on the chart (for example, the number in the cell). The cells in the chart update with any changes you make to the data or properties of the notebook cells.

 How to


To add linked data to a chart

1	Double-click a chart.

2	Click Insert [image] Link to cells.

3	Click and drag a rectangle on the chart where you want the data to appear.

4	Click the Pointer button next to the Select cells box in the Link cells dialog box, then choose the cell or group of cells you want to display.

5	Enable one or both of the following check boxes in the Border options section:

•	Row borders

•	Column borders

6	Enable one or both of the following check boxes in the Grid lines section:

•	Horizontal

•	Vertical

7	Enable the Maintain aspect ratio check box in the Display scaling section to match the same aspect ratio used on the notebook.

 Note

•	You cannot select noncontiguous selections with the Link to cells tool.

 Related topics


Reference: Presenting spreadsheet data in a chart

This topic contains reference information related to creating a chart, such as how to set up the chart data, and the different chart types that you can create.

 How to


Plotting chart data

How Quattro Pro plots data depends on the range and values of the cells you select before you create the chart.

When a selection contains more rows than columns or an equal number of rows and columns:

•	Quattro Pro plots each column as a single series.

•	If the first column contains labels, the labels are placed along the x-axis.

•	If the first row contains labels, the labels are used as the chart legend.

When a selection contains more columns than rows:

•	Quattro Pro plots each row as a single series.

•	If the first row contains labels, the labels are placed along the x-axis.

•	If the first column contains labels, the labels are used as the chart legend.

 Related topics


Setting up chart axes

All charts except pie and doughnutcharts have two references for plotting data: the x-axis and the y-axis. The x-axis is a horizontal line at the bottom of the chart pane with fixed reference points; the column labels in your data series are used for x-axis labels to explain what each data series represents. Y-axis labels show the values being represented. Depending on the data series, Quattro Pro determines the range and increment amounts of the y-axis.

There are a few exceptions to this format:

•	Horizontal charts have a vertical x-axis and a horizontal y-axis. Quattro Pro reverses the axes of horizontal charts automatically.

•	In XY charts (scatter diagrams), the x-axis series is data, not labels. Quattro Pro scales the x-axis to match the data.

•	If the chart is a 2-D bar, line, or area chart, you can assign any series to a secondary y-axis, which appears on the right side of the chart.

 Related topics


Area charts

Area charts (except 2D and 3D, unstacked area charts) plot cumulative rather than individual values. The first series is plotted without modification. The second series is plotted using the top of the first series as the baseline. The third series is charted on top of the second, and so forth.

 Related topics


Bar charts

Bar chars display each value in a series as a bar. Values are plotted against the y-axis scale, the taller the bar, the greater the value. Bar charts are ideal for comparison or ranking of items against one scale.

Quattro Pro lets you create stacked bar charts, and bipolar bar charts. Stacked bar charts show the relationship of each value to the total, for example, how total sales are divided between regions. Bipolar bar charts split the chart data and plot it along two y axes.

 Related topics


Bubble charts

Bubble charts are similar to scatter charts, however, in a bubble chart, a third value is represented by the size of the bubble.

 Related topics


Gantt charts

Gantt charts are used to track the progress of a project. The expected time to complete each task in a project is plotted as a horizontal bar that is colored in gradually as the project progresses.

 Related topics


High/Low charts

High/Low (open-close) charts are often used to track daily stock prices. You need at least two series to create this type of chart (to represent the highest and lowest price a stock reached each day).

The type of High/Low chart that you can create depends on the number of series that you want to plot.

If you want to plot	Chart types available
Three series	High/Low [image] The third series is not used in the chart. High/Low/Open [image] The third series is the open value (the price of the stock at the beginning of the business day). High/Low/Close [image] The third series is the close values (the price of the stock at end of the business day).
Four series	High/Low/Open/Close [image] All four series are used in the chart. High/Low/Open or High/Low/Close [image] The fourth series is not used in the chart High/Low [image] the four series are used to represent two companies
Five series	High/Low/Open/Close/Volume [image] The fifth series is used to plot the trading volume High/Low/Open [image] The third series is the open value (the price of the stock at the beginning of the business day). The fourth and fifth series are discarded. High/Low/Close [image] The third series is the close values (the price of the stock at end of the business day). The fourth and fifth series are discarded. High/Low/Open/Close [image] Uses the first four series and discards the fifth series
A common use for the fifth series is to display the volume data, or number of shares of stock that changed hands that day. Volume data is usually much larger than High/Low data, so the High/Low data does not show up well in the chart. The High/Low-bar chart has special formatting to deal with this problem. High/Low-bar charts plot the first four series as regular High/Low charts. The fifth series, however, is plotted as bars against the secondary y-axis. The secondary y-axis scale is adjusted to plot the bars on the lower quarter of the chart, where the bars are unlikely to cover the High/Low values.

 Related topics


Histograms

Histograms let you graphically display continuous or discrete data by grouping data into a series of bins representing a certain range of values, and displaying the frequencies of each of these bins in the form of a bar on a chart. Histograms are useful for examining the distribution of a data in different ways by changing the number of bins and the data ranges they represent.

 Related topics


Line charts

Line charts plot series values as points, and connect the points in each series with a line. Line charts best illustrate trends over a period of time.

You can create 2-D and 3-D line charts.

 Related topics


Mixed charts

Mixed charts combine bars, lines, and areas in the same chart to highlight a series or contrast different series in the chart. Quattro Pro provides three combination charts : area-line, area-bar, and line-bar. Line bar charts and area bar charts plot the first series as a bar, and plot all other series as lines or areas.

 Related topics


Pie charts

Pie charts plot each value as a series and illustrate how each series relates to the whole. You can create 2-D and 3-D charts, as well as doughnut and column charts which are a variation of the original pie chart.

You can create a pie of a pie chart where one slice of the pie chart is expanded into an individual pie chart that displays all of its components.

 Related topics


Radar charts

Radar charts can highlight trends. Growth trends show as outward spirals; static or fluctuating trends look more like circles or stars. Radar charts can also simplify series comparisons; the series with the highest values occupies the most area.

 Related topics


Scatter charts

Scatter charts have x-axis series that contain numeric data instead of text labels. The y-axis scale is calculated from the data in the series. Each series value is plotted as a pair of coordinates. The first coordinate is an x-axis series value; it determines where the data point is placed relative to the x-axis. The second coordinate is the corresponding value in the series you are plotting; it gives the data point's position relative to the y-axis.

Quattro Pro provides two different types of scatter charts: XY and XYX. The difference between XY and XYX charts is how they interpret data from the spreadsheet. If the chart is plotted by columns, the first column in an XY chart becomes the x coordinate, and the rest of the columns become the y coordinates. In an XYX chart, the first column becomes the x coordinate, the second column becomes the y coordinate, the third column becomes a different x coordinate, and the fourth column becomes a different y coordinate.

 Related topics


Surface charts

Surface charts plot rows and columns as lines that form a "mesh" on a 3-D frame. When you chart a square array of cells, values in columns correspond with mesh lines from left to right. Rows of data correspond to mesh lines from front to back. Each data point is represented by an intersection of two mesh lines. How the surface of the mesh is shaded depends on the type of surface chart.

 Related topics


Editing charts

Quattro Pro lets you customize the appearance of charts by editing chart items.

In this section, you'll learn about

•	selecting chart items

•	changing chart types

•	changing legend labels and position

•	changing legend boxes and borders

•	applying fills to legend boxes

•	changing the fill and border of chart frames

•	changing the background fill

•	applying advanced rendering to charts

•	changing chart lighting

•	moving, resizing, and deleting charts

•	saving and retrieving chart templates


Selecting chart items

To edit chart items, you must first select them. You can select individual or multiple chart items.

 How to


To select chart items

To select	Do the following
A chart item	Click a chart, and click an item.
Multiple chart items	Click a chart. Hold down Ctrl, and click the items you want.
 Related topics


Changing chart types

You can change the chart type. Quattro Pro provides you with a collection of predesigned chart templates and color schemes that let you change the chart type, or format charts quickly, rather than editing individual features.

You can also specify the default chart that displays every time you create a chart automatically. For more information about creating charts, see "Creating charts."

 How to


To change the chart type

1	Click a chart.

2	Click Chart [image] Gallery.

3	Click the Type tab.

4	Choose a chart category from the Category list.

5	In the Type area, click a chart type.

You can also
Apply a color scheme to a chart	Choose a color scheme from the Color scheme list box.
Add depth to a chart	Enable the Add depth check box.
Use a chart type recommended by the Advisor	Click the Advisor tab. Choose a chart type from the list.
Select a custom chart	Click the Custom tab. Choose a chart type from the list.
 Related topics


To specify the default chart

1	Click a chart.

2	Click Chart [image] Gallery, and click the Type tab.

3	Click a chart category from the Category list.

4	In the Type section, click a chart type.

5	Enable the Use as default for all new charts check box.

 Related topics


Changing legend labels and position

You can add legend and x-axis labels to a chart series to make a chart easier to understand.

You can also specify the position of the chart legend. There are two legend types [image] horizontal and vertical [image] that can be placed inside the chart frame.

 How to


To add legend and x-axis labels to a series

1	Click a chart.

2	Click Chart [image] Source data.

3	Choose a series from the list.

4	Type a label in the Legend label box.

 Tips

•	You can specify a range of legend labels by clicking the Range picker in the Legend labels box.

•	You can specify a range of x-axis labels by clicking the Range picker in the X-axis labels box.

 Related topics


To change the position of a legend

1	Click a chart.

2	Click Chart [image] Legend properties.

3	Click the Format tab.

4	Enable the Display legend check box.

5	In the Position area, enable one of the position options.

If you want the legend placed in the chart, enable the Place legend inside chart check box.

6	In the Legend type area, click one of the following legend types:

•	Horizontal

•	Vertical

 Note

•	You can specify a horizontal or vertical legend only if the Place legend inside chart check box is enabled.

 Related topics


Changing legend boxes and borders

You can change the box and border of a chart legend. You can also change the border properties, such as the line width, style, and color.

You can add a shadow to a legend box to create the illusion of depth and specify the direction and color of the shadow.

 How to


To change a legend box

1	Click a chart.

2	Click Chart [image] Legend properties.

3	Click the Box style tab.

4	Open the Box picker, and click a box style.

 Related topics


To change a legend border

1	Click a chart.

2	Click Chart [image] Legend properties.

3	Click the Box style tab.

4	Open the Border picker, and click a border style.

You can also
Change the border width	In the Line format area, open the Width picker, and click a border width.
Change the border style	In the Line format area, open the Line style picker, and click a border style.
Change the border color	In the Line format area, open the Color picker, and click a color.
 Related topics


To add a shadow to a legend box

1	Click a chart.

2	Click Chart [image] Legend properties.

3	Click the Box style tab.

4	Enable the Shadow check box.

You can also
Specify the direction of the shadow	Type values in the X offset box and the Y offset box.
Change the color of the shadow	Open the Shadow color picker, and click a color.
 Related topics


Applying fills to legend boxes

You can apply a pattern or gradient fill to legend boxes. A pattern fill consists of two colors arranged to form a design. A gradient fill creates a smooth transition between two colors by gradually changing their transparency as the fill progresses from one color to another.

You can also apply a texture or picture fill to legend boxes. Quattro Pro provides a selection of texture and picture fills that you can use.

You can modify the gradient fill and picture fill settings. For example, you can choose from three different gradient types, linear, circular, or rectangular, where each gradient type creates a unique transition between the two colors.

 How to


To apply a pattern fill to a legend box

1	Click a chart.

2	Click Chart [image] Legend properties.

3	Click the Fill tab.

4	Click Pattern.

5	In the Colors area, open the Foreground color picker, and click a color.

6	Open the Background color picker, and click a color.

If you want to reverse the foreground and background colors, click Reverse colors.

7	Click a pattern on the pattern palette.

 Note

•	You can apply a pattern fill only to a legend box that has a border.

 Related topics


To apply a gradient fill to a legend box

1	Click a chart.

2	Click Chart [image] Legend properties.

3	Click the Fill tab.

4	Click Gradient.

5	In the Colors area, open the Foreground color picker, and click a color.

6	Open the Background color picker, and click a color.

If you want to reverse the foreground and background colors, click Reverse colors.

7	Click a gradient style on the gradient palette.

 Note

•	You can apply a gradient fill only to a legend box that has a border.

 Related topics


To apply a texture fill to a legend box

1	Click a chart.

2	Click Chart [image] Legend properties.

3	Click the Fill tab.

4	Click Texture.

5	Choose a texture category from the Category list box.

6	Click a texture style on the texture palette.

 Note

•	You can apply a texture fill only to a legend box that has a border.

 Tip

•	You can apply a custom texture not included with Quattro Pro by clicking Browse and choosing a texture.

 Related topics


To apply a picture fill to a legend box

1	Click a chart.

2	Click Chart [image] Legend properties.

3	Click the Fill tab.

4	Click Picture.

5	Choose a picture category from the Category list box.

6	Click a picture on the picture palette.

 Note

•	You can apply a picture fill only to a legend box that has a border.

 Tip

•	You can apply a custom picture not included with Quattro Pro by clicking Browse and choosing a picture.

 Related topics


To modify the gradient fill properties of a legend box

1	Click a chart.

2	Click Chart [image] Legend properties.

3	Click the Fill tab.

4	Click Gradient.

5	Click Gradient settings.

6	In the Gradient settings dialog box, change the options you want.

 Related topics


To edit the picture fill properties of a legend box

1	Click a chart.

2	Click Chart [image] Legend properties.

3	Click the Fill tab.

4	Click Picture.

5	Click Picture settings.

6	In the Picture settings dialog box, change any options.

 Related topics


Changing the fill and border of chart frames

You can add a pattern or gradient fill to the chart frame of a 2-D chart. A pattern fill consists of two colors arranged to form a design. A gradient fill creates a smooth transition between two colors by gradually changing their transparency as the fill progresses from one color to another.

You can also apply a texture or picture fill to legend boxes. Quattro Pro provides a selection of texture and picture fills that you can use.

You can modify the gradient fill and picture fill settings. For example, you can choose from three different gradient types, linear, circular, or rectangular, where each gradient type creates a unique transition between the two colors.

You can also change the border of the chart frame and specify the border's width and color.

 How to


To apply a pattern fill to a chart frame

1	Click a 2D chart, and click the chart frame.

2	Right-click the chart frame, and click Frame properties.

3	Click the Fill tab.

4	Click Pattern.

5	In the Colors area, open the Foreground color picker, and click a color on the color palette.

6	Open the Background color picker, and click a color on the color palette.

If you want to reverse the foreground and background colors, click Reverse colors.

7	Click a pattern on the pattern palette.

 Related topics


To apply a gradient fill to a chart frame

1	Click a 2-D chart, and click the chart frame.

2	Right-click the chart frame, and click Frame properties.

3	Click the Fill tab.

4	Click Gradient.

5	In the Colors area, open the Foreground color picker, and click a color.

6	Open the Background color picker, and click a color.

If you want to reverse the foreground and background colors, click Reverse colors.

7	Click a gradient style on the gradient palette.

 Related topics


To apply a texture fill to a chart frame

1	Click a 2-D chart, and click the chart frame.

2	Right-click the chart frame, and click Frame properties.

3	Click the Fill tab.

4	Click Texture.

5	Choose a texture category from the Category list box.

6	Click a texture style on the texture palette.

 Tip

•	You can apply a custom texture not included with Quattro Pro by clicking Browse and choosing a texture.

 Related topics


To apply a picture fill to a chart frame

1	Click a chart, and click the chart frame.

2	Right-click the chart frame, and click Frame properties.

3	Click the Fill tab.

4	Click Picture.

5	Choose a picture category from the Category list box.

6	Click a picture on the picture palette.

 Tip

•	You can apply a custom picture not included with Quattro Pro by clicking Browse and choosing a picture.

 Related topics


To modify the gradient fill properties of a chart frame

1	Click a chart, and click the chart frame.

2	Right-click the chart frame, and click Frame properties.

3	Click the Fill tab.

4	Click Gradient.

5	Click Gradient settings.

6	In the Gradient settings dialog box, change any options.

 Related topics


To modify the picture fill properties of a chart frame

1	Click a chart, and click the chart frame.

2	Right-click the chart frame, and click Frame properties.

3	Click the Fill tab.

4	Click Picture.

5	Click Picture settings.

6	In the Picture settings dialog box, change any options.

 Related topics


To change the border of the chart frame

1	Click a chart, and click the chart frame.

2	Right-click the chart frame, and click Frame properties.

3	Click the Line tab.

4	Open the Style picker, and click a line style.

You can also
Change the border width	Open the Width picker, and click a line width.
Change the border color	Open the Color picker, and click a color .
 Related topics


Changing the background fill

You can add a pattern or gradient fill to the chart background. A pattern fill consists of two colors arranged to form a design. A gradient fill creates a smooth transition between two colors by gradually changing their transparency as the fill progresses from one color to another.

You can also apply a texture or picture fill to a chart background. Quattro Pro provides a selection of texture and picture fills that you can use.

You can modify the gradient fill and picture fill settings. For example, you can choose from three different gradient types, linear, circular, or rectangular, where each gradient type creates a unique transition between the two colors.

 How to


To apply a pattern fill to a chart background

1	Click a chart, and click the chart background.

2	Click Chart [image]  Background properties.

3	Click the Fill tab.

4	Click Pattern.

5	In the Colors area, open the Foreground color picker, and click a color.

6	Open the Background color picker, and click a color.

If you want to reverse the foreground and background colors, click Reverse colors.

7	Click a pattern on the pattern palette.

 Related topics


To apply a gradient fill to a chart background

1	Click a chart, and click the chart background.

2	Click Chart [image]  Background properties.

3	Click the Fill tab.

4	Click Gradient.

5	In the Colors area, open the Foreground color picker, and click a color.

6	Open the Background color picker, and click a color.

If you want to reverse the foreground and background colors, click Reverse colors.

7	Click a gradient style on the gradient palette.

 Related topics


To apply a texture fill to a chart background

1	Click a chart, and click the chart background.

2	Click Chart [image]  Background properties.

3	Click the Fill tab.

4	Click Texture.

5	Choose a texture category from the Category list box.

6	Click a texture style on the texture palette.

 Tip

•	You can apply a custom texture not included with Quattro Pro by clicking Browse, and choosing a texture.

 Related topics


To apply a picture fill to a chart background

1	Click a chart, and click the chart background.

2	Click Chart [image]  Background properties.

3	Click the Fill tab.

4	Click Picture.

5	Choose a picture category from the Category list box.

6	Click a picture on the picture palette.

 Tip

•	You can apply a custom picture not included with Quattro Pro by clicking Browse, and choosing a picture.

 Related topics


To modify the gradient fill properties of a chart background

1	Click a chart, and click the chart background.

2	Click Chart [image]  Background properties.

3	Click the Fill tab.

4	Click Gradient.

5	Click Gradient settings.

6	In the Gradient settings dialog box, change any options.

 Related topics


To modify the picture fill properties of a chart background

1	Click a chart, and click the chart background.

2	Click Chart [image]  Background properties.

3	Click the Fill tab.

4	Click Picture.

5	Click Picture settings.

6	In the Picture settings dialog box, change any options.

 Related topics


Applying advanced rendering to charts

You can apply advanced rendering to charts to smooth out the edges of chart items and to give a chart a polished and professional appearance.

The example below shows how a 3-D chart appears after you apply advanced rendering.

When you no longer need advanced rendering, you can remove it.

 How to


To apply advanced rendering to a chart

1	Click a chart.

2	Click Chart [image] Render chart.

 Tip

•	You can also apply advanced rendering to a chart by clicking Chart [image] Gallery and enabling the Advanced rendering check box.

 Related topics


To remove advanced rendering from a chart

1	Click a chart.

2	Click Chart [image] Render chart.

 Tip

•	You can also remove advanced rendering from chart by clicking Chart [image] Gallery and disabling the Advanced rendering check box.

 Related topics


Changing chart lighting

You can change the appearance of an advanced rendered chart by specifying the way light shines on it. Adding light to a chart simulates the effect of light shining on an object and it  changes not only the chart color, but also its illumination.

Quattro Pro provides a collection of preset light combinations that you can apply; however, you can also create your own combination by choosing up to three different light colors. You can adjust the angle at which light shines on a chart, and adjust light properties such as glow and shininess.

 How to


To apply a preset light combination

1	Click a rendered chart.

2	Click Chart [image] Lighting options.

3	Choose one of the light combinations from the list.

4	Click Apply.

 Related topics


To choose a light color

1	Click a rendered chart.

2	Click Chart [image] Lighting options.

3	Click Advanced options>>.

4	Click one of the following tabs:

•	1

•	2

•	3

5	Enable the Light on check box.

6	Open the Light color picker, and click a color.

 Notes

•	You can use only one light color, or you can use all three.

 Related topics


To adjust the light angle

1	Click a rendered chart.

2	Click Chart [image] Lighting options.

3	Click Advanced options>>.

4	Click one of the following tabs:

•	1

•	2

•	3

5	Enable the Light on check box.

6	Move any of the following sliders:

•	X position

•	Y position

•	Z position

 Related topics


To adjust the light properties

1	Click a rendered chart.

2	Click Chart [image] Lighting options.

3	Click Advanced options.

4	Click the General tab.

5	Move any of the following sliders:

•	Ambient

•	Radiocity

•	Shininess

•	Glow

 Related topics


Moving, resizing, and deleting charts

You can move a floating chart to another area of the spreadsheet, and you can resize the chart. You can also delete a chart from a spreadsheet.

 How to


To move a chart

1	Click a chart window border.

2	Drag the chart to a new location on the spreadsheet.

 Related topics


To resize a chart

1	Click a chart window border.

2	Drag one of the selection handles.

 Related topics


To delete a chart

1	Click a chart window border.

2	Press Delete.

 Related topics


Saving and retrieving chart templates

After you create a chart that has all the required attributes you can save the attributes as a chart template. Saving a chart template lets you apply a particular appearance without having to recreate it.

 How to


To save a chart template

1	Click a chart that has the attributes you want to save.

2	Click Chart [image] Save template.

3	Browse to \Corel\WordPerfect Office 11\Chart support files\Templates.

4	Type the filename in the Filename box.

5	Choose Chart template (.3tf) from the Save as type list box.

 Related topics


To retrieve a chart template

1	Click a chart to which you want to apply a template.

2	Click Chart [image] Retrieve template.

3	Click the Custom tab.

4	From the Category list, choose the folder in which you saved the template.

5	Choose a template from the Type list.

 Related topics


Working with chart series

Quattro Pro lets you change the properties of chart series.

In this section, you'll learn about

•	changing chart data

•	plotting a series on a secondary y-axis

•	changing bar chart options

•	changing line chart options

•	changing pie chart options

•	changing high/low chart options

•	changing series fill and border style

•	changing the fill and border style of data points

•	replacing chart series with riser models

•	applying transparency and glow to a chart series

•	displaying data labels


Changing chart data

Quattro Pro lets you change chart data by adding or removing a series and by changing the data range of a series. For most chart types, you can change only the Y range, however for XY, XYX, bubble, and high/low charts you can change other ranges. For example, in a bubble chart you can change the Y range, the X range, and the size range.

 How to


To add a series

1	Click a chart.

2	Click Chart [image] Source data.

3	Click Add.

4	Click the Range picker in the Y-range box, and select a data range.

 Note

•	When you add a series to a chart, it is placed as the last series.

 Tip

•	You can also add a series by selecting the data, and dragging it onto the chart.

 Related topics


To remove a series

1	Click a chart.

2	Click Chart [image] Source data.

3	From the list, choose the series you want to remove.

4	Click Remove.

 Note

•	When you remove a series, all the series following it are renumbered accordingly.

 Tip

•	You can also remove a series by selecting it, and clicking Delete.

 Related topics


To change the data range of a series

1	Type a new data range on a spreadsheet.

2	Click a chart.

3	Click Chart [image] Source data.

4	Choose a series from the list.

5	Click the Range picker in the Y-range box, and select the new data range.

 Related topics


To change the data range of a series in an XY or XYX chart

1	Type a new data range on a spreadsheet.

2	Click an XY or XYX chart.

3	Click Chart [image] Source data.

4	Choose a series from the list.

5	Click the Range picker in any of the following boxes, and select the new data range:

•	Y-range

•	X-range

 Related topics


To change the data range of a series in a bubble chart

1	Type a new data range on a spreadsheet.

2	Click a bubble chart.

3	Click Chart [image] Source data.

4	Choose a series from the list.

5	Click the Range picker in any of the following boxes, and select the new data range:

•	Y-range

•	X-range

•	Size

 Related topics


To change the data range of a series in a High\Low chart

1	Type a new data range on a spreadsheet.

2	Click a High\Low chart.

3	Click Chart [image] Source data.

4	Choose a series from the list.

5	Click the Range picker in any of the following boxes, and select the new data range:

•	High [image] lets you select the data range for the high values

•	Low [image] lets you select the data range for the low values

•	Open [image] lets you select the data range for the open values

•	Close [image] lets you select the data range for the close values

•	Volume 1 [image] lets you select the data range for the volume values

 Related topics


Changing chart data order

Quattro Pro lets you plot chart series by row or column.

You can also change the chart data order by reversing the series, which is useful in 3-D bar and unstacked area charts, when a series of high values covers other series of lower values.

 How to


To plot chart series by row or column

1	Click a chart.

2	Click Chart [image] Source data.

3	From the Series as list box, choose one of the following:

•	Columns

•	Rows

 Related topics


To reverse the order of the chart series

1	Click a chart.

2	Click Chart [image] Source data.

3	Enable the Reverse series check box.

 Related topics


Plotting a series on a secondary y-axis

Quattro Pro lets you add a secondary y-axis to a chart. You can plot a chart series on a secondary y-axis if, for example, the values in one series are much larger or smaller than those in other series, or if a series requires a different scale type.

 How to


To add a secondary y-axis to a chart

1	Click a chart.

2	Click Chart [image] Gallery.

3	Enable the Add secondary y-axis check box.

 Related topics


To plot a series on a secondary y-axis

1	Click a chart, and click a chart series.

2	Right-click the selected series, and click Series properties.

3	Click the Series options tab.

4	In the Y-axis area, choose Secondary from the list.

You can also
Specify on which side of the chart the secondary y-axis is placed	In the Axis on area, enable the Left side or Right side option.
Change the series type to distinguish it from the rest of the chart	In the Series type area, enable one of the series options.
 Note

•	You can plot a series on a secondary y-axis only in 2-D charts that have a y-axis and an x-axis

 Related topics


Changing bar chart options

You can change the bar chart options. For example, you can change the style of the riser, its width, and the amount of space between risers.

 How to


To change the riser style

1	Click a bar chart, and click a series.

2	Right-click the selected series, and click Series properties.

3	Click the Type options tab.

4	Choose a riser style from the Riser style list.

You can also
Adjust the riser width	Move the Bar width slider.
Change the amount of space between risers	Move the Bar spacing slider.
 Note

•	You can adjust the width and the amount of space between the risers in a 2D chart only.

 Related topics


Changing line chart options

A line chart displays a series in a continuous line. You can display the markers for each data point so that they are visible on the line.

 How to


To display markers

1	Click a line chart, and click a series.

2	Right-click the selected series, and click Series properties.

3	Click the Type options tab.

4	Enable the Marker check box.

You can also
Specify the shape of the marker	Choose a shape from the list under the Marker check box.
Specify the size of the marker	Type a number in the Size box.
 Note

•	You can also use this procedure to change the bubble chart markers; however, the size option is not available.

 Related topics


Changing pie chart options

You can change the appearance of a pie chart by detaching a slice, or exploding the entire pie. You can also tilt a pie chart. In a pie of a pie chart, you can specify which slice of the pie chart links to a second pie chart. For more information about chart types, see "Reference: Presenting spreadsheet data in a chart."

 How to


To detach a pie slice

1	Click a pie chart, and click a slice.

2	Right-click the selected slice, and click Series properties.

3	Click the Type options tab.

4	In the Explode area, move the Detach slice slider.

 Tip

•	If you want to detach all of the pie slices, move the Explode pie slider.

 Related topics


To change the tilt of a pie chart

1	Click a pie chart.

2	Right-click the chart, and click Series properties.

3	Click the Type options tab.

4	In the Orientation area, move the Pie tilt slider.

You can also
Adjust the pie depth	Move the Pie depth slider.
Rotate the pie	Move the Pie rotation slider.
 Note

•	You cannot adjust the pie depth when the tilt option is set to zero.

 Related topics


To change the linked slice in a pie of a pie chart

1	Click a pie of a pie chart.

2	Right-click the chart, and click Series properties.

3	Click the Type options tab.

4	In the Pie of a pie area, type a number in the Link to slice box.

 Related topics


Changing high/low chart options

You can change the high/low series type options.

 How to


To change the high/low series type

1	Click a high/low chart, and click a series.

2	Right-click the selected series, and click Series properties.

3	Click the Type options tab.

4	Choose one of the following from the Type list:

•	Area with vertical line

•	Candle stick

•	Default

•	Dot

•	Line chart

•	Line circle

•	Vertical line

5	Type a width in the Width box.

 Note

•	The type options available depend on the high/low chart type. For information about chart types, see "Reference: Presenting spreadsheet data in a chart."

 Related topics


Changing series fill and border style

You can apply different fills and border styles to a data series. Changing the series fill and border style is useful if you want to distinguish a series from the rest of the chart.

You can apply a pattern or gradient fill to a chart series. A pattern fill consists of two colors arranged to form a design. A gradient fill creates a smooth transition between two colors by gradually changing their transparency as the fill progresses from one color to another.

You can also apply a texture or picture fill to a chart series. Quattro Pro provides a selection of texture and picture fills that you can use.

You can modify the gradient fill and picture fill properties. For example, you can choose from three different gradient types, linear, circular, or rectangular, where each gradient type creates a unique transition between the two colors.

You can also change the border style of a series, and specify the border's width and color.

 How to


To apply a pattern fill to a chart series

1	Click a chart, and click a chart series.

2	Right-click the selected series, and click Series properties.

3	Click the Fill tab.

4	Click Pattern.

5	In the Colors area, open the Foreground color picker, and click a color.

6	Open the Background color picker, and click a color.

If you want to reverse the foreground and background colors, click Reverse colors.

7	Click a pattern on the pattern palette.

 Related topics


To apply a gradient fill to a chart series

1	Click a chart, and click a chart series.

2	Right-click the selected series, and click Series properties.

3	Click the Fill tab.

4	Click Gradient.

5	In the Colors area, open the Foreground color picker, and click a color.

6	Open the Background color picker, and click a color.

If you want to reverse the foreground and background colors, click Reverse colors.

7	Click a gradient style on the gradient palette.

 Related topics


To apply a texture fill to a chart series

1	Click a chart, and click a chart series.

2	Right-click the selected series, and click Series properties.

3	Click the Fill tab.

4	Click Texture.

5	Choose a texture category from the Category list box.

6	Click a texture on the texture palette.

 Tip

•	You can apply a custom texture not included with Quattro Pro by clicking Browse and choosing a texture.

 Related topics


To apply a picture fill to a chart series

1	Click a chart, and click a chart series.

2	Right-click the selected series, and click Series properties.

3	Click the Fill tab.

4	Click Picture.

5	Choose a picture category from the Category list box.

6	Click a picture on the picture palette.

 Tip

•	You can apply a custom picture not included with Quattro Pro by clicking Browse and choosing a picture.

 Related topics


To modify the gradient fill properties of a chart series

1	Click a chart, and click a chart series.

2	Right-click the selected series, and click Series properties.

3	Click the Fill tab.

4	Click Gradient.

5	Click Gradient settings.

6	In the Gradient settings dialog box, change any options.

 Related topics


To modify the picture fill properties of a chart series

1	Click a chart, and click a chart series.

2	Right-click the selected series, and click Series properties.

3	Click the Fill tab.

4	Click Picture.

5	Click Picture settings.

6	In the Picture settings dialog box, change any options.

 Related topics


To modify the chart series border style

1	Click a chart, and click a chart series.

2	Right-click the selected series, and click Series properties.

3	Click the Line tab.

4	Open the Style picker, and click a border style.

You can also
Change the border width	Open the Width picker, and click a border width.
Change the border color	Open the Color picker, and click a color.
 Related topics


Changing the fill and border style of data points

A data point represents a single value in a chart series. You can change the fill and border of a data point to distinguish it from the rest of the series. For example, you can apply a pattern or gradient fill. A pattern fill consists of two colors arranged to form a design. A gradient fill creates a smooth transition between two colors by gradually changing their transparency as the fill progresses from one color to another.

You can also apply a texture or picture fill to a data point. Quattro Pro provides a selection of texture and picture fills that you can use.

You can change the gradient fill and picture fill settings. For example, you can choose from three different gradient types, linear, circular, or rectangular, where each gradient type creates a unique transition between the two colors.

You can also change the border style of a data point, and specify the border's width and color.

 How to


To apply a pattern fill to a data point

1	Click a chart, and click a chart series.

2	Click a data point.

3	Right-click the selected data point, and click Data point properties.

4	Click the Fill tab.

5	Click Pattern.

6	In the Colors area, open the Foreground color picker, and click a color.

7	Open the Background color picker, and click a color.

If you want to reverse the foreground and background colors, click Reverse colors.

8	Click a pattern on the pattern palette.

 Related topics


To apply a gradient fill to a data point

1	Click a chart, and click a chart series.

2	Click a data point.

3	Right-click the selected data point, and click Data point properties.

4	Click the Fill tab.

5	Click Gradient.

6	In the Colors area, open the Foreground color picker, and click a color.

7	Open the Background color picker, and click a color.

If you want to reverse the foreground and background colors, click Reverse colors.

8	Click a gradient style on the gradient palette.

 Related topics


To apply a texture fill to a data point

1	Click a chart, and click a chart series.

2	Click a data point.

3	Right-click the selected data point, and click Data point properties.

4	Click the Fill tab.

5	Click Texture.

6	Choose a texture category from the Category list box.

7	Click a texture style on the texture palette.

 Tip

•	You can apply a custom texture not included with Quattro Pro by clicking Browse and choosing a texture.

 Related topics


To apply a picture fill to a data point

1	Click a chart, and click a chart series.

2	Click a data point.

3	Right-click the selected data point, and click Data point properties.

4	Click the Fill tab.

5	Click Picture.

6	Choose a picture category from the Category list box.

7	Click a picture on the picture palette.

 Tip

•	You can apply a custom picture not included with Quattro Pro by clicking Browse and choosing a picture.

 Related topics


To modify the gradient fill properties of a data point

1	Click a chart, and click a chart series.

2	Click a data point.

3	Right-click the selected data point, and click Data point properties.

4	Click the Fill tab.

5	Click Gradient.

6	Click Gradient settings.

7	In the Gradient settings dialog box, change any options.

 Related topics


To modify the picture fill properties of a data point

1	Click a chart, and click a chart series.

2	Click a data point.

3	Right-click the selected data point, and click Data point properties.

4	Click the Fill tab.

5	Click Picture.

6	Click Picture settings.

7	In the Picture settings dialog box, change the options you want.

 Related topics


To change the data point border style

1	Click a chart, and click a chart series.

2	Click a data point.

3	Right-click the selected data point, and click Data point properties.

4	Click the Line tab.

5	Open the Style picker, and click a border style.

You can also
Change the border width	Open the Width picker, and click a border width.
Change the border color	Open the Color picker, and click a color.
 Related topics


Replacing chart series with riser models

You can replace a series in an advanced rendered bar chart with a riser model, such as a sword, pencil, or a coffee cup. For information about applying advanced rendering to charts, see "Applying advanced rendering to charts."

 How to


To replace a series with a model

1	Click an advanced rendered chart, and click a chart series.

2	Click Chart [image] Riser models.

3	Choose a model from the list.

 Related topics


Applying transparency and glow to a chart series

You can adjust the transparency of a series or a data point to reveal the objects in the background. You can also add a colored glow effect to the series, and specify the position of the glow.

 How to


To make a series transparent

1	Click a chart, and click a chart series.

2	Click Chart [image] Visualize palette.

3	Adjust the Transparency slider.

 Tip

•	If you want to make a data point transparent, click the data point after clicking the chart series.

 Related topics


To add a glow to a series

1	Click a chart, and click a chart series.

2	Click Chart [image] Visualize palette.

3	Enable the Glow check box.

You can also
Choose the color of the glow	Open the color picker, and click a color.
Adjust the width of the glow	Type a number in the Glow width box.
 Note

•	You cannot add a glow to a series in an advanced rendered chart.

 Tip

•	If you want to add a glow to a data point, click the data point after clicking the chart series.

 Related topics


To specify the position of the glow

1	Click a chart, and click a chart series.

2	Click Chart [image] Visualize palette.

3	Enable the Glow check box.

4	In the Display area, enable one of the following options:

•	Glow outside

•	Glow inside

•	Glow both sides

 Tip

•	If you want to specify the position of the glow of a data point, click the data point after clicking the chart series.

 Related topics


Displaying data labels

You can display a series' data labels to show the accurate value of each data point. The data labels are generated from the data series. You can specify the source of the data labels. As well, you can specify where the data labels display in relation to the data points.

 How to


To display data labels

1	Click a chart, and click a chart series.

2	Right-click the selected series, and click Series properties.

3	Click the Data labels tab.

4	Enable the Display check box.

 Related topics


To display data labels for a pie chart

1	Click a chart, and click a chart series.

2	Right-click the selected series, and click Series properties.

3	Click the Data labels tab.

4	Enable the Display check box.

You can also
Place the data label inside a pie slice	Enable the Values on slices option.
Place the data label outside a pie slice	Enable the Values outside slices option.
Show leader lines between the label and slice	Enable the Show leader lines check box.
Display the data labels as percentages	Enable the Display values as percentages check box.
 Note

•	You can show leader lines only if the Values outside slices option is enabled.

 Related topics


To specify the source of the data labels

1	Click a chart, and click a chart series.

2	Right-click the selected series, and click Series properties.

3	Click the Data labels tab.

4	Choose one of the following from the Source area:

•	Value

•	Legend label

•	Value and legend label

•	Custom

 Note

•	The Legend label, Value and legend label, and Custom options are not available for histograms, bubble charts, scatter charts, or polar charts.

 Related topics


To specify the position of the data labels

1	Click a chart, and click a chart series.

2	Right-click the selected series, and click Series properties.

3	Click the Data labels tab.

4	Choose one of the following from the Position list box:

•	Above

•	Inside top

•	Inside center

•	Inside bottom

 Related topics


Working with chart text

You can customize the appearance of charts by changing text properties.

In this section, you'll learn about

•	selecting text

•	changing font appearance

•	applying fills to text

•	positioning, rotating, and moving text

•	adding boxes to text

•	adding fills to text boxes

•	setting the numeric format for chart text

•	editing chart text


Selecting text

Before you can change the properties of text items in a chart, you must select them. Quattro Pro provides two edit modes for text manipulation: select mode, and edit mode. Direct editing of text is not available when in select mode, and all changes are applied to the entire text string. For example, can change the size of the entire text item, and apply a box to it. When the text is in edit mode, you can apply changes to individual characters. For example, you can change the size and color of the first character in a word. Edit mode is available for titles, subtitles, axes titles, and footnotes.

Quattro Pro also lets you browse between the text items in a chart in the Text properties dialog box.

 How to


To select text

To select	Do the following
An entire text string	Click a chart, and click the text you want.
A single character	Click a chart, click the text, and click and drag over the characters you want.
 Related topics


To select text items in the Text properties dialog box

1	Click a chart.

2	Select the text.

3	Click Chart [image] Text properties.

4	Choose the text from the list box under the chart preview window.

If you want to select an individual character, click and drag over the character in the text edit window.

 Related topics


Changing font appearance

You can modify chart text font and font size.

Quattro Pro lets you make the text in the charts superscript and subscript. You can also add a shadow to the text to create the illusion of depth.

 How to


To change the chart font

1	Click a chart.

2	Select the text.

3	Click Chart [image] Text properties.

4	Click the Font tab.

5	Click a font type from the first list box.

 Related topics


To change the font size

1	Click a chart.

2	Select the text.

3	Click Chart [image] Text properties.

4	Click the Font tab.

5	Choose a font size from the second list box.

 Related topics


To make text superscript or subscript

1	Click a chart.

2	Select the text.

3	Click Chart [image] Text properties.

4	Click the Font tab.

5	Enable one of the following check boxes:

•	Superscript

•	Subscript

You can also
Strikeout text	Enable the Strikeout check box.
Outline text	Enable the Outline check box. Open the Color picker, and click a color.
 Note

•	You cannot outline an individual character.

 Related topics


To add a shadow to text

1	Click a chart.

2	Select the text.

3	Click Chart [image] Text properties.

4	Click the Font tab.

5	Enable the Shadow check box.

You can also
Specify the direction of the shadow	Type values in the X offset box and the Y offset box.
Change the color of the shadow	Open the Shadow color picker, and click a color.
 Related topics


Applying fills to text

Quattro Pro lets you apply different fill styles, such as a pattern or gradient, to chart text. A pattern fill consists of two colors arranged to form a design. A gradient fill creates a smooth transition between two colors by gradually changing their transparency as the fill progresses from one color to another.

You can also apply a texture or picture fill to text. Quattro Pro provides a selection of texture and picture fills that you can use.

You can modify the gradient fill and picture fill settings. For example, you can choose from three different gradient types, linear, circular, or rectangular, where each gradient type creates a unique transition between the two colors.

 How to


To apply a pattern fill to text

1	Click a chart.

2	Select the text.

3	Click Chart [image] Text properties.

4	Click the Text fill tab.

5	Click Pattern.

6	In the Colors area, open the Foreground color picker, and click a color.

7	Open the Background color picker, and click a color.

If you want to reverse the foreground and background colors, click Reverse colors.

8	Click a pattern on the pattern palette.

 Related topics


To apply a gradient fill to text

1	Click a chart.

2	Select the text.

3	Click Chart [image] Text properties.

4	Click the Text fill tab.

5	Click Gradient.

6	In the Colors area, open the Foreground color picker, and click a color.

7	Open the Background color picker, and click a color.

If you want to reverse the foreground and background colors, click Reverse colors.

8	Click a gradient style on the gradient palette.

 Related topics


To apply a texture fill to text

1	Click a chart.

2	Select the text.

3	Click Chart [image] Text properties.

4	Click the Text fill tab.

5	Click Texture.

6	Choose a texture category from the Category list box.

7	Click a texture style on the texture palette.

 Tip

•	You can apply a custom texture not included with Quattro Pro by clicking Browse, and choosing a texture.

 Related topics


To apply a picture fill to text

1	Click a chart.

2	Select the text.

3	Click Chart [image] Text properties.

4	Click the Text fill tab.

5	Click Picture.

6	Choose a picture category from the Category list box.

7	Click a picture on the picture palette.

 Tip

•	You can apply a custom picture not included with Quattro Pro by clicking Browse, and choosing a picture.

 Related topics


To modify the gradient fill properties of text

1	Click a chart.

2	Select the text.

3	Click Chart [image] Text properties.

4	Click the Text fill tab.

5	Click Gradient.

6	Click Gradient settings.

7	In the Gradient settings dialog box, change any options.

 Related topics


To modify the picture fill properties of text

1	Click a chart.

2	Select the text.

3	Click Chart [image] Text properties.

4	Click the Text fill tab.

5	Click Picture.

6	Click Picture settings.

7	In the Picture settings dialog box, change any options.

 Related topics


Positioning, rotating, and moving text

You can change the position of text in a chart by aligning it and changing its orientation. You can also rotate text and move text to another position in the chart window.

 How to


To align chart text within a text box

1	Click a chart.

2	Select the text.

3	Click Chart [image] Text properties.

4	Click the Position tab.

5	Open the Alignment picker, and click one of the following:

•	Left

•	Center

•	Right

 Related topics


To change text orientation

1	Click a chart.

2	Select the text.

3	Click Chart [image] Text properties.

4	Click the Position tab.

5	Open the Orientation picker, and click one of the following:

•	Horizontal

•	Vertical

 Related topics


To rotate chart text

1	Click a chart.

2	Select the text.

3	Click Chart [image] Text properties.

4	Click the Position tab.

5	In the Rotation box, drag the arrow to a new position.

 Tip

•	You can also specify the text rotation by typing a number in the box under the Rotation box.

 Related topics


To move chart text

1	Click a chart.

2	Select the text.

3	Drag the text to a new position in the chart window.

 Related topics


Adding boxes to text

To emphasize text in a chart, you can frame it with a box. For example, you can place a box around a legend or a title, and you can customize it by adding a border and changing the border's style, width, and color.

You can also add a shadow to a box to create the illusion of depth, and you can customize the shadow's direction and color.

 How to


To add a box to text

1	Click a chart.

2	Select the text.

3	Click Chart [image] Text properties.

4	Click the Box style tab.

5	Open the Box picker, and click a box style.

 Related topics


To add a border to a text box

1	Click a chart.

2	Select the text.

3	Click Chart [image] Text properties.

4	Click the Box style tab.

5	Open the Border picker, and click a border style.

You can also
Change the border width	In the Line format area, open the Width picker, and click a border width.
Change the border style	In the Line format area, open the Line style picker, and click a border style.
Change the border color	In the Line format area, open the Color picker, and click a color.
 Related topics


To add a shadow to a text box

1	Click a chart.

2	Select the text.

3	Click Chart [image] Text properties.

4	Click the Box style tab.

5	Enable the Shadow check box.

You can also
Specify the direction of the shadow	Type values in the X offset box and the Y offset box.
Change the color of the shadow	Open the Shadow color picker, and click a color.
 Note

•	You can apply a shadow to a text box only if the text box has a border.

 Related topics


Adding fills to text boxes

Quattro Pro lets you apply different fill styles, such as a pattern or gradient, to text boxes in a chart. A pattern fill consists of two colors arranged to form a design. A gradient fill creates a smooth transition between two colors by gradually changing their transparency as the fill progresses from one color to another.

You can also apply a texture or picture fill to text boxes. Quattro Pro provides a selection of texture and picture fills that you can use.

You can modify the gradient fill and picture fill settings. For example, you can choose from three different gradient types, linear, circular, or rectangular, where each gradient type creates a unique transition between the two colors.

 How to


To apply a pattern fill to a text box

1	Click a chart.

2	Select the text.

3	Click Chart [image] Text properties.

4	Click the Box fill tab.

5	Click Pattern.

6	In the Colors area, open the Foreground color picker, and click a color.

7	Open the Background color picker, and click a color.

If you want to reverse the foreground and background colors, click Reverse colors.

8	Click a pattern on the pattern palette.

 Note

•	You can apply a fill only to a text box that has a border.

 Related topics


To apply a gradient fill to a text box

1	Click a chart.

2	Select the text.

3	Click Chart [image] Text properties.

4	Click the Box fill tab.

5	Click Gradient.

6	In the Colors area, open the Foreground color picker, and click a color.

7	Open the Background color picker, and click a color.

If you want to reverse the foreground and background colors, click Reverse colors.

8	Click a gradient style on the gradient palette.

 Note

•	You can apply a fill only to a text box that has a border.

 Related topics


To apply a texture fill to a text box

1	Click a chart.

2	Select the text.

3	Click Chart [image] Text properties.

4	Click the Box fill tab.

5	Click Texture.

6	Choose a texture category from the Category list box.

7	Click a texture style on the texture palette.

 Note

•	You can apply a fill only to a text box that has a border.

 Tip

•	You can apply a custom texture not included with Quattro Pro by clicking Browse, and choosing a texture.

 Related topics


To apply a picture fill

1	Click a chart.

2	Select the text.

3	Click Chart [image] Text properties.

4	Click the Box fill tab.

5	Click Picture.

6	Choose a picture category from the Category list box.

7	Click a picture on the picture palette.

 Note

•	You can apply a fill only to a text box that has a border.

 Tip

•	You can apply a custom picture not included with Quattro Pro by clicking Browse, and choosing a picture.

 Related topics


To modify the gradient fill properties of a text box

1	Click a chart.

2	Select the text.

3	Click Chart [image] Text properties.

4	Click the Box fill tab.

5	Click Gradient.

6	Click Gradient settings.

7	In the Gradient settings dialog box, change any options.

 Related topics


To modify the picture fill properties of a text box

1	Click a chart.

2	Select the text.

3	Click Chart [image] Text properties.

4	Click the Box fill tab.

5	Click Picture.

6	Click Picture settings.

7	In the Picture settings dialog box, change any options.

 Related topics


Setting the numeric format for chart text

You can change the numeric format for x-axis, y-axis, and data label text in charts. For example, you can display data using currency symbols or percentages.

 How to


To set the numeric format for chart text

1	Click a chart.

2	Select the text.

3	Click Chart [image] Text properties.

3	Click the Numeric format tab.

4	In the Category area, choose one of the numeric formats from the list.

For example, to use a date format, choose Date from the list.

5	In the Format area, specify any numeric format settings.

 Notes

•	In order to format dates and times to properly display in a chart, you must first concatenate the date and time as a single number as follows: YYYYMMDDhhmmss. For example, 20011231235959 = December 31st, 2001 at 11:59:59 pm.

•	Maximum, minimum, and increment values must be set precisely in the Y-axis properties dialog box to allow dates to properly appear on the y-axis of your chart. For example, to create a y-axis scale that ranges from the start to the end of the year 2001, incremented by month, you would use 20011201000000 as the Max value, 20010101000000 as the Min value, and 100000000 as the Increment value.

 Related topics


Editing chart text

After you add text to a chart, you can retype it to change the content.

 How to


To edit chart text

1	Click a chart.

2	Select the text you want to edit.

3	Click inside the text.

4	Type the new text.

 Note

•	You can edit titles, subtitles, axes titles, and footnotes only.

 Related topics


Formatting the x and y axes

You can change the properties of a chart's x and y axes in Quattro Pro.

In this section, you'll learn about

•	displaying and positioning axes labels

•	displaying and formatting gridlines

•	specifying scale properties


Displaying and positioning axes labels

Axes labels are generated automatically from the column labels in a data series. You can display or hide axes labels on a chart that has an x-axis and a y-axis, and you can specify the labels' positions. If the labels on an x-axis overlap, you can place them on multiple rows, or you can skip certain labels to make the information easier to read.

 How to


To display axis labels

1	Click a chart.

2	Click Chart [image] Axes, and click an axis.

3	Click the Labels tab.

4	Enable the Display labels check box.

 Tip

•	You can alternate between axes by choosing them from the list box under the preview window.

 Related topics


To hide axis labels

1	Click a chart.

2	Click Chart [image] Axes, and click an axis.

3	Click the Labels tab.

4	Disable the Display labels check box.

 Tip

•	You can alternate between axes by choosing them from the list box under the preview window.

 Related topics


To specify the position of x-axis labels

1	Click a chart.

2	Click Chart [image] Axes [image] X-axis.

3	Click the Labels tab.

4	Enable one of the following options:

•	Axis labels on bottom

•	Axis labels on top

•	Axis labels on both sides

If you want to position the x-axis labels in reverse order, enable the Draw as descending axis check box.

 Related topics


To specify the position of y-axis labels

1	Click a chart.

2	Click Chart [image] Axes, and click a y-axis.

3	Click the Labels tab.

4	Enable one of the following options:

•	Axis labels on the right

•	Axis labels on the left

•	Axis labels on both sides

If you want to position the y-axis labels in descending order, enable the Draw as descending axis check box.

 Related topics


To position x-axis labels on multiple rows

1	Click a chart.

2	Click Chart [image] Axes [image] X-axis.

3	Click the Labels tab.

4	Type a number in the Display on box.

 Related topics


To skip x-axis labels

1	Click a chart.

2	Click Chart [image] Axes [image] X-axis.

3	Click the Labels tab.

4	Type the number of labels to skip in the Skip box.

 Tip

•	You can also skip labels by enabling the Automatically skip labels check box.

 Related topics


Displaying and formatting gridlines

You can display the major and minor gridlines of a chart that has an x-axis and a y-axis. Gridlines display behind the chart series and are extensions of the ticks on each axis that span the whole chart. Gridlines allow you to clearly see the value of each data point.

You can also change the border style of the gridlines and specify the border's width and color.

 How to


To display a major gridline

1	Click a chart.

2	Click Chart [image] Axes, and click an axis.

3	Click the Grids & ticks tab.

4	Enable the Show major gridline check box.

5	Open the Major gridline picker, and click one of the following:

•	Gridline (only)

•	Gridline with ticks

•	Inside tick (only)

•	Ouside tick (only)

•	Tick on both sides

•	None

If you want to display the grid on top of the series, enable the Grids on top check box.

 Related topics


To display a minor gridline

1	Click a chart.

2	Click Chart [image] Axes, and click an axis.

3	Click the Grids & ticks tab.

4	Enable the Show minor gridline check box.

5	Open the Minor gridline picker, and click one of the following:

•	Gridline (only)

•	Gridline with ticks

•	Inside tick (only)

•	Ouside tick (only)

•	Tick on both sides

•	None

If you want to display the grid on top of the series, enable the Grids on top check box.

 Related topics


To display a 3-D chart gridline

1	Click a chart.

2	Click Chart [image] Axes, and click an axis.

3	Click the Grids & ticks tab.

4	Enable the Show gridline check box.

You can also
Change the gridline color	Open the Color picker, and click a color.
Change the gridline width	Open the Width picker, and click a width.
Change the gridline style	Open the Style picker, and click a line style.
 Related topics


To change the major gridline color

1	Click a chart.

2	Click Chart [image] Axes, and click an axis.

3	Click the Grids & ticks tab.

4	In the major gridline area, open the Color picker, and click a color.

You can also
Change the gridline width	Open the Width picker, and click a width.
Change the gridline style	Open the Style picker, and click a line style.
 Related topics


To change the minor gridline color

1	Click a chart.

2	Click Chart [image] Axes, and click the axis you want.

3	Click the Grids & ticks tab.

4	In the minor gridline area, open the Color picker, and click a color on the color palette.

You can also
Change the gridline width	Open the Width picker, and click a width.
Change the gridline style	Open the Style picker, and click a line style.
 Related topics


To change the gridline border style

1	Click a chart, and click a gridline.

2	Right-click the selected gridline, and click Gridline properties.

3	Click the Line tab.

4	Open the Style picker, and click a border style on the border style palette.

You can also
Change the border width	Open the Width picker, and click a border width on the width palette.
Change the border color	Open the Color picker, and click a color on the color palette.
 Related topics


Specifying scale properties

You can specify the scale type for a y-axis and the x-axis in a scatter chart by choosing either a linear or logarithmic scale.

When you create a chart, the scale values are automatically set based on the source data; however, you can specify custom values.

You can also restore the default scale values.

 How to


To specify the scale type

1	Click a chart.

2	Click Chart [image] Axes, and click an axis.

3	Click the Scale tab.

4	In the Scale type area, enable one of the following options:

•	Linear [image] sets the scale to linear, where the value of each major division is exactly the same

•	Logarithmic [image] sets the scale to logarithmic, where the value of each major division of the axis represents 10 times the value of the previous major division

5	Choose an option from the Scale values to list box.

 Note

•	You can scale values only when the scale numeric format is set to currency or number. For information about setting the numeric format, see "Setting the numeric format for chart text."

 Related topics


To specify the scale values

1	Click a chart.

2	Click Chart [image] Axes, and click an axis.

3	Click the Scale tab.

4	Disable the Automatic check box.

5	Type values in the following boxes:

•	Max value

•	Min value

You can also
Set the scale increment	Type a value in the Increment box.
Specify the number of minor ticks	Type a value in the Minors box.
Specify at what value of the y-axis the x-axis intersects	Type a value in the X-axis box.
Specify whether or not to include zero in the scale.	Enable or disable the Always include zero in this scale check box.
 Related topics


To restore the default scale values

1	Click a chart.

2	Click Chart [image] Axes, and click an axis.

3	Click the Scale tab.

4	In the Values area, enable the Automatic check box.

 Related topics


All dialogs


Lets you preview changes made to a chart.


Lets you select a chart element to edit.


Closes this dialog box and saves any changes you have made.


Closes this dialog box without saving any changes you have made.


Lets you display a Help topic for this dialog box. For specific help, click [image], and click any control.


Fill dialog/Fill tab


Lets you remove a fill.


Lets you apply a gradient fill.


Lets you apply a pattern fill.


Lets you apply a texture fill


Lets you apply a picture fill.


Fill dialog/Fill tab: Pattern button enabled


Let you choose the foreground color.


Lets you choose the background color.


Reverses the foreground and background colors.


Lets you choose a pattern.


Fill dialog/Fill tab: Gradient button enabled


Opens the Gradient setting dialog box that lets you specify gradient options.


Lets you choose a gradient.


Fill dialog/Fill tab: Texture button enabled


Lets you browse a specific file.


Lets you specify a file and its path.


Lets you choose a category.


Fill dialog/Fill tab: Picture button enabled


Opens the Picture options dialog box that lets you set the picture fill options, such as the layout of the picture.


Lets you choose a picture or texture fill.


Fill dialogs/Line tab


Lets you choose the line style.


Lets you choose the line width.


Lets you choose the line color.


Series properties/Trendline tab


Lets you choose an analysis method.


Lets you choose a display option for the trendline.


Enable to display the results on the chart.


Enable to display the equation on the chart.


Lets you specify the period over which the average is calculated.


Lets you specify the degree of the polynomial.


Lets you choose what the series values represent, or what period exists in the series.


Lets you specify the number of data values to combine for each point on the chart.


Lets you choose the function to combine data points.


Series properties/Data labels tab


Enable display data labels in a chart.


Lets you choose a position for data labels in a chart.


Series properties/Data labels tab pie charts


Enable to display data labels in a chart.


Enable to display data labels inside a pie slice.


Enable to display data labels outside a pie slice.


Enable to display leader lines between pie slices and data labels.


Enable to display data labels as percentages.


Series properties/Error bars tab


Lets you delete the Y-direction error bar.


Lets you plot a negative and positive Y-direction error bar.


Lets you plot a negative Y-direction error bar.


Lets you plot a positive Y-direction error bar.


Lets you choose a method for calculating the error.


Lets you specify the negative value for the error amount.


Lets you specify the positive value for the error amount.


Lets you delete the X-direction error bar.


Lets you plot a negative and positive X-direction error bar.


Lets you plot a negative X-direction error bar.


Lets you plot a positive X-direction error bar.


Lets you choose a method for calculating the error.


Lets you specify the negative value for the error amount.


Lets you specify the positive value for the error amount.


Series properties/High low tab-high low chart


Lets you choose a type of high/low series.


Lets you specify a width for the high/low series.


Series properties/Series options tab


Enable to change the series to the default type.


Enable to change the series to an area type.


Enable to change the series to a bar type.


Enable to change the series to a line type.


Lets you choose a y-axis on which to plot a series.


Enable to position the y-axis on the left side of the chart.


Enable to position the y-axis on the right side of the chart.


Lets you set the percent of frame that is taken up by each axis.


Lets you set the percent of frame that is taken up by each axis.


Series properties/type option tab-Bar chart


Lets you choose a riser style.


Lets you set the riser width.


Lets you specify the riser width.


Lets you set the spacing between risers.


Lets you specify the amount of spacing between risers.


Series properties/Type option tab-Pie chart


Lets you set the spacing between the detached slice and the pie.


Lets you specify the spacing between the detached slice and the pie.


Lets you set the spacing between slices when all slices of the pie are detached.


Lets you specify the spacing between slices when all slices of the pie are detached.


Lets you set the tilt of the pie.


Lets you specify the tilt of the pie.


Lets you set the depth of the pie.


Lets you specify the depth of the pie.


Lets you set the rotation of the pie.


Lets you specify the rotation of the pie.


Lets you specify the slice to be linked in a pie of a pie chart.


Series properties/Type options line chart


Enable to display markers.


Lets you choose a marker shape.


Lets you specify the size of the marker.


Text properties dialog box/Position tab


Lets you choose an alignment setting for text.


Lets you choose a text orientation.


Lets you set the rotation of text.


Lets you specify the rotation of text.


Axes dialog box/Common


Enable to display an axis' label.


Enable to display major gridlines.


Lets you choose a major gridline type.


Lets you choose a gridline border color.


Lets you choose a gridline border width.


Lets you choose a gridline border style.


Enable to display minor gridlines.


Lets you choose a minor gridline type.


Lets you choose a gridline border color.


Lets you choose a gridline border width.


Lets you choose a gridline border style.


Enable to display gridlines on a 3D chart.


Lets you choose a color for the gridlines.


Lets you choose a width for the gridlines.


Lets you choose a style for the gridlines.


Enable to display a grid on top of a series.


Enable to automatically set the scale values.


Lets you set the maximum scale value.


Lets you set the minimum scale value.


Lets you set the scale increment.


Lets you set the number of minor ticks.


Lets you set at what value the x-axis and y-axis intersect.


Enable to set a scale to linear.


Enable to set a scale to logarithmic.


Enable to include zero in the scale.


Lets you choose a numeric format.


Lets you set the number of decimal places.


Enable to use a thousand separator.


Lets you choose a currency symbol.


Lets you choose a unit to scale the values to.


Lets you choose an abbreviation.


Lets you choose a format.


Axes dialog box/X axis


Enable to position a x-axis' label on the bottom.


Enable to position a x-axis' label on the top.


Enable to skip labels automatically.


Lets you specify the number of x-axis labels to skip.


Lets you specify multiple rows for the x-axis labels.


Enable to position x-axis labels in descending order.


Axes dialog box/Y axis


Enable to position a y-axis' label on the right.


Enable to position a y-axis' label on the left.


Enable to position a y-axis' label on both sides.


Enable to position y-axis labels in descending order.


Text properties dialog box/Font tab


Lets you choose a font type.


Lets you choose a font size.


Bolds text.


Italicizes text.


Underlines text.


Enable to strikeout text.


Enable to make text superscript.


Enable to make text subscript.


Enable to outline text.


Lets you choose an a outline color.


Enable to add a shadow.


Lets you specify the direction of the offset.


Lets you specify the direction of the offset.


Lets you choose a shadow color.


Text properties dialog box/main


Lets you choose a label.


Lets you preview changes made to text properties.


Legend dialog/Box style tab


Lets you choose a box style.


Lets you choose a border style.


Lets you choose the width of the border width.


Lets you choose the style of the border line.


Lets you choose the color of the border.


Titles dialog


Enable to add a title to a chart.


Lets you specify a main title for a chart.


Enable to add a subtitle to a chart.


Lets you specify a subtitle for a chart.


Enable to add a footnote to a chart.


Lets you specify a footnote for a chart.


Enable to add a title to an x-axis.


Lets you specify a title for an x-axis.


Enable to add a title to a primary y-axis.


Lets you specify a title for a primary y-axis.


Enable to add a title to a secondary y-axis.


Lets you specify a title for a secondary y-axis.


Enable to add a title to a z-axis.


Lets you specify a title for the legend axis.


Chart type gallery dialog/Type tab


Lets you choose a chart category.


Lets you choose a color scheme.


Enable to use the selected chart as the default for all new charts.


Enable to create a 3-D chart.


Lets you choose a chart.


Enable to add depth to a chart.


Enable to add a secondary y-axis.


Enable to apply advanced rendering to a chart.


Chart type gallery dialog/Advisor and Custom tab


Lets you choose a chart type suggested by the Advisor.


Lets you choose a chart category.


Lets you choose a chart.


Legend dialog/Format tab


Lets you specify a horizontal legend.


Lets you specify a vertical legend.


Lets you preview the position of the legend in a chart.


Enable to position the legend in the top-left of a chart.


Enable to position the legend in the middle-left of a chart.


Enable to position the legend in the bottom-left of a chart.


Enable to position the legend in the bottom-middle of a chart.


Enable to position the legend in the bottom-right of a chart.


Enable to position the legend in the middle-right of a chart.


Enable to position the legend in the top-right of a chart.


Enable to position the legend in the top-middle of a chart.


Enable to display a legend.


Enable to place a legend in a chart.


Visualize palette


Lets you set the transparency of a series.


Lets you specify the transparency of a series.


Enable to add a glow to a series.


Lets you choose the color of a glow.


Lets you set the width of a glow.


Enable to position a glow on the outside of a series.


Enable to position a glow on the inside of a series.


Enable to position a glow on both sides of a series.


Fill dialog/Fill tab: Picture button enabled, Picture options dialog box


Enable to tile the pictures.


Enable to display the pictures in a horizontally offset brick pattern.


Enable to display the pictures in a vertically offset brick pattern.


Enable to stretch or shrink the picture to fit a designated area.


Enable to scale the picture proportionally to fit the designated area.


Enable to stack the picture.


Enable to remove the flip options of the picture fill.


Enable to flip the picture fill horizontally.


Enable to flip the picture fill vertically.


Enable to flip the picture fill vertically and horizontally.


Shows an example of how the fill will display.


Fill dialog/Fill tab: Gradient button enabled, Gradient settings dialog box


Lets you choose a gradient type.


Lets you set the gradient angle.


Lets you specify the gradient angle.


Lets you set the horizontal offset of the gradient colors.


Lets you specify the horizontal offset of the gradient colors.


Lets you set the vertical offset of the gradient colors.


Lets you specify the vertical offset of the gradient colors.


Enable to apply auto-step blending of the gradient colors.


Enable to apply fixed blending.


Lets you set the number of steps it takes to blend the colors.


Lets you specify the number of steps it takes to blend the colors.


Displays how the gradient fill will appear.


Source data dialog


Lets you choose a series.


Adds a series.


Removes a series.


Enable to reverse the order of a series.


Lets you choose a series type.


Lets you specify a data range.


Lets you specify a legend label.


Chart Expert


OK/CANCEL/HELP buttons


Closes this dialog box and saves any changes you have made.


Closes this dialog box without saving any changes you have made.


Lets you display a Help topic for this dialog box. For specific help, click [image], and click any control.


Closes this dialog box and saves any changes you have made.


Closes this dialog box without saving any changes you have made.


Lets you display a Help topic for this dialog box. For specific help, click [image], and click any control.


Chart expert dialogs


Lets you select the data to plot in a chart.


Enable to plot the chart series in reverse.


Lets you choose whether to plot the chart series by columns or by rows.


Enable to place the chart on the current spreadsheet.


Enable to place the chart in its own window.


Lets you choose the chart recommended by the Advisor.


Lets you specify a main title for a chart.


Lets you specify a subtitle for a chart.


Lets you specify a title for an x-axis.


Lets you specify a title for a y-axis.


Lets you specify a footnote for a chart.


Lets you choose a color scheme for a chart.


QP Title bar (see: qp11newmap.txt)


Displays the application name and filename of the document.


Graphics What's this (see qp11newmap.txt)


Displays the inserted image object.


Fixed-width parse breaks (see qp11newmap.txt)


Lets you browse parse breaks.


Lets you specify the position of a parse break.


Lets you repeat parse breaks at regular intervals.


Lets you edit the position of a parse break.


Sets the parse break you specify.


Clears the selection.


Clears all selections.


Applies the default parse break settings.


Graphics, Maps


Lets you choose a color from the color palette.


QuickSubtotals dialog


Lets you choose an outline group.


Lets you choose a function.


Lets you choose a column to subtotal.


Enable to total a subtotaled outline group.


Lets you add a page break between groups.


Lets you display subtotals above the data for each group.


Lets you add a row of subtotal options.


Lets you delete a row of subtotal options.